Ogden Regional Medical Center ED Remodel

PROJECT MANUAL FOR

Ogden Regional Medical CenterED Remodel

5475 S. 500 E. Ogden, UT 84405

for

MOUNTAINSTAR HEALTHCARE

Construction Documents July 9, 2018

NJRA Architects, Inc. 5272 South College Dr. Murray, Utah 84123 Telephone: (801) 364-9259

Ogden Regional Medical Center ED Remodel

PROJECT MANUAL INDEX PAGE 1

PROJECT MANUAL INDEX

Title Page

Project Manual Index

Notice to Contractors

Bid Response Form

General Conditions

General Conditions of the Contract for Construction (AIA Document A201-2007) Bidding and Contract Requirements

HCA Short Form Agreement between Owner and Contractor for work on a Lump Sum Basis

Bid Bond (AIA Document A310)

Payment Bond (AIA Document A312) - Exhibit D

Performance Bond (AIA Document A312) - Exhibit D

Instructions to Bidders (AIA Document A701-1997)

Certificate of Substantial Completion (AIA Document G704-2000) - Exhibit K

Consent of Surety to Final Payment (AIA Document G707-1994) Sample Architect’s Supplemental Instructions

Sample Addendum

Sample Proposal Request

Sample Submittal Review Technical Specifications

Architectural

DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01 10 00 Summary

01 29 00 Payment Procedures

01 31 00 Project Management and Coordination

01 31 10 Field Engineering

01 33 00 Submittal Procedures

01 40 00 Quality Requirements

01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls

01 60 00 Product Requirements

01 76 00 Guaranties and Warranties

01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data

01 78 39 Project Record Documents

01 79 00 Cleaning

DIVISION 2 – EXISTING CONDITIONS

02 41 19 Selective Structure Demolition



DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE

03 30 00 Cast In Place Concrete

03 53 00 Concrete Topping

DIVISION 5 - METALS

05 05 00 Metal Fasteners

05 50 00 Metal Fabrications

DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS

06 10 00 Rough Carpentry

06 41 23 Interior Architectural Woodwork

DIVISION 7 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

07 84 13 Firestopping

07 92 00 Joint Sealants

DIVISION 8 – DOORS AND WINDOWS

08 11 13 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames

08 14 16 Flush Wood Doors

08 33 23 Overhead Coiling Doors

08 31 13 Access Panels

08 71 00 Door Hardware

08 80 00 Glazing

DIVISION 9 - FINISHES

09 22 16 Non-Structural Metal Framing

09 22 20 Acoustical Insulation

09 29 00 Gypsum Board

09 51 00 Ceiling Suspension

09 51 13 Acoustical Panel Ceilings

09 65 19 Resilient Flooring

09 91 23 Interior Painting

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES

10 26 00 Wall and Door Protection

Mechanical

DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION

21 13 13 Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING



22 05 18 Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping

22 05 23.12 Ball Valves for Plumbing Piping

22 05 29 Hangers And Supports For Plumbing Piping And Equipment

22 05 48 Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment

22 07 19 Plumbing Piping Insulation

22 11 16 Domestic Water Piping

22 13 16 Sanitary Waste And Vent Piping

22 13 19 Sanitary Waste and Piping Specialties

22 41 00 Plumbing Fixtures

22 61 13 Compressed-Air Piping for Laboratory and Healthcare Facilities

22 62 13 Vacuum and Gas Piping for Laboratory and Healthcare Facilities

22 63 13 Gas Piping For Laboratory and Healthcare Facilities

DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING

23 05 13 Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment

23 05 23.12 Ball Valves For HVAC Piping

23 05 29 Hangers And Supports For HVAC Piping And Equipment

23 05 48 Vibration And Seismic Controls For HVAC

23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting, And Balancing For HVAC

23 07 13 Duct Insulation

23 31 13 Metal Ducts

23 33 00 Air Duct Accessories

23 37 13 Diffusers, Registers, And Grilles Electrical DIVISION 26 – RESERVED

26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical

26 05 19 Low-voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables

26 05 23 Grounding and Bonding

26 05 33 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems

26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems

26 27 26 Wiring Devices 26 28 16 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breaker 26 51 00 Interior Lighting

DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS

27 10 00 Voice and Data Cabling

27 52 23 Nurse Call DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

28 13 00 Access Control Systems 28 31 11 Digital, Addressable Fire-Alarm System


NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS

MountainstarOgden Regional Medical Center5475 South 500 EastOgden, Utah 84405

Ogden Regional Medical Center (ORMC) will receive sealed bids until 2:00 p.m. prevailing Mountain Time, on Thursday, July 26, 2018 at the 5475 South 500 East Ogden, UT 84405, for the construction & remodel of the Emergency Department. Bid Documents shall be turned into Brett Dille in the Engineering office. Only those General Contractors, who have been pre-qualified to bid this project by ORMC, may bid. NO EXCEPTIONS.

Electronic contract documents, dated July 9, 2018 may be obtained on July 11, 2018 from the office of NJRA Architects, Inc. A download link can be requested via email to erigro@njraarchitects (Erik Groethe) or by calling the office directly at 801-364-9259.

A mandatory Pre-Bid walk through for General Contractors will be held on Monday, July 16, 2018 at 10:00 a.m. at the project site. Meet in the Engineering Office area of the ORMC at level one. Sub-contractors are welcome to attend but not mandatory. Product substitutions received after July 19, 2018 shall not be accepted. All questions regarding this bid must be submitted to NJRA Architects via email to [email protected] by July 19, 2018.

Bidders are required to submit a detailed construction schedule along with their bid. The schedule shall outline the proposed work and reflect the start and completion dates. Indicate the number of calendar days required to complete the project. A penalty of $500 per calendar day will be assessed as liquidated damages in accordance with the General Conditions for each calendar day that the project is delayed after the scheduled completion date.

The Permit fees for this project shall be provided by the Owner. The contractor shall NOT include in the bid.

The owner reserves the right to reject any and all bids and to waive any irregularities in any bid or in the bidding.

mailto:[email protected]


- 1

BID RESPONSE FORM

TO:Ogden Regional Medical Center5475 S. 500 E. Ogden, UT 84405

PROJECT: Ogden Regional Medical Center- ED Remodel

NAME OF BIDDER:_____________________________________________

Gentlemen:

The Undersigned, in compliance with your invitation for bids, having examined the Drawings and Specifications and related documents and the site of the proposed work and being familiar with all of the conditions surrounding the construction of the proposed project, including the availability of labor, hereby propose to furnish all labor, materials and supplies as required for the Project in accordance with the Contract Documents as specified and within the time set forth and at the price stated below. This price is to cover all expenses incurred in performing the work required under the Contract Documents of which this proposal is a part.

ADDENDA: I/We acknowledge receipt of the following addenda: ____/____/____/____

BID BOND:

BASE BID: I/We agree to perform all work shown on the Drawings and described in the Specifications and Contract Documents for the sum of:

____________________________________________________________Dollars ($______________________)(In the case of discrepancy, written amount shall govern)

ALTERNATE 1:


ALTERNATE 2:


ALTERNATE 3:



- 2

ALTERNATE 4:


This bid shall remain good for 60 days after bid opening.

COMPLETION DATE:I/We guarantee that the Work will be Substantially Complete not later than ____________ (calendar days) from the

anticipated construction start date of ___________________, 2018. Should I/we be the successful bidder after which liquidated damages will be assessed at the rate of $500.00 per calendar day in accordance with the General Conditions.

Schedule Attached Schedule Not Attached

TYPE OF ORGANIZATION:

_____________________________________________ _______________________________(Corporation, Partnership, Individual, etc.) Type/Print Name and Title

SEAL (If a Corporation)

RESPECTFULLY SUBMITTED BY: _____________________________________ _________________________ Type/Print Company Name Date Authorized Signature

Address:______________________________

______________________________

______________________________

______________________________( ) ( ) Telephone Number FAX Number

_______________________ ____________________ _________________________________Utah Contractor License No. Federal Tax ID No.

AIA®

Document A201TM – 2017

General Conditions of the Contract for Construction

AIA Document A201™ – 2017. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by

The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International

Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,

and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 17:35:16 on 07/09/2018 under

Order No.8665849388 which expires on 03/28/2019, and is not for resale.

User Notes: (1194618422)

1

ADDITIONS AND DELETIONS: The

author of this document has

added information needed for

its completion. The author

may also have revised the

text of the original AIA

standard form. An Additions

and Deletions Report that

notes added information as

well as revisions to the

standard form text is

available from the author and

should be reviewed.

This document has important

legal consequences.

Consultation with an

attorney is encouraged with

respect to its completion or

modification.

For guidance in modifying

this document to include

supplementary conditions,

see AIA Document A503™, Guide

for Supplementary

Conditions.

ELECTRONIC COPYING of any

portion of this AIA® Document to

another electronic file is

prohibited and constitutes a

violation of copyright laws as

set forth in the footer of this

document.

for the following PROJECT: (Name and location or address)

«Ogden Regional Medical Center ED Remodel»

«5475 South 500 East

Ogden, Utah 84405»

THE OWNER: (Name, legal status and address)

«Ogden Regional Medical Center»«»


Ogden, Utah 84405»

THE ARCHITECT: (Name, legal status and address)

«NJRA Architects, Inc.»«»

«5272 South College Drive, Suite 104

Murray, Utah 84123»

TABLE OF ARTICLES 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS 2 OWNER 3 CONTRACTOR 4 ARCHITECT 5 SUBCONTRACTORS 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK 8 TIME 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT 15 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES






User Notes: (1194618422)

2






User Notes: (1194618422)

3

INDEX (Topics and numbers in bold are Section headings.)

Acceptance of Nonconforming Work

9.6.6, 9.9.3, 12.3

Acceptance of Work

9.6.6, 9.8.2, 9.9.3, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 12.3

Access to Work

3.16, 6.2.1, 12.1

Accident Prevention

10

Acts and Omissions

3.2, 3.3.2, 3.12.8, 3.18, 4.2.3, 8.3.1, 9.5.1, 10.2.5,

10.2.8, 13.3.2, 14.1, 15.1.2, 15.2

Addenda

1.1.1

Additional Costs, Claims for

3.7.4, 3.7.5, 10.3.2, 15.1.5

Additional Inspections and Testing

9.4.2, 9.8.3, 12.2.1, 13.4

Additional Time, Claims for

3.2.4, 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.10.2, 8.3.2, 15.1.6

Administration of the Contract

3.1.3, 4.2, 9.4, 9.5

Advertisement or Invitation to Bid

1.1.1

Aesthetic Effect

4.2.13

Allowances

3.8

Applications for Payment

4.2.5, 7.3.9, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5.1, 9.5.4, 9.6.3, 9.7, 9.10

Approvals

2.1.1, 2.3.1, 2.5, 3.1.3, 3.10.2, 3.12.8, 3.12.9,

3.12.10.1, 4.2.7, 9.3.2, 13.4.1

Arbitration

8.3.1, 15.3.2, 15.4

ARCHITECT

4

Architect, Definition of

4.1.1

Architect, Extent of Authority

2.5, 3.12.7, 4.1.2, 4.2, 5.2, 6.3, 7.1.2, 7.3.4, 7.4, 9.2,

9.3.1, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.3, 9.8, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 12.1, 12.2.1,

13.4.1, 13.4.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4, 15.1.4, 15.2.1

Architect, Limitations of Authority and Responsibility

2.1.1, 3.12.4, 3.12.8, 3.12.10, 4.1.2, 4.2.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.3,

4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.10, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 5.2.1, 7.4, 9.4.2,

9.5.4, 9.6.4, 15.1.4, 15.2

Architect’s Additional Services and Expenses

2.5, 12.2.1, 13.4.2, 13.4.3, 14.2.4

Architect’s Administration of the Contract

3.1.3, 3.7.4, 15.2, 9.4.1, 9.5

Architect’s Approvals

2.5, 3.1.3, 3.5, 3.10.2, 4.2.7

Architect’s Authority to Reject Work

3.5, 4.2.6, 12.1.2, 12.2.1

Architect’s Copyright

1.1.7, 1.5

Architect’s Decisions

3.7.4, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.11, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 4.2.14, 6.3,

7.3.4, 7.3.9, 8.1.3, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.4.1, 9.5, 9.8.4, 9.9.1,

13.4.2, 15.2

Architect’s Inspections

3.7.4, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 13.4

Architect’s Instructions

3.2.4, 3.3.1, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 13.4.2

Architect’s Interpretations

4.2.11, 4.2.12

Architect’s Project Representative

4.2.10

Architect’s Relationship with Contractor

1.1.2, 1.5, 2.3.3, 3.1.3, 3.2.2, 3.2.3, 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.4.2,

3.5, 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.9.2, 3.9.3, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 3.16,

3.18, 4.1.2, 4.2, 5.2, 6.2.2, 7, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5,

9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 10.2.6, 10.3, 11.3, 12, 13.3.2, 13.4, 15.2

Architect’s Relationship with Subcontractors

1.1.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.4, 4.2.6, 9.6.3, 9.6.4, 11.3

Architect’s Representations

9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.10.1

Architect’s Site Visits

3.7.4, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 13.4

Asbestos

10.3.1

Attorneys’ Fees

3.18.1, 9.6.8, 9.10.2, 10.3.3

Award of Separate Contracts

6.1.1, 6.1.2

Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for

Portions of the Work

5.2

Basic Definitions

1.1

Bidding Requirements

1.1.1

Binding Dispute Resolution

8.3.1, 9.7, 11.5, 13.1, 15.1.2, 15.1.3, 15.2.1, 15.2.5,

15.2.6.1, 15.3.1, 15.3.2, 15.3.3, 15.4.1

Bonds, Lien

7.3.4.4, 9.6.8, 9.10.2, 9.10.3

Bonds, Performance, and Payment

7.3.4.4, 9.6.7, 9.10.3, 11.1.2, 11.1.3, 11.5

Building Information Models Use and Reliance

1.8 Building Permit

3.7.1

Capitalization

1.3

Certificate of Substantial Completion

9.8.3, 9.8.4, 9.8.5

Certificates for Payment

4.2.1, 4.2.5, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.1, 9.6.6, 9.7,

9.10.1, 9.10.3, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4, 15.1.4

Certificates of Inspection, Testing or Approval

13.4.4






User Notes: (1194618422)

4

Certificates of Insurance

9.10.2

Change Orders

1.1.1, 3.4.2, 3.7.4, 3.8.2.3, 3.11, 3.12.8, 4.2.8, 5.2.3,

7.1.2, 7.1.3, 7.2, 7.3.2, 7.3.7, 7.3.9, 7.3.10, 8.3.1,

9.3.1.1, 9.10.3, 10.3.2, 11.2, 11.5, 12.1.2

Change Orders, Definition of

7.2.1

CHANGES IN THE WORK

2.2.2, 3.11, 4.2.8, 7, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 7.4, 8.3.1, 9.3.1.1,

11.5

Claims, Definition of

15.1.1

Claims, Notice of

1.6.2, 15.1.3

CLAIMS AND DISPUTES

3.2.4, 6.1.1, 6.3, 7.3.9, 9.3.3, 9.10.4, 10.3.3, 15, 15.4

Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims

15.4.1

Claims for Additional Cost

3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.7.4, 7.3.9, 9.5.2, 10.2.5, 10.3.2, 15.1.5

Claims for Additional Time

3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.7.4, 6.1.1, 8.3.2, 9.5.2, 10.3.2, 15.1.6

Concealed or Unknown Conditions, Claims for

3.7.4

Claims for Damages

3.2.4, 3.18, 8.3.3, 9.5.1, 9.6.7, 10.2.5, 10.3.3, 11.3,

11.3.2, 14.2.4, 15.1.7

Claims Subject to Arbitration

15.4.1

Cleaning Up

3.15, 6.3

Commencement of the Work, Conditions Relating to

2.2.1, 3.2.2, 3.4.1, 3.7.1, 3.10.1, 3.12.6, 5.2.1, 5.2.3,

6.2.2, 8.1.2, 8.2.2, 8.3.1, 11.1, 11.2, 15.1.5

Commencement of the Work, Definition of

8.1.2

Communications

3.9.1, 4.2.4

Completion, Conditions Relating to

3.4.1, 3.11, 3.15, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 8.2, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1,

9.10, 12.2, 14.1.2, 15.1.2

COMPLETION, PAYMENTS AND

9

Completion, Substantial

3.10.1, 4.2.9, 8.1.1, 8.1.3, 8.2.3, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1,

9.10.3, 12.2, 15.1.2

Compliance with Laws

2.3.2, 3.2.3, 3.6, 3.7, 3.12.10, 3.13, 9.6.4, 10.2.2, 13.1,

13.3, 13.4.1, 13.4.2, 13.5, 14.1.1, 14.2.1.3, 15.2.8,

15.4.2, 15.4.3

Concealed or Unknown Conditions

3.7.4, 4.2.8, 8.3.1, 10.3

Conditions of the Contract

1.1.1, 6.1.1, 6.1.4

Consent, Written

3.4.2, 3.14.2, 4.1.2, 9.8.5, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 13.2,

15.4.4.2

Consolidation or Joinder

15.4.4

CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY

SEPARATE CONTRACTORS

1.1.4, 6

Construction Change Directive, Definition of

7.3.1

Construction Change Directives

1.1.1, 3.4.2, 3.11, 3.12.8, 4.2.8, 7.1.1, 7.1.2, 7.1.3, 7.3,

9.3.1.1

Construction Schedules, Contractor’s

3.10, 3.11, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 6.1.3, 15.1.6.2

Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts

5.4, 14.2.2.2

Continuing Contract Performance

15.1.4

Contract, Definition of

1.1.2

CONTRACT, TERMINATION OR

SUSPENSION OF THE

5.4.1.1, 5.4.2, 11.5, 14

Contract Administration

3.1.3, 4, 9.4, 9.5

Contract Award and Execution, Conditions Relating

to

3.7.1, 3.10, 5.2, 6.1

Contract Documents, Copies Furnished and Use of

1.5.2, 2.3.6, 5.3

Contract Documents, Definition of

1.1.1

Contract Sum

2.2.2, 2.2.4, 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.8, 3.10.2, 5.2.3, 7.3, 7.4,

9.1, 9.2, 9.4.2, 9.5.1.4, 9.6.7, 9.7, 10.3.2, 11.5, 12.1.2,

12.3, 14.2.4, 14.3.2, 15.1.4.2, 15.1.5, 15.2.5

Contract Sum, Definition of

9.1

Contract Time

1.1.4, 2.2.1, 2.2.2, 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.10.2, 5.2.3, 6.1.5,

7.2.1.3, 7.3.1, 7.3.5, 7.3.6, 7, 7, 7.3.10, 7.4, 8.1.1,

8.2.1, 8.2.3, 8.3.1, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.3.2, 12.1.1, 12.1.2,

14.3.2, 15.1.4.2, 15.1.6.1, 15.2.5

Contract Time, Definition of

8.1.1

CONTRACTOR

3

Contractor, Definition of

3.1, 6.1.2

Contractor’s Construction and Submittal

Schedules

3.10, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 4.2.3, 6.1.3, 15.1.6.2

Contractor’s Employees

2.2.4, 3.3.2, 3.4.3, 3.8.1, 3.9, 3.18.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 10.2,

10.3, 11.3, 14.1, 14.2.1.1

Contractor’s Liability Insurance

11.1

Contractor’s Relationship with Separate Contractors

and Owner’s Forces

3.12.5, 3.14.2, 4.2.4, 6, 11.3, 12.2.4






User Notes: (1194618422)

5

Contractor’s Relationship with Subcontractors

1.2.2, 2.2.4, 3.3.2, 3.18.1, 3.18.2, 4.2.4, 5, 9.6.2, 9.6.7,

9.10.2, 11.2, 11.3, 11.4

Contractor’s Relationship with the Architect

1.1.2, 1.5, 2.3.3, 3.1.3, 3.2.2, 3.2.3, 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.4.2,

3.5.1, 3.7.4, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 3.16, 3.18, 4.2, 5.2, 6.2.2,

7, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 10.2.6, 10.3,

11.3, 12, 13.4, 15.1.3, 15.2.1

Contractor’s Representations

3.2.1, 3.2.2, 3.5, 3.12.6, 6.2.2, 8.2.1, 9.3.3, 9.8.2

Contractor’s Responsibility for Those Performing the

Work

3.3.2, 3.18, 5.3, 6.1.3, 6.2, 9.5.1, 10.2.8

Contractor’s Review of Contract Documents

3.2

Contractor’s Right to Stop the Work

2.2.2, 9.7

Contractor’s Right to Terminate the Contract

14.1

Contractor’s Submittals

3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 9.2, 9.3, 9.8.2,

9.8.3, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3

Contractor’s Superintendent

3.9, 10.2.6

Contractor’s Supervision and Construction

Procedures

1.2.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.12.10, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 6.1.3, 6.2.4, 7.1.3,

7.3.4, 7.3.6, 8.2, 10, 12, 14, 15.1.4

Coordination and Correlation

1.2, 3.2.1, 3.3.1, 3.10, 3.12.6, 6.1.3, 6.2.1

Copies Furnished of Drawings and Specifications

1.5, 2.3.6, 3.11

Copyrights

1.5, 3.17

Correction of Work

2.5, 3.7.3, 9.4.2, 9.8.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.1, 12.1.2, 12.2, 12.3,

15.1.3.1, 15.1.3.2, 15.2.1

Correlation and Intent of the Contract Documents

1.2

Cost, Definition of

7.3.4

Costs

2.5, 3.2.4, 3.7.3, 3.8.2, 3.15.2, 5.4.2, 6.1.1, 6.2.3,

7.3.3.3, 7.3.4, 7.3.8, 7.3.9, 9.10.2, 10.3.2, 10.3.6, 11.2,

12.1.2, 12.2.1, 12.2.4, 13.4, 14

Cutting and Patching

3.14, 6.2.5

Damage to Construction of Owner or Separate

Contractors

3.14.2, 6.2.4, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.5, 10.4, 12.2.4

Damage to the Work

3.14.2, 9.9.1, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.5, 10.4, 12.2.4

Damages, Claims for

3.2.4, 3.18, 6.1.1, 8.3.3, 9.5.1, 9.6.7, 10.3.3, 11.3.2,

11.3, 14.2.4, 15.1.7

Damages for Delay

6.2.3, 8.3.3, 9.5.1.6, 9.7, 10.3.2, 14.3.2

Date of Commencement of the Work, Definition of

8.1.2

Date of Substantial Completion, Definition of

8.1.3

Day, Definition of

8.1.4

Decisions of the Architect

3.7.4, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.11, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 6.3, 7.3.4,

7.3.9, 8.1.3, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.4, 9.5.1, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, 13.4.2,

14.2.2, 14.2.4, 15.1, 15.2

Decisions to Withhold Certification

9.4.1, 9.5, 9.7, 14.1.1.3

Defective or Nonconforming Work, Acceptance,

Rejection and Correction of

2.5, 3.5, 4.2.6, 6.2.3, 9.5.1, 9.5.3, 9.6.6, 9.8.2, 9.9.3,

9.10.4, 12.2.1

Definitions

1.1, 2.1.1, 3.1.1, 3.5, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 3.12.3, 4.1.1, 5.1,

6.1.2, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 8.1, 9.1, 9.8.1, 15.1.1

Delays and Extensions of Time

3.2, 3.7.4, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 7.4, 8.3, 9.5.1, 9.7,

10.3.2, 10.4, 14.3.2, 15.1.6, 15.2.5

Digital Data Use and Transmission

1.7 Disputes

6.3, 7.3.9, 15.1, 15.2

Documents and Samples at the Site

3.11

Drawings, Definition of

1.1.5

Drawings and Specifications, Use and Ownership of

3.11

Effective Date of Insurance

8.2.2

Emergencies

10.4, 14.1.1.2, 15.1.5

Employees, Contractor’s

3.3.2, 3.4.3, 3.8.1, 3.9, 3.18.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 10.2,

10.3.3, 11.3, 14.1, 14.2.1.1

Equipment, Labor, or Materials

1.1.3, 1.1.6, 3.4, 3.5, 3.8.2, 3.8.3, 3.12, 3.13, 3.15.1,

4.2.6, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 6.2.1, 7.3.4, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 9.5.1.3,

9.10.2, 10.2.1, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.1, 14.2.1.2

Execution and Progress of the Work

1.1.3, 1.2.1, 1.2.2, 2.3.4, 2.3.6, 3.1, 3.3.1, 3.4.1, 3.7.1,

3.10.1, 3.12, 3.14, 4.2, 6.2.2, 7.1.3, 7.3.6, 8.2, 9.5.1,

9.9.1, 10.2, 10.3, 12.1, 12.2, 14.2, 14.3.1, 15.1.4

Extensions of Time

3.2.4, 3.7.4, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3, 7.4, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.3.2,

10.4, 14.3, 15.1.6, 15.2.5

Failure of Payment

9.5.1.3, 9.7, 9.10.2, 13.5, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.1.2

Faulty Work

(See Defective or Nonconforming Work)

Final Completion and Final Payment

4.2.1, 4.2.9, 9.8.2, 9.10, 12.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3

Financial Arrangements, Owner’s

2.2.1, 13.2.2, 14.1.1.4






User Notes: (1194618422)

6

GENERAL PROVISIONS

1

Governing Law

13.1

Guarantees (See Warranty)

Hazardous Materials and Substances

10.2.4, 10.3

Identification of Subcontractors and Suppliers

5.2.1

Indemnification

3.17, 3.18, 9.6.8, 9.10.2, 10.3.3, 11.3

Information and Services Required of the Owner

2.1.2, 2.2, 2.3, 3.2.2, 3.12.10.1, 6.1.3, 6.1.4, 6.2.5,

9.6.1, 9.9.2, 9.10.3, 10.3.3, 11.2, 13.4.1, 13.4.2,

14.1.1.4, 14.1.4, 15.1.4

Initial Decision

15.2

Initial Decision Maker, Definition of

1.1.8

Initial Decision Maker, Decisions

14.2.4, 15.1.4.2, 15.2.1, 15.2.2, 15.2.3, 15.2.4, 15.2.5

Initial Decision Maker, Extent of Authority

14.2.4, 15.1.4.2, 15.2.1, 15.2.2, 15.2.3, 15.2.4, 15.2.5

Injury or Damage to Person or Property

10.2.8, 10.4

Inspections

3.1.3, 3.3.3, 3.7.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.6, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.8.3,

9.9.2, 9.10.1, 12.2.1, 13.4

Instructions to Bidders

1.1.1

Instructions to the Contractor

3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.8.1, 5.2.1, 7, 8.2.2, 12, 13.4.2

Instruments of Service, Definition of

1.1.7

Insurance

6.1.1, 7.3.4, 8.2.2, 9.3.2, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 10.2.5, 11

Insurance, Notice of Cancellation or Expiration

11.1.4, 11.2.3

Insurance, Contractor’s Liability

11.1

Insurance, Effective Date of

8.2.2, 14.4.2

Insurance, Owner’s Liability

11.2

Insurance, Property

10.2.5, 11.2, 11.4, 11.5

Insurance, Stored Materials

9.3.2

INSURANCE AND BONDS

11

Insurance Companies, Consent to Partial Occupancy

9.9.1

Insured loss, Adjustment and Settlement of

11.5

Intent of the Contract Documents

1.2.1, 4.2.7, 4.2.12, 4.2.13

Interest

13.5

Interpretation

1.1.8, 1.2.3, 1.4, 4.1.1, 5.1, 6.1.2, 15.1.1

Interpretations, Written

4.2.11, 4.2.12

Judgment on Final Award

15.4.2

Labor and Materials, Equipment

1.1.3, 1.1.6, 3.4, 3.5, 3.8.2, 3.8.3, 3.12, 3.13, 3.15.1,

5.2.1, 6.2.1, 7.3.4, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 9.5.1.3, 9.10.2, 10.2.1,

10.2.4, 14.2.1.1, 14.2.1.2

Labor Disputes

8.3.1

Laws and Regulations

1.5, 2.3.2, 3.2.3, 3.2.4, 3.6, 3.7, 3.12.10, 3.13, 9.6.4,

9.9.1, 10.2.2, 13.1, 13.3.1, 13.4.2, 13.5, 14, 15.2.8,

15.4

Liens

2.1.2, 9.3.1, 9.3.3, 9.6.8, 9.10.2, 9.10.4, 15.2.8

Limitations, Statutes of

12.2.5, 15.1.2, 15.4.1.1

Limitations of Liability

3.2.2, 3.5, 3.12.10, 3.12.10.1, 3.17, 3.18.1, 4.2.6,

4.2.7, 6.2.2, 9.4.2, 9.6.4, 9.6.7, 9.6.8, 10.2.5, 10.3.3,

11.3, 12.2.5, 13.3.1

Limitations of Time

2.1.2, 2.2, 2.5, 3.2.2, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12.5, 3.15.1, 4.2.7,

5.2, 5.3, 5.4.1, 6.2.4, 7.3, 7.4, 8.2, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.3.3,

9.4.1, 9.5, 9.6, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 9.10, 12.2, 13.4, 14, 15,

15.1.2, 15.1.3, 15.1.5

Materials, Hazardous

10.2.4, 10.3

Materials, Labor, Equipment and

1.1.3, 1.1.6, 3.4.1, 3.5, 3.8.2, 3.8.3, 3.12, 3.13, 3.15.1,

5.2.1, 6.2.1, 7.3.4, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 9.5.1.3, 9.10.2,

10.2.1.2, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.1, 14.2.1.2

Means, Methods, Techniques, Sequences and

Procedures of Construction

3.3.1, 3.12.10, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 9.4.2

Mechanic’s Lien

2.1.2, 9.3.1, 9.3.3, 9.6.8, 9.10.2, 9.10.4, 15.2.8

Mediation

8.3.1, 15.1.3.2, 15.2.1, 15.2.5, 15.2.6, 15.3, 15.4.1,

15.4.1.1

Minor Changes in the Work

1.1.1, 3.4.2, 3.12.8, 4.2.8, 7.1, 7.4

MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS

13

Modifications, Definition of

1.1.1

Modifications to the Contract

1.1.1, 1.1.2, 2.5, 3.11, 4.1.2, 4.2.1, 5.2.3, 7, 8.3.1, 9.7,

10.3.2

Mutual Responsibility

6.2

Nonconforming Work, Acceptance of

9.6.6, 9.9.3, 12.3






User Notes: (1194618422)

7

Nonconforming Work, Rejection and Correction of

2.4, 2.5, 3.5, 4.2.6, 6.2.4, 9.5.1, 9.8.2, 9.9.3, 9.10.4,

12.2

Notice

1.6, 1.6.1, 1.6.2, 2.1.2, 2.2.2., 2.2.3, 2.2.4, 2.5, 3.2.4,

3.3.1, 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.9.2, 3.12.9, 3.12.10, 5.2.1, 7.4,

8.2.2 9.6.8, 9.7, 9.10.1, 10.2.8, 10.3.2, 11.5, 12.2.2.1,

13.4.1, 13.4.2, 14.1, 14.2.2, 14.4.2, 15.1.3, 15.1.5,

15.1.6, 15.4.1

Notice of Cancellation or Expiration of Insurance

11.1.4, 11.2.3

Notice of Claims

1.6.2, 2.1.2, 3.7.4, 9.6.8, 10.2.8, 15.1.3, 15.1.5, 15.1.6,

15.2.8, 15.3.2, 15.4.1

Notice of Testing and Inspections

13.4.1, 13.4.2

Observations, Contractor’s

3.2, 3.7.4

Occupancy

2.3.1, 9.6.6, 9.8

Orders, Written

1.1.1, 2.4, 3.9.2, 7, 8.2.2, 11.5, 12.1, 12.2.2.1, 13.4.2,

14.3.1

OWNER

2

Owner, Definition of

2.1.1

Owner, Evidence of Financial Arrangements

2.2, 13.2.2, 14.1.1.4

Owner, Information and Services Required of the

2.1.2, 2.2, 2.3, 3.2.2, 3.12.10, 6.1.3, 6.1.4, 6.2.5, 9.3.2,

9.6.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.2, 9.10.3, 10.3.3, 11.2, 13.4.1, 13.4.2,

14.1.1.4, 14.1.4, 15.1.4

Owner’s Authority

1.5, 2.1.1, 2.3.32.4, 2.5, 3.4.2, 3.8.1, 3.12.10, 3.14.2,

4.1.2, 4.2.4, 4.2.9, 5.2.1, 5.2.4, 5.4.1, 6.1, 6.3, 7.2.1,

7.3.1, 8.2.2, 8.3.1, 9.3.2, 9.5.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.1, 9.10.2,

10.3.2, 11.4, 11.5, 12.2.2, 12.3, 13.2.2, 14.3, 14.4,

15.2.7

Owner’s Insurance

11.2

Owner’s Relationship with Subcontractors

1.1.2, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 9.6.4, 9.10.2, 14.2.2

Owner’s Right to Carry Out the Work

2.5, 14.2.2

Owner’s Right to Clean Up

6.3

Owner’s Right to Perform Construction and to

Award Separate Contracts

6.1

Owner’s Right to Stop the Work

2.4

Owner’s Right to Suspend the Work

14.3

Owner’s Right to Terminate the Contract

14.2, 14.4

Ownership and Use of Drawings, Specifications

and Other Instruments of Service

1.1.1, 1.1.6, 1.1.7, 1.5, 2.3.6, 3.2.2, 3.11, 3.17, 4.2.12,

5.3

Partial Occupancy or Use

9.6.6, 9.9

Patching, Cutting and

3.14, 6.2.5

Patents

3.17

Payment, Applications for

4.2.5, 7.3.9, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.3, 9.7, 9.8.5, 9.10.1,

14.2.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3

Payment, Certificates for

4.2.5, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.1, 9.6.6, 9.7, 9.10.1,

9.10.3, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4

Payment, Failure of

9.5.1.3, 9.7, 9.10.2, 13.5, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.1.2

Payment, Final

4.2.1, 4.2.9, 9.10, 12.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3

Payment Bond, Performance Bond and

7.3.4.4, 9.6.7, 9.10.3, 11.1.2

Payments, Progress

9.3, 9.6, 9.8.5, 9.10.3, 14.2.3, 15.1.4

PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION

9

Payments to Subcontractors

5.4.2, 9.5.1.3, 9.6.2, 9.6.3, 9.6.4, 9.6.7, 14.2.1.2

PCB

10.3.1

Performance Bond and Payment Bond

7.3.4.4, 9.6.7, 9.10.3, 11.1.2

Permits, Fees, Notices and Compliance with Laws

2.3.1, 3.7, 3.13, 7.3.4.4, 10.2.2

PERSONS AND PROPERTY, PROTECTION OF

10

Polychlorinated Biphenyl

10.3.1

Product Data, Definition of

3.12.2

Product Data and Samples, Shop Drawings

3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7

Progress and Completion

4.2.2, 8.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 14.1.4, 15.1.4

Progress Payments

9.3, 9.6, 9.8.5, 9.10.3, 14.2.3, 15.1.4

Project, Definition of

1.1.4

Project Representatives

4.2.10

Property Insurance

10.2.5, 11.2

Proposal Requirements

1.1.1

PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY

10






User Notes: (1194618422)

8

Regulations and Laws

1.5, 2.3.2, 3.2.3, 3.6, 3.7, 3.12.10, 3.13, 9.6.4, 9.9.1,

10.2.2, 13.1, 13.3, 13.4.1, 13.4.2, 13.5, 14, 15.2.8, 15.4

Rejection of Work

4.2.6, 12.2.1

Releases and Waivers of Liens

9.3.1, 9.10.2

Representations

3.2.1, 3.5, 3.12.6, 8.2.1, 9.3.3, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.10.1

Representatives

2.1.1, 3.1.1, 3.9, 4.1.1, 4.2.10, 13.2.1

Responsibility for Those Performing the Work

3.3.2, 3.18, 4.2.2, 4.2.3, 5.3, 6.1.3, 6.2, 6.3, 9.5.1, 10

Retainage

9.3.1, 9.6.2, 9.8.5, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3

Review of Contract Documents and Field

Conditions by Contractor

3.2, 3.12.7, 6.1.3

Review of Contractor’s Submittals by Owner and

Architect

3.10.1, 3.10.2, 3.11, 3.12, 4.2, 5.2, 6.1.3, 9.2, 9.8.2

Review of Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples

by Contractor

3.12

Rights and Remedies

1.1.2, 2.4, 2.5, 3.5, 3.7.4, 3.15.2, 4.2.6, 5.3, 5.4, 6.1,

6.3, 7.3.1, 8.3, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.2.5, 10.3, 12.2.1, 12.2.2,

12.2.4, 13.3, 14, 15.4

Royalties, Patents and Copyrights

3.17

Rules and Notices for Arbitration

15.4.1

Safety of Persons and Property

10.2, 10.4

Safety Precautions and Programs

3.3.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 5.3, 10.1, 10.2, 10.4

Samples, Definition of

3.12.3

Samples, Shop Drawings, Product Data and

3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7

Samples at the Site, Documents and

3.11

Schedule of Values

9.2, 9.3.1

Schedules, Construction

3.10, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 6.1.3, 15.1.6.2

Separate Contracts and Contractors

1.1.4, 3.12.5, 3.14.2, 4.2.4, 4.2.7, 6, 8.3.1, 12.1.2

Separate Contractors, Definition of

6.1.1

Shop Drawings, Definition of

3.12.1

Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples

3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7

Site, Use of

3.13, 6.1.1, 6.2.1

Site Inspections

3.2.2, 3.3.3, 3.7.1, 3.7.4, 4.2, 9.9.2, 9.4.2, 9.10.1, 13.4

Site Visits, Architect’s

3.7.4, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 13.4

Special Inspections and Testing

4.2.6, 12.2.1, 13.4

Specifications, Definition of

1.1.6

Specifications

1.1.1, 1.1.6, 1.2.2, 1.5, 3.12.10, 3.17, 4.2.14

Statute of Limitations

15.1.2, 15.4.1.1

Stopping the Work

2.2.2, 2.4, 9.7, 10.3, 14.1

Stored Materials

6.2.1, 9.3.2, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.4

Subcontractor, Definition of

5.1.1

SUBCONTRACTORS

5

Subcontractors, Work by

1.2.2, 3.3.2, 3.12.1, 3.18, 4.2.3, 5.2.3, 5.3, 5.4, 9.3.1.2,

9.6.7

Subcontractual Relations

5.3, 5.4, 9.3.1.2, 9.6, 9.10, 10.2.1, 14.1, 14.2.1

Submittals

3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 7.3.4, 9.2, 9.3, 9.8,

9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3

Submittal Schedule

3.10.2, 3.12.5, 4.2.7

Subrogation, Waivers of

6.1.1, 11.3

Substances, Hazardous

10.3

Substantial Completion

4.2.9, 8.1.1, 8.1.3, 8.2.3, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10.3, 12.2,

15.1.2

Substantial Completion, Definition of

9.8.1

Substitution of Subcontractors

5.2.3, 5.2.4

Substitution of Architect

2.3.3

Substitutions of Materials

3.4.2, 3.5, 7.3.8

Sub-subcontractor, Definition of

5.1.2

Subsurface Conditions

3.7.4

Successors and Assigns

13.2

Superintendent

3.9, 10.2.6

Supervision and Construction Procedures

1.2.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.12.10, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 6.1.3, 6.2.4, 7.1.3,

7.3.4, 8.2, 8.3.1, 9.4.2, 10, 12, 14, 15.1.4

Suppliers

1.5, 3.12.1, 4.2.4, 4.2.6, 5.2.1, 9.3, 9.4.2, 9.5.4, 9.6,

9.10.5, 14.2.1






User Notes: (1194618422)

9

Surety

5.4.1.2, 9.6.8, 9.8.5, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 11.1.2, 14.2.2,

15.2.7

Surety, Consent of

9.8.5, 9.10.2, 9.10.3

Surveys

1.1.7, 2.3.4

Suspension by the Owner for Convenience

14.3

Suspension of the Work

3.7.5, 5.4.2, 14.3

Suspension or Termination of the Contract

5.4.1.1, 14

Taxes

3.6, 3.8.2.1, 7.3.4.4

Termination by the Contractor

14.1, 15.1.7

Termination by the Owner for Cause

5.4.1.1, 14.2, 15.1.7

Termination by the Owner for Convenience

14.4

Termination of the Architect

2.3.3

Termination of the Contractor Employment

14.2.2

TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE

CONTRACT

14

Tests and Inspections

3.1.3, 3.3.3, 3.7.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.6, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.8.3,

9.9.2, 9.10.1, 10.3.2, 12.2.1, 13.4

TIME

8

Time, Delays and Extensions of

3.2.4, 3.7.4, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 7.4, 8.3, 9.5.1, 9.7,

10.3.2, 10.4, 14.3.2, 15.1.6, 15.2.5

Time Limits

2.1.2, 2.2, 2.5, 3.2.2, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12.5, 3.15.1, 4.2,

5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 6.2.4, 7.3, 7.4, 8.2, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.3.3, 9.4.1,

9.5, 9.6, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 9.10, 12.2, 13.4, 14, 15.1.2,

15.1.3, 15.4

Time Limits on Claims

3.7.4, 10.2.8, 15.1.2, 15.1.3

Title to Work

9.3.2, 9.3.3

UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK

12

Uncovering of Work

12.1

Unforeseen Conditions, Concealed or Unknown

3.7.4, 8.3.1, 10.3

Unit Prices

7.3.3.2, 9.1.2

Use of Documents

1.1.1, 1.5, 2.3.6, 3.12.6, 5.3

Use of Site

3.13, 6.1.1, 6.2.1

Values, Schedule of

9.2, 9.3.1

Waiver of Claims by the Architect

13.3.2

Waiver of Claims by the Contractor

9.10.5, 13.3.2, 15.1.7

Waiver of Claims by the Owner

9.9.3, 9.10.3, 9.10.4, 12.2.2.1, 13.3.2, 14.2.4, 15.1.7

Waiver of Consequential Damages

14.2.4, 15.1.7

Waiver of Liens

9.3, 9.10.2, 9.10.4

Waivers of Subrogation

6.1.1, 11.3

Warranty

3.5, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.4, 12.2.2,

15.1.2

Weather Delays

8.3, 15.1.6.2

Work, Definition of

1.1.3

Written Consent

1.5.2, 3.4.2, 3.7.4, 3.12.8, 3.14.2, 4.1.2, 9.3.2, 9.10.3,

13.2, 13.3.2, 15.4.4.2

Written Interpretations

4.2.11, 4.2.12

Written Orders

1.1.1, 2.4, 3.9, 7, 8.2.2, 12.1, 12.2, 13.4.2, 14.3.1






User Notes: (1194618422)

10

ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS § 1.1 Basic Definitions § 1.1.1 The Contract Documents The Contract Documents are enumerated in the Agreement between the Owner and Contractor (hereinafter the

Agreement) and consist of the Agreement, Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other Conditions),

Drawings, Specifications, Addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract, other documents listed in the Agreement,

and Modifications issued after execution of the Contract. A Modification is (1) a written amendment to the Contract

signed by both parties, (2) a Change Order, (3) a Construction Change Directive, or (4) a written order for a minor

change in the Work issued by the Architect. Unless specifically enumerated in the Agreement, the Contract

Documents do not include the advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, sample forms, other

information furnished by the Owner in anticipation of receiving bids or proposals, the Contractor’s bid or proposal, or

portions of Addenda relating to bidding or proposal requirements.

§ 1.1.2 The Contract The Contract Documents form the Contract for Construction. The Contract represents the entire and integrated

agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, representations, or agreements, either written

or oral. The Contract may be amended or modified only by a Modification. The Contract Documents shall not be

construed to create a contractual relationship of any kind (1) between the Contractor and the Architect or the

Architect’s consultants, (2) between the Owner and a Subcontractor or a Sub-subcontractor, (3) between the Owner

and the Architect or the Architect’s consultants, or (4) between any persons or entities other than the Owner and the

Contractor. The Architect shall, however, be entitled to performance and enforcement of obligations under the

Contract intended to facilitate performance of the Architect’s duties.

§ 1.1.3 The Work The term “Work” means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents, whether completed or

partially completed, and includes all other labor, materials, equipment, and services provided or to be provided by the

Contractor to fulfill the Contractor’s obligations. The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Project.

§ 1.1.4 The Project The Project is the total construction of which the Work performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole or

a part and which may include construction by the Owner and by Separate Contractors.

§ 1.1.5 The Drawings The Drawings are the graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents showing the design, location and

dimensions of the Work, generally including plans, elevations, sections, details, schedules, and diagrams.

§ 1.1.6 The Specifications The Specifications are that portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the written requirements for materials,

equipment, systems, standards and workmanship for the Work, and performance of related services.

§ 1.1.7 Instruments of Service Instruments of Service are representations, in any medium of expression now known or later developed, of the tangible

and intangible creative work performed by the Architect and the Architect’s consultants under their respective

professional services agreements. Instruments of Service may include, without limitation, studies, surveys, models,

sketches, drawings, specifications, and other similar materials.

§ 1.1.8 Initial Decision Maker The Initial Decision Maker is the person identified in the Agreement to render initial decisions on Claims in

accordance with Section 15.2. The Initial Decision Maker shall not show partiality to the Owner or Contractor and

shall not be liable for results of interpretations or decisions rendered in good faith.

§ 1.2 Correlation and Intent of the Contract Documents § 1.2.1 The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and completion

of the Work by the Contractor. The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as

binding as if required by all; performance by the Contractor shall be required only to the extent consistent with the

Contract Documents and reasonably inferable from them as being necessary to produce the indicated results.






User Notes: (1194618422)

11

§ 1.2.1.1 The invalidity of any provision of the Contract Documents shall not invalidate the Contract or its remaining

provisions. If it is determined that any provision of the Contract Documents violates any law, or is otherwise invalid or

unenforceable, then that provision shall be revised to the extent necessary to make that provision legal and

enforceable. In such case the Contract Documents shall be construed, to the fullest extent permitted by law, to give

effect to the parties’ intentions and purposes in executing the Contract.

§ 1.2.2 Organization of the Specifications into divisions, sections and articles, and arrangement of Drawings shall not

control the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of Work to be

performed by any trade.

§ 1.2.3 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, words that have well-known technical or construction

industry meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meanings.

§ 1.3 Capitalization Terms capitalized in these General Conditions include those that are (1) specifically defined, (2) the titles of numbered

articles, or (3) the titles of other documents published by the American Institute of Architects.

§ 1.4 Interpretation In the interest of brevity the Contract Documents frequently omit modifying words such as “all” and “any” and articles

such as “the” and “an,” but the fact that a modifier or an article is absent from one statement and appears in another is

not intended to affect the interpretation of either statement.

§ 1.5 Ownership and Use of Drawings, Specifications, and Other Instruments of Service § 1.5.1 The Architect and the Architect’s consultants shall be deemed the authors and owners of their respective

Instruments of Service, including the Drawings and Specifications, and retain all common law, statutory, and other

reserved rights in their Instruments of Service, including copyrights. The Contractor, Subcontractors,

Sub-subcontractors, and suppliers shall not own or claim a copyright in the Instruments of Service. Submittal or

distribution to meet official regulatory requirements or for other purposes in connection with the Project is not to be

construed as publication in derogation of the Architect’s or Architect’s consultants’ reserved rights.

§ 1.5.2 The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, and suppliers are authorized to use and reproduce the

Instruments of Service provided to them, subject to any protocols established pursuant to Sections 1.7 and 1.8, solely

and exclusively for execution of the Work. All copies made under this authorization shall bear the copyright notice, if

any, shown on the Instruments of Service. The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, and suppliers may not

use the Instruments of Service on other projects or for additions to the Project outside the scope of the Work without

the specific written consent of the Owner, Architect, and the Architect’s consultants.

§ 1.6 Notice § 1.6.1 Except as otherwise provided in Section 1.6.2, where the Contract Documents require one party to notify or

give notice to the other party, such notice shall be provided in writing to the designated representative of the party to

whom the notice is addressed and shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person, by mail, by courier,

or by electronic transmission if a method for electronic transmission is set forth in the Agreement.

§ 1.6.2 Notice of Claims as provided in Section 15.1.3 shall be provided in writing and shall be deemed to have been

duly served only if delivered to the designated representative of the party to whom the notice is addressed by certified

or registered mail, or by courier providing proof of delivery.

§ 1.7 Digital Data Use and Transmission The parties shall agree upon protocols governing the transmission and use of Instruments of Service or any other

information or documentation in digital form. The parties will use AIA Document E203™–2013, Building

Information Modeling and Digital Data Exhibit, to establish the protocols for the development, use, transmission, and

exchange of digital data.

§ 1.8 Building Information Models Use and Reliance Any use of, or reliance on, all or a portion of a building information model without agreement to protocols governing

the use of, and reliance on, the information contained in the model and without having those protocols set forth in AIA

Document E203™–2013, Building Information Modeling and Digital Data Exhibit, and the requisite AIA Document

G202™–2013, Project Building Information Modeling Protocol Form, shall be at the using or relying party’s sole risk






User Notes: (1194618422)

12

and without liability to the other party and its contractors or consultants, the authors of, or contributors to, the building

information model, and each of their agents and employees.

ARTICLE 2 OWNER § 2.1 General § 2.1.1 The Owner is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract

Documents as if singular in number. The Owner shall designate in writing a representative who shall have express

authority to bind the Owner with respect to all matters requiring the Owner’s approval or authorization. Except as

otherwise provided in Section 4.2.1, the Architect does not have such authority. The term “Owner” means the Owner

or the Owner’s authorized representative.

§ 2.1.2 The Owner shall furnish to the Contractor, within fifteen days after receipt of a written request, information

necessary and relevant for the Contractor to evaluate, give notice of, or enforce mechanic’s lien rights. Such

information shall include a correct statement of the record legal title to the property on which the Project is located,

usually referred to as the site, and the Owner’s interest therein.

§ 2.2 Evidence of the Owner’s Financial Arrangements § 2.2.1 Prior to commencement of the Work and upon written request by the Contractor, the Owner shall furnish to the

Contractor reasonable evidence that the Owner has made financial arrangements to fulfill the Owner’s obligations

under the Contract. The Contractor shall have no obligation to commence the Work until the Owner provides such

evidence. If commencement of the Work is delayed under this Section 2.2.1, the Contract Time shall be extended

appropriately.

§ 2.2.2 Following commencement of the Work and upon written request by the Contractor, the Owner shall furnish to

the Contractor reasonable evidence that the Owner has made financial arrangements to fulfill the Owner’s obligations

under the Contract only if (1) the Owner fails to make payments to the Contractor as the Contract Documents require;

(2) the Contractor identifies in writing a reasonable concern regarding the Owner’s ability to make payment when due;

or (3) a change in the Work materially changes the Contract Sum. If the Owner fails to provide such evidence, as

required, within fourteen days of the Contractor’s request, the Contractor may immediately stop the Work and, in that

event, shall notify the Owner that the Work has stopped. However, if the request is made because a change in the Work

materially changes the Contract Sum under (3) above, the Contractor may immediately stop only that portion of the

Work affected by the change until reasonable evidence is provided. If the Work is stopped under this Section 2.2.2, the

Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the

Contractor’s reasonable costs of shutdown, delay and start-up, plus interest as provided in the Contract Documents.

§ 2.2.3 After the Owner furnishes evidence of financial arrangements under this Section 2.2, the Owner shall not

materially vary such financial arrangements without prior notice to the Contractor.

§ 2.2.4 Where the Owner has designated information furnished under this Section 2.2 as “confidential,” the Contractor

shall keep the information confidential and shall not disclose it to any other person. However, the Contractor may

disclose “confidential” information, after seven (7) days’ notice to the Owner, where disclosure is required by law,

including a subpoena or other form of compulsory legal process issued by a court or governmental entity, or by court

or arbitrator(s) order. The Contractor may also disclose “confidential” information to its employees, consultants,

sureties, Subcontractors and their employees, Sub-subcontractors, and others who need to know the content of such

information solely and exclusively for the Project and who agree to maintain the confidentiality of such information.

§ 2.3 Information and Services Required of the Owner § 2.3.1 Except for permits and fees that are the responsibility of the Contractor under the Contract Documents,

including those required under Section 3.7.1, the Owner shall secure and pay for necessary approvals, easements,

assessments and charges required for construction, use or occupancy of permanent structures or for permanent

changes in existing facilities.

§ 2.3.2 The Owner shall retain an architect lawfully licensed to practice architecture, or an entity lawfully practicing

architecture, in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. That person or entity is identified as the Architect in the

Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number.

§ 2.3.3 If the employment of the Architect terminates, the Owner shall employ a successor to whom the Contractor has

no reasonable objection and whose status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the Architect.






User Notes: (1194618422)

13

§ 2.3.4 The Owner shall furnish surveys describing physical characteristics, legal limitations and utility locations for

the site of the Project, and a legal description of the site. The Contractor shall be entitled to rely on the accuracy of

information furnished by the Owner but shall exercise proper precautions relating to the safe performance of the

Work.

§ 2.3.5 The Owner shall furnish information or services required of the Owner by the Contract Documents with

reasonable promptness. The Owner shall also furnish any other information or services under the Owner’s control and

relevant to the Contractor’s performance of the Work with reasonable promptness after receiving the Contractor’s

written request for such information or services.

§ 2.3.6 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor one copy of

the Contract Documents for purposes of making reproductions pursuant to Section 1.5.2.

§ 2.4 Owner’s Right to Stop the Work If the Contractor fails to correct Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents as

required by Section 12.2 or repeatedly fails to carry out Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Owner

may issue a written order to the Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has

been eliminated; however, the right of the Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to a duty on the part of the Owner

to exercise this right for the benefit of the Contractor or any other person or entity, except to the extent required by

Section 6.1.3.

§ 2.5 Owner’s Right to Carry Out the Work If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and fails

within a ten-day period after receipt of notice from the Owner to commence and continue correction of such default or

neglect with diligence and promptness, the Owner may, without prejudice to other remedies the Owner may have,

correct such default or neglect. Such action by the Owner and amounts charged to the Contractor are both subject to

prior approval of the Architect and the Architect may, pursuant to Section 9.5.1, withhold or nullify a Certificate for

Payment in whole or in part, to the extent reasonably necessary to reimburse the Owner for the reasonable cost of

correcting such deficiencies, including Owner’s expenses and compensation for the Architect’s additional services

made necessary by such default, neglect, or failure. If current and future payments are not sufficient to cover such

amounts, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. If the Contractor disagrees with the actions of the

Owner or the Architect, or the amounts claimed as costs to the Owner, the Contractor may file a Claim pursuant to

Article 15.

ARTICLE 3 CONTRACTOR § 3.1 General § 3.1.1 The Contractor is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the

Contract Documents as if singular in number. The Contractor shall be lawfully licensed, if required in the jurisdiction

where the Project is located. The Contractor shall designate in writing a representative who shall have express

authority to bind the Contractor with respect to all matters under this Contract. The term “Contractor” means the

Contractor or the Contractor’s authorized representative.

§ 3.1.2 The Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

§ 3.1.3 The Contractor shall not be relieved of its obligations to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract

Documents either by activities or duties of the Architect in the Architect’s administration of the Contract, or by tests,

inspections or approvals required or performed by persons or entities other than the Contractor.

§ 3.2 Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions by Contractor § 3.2.1 Execution of the Contract by the Contractor is a representation that the Contractor has visited the site, become

generally familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be performed, and correlated personal

observations with requirements of the Contract Documents.

§ 3.2.2 Because the Contract Documents are complementary, the Contractor shall, before starting each portion of the

Work, carefully study and compare the various Contract Documents relative to that portion of the Work, as well as the

information furnished by the Owner pursuant to Section 2.3.4, shall take field measurements of any existing

conditions related to that portion of the Work, and shall observe any conditions at the site affecting it. These






User Notes: (1194618422)

14

obligations are for the purpose of facilitating coordination and construction by the Contractor and are not for the

purpose of discovering errors, omissions, or inconsistencies in the Contract Documents; however, the Contractor shall

promptly report to the Architect any errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered by or made known to the

Contractor as a request for information in such form as the Architect may require. It is recognized that the Contractor’s

review is made in the Contractor’s capacity as a contractor and not as a licensed design professional, unless otherwise

specifically provided in the Contract Documents.

§ 3.2.3 The Contractor is not required to ascertain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable laws,

statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, or lawful orders of public authorities, but the Contractor shall

promptly report to the Architect any nonconformity discovered by or made known to the Contractor as a request for

information in such form as the Architect may require.

§ 3.2.4 If the Contractor believes that additional cost or time is involved because of clarifications or instructions the

Architect issues in response to the Contractor’s notices or requests for information pursuant to Sections 3.2.2 or 3.2.3,

the Contractor shall submit Claims as provided in Article 15. If the Contractor fails to perform the obligations of

Sections 3.2.2 or 3.2.3, the Contractor shall pay such costs and damages to the Owner, subject to Section 15.1.7, as

would have been avoided if the Contractor had performed such obligations. If the Contractor performs those

obligations, the Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner or Architect for damages resulting from errors,

inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract Documents, for differences between field measurements or conditions

and the Contract Documents, or for nonconformities of the Contract Documents to applicable laws, statutes,

ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities.

§ 3.3 Supervision and Construction Procedures § 3.3.1 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, using the Contractor’s best skill and attention. The

Contractor shall be solely responsible for, and have control over, construction means, methods, techniques, sequences,

and procedures, and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract. If the Contract Documents give

specific instructions concerning construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures, the Contractor

shall evaluate the jobsite safety thereof and shall be solely responsible for the jobsite safety of such means, methods,

techniques, sequences, or procedures. If the Contractor determines that such means, methods, techniques, sequences

or procedures may not be safe, the Contractor shall give timely notice to the Owner and Architect, and shall propose

alternative means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures. The Architect shall evaluate the proposed

alternative solely for conformance with the design intent for the completed construction. Unless the Architect objects

to the Contractor’s proposed alternative, the Contractor shall perform the Work using its alternative means, methods,

techniques, sequences, or procedures.

§ 3.3.2 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for acts and omissions of the Contractor’s employees,

Subcontractors and their agents and employees, and other persons or entities performing portions of the Work for, or

on behalf of, the Contractor or any of its Subcontractors.

§ 3.3.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for inspection of portions of Work already performed to determine that

such portions are in proper condition to receive subsequent Work.

§ 3.4 Labor and Materials § 3.4.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide and pay for labor,

materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, heat, utilities, transportation, and other

facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work, whether temporary or permanent

and whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work.

§ 3.4.2 Except in the case of minor changes in the Work approved by the Architect in accordance with Section 3.12.8

or ordered by the Architect in accordance with Section 7.4, the Contractor may make substitutions only with the

consent of the Owner, after evaluation by the Architect and in accordance with a Change Order or Construction

Change Directive.

§ 3.4.3 The Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good order among the Contractor’s employees and other

persons carrying out the Work. The Contractor shall not permit employment of unfit persons or persons not properly

skilled in tasks assigned to them.






User Notes: (1194618422)

15

§ 3.5 Warranty § 3.5.1 The Contractor warrants to the Owner and Architect that materials and equipment furnished under the Contract

will be of good quality and new unless the Contract Documents require or permit otherwise. The Contractor further

warrants that the Work will conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents and will be free from defects,

except for those inherent in the quality of the Work the Contract Documents require or permit. Work, materials, or

equipment not conforming to these requirements may be considered defective. The Contractor’s warranty excludes

remedy for damage or defect caused by abuse, alterations to the Work not executed by the Contractor, improper or

insufficient maintenance, improper operation, or normal wear and tear and normal usage. If required by the Architect,

the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment.

§ 3.5.2 All material, equipment, or other special warranties required by the Contract Documents shall be issued in the

name of the Owner, or shall be transferable to the Owner, and shall commence in accordance with Section 9.8.4.

§ 3.6 Taxes The Contractor shall pay sales, consumer, use and similar taxes for the Work provided by the Contractor that are

legally enacted when bids are received or negotiations concluded, whether or not yet effective or merely scheduled to

go into effect.

§ 3.7 Permits, Fees, Notices and Compliance with Laws § 3.7.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall secure and pay for the building

permit as well as for other permits, fees, licenses, and inspections by government agencies necessary for proper

execution and completion of the Work that are customarily secured after execution of the Contract and legally required

at the time bids are received or negotiations concluded.

§ 3.7.2 The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes,

rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities applicable to performance of the Work.

§ 3.7.3 If the Contractor performs Work knowing it to be contrary to applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules

and regulations, or lawful orders of public authorities, the Contractor shall assume appropriate responsibility for such

Work and shall bear the costs attributable to correction.

§ 3.7.4 Concealed or Unknown Conditions If the Contractor encounters conditions at the site that are (1) subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions

that differ materially from those indicated in the Contract Documents or (2) unknown physical conditions of an

unusual nature that differ materially from those ordinarily found to exist and generally recognized as inherent in

construction activities of the character provided for in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall promptly provide

notice to the Owner and the Architect before conditions are disturbed and in no event later than 14 days after first

observance of the conditions. The Architect will promptly investigate such conditions and, if the Architect determines

that they differ materially and cause an increase or decrease in the Contractor’s cost of, or time required for,

performance of any part of the Work, will recommend that an equitable adjustment be made in the Contract Sum or

Contract Time, or both. If the Architect determines that the conditions at the site are not materially different from those

indicated in the Contract Documents and that no change in the terms of the Contract is justified, the Architect shall

promptly notify the Owner and Contractor, stating the reasons. If either party disputes the Architect’s determination or

recommendation, that party may submit a Claim as provided in Article 15.

§ 3.7.5 If, in the course of the Work, the Contractor encounters human remains or recognizes the existence of burial

markers, archaeological sites or wetlands not indicated in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall immediately

suspend any operations that would affect them and shall notify the Owner and Architect. Upon receipt of such notice,

the Owner shall promptly take any action necessary to obtain governmental authorization required to resume the

operations. The Contractor shall continue to suspend such operations until otherwise instructed by the Owner but shall

continue with all other operations that do not affect those remains or features. Requests for adjustments in the Contract

Sum and Contract Time arising from the existence of such remains or features may be made as provided in Article 15.

§ 3.8 Allowances § 3.8.1 The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum all allowances stated in the Contract Documents. Items

covered by allowances shall be supplied for such amounts and by such persons or entities as the Owner may direct, but

the Contractor shall not be required to employ persons or entities to whom the Contractor has reasonable objection.






User Notes: (1194618422)

16

§ 3.8.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,

.1 allowances shall cover the cost to the Contractor of materials and equipment delivered at the site and all

required taxes, less applicable trade discounts;

.2 Contractor’s costs for unloading and handling at the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit, and

other expenses contemplated for stated allowance amounts shall be included in the Contract Sum but

not in the allowances; and

.3 whenever costs are more than or less than allowances, the Contract Sum shall be adjusted accordingly

by Change Order. The amount of the Change Order shall reflect (1) the difference between actual costs

and the allowances under Section 3.8.2.1 and (2) changes in Contractor’s costs under Section 3.8.2.2.

§ 3.8.3 Materials and equipment under an allowance shall be selected by the Owner with reasonable promptness.

§ 3.9 Superintendent § 3.9.1 The Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent and necessary assistants who shall be in attendance at

the Project site during performance of the Work. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor, and

communications given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor.

§ 3.9.2 The Contractor, as soon as practicable after award of the Contract, shall notify the Owner and Architect of the

name and qualifications of a proposed superintendent. Within 14 days of receipt of the information, the Architect may

notify the Contractor, stating whether the Owner or the Architect (1) has reasonable objection to the proposed

superintendent or (2) requires additional time for review. Failure of the Architect to provide notice within the 14-day

period shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection.

§ 3.9.3 The Contractor shall not employ a proposed superintendent to whom the Owner or Architect has made

reasonable and timely objection. The Contractor shall not change the superintendent without the Owner’s consent,

which shall not unreasonably be withheld or delayed.

§ 3.10 Contractor’s Construction and Submittal Schedules § 3.10.1 The Contractor, promptly after being awarded the Contract, shall submit for the Owner’s and Architect’s

information a Contractor’s construction schedule for the Work. The schedule shall contain detail appropriate for the

Project, including (1) the date of commencement of the Work, interim schedule milestone dates, and the date of

Substantial Completion; (2) an apportionment of the Work by construction activity; and (3) the time required for

completion of each portion of the Work. The schedule shall provide for the orderly progression of the Work to

completion and shall not exceed time limits current under the Contract Documents. The schedule shall be revised at

appropriate intervals as required by the conditions of the Work and Project.

§ 3.10.2 The Contractor, promptly after being awarded the Contract and thereafter as necessary to maintain a current

submittal schedule, shall submit a submittal schedule for the Architect’s approval. The Architect’s approval shall not

be unreasonably delayed or withheld. The submittal schedule shall (1) be coordinated with the Contractor’s

construction schedule, and (2) allow the Architect reasonable time to review submittals. If the Contractor fails to

submit a submittal schedule, or fails to provide submittals in accordance with the approved submittal schedule, the

Contractor shall not be entitled to any increase in Contract Sum or extension of Contract Time based on the time

required for review of submittals.

§ 3.10.3 The Contractor shall perform the Work in general accordance with the most recent schedules submitted to the

Owner and Architect.

§ 3.11 Documents and Samples at the Site The Contractor shall make available, at the Project site, the Contract Documents, including Change Orders,

Construction Change Directives, and other Modifications, in good order and marked currently to indicate field

changes and selections made during construction, and the approved Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and

similar required submittals. These shall be in electronic form or paper copy, available to the Architect and Owner, and

delivered to the Architect for submittal to the Owner upon completion of the Work as a record of the Work as

constructed.






User Notes: (1194618422)

17

§ 3.12 Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples § 3.12.1 Shop Drawings are drawings, diagrams, schedules, and other data specially prepared for the Work by the

Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier, or distributor to illustrate some portion of

the Work.

§ 3.12.2 Product Data are illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams, and

other information furnished by the Contractor to illustrate materials or equipment for some portion of the Work.

§ 3.12.3 Samples are physical examples that illustrate materials, equipment, or workmanship, and establish standards

by which the Work will be judged.

§ 3.12.4 Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and similar submittals are not Contract Documents. Their purpose is

to demonstrate how the Contractor proposes to conform to the information given and the design concept expressed in

the Contract Documents for those portions of the Work for which the Contract Documents require submittals. Review

by the Architect is subject to the limitations of Section 4.2.7. Informational submittals upon which the Architect is not

expected to take responsive action may be so identified in the Contract Documents. Submittals that are not required by

the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without action.

§ 3.12.5 The Contractor shall review for compliance with the Contract Documents, approve, and submit to the

Architect, Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and similar submittals required by the Contract Documents, in

accordance with the submittal schedule approved by the Architect or, in the absence of an approved submittal

schedule, with reasonable promptness and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of the

Owner or of Separate Contractors.

§ 3.12.6 By submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and similar submittals, the Contractor represents to

the Owner and Architect that the Contractor has (1) reviewed and approved them, (2) determined and verified

materials, field measurements and field construction criteria related thereto, or will do so, and (3) checked and

coordinated the information contained within such submittals with the requirements of the Work and of the Contract

Documents.

§ 3.12.7 The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work for which the Contract Documents require submittal and

review of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, or similar submittals, until the respective submittal has been

approved by the Architect.

§ 3.12.8 The Work shall be in accordance with approved submittals except that the Contractor shall not be relieved of

responsibility for deviations from the requirements of the Contract Documents by the Architect’s approval of Shop

Drawings, Product Data, Samples, or similar submittals, unless the Contractor has specifically notified the Architect

of such deviation at the time of submittal and (1) the Architect has given written approval to the specific deviation as a

minor change in the Work, or (2) a Change Order or Construction Change Directive has been issued authorizing the

deviation. The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in Shop Drawings, Product

Data, Samples, or similar submittals, by the Architect’s approval thereof.

§ 3.12.9 The Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing or on resubmitted Shop Drawings, Product Data,

Samples, or similar submittals, to revisions other than those requested by the Architect on previous submittals. In the

absence of such notice, the Architect’s approval of a resubmission shall not apply to such revisions.

§ 3.12.10 The Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services that constitute the practice of

architecture or engineering unless such services are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of

the Work or unless the Contractor needs to provide such services in order to carry out the Contractor’s responsibilities

for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures. The Contractor shall not be required to

provide professional services in violation of applicable law.

§ 3.12.10.1 If professional design services or certifications by a design professional related to systems, materials, or

equipment are specifically required of the Contractor by the Contract Documents, the Owner and the Architect will

specify all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. The Contractor shall be entitled to rely upon

the adequacy and accuracy of the performance and design criteria provided in the Contract Documents. The

Contractor shall cause such services or certifications to be provided by an appropriately licensed design professional,

whose signature and seal shall appear on all drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, Shop Drawings, and






User Notes: (1194618422)

18

other submittals prepared by such professional. Shop Drawings, and other submittals related to the Work, designed or

certified by such professional, if prepared by others, shall bear such professional’s written approval when submitted to

the Architect. The Owner and the Architect shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy and accuracy of the services,

certifications, and approvals performed or provided by such design professionals, provided the Owner and Architect

have specified to the Contractor the performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. Pursuant to this

Section 3.12.10, the Architect will review and approve or take other appropriate action on submittals only for the

limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract

Documents.

§ 3.12.10.2 If the Contract Documents require the Contractor’s design professional to certify that the Work has been

performed in accordance with the design criteria, the Contractor shall furnish such certifications to the Architect at the

time and in the form specified by the Architect.

§ 3.13 Use of Site The Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes,

rules and regulations, lawful orders of public authorities, and the Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably

encumber the site with materials or equipment.

§ 3.14 Cutting and Patching § 3.14.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for cutting, fitting, or patching required to complete the Work or to make

its parts fit together properly. All areas requiring cutting, fitting, or patching shall be restored to the condition existing

prior to the cutting, fitting, or patching, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents.

§ 3.14.2 The Contractor shall not damage or endanger a portion of the Work or fully or partially completed

construction of the Owner or Separate Contractors by cutting, patching, or otherwise altering such construction, or by

excavation. The Contractor shall not cut or otherwise alter construction by the Owner or a Separate Contractor except

with written consent of the Owner and of the Separate Contractor. Consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. The

Contractor shall not unreasonably withhold, from the Owner or a Separate Contractor, its consent to cutting or

otherwise altering the Work.

§ 3.15 Cleaning Up § 3.15.1 The Contractor shall keep the premises and surrounding area free from accumulation of waste materials and

rubbish caused by operations under the Contract. At completion of the Work, the Contractor shall remove waste

materials, rubbish, the Contractor’s tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus materials from and about

the Project.

§ 3.15.2 If the Contractor fails to clean up as provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner may do so and the Owner

shall be entitled to reimbursement from the Contractor.

§ 3.16 Access to Work The Contractor shall provide the Owner and Architect with access to the Work in preparation and progress wherever

located.

§ 3.17 Royalties, Patents and Copyrights The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. The Contractor shall defend suits or claims for infringement of

copyrights and patent rights and shall hold the Owner and Architect harmless from loss on account thereof, but shall

not be responsible for defense or loss when a particular design, process, or product of a particular manufacturer or

manufacturers is required by the Contract Documents, or where the copyright violations are contained in Drawings,

Specifications, or other documents prepared by the Owner or Architect. However, if an infringement of a copyright or

patent is discovered by, or made known to, the Contractor, the Contractor shall be responsible for the loss unless the

information is promptly furnished to the Architect.

§ 3.18 Indemnification § 3.18.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner,

Architect, Architect’s consultants, and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages, losses,

and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys’ fees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work,

provided that such claim, damage, loss, or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to

injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), but only to the extent caused by the negligent






User Notes: (1194618422)

19

acts or omissions of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them, or anyone for

whose acts they may be liable, regardless of whether or not such claim, damage, loss, or expense is caused in part by a

party indemnified hereunder. Such obligation shall not be construed to negate, abridge, or reduce other rights or

obligations of indemnity that would otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this Section 3.18.

§ 3.18.2 In claims against any person or entity indemnified under this Section 3.18 by an employee of the Contractor,

a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them, or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, the

indemnification obligation under Section 3.18.1 shall not be limited by a limitation on amount or type of damages,

compensation, or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or a Subcontractor under workers’ compensation acts,

disability benefit acts, or other employee benefit acts.

ARTICLE 4 ARCHITECT § 4.1 General § 4.1.1 The Architect is the person or entity retained by the Owner pursuant to Section 2.3.2 and identified as such in

the Agreement.

§ 4.1.2 Duties, responsibilities, and limitations of authority of the Architect as set forth in the Contract Documents

shall not be restricted, modified, or extended without written consent of the Owner, Contractor, and Architect. Consent

shall not be unreasonably withheld.

§ 4.2 Administration of the Contract § 4.2.1 The Architect will provide administration of the Contract as described in the Contract Documents and will be

an Owner’s representative during construction until the date the Architect issues the final Certificate for Payment. The

Architect will have authority to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract Documents.

§ 4.2.2 The Architect will visit the site at intervals appropriate to the stage of construction, or as otherwise agreed with

the Owner, to become generally familiar with the progress and quality of the portion of the Work completed, and to

determine in general if the Work observed is being performed in a manner indicating that the Work, when fully

completed, will be in accordance with the Contract Documents. However, the Architect will not be required to make

exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work. The Architect will not have

control over, charge of, or responsibility for the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or

for the safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work, since these are solely the Contractor’s rights and

responsibilities under the Contract Documents.

§ 4.2.3 On the basis of the site visits, the Architect will keep the Owner reasonably informed about the progress and

quality of the portion of the Work completed, and promptly report to the Owner (1) known deviations from the

Contract Documents, (2) known deviations from the most recent construction schedule submitted by the Contractor,

and (3) defects and deficiencies observed in the Work. The Architect will not be responsible for the Contractor’s

failure to perform the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Architect will not

have control over or charge of, and will not be responsible for acts or omissions of, the Contractor, Subcontractors, or

their agents or employees, or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work.

§ 4.2.4 Communications The Owner and Contractor shall include the Architect in all communications that relate to or affect the Architect’s

services or professional responsibilities. The Owner shall promptly notify the Architect of the substance of any direct

communications between the Owner and the Contractor otherwise relating to the Project. Communications by and

with the Architect’s consultants shall be through the Architect. Communications by and with Subcontractors and

suppliers shall be through the Contractor. Communications by and with Separate Contractors shall be through the

Owner. The Contract Documents may specify other communication protocols.

§ 4.2.5 Based on the Architect’s evaluations of the Contractor’s Applications for Payment, the Architect will review

and certify the amounts due the Contractor and will issue Certificates for Payment in such amounts.

§ 4.2.6 The Architect has authority to reject Work that does not conform to the Contract Documents. Whenever the

Architect considers it necessary or advisable, the Architect will have authority to require inspection or testing of the

Work in accordance with Sections 13.4.2 and 13.4.3, whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed or completed.

However, neither this authority of the Architect nor a decision made in good faith either to exercise or not to exercise






User Notes: (1194618422)

20

such authority shall give rise to a duty or responsibility of the Architect to the Contractor, Subcontractors, suppliers,

their agents or employees, or other persons or entities performing portions of the Work.

§ 4.2.7 The Architect will review and approve, or take other appropriate action upon, the Contractor’s submittals such

as Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples, but only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with

information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. The Architect’s action will be taken

in accordance with the submittal schedule approved by the Architect or, in the absence of an approved submittal

schedule, with reasonable promptness while allowing sufficient time in the Architect’s professional judgment to

permit adequate review. Review of such submittals is not conducted for the purpose of determining the accuracy and

completeness of other details such as dimensions and quantities, or for substantiating instructions for installation or

performance of equipment or systems, all of which remain the responsibility of the Contractor as required by the

Contract Documents. The Architect’s review of the Contractor’s submittals shall not relieve the Contractor of the

obligations under Sections 3.3, 3.5, and 3.12. The Architect’s review shall not constitute approval of safety

precautions or of any construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures. The Architect’s approval of

a specific item shall not indicate approval of an assembly of which the item is a component.

§ 4.2.8 The Architect will prepare Change Orders and Construction Change Directives, and may order minor changes

in the Work as provided in Section 7.4. The Architect will investigate and make determinations and recommendations

regarding concealed and unknown conditions as provided in Section 3.7.4.

§ 4.2.9 The Architect will conduct inspections to determine the date or dates of Substantial Completion and the date of

final completion; issue Certificates of Substantial Completion pursuant to Section 9.8; receive and forward to the

Owner, for the Owner’s review and records, written warranties and related documents required by the Contract and

assembled by the Contractor pursuant to Section 9.10; and issue a final Certificate for Payment pursuant to

Section 9.10.

§ 4.2.10 If the Owner and Architect agree, the Architect will provide one or more Project representatives to assist in

carrying out the Architect’s responsibilities at the site. The Owner shall notify the Contractor of any change in the

duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Project representatives.

§ 4.2.11 The Architect will interpret and decide matters concerning performance under, and requirements of, the

Contract Documents on written request of either the Owner or Contractor. The Architect’s response to such requests

will be made in writing within any time limits agreed upon or otherwise with reasonable promptness.

§ 4.2.12 Interpretations and decisions of the Architect will be consistent with the intent of, and reasonably inferable

from, the Contract Documents and will be in writing or in the form of drawings. When making such interpretations and

decisions, the Architect will endeavor to secure faithful performance by both Owner and Contractor, will not show

partiality to either, and will not be liable for results of interpretations or decisions rendered in good faith.

§ 4.2.13 The Architect’s decisions on matters relating to aesthetic effect will be final if consistent with the intent

expressed in the Contract Documents.

§ 4.2.14 The Architect will review and respond to requests for information about the Contract Documents. The

Architect’s response to such requests will be made in writing within any time limits agreed upon or otherwise with

reasonable promptness. If appropriate, the Architect will prepare and issue supplemental Drawings and Specifications

in response to the requests for information.

ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS § 5.1 Definitions § 5.1.1 A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct contract with the Contractor to perform a portion of the

Work at the site. The term “Subcontractor” is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number

and means a Subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Subcontractor. The term “Subcontractor” does not

include a Separate Contractor or the subcontractors of a Separate Contractor.

§ 5.1.2 A Sub-subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct or indirect contract with a Subcontractor to perform

a portion of the Work at the site. The term “Sub-subcontractor” is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if

singular in number and means a Sub-subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Sub-subcontractor.






User Notes: (1194618422)

21

§ 5.2 Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for Portions of the Work § 5.2.1 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, the Contractor, as soon as practicable after award of the

Contract, shall notify the Owner and Architect of the persons or entities proposed for each principal portion of the

Work, including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design. Within 14 days of

receipt of the information, the Architect may notify the Contractor whether the Owner or the Architect (1) has

reasonable objection to any such proposed person or entity or (2) requires additional time for review. Failure of the

Architect to provide notice within the 14-day period shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection.

§ 5.2.2 The Contractor shall not contract with a proposed person or entity to whom the Owner or Architect has made

reasonable and timely objection. The Contractor shall not be required to contract with anyone to whom the Contractor

has made reasonable objection.

§ 5.2.3 If the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the Contractor, the

Contractor shall propose another to whom the Owner or Architect has no reasonable objection. If the proposed but

rejected Subcontractor was reasonably capable of performing the Work, the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be

increased or decreased by the difference, if any, occasioned by such change, and an appropriate Change Order shall be

issued before commencement of the substitute Subcontractor’s Work. However, no increase in the Contract Sum or

Contract Time shall be allowed for such change unless the Contractor has acted promptly and responsively in

submitting names as required.

§ 5.2.4 The Contractor shall not substitute a Subcontractor, person, or entity for one previously selected if the Owner

or Architect makes reasonable objection to such substitution.

§ 5.3 Subcontractual Relations By appropriate written agreement, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor, to the extent of the Work to be

performed by the Subcontractor, to be bound to the Contractor by terms of the Contract Documents, and to assume

toward the Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities, including the responsibility for safety of the

Subcontractor’s Work that the Contractor, by these Contract Documents, assumes toward the Owner and Architect.

Each subcontract agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of the Owner and Architect under the Contract

Documents with respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor so that subcontracting thereof will not

prejudice such rights, and shall allow to the Subcontractor, unless specifically provided otherwise in the subcontract

agreement, the benefit of all rights, remedies, and redress against the Contractor that the Contractor, by the Contract

Documents, has against the Owner. Where appropriate, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into

similar agreements with Sub-subcontractors. The Contractor shall make available to each proposed Subcontractor,

prior to the execution of the subcontract agreement, copies of the Contract Documents to which the Subcontractor will

be bound, and, upon written request of the Subcontractor, identify to the Subcontractor terms and conditions of the

proposed subcontract agreement that may be at variance with the Contract Documents. Subcontractors will similarly

make copies of applicable portions of such documents available to their respective proposed Sub-subcontractors.

§ 5.4 Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts § 5.4.1 Each subcontract agreement for a portion of the Work is assigned by the Contractor to the Owner, provided that

.1 assignment is effective only after termination of the Contract by the Owner for cause pursuant to

Section 14.2 and only for those subcontract agreements that the Owner accepts by notifying the

Subcontractor and Contractor; and

.2 assignment is subject to the prior rights of the surety, if any, obligated under bond relating to the

Contract.

When the Owner accepts the assignment of a subcontract agreement, the Owner assumes the Contractor’s rights and

obligations under the subcontract.

§ 5.4.2 Upon such assignment, if the Work has been suspended for more than 30 days, the Subcontractor’s

compensation shall be equitably adjusted for increases in cost resulting from the suspension.

§ 5.4.3 Upon assignment to the Owner under this Section 5.4, the Owner may further assign the subcontract to a

successor contractor or other entity. If the Owner assigns the subcontract to a successor contractor or other entity, the

Owner shall nevertheless remain legally responsible for all of the successor contractor’s obligations under the

subcontract.






User Notes: (1194618422)

22

ARTICLE 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS § 6.1 Owner’s Right to Perform Construction and to Award Separate Contracts § 6.1.1 The term “Separate Contractor(s)” shall mean other contractors retained by the Owner under separate

agreements. The Owner reserves the right to perform construction or operations related to the Project with the

Owner’s own forces, and with Separate Contractors retained under Conditions of the Contract substantially similar to

those of this Contract, including those provisions of the Conditions of the Contract related to insurance and waiver of

subrogation.

§ 6.1.2 When separate contracts are awarded for different portions of the Project or other construction or operations on

the site, the term “Contractor” in the Contract Documents in each case shall mean the Contractor who executes each

separate Owner-Contractor Agreement.

§ 6.1.3 The Owner shall provide for coordination of the activities of the Owner’s own forces and of each Separate

Contractor with the Work of the Contractor, who shall cooperate with them. The Contractor shall participate with any

Separate Contractors and the Owner in reviewing their construction schedules. The Contractor shall make any

revisions to its construction schedule deemed necessary after a joint review and mutual agreement. The construction

schedules shall then constitute the schedules to be used by the Contractor, Separate Contractors, and the Owner until

subsequently revised.

§ 6.1.4 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, when the Owner performs construction or operations

related to the Project with the Owner’s own forces or with Separate Contractors, the Owner or its Separate Contractors

shall have the same obligations and rights that the Contractor has under the Conditions of the Contract, including,

without excluding others, those stated in Article 3, this Article 6, and Articles 10, 11, and 12.

§ 6.2 Mutual Responsibility § 6.2.1 The Contractor shall afford the Owner and Separate Contractors reasonable opportunity for introduction and

storage of their materials and equipment and performance of their activities, and shall connect and coordinate the

Contractor’s construction and operations with theirs as required by the Contract Documents.

§ 6.2.2 If part of the Contractor’s Work depends for proper execution or results upon construction or operations by the

Owner or a Separate Contractor, the Contractor shall, prior to proceeding with that portion of the Work, promptly

notify the Architect of apparent discrepancies or defects in the construction or operations by the Owner or Separate

Contractor that would render it unsuitable for proper execution and results of the Contractor’s Work. Failure of the

Contractor to notify the Architect of apparent discrepancies or defects prior to proceeding with the Work shall

constitute an acknowledgment that the Owner’s or Separate Contractor’s completed or partially completed

construction is fit and proper to receive the Contractor’s Work. The Contractor shall not be responsible for

discrepancies or defects in the construction or operations by the Owner or Separate Contractor that are not apparent.

§ 6.2.3 The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for costs the Owner incurs that are payable to a Separate Contractor

because of the Contractor’s delays, improperly timed activities or defective construction. The Owner shall be

responsible to the Contractor for costs the Contractor incurs because of a Separate Contractor’s delays, improperly

timed activities, damage to the Work or defective construction.

§ 6.2.4 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage that the Contractor wrongfully causes to completed or partially

completed construction or to property of the Owner or Separate Contractor as provided in Section 10.2.5.

§ 6.2.5 The Owner and each Separate Contractor shall have the same responsibilities for cutting and patching as are

described for the Contractor in Section 3.14.

§ 6.3 Owner’s Right to Clean Up If a dispute arises among the Contractor, Separate Contractors, and the Owner as to the responsibility under their

respective contracts for maintaining the premises and surrounding area free from waste materials and rubbish, the

Owner may clean up and the Architect will allocate the cost among those responsible.






User Notes: (1194618422)

23

ARTICLE 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK § 7.1 General § 7.1.1 Changes in the Work may be accomplished after execution of the Contract, and without invalidating the

Contract, by Change Order, Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work, subject to the

limitations stated in this Article 7 and elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

§ 7.1.2 A Change Order shall be based upon agreement among the Owner, Contractor, and Architect. A Construction

Change Directive requires agreement by the Owner and Architect and may or may not be agreed to by the Contractor.

An order for a minor change in the Work may be issued by the Architect alone.

§ 7.1.3 Changes in the Work shall be performed under applicable provisions of the Contract Documents. The

Contractor shall proceed promptly with changes in the Work, unless otherwise provided in the Change Order,

Construction Change Directive, or order for a minor change in the Work.

§ 7.2 Change Orders § 7.2.1 A Change Order is a written instrument prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner, Contractor, and

Architect stating their agreement upon all of the following:

.1 The change in the Work;

.2 The amount of the adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum; and

.3 The extent of the adjustment, if any, in the Contract Time.

§ 7.3 Construction Change Directives § 7.3.1 A Construction Change Directive is a written order prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner and

Architect, directing a change in the Work prior to agreement on adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum or Contract

Time, or both. The Owner may by Construction Change Directive, without invalidating the Contract, order changes in

the Work within the general scope of the Contract consisting of additions, deletions, or other revisions, the Contract

Sum and Contract Time being adjusted accordingly.

§ 7.3.2 A Construction Change Directive shall be used in the absence of total agreement on the terms of a Change

Order.

§ 7.3.3 If the Construction Change Directive provides for an adjustment to the Contract Sum, the adjustment shall be

based on one of the following methods:

.1 Mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient substantiating data to

permit evaluation;

.2 Unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon;

.3 Cost to be determined in a manner agreed upon by the parties and a mutually acceptable fixed or

percentage fee; or

.4 As provided in Section 7.3.4.

§ 7.3.4 If the Contractor does not respond promptly or disagrees with the method for adjustment in the Contract Sum,

the Architect shall determine the adjustment on the basis of reasonable expenditures and savings of those performing

the Work attributable to the change, including, in case of an increase in the Contract Sum, an amount for overhead and

profit as set forth in the Agreement, or if no such amount is set forth in the Agreement, a reasonable amount. In such

case, and also under Section 7.3.3.3, the Contractor shall keep and present, in such form as the Architect may

prescribe, an itemized accounting together with appropriate supporting data. Unless otherwise provided in the

Contract Documents, costs for the purposes of this Section 7.3.4 shall be limited to the following:

.1 Costs of labor, including applicable payroll taxes, fringe benefits required by agreement or custom,

workers’ compensation insurance, and other employee costs approved by the Architect;

.2 Costs of materials, supplies, and equipment, including cost of transportation, whether incorporated or

consumed;

.3 Rental costs of machinery and equipment, exclusive of hand tools, whether rented from the Contractor

or others;

.4 Costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance, permit fees, and sales, use, or similar taxes, directly

related to the change; and

.5 Costs of supervision and field office personnel directly attributable to the change.






User Notes: (1194618422)

24

§ 7.3.5 If the Contractor disagrees with the adjustment in the Contract Time, the Contractor may make a Claim in

accordance with applicable provisions of Article 15.

§ 7.3.6 Upon receipt of a Construction Change Directive, the Contractor shall promptly proceed with the change in the

Work involved and advise the Architect of the Contractor’s agreement or disagreement with the method, if any,

provided in the Construction Change Directive for determining the proposed adjustment in the Contract Sum or

Contract Time.

§ 7.3.7 A Construction Change Directive signed by the Contractor indicates the Contractor’s agreement therewith,

including adjustment in Contract Sum and Contract Time or the method for determining them. Such agreement shall

be effective immediately and shall be recorded as a Change Order.

§ 7.3.8 The amount of credit to be allowed by the Contractor to the Owner for a deletion or change that results in a net

decrease in the Contract Sum shall be actual net cost as confirmed by the Architect. When both additions and credits

covering related Work or substitutions are involved in a change, the allowance for overhead and profit shall be figured

on the basis of net increase, if any, with respect to that change.

§ 7.3.9 Pending final determination of the total cost of a Construction Change Directive to the Owner, the Contractor

may request payment for Work completed under the Construction Change Directive in Applications for Payment. The

Architect will make an interim determination for purposes of monthly certification for payment for those costs and

certify for payment the amount that the Architect determines, in the Architect’s professional judgment, to be

reasonably justified. The Architect’s interim determination of cost shall adjust the Contract Sum on the same basis as

a Change Order, subject to the right of either party to disagree and assert a Claim in accordance with Article 15.

§ 7.3.10 When the Owner and Contractor agree with a determination made by the Architect concerning the

adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time, or otherwise reach agreement upon the adjustments, such

agreement shall be effective immediately and the Architect will prepare a Change Order. Change Orders may be

issued for all or any part of a Construction Change Directive.

§ 7.4 Minor Changes in the Work The Architect may order minor changes in the Work that are consistent with the intent of the Contract Documents and

do not involve an adjustment in the Contract Sum or an extension of the Contract Time. The Architect’s order for

minor changes shall be in writing. If the Contractor believes that the proposed minor change in the Work will affect the

Contract Sum or Contract Time, the Contractor shall notify the Architect and shall not proceed to implement the

change in the Work. If the Contractor performs the Work set forth in the Architect’s order for a minor change without

prior notice to the Architect that such change will affect the Contract Sum or Contract Time, the Contractor waives any

adjustment to the Contract Sum or extension of the Contract Time.

ARTICLE 8 TIME § 8.1 Definitions § 8.1.1 Unless otherwise provided, Contract Time is the period of time, including authorized adjustments, allotted in

the Contract Documents for Substantial Completion of the Work.

§ 8.1.2 The date of commencement of the Work is the date established in the Agreement.

§ 8.1.3 The date of Substantial Completion is the date certified by the Architect in accordance with Section 9.8.

§ 8.1.4 The term “day” as used in the Contract Documents shall mean calendar day unless otherwise specifically

defined.

§ 8.2 Progress and Completion § 8.2.1 Time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. By executing the Agreement,

the Contractor confirms that the Contract Time is a reasonable period for performing the Work.

§ 8.2.2 The Contractor shall not knowingly, except by agreement or instruction of the Owner in writing, commence the

Work prior to the effective date of insurance required to be furnished by the Contractor and Owner.






User Notes: (1194618422)

25

§ 8.2.3 The Contractor shall proceed expeditiously with adequate forces and shall achieve Substantial Completion

within the Contract Time.

§ 8.3 Delays and Extensions of Time § 8.3.1 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the commencement or progress of the Work by (1) an act or neglect

of the Owner or Architect, of an employee of either, or of a Separate Contractor; (2) by changes ordered in the Work;

(3) by labor disputes, fire, unusual delay in deliveries, unavoidable casualties, adverse weather conditions documented

in accordance with Section 15.1.6.2, or other causes beyond the Contractor’s control; (4) by delay authorized by the

Owner pending mediation and binding dispute resolution; or (5) by other causes that the Contractor asserts, and the

Architect determines, justify delay, then the Contract Time shall be extended for such reasonable time as the Architect

may determine.

§ 8.3.2 Claims relating to time shall be made in accordance with applicable provisions of Article 15.

§ 8.3.3 This Section 8.3 does not preclude recovery of damages for delay by either party under other provisions of the

Contract Documents.

ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION § 9.1 Contract Sum § 9.1.1 The Contract Sum is stated in the Agreement and, including authorized adjustments, is the total amount

payable by the Owner to the Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract Documents.

§ 9.1.2 If unit prices are stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon, and if quantities originally

contemplated are materially changed so that application of such unit prices to the actual quantities causes substantial

inequity to the Owner or Contractor, the applicable unit prices shall be equitably adjusted.

§ 9.2 Schedule of Values Where the Contract is based on a stipulated sum or Guaranteed Maximum Price, the Contractor shall submit a

schedule of values to the Architect before the first Application for Payment, allocating the entire Contract Sum to the

various portions of the Work. The schedule of values shall be prepared in the form, and supported by the data to

substantiate its accuracy, required by the Architect. This schedule, unless objected to by the Architect, shall be used as

a basis for reviewing the Contractor’s Applications for Payment. Any changes to the schedule of values shall be

submitted to the Architect and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Architect may require, and

unless objected to by the Architect, shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor’s subsequent Applications for

Payment.

§ 9.3 Applications for Payment § 9.3.1 At least ten days before the date established for each progress payment, the Contractor shall submit to the

Architect an itemized Application for Payment prepared in accordance with the schedule of values, if required under

Section 9.2, for completed portions of the Work. The application shall be notarized, if required, and supported by all

data substantiating the Contractor’s right to payment that the Owner or Architect require, such as copies of

requisitions, and releases and waivers of liens from Subcontractors and suppliers, and shall reflect retainage if

provided for in the Contract Documents.

§ 9.3.1.1 As provided in Section 7.3.9, such applications may include requests for payment on account of changes in

the Work that have been properly authorized by Construction Change Directives, or by interim determinations of the

Architect, but not yet included in Change Orders.

§ 9.3.1.2 Applications for Payment shall not include requests for payment for portions of the Work for which the

Contractor does not intend to pay a Subcontractor or supplier, unless such Work has been performed by others whom

the Contractor intends to pay.

§ 9.3.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, payments shall be made on account of materials and

equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the Work. If approved in advance

by the Owner, payment may similarly be made for materials and equipment suitably stored off the site at a location

agreed upon in writing. Payment for materials and equipment stored on or off the site shall be conditioned upon

compliance by the Contractor with procedures satisfactory to the Owner to establish the Owner’s title to such materials






User Notes: (1194618422)

26

and equipment or otherwise protect the Owner’s interest, and shall include the costs of applicable insurance, storage,

and transportation to the site, for such materials and equipment stored off the site.

§ 9.3.3 The Contractor warrants that title to all Work covered by an Application for Payment will pass to the Owner no

later than the time of payment. The Contractor further warrants that upon submittal of an Application for Payment all

Work for which Certificates for Payment have been previously issued and payments received from the Owner shall, to

the best of the Contractor’s knowledge, information, and belief, be free and clear of liens, claims, security interests, or

encumbrances, in favor of the Contractor, Subcontractors, suppliers, or other persons or entities that provided labor,

materials, and equipment relating to the Work.

§ 9.4 Certificates for Payment § 9.4.1 The Architect will, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor’s Application for Payment, either (1) issue

to the Owner a Certificate for Payment in the full amount of the Application for Payment, with a copy to the

Contractor; or (2) issue to the Owner a Certificate for Payment for such amount as the Architect determines is properly

due, and notify the Contractor and Owner of the Architect’s reasons for withholding certification in part as provided in

Section 9.5.1; or (3) withhold certification of the entire Application for Payment, and notify the Contractor and Owner

of the Architect’s reason for withholding certification in whole as provided in Section 9.5.1.

§ 9.4.2 The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will constitute a representation by the Architect to the Owner, based

on the Architect’s evaluation of the Work and the data in the Application for Payment, that, to the best of the

Architect’s knowledge, information, and belief, the Work has progressed to the point indicated, the quality of the

Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents, and that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount

certified. The foregoing representations are subject to an evaluation of the Work for conformance with the Contract

Documents upon Substantial Completion, to results of subsequent tests and inspections, to correction of minor

deviations from the Contract Documents prior to completion, and to specific qualifications expressed by the Architect.

However, the issuance of a Certificate for Payment will not be a representation that the Architect has (1) made

exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work; (2) reviewed construction

means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures; (3) reviewed copies of requisitions received from

Subcontractors and suppliers and other data requested by the Owner to substantiate the Contractor’s right to payment;

or (4) made examination to ascertain how or for what purpose the Contractor has used money previously paid on

account of the Contract Sum.

§ 9.5 Decisions to Withhold Certification § 9.5.1 The Architect may withhold a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part, to the extent reasonably necessary to

protect the Owner, if in the Architect’s opinion the representations to the Owner required by Section 9.4.2 cannot be

made. If the Architect is unable to certify payment in the amount of the Application, the Architect will notify the

Contractor and Owner as provided in Section 9.4.1. If the Contractor and Architect cannot agree on a revised amount,

the Architect will promptly issue a Certificate for Payment for the amount for which the Architect is able to make such

representations to the Owner. The Architect may also withhold a Certificate for Payment or, because of subsequently

discovered evidence, may nullify the whole or a part of a Certificate for Payment previously issued, to such extent as

may be necessary in the Architect’s opinion to protect the Owner from loss for which the Contractor is responsible,

including loss resulting from acts and omissions described in Section 3.3.2, because of

.1 defective Work not remedied;

.2 third party claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of such claims, unless security

acceptable to the Owner is provided by the Contractor;

.3 failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors or suppliers for labor, materials

or equipment;

.4 reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum;

.5 damage to the Owner or a Separate Contractor;

.6 reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time, and that the unpaid

balance would not be adequate to cover actual or liquidated damages for the anticipated delay; or

.7 repeated failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

§ 9.5.2 When either party disputes the Architect’s decision regarding a Certificate for Payment under Section 9.5.1, in

whole or in part, that party may submit a Claim in accordance with Article 15.

§ 9.5.3 When the reasons for withholding certification are removed, certification will be made for amounts previously

withheld.






User Notes: (1194618422)

27

§ 9.5.4 If the Architect withholds certification for payment under Section 9.5.1.3, the Owner may, at its sole option,

issue joint checks to the Contractor and to any Subcontractor or supplier to whom the Contractor failed to make

payment for Work properly performed or material or equipment suitably delivered. If the Owner makes payments by

joint check, the Owner shall notify the Architect and the Contractor shall reflect such payment on its next Application

for Payment.

§ 9.6 Progress Payments § 9.6.1 After the Architect has issued a Certificate for Payment, the Owner shall make payment in the manner and

within the time provided in the Contract Documents, and shall so notify the Architect.

§ 9.6.2 The Contractor shall pay each Subcontractor, no later than seven days after receipt of payment from the Owner,

the amount to which the Subcontractor is entitled, reflecting percentages actually retained from payments to the

Contractor on account of the Subcontractor’s portion of the Work. The Contractor shall, by appropriate agreement

with each Subcontractor, require each Subcontractor to make payments to Sub-subcontractors in a similar manner.

§ 9.6.3 The Architect will, on request, furnish to a Subcontractor, if practicable, information regarding percentages of

completion or amounts applied for by the Contractor and action taken thereon by the Architect and Owner on account

of portions of the Work done by such Subcontractor.

§ 9.6.4 The Owner has the right to request written evidence from the Contractor that the Contractor has properly paid

Subcontractors and suppliers amounts paid by the Owner to the Contractor for subcontracted Work. If the Contractor

fails to furnish such evidence within seven days, the Owner shall have the right to contact Subcontractors and suppliers

to ascertain whether they have been properly paid. Neither the Owner nor Architect shall have an obligation to pay, or

to see to the payment of money to, a Subcontractor or supplier, except as may otherwise be required by law.

§ 9.6.5 The Contractor’s payments to suppliers shall be treated in a manner similar to that provided in Sections 9.6.2,

9.6.3 and 9.6.4.

§ 9.6.6 A Certificate for Payment, a progress payment, or partial or entire use or occupancy of the Project by the

Owner shall not constitute acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents.

§ 9.6.7 Unless the Contractor provides the Owner with a payment bond in the full penal sum of the Contract Sum,

payments received by the Contractor for Work properly performed by Subcontractors or provided by suppliers shall be

held by the Contractor for those Subcontractors or suppliers who performed Work or furnished materials, or both,

under contract with the Contractor for which payment was made by the Owner. Nothing contained herein shall require

money to be placed in a separate account and not commingled with money of the Contractor, create any fiduciary

liability or tort liability on the part of the Contractor for breach of trust, or entitle any person or entity to an award of

punitive damages against the Contractor for breach of the requirements of this provision.

§ 9.6.8 Provided the Owner has fulfilled its payment obligations under the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall

defend and indemnify the Owner from all loss, liability, damage or expense, including reasonable attorney’s fees and

litigation expenses, arising out of any lien claim or other claim for payment by any Subcontractor or supplier of any

tier. Upon receipt of notice of a lien claim or other claim for payment, the Owner shall notify the Contractor. If

approved by the applicable court, when required, the Contractor may substitute a surety bond for the property against

which the lien or other claim for payment has been asserted.

§ 9.7 Failure of Payment If the Architect does not issue a Certificate for Payment, through no fault of the Contractor, within seven days after

receipt of the Contractor’s Application for Payment, or if the Owner does not pay the Contractor within seven days

after the date established in the Contract Documents, the amount certified by the Architect or awarded by binding

dispute resolution, then the Contractor may, upon seven additional days’ notice to the Owner and Architect, stop the

Work until payment of the amount owing has been received. The Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and

the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Contractor’s reasonable costs of shutdown, delay and

start-up, plus interest as provided for in the Contract Documents.






User Notes: (1194618422)

28

§ 9.8 Substantial Completion § 9.8.1 Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work when the Work or designated portion thereof is

sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work for

its intended use.

§ 9.8.2 When the Contractor considers that the Work, or a portion thereof which the Owner agrees to accept

separately, is substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architect a comprehensive list of

items to be completed or corrected prior to final payment. Failure to include an item on such list does not alter the

responsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

§ 9.8.3 Upon receipt of the Contractor’s list, the Architect will make an inspection to determine whether the Work or

designated portion thereof is substantially complete. If the Architect’s inspection discloses any item, whether or not

included on the Contractor’s list, which is not sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so

that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work or designated portion thereof for its intended use, the Contractor shall,

before issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, complete or correct such item upon notification by the

Architect. In such case, the Contractor shall then submit a request for another inspection by the Architect to determine

Substantial Completion.

§ 9.8.4 When the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete, the Architect will prepare a Certificate

of Substantial Completion that shall establish the date of Substantial Completion; establish responsibilities of the

Owner and Contractor for security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance; and fix the time

within which the Contractor shall finish all items on the list accompanying the Certificate. Warranties required by the

Contract Documents shall commence on the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof

unless otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Completion.

§ 9.8.5 The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be submitted to the Owner and Contractor for their written

acceptance of responsibilities assigned to them in the Certificate. Upon such acceptance, and consent of surety if any,

the Owner shall make payment of retainage applying to the Work or designated portion thereof. Such payment shall be

adjusted for Work that is incomplete or not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

§ 9.9 Partial Occupancy or Use § 9.9.1 The Owner may occupy or use any completed or partially completed portion of the Work at any stage when

such portion is designated by separate agreement with the Contractor, provided such occupancy or use is consented to

by the insurer and authorized by public authorities having jurisdiction over the Project. Such partial occupancy or use

may commence whether or not the portion is substantially complete, provided the Owner and Contractor have

accepted in writing the responsibilities assigned to each of them for payments, retainage, if any, security, maintenance,

heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance, and have agreed in writing concerning the period for correction of

the Work and commencement of warranties required by the Contract Documents. When the Contractor considers a

portion substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit a list to the Architect as provided under

Section 9.8.2. Consent of the Contractor to partial occupancy or use shall not be unreasonably withheld. The stage of

the progress of the Work shall be determined by written agreement between the Owner and Contractor or, if no

agreement is reached, by decision of the Architect.

§ 9.9.2 Immediately prior to such partial occupancy or use, the Owner, Contractor, and Architect shall jointly inspect

the area to be occupied or portion of the Work to be used in order to determine and record the condition of the Work.

§ 9.9.3 Unless otherwise agreed upon, partial occupancy or use of a portion or portions of the Work shall not constitute

acceptance of Work not complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

§ 9.10 Final Completion and Final Payment § 9.10.1 Upon receipt of the Contractor’s notice that the Work is ready for final inspection and acceptance and upon

receipt of a final Application for Payment, the Architect will promptly make such inspection. When the Architect finds

the Work acceptable under the Contract Documents and the Contract fully performed, the Architect will promptly

issue a final Certificate for Payment stating that to the best of the Architect’s knowledge, information and belief, and

on the basis of the Architect’s on-site visits and inspections, the Work has been completed in accordance with the

Contract Documents and that the entire balance found to be due the Contractor and noted in the final Certificate is due

and payable. The Architect’s final Certificate for Payment will constitute a further representation that conditions listed

in Section 9.10.2 as precedent to the Contractor’s being entitled to final payment have been fulfilled.






User Notes: (1194618422)

29

§ 9.10.2 Neither final payment nor any remaining retained percentage shall become due until the Contractor submits to

the Architect (1) an affidavit that payrolls, bills for materials and equipment, and other indebtedness connected with

the Work for which the Owner or the Owner’s property might be responsible or encumbered (less amounts withheld

by Owner) have been paid or otherwise satisfied, (2) a certificate evidencing that insurance required by the Contract

Documents to remain in force after final payment is currently in effect, (3) a written statement that the Contractor

knows of no reason that the insurance will not be renewable to cover the period required by the Contract Documents,

(4) consent of surety, if any, to final payment, (5) documentation of any special warranties, such as manufacturers’

warranties or specific Subcontractor warranties, and (6) if required by the Owner, other data establishing payment or

satisfaction of obligations, such as receipts and releases and waivers of liens, claims, security interests, or

encumbrances arising out of the Contract, to the extent and in such form as may be designated by the Owner. If a

Subcontractor refuses to furnish a release or waiver required by the Owner, the Contractor may furnish a bond

satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against such lien, claim, security interest, or encumbrance. If a lien,

claim, security interest, or encumbrance remains unsatisfied after payments are made, the Contractor shall refund to

the Owner all money that the Owner may be compelled to pay in discharging the lien, claim, security interest, or

encumbrance, including all costs and reasonable attorneys’ fees.

§ 9.10.3 If, after Substantial Completion of the Work, final completion thereof is materially delayed through no fault

of the Contractor or by issuance of Change Orders affecting final completion, and the Architect so confirms, the

Owner shall, upon application by the Contractor and certification by the Architect, and without terminating the

Contract, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed, corrected, and accepted. If

the remaining balance for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than retainage stipulated in the Contract

Documents, and if bonds have been furnished, the written consent of the surety to payment of the balance due for that

portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Architect prior to

certification of such payment. Such payment shall be made under terms and conditions governing final payment,

except that it shall not constitute a waiver of Claims.

§ 9.10.4 The making of final payment shall constitute a waiver of Claims by the Owner except those arising from

.1 liens, Claims, security interests, or encumbrances arising out of the Contract and unsettled;

.2 failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents;

.3 terms of special warranties required by the Contract Documents; or

.4 audits performed by the Owner, if permitted by the Contract Documents, after final payment.

§ 9.10.5 Acceptance of final payment by the Contractor, a Subcontractor, or a supplier, shall constitute a waiver of

claims by that payee except those previously made in writing and identified by that payee as unsettled at the time of

final Application for Payment.

ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY § 10.1 Safety Precautions and Programs The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining, and supervising all safety precautions and programs in

connection with the performance of the Contract.

§ 10.2 Safety of Persons and Property § 10.2.1 The Contractor shall take reasonable precautions for safety of, and shall provide reasonable protection to

prevent damage, injury, or loss to

.1 employees on the Work and other persons who may be affected thereby;

.2 the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site,

under care, custody, or control of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, or a Sub-subcontractor; and

.3 other property at the site or adjacent thereto, such as trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways,

structures, and utilities not designated for removal, relocation, or replacement in the course of

construction.

§ 10.2.2 The Contractor shall comply with, and give notices required by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes,

rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities, bearing on safety of persons or property or their

protection from damage, injury, or loss.

§ 10.2.3 The Contractor shall implement, erect, and maintain, as required by existing conditions and performance of

the Contract, reasonable safeguards for safety and protection, including posting danger signs and other warnings






User Notes: (1194618422)

30

against hazards; promulgating safety regulations; and notifying the owners and users of adjacent sites and utilities of

the safeguards.

§ 10.2.4 When use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment, or unusual methods are

necessary for execution of the Work, the Contractor shall exercise utmost care and carry on such activities under

supervision of properly qualified personnel.

§ 10.2.5 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage and loss (other than damage or loss insured under property

insurance required by the Contract Documents) to property referred to in Sections 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3 caused in

whole or in part by the Contractor, a Subcontractor, a Sub-subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by

any of them, or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable and for which the Contractor is responsible under

Sections 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3. The Contractor may make a Claim for the cost to remedy the damage or loss to the

extent such damage or loss is attributable to acts or omissions of the Owner or Architect or anyone directly or

indirectly employed by either of them, or by anyone for whose acts either of them may be liable, and not attributable to

the fault or negligence of the Contractor. The foregoing obligations of the Contractor are in addition to the

Contractor’s obligations under Section 3.18.

§ 10.2.6 The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of the Contractor’s organization at the site whose duty

shall be the prevention of accidents. This person shall be the Contractor’s superintendent unless otherwise designated

by the Contractor in writing to the Owner and Architect.

§ 10.2.7 The Contractor shall not permit any part of the construction or site to be loaded so as to cause damage or

create an unsafe condition.

§ 10.2.8 Injury or Damage to Person or Property If either party suffers injury or damage to person or property because of an act or omission of the other party, or of

others for whose acts such party is legally responsible, notice of the injury or damage, whether or not insured, shall be

given to the other party within a reasonable time not exceeding 21 days after discovery. The notice shall provide

sufficient detail to enable the other party to investigate the matter.

§ 10.3 Hazardous Materials and Substances § 10.3.1 The Contractor is responsible for compliance with any requirements included in the Contract Documents

regarding hazardous materials or substances. If the Contractor encounters a hazardous material or substance not

addressed in the Contract Documents and if reasonable precautions will be inadequate to prevent foreseeable bodily

injury or death to persons resulting from a material or substance, including but not limited to asbestos or

polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB), encountered on the site by the Contractor, the Contractor shall, upon recognizing the

condition, immediately stop Work in the affected area and notify the Owner and Architect of the condition.

§ 10.3.2 Upon receipt of the Contractor’s notice, the Owner shall obtain the services of a licensed laboratory to verify

the presence or absence of the material or substance reported by the Contractor and, in the event such material or

substance is found to be present, to cause it to be rendered harmless. Unless otherwise required by the Contract

Documents, the Owner shall furnish in writing to the Contractor and Architect the names and qualifications of persons

or entities who are to perform tests verifying the presence or absence of the material or substance or who are to

perform the task of removal or safe containment of the material or substance. The Contractor and the Architect will

promptly reply to the Owner in writing stating whether or not either has reasonable objection to the persons or entities

proposed by the Owner. If either the Contractor or Architect has an objection to a person or entity proposed by the

Owner, the Owner shall propose another to whom the Contractor and the Architect have no reasonable objection.

When the material or substance has been rendered harmless, Work in the affected area shall resume upon written

agreement of the Owner and Contractor. By Change Order, the Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the

Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Contractor’s reasonable additional costs of shutdown, delay, and

start-up.

§ 10.3.3 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless the Contractor,

Subcontractors, Architect, Architect’s consultants, and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims,

damages, losses, and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys’ fees, arising out of or resulting from

performance of the Work in the affected area if in fact the material or substance presents the risk of bodily injury or

death as described in Section 10.3.1 and has not been rendered harmless, provided that such claim, damage, loss, or

expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property






User Notes: (1194618422)

31

(other than the Work itself), except to the extent that such damage, loss, or expense is due to the fault or negligence of

the party seeking indemnity.

§ 10.3.4 The Owner shall not be responsible under this Section 10.3 for hazardous materials or substances the

Contractor brings to the site unless such materials or substances are required by the Contract Documents. The Owner

shall be responsible for hazardous materials or substances required by the Contract Documents, except to the extent of

the Contractor’s fault or negligence in the use and handling of such materials or substances.

§ 10.3.5 The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for the cost and expense the Owner incurs (1) for remediation of

hazardous materials or substances the Contractor brings to the site and negligently handles, or (2) where the

Contractor fails to perform its obligations under Section 10.3.1, except to the extent that the cost and expense are due

to the Owner’s fault or negligence.

§ 10.3.6 If, without negligence on the part of the Contractor, the Contractor is held liable by a government agency for

the cost of remediation of a hazardous material or substance solely by reason of performing Work as required by the

Contract Documents, the Owner shall reimburse the Contractor for all cost and expense thereby incurred.

§ 10.4 Emergencies In an emergency affecting safety of persons or property, the Contractor shall act, at the Contractor’s discretion, to

prevent threatened damage, injury, or loss. Additional compensation or extension of time claimed by the Contractor on

account of an emergency shall be determined as provided in Article 15 and Article 7.

ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS § 11.1 Contractor’s Insurance and Bonds § 11.1.1 The Contractor shall purchase and maintain insurance of the types and limits of liability, containing the

endorsements, and subject to the terms and conditions, as described in the Agreement or elsewhere in the Contract

Documents. The Contractor shall purchase and maintain the required insurance from an insurance company or

insurance companies lawfully authorized to issue insurance in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. The

Owner, Architect, and Architect’s consultants shall be named as additional insureds under the Contractor’s

commercial general liability policy or as otherwise described in the Contract Documents.

§ 11.1.2 The Contractor shall provide surety bonds of the types, for such penal sums, and subject to such terms and

conditions as required by the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall purchase and maintain the required bonds

from a company or companies lawfully authorized to issue surety bonds in the jurisdiction where the Project is located.

§ 11.1.3 Upon the request of any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of bonds covering payment of

obligations arising under the Contract, the Contractor shall promptly furnish a copy of the bonds or shall authorize a

copy to be furnished.

§ 11.1.4 Notice of Cancellation or Expiration of Contractor’s Required Insurance. Within three (3) business days of the

date the Contractor becomes aware of an impending or actual cancellation or expiration of any insurance required by

the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide notice to the Owner of such impending or actual cancellation or

expiration. Upon receipt of notice from the Contractor, the Owner shall, unless the lapse in coverage arises from an act

or omission of the Owner, have the right to stop the Work until the lapse in coverage has been cured by the

procurement of replacement coverage by the Contractor. The furnishing of notice by the Contractor shall not relieve

the Contractor of any contractual obligation to provide any required coverage.

§ 11.2 Owner’s Insurance § 11.2.1 The Owner shall purchase and maintain insurance of the types and limits of liability, containing the

endorsements, and subject to the terms and conditions, as described in the Agreement or elsewhere in the Contract

Documents. The Owner shall purchase and maintain the required insurance from an insurance company or insurance

companies lawfully authorized to issue insurance in the jurisdiction where the Project is located.

§ 11.2.2 Failure to Purchase Required Property Insurance. If the Owner fails to purchase and maintain the required

property insurance, with all of the coverages and in the amounts described in the Agreement or elsewhere in the

Contract Documents, the Owner shall inform the Contractor in writing prior to commencement of the Work. Upon

receipt of notice from the Owner, the Contractor may delay commencement of the Work and may obtain insurance that

will protect the interests of the Contractor, Subcontractors, and Sub-Subcontractors in the Work. When the failure to






User Notes: (1194618422)

32

provide coverage has been cured or resolved, the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be equitably adjusted. In the

event the Owner fails to procure coverage, the Owner waives all rights against the Contractor, Subcontractors, and

Sub-subcontractors to the extent the loss to the Owner would have been covered by the insurance to have been

procured by the Owner. The cost of the insurance shall be charged to the Owner by a Change Order. If the Owner does

not provide written notice, and the Contractor is damaged by the failure or neglect of the Owner to purchase or

maintain the required insurance, the Owner shall reimburse the Contractor for all reasonable costs and damages

attributable thereto.

§ 11.2.3 Notice of Cancellation or Expiration of Owner’s Required Property Insurance. Within three (3) business days of

the date the Owner becomes aware of an impending or actual cancellation or expiration of any property insurance

required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall provide notice to the Contractor of such impending or actual

cancellation or expiration. Unless the lapse in coverage arises from an act or omission of the Contractor: (1) the

Contractor, upon receipt of notice from the Owner, shall have the right to stop the Work until the lapse in coverage has

been cured by the procurement of replacement coverage by either the Owner or the Contractor; (2) the Contract Time

and Contract Sum shall be equitably adjusted; and (3) the Owner waives all rights against the Contractor,

Subcontractors, and Sub-subcontractors to the extent any loss to the Owner would have been covered by the insurance

had it not expired or been cancelled. If the Contractor purchases replacement coverage, the cost of the insurance shall

be charged to the Owner by an appropriate Change Order. The furnishing of notice by the Owner shall not relieve the

Owner of any contractual obligation to provide required insurance.

§ 11.3 Waivers of Subrogation § 11.3.1 The Owner and Contractor waive all rights against (1) each other and any of their subcontractors,

sub-subcontractors, agents, and employees, each of the other; (2) the Architect and Architect’s consultants; and (3)

Separate Contractors, if any, and any of their subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, agents, and employees, for damages

caused by fire, or other causes of loss, to the extent those losses are covered by property insurance required by the

Agreement or other property insurance applicable to the Project, except such rights as they have to proceeds of such

insurance. The Owner or Contractor, as appropriate, shall require similar written waivers in favor of the individuals

and entities identified above from the Architect, Architect’s consultants, Separate Contractors, subcontractors, and

sub-subcontractors. The policies of insurance purchased and maintained by each person or entity agreeing to waive

claims pursuant to this section 11.3.1 shall not prohibit this waiver of subrogation. This waiver of subrogation shall be

effective as to a person or entity (1) even though that person or entity would otherwise have a duty of indemnification,

contractual or otherwise, (2) even though that person or entity did not pay the insurance premium directly or indirectly,

or (3) whether or not the person or entity had an insurable interest in the damaged property.

§ 11.3.2 If during the Project construction period the Owner insures properties, real or personal or both, at or adjacent

to the site by property insurance under policies separate from those insuring the Project, or if after final payment

property insurance is to be provided on the completed Project through a policy or policies other than those insuring the

Project during the construction period, to the extent permissible by such policies, the Owner waives all rights in

accordance with the terms of Section 11.3.1 for damages caused by fire or other causes of loss covered by this separate

property insurance.

§ 11.4 Loss of Use, Business Interruption, and Delay in Completion Insurance The Owner, at the Owner’s option, may purchase and maintain insurance that will protect the Owner against loss of

use of the Owner’s property, or the inability to conduct normal operations, due to fire or other causes of loss. The

Owner waives all rights of action against the Contractor and Architect for loss of use of the Owner’s property, due to

fire or other hazards however caused.

§11.5 Adjustment and Settlement of Insured Loss § 11.5.1 A loss insured under the property insurance required by the Agreement shall be adjusted by the Owner as

fiduciary and made payable to the Owner as fiduciary for the insureds, as their interests may appear, subject to

requirements of any applicable mortgagee clause and of Section 11.5.2. The Owner shall pay the Architect and

Contractor their just shares of insurance proceeds received by the Owner, and by appropriate agreements the Architect

and Contractor shall make payments to their consultants and Subcontractors in similar manner.

§ 11.5.2 Prior to settlement of an insured loss, the Owner shall notify the Contractor of the terms of the proposed

settlement as well as the proposed allocation of the insurance proceeds. The Contractor shall have 14 days from receipt

of notice to object to the proposed settlement or allocation of the proceeds. If the Contractor does not object, the

Owner shall settle the loss and the Contractor shall be bound by the settlement and allocation. Upon receipt, the Owner






User Notes: (1194618422)

33

shall deposit the insurance proceeds in a separate account and make the appropriate distributions. Thereafter, if no

other agreement is made or the Owner does not terminate the Contract for convenience, the Owner and Contractor

shall execute a Change Order for reconstruction of the damaged or destroyed Work in the amount allocated for that

purpose. If the Contractor timely objects to either the terms of the proposed settlement or the allocation of the

proceeds, the Owner may proceed to settle the insured loss, and any dispute between the Owner and Contractor arising

out of the settlement or allocation of the proceeds shall be resolved pursuant to Article 15. Pending resolution of any

dispute, the Owner may issue a Construction Change Directive for the reconstruction of the damaged or destroyed

Work.

ARTICLE 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK § 12.1 Uncovering of Work § 12.1.1 If a portion of the Work is covered contrary to the Architect’s request or to requirements specifically

expressed in the Contract Documents, it must, if requested in writing by the Architect, be uncovered for the Architect’s

examination and be replaced at the Contractor’s expense without change in the Contract Time.

§ 12.1.2 If a portion of the Work has been covered that the Architect has not specifically requested to examine prior to

its being covered, the Architect may request to see such Work and it shall be uncovered by the Contractor. If such

Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment to the

Contract Sum and Contract Time as may be appropriate. If such Work is not in accordance with the Contract

Documents, the costs of uncovering the Work, and the cost of correction, shall be at the Contractor’s expense.

§ 12.2 Correction of Work § 12.2.1 Before Substantial Completion The Contractor shall promptly correct Work rejected by the Architect or failing to conform to the requirements of the

Contract Documents, discovered before Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated, installed or completed.

Costs of correcting such rejected Work, including additional testing and inspections, the cost of uncovering and

replacement, and compensation for the Architect’s services and expenses made necessary thereby, shall be at the

Contractor’s expense.

§ 12.2.2 After Substantial Completion § 12.2.2.1 In addition to the Contractor’s obligations under Section 3.5, if, within one year after the date of Substantial

Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof or after the date for commencement of warranties established

under Section 9.9.1, or by terms of any applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents, any of the

Work is found to be not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall correct it

promptly after receipt of notice from the Owner to do so, unless the Owner has previously given the Contractor a

written acceptance of such condition. The Owner shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the condition.

During the one-year period for correction of Work, if the Owner fails to notify the Contractor and give the Contractor

an opportunity to make the correction, the Owner waives the rights to require correction by the Contractor and to make

a claim for breach of warranty. If the Contractor fails to correct nonconforming Work within a reasonable time during

that period after receipt of notice from the Owner or Architect, the Owner may correct it in accordance with

Section 2.5.

§ 12.2.2.2 The one-year period for correction of Work shall be extended with respect to portions of Work first

performed after Substantial Completion by the period of time between Substantial Completion and the actual

completion of that portion of the Work.

§ 12.2.2.3 The one-year period for correction of Work shall not be extended by corrective Work performed by the

Contractor pursuant to this Section 12.2.

§ 12.2.3 The Contractor shall remove from the site portions of the Work that are not in accordance with the

requirements of the Contract Documents and are neither corrected by the Contractor nor accepted by the Owner.

§ 12.2.4 The Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting destroyed or damaged construction of the Owner or Separate

Contractors, whether completed or partially completed, caused by the Contractor’s correction or removal of Work that

is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

§ 12.2.5 Nothing contained in this Section 12.2 shall be construed to establish a period of limitation with respect to

other obligations the Contractor has under the Contract Documents. Establishment of the one-year period for






User Notes: (1194618422)

34

correction of Work as described in Section 12.2.2 relates only to the specific obligation of the Contractor to correct the

Work, and has no relationship to the time within which the obligation to comply with the Contract Documents may be

sought to be enforced, nor to the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish the Contractor’s

liability with respect to the Contractor’s obligations other than specifically to correct the Work.

§ 12.3 Acceptance of Nonconforming Work If the Owner prefers to accept Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the

Owner may do so instead of requiring its removal and correction, in which case the Contract Sum will be reduced as

appropriate and equitable. Such adjustment shall be effected whether or not final payment has been made.

ARTICLE 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS § 13.1 Governing Law The Contract shall be governed by the law of the place where the Project is located, excluding that jurisdiction’s

choice of law rules. If the parties have selected arbitration as the method of binding dispute resolution, the Federal

Arbitration Act shall govern Section 15.4.

§ 13.2 Successors and Assigns § 13.2.1 The Owner and Contractor respectively bind themselves, their partners, successors, assigns, and legal

representatives to covenants, agreements, and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. Except as provided in

Section 13.2.2, neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract as a whole without written consent of the other.

If either party attempts to make an assignment without such consent, that party shall nevertheless remain legally

responsible for all obligations under the Contract.

§ 13.2.2 The Owner may, without consent of the Contractor, assign the Contract to a lender providing construction

financing for the Project, if the lender assumes the Owner’s rights and obligations under the Contract Documents. The

Contractor shall execute all consents reasonably required to facilitate the assignment.

§ 13.3 Rights and Remedies § 13.3.1 Duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Documents and rights and remedies available thereunder

shall be in addition to and not a limitation of duties, obligations, rights, and remedies otherwise imposed or available

by law.

§ 13.3.2 No action or failure to act by the Owner, Architect, or Contractor shall constitute a waiver of a right or duty

afforded them under the Contract, nor shall such action or failure to act constitute approval of or acquiescence in a

breach thereunder, except as may be specifically agreed upon in writing.

§ 13.4 Tests and Inspections § 13.4.1 Tests, inspections, and approvals of portions of the Work shall be made as required by the Contract

Documents and by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules, and regulations or lawful orders of public

authorities. Unless otherwise provided, the Contractor shall make arrangements for such tests, inspections, and

approvals with an independent testing laboratory or entity acceptable to the Owner, or with the appropriate public

authority, and shall bear all related costs of tests, inspections, and approvals. The Contractor shall give the Architect

timely notice of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such

procedures. The Owner shall bear costs of tests, inspections, or approvals that do not become requirements until after

bids are received or negotiations concluded. The Owner shall directly arrange and pay for tests, inspections, or

approvals where building codes or applicable laws or regulations so require.

§ 13.4.2 If the Architect, Owner, or public authorities having jurisdiction determine that portions of the Work require

additional testing, inspection, or approval not included under Section 13.4.1, the Architect will, upon written

authorization from the Owner, instruct the Contractor to make arrangements for such additional testing, inspection, or

approval, by an entity acceptable to the Owner, and the Contractor shall give timely notice to the Architect of when

and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such procedures. Such costs,

except as provided in Section 13.4.3, shall be at the Owner’s expense.

§ 13.4.3 If procedures for testing, inspection, or approval under Sections 13.4.1 and 13.4.2 reveal failure of the

portions of the Work to comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents, all costs made necessary by

such failure, including those of repeated procedures and compensation for the Architect’s services and expenses, shall

be at the Contractor’s expense.






User Notes: (1194618422)

35

§ 13.4.4 Required certificates of testing, inspection, or approval shall, unless otherwise required by the Contract

Documents, be secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the Architect.

§ 13.4.5 If the Architect is to observe tests, inspections, or approvals required by the Contract Documents, the

Architect will do so promptly and, where practicable, at the normal place of testing.

§ 13.4.6 Tests or inspections conducted pursuant to the Contract Documents shall be made promptly to avoid

unreasonable delay in the Work.

§ 13.5 Interest Payments due and unpaid under the Contract Documents shall bear interest from the date payment is due at the rate the

parties agree upon in writing or, in the absence thereof, at the legal rate prevailing from time to time at the place where

the Project is located.

ARTICLE 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT § 14.1 Termination by the Contractor § 14.1.1 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if the Work is stopped for a period of 30 consecutive days through

no act or fault of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, a Sub-subcontractor, their agents or employees, or any other persons

or entities performing portions of the Work, for any of the following reasons:

.1 Issuance of an order of a court or other public authority having jurisdiction that requires all Work to be

stopped;

.2 An act of government, such as a declaration of national emergency, that requires all Work to be

stopped;

.3 Because the Architect has not issued a Certificate for Payment and has not notified the Contractor of the

reason for withholding certification as provided in Section 9.4.1, or because the Owner has not made

payment on a Certificate for Payment within the time stated in the Contract Documents; or

.4 The Owner has failed to furnish to the Contractor reasonable evidence as required by Section 2.2.

§ 14.1.2 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if, through no act or fault of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, a

Sub-subcontractor, their agents or employees, or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work,

repeated suspensions, delays, or interruptions of the entire Work by the Owner as described in Section 14.3, constitute

in the aggregate more than 100 percent of the total number of days scheduled for completion, or 120 days in any

365-day period, whichever is less.

§ 14.1.3 If one of the reasons described in Section 14.1.1 or 14.1.2 exists, the Contractor may, upon seven days’ notice

to the Owner and Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner payment for Work executed, as well as

reasonable overhead and profit on Work not executed, and costs incurred by reason of such termination.

§ 14.1.4 If the Work is stopped for a period of 60 consecutive days through no act or fault of the Contractor, a

Subcontractor, a Sub-subcontractor, or their agents or employees or any other persons or entities performing portions

of the Work because the Owner has repeatedly failed to fulfill the Owner’s obligations under the Contract Documents

with respect to matters important to the progress of the Work, the Contractor may, upon seven additional days’ notice

to the Owner and the Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner as provided in Section 14.1.3.

§ 14.2 Termination by the Owner for Cause § 14.2.1 The Owner may terminate the Contract if the Contractor

.1 repeatedly refuses or fails to supply enough properly skilled workers or proper materials;

.2 fails to make payment to Subcontractors or suppliers in accordance with the respective agreements

between the Contractor and the Subcontractors or suppliers;

.3 repeatedly disregards applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, or lawful

orders of a public authority; or

.4 otherwise is guilty of substantial breach of a provision of the Contract Documents.

§ 14.2.2 When any of the reasons described in Section 14.2.1 exist, and upon certification by the Architect that

sufficient cause exists to justify such action, the Owner may, without prejudice to any other rights or remedies of the

Owner and after giving the Contractor and the Contractor’s surety, if any, seven days’ notice, terminate employment

of the Contractor and may, subject to any prior rights of the surety:






User Notes: (1194618422)

36

.1 Exclude the Contractor from the site and take possession of all materials, equipment, tools, and

construction equipment and machinery thereon owned by the Contractor;

.2 Accept assignment of subcontracts pursuant to Section 5.4; and

.3 Finish the Work by whatever reasonable method the Owner may deem expedient. Upon written request

of the Contractor, the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor a detailed accounting of the costs incurred

by the Owner in finishing the Work.

§ 14.2.3 When the Owner terminates the Contract for one of the reasons stated in Section 14.2.1, the Contractor shall

not be entitled to receive further payment until the Work is finished.

§ 14.2.4 If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds costs of finishing the Work, including compensation for

the Architect’s services and expenses made necessary thereby, and other damages incurred by the Owner and not

expressly waived, such excess shall be paid to the Contractor. If such costs and damages exceed the unpaid balance,

the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. The amount to be paid to the Contractor or Owner, as the case

may be, shall be certified by the Initial Decision Maker, upon application, and this obligation for payment shall survive

termination of the Contract.

§ 14.3 Suspension by the Owner for Convenience § 14.3.1 The Owner may, without cause, order the Contractor in writing to suspend, delay or interrupt the Work, in

whole or in part for such period of time as the Owner may determine.

§ 14.3.2 The Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be adjusted for increases in the cost and time caused by

suspension, delay, or interruption under Section 14.3.1. Adjustment of the Contract Sum shall include profit. No

adjustment shall be made to the extent

.1 that performance is, was, or would have been, so suspended, delayed, or interrupted, by another cause

for which the Contractor is responsible; or

.2 that an equitable adjustment is made or denied under another provision of the Contract.

§ 14.4 Termination by the Owner for Convenience § 14.4.1 The Owner may, at any time, terminate the Contract for the Owner’s convenience and without cause.

§ 14.4.2 Upon receipt of notice from the Owner of such termination for the Owner’s convenience, the Contractor shall

.1 cease operations as directed by the Owner in the notice;

.2 take actions necessary, or that the Owner may direct, for the protection and preservation of the Work;

and

.3 except for Work directed to be performed prior to the effective date of termination stated in the notice,

terminate all existing subcontracts and purchase orders and enter into no further subcontracts and

purchase orders.

§ 14.4.3 In case of such termination for the Owner’s convenience, the Owner shall pay the Contractor for Work

properly executed; costs incurred by reason of the termination, including costs attributable to termination of

Subcontracts; and the termination fee, if any, set forth in the Agreement.

ARTICLE 15 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES § 15.1 Claims § 15.1.1 Definition A Claim is a demand or assertion by one of the parties seeking, as a matter of right, payment of money, a change in the

Contract Time, or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. The term “Claim” also includes other disputes

and matters in question between the Owner and Contractor arising out of or relating to the Contract. The responsibility

to substantiate Claims shall rest with the party making the Claim. This Section 15.1.1 does not require the Owner to

file a Claim in order to impose liquidated damages in accordance with the Contract Documents.

§ 15.1.2 Time Limits on Claims The Owner and Contractor shall commence all Claims and causes of action against the other and arising out of or

related to the Contract, whether in contract, tort, breach of warranty or otherwise, in accordance with the requirements

of the binding dispute resolution method selected in the Agreement and within the period specified by applicable law,

but in any case not more than 10 years after the date of Substantial Completion of the Work. The Owner and

Contractor waive all Claims and causes of action not commenced in accordance with this Section 15.1.2.






User Notes: (1194618422)

37

§ 15.1.3 Notice of Claims § 15.1.3.1 Claims by either the Owner or Contractor, where the condition giving rise to the Claim is first discovered

prior to expiration of the period for correction of the Work set forth in Section 12.2.2, shall be initiated by notice to the

other party and to the Initial Decision Maker with a copy sent to the Architect, if the Architect is not serving as the

Initial Decision Maker. Claims by either party under this Section 15.1.3.1 shall be initiated within 21 days after

occurrence of the event giving rise to such Claim or within 21 days after the claimant first recognizes the condition

giving rise to the Claim, whichever is later.

§ 15.1.3.2 Claims by either the Owner or Contractor, where the condition giving rise to the Claim is first discovered

after expiration of the period for correction of the Work set forth in Section 12.2.2, shall be initiated by notice to the

other party. In such event, no decision by the Initial Decision Maker is required.

§ 15.1.4 Continuing Contract Performance § 15.1.4.1 Pending final resolution of a Claim, except as otherwise agreed in writing or as provided in Section 9.7 and

Article 14, the Contractor shall proceed diligently with performance of the Contract and the Owner shall continue to

make payments in accordance with the Contract Documents.

§ 15.1.4.2 The Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be adjusted in accordance with the Initial Decision Maker’s

decision, subject to the right of either party to proceed in accordance with this Article 15. The Architect will issue

Certificates for Payment in accordance with the decision of the Initial Decision Maker.

§ 15.1.5 Claims for Additional Cost If the Contractor wishes to make a Claim for an increase in the Contract Sum, notice as provided in Section 15.1.3

shall be given before proceeding to execute the portion of the Work that is the subject of the Claim. Prior notice is not

required for Claims relating to an emergency endangering life or property arising under Section 10.4.

§ 15.1.6 Claims for Additional Time § 15.1.6.1 If the Contractor wishes to make a Claim for an increase in the Contract Time, notice as provided in Section

15.1.3 shall be given. The Contractor’s Claim shall include an estimate of cost and of probable effect of delay on

progress of the Work. In the case of a continuing delay, only one Claim is necessary.

§ 15.1.6.2 If adverse weather conditions are the basis for a Claim for additional time, such Claim shall be documented

by data substantiating that weather conditions were abnormal for the period of time, could not have been reasonably

anticipated, and had an adverse effect on the scheduled construction.

§ 15.1.7 Waiver of Claims for Consequential Damages The Contractor and Owner waive Claims against each other for consequential damages arising out of or relating to this

Contract. This mutual waiver includes

.1 damages incurred by the Owner for rental expenses, for losses of use, income, profit, financing,

business and reputation, and for loss of management or employee productivity or of the services of such

persons; and

.2 damages incurred by the Contractor for principal office expenses including the compensation of

personnel stationed there, for losses of financing, business and reputation, and for loss of profit, except

anticipated profit arising directly from the Work.

This mutual waiver is applicable, without limitation, to all consequential damages due to either party’s termination in

accordance with Article 14. Nothing contained in this Section 15.1.7 shall be deemed to preclude assessment of

liquidated damages, when applicable, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

§ 15.2 Initial Decision § 15.2.1 Claims, excluding those where the condition giving rise to the Claim is first discovered after expiration of the

period for correction of the Work set forth in Section 12.2.2 or arising under Sections 10.3, 10.4, and 11.5, shall be

referred to the Initial Decision Maker for initial decision. The Architect will serve as the Initial Decision Maker, unless

otherwise indicated in the Agreement. Except for those Claims excluded by this Section 15.2.1, an initial decision

shall be required as a condition precedent to mediation of any Claim. If an initial decision has not been rendered within

30 days after the Claim has been referred to the Initial Decision Maker, the party asserting the Claim may demand

mediation and binding dispute resolution without a decision having been rendered. Unless the Initial Decision Maker






User Notes: (1194618422)

38

and all affected parties agree, the Initial Decision Maker will not decide disputes between the Contractor and persons

or entities other than the Owner.

§ 15.2.2 The Initial Decision Maker will review Claims and within ten days of the receipt of a Claim take one or more

of the following actions: (1) request additional supporting data from the claimant or a response with supporting data

from the other party, (2) reject the Claim in whole or in part, (3) approve the Claim, (4) suggest a compromise, or (5)

advise the parties that the Initial Decision Maker is unable to resolve the Claim if the Initial Decision Maker lacks

sufficient information to evaluate the merits of the Claim or if the Initial Decision Maker concludes that, in the Initial

Decision Maker’s sole discretion, it would be inappropriate for the Initial Decision Maker to resolve the Claim.

§ 15.2.3 In evaluating Claims, the Initial Decision Maker may, but shall not be obligated to, consult with or seek

information from either party or from persons with special knowledge or expertise who may assist the Initial Decision

Maker in rendering a decision. The Initial Decision Maker may request the Owner to authorize retention of such

persons at the Owner’s expense.

§ 15.2.4 If the Initial Decision Maker requests a party to provide a response to a Claim or to furnish additional

supporting data, such party shall respond, within ten days after receipt of the request, and shall either (1) provide a

response on the requested supporting data, (2) advise the Initial Decision Maker when the response or supporting data

will be furnished, or (3) advise the Initial Decision Maker that no supporting data will be furnished. Upon receipt of

the response or supporting data, if any, the Initial Decision Maker will either reject or approve the Claim in whole or in

part.

§ 15.2.5 The Initial Decision Maker will render an initial decision approving or rejecting the Claim, or indicating that

the Initial Decision Maker is unable to resolve the Claim. This initial decision shall (1) be in writing; (2) state the

reasons therefor; and (3) notify the parties and the Architect, if the Architect is not serving as the Initial Decision

Maker, of any change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time or both. The initial decision shall be final and binding on

the parties but subject to mediation and, if the parties fail to resolve their dispute through mediation, to binding dispute

resolution.

§ 15.2.6 Either party may file for mediation of an initial decision at any time, subject to the terms of Section 15.2.6.1.

§ 15.2.6.1 Either party may, within 30 days from the date of receipt of an initial decision, demand in writing that the

other party file for mediation. If such a demand is made and the party receiving the demand fails to file for mediation

within 30 days after receipt thereof, then both parties waive their rights to mediate or pursue binding dispute resolution

proceedings with respect to the initial decision.

§ 15.2.7 In the event of a Claim against the Contractor, the Owner may, but is not obligated to, notify the surety, if any,

of the nature and amount of the Claim. If the Claim relates to a possibility of a Contractor’s default, the Owner may,

but is not obligated to, notify the surety and request the surety’s assistance in resolving the controversy.

§ 15.2.8 If a Claim relates to or is the subject of a mechanic’s lien, the party asserting such Claim may proceed in

accordance with applicable law to comply with the lien notice or filing deadlines.

§ 15.3 Mediation § 15.3.1 Claims, disputes, or other matters in controversy arising out of or related to the Contract, except those waived

as provided for in Sections 9.10.4, 9.10.5, and 15.1.7, shall be subject to mediation as a condition precedent to binding

dispute resolution.

§ 15.3.2 The parties shall endeavor to resolve their Claims by mediation which, unless the parties mutually agree

otherwise, shall be administered by the American Arbitration Association in accordance with its Construction Industry

Mediation Procedures in effect on the date of the Agreement. A request for mediation shall be made in writing,

delivered to the other party to the Contract, and filed with the person or entity administering the mediation. The request

may be made concurrently with the filing of binding dispute resolution proceedings but, in such event, mediation shall

proceed in advance of binding dispute resolution proceedings, which shall be stayed pending mediation for a period of

60 days from the date of filing, unless stayed for a longer period by agreement of the parties or court order. If an

arbitration is stayed pursuant to this Section 15.3.2, the parties may nonetheless proceed to the selection of the

arbitrator(s) and agree upon a schedule for later proceedings.

Short-Form Lump Sum AgreementApril 15, 2013 i

SHORT FORM AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR FOR WORK ON A LUMP SUM BASIS

THIS CONSTRUCTION SERVICES AGREEMENT is effective the day of in the year 20 , by and between Owner and Contractor, as it relates to the construction Project identified below:

OWNER: (Identify by legal name, d/b/a name and address of facility)

CONTRACTOR:(Identify by legal name and address)

PROJECT:(Identify by name, number(s), and address)

ARCHITECT:(Identify by legal name and address)

Short-Form Lump Sum AgreementApril 15, 2013 ii

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page

ARTICLE 1. Basic Terms ............................................................................................................................................1

1.1 Performance of Work .................................................................................................................................11.2 Commencement of Work ...........................................................................................................................11.3 Substantial Completion ..............................................................................................................................11.4 Final Completion ........................................................................................................................................11.5 Anticipated Weather Days..........................................................................................................................11.6 Project Schedule .........................................................................................................................................11.7 Contractor’s Staff .......................................................................................................................................11.8 Notice to Owner .........................................................................................................................................11.9 Notice to Contractor ...................................................................................................................................11.10 Notice to Project Manager........................................................................................................................11.11 Project Manager........................................................................................................................................2

ARTICLE 2. Work; Contractor’s Responsibilities; Contract Documents; Commissioning; Interpretation; Subcontractors..................................................................................................2

2.1 Scope of Work/Contractor’s Responsibilities ............................................................................................22.2 Subcontractor’s Responsibilities ................................................................................................................22.3 Contract Documents ...................................................................................................................................22.4 Ownership of Documents ...........................................................................................................................22.5 Contractor and Subcontractor Records.......................................................................................................22.6 Exhibits.......................................................................................................................................................2

ARTICLE 3. Builder’s Risk Insurance; Contractor and Subcontractor Insurance; Bonds .................................3

3.1 Builder’s Risk Insurance ............................................................................................................................33.2 Insurance Requirements .............................................................................................................................33.3 Payment/Performance Bonds .....................................................................................................................53.4 Failure to Furnish Insurance Policy or Bonds ............................................................................................5

ARTICLE 4. Contract Time; Project Schedule; Time Extension; Final Completion............................................5

4.1 Date of Commencement .............................................................................................................................54.2 Time is of the Essence................................................................................................................................54.3 Project Schedule .........................................................................................................................................54.4 Changes to Contract Time ..........................................................................................................................64.5 Owner’s Right to Complete........................................................................................................................64.6 Day ............................................................................................................................................................6

ARTICLE 5. Contractor’s Performance ....................................................................................................................7

5.1 Contractor’s Performance Warranties ........................................................................................................75.2 Permits ........................................................................................................................................................75.3 Submittals ...................................................................................................................................................75.4 Deviations...................................................................................................................................................75.5 Tests............................................................................................................................................................75.6 Uncovering Work; Correction of Work During Construction ...................................................................85.7 Call Back Warranty; Provided in Addition to all Other Claims, Rights and Remedies.............................85.8 Contractor’s General Duty; Independent Vendors .....................................................................................95.9 Background Checks....................................................................................................................................9

Short-Form Lump Sum AgreementApril 15, 2013 iii

ARTICLE 6. Contract Sum and Schedule of Values ................................................................................................9

6.1 Schedule of Values .....................................................................................................................................96.2 Stored Materials........................................................................................................................................10

ARTICLE 7. Progress Payments...............................................................................................................................10

7.1 Application for Progress Payment............................................................................................................107.2 Amount of Application.............................................................................................................................107.3 Contractor Certification............................................................................................................................107.4 Documents Included with Application.....................................................................................................117.5 Subcontractor Lien Waivers .....................................................................................................................117.6 Items not to Include in Application ..........................................................................................................117.7 Certification of Payment...........................................................................................................................117.8 Payment ....................................................................................................................................................11

ARTICLE 8. Final Payment ......................................................................................................................................12

ARTICLE 9. RESERVED .........................................................................................................................................13

ARTICLE 10. Additional Terms and Conditions of Payment to Contractor .......................................................13

10.1 Payment Only Upon Submission of Respective Application.................................................................1310.2 Retainage ................................................................................................................................................1310.3 Withholding............................................................................................................................................1310.4 Form of Payment by Owner ...................................................................................................................13

ARTICLE 11. Liens and Stop Notices ......................................................................................................................14

ARTICLE 12. Changes; Change Orders; Change Directives; Field Directives ...................................................14

12.1 Changes ..................................................................................................................................................1412.2 Change Requests ....................................................................................................................................1412.3 Change Orders ........................................................................................................................................1512.4 Change Directives ..................................................................................................................................1512.5 Field Directives ......................................................................................................................................16

ARTICLE 13. Claims .................................................................................................................................................16

13.1 General ...................................................................................................................................................1613.2 Making Claims .......................................................................................................................................16

ARTICLE 14. Site Conditions; Improper or Differing Conditions .......................................................................17

14.1 Inspection by Contractor ........................................................................................................................1714.2 Differing Conditions...............................................................................................................................17

ARTICLE 15. Dispute Resolution.............................................................................................................................17

15.1 Step Negotiation .....................................................................................................................................1715.2 Dispute Resolution .................................................................................................................................1815.3 Performance Pending Dispute Resolution..............................................................................................19

ARTICLE 16. Termination........................................................................................................................................19

16.1 Owner’s Right to Terminate for Cause ..................................................................................................1916.2 Owner’s Right to Terminate for Convenience .......................................................................................2016.3 Contractor’s Right to Terminate.............................................................................................................2016.4 Termination for Causes Beyond either Party’s Control .........................................................................20

Short-Form Lump Sum AgreementApril 15, 2013 iv

16.5 Bankruptcy .............................................................................................................................................21

ARTICLE 17. Superintendent; Subcontractors; Sub-Subcontractors; Suppliers; Lower Tier Persons ...........21

17.1 Subcontractor..........................................................................................................................................2117.2 Agreements with Subcontractors............................................................................................................2117.3 Subcontracts and Subcontract Documents .............................................................................................2117.4 Suppliers .................................................................................................................................................2217.5 Lower Tier Persons.................................................................................................................................2217.6 Compliance with Immigration Laws ......................................................................................................2217.7 Equal Employment Opportunity.............................................................................................................22

ARTICLE 18. Health and Safety; Hazardous Substances; Waste Disposal .........................................................22

18.1 Safety......................................................................................................................................................2218.2 Hazardous Substances ............................................................................................................................2218.3 Wastes.....................................................................................................................................................23

ARTICLE 19. Indemnity ...........................................................................................................................................23

ARTICLE 20. Notices.................................................................................................................................................24

20.1 Authorization of Owner’s Representative and Contractor’s Representative to Receive Notices .............................................................................................................................................24

20.2 Notice Procedure ....................................................................................................................................24

ARTICLE 21. Laws Generally; Investigations ........................................................................................................24

21.1 Compliance with all Applicable Laws ...................................................................................................2421.2 Notification of Auditor Investigation .....................................................................................................24

ARTICLE 22. Owner’s Rules ....................................................................................................................................24

ARTICLE 23. Owner Review or Other Action........................................................................................................25

ARTICLE 24. Owner Assignments; Cooperation with Financing Parties............................................................25

ARTICLE 25. Contractor Assignments and Transfers ..........................................................................................25

ARTICLE 26. Miscellaneous .....................................................................................................................................25

26.1 Confidentiality........................................................................................................................................2526.2 Contract Amendment..............................................................................................................................2526.3 Counterparts; Integration; Inurement; Cumulative Remedies; Severability; Survival; Choice

of Laws.............................................................................................................................................25

Short-Form Lump Sum AgreementApril 15, 2013 v

Exhibit A Project Summary

Exhibit B Project Schedule

Exhibit C Staffing Plan

Exhibit D Payment and Performance Bonds

Exhibit E Contractor’s Certificates of Insurance

Exhibit F Allowance Summary

Exhibit G Contractor’s Partial Waiver and Release of Lien to Owner

Exhibit H Change Order Form

Exhibit I Contractor’s Affidavit and Final Waiver and Release

Exhibit J Contractor Change Request

Exhibit K Certificate of Substantial Completion

Exhibit L-1 Contractor’s Invoice Summary

Exhibit L-2 Application for Payment Form

Exhibit L-3 Project Schedule of Values Form

Exhibit M Project Closeout Checklist

Exhibit N Alternative Subcontractor and Sub-Sub Contractor Insurance Coverage Minimums

Exhibit O Builder’s Risk Insurance Information

Short-Form Lump Sum AgreementApril 15, 2013 1

Owner, subject to the terms and conditions of this Agreement, hereby engages Contractor to construct the Project. Contractor accepts such engagement. Contractor and Owner agree as follows:

ARTICLE 1. Basic Terms.. Subject to the other provisions of this Agreement, Owner agrees to pay Contractor for the performance of the Work described in Article 2.. Contractor shall commence the Work on the date established by Owner in a written notice to proceed (the “Notice to Proceed”).. Contractor shall accomplish Substantial Completion, as defined in Section 4.2, not later than , as evidenced by a Certificate of Substantial Completion in the form attached hereto as Exhibit K (the “Substantial Completion Date”).. Contractor shall accomplish Final Completion, as defined in Section 4.2, by (the “Final Completion Date”).. The time for accomplishing Substantial Completion includes an allowance of up to ( ) days for delay or disruption due to reasonably anticipatable adverse weather (the “Scheduled Weather Days”). The Substantial Completion Date shall be subject to adjustment for adverse weather only if the cumulative total of critical path delays caused by weather exceeds the Scheduled Weather Days.. Contractor shall prosecute the Work in a logical and efficient manner in accordance with the written project schedule (“Project Schedule”): [Select one:] attached as Exhibit B; OR to be approved by Owner as provided in Section 4.3.. Contractor’s Project Staff is identified in the “Staffing Plan,” which is attached hereto as Exhibit C.. Owner’s representative (“Owner’s Representative”), as provided in Article 20, and his or her information for delivery of Notices is:

Telephone: Facsimile: Email:

. Contractor’s representative (“Contractor’s Representative”), as provided in Article 20, and his or her information for delivery of Notices is:


. Owner has engaged (“Project Manager”) to assist Owner in the administration of the Work. The Project Manager’s representative (“Project Manager’s Representative”), and his or her information for delivery of Notices, is:


. The Project Manager, acting by and through its representative(s) designated in Section 1.11, will assist Owner in its administration of this Agreement. Project Manager shall have such duties and responsibilities as Owner’s Representative may designate in writing from time to time. Contractor agrees to cooperate with the Project Manager so as not to result in any delay in the progress of the Work.

1.12 Contract Sum. The Contract Sum at the time of execution of this Agreement is ____________.


ARTICLE 2. Work; Contractor’s Responsibilities; Contract Documents; Commissioning; Interpretation; Subcontractors.. Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, fixtures, specially manufactured or fabricated equipment, supplies, tools, utilities, supervision, coordination, scheduling, expertise, shop drawings, transportation, occupational health and safety measures, site safety and traffic control, installation, start up, testing, clean up, waste disposal, permitting and other construction services and facilities of every kind and description (collectively, the “Work”), necessary for timely and proper construction and commissioning of the fully completed Project in accordance with this Agreement and the other documents identified in Exhibit A (collectively, the “Contract Documents”), and all Work reasonably inferable from them, to the reasonable satisfaction of Owner and Architect. The fixtures, materials and supplies provided for incorporation in the Project are sometimes referred to collectively as the “Construction Materials”. The Work shall include Contractor’s demonstration after start-up and testing to the satisfaction of Owner and Architect, that the equipment, utilities and engineered systems installed by Contractor are fully operational. Excepted only from Contractor’s undertaking are the items specifically identified as Exclusions in Exhibit A.. Contractor’s Work shall be performed and/or furnished by qualified Subcontractors pursuant to written Subcontracts as provided in Article 17. . Any inconsistency among or between any provision in any of the Contract Documents shall be resolved by an interpretation that results in the highest and best quality of Work. Subject to the provisions of Article 13, the decision of Owner’s Representative as to the proper construction and meaning of the Contract Documents shall be final and binding.. All reports, studies, Submittals, and other work product (“Work Product”) generated by Contractor and its Subcontractors and Sub-Subcontractors shall be deemed joint property of the Owner and the Contractor. Contractor hereby assigns to Owner the non-exclusive, perpetual, royalty free license to reproduce, distribute, modify, and make derivative works from the Work Product.. Contractor shall, upon reasonable notice, make all of Contractor’s documents and records arising out of or relating to the Work, including all subcontracts, charge orders, purchase orders, supply contracts, records and schedules available for Owner’s review and audit at reasonable times during the period that the Work of this contract is being performed and at any time within six (6) years after final payment, the Owner shall have the right to cause its auditors, accountants, or other representatives to audit all of the Contractor’s books, records, documents and electronic data with respect to the Project and, to the extent determined necessary by the Owner’s auditors and accountants, all other books and records of the Contractor. In the event Owner’s audit under this Section 2.5 results in a determination that improper payments were made to Contractor in connection with the Project, Owner shall provide Contractor with the relevant portions of Owner’s audit report. Contractor shall reimburse Owner for any such improper payments within thirty (30) days of notice.. The following exhibits (each, an “Exhibit”), are incorporated by this reference:

Exhibit Title

A Project SummaryB Project ScheduleC Staffing PlanD Payment and Performance BondsE Contractor’s Certificate of InsuranceF Allowance SummaryG Contractor’s Partial Waiver and Release of Lien to OwnerH Change Order FormI Contractor’s Affidavit and Final Waiver and ReleaseJ Contractor Change RequestK Certificate of Substantial Completion

L-1L-2L-3

Contractor’s Invoice SummaryApplication for Payment FormSchedule of Values Form

M Project Closeout ChecklistN Alternative Subcontractor and Sub-Sub Contractor Insurance

Coverage MinimumsO Builder’s Risk Insurance Information

ARTICLE 3. Builder’s Risk Insurance; Contractor and Subcontractor Insurance; Bonds.. Owner shall provide and pay for builder’s risk (“Builder’s Risk”) insurance written on an “all-risk basis” to insure against all risks of direct physical loss, damage or destruction occurring during the policy period, except as


excluded, that shall at least include the full replacement cost of the Project, with no co-insurance policy. The value utilized shall be one hundred percent (100%) of the completed value of the construction; and the policy will include coverage for delay in completion (soft costs/additional expenses) with limits reasonably acceptable to Owner. Insurance against loss of tools, equipment, or other items not to be incorporated in the Work, but required for prosecution of the Work shall be the responsibility of Contractor. Additional information concerning the Owner’s Builder’s Risk Insurance Policy is described in Exhibit O.. Contractor shall furnish and maintain, and cause its Subcontractors and Sub-Subcontractors to furnish and maintain, insurance in accordance with the insurance requirements of this Article 3, as evidenced by the Certificates of Insurance attached as Exhibit E.

3.2.1 The Contractor shall purchase and maintain, as a material obligation to Owner, and cause its Subcontractors and Sub-Subcontractors to furnish and maintain, insurance and bonds in accordance with, and subject to, the following provisions:

(a) Commercial General Liability Insurance, and if necessary, a policy of umbrella/excess liability insurance that together furnish a minimum combined single limit of one million dollars ($1,000,000.00) each occurrence applicable to the Work and an annual aggregate limit of liability of two million dollars ($2,000,000.00) applicable solely to the construction of the Work. The policy shall include coverage for any and all of the following: bodily injury, broad form property damage, personal injury (including coverage for contractual and employee acts), contractual liability, incidental professional liability, and products and completed operations. Further, the policy shall include coverage for the hazards commonly referred to as XCU. The products and completed operations coverage shall extend for five (5) years past acceptance, cancellation or termination of the Work. Said policy shall contain a severability of interest provision.

i. Each general liability policy be written on ISO form CG 001 or its equivalent, and shall be endorsed to include the Owner (including its parent and affiliate companies), and their respective officers, directors, members, managers, shareholders, employees, representatives and agents (collectively, the “Additional Insureds”); and shall stipulate that the insurance afforded by the policies shall be primary insurance and that any insurance, self-insured retention, deductibles, or risk retention programs maintained or participated in by the Additional Insureds, or their agents, officials or employees shall be excess and not contributory to the Contractor’s insurance.

ii. The Contractor shall cause insurer providing the policies required to waive all rights of recovery against the Owner (including its parent and affiliate companies), and their respective officers, directors, members, managers, shareholders, employees, representatives and agents.

(b) Workers’ Compensation Insurance with benefits as required the law of Project state, and Employers’ Liability, with limits of at least $1 million per accident or disease, both policies being endorsed to waive subrogation against the Additional Insureds.

(c) Business Auto Liability Insurance, with minimum combined single limits of $1 million per accident for bodily injury and property damage. The policy must include a duty to defend and cover all owned, non owned, and leased, hired or borrowed vehicles used in performance of the Work on or off the Site.

(d) Special Requirements of Contractor’s Insurance Policies. Each policy of insurance required by Subparagraphs .1, .2 and .3 shall: be issued by a carrier having a rating of A-VII or better by the AM Best & Company; have a deductible not exceeding $5,000.00; and provide that attorneys’ fees shall be outside the policy’s liability limits and shall be unlimited. Each policy of insurance shall also contain a provision that coverages afforded under the policies will not be canceled, allowed to expire, or reduced in amount until at least thirty (30) days’ prior written notice has been given to the Owner.

(e) Contractor’s Equipment Insurance, covering owned, non-owned, leased equipment used in connection with the construction of the Work.


3.2.2 Subcontractor and Sub-Subcontractor Insurance Requirements. Contractor shall require all of Contractor’s Subcontractors and Sub-Subcontractors, as a condition of commencing any of the Work, to purchase and maintain the insurance coverages required in Subsections 1.a, 1.b, and 1.c, and meeting the special requirements of Subsection 1.d above. In addition, each Subcontractor’s policies of liability insurance shall be written or endorsed so that they shall be primary insurance, the general liability insurance furnished by Contractor shall be secondary and non-contributory, and that any insurance carried by the Additional Insureds shall be excess, tertiary and non-contributory to the insurance furnished by the Contractor and Subcontractor.

3.2.3 Waiver of Subrogation. Contractor and each Subcontractor hereby waive all rights of subrogation against Owner, its employees and agents to the extent of all losses or damage to the Improvements covered by any policy of insurance.

3.2.4 Alternative Insurance. Owner will consider alternatives to the requirements imposed by this Article 3 to the extent Owner is satisfied, in Owner’s sole discretion, that the required insurance is not commercially available to the insured(s) and the alternatives will be sufficient to protect Owner’s rights and interests. In such event, Owner shall have the right to set conditions for its acceptance of such alternatives, including, but not limited to, additional indemnification from the insured(s), personal guaranties and/or secured collateral and the requirement that Owner shall be a loss payee under the alternative policy. Specifically, Contractor may seek Owner’s written consent and approval to relieve its Subcontractors and Sub-Subcontractors from the minimum insurance limits required under Article 3 consistent with the alternative plans shown on Exhibit N.

3.2.5 Evidence of Insurance. Contractor shall deliver to Owner certificates and endorsements and declarations pages acceptable to Owner (which certificates and endorsements Owner shall be entitled to reject) evidencing compliance with the requirements of this Article 3 by Contractor, and each of Contractor’s Subcontractors, in each case, before Contractor and each Subcontractor commence any of the Work. The cost of all required insurance and bonds is included within the Contract Sum. Contractor shall furnish and maintain, and cause its Subcontractors to furnish and maintain, insurance in accordance with the insurance requirements of this Article 3, and the furnishing and maintenance of all insurance required by Contractor and its Subcontractors as provided in this Article 3 shall be a condition precedent to (1) the right of Contractor and the Subcontractor to commence Work; and (2) any payment otherwise due to Contractor.

3.2.6 Reduction in Available Insurance. The Contractor and each of its Subcontractors shall promptly inform the Owner of any reduction of coverage because of revised limits, claims paid, or both. Owner shall have the right to require Contractor, as a condition of continued employment in connection with the Work, to obtain (or to require the applicable Subcontractor to obtain) supplemental or replacement coverage to offset any reduced coverage, at the sole cost or expense of Contractor, within ten (10) days after demand.

3.2.7 Cost of Insurance; Responsibility for Deductible. The cost of all insurance furnished by Contractor and its Subcontractors is included within the Contract Sum. Contractor and its Subcontractor shall be responsible for all losses that are not covered by the deductibles, or are excluded from coverage under the policies of insurance they furnish.

3.2.8 Additional Proofs of Insurance. Contractor shall, within ten (10) days after request, provide Owner with certified copies of all certificates and endorsements evidencing coverage in compliance with this Addendum.

3.2.9 Uninsured Losses. Owner shall not be responsible for any uninsured loss or damage incurred by Contractor, Subcontractors or other Lower Tier Persons in connection with the Work.. Payment and Performance Bonds, if required in Exhibit A, will be furnished as provided in Exhibit D.. The furnishing and maintenance of all insurance and bonds required of Contractor and its Subcontractors and Sub-Subcontractors as provided in this Agreement shall be a condition precedent to any payment otherwise due; and, if Contractor or any Subcontractor or Sub-Subcontractor fails to furnish or maintain any policy of insurance or bond required of it, Owner may, in addition to, and without prejudice to any other remedies available to it under this Agreement or applicable Law, with two (2) days notice, purchase equivalent insurance or bonds. Owner shall be reimbursed by Contractor, upon demand and/or by way of Withholding from amounts otherwise due to Contractor, for all expenses Owner incurs in connection with obtaining such insurance or bonds.


ARTICLE 4. Contract Time; Project Schedule; Time Extension; Final Completion.. Contractor shall commence the Work on the Date of Commencement established by Owner in a written Notice to Proceed as provided in Section 1.2.. Contractor shall accomplish “Substantial Completion” of the Project (defined as the date when Owner and Architect have each issued their written approval of the Project as having been sufficiently completed so that any remaining Work, such as minor punch list items, does not preclude Owner from lawfully taking occupancy and utilizing the Project, and all equipment, utilities and engineered systems installed by Contractor are established as fully operational after testing and start-up performed by Contractor, and the governmental permitting agency (if a permit is required) has issued its temporary certificate of occupancy) not later than the Substantial Completion Date established in Section 1.3. Contractor shall accomplish “Final Completion” (defined as the later of when Architect has made its final inspection and has issued its final written approval of the Work, Owner has accepted the Work in writing, and all applicable (if any) permitting authorities have issued their written final approval of the Work (or such agencies are not able to issue their final approvals solely by reason of incomplete requirements that are not Contractor’s responsibility under the Contract Documents)) by the Final Completion Date established in Section 1.4. Contractor agrees these are reasonable deadlines for accomplishing Substantial Completion and Final Completion of the Work, taking into account all foreseeable contingencies.. If a Project Schedule is not attached as Exhibit B to this Agreement, Contractor will, not later than five (5) days after the date this Agreement is signed on behalf of both Parties, prepare and submit to Owner and Architect Contractor’s proposed project schedule for the Work in the form attached as Exhibit B. The proposed project schedule shall be sufficiently detailed and integrated to demonstrate the timing, duration and sequencing of each element of the Work, in a logical order, with a reasonable critical path showing how Contractor will accomplish Substantial Completion and Final Completion by the respective Contract Times, taking into account the Scheduled Weather Delays and progressive adjustment as necessary to avoid disruption of Owner’s ongoing operations and/or to coordinate with Owner’s separate Vendors. Contractor shall make whatever changes to the proposed project schedule Owner reasonably requires as a condition of its approval (the project schedule in form approved by Owner in writing is hereafter referred to as the “Project Schedule”). Contractor shall adhere to the Owner-approved Project Schedule at all times during the Work, unless it has received Owner’s prior written approval for a deviation from or modification to the Project Schedule. The Project Schedule shall be revised at least monthly, or at more frequent intervals as required by the conditions of the Work and Project, provided that each revision of the Project Schedule shall provide for expeditious and practicable execution of the Work consistent with the Contract Times. Compliance with the requirements of this Section 4.3 shall be a condition precedent to any payment otherwise due to Contractor. No acceptance, review, non-review, approval, objection or failure to object, in connection with any proposed or approved Project Schedule by Owner shall relieve Contractor from its sole responsibility for ensuring that the Work is properly scheduled and completed within the Contract Times. Contractor shall advise Owner in writing of an unexcused delay or imminent delay and shall take all necessary actions to recover the planned progress of the Work including:

(a) providing a detailed, accurate plan to recover the planned progress of the Work;

(b) working overtime, weekends, or additional shifts;

(c) increasing the labor and equipment on the Project;

(d) expediting the delivery of long-lead materials; or

(e) taking other actions to recover the planned progress of the Work.

Should Contractor fail to take appropriate corrective action, Owner may, upon seven (7) days written notice, direct Contractor to take any of the above referenced actions to recover without adjustment to the Contract Sum.. The Substantial Completion and Final Completion Dates (the “Contract Time(s)”) may be equitably extended by Change Directive or Contract Amendment to the extent the critical path of the Work is necessarily delayed by:

(a) a Change Directive;

(b) any of the following force majeure (“Force Majeure”) events to the extent they are not caused or contributed to by Contractor, or by any Subcontractor or other person or entity for whom Contractor is responsible: fire, war, damage or disruption committed on behalf of any foreign interests to further international political


objectives, injunction in connection with litigation, governmental action, or, severe and adverse weather conditions exceeding the Scheduled Weather Days and beyond those reasonably anticipatable as of the Effective Date;

(c) the failure of Owner to make any decision within a reasonable time but not later than ten (10) days after written request from Contractor accompanied by all documents and other information necessary for making the decision; or

(d) any other cause which, in Owner’s reasonable opinion, constitutes an excusable delay; provided that Contractor has timely perfected a Contractor Claim for additional time arising from the alleged delay as provided in Article 13.

Contractor shall use reasonable efforts to minimize any such delays and shall cooperate with Owner to mitigate the impact of any delays encountered by Contractor that would entitle it to an extension of time, even if its performance is unreasonably delayed by Owner. Contractor’s sole and exclusive remedy for a Force Majeure event shall be an extension of time.. If Contractor does not accomplish Final Completion by the Final Completion Date. Owner may thereafter take control of the Site, effective upon delivery of written Notice to Contractor, and Owner may engage other Vendors to complete the remaining Work, at Contractor’s expense. Owner may deduct its resulting expenses, plus twenty percent (20%), from amounts otherwise payable to Contractor. Contractor shall pay any amounts not so deducted within ten (10) days after demand.. The term “day” in this Agreement shall mean a calendar day except only with respect to Notices as provided in Article 20.

ARTICLE 5. Contractor’s Performance.. Contractor warrants to Owner that: (1) Contractor, and all of its Subcontractors and other Lower Tier Persons, shall perform their respective obligations under this Agreement with the professional diligence and care prevailing among highly skilled and experienced commercial Vendors and Subcontractors with demonstrated ability to timely and properly construct projects equivalent to the Project, on schedule, within budget, and without latent defects; (2) the Work shall be: (a) in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, (b) free from defects, and (c) fit for Owner’s intended use; (3) all Construction Materials shall be new and in excellent condition, except to the extent specifically provided otherwise in the Contract Documents; and (4) Contractor and each of its Subcontractors and other Lower Tier Persons now hold and will continue to hold all licenses, registrations and other approvals necessary for the lawful furnishing of the Work. Unless limited or Modified by the Contract Documents, all warranty, guarantee, and special warranty obligations under this Agreement shall commence or go into effect no earlier than Substantial Completion of the entire Work, survive Final Payment to Contractor, and continue until time-barred under the Applicable Laws.. Contractor shall comply with, and give all notices and take all actions required by all permits (“Permits”) issued for the Work. Contractor shall obtain the Permits for which it is responsible under the Contract Documents, and shall proactively assist Architect and Owner, as they may request, in connection with their efforts to obtain Permits for which they are responsible.. Contractor shall promptly furnish to Architect and any applicable Consultant, so as not to result in delays in completion of the Project: (1) all shop drawings, catalogs, samples, material lists and other submittals (collectively “Submittals”) required by the Contract Documents or requested by Owner or Architect; and (2) Contractor’s requests for interpretation and/or clarification of architectural, engineering or other design related requirements of any of the Contract Documents.. All deviations from the Contract Documents shall be noted clearly on Contractor’s Submittals and by separate cover letter in which Contractor shall describe the deviation with reference to the specific plan or specification, and shall state reasons for the deviation. Approval by Architect or Owner of a Submittal will not constitute approval of any deviation from the Contract Documents unless the deviations have been conspicuously identified on both the Submittal and separate cover letter, and the approval is in writing. Contractor will not order any Construction Materials or commence the corresponding element of Work until the applicable Submittals have been approved in writing by Architect and Owner.

5.5 Tests.

5.5.1 Contractor shall monitor and test the quality of the Work during construction to protect Owner against defective or non-conforming Work. Contractor shall make the results of each and every such test available to Owner upon Owner’s request.


5.5.2 In addition to and not in lieu of Contractor’s testing obligations under paragraph 5.5.1, Owner will employ an independent consultant to test Materials if and to the extent testing is required by the Contract Documents. Owner shall make the results of each and every such test available to Contractor upon Contractor’s request.

5.5.3 Contractor shall notify Owner, Architect and any Owner designee in writing when any portion of the Work is ready for any inspection required by the Contract Documents. Contractor, Architect and any Owner designee shall promptly inspect such Work and identify any defective or non-conforming items.

5.5.4 In addition to inspections under subparagraph 5.5.3, Owner may direct Contractor to allow inspection or testing of any portion of the Work at any time, for any reason.

5.5.5 After any inspection under this Paragraph is complete, Contractor shall promptly repair or replace any defective or non-conforming Work. Upon correction, but before covering, Contractor shall notify Owner, Architect and any Owner designee of the need to re-inspect such Work.

5.5.6 The Contract Sum may be adjusted in strict accordance with Article 12 of this Agreement for the reasonable direct cost to uncover, inspect, test, and recover any portion of the Work found to be without defects and conforming to the Contract Documents, unless such Work was uncovered as a result of Contractor’s failure to notify Owner, Architect and any Owner designee of an inspection required by the Contract Documents.

5.5.7 Contractor shall not be reimbursed for any cost or expense to uncover, re-inspect, and cover any defective or non-conforming Work, or any Work uncovered as a result of Contractor’s failure to notify Owner, Architect and any Owner designee of an inspection required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall reimburse Owner, or Owner may deduct from any payments otherwise due Contractor, any costs and expenses Owner incurs to uncover, re-inspect, and cover any defective or non-conforming Work, or any Work uncovered as a result of Contractor’s failure to notify Owner, Architect and any Owner designee of a test or inspection required by the Contract Documents.

5.5.8 No observation, test, approval, or inspection under this Section 5.5 shall relieve Contractor from conformance with the Contract Documents.

5.6 Uncovering Work; Correction of Work During Construction.

5.6.1 Owner or Architect may require Contractor to uncover Work for inspection and testing. If the Work had been covered without Contractor’s compliance with all applicable inspection and approval requirements of the Contract Documents, or any mutually agreed upon protocol between by Owner and Contractor for inspection/approval before covering of Work (“Work Covering Protocol”), Contractor shall properly remedy or replace all nonconforming or deficient Work, and adjacent property damaged thereby, to Owner’s satisfaction, and Contractor shall pay the costs Owner reasonably incurs in connection with uncovering, testing, inspection and remedial work, subject to Article 21. If the Work had been covered in accordance with such Work Covering Protocol, Owner shall pay the costs Contractor reasonably incurs in connection with the uncovering, testing, inspection, remedial and restoration work, subject to Article 21.

5.6.2 Contractor shall promptly, so as not to interfere with the Contract Times, remove and replace, at Contractor’s expense, any Work that is rejected by Owner or Architect as defective, contrary to Contractor’s warranties or otherwise not in accordance with the Contract Documents. If Contractor does not correct such deficient or nonconforming Work within seven (7) days after receipt of written notice from Owner to do so, Owner may, without prejudice to any other remedies it may have, take whatever steps are necessary to correct the deficient or nonconforming Work, and Contractor will pay Owner the costs Owner reasonably incurs in connection with the remedial and corrective Work.

5.7 Call Back Warranty; Provided in Addition to all Other Claims, Rights and Remedies.

5.7.1 In addition to and not in lieu of any other warranty obligations under the Contract Documents, Contractor shall promptly and diligently repair, replace, and make new any portion of the Work in which:


(a) Any defect in materials, equipment, or workmanship (“Defective Work”) appears or arises within one year from the Substantial Completion Date of the entire Work, or within the term of any special extended warranties, unless Owner specifically accepts in writing such Defective Work, or Owner allows, at its sole discretion, the one-year correction period to commence earlier for materials, equipment, or workmanship wholly contained within a single phase of the Project.

(b) Any failure to conform to the Contract Documents (“Non-Conforming Work”) is discovered before expiration of the applicable Statute of Limitations or Statute or Repose, whichever is longer, unless Owner specifically accepts such Non-Conforming Work in writing.

5.7.2 Owner shall promptly notify Contractor in writing of any Defective Work or Non-Conforming Work within the applicable period of the correction warranty.

5.7.3 Within five (5) days after receipt of notice, Contractor shall promptly commence and diligently pursue correction of the Defective Work or Non-Conforming Work, including removal and replacement of any damage caused to other portions of the Work thereby. Contractor shall coordinate all corrective activities with Owner to avoid or mitigate any loss to Owner of business, production, efficiency, or enjoyment of the Project.

5.7.4 If Contractor fails to commence and diligently pursue correction of any Defective Work or Non-Conforming Work within five (5) days of Owner’s notice under subparagraph 5.7.2, or if the Defective Work or Non-Conforming Work creates an Emergency, or if the Defective Work or Non-Conforming Work will, in Owner’s opinion, result in unreasonable loss to Owner of business, production, efficiency, or enjoyment of the Project, Owner may, without notice or waiver of any right or remedy against Contractor and any responsible Subcontractor, correct the Defective Work or Non-Conforming Work.

5.7.5 Contractor shall reimburse Owner within thirty (30) days of receipt of Owner’s written invoice for all costs and expenses incurred by Owner in connection with this Section 5.7.. Contractor’s relationship to Owner is in all respects that of an independent contractor. Except only to the extent specifically directed in the Contract Documents with respect to a particular element of the Work, Contractor shall be solely responsible for the manner in which the Work is performed consistent with Contractor’s obligations under this Agreement. Contractor shall not be deemed an employee of Owner for any purpose. This Agreement shall, in no respect, be construed to create a partnership, joint venture or agency between the Owner and Contractor. Neither Owner nor Contractor shall have the right or power to bind or obligate the other for any liabilities or obligations without its prior written consent.

5.9 Background Checks. Contractor certifies that it will not employ or use any individual to perform Work under this Agreement who has had a criminal conviction in the past 5 years for crimes involving theft, violence, weapons, or drugs, or who is confirmed to appear on the Violent Sexual Offender and Predator Registry. Contractor will ensure that its Subcontractors can provide an identical certification prior to any Commencement Date. The Contractor agrees to include a clause requiring the certification in any Project related agreement with a Subcontractor.

ARTICLE 6. Contract Sum and Schedule of Values.

6.1 Schedule of Values.

6.1.1 At the time of executing this Agreement, Contractor shall submit to Owner a Schedule of Values that fairly and accurately apportions the actual costs and expenses Contractor anticipates it will incur as an immediate and proximate result of performing the Work whether performed by the Contractor’s own forces or through those of others inclusive of any allowances, and all Contractor’s field, overhead, direct and support Costs for the Project, in such form and detail as reasonably required by Owner to verify its accuracy. Such detail may be shown within Exhibit L-3, the Project Schedule of Values Form.

6.1.2 Contractor shall not front-load, or otherwise materially misrepresent Contractor’s estimated costs or expenses for any line item in the Schedule of Values. Upon Owner’s request, Contractor shall furnish Owner with documents that confirm the accuracy of the estimated costs or expenses for each line item in the Schedule of Values.


6.1.3 Owner acknowledges that Contractor does not guarantee the maximum cost of any particular line item in the Schedule of Values, as the Contract Sum is Owner’s maximum obligation to pay the aggregate of all line items in the Schedule of Values.

6.1.4 Contractor shall revise the Schedule of Values to include all executed Change Orders.

6.1.5 Contractor shall not make adjustments to any incorrect line items in the Schedule of Values without first receiving authorization from Owner through an approved Change Request, which is subsequently incorporated by Change Order.

6.1.6 The Schedule of Values shall be used as a basis to review and approve Applications for Payment.

6.1.7 Contractor shall not use or retain any funds, except to the extent specifically identified in Exhibit F.

6.2 Stored Materials

6.2.1 Contractor’s Applications for Payment may include, with Owner’s prior written approval, the cost to Contractor of materials and equipment

(a) delivered undamaged,

(b) inspected by Contractor for conformance with the Contract Documents,

(c) adequately protected,

(d) properly insured, and

(e) suitably stored at the Site or any approved off-Site location for subsequent incorporation into the Work.

6.2.2 Owner may reject any location for the storage of materials and equipment for any reason. Approval of a storage location for materials or equipment shall not constitute approval of the same location for other materials or equipment, including those of the same make, model, or type previously approved.

6.2.3 Owner’s approval and obligation to make payment for stored materials and equipment at the Site or any other location shall be conditioned upon Contractor providing Owner with satisfactory evidence:

(a) Owner has good title to the materials and equipment, free and clear of all claims, liens, security interests, and encumbrances;

(b) all costs of storage, inspection, security, and transportation related to the materials and equipment were paid; and

(c) all warranties, guaranty, and special warranties for the materials and equipment will remain in effect and toll for the entire time of storage.

ARTICLE 7. Progress Payments.. Contractor may submit to Architect an itemized Application for Payment on or before the 20th day of the month for the period ending on the 20th day of the month. Contractor’s Application for Payment shall be in the form attached to this Agreement as Exhibit L-2, and include an appropriately completed Contractor’s Invoice Summary consistent with Exhibit L-1, which shall be properly completed and contain sufficient detail to allow Architect to readily verify the accuracy of the amounts requested therein.


7.2 Amount of Application.

7.2.1 Notwithstanding anything to the contrary herein, Contractor shall not apply for payment of an amount greater than the Contract Sum multiplied by the actual percent completion of the entire Work through the last day of the pay period.

7.2.2 Contractor shall not apply for payment for any portion of the Work:

(a) not executed, unless specifically provided for otherwise in the Contract Documents; or

(b) that exceeds the amount allocated for that item of Work in the Schedule of Values.. The Application for Payment shall be notarized and signed by Contractor’s Representative, who shall swear or affirm under oath that:

(a) Contractor has paid or will pay, all bills for labor, materials, equipment, and services furnished to the Project through the date of the previous Application for Payment; and

(b) each portion of the Work represented in the current Application for Payment was properly performed, without known defects, and completed to the extent indicated.. Contractor shall include the following documents with each Application for Payment:

(a) Properly executed and witnessed “Contractor’s Partial Waiver and Release of Lien to Owner” from Contractor in the form attached to this Agreement as Exhibit G, through the date of the current Application for Payment.

(b) Properly executed and witnessed Contractor’s Partial Waiver and Release of Lien from Contractor in the statutory form, if any, used in the state where the Project is located.

. With each and every payment request from a Subcontractor, Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to provide the Contractor with a properly executed, witnessed, and notarized “Interim Lien Waiver and Release Upon Payment,” in a form acceptable to Owner, through the date of the current application for payment. Such “Interim Waiver and Release Upon Final Payment” waivers shall be provided to Owner or Architect upon request.

. Contractor shall not request, and Owner shall not be obligated to pay, any portion of an unsigned Change Order, authorized Change Directive, or pending Claim; provided, however, Contractor may request payment and Owner shall pay any undisputed portions of a Change Request executed by Owner submitted with a Change Order executed by both Contractor and Architect to the extent authorized by the Change Request. Contractor shall also not request payment for any portion of the Work performed by a Subcontractor for which Contractor does not intend to promptly pay such Subcontractor..

7.7.1 Architect shall review and compare Contractor’s Application for Payment with the actual progress, quality, and quantity or the Work on the Project within five (5) days of receipt, and either certify the Application for Payment, in whole or in part, or inform the Owner and Contractor of its reasons for withholding certification.

7.7.2 Architect’s certification of Contractor’s Application for Payment is a representation to Owner alone that the Application for Payment reasonably appears proper in form, substance, and support.

7.8 Payment.

7.8.1 Subject to any reasonable Lender requirements, Owner shall review Contractor’s Application for Payment and pay Contractor the undisputed amount of such Application for Payment, less retainage, within fifteen (15) days of Architect’s certification of Contractor’s Application for Payment.

7.8.2 The amount of each Progress Payment, or Final Payment otherwise payable to Contractor shall be reduced by the following, as applicable and as permitted under Applicable Law, in addition to retainage:


(a) The items identified in all applicable Applications for Payment and/or amendments thereto for items such as incomplete or defective work, failures to make payment to Subcontractors; or

(b) Any additional amounts Owner in good faith believes are necessary to withhold, back charge, or setoff in order to satisfy or cover any actual or reasonably anticipated loss, liability, damage or judgment that Owner has incurred or may incur in connection with Contractor’s performance or non-performance of this Agreement.

(c) Any material misrepresentation by Contractor in the Application for Payment.

(d) Any Claims, setoffs, credits, and deductions that Owner may have against the Contract Sum.

(e) Unsatisfactory progress of the Work relative to the Construction Schedule.

(f) Contractor’s failure to promptly remedy all defective or non-conforming Work.

(g) Work in dispute.

(h) Any unreleased lien, claim, security interest, or encumbrance recorded by any Subcontractor against the real property where the Project is located.

(i) Contractor’s failure to satisfy any payment obligations in connection with the Work.

(j) Any damage caused by Contractor to Owner, Architect, other Designers, or Separate Contractors.

(k) Owner’s reasonable information and belief that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum.

(l) Reasonable information and belief that the Work cannot be completed within the Contract Time.

(m) Contractor’s repeated failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

(n) Contractor’s failure to submit accurate and complete Applications for Payment, affidavits, and waivers.

Owner will make appropriate adjustments to any withheld funds after final disposition of the matter, condition, event or claim that resulted in such withholding. If the expense incurred by Owner is less than the amount withheld, Owner shall release the difference to Contractor within fourteen (14) days after such final disposition inclusive of appeals. If, however, such expense exceeds the unpaid amounts otherwise due, the Contractor shall pay the difference within fourteen (14) days after written demand from Owner.

7.8.3 In the event Owner withholds any sums from Contractor pursuant to subparagraph 7.8.2, Owner shall provide Contractor with a written list of the specific amounts and reasons for withholding such sums on or before the date that the payment of such sums would otherwise become due.

7.8.4 Contractor shall notify Owner in writing in the event Owner fails to make payment to Contractor within seven (7) days after the date such payment becomes due and payable and Owner has failed to provide Contractor with Owner’s reason(s) for withholding such payment. Contractor may stop the Work if Owner fails to make the payment or provide its reasons for withholding payment to Contractor within seven (7) additional days after Owner receives Contractor’s notice.

7.8.5 Owner’s payment to Contractor for any sum withheld under subparagraph 7.8.2 shall become due within fifteen (15) days after all reasons for withholding such sum have been removed, satisfied, or resolved to Owner’s reasonable satisfaction.

7.8.6 Owner’s payment of any Application for Payment shall not constitute acceptance of any portion of the Work, nor excuse Contractor from the proper performance of any obligation under the Contract Documents.


ARTICLE 8. Final Payment.

8.1.1 Contractor’s Final Application for Payment shall include the following items, which shall be conditions precedent to Owner’s obligation to make Final Payment to Contractor:

(a) Properly executed and witnessed “Contractor’s Affidavit and Final Waiver and Release” from Contractor in the form attached to this Agreement as Exhibit I. Contractor shall cause its Subcontractors to execute a similar affidavit, and final waiver and release, of Owner and the Project.

(b) Evidence that each and every Claim of Lien recorded by Contractor and any Subcontractors against the Work, Site, or real property where the Project is located has been canceled of record either by satisfaction, release, or dissolution bond;

(c) Consent of Contractor’s surety to Final Payment if Contractor is obligated to provide a bond under the Contract Documents;

(d) All close-out documents required by the Contract Documents including completed final cost reconciliation and closeout checklist in the forms attached as Exhibit M;

(e) All certificates of insurance for any Contractor or Subcontractor furnished insurance coverages that will remain in effect after Final Payment; and

(f) All other documents reasonably required by Owner or its Lender.

(g) Properly executed and witnessed Lien Waiver and Release upon Final Payment from Contractor and all Subcontractors in the statutory form, if any, used in the state where the Project is located.

Final Payment shall be made by Owner to Contractor within thirty (30) days of the date when Owner Approves Contractor’s Final Application for Payment.

ARTICLE 9. RESERVED

ARTICLE 10. Additional Terms and Conditions of Payment to Contractor.. Notwithstanding anything in this Agreement to the contrary, Contractor shall not be entitled to any payment otherwise payable under this Agreement until the applicable Application for Progress Payment, or Application for Final Payment, accompanying backup, waivers and releases, and other documentation are approved by Owner as meeting the requirements of this Agreement.

10.2 Retainage. Retainage shall be held by Owner as additional security for performance of Contractor’s obligations, and may be applied by Owner towards payment of any backcharge, setoff, or other amount payable by Contractor to Owner. After the Work is fifty percent (50%) complete Contractor may submit a request for reduction of the amount of Retainage to be withheld from subsequent Progress Payments. If Contractor has performed its obligations on schedule and is otherwise in compliance with the Contract Documents, Owner shall have the right, but not the obligation, to reduce the amount of Retainage from future Progress Payments to not less than percent ( %), subject to Owner’s right to later reinstate percent ( %) Retainage if Contractor thereafter fails to perform any responsibility under the Contract Documents. With the regular Progress Payment after Contractor has accomplished Substantial Completion, Owner may release unapplied Retainage to Contractor, less an amount equal to two hundred percent (200%) times Owner’s estimate of the costs it would incur to engage a third party to complete any remaining Work. With the Final Payment, any unapplied retainage shall be released to Contractor.. The amount of each Progress Payment, or Final Payment, otherwise payable to Contractor shall be reduced by the following sums (“Withholding”), as applicable, in addition to Retainage as such sums as are permitted under applicable Law on account of (a) the items identified in all applicable Certificates for Payment and/or Deficiency Notices and amendments thereto, or (b) any additional amounts Owner in good faith believes are necessary to withhold, backcharge, or setoff in order to satisfy or cover any actual or reasonably anticipated loss, liability, damage or judgment that Owner has incurred or may incur in connection with Contractor’s performance or non-performance of this Agreement. Owner will make appropriate adjustments to Withholding after final disposition of


the matter, condition, event or claim that resulted in such Withholding. If the expense incurred by Owner is less than the amount withheld, Owner shall release the difference to Contractor within fourteen (14) days after such final disposition.. Owner shall have the right, exercisable in its discretion, to: (1) issue joint checks or (2) pay any Subcontractor directly for performance of the Work. Contractor agrees to accept joint checks and to execute, when requested by Owner, joint check agreements in a form acceptable to Owner. Contractor consents to such direct payments and joint checks, as well as to Owner communicating directly with Contractor’s Subcontractors, Sub-Subcontractors and other Lower Tier Persons to verify Contractor’s payment history and account status. Payments made by Owner in accordance with this Section shall be credited against amounts otherwise due to Contractor.. Contractor warrants that, provided Owner has paid all amounts otherwise currently due to Contractor, after all just setoffs, Retainage and Withholding, Contractor will not record or file, and will not cause, suffer or permit its Lower Tier Persons to record or file, any liens or stop notices in connection with the Project. If Contractor does not release any lien or stop notice recorded or filed by Contractor, or by any Lower Tier Person contrary to this Section, within ten (10) days after receipt of demand from Owner, Owner may (1) cause to be recorded the payment bonds, lien discharge bonds, or stop notice release bonds necessary to release and discharge the lien and/or to result in release of funds held in response to the stop notice or bonded stop notice pursuant to applicable Law; or (2) in the alternative, Owner may thereafter retain, out of any amount due or to become due the Contractor, one hundred fifty percent (150%) of the face amount claimed in the lien, stop notice or bonded stop notice together with any additional sums Owner considers necessary to protect Owner from loss or expense arising from such lien, stop notice or bonded stop notice; and, in either case, Contractor shall reimburse Owner for all resulting expenses incurred by Owner, including, but not limited to, bond premiums, recording charges, attorneys’ fees and disbursements. The provisions of this Article 11 shall not limit the rights otherwise available to Owner under applicable Law.

ARTICLE 12. Changes; Change Orders; Change Directives; Field Directives.

12.1 Changes.

12.1.1 Owner may make changes to the Work and Contract Documents at any time without invalidating this Agreement, including changes that alter, modify, add to, or deduct from the Work, but only if and to the extent such changes are made strictly in accordance with this Article 12.

12.1.2 The number, magnitude, timing, or cost of changes shall not excuse Contractor’s obligation to perform such changes, unless and to the extent such changes are clearly outside the general scope of Work, and of a completely different nature from the Work called for in the Contract Documents.

12.1.3 Changes in the Work or Contract Documents shall be effective only if made by a properly executed Change Order, Change Directive, or Field Directive.

12.1.4 Contractor shall perform any change in the Work promptly upon execution and issuance of a Change Order or Change Directive.

12.1.5 Contractor’s markup for overhead and profit associated with any change in the Work shall not exceed percent ( %). A Subcontractor’s markup for overhead and profit for any change in the Work shall not exceed:

(a) Ten percent (10%) of the actual or estimated direct cost of such Work when the Subcontractor performs the change in the Work with its own labor, and

(b) Five percent (5%) cumulative for all tiers of Subcontractors who perform the change in the Work through other Subcontractors.

12.1.6 Nothing contained in this Paragraph 12.1 is intended to preclude Owner or Contractor from making a Claim in accordance with Article 21 if Owner and Contractor disagree about the scope of Work, proposed changes, or whether Contractor is entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time for any properly executed Change Directive or Field Directive.


12.2 Change Requests.

12.2.1 Upon Owner’s request or at its own initiative, Contractor shall promptly submit to Owner and Architect a Change Request in the form attached hereto as Exhibit J identifying all proposed adjustments to the Contract Sum or Contract Time or both that result directly and indirectly from each potential modification to the Work or Contract Documents.

12.2.2 Owner shall accept, reject, or otherwise respond to the Change Request within a reasonable time. Contractor shall notify Owner in writing if a decision on the Change Request is required in less than thirty (30) days to avoid any delay or disruption in the performance of the Work.

12.2.3 Contractor shall not perform any Work affected by a Change Request until Owner directs Contractor to proceed. Contractor shall not be entitled to an adjustment to the Contract Sum or Contract Time to the extent that Contractor prematurely performs any such Work.

12.2.4 Contractor shall diligently perform the Work described in a Change Request in the event Owner directs Contractor to proceed with such Work before the parties execute a Change Order, in which case the Change Request shall be treated as a Change Directive.

12.3 Change Orders.

12.3.1 Contractor shall prepare, and Owner, Architect and Contractor shall execute, a Change Order in the form attached as Exhibit H once they reach agreement to modify the Work or Contract Documents, and any adjustments to the Contract Sum or Contract Time or both as a result thereof.

12.3.2 A Change Order shall include all adjustments to the Contract Sum or Contract Time or both that result directly or indirectly from the subject matter of the Change Order. All Claims arising out of or relating to an executed Change Order shall be deemed waived unless specifically identified and reserved in the Change Order.

12.3.3 The Change Order shall include adjustments to the Contract Sum and Contract Time that result directly from premium increases or deductions resulting from the change in the Work, consistent with any unit rates of insurance established in the Contract Documents.

12.3.4 At Owner’s option, Contractor shall identify in the Change Order all activities on the most current Construction Schedule affected by the changes therein. Contractor’s failure to identify in the Change Order a particular activity affected by a change shall not be grounds for a Contractor Claim, irrespective of whether such effects are known or unknown at the time of execution.

12.4 Change Directives.

12.4.1 Owner may issue a Change Directive to expedite construction, or where the parties cannot agree on an adjustment to the Contract Sum or Contract Time for a modification or change in the Work.

12.4.2 Upon receipt of a Change Directive, Contractor shall diligently proceed with the Work as changed or modified by the Change Directive.

12.4.3 At Owner’s option, a Change Directive may provide a method for adjusting the Contract Sum, Contract Time, or both, in which case Contractor shall keep careful and accurate records in accordance with the method specified in the Change Directive. Such methods include, without limitation:

(a) A lump sum adjustment, based upon Contractor’s proposal to perform the changes, as generally supported by Contractor’s actual records;

(b) A unit price adjustment, based upon a unit price and actual quantities and time impacts, as supported by surveys, tests, or Contractor’s actual records; or

(c) An actual cost and time adjustment, based upon Contractor’s actual cost records.


12.4.4 Contractor may make a Claim in accordance with Article 13 of this Agreement if Contractor objects to the method specified in the Change Directive for making an adjustment. Contractor shall comply with Paragraph 13.2.2 while the Claim is pending.

12.4.5 Contractor may apply for payment and Owner shall make payment for any undisputed portion of a Change Directive in accordance with Article 7 of this Agreement.

12.4.6 Unit prices may be equitably adjusted if it is subsequently determined that the unit price will cause substantial inequity to either Owner or Contractor due to gross mistakes in the character of such items.

12.4.7 The parties shall prepare and execute a Change Order in accordance with Paragraph 12.3 of this Agreement upon completion of the Work in a Change Directive and agreement to any adjustments to the Contract Sum or Contract Time or both as a result thereof.

12.5 Field Directives.

12.5.1 Contractor shall promptly perform the Work in a Field Directive without adjustment to the Contract Sum or Contract Time.

12.5.2 Contractor may make a Claim pursuant to Paragraph 13.2 if Contractor reasonably believes that the Work in a Field Directive is neither required by the Contract Documents, nor a minor change, selection, instruction, or clarification in the Work.

ARTICLE 13. Claims.

13.1 General.

13.1.1 All demands, assertions or affirmations of right made in good faith by either Owner or Contractor to the other seeking to adjust the Contract Sum or Contract Time or to interpret any dispute between Owner and Contractor arising out of or relating to the Contract Documents (a “Claim”) shall be deemed abandoned and waived, unless made in strict accordance with this Article 13.

13.1.2 Owner and Contractor shall continue to perform their obligations under the Contract Documents pending final resolution of any Claim made by either party pursuant to this Article 13.

13.2 Making Claims.

13.2.1 To make a Claim, Contractor must state in writing to Owner all known and presumed facts upon which the Claim is based, including (i) the character, duration, and extent of any cause, condition or event that will or reasonably may create or give rise to any Claim (“Claim Incident”); (ii) the date that Contractor or any Subcontractor or any employee, officer, agent, representative, or consultant of either of them, first knew of the Claim Incident; (iii) any construction activities impacted by the Claim Incident; and (iv) the cost and time consequences of the Claim Incident. No Claim shall be considered effective until such information is provided.

13.2.2 To make a Claim, Owner must state in writing to Contractor all known and presumed facts upon which the Claim is based, including (i) the character, duration, and extent of the Claim Incident; (ii) the date that Owner or any employee, officer, agent, representative, or consultant of Owner first knew of the Claim Incident; and (iii) the cost consequences of the Claim Incident. No Claim shall be considered effective until such information is provided.

13.2.3 The claimant shall only be required to comply with subparagraph 13.2.1 or 13.2.2, as the case may be, once for continuing Claim Incidents, provided the Claim expressly states that the Claim Incident is continuing, and includes the claimant’s best estimate of the time and cost consequences of the Claim Incident. Thereafter, the claimant shall periodically review, update, and inform the other party of the actual cost and time consequences of the continuing Claim Incident.

13.2.4 Owner and Contractor acknowledge that the other party will be prejudiced if a claimant fails to provide timely, detailed, and complete notice of each Claim Incident.


13.2.5 Verbal notice, shortness of time, or the other party’s actual knowledge of a particular Claim Incident shall not waive, satisfy, discharge, or otherwise excuse the claimant’s strict compliance with this Paragraph.

13.2.6 Regardless of cause, Contractor and Owner shall cooperate with each other to avoid or mitigate the effects of any Claim Incident. At Owner’s written request, Contractor shall take reasonable actions to avoid or mitigate the effects of a Claim Incident, including working overtime, weekends, or additional shifts; increasing the labor and equipment on the Project; expediting the delivery of critical equipment and materials, or taking other reasonable measures to recover the planned progress of the Work. Contractor may be entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time or both for such actions to the extent authorized by the Contract Documents.

13.2.7 Should Contractor desire to make a Claim, Contractor shall make the Claim to Owner in writing within ten (10) days after Contractor knew or reasonably should have known of the Claim Incident.

13.2.8 Should Contractor be unable to make a Claim within the time set forth in this Paragraph 13.2, Contractor may notify Owner in writing and automatically obtain a ten (10) day time extension within which to make the Claim if the notice is received by Owner before the time for making a Claim has expired.

13.2.9 No time period contained herein shall be construed as limiting any right under the Applicable Laws to file a claim of lien or to make a demand under a payment or performance bond.

ARTICLE 14. Site Conditions; Improper or Differing Conditions.. Contractor acknowledges that it: (1) has inspected the visible portions of the Site, reviewed the soils report, and performed other due diligence with respect to existing conditions; (2) considers the Owner’s soil report adequate to verify the conditions of the soils and other conditions at the Site that may affect its performance of the Work; (3) has observed no defects, discrepancies or problems with the Site or in the application of the Contract Documents to the Site that would require further investigation (except those that have been reported to Owner in writing); and (4) accepts the condition of the soils and the Site as being fit and proper to receive Contractor’s Work, except only for concealed or unknown conditions differing materially from those expected to be encountered, and which could not reasonably have been detected by Contractor’s investigation.. If, at any time Contractor encounters conditions at the Site that are not suitable for the proper and accurate performance of any of the Work including, without limitation, deficiencies in the design or in the condition of existing construction, conditions in or beneath the Site that differ materially from indications in the Contract Documents, or other improper or differing conditions that may adversely impact the Work and that are not provided for in the Contract Documents (collectively, “Improper or Differing Conditions”), Contractor shall promptly discontinue Work in the affected area, leaving the Improper or Differing Conditions as they are found (taking reasonable precautions for the protection of persons and property), notify Owner and Architect (immediately by phone or email, followed by written notice within twenty-four (24) hours identifying the Improper or Differing Conditions with specificity), and await clarification and direction before Contractor proceeds with any Work that may be affected. If the Improper or Differing Conditions were not reasonably anticipatable by Contractor during its review of the Site as provided in Section 14.2, Contractor shall be entitled to equitable adjustment of the Contract Time and Contract Sum for any resulting critical path delays or additional expenses incurred by Contractor, subject to Articles 12 and 13. If Contractor proceeds with Work after discovery of an Improper or Differing Condition without notifying Owner and deferring applicable Work as provided in this Section, Contractor shall be liable and responsible to Owner for all resulting losses, liabilities, damages, and expenses and Contractor shall be deemed to have waived any right to prosecute a Contractor Claim arising from the Improper or Differing Conditions.

ARTICLE 15. Dispute Resolution.

15.1 Step Negotiation.

15.1.1 Owner and Contractor recognize that the best interest of the Project requires the timely and expeditious resolution of all disputed Claims. Owner and Contractor shall cooperate in joint efforts to quickly and fairly resolve all disputed Claims by open communication, good faith negotiation, and objective analysis of all viewpoints.

15.1.2 Within thirty (30) days of receiving a fully and properly supported Claim, the non-claiming party shall investigate the Claim, review the supporting documents, and notify the claiming party that the Claim is either:


(a) accepted in whole,

(b) denied in whole or in part, or

(c) under consideration pending further investigation or receipt of additional supporting documents.

15.1.3 The claiming party shall be bound to the non-claiming party’s denial of a Claim in whole or part unless the claiming party provides written notice of a disputed Claim within ten (10) days of the date that the claiming party receives notice of the non-claiming party’s decision to deny all or part of the Claim.

15.1.4 Owner’s and Contractor’s Representative shall meet within five (5) days of any notice of a disputed Claim, and as often as necessary thereafter, to negotiate in good faith the fair resolution of such disputed Claim.

15.1.5 If either or both of the Owner’s Construction Manager and Contractor’s Representative determine that a disputed Claim cannot be fully resolved between them, they shall collectively notify a more senior Owner’s Representative and more senior Contractor’s Representative, who shall meet within thirty (30) days of such notice to negotiate in good faith the fair resolution of the disputed Claim. If each party agrees, the more senior Representatives may elect to submit their dispute to mediation by engaging a neutral third party acceptable to both Owner and Contractor. Expenses of any such mediation shall be borne equally.

15.2 Dispute Resolution.

15.2.1 Subject to Paragraph 15.1, the parties agree to decide all unresolved disputes arising out of or related to the Contract Documents, or breach thereof, or the Work, Project, or any Claim, at Owner’s sole option, by litigation or binding arbitration.

15.2.2 By executing this Agreement, Owner and Contractor intentionally and knowingly waive any right to trial by jury, unless prohibited by the Applicable Laws.

15.2.3 Venue for any litigation or arbitration between Owner and Contractor shall be in the place where the Project is located, without regard to any choice of law rules that could apply.

15.2.4 In the event of any litigation or arbitration between the parties, the prevailing party shall be entitled to recover its reasonable attorneys’ fees, and litigation/arbitration expenses in accordance with the following terms:

(a) The prevailing party shall be the party whose last written offer of settlement is closest to the judgment or award. If the plaintiff (or claimant) makes no written offer, its last offer shall be the sum of its claims. If the defendant (or respondent) makes no written offer, its last offer shall either be zero or, if applicable, the sum of its counterclaims.

(b) Basing the prevailing party on offers of settlement shall not waive any rule of evidence, except to the extent necessary to administer and enforce this provision, which shall occur after any ruling on the merits of the claims and counterclaims, but before entry of a final judgment or award.

The remaining provisions in this paragraph apply only if this Agreement requires arbitration.

15.2.5 Arbitration shall be conducted and a single arbitrator selected in accordance with the then most current construction industry rules of the American Arbitration Association.

15.2.6 The parties shall only consider an arbitrator that is impartial, a practicing or retired attorney or judge, who has significant experience with and knowledge of construction issues and construction law.

15.2.7 To the extent allowed under the Applicable Laws, and at Owner’s sole option, the Architect, any other entity providing design services for or on behalf of Owner in connection with the Project, Subcontractor, any other entity, other than Contractor, who contracts with the Owner to perform work in connection with the Project, or


surety may be joined or have a separate arbitration consolidated with any arbitration demanded in accordance with this Paragraph 15.2, provided that:

(a) The joining or consolidating party is or reasonably may be liable to either Owner or Contractor for any of the claims and counterclaims raised by either Owner or Contractor;

(b) The joining or consolidating party will or reasonably may reduce or eliminate the risk Owner or Contractor will have to present duplicate claims in two or more arbitrations or actions, or otherwise be subject to excess liability for multiple or inconsistent awards or judgments; or

(c) The joining or consolidating party is or reasonably may be liable for any relief arising out of or relating to the same transaction or occurrence which gives rise to any dispute between Owner and Contractor.

Contractor shall include a provision in each subcontract agreement or purchase order it enters into with any Subcontractor requiring the Subcontractor to submit to joinder or consolidation in the event arbitration is demanded pursuant to this Paragraph 15.2.

15.2.8 In the event that a person described in clauses (i), (ii), or (iii) of subparagraph 15.2.7 cannot be made a party to an arbitration between Owner and Contractor, the administrator of the arbitration shall appoint an arbitrator to determine whether such person is so indispensable to the arbitration that either Owner or Contractor is likely to be prejudiced by such person’s absence. If the arbitrator determines that such person is indispensable, the prejudiced party may elect either to proceed with arbitration or to dismiss the arbitration and proceed with litigation.

15.2.9 Balancing the expediency and economy functions of arbitration with the parties’ desire to avoid surprise and narrow issues, the arbitrator shall have authority to allow the following discovery in advance of the arbitration hearing:

(a) Require the exchange of all relevant documents within the custody, control, or possession of the parties as soon as practical; and

(b) Require each party to disclose to opposing party any expert witnesses expected to testify at the arbitration hearing, exchange expert reports, and allow depositions of such expert witnesses sufficiently in advance of the arbitration hearing.

15.2.10 Issues concerning the arbitrability of a matter in dispute shall be decided by a court with proper jurisdiction.

15.2.11 Any award in arbitration may be confirmed in any court with proper jurisdiction.

15.2.12 A demand for arbitration may not be made if the matter in dispute would otherwise be barred by the applicable Statute of Limitations or Statute of Repose, or otherwise untimely under the Applicable Laws.. Contractor shall continue performance of the Work pending resolution of any Contractor Claim, or of any Dispute unless directed otherwise by Owner in writing.

ARTICLE 16. Termination.. Owner shall have the right to terminate this Agreement without notice if Contractor: (1) fails to maintain insurance required by this Agreement; (2) violates any applicable Law regulating Hazardous Substances, occupational health, job safety, environmental matters; (3) jeopardizes the health, safety or welfare of persons or property; (4) abandons the Work; (5) fails to properly disburse Owner’s payments to Subcontractors in accordance with the Contract Documents; (6) materially fails to comply with the Applicable Laws arising out of or relating to the performance of the Work; (7) fails to diligently correct defective and non-conforming Work or complete punch list items; (8) fails to furnish or maintain any insurance coverage required by the Contract Documents; or (9) breaches a material obligation of the Contract Documents. In the case of any other breach of the Contract Documents by Contractor, Owner may terminate this Agreement if Contractor fails to cure the breach within two (2) days after delivery of written notice specifying the breach or within such longer period of time as Owner may agree to in writing. In the event of termination, Contractor will immediately stop Work and remove its employees from the Site, and Owner may, without prejudice to any other right or remedy available in law or in equity, complete the


Project through alternate means in whatever manner Owner deems appropriate, and Owner may, at its election, take possession of and use the materials, equipment, tools and machinery of Contractor and its Lower Tier Persons. Contractor shall have no right to any further payment until after Owner has completed the Project and determined the amount of its costs, and expenses and damages resulting from the termination. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum otherwise payable as of the date of termination exceeds the costs Owner incurs to complete the Project, plus other costs, expenses, and damages incurred by Owner resulting from Contractor’s breaches, Owner shall pay Contractor the difference. If the expense of completing the Project plus Owner’s damages exceed such unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the difference to Owner upon demand.

16.2 Owner’s Right to Terminate for Convenience.

16.2.1 Absent bad faith, Owner may for its own convenience and without cause terminate this Agreement at will.

16.2.2 Upon receipt of Owner’s notice to terminate for convenience, Contractor shall immediately:

(a) stop, secure, protect, and preserve all existing Work, and stored materials and equipment; and

(b) cancel or terminate all subcontract agreements, purchase orders and other obligations related to the Work; and

(c) demobilize all personnel, Subcontractors, tools, and construction equipment and machinery.

16.2.3 Contractor’s sole and exclusive remedy for Owner’s termination for convenience shall be payment for:

(a) All unpaid costs and expenses Contractor incurs as an immediate and proximate result of performing the Work (“Direct Cost of the Work”) performed or earned through the date of termination, plus Contractor’s actual cost to demobilize, and to cancel any subcontract agreement for any portion of the Work.

16.3 Contractor’s Right to Terminate.

16.3.1 Contractor may place Owner in default where:

(a) Owner suspends the Work without cause for more than ninety (90) consecutive days; or

(b) Owner solely causes uncompensated Excusable Delays in the Work equal to or greater than 100% of the Contract Time,

16.3.2 Contractor may terminate this Agreement if Owner fails to cure any default under this Section 16.3 within thirty (30) days of Contractor’s written notice of default.

16.3.3 Contractor may, as its sole and exclusive remedy for Owner’s default, recover from Owner payment as follows:

(a) All unpaid Direct Cost of the Work performed or earned through the date of termination, plus Contractor’s actual cost to demobilize, and to cancel any subcontract agreement for any portion of the Work.

16.4 Termination for Causes Beyond either Party’s Control.

16.4.1 Owner or Contractor may terminate this Agreement for causes that are beyond the control of either party if the Work is stopped for a period of 120 consecutive days or longer, provided such stoppage is solely due to the issuance of a judicial order or act of government that requires that all Work be stopped indefinitely.


16.4.2 Neither party shall terminate this Agreement pursuant to this Paragraph unless the judicial order or act of government remains in effect thirty (30) days after providing the other party written notice of the terminating party’s intent to terminate for causes beyond either party’s control.

16.4.3 Should either party terminate for causes beyond either party’s control, Owner’s sole and exclusive obligation to pay Contractor shall be determined as follows:

(a) All unpaid Direct Cost of the Work performed or earned through the date of termination, plus Contractor’s actual cost to demobilize.

16.5 Bankruptcy.

16.5.1 Owner and Contractor recognize that the Project will be significantly impacted if a bankruptcy petition under the Applicable Laws is filed by or against either Owner or Contractor.

16.5.2 Owner and Contractor agree that if a bankruptcy petition is filed by or against either of them, the party in bankruptcy shall take appropriate action to have this Agreement assumed or rejected by the bankruptcy court or trustee within sixty (60) days of the filing of the petition.

16.5.3 Nothing in this Paragraph shall be construed to limit or waive the rights of either party to seek any remedies provided by the Contract Documents or the Applicable Law.

ARTICLE 17. Superintendent; Subcontractors; Sub-Subcontractors; Suppliers; Lower Tier Persons.. A “Subcontractor” is a person or entity that has a direct contract with Contractor to perform or furnish any element of the Work. A “Sub-Subcontractor” is a person or entity that has a direct contract with Subcontractor to perform or furnish any element of the Work. . Contractor may engage a Subcontractor, provided that: (1) Contractor will remain responsible for the Subcontractor’s Work as if it had been performed by Contractor, (2) Subcontractor meets the qualifications required of Subcontractors under the Contract Documents, (3) Owner has approved Subcontractor and (4) Subcontractor has entered into a written agreement with Contractor (“Subcontract”) that meets the requirements of this Article 17.. Except as provided in Section 17.4, with respect to certain Suppliers, each Subcontract and each agreement between a Subcontractor and a Sub-Subcontractor (each a “Sub-subcontract”) shall: (1) be in writing; (2) provide for a fixed, or not-to-exceed amount as Subcontractor’s or Sub-Subcontractor’s, as applicable, entire compensation; (3) state that the Subcontract or Sub-subcontract, as applicable, is subject to the terms and conditions of, and specifically incorporates the provisions of, this Agreement (except its compensation terms); (4) bind and obligate Subcontractor to Contractor as Contractor is bound to Owner under the Contract Documents or bind and obligate Sub-Subcontractor to Subcontractor as Subcontractor is bound and obligated to Contractor under the Contract Documents, as applicable; (5) state Owner is the intended third-party beneficiary of the Subcontract or Sub-subcontract, as applicable, with the right (but not the obligation) to pursue claims for damages and/or equitable or other rights or remedies directly against Subcontractor or Sub-Subcontractor, as applicable, for breach of Subcontractor’s or Sub-Subcontractor’s, as applicable, obligations under the Subcontract or Sub-subcontract, as applicable, or of any of the warranties given by Subcontractor or Sub-Subcontractor, as applicable, without liability for benefits received, provided that Owner shall not exercise its rights as a third-party unless the breach has continued without cure for at least seven (7) days after written notice has been given to Contractor, Subcontractor and Sub-Subcontractor, as applicable; (6) contingently assign the Subcontract to Owner in the event this Agreement is terminated, subject to Owner’s election to accept the assignment by delivery to Subcontractor of written notice (which Owner shall not be obligated to give), and provided that Owner shall not be under any obligation to compensate Subcontractor with respect to amounts due under the Subcontract for which Owner has paid to Contractor or, in the case of a Sub-subcontract, consent to the contingent assignment of the Sub-subcontract to Owner, in the event this Agreement is terminated; (7) obligate Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor, as applicable, to be joined as a party to any arbitration or other dispute resolution proceeding in which Owner or Contractor is a party and which arises out of or relates to Subcontractor’s or Sub-Subcontractor’s, as applicable, performance or nonperformance of the Subcontract or Sub-subcontract, as applicable, (8) include a termination for convenience clause equivalent to Section 16.2; (9) contain an indemnity that is, at a minimum, equivalent to the provisions of Article 19 and identifying, as Indemnitees, all of the Indemnified Parties identified in Article 19; (10) include any other provision required by the Contract Documents; and (11) contain Subcontractor’s agreement it will not engage a Sub-Subcontractor unless it has first obtained the written consent of Owner and Contractor to engage Sub-


Subcontractor, and it has entered into a written agreement with Sub-Subcontractor meeting the requirements of this Section 17.3.. A “Supplier” is a Subcontractor or Sub-Subcontractor who sells, but does not attach or install, Construction Materials that are not specially manufactured or fabricated for the Project. Each Subcontract or Sub-subcontract with a Contractor shall: (1) be in writing; (2) specifically incorporate the requirements of the Drawings & Specifications insofar as applicable to the Construction Materials to be furnished; (3) provide a fixed, or not-to-exceed amount, as the Contractor’s entire compensation and (4) require that the Contractor will, as a condition precedent to the right to deliver any Construction Materials to the Site, (a) comply with the insurance requirements of Article 3, and (b) execute an indemnity equivalent to that provided in Article 19 and identifying, as Indemnitees, all of the Indemnified Parties identified in Article 19.. The Subcontractors, Sub-Subcontractors, and other lower tier persons and entities who furnish any labor, equipment, professional services, Construction Materials or other Work, are sometimes collectively referred in this Agreement to as the “Lower Tier Persons”.. Contractor will take all steps necessary and appropriate to ensure no employee will be recruited, interviewed, screened and employed in connection with the Work unless Contractor, Subcontractor or Sub-Subcontractor, as applicable, verified the employee’s authorization to work in the United States in compliance with all applicable Laws, including without limitation, 8 U.S.C.A. 1324a, et seq. (the “Immigration Reform and Control Act”).. Contractor shall maintain policies of non-discrimination. Contractor, its Subcontractors and other Lower Tier Persons shall not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, religion, color, sex, or national origin. Contractor shall take affirmative action to insure that applicants are employed, and that the employees are treated during employment, without regard to their race, religion, color, sex, or national origin. Such action shall include, but not be limited to, the following: employment; upgrading, demotion or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates of pay or other compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. Contractor agrees to post in conspicuous places, available to employees and applicants for employment, notices setting forth the policies of non-discrimination; and Contractor and its Subcontractors and other Lower Tier Persons shall, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by them or on their behalf, state that all qualified applicants will receive consideration for employment without regard to race, religion, color, sex, or national origin.

ARTICLE 18. Health and Safety; Hazardous Substances; Waste Disposal.. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the safety and health effects of the Work as it may impact all persons and property whether or not under the control of Contractor. Contractor shall at all times: (1) provide proper traffic control, warnings, and all other measures necessary to protect Owner and Owner’s employees, invitees, licensees, and agents, and all other third persons from illness, sickness, death, personal injury or property damage arising from or relating to the Work; and (2) maintain a safe working environment, in full compliance with all applicable Laws relating to occupational health and safety and drugs in the workplace.

18.1.1 Photo Identification. As part of the Design-Builder’s responsibility for the safety and health effects of the Work, the Design-Builder shall require all construction personnel to wear photo identification at all times while on the Project Site.. The term “Hazardous Substance” or “Hazardous Substances” means any element, compound, mixture, solution, particle or substance which is or may become dangerous, or harmful to the health and welfare of life or the physical environment if not used, stored or disposed of in accordance with applicable law, such as, but not limited to, explosives, petroleum products, radioactive materials, hazardous wastes, toxic substances and related materials, and including without limitation: (1) any substance or material included within the definitions of “hazardous substances,” “hazardous wastes,” “special wastes,” “regulated substances,” “hazardous materials,” “toxic substances,” “hazardous pollutants” or “toxic pollutants” in any of the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act, 42 U.S.C. Section 9601, the Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation and Liability Act of 1980, 42 U.S.C. 6901, the Toxic Substances Control Act, the Clean Air Act and/or the Clean Water Act, as the foregoing may be amended from time to time, or any regulations promulgated thereunder, and any analogous state, local or other governmental laws, rules or regulations; (2) any “PCBs” or “PCB items,” as defined in 40 CFR § 761.3; and (3) any “asbestos,” as defined in 40 CFR § 763.63. Contractor shall be responsible for the proper handling of every substance, material and equipment it brings to Site, and in the conduct of its operations, so as to prevent the release of any Hazardous Substance, and Contractor shall be responsible for the cost of remediation and all other losses and damages to Owner resulting from any release by Contractor of any Hazardous Substance. If Contractor discovers material on the Site it reasonably believes to be a pre-existing Hazardous Substance, then Contractor shall immediately (1) discontinue Work in the affected area leaving the suspected Hazardous Substance uncovered as it was found (taking reasonable precautions to protect persons and property and prevent the movement, spread or disturbance of the suspected Hazardous Substance in accordance with applicable Laws), and (2) notify Owner


immediately, but not later than twenty-four (24) hours, by phone or email, followed by written notice. Contractor shall resume operations in the affected area after Owner has determined by reasonable means that the material is either not a Hazardous Substance or has been mitigated in accordance with applicable Law. If the remedy directed by Owner results in a delay to the critical path of the Work, and if Contractor did not cause, suffer or permit the release of the Hazardous Substance, Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment of the Contract Time and Contract Sum, subject to Article 13.. The term “Waste” means any dust, solids, liquids or other form of Waste that is not a Hazardous Substance. Contractor shall maintain proper precautions so that the amount of Waste resulting from Contractor’s Work is at all times (1) kept at minimum; (2) confined within the Site; and (3) not permitted to interfere with or disturb Owner’s ongoing operations or the activities of Owner’s employees, customers, guests, invitees, or licensees. All Waste shall be removed from the Site each day, pursuant to a plan approved by Owner, and disposed of at a disposal facility in accordance with applicable Law.. To the fullest extent allowed by the Applicable Laws, Contractor shall defend, indemnify, and hold harmless Owner, and any other Designer, and any employee, officer, director, Lender, affiliate, parent, subsidiary, agent, representative, or consultant of any of them (the “Indemnities”), from and against any and all claims, damages, losses, costs, and expenses, including reasonable attorney, expert, and consultant fees and legal expenses, to the extent arising out of or relating to any intentional or negligent act or omission by Contractor or any Subcontractor or any employee, officer, agent representative, or consultant of any of them, that results in personal injury, death, or property damage. Contractor’s obligations under this paragraph shall not be limited, waived, or excused by the payment of any damages, benefits, expenses, or compensation under any employee death or disability statute, including worker’s compensation, employer’s liability, employee benefit, or other such act. If and only if a maximum limit on indemnification liability is required under the Applicable Laws for enforceability, Contractor’s obligations under this paragraph shall be limited to 200% of the insurance limit provided by Contractor. Contractor shall defend, indemnify, and hold Owner and its employees, officers, directors, Lenders, affiliates, parents, subsidiaries, agents, representatives, and consultants harmless from and against any and all claims, damages, losses, and expenses, including attorney, expert, or consultant fees, that arise out of or relate to:

(a) the failure of Contractor or any Subcontractor, or any employee, officer, agent, representative, or consultant of any of them, to comply with any Applicable Law;

(b) any Hazardous Material brought to the Site, or if part of the Work, not properly removed from the Site by Contractor or any Subcontractor, or any employee, officer, agent, representative, or consultant of any of them;

(c) any disposal at the Site of any trash, debris, waste, Hazardous Materials, rock, unsuitable soil, or organic materials at the Site without Owner’s prior written consent;

(d) any infringement of Intellectual Property by Contractor or any Subcontractor, or any employee, officer, agent, representative, or consultant of any of them, unless the infringement results from a violation of the copyright laws contained in the Contract Documents or the installation of a specific process, system, invention, design, or item required by the Contract Documents to come from a single source;

(e) any lien, claim, or demand by any Subcontractor as a result of an alleged failure of Contractor or any other Subcontractor to pay for any portion of the Work, whether valid or not; and

(f) any claim or demand by any Separate Contractor as a result of an alleged act or omission by Contractor or any Subcontractor, or any employee, officer, agent, representative, or consultant of any of them.

Owner shall defend, indemnify, and hold Contractor and the employees, officer, agents, representatives, and consultants of Contractor harmless from and against any and all claims, damages, losses, and expenses, including attorney, expert, or consultant fees, that arise out of the existence of any Hazardous Material discovered at the Site that was not part of the Work or brought to the Site by Contractor or its Subcontractors, or any employee, officer, agent, representative, or consults of any of them. Owner and Contractor acknowledge receipt of the mutual indemnifications in this Article 19 as separate consideration for the obligations contained in this Paragraph.


ARTICLE 20. Notices.

. The persons designated in Sections 1.9 and 1.10 as Owner’s Representative and Contractor’s Representative, respectively, shall each have authority to act on behalf of their respective principals in connection with all matters arising under this Agreement, and for purposes of receipt of notice, requests and other communication required or permitted under this Agreement. The Owner’s Representative is the person designated for receipt, review and approval of all requests for payment.

. Any communication or notice required to be issued or given under this Agreement (each, a “Notice”) shall be effective only if (1) the Notice is in writing, and (2) delivered in person or by private express overnight delivery service (delivery service charges prepaid), certified or registered mail (return receipt requested), facsimile transmission or electronic mail to the physical or electronic address given in Article 1. A Notice shall be deemed to have been delivered to the Party as of the date of receipt, if received on a business day observed by the law of the Project State (“Business Day”) before 5:00 PM at the address for Notices identified in Article 1, or as of the next Business Day if received after 5:00 PM, at the address for Notices identified in Article 1, and the burden of proof of the place and time of delivery shall be on the Party giving the Notice. A Party may change its Representative, or the information for giving Notice by giving Notice of the change, in writing, in accordance with this Section.

ARTICLE 21. Laws Generally; Investigations.. Contractor will comply with all federal, state, county and local statutes, rules, regulations, codes, ordinances, executive orders, and other legislative, executive, or judicial requirements and/or decisions (collectively, “Law(s)”) applicable to the Work whether or not specifically referenced elsewhere in this Agreement, including, but not limited to, those pertaining to Contractor licensing, occupational health, safety, disabilities, building codes, construction standards, licensure, social security, employment, workers compensation, immigration, wages, payrolls, health, discrimination, equal employment opportunity, civil rights, storm water, solid wastes, Hazardous Substance, grading, air pollution, water pollution, waste disposal, human remains, land use, historic preservation, endangered or threatened species, navigable waters, waters of the United States and tributaries thereof, and all other Laws applicable to the Work.. To the fullest extent permitted by applicable Law, Contractor will notify Owner, and require its Subcontractors and Sub-Subcontractors to notify Owner, in each case within twenty-four (24) hours after a demand for records or notice of audit is received and/or any inspection or other investigation is commenced by any federal, state or local governmental agency that relates to the Work, including, without limitation: (1) any inspection or investigation of the Site relative to a determination of compliance with any Laws or Permits pertaining to Hazardous Substances, Waste, dust control, air quality, water pollution, storm water runoff, endangered species, navigable waters, occupational health or safety; and (2) any inspection, audit or other investigation, whether on or off the Site, that is initiated by any federal or state authorities to verify the immigration and/or worker authorization status of any employees of Contractor, any of its Subcontractors, or any other Lower Tier Person.. Owner shall have the right, but not the obligation, to adopt and prescribe from time to time one or more reasonable rules and regulations (“Owner’s Rule(s)”) governing parking, access, times of work, noise, behavior towards employees, customers, guests or invitees of Owner, and such other matters not involving the means, method, techniques or manner of performance of the Work that Owner deems pertinent to preventing disruption to Owner’s ongoing operations. Contractor will enforce, and will be responsible to Owner for the failure of its employees, or of the employees of its Subcontractors, or other persons or entities for whom Contractor is responsible to comply with, the Owner’s Rules. Compliance with Owner’s Rules will be a condition to the right of any person to enter upon any of Owner’s property, and Owner shall have the right to revoke such right of access as to any person who has materially breached any of Owner’s Rules. The issuance or non-issuance, enforcement or non-enforcement of any of Owner’s Rules by Owner shall not relieve Contractor from its sole and exclusive responsibility to Owner for taking all appropriate precautions, in accordance with applicable Laws, to ensure the health and safety of persons and property with respect to the Work.. Any review or approval given by Owner or any of its representatives of any document submitted by Contractor, and any payment made by Owner, shall not: (1) constitute acceptance of any of Contractor’s Work, or of the sufficiency of any request for payment; (2) operate as an acquiescence to, or waiver of, any departure from, or Contractor’s failure to perform in accordance with, any requirements of this Agreement; (3) constitute approval of: (a) the adequacy, form or content of any document, or (b) any actions taken by Contractor or by any Lower Tier Person; (4) relieve Contractor or any Lower Tier Person of any obligations or responsibilities under this Agreement; or (5) be accepted as evidence of satisfactory performance of any Work.


ARTICLE 24. Owner Assignments; Cooperation with Financing Parties. Owner may assign or transfer this Agreement without Contractor’s consent. Contractor agrees that if Owner assigns this Agreement to any lender or other third party source of funding for the Project (each, a “Financing Party”), Contractor will (1) cooperate with any such assignments; (2) execute any consent, assignment, disbursement agreement, or other document reasonably required of Contractor by a Financing Party as a condition of its approval of financing for the Project; (3) cooperate with any inspectors engaged by a Financing Party to observe or inspect the work; and (4) execute any documents a Financing Party reasonably requests it to execute in connection with its review of any of Contractor’s Work, or of any of Owner’s requests to a Financing Party for disbursements on account of the Work.

ARTICLE 25. Contractor Assignments and Transfers. Contractor shall not, without the prior written consent of Owner, which shall not be unreasonably withheld: (1) sell, transfer, assign or delegate any interest in this Agreement or any rights or obligations of Contractor hereunder; or (2) until Final Payment is made, cause, suffer or permit: (a) any sale, transfer or assignment of any stock, membership or other equity interest in Contractor, or (b) the issuance of any new stock or other equity interest in the Contractor. Any such purported assignment, delegation, transfer or issuance without Owner’s written consent shall be void.

ARTICLE 26. Miscellaneous.. Contractor shall treat all information, discussions, work papers, Drawings and Specifications, and other Contract Documents, memoranda, and all materials relating to the Project and all information supplied to Contractor by Owner as strictly confidential and proprietary information of Owner and shall not permit its release to other parties or make any public announcement or publicity releases without Participants’ prior written authorization, and such information shall not be used or discussed by Contractor, except as required to complete the Work, without Owner’s prior written approval. Contractor shall also require its Subcontractors and Sub-Subcontractors to comply with this requirement.. The Parties may, at any time, modify this Agreement by written agreement (“Contract Amendment”) signed by Owner and Contractor. Upon its execution, the Contract Amendment shall be a Contract Document.

26.3 Counterparts; Integration; Inurement; Cumulative Remedies; Severability; Survival; Choice of Laws. This Agreement may be executed in counterparts, and all counterparts will together comprise one instrument. This is the entire Agreement of Owner and Contractor, and it supersedes all negotiations and any prior agreements between them relating to the Work. This Agreement shall insure to the benefit of and be binding on the successors and assigns of the Parties. No other documents are included unless incorporated herein by reference. All rights and remedies provided in this Agreement are cumulative and the exercise or assertion of one or more rights or remedies shall not affect any other rights or remedies allowed by Law or equity or this Agreement. Neither the failure nor any delay on the part of a Party to exercise any right, remedy, power or privilege under any provision of this Agreement, or with respect to any occurrence, shall operate as a waiver with respect to such provision or occurrence thereof, nor shall any single or partial exercise of any right, remedy, power or privilege preclude any other or further exercise of the same or of any right, remedy, power or privilege. No waiver shall be effective unless it is in writing and is signed by the Party asserted to have granted such waiver. If any provision of this Agreement is held by any court to be void or unenforceable, such provision shall not affect the validity of the other provisions. Except as specifically provided otherwise in this Agreement or the Contract Documents, each warranty, representation, indemnification provision, insurance requirement, and every other right, remedy and responsibility of Owner or Contractor under this Agreement shall survive completion of the Project, or the earlier termination of this Agreement. This Agreement will be governed by, interpreted under, and construed and enforced exclusively in accordance with the laws of the Project state.


IN WITNESS OF THE OBLIGATIONS HEREIN, the parties have executed this Construction Agreement, this the ______ day of ______, 20___.

OWNER CONTRACTOR

Date: Date:

(a)n (a)n

By: By:

Name: Name:

Title: Title:

Short-Form Lump Sum AgreementApril 15, 2013 Exhibit A – Page 13608041.23

EXHIBIT A

PROJECT SUMMARY

1. PROJECT. The Project is described as Remodel of the existing CT room at the Radiology Department of the Ogden Regional Medical Center.

All in accordance with the Drawings, Specifications and the other Contract Documents identified in Section 2 of this Exhibit A below, and all Work reasonably inferable from such Contract Documents.

2. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. The Contract Documents each of which Contractor acknowledges it has received and studied, are:

2.1. The Agreement, including all of its Exhibits; and

2.2. The following Drawings:

Sheet Title Prepared By Date Sealed

See sheet G-002 for list of drawings. Also refer to any subsequent addenda. ; and

2.3. The following Specifications and other technical documents:

See Project Specifications Manual. ; and

2.4. The following additional documents:

; and

2.5. Any other written instructions supplied by Owner.

3. CONTRACT SUM. Subject to the terms of this Agreement, Owner agrees to pay Contractor for the performance of the Work an amount (the “Contract Sum”) equal to the total of: _________________________________________________________.

4. PERMITS. Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining the following permits (if none, state “None”):

5. PAYMENT/PERFORMANCE BONDS. ([Select One] Contractor ¨ will ¨ will not) be required to _____________ furnish Payment and Performance Bonds as provided in Article 3 and Exhibit D.

Short-Form Lump Sum AgreementApril 15, 2013 Exhibit B – Page 13608041.23

EXHIBIT B

PROJECT SCHEDULE

(Contractor to Attach)

Short-Form Lump Sum AgreementApril 15, 2013 Exhibit C – Page 13608041.23

EXHIBIT C

STAFFING PLAN

Senior Project Manager:Name: Phone Number: Mobile Phone Number: e-mail address: Senior Project Manager will / will not be on site (circle one)

Project Manager: (if more than one PM, provide information for all)Name: Phone Number: Mobile Phone Number: e-mail address: Project Manager will / will not be on site (circle one)If Multi-Phased Project, identify the phase for which this PM is responsible:

Assistant Project Manager: (if more than one APM provide information for all)Name: Phone Number: Mobile Phone Number: e-mail address: Assistant Project Manager will / will not be on site (circle one)If Multi-Phased Project, identify the phase for which this APM is responsible:

Superintendent: (if more than one superintendent provide information for all)Name: Phone Number: Mobile Phone Number: e-mail address:

Assistant Superintendent: (if more than one assistant superintendent provide information for all)Name: Phone Number: Mobile Phone Number: e-mail address: If Multi-Phased Project, identify the phase for which this assistant super is responsible:

Short-Form Lump Sum AgreementApril 15, 2013 Exhibit D – Page 13608041.23

EXHIBIT D

PAYMENT AND PERFORMANCE BONDS

Contractor shall furnish to Owner and keep in force during the terms of the Agreement a payment bond in lieu of lien rights (“Payment Bond”), and a performance bond (“Performance Bond”), in accordance with the following:

Short-Form Lump Sum AgreementApril 15, 2013 Exhibit E – Page 13608041.23

EXHIBIT E

CONTRACTOR’S CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE

(Contractor to Attach)

Short-Form Lump Sum AgreementApril 15, 2013 Exhibit F – Page 13608041.23

EXHIBIT F

ALLOWANCE SUMMARY

I. Allowances

As part of the Contract Sum, the Parties have chosen to allocate $ ______ for the completion of certain work by the Contractor which cannot be reliably predicted as of the date of the execution of the Agreement. The parties have thus determined to include certain estimates for the completion of the work for purposes of cost control and project planning. The Parties term these estimates to be “allowances” (the “Allowances”).

These Allowances are as follows:

ItemDetailed Work Item DescriptionInclusive of Specification, Unit Price and Quantity Allowance Amount

Contractor acknowledges that the inclusion of the Allowances are merely estimates of potential expenses which may or may not be incurred. If the Contractor does not incur any cost associated with the Allowance item, no Owner payment obligation shall arise.

In the event that the Contractor wishes to utilize an Allowance funds, it shall submit a Change Request (“CCR”) and obtain the Owner’s written approval prior to executing the associated work. Upon receiving the Owner’s written approval, the Contractor shall prepare a Change Order for the Owner’s execution. The Contractor shall then modify the Schedule of Values via Change Order.

Within the CCR, the Contractor shall account for any expenditures impacting the Allowance inclusive of all direct costs incurred in connection with the Allowance item, including without limitation, all labor, material, handling, transportation, loading and unloading, and installation, costs or expenses, however characterized.

The Contractor shall advise the Owner in writing when the Allowance has been depleted by greater than 50% and also prior the Allowance being fully consumed. To the extent the Contractor exceeds the Allowance Amount, the Owner shall have no payment obligation unless the Contractor receives Owner’s express written consent prior to exceeding the Allowance Amount.

Absent Owner’s prior to written consent to exceed an Allowance item, no use or non-use of any Allowance by the Contractor shall result in any impact or adjustment to the Contract Sum or form the basis for any claim for additional compensation to the Contractor, however denominated.

Short-Form Lump Sum AgreementApril 15, 2013 Exhibit G – Page 13608041.23

EXHIBIT G

CONTRACTOR’S PARTIAL WAIVER AND RELEASE OF LIEN TO OWNER

A. OWNER 1.

B. CONTRACTOR 2.

C. FACILITY: 3.

D. CONTRACT DATE: 4.

E. PROJECT DESCRIPTION: 5

F. OWNER’S PROJECT NUMBER: __________6.

G. APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT NUMBER: ________7.

H. AMOUNT OF PAYMENT: $ _______________8

For and in consideration of the payment to be made by the Owner to the undersigned contractor in the amount set forth in Item H. above, which payment is for work, labor and services and/or materials furnished for the construction of the above referenced project, the undersigned Contractor hereby certifies as follows:

1. The undersigned Contractor hereby waives, releases and quit claims in favor of the Owner of the project, each and every party acquiring title to and/or making a loan on the project, and the title company or companies examining and/or insuring title to the project and any and all of their successors and assignees, all rights of the undersigned Contractor to assert a lien upon the land and improvements comprising the project, but only to the extent of sums actually received for work, labor, services and materials furnished through ______________,20 ,9 plus the sum paid to the undersigned set forth in item H above.

2. The undersigned Contractor has not assigned any lien or right to perfect a lien against the project, and the undersigned Contractor has the right, power and authority to execute this document.

3. The undersigned Contractor warrants that all laborers and all subcontractors employed by the undersigned contractor, and all other laborers, trade contractors and sub-subcontractors of every tier and all suppliers or materialmen who have furnished work, labor, materials or services incorporated into the project and any lien or bond claimant relating to the work, labor, materials or services of any such laborers, subcontractors, trade contractors, sub-subcontractors, suppliers or materialmen furnished in connection with the project, have been paid their respective portion of all prior payments and that none of such laborers, subcontractors, trade contractors, sub-subcontractors, suppliers, materialmen, or other claimants have any claim of lien against the project through the day of , 20 10.

1 Name of Owner.2 Name of Contractor.3 Name of the hospital or health care facility to which the project relates..4 Date of the Agreement between Owner and Contractor.5 Description of project and address of project site.6 Owner’s Project number on Contract.7 Number of Application for Payment.8 Amount of Current Application for Payment.9 Date of last payment.10 Date of last payment.

Short-Form Lump Sum AgreementApril 15, 2013 Exhibit G – Page 23608041.23

4. No security interest has been given or executed by the undersigned Contractor for or in connection with any materials, appliances, machinery, fixtures, or furnishings placed upon or installed in the project.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this Partial Release of Lien has been executed this day of , 20 .

WITNESSES 11

By:

Its:

Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of , 20 .

(Notary Public)

My Commission Expires:

11 Name of Contractor.

Short-Form Lump Sum AgreementApril 15, 2013 Exhibit H – Page 13608041.23

EXHIBIT H

CHANGE ORDER FORM

CHANGE OWNER

ORDER ARCHITECT

CONTRACTOR

FIELD

DOCUMENT G701 OTHER

PROJECT: CHANGE ORDER NUMBER: (name, address) DATE: ARCHITECT'S PROJECT NO.: TO CONTRACTOR: (name, address) CONTRACT DATE: OWNER PROJECT NO.: The Contract is changed as follows:

Not valid until signed by the Owner, Architect and Contractor.

The original (Contract Sum) was ………………...……………....…$ Net change by previously authorized Change Orders ……………………………………………….$ The original (Contract Sum) prior to this Change Order was…….$ The original (Contract Sum) will be (increased) (decreased) (unchanged) by this Change Order in the amount of …………………………………....$ The new (Contract Sum) including this Change Order will be …..$

The Contract Time will be (increased) (decreased) (unchanged) by ………………………………………..... ( ) Days * Must Input*

The date of Substantial Completion as of the date of this Change Order therefore is …………………………( ) Date *Must Input*

ARCHITECT CONTRACTORHOSPITAL LEGAL NAME

Address Address Address

* if over $500,000, Must be approved by SVP

BY _________________________ BY _________________________ BY __________________________

DATE ______________________ DATE ______________________ DATE _______________________

Short-Form Lump Sum AgreementApril 15, 2013 Exhibit I – Page 13608041.23

EXHIBIT I

CONTRACTOR’S AFFIDAVIT AND FINAL WAIVER AND RELEASE

A. OWNER 12.

B. CONTRACTOR 13.

C. FACILITY: 14.

D. CONTRACT DATE: 15.

E. PROJECT DESCRIPTION:

16

F. OWNER’S PROJECT NUMBER: 17.

G. APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT NUMBER: 18.

H. AMOUNT OF FINAL PAYMENT: $ 19

For and in consideration of the payments made by the Owner to the undersigned Contractor or to any subcontractor, materialman or supplier of the undersigned, for labor and employed in and/or materials furnished for the construction of the above referenced project, the undersigned Contractor hereby certifies as follows:

1. Upon receipt of the sum specified in Item H. above, the undersigned Contractor certifies that it has received payment in full for all sums due and payable under the contract described herein, as amended by all change orders and other amendments, if any (collectively, the “Contract”), and all sums due for all materials furnished to and/or for all work performed and labor and services furnished in the construction of the project, and the undersigned Contractor hereby affirms that there will be no outstanding claims against the undersigned Contractor and/or its sureties in connection with this project.

2. Contingent upon receipt of the sum specified in item H., the undersigned Contractor does hereby waive, release and quit claim in favor of the Owner of the project, each and every party acquiring title to and/or making a loan on the project, and the title company or companies examining and/or insuring title to the project and any and all of their successors and assignees, all rights of the undersigned Contractor to assert any lien upon the land and

12 Name of Owner.13 Name of Contractor14 Name of hospital or other health care facility to which the project relates.15 Date of the Agreement between Owner and Contractor.16 Description of project and address of project site.17 Owners Project number on Contract.18 Number of Application for Payment.19 Amount of this Application for Payment


improvements comprising the project, by virtue of any law in the jurisdiction in which the land and improvements are situate or any amendment of said law, regarding the rights of a contractor, subcontractor, laborer, supplier, or materialman to assert a lien or claim against the project.

3. Contingent upon receipt of the sum specified in Item H., the undersigned Contractor does hereby forever release, waive, and discharge the project and the Owner of the project, from any and all causes of action, suits, debts, accounts, damages, liens, encumbrances, judgments, claims, and demands whatsoever, in law or equity which the undersigned and/or its successors and/or assignees ever had, now have, or ever will have against the Owner of the project, by reason of the Contract and/or the performance of work and/or the furnishing of labor, services and materials relating to the construction of the project; and the undersigned hereby agrees to indemnify and hold the above parties harmless from any and all damages, costs, expenses, demands, suits, and legal fees, directly or indirectly relating to or arising out of any claim or lien by any party relating to that which was paid or performed or should have been performed by or for the undersigned Contractor in connection with the project or under the terms of the Contract.

4. The undersigned Contractor has not and will not assign any claim against the Owner of the project, nor any lien or right to perfect a lien against the project, and the undersigned has the right, power, and authority to execute this Affidavit, Final Waiver and Release.

5. Contingent upon receipt of the sum specified in Item H., the undersigned Contractor agrees that all laborers and all subcontractors employed by it, and all other laborers, trade contractors and subcontractors and sub-subcontractors of every tier and all suppliers or materialmen who have furnished work, labor, materials or services in connection with the project will be paid in full and that none of such laborers, subcontractors, trade contractors, sub-subcontractors, suppliers, materialmen, or other claimant will have any claim, demand or lien against the project, and the undersigned Contractor hereby agrees to hold the project and the Owner of the project harmless from any such claim, demand or lien.

6. No security interest has been given or executed by the undersigned Contractor for or in connection with any materials, appliances, machinery, fixtures, or furnishings placed upon or installed in the project.

This Affidavit, Waiver and Release shall be an independent agreement and covenant and shall operate and be effective with respect to work and labor done and materials furnished under any supplemental contract or contracts, whether oral or written, for extra or additional work on the project and for any further work done or materials furnished at any time with respect to the project subsequent to the execution hereof.


IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this Final Release of Lien has been executed this day of , 20 .

WITNESS 20

By:

Its:

Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of , 20 .

(Notary Public)

My Commission Expires:

(Notarial Seal)

20 Name of Contractor

Short-Form Lump Sum AgreementApril 15, 2013 Exhibit J – Page 13608041.23

HCA CONTRACTOR CHANGE REQUEST

Change Request # Date:

Project: Hospital: Location:

Owner Project No.: Contractor Project #:

To: HCA Construction Manager Construction Company requests authorization to make the following change in this project:

Prepared by: ______________________ Title: ___________________Person requesting this change: _________________________________

Estimated Construction Cost for this Change: _____________0 ___

Change Request(s) #(s) ______________totaling $ __________ have been approved by Owner but have not yet been included in an owner change order to date.

Reason Change is Needed: ________________________________________________________________________Project Duration Will Change By: days. Thereafter, CSC date is , if executed.

Authorization Reply:Proceed: Yes No Incorporate Into a Future Owner Change Order: Yes No

By: Date Approved: HCA Construction Manager

By (Initial): _____ By: Date Approved: ____ Director, Construction (Over $25,000) VP, Construction (Over $25,000)

By: Date Approved: SVP, HCA (Over $500,000)NOTE: A COMPLETE COST BREAKDOWN ITEMIZING ALL QUANTITIES, LABOR COST, MATERIAL COST, SUB COST, ETC., SHALL BE ATTACHED. The HCA Construction Manager and HCA VP, Construction (over $25,000) shall sign and date contractor change requests prior to any work proceeding

D&C SCOPE/VALUE ENGR. HOSPITAL SCOPE LATENT CONDITIONS LOCAL/STATE CODES DESIGN ERRORS/OMISSIONS ALLOWANCES OTHER

CONTROLLABLE YES NO

EXHIBIT J

Short-Form Lump Sum AgreementApril 15, 2013 Exhibit K – Page 13608041.23

EXHIBIT K

CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

(utilize the latest version of the applicable AIA document)

Short-Form Lump Sum AgreementApril 15, 2013 Exhibit L-1 – Page 13608041.23

EXHIBIT L-1

CONTRACTOR INVOICE SUMMARY

Attn: _______________________HCA

One Park Plaza, Construction DepartmentNashville, TN 37203

Date: Facility Name: Project Name: Project Location: HCA Constr. Mgr.: HCA Project #: Vendor Name: HCA PO #: Contact Person: Invoice #: Phone #: Period Ending: Vendor Project #: Pay Request #:

Current Schedule

Adjusted Amt [by Approved Change

Order Only]

Revised Schedule of

ValuesCurrent

Payment DueCO #______

CATEGORY CONSTRUCTION (54) 1a. Fixed Gen. Cond. 54-D $ - 1b. Reimb.Gen. Cond. 54-J $ - 2 Sitework 54-K $ - 3 Concrete 54-L $ - 4 Masonry 54-M $ - 5 Metals 54-N $ - 6 Wood/Plastics 54-O $ - 7 Therm/Moist. Prot. 54-P $ - 8 Doors/Windows 54-Q $ - 9 Finishes 54-R $ - 10 Specialties 54-S $ - 11 Equipment 54-T $ - 12 Furnishings 54-U $ - 13 Special Constr. 54-V $ - 14 Conveying Sys. 54-W $ - 15 Mechanical 54-X $ - 16 Electrical 54-Y $ - 17 Contractor Fee 54-A $ -

$ - TOTAL $ - $ - $ - $ -

$ - *TOTAL DUE THIS PERIOD

APPROVALS:Architect.: Director, AVP, VP:

Date: Date: Construction Manager: SVP ($1.5M+):

Date: Date:

Shor

t-For

m L

ump

Sum

Agr

eem

ent

Apr

il 15

, 201

3Ex

hibi

t L-3

– P

age

136

0804

1.23

EX

HIB

IT L

-2

AIA

APP

LIC

AT

ION

AN

D C

ER

TIF

ICA

TIO

N F

OR

PA

YM

EN

T(A

IA D

OC

UM

EN

T G

702)

TO

OW

NE

R:

PRO

JEC

T:

APP

LIC

ATI

ON

NO

:

Dis

tribu

tion

to:

PE

RIO

D T

O:

OW

NER

PRO

JEC

T N

O:

AR

CH

ITEC

T

C

ON

TRA

CTO

R

FRO

M C

ON

TR

AC

TO

R:

VIA

AR

CH

ITE

CT

:C

ON

TRA

CT

DA

TE:

CO

NT

RA

CT

OR

'S A

PPL

ICA

TIO

N F

OR

PA

YM

EN

TA

pplic

atio

n is

mad

e fo

r Pay

men

t, as

show

n be

low

, in

conn

ectio

n w

ith th

e C

ontra

ct.

1.O

RIG

INA

L C

ON

TR

AC

T S

UM

.....

......

......

......

......

......

......

......

......

......

......

......

...$

2.

Net

cha

nge

by C

hang

e O

rder

s ...

......

......

......

......

......

......

......

......

......

......

......

......

..$

3.C

ON

TR

AC

T S

UM

TO

DA

TE

(Lin

e 1+

/-2).

......

......

......

......

......

......

......

......

......

.$

4.T

OT

AL

CO

MPL

ET

ED

& S

TO

RE

D T

O D

AT

E ..

......

......

......

......

......

......

......

...$

5.R

ET

AIN

AG

E:

a.10

.0%

of C

ompl

eted

Wor

k$

b.

10.0

% o

f Sto

red

Mat

eria

l$

To

tal R

etai

nage

(Lin

e 5a

+5b)

$

6.T

OT

AL

EA

RN

ED

LE

SS R

ET

AIN

AG

E .

......

......

......

......

......

......

......

......

......

.....$

(L

ine

4 le

ss L

ine

5 To

tal)

7.L

ESS

PR

EV

IOU

S C

ER

TIF

ICA

TE

S FO

R

PAY

ME

NT

(Lin

e 6

from

prio

r Cer

tific

ate)

......

......

......

......

......

......

......

......

......

......

$

8.C

UR

RE

NT

PA

YM

EN

T D

UE

.....

......

......

......

......

......

......

......

......

......

......

......

......

.$

9.B

AL

AN

CE

TO

FIN

ISH

, IN

CL

UD

ING

RE

TA

INA

GE

.....

......

......

......

......

......

..$

(Lin

e 3

less

Lin

e 6)

......

......

......

......

......

......

......

......

......

......

......

......

......

......

......

......

..

CH

AN

GE

OR

DER

SU

MM

AR

YA

DD

ITIO

NS

DED

UC

TIO

NS

Tota

l ch

ange

s ap

prov

ed i

n pr

evio

us m

onth

s by

ow

ner

Tota

l app

rove

d th

is M

onth

TOTA

LS

N

ET C

HA

NG

ES b

y C

hang

e O

rder

The

unde

rsig

ned

Con

tract

or c

ertif

ies

that

to th

e be

st o

f the

Con

tract

or's

know

ledg

e, in

form

atio

n an

d be

lief t

he

Wor

k co

vere

d by

this

App

licat

ion

for P

aym

ent h

as b

een

com

plet

ed in

acc

orda

nce

with

the

Con

tract

Doc

umen

ts,

that

all

amou

nts

have

bee

n pa

id b

y th

e C

ontra

ctor

for W

ork

for w

hich

pre

viou

s C

ertif

icat

es fo

r Pay

men

t wer

e is

sued

and

pay

men

ts re

ceiv

ed fr

om th

e O

wne

r, an

d th

at c

urre

nt p

aym

ent s

how

n he

rein

is n

ow d

ue.

CO

NTR

AC

TOR

:

By:

Dat

e:

Stat

e of

:

Cou

nty

of:

Su

bscr

ibed

and

swor

n to

bef

ore

me

this

d

ay o

f

Not

ary

Publ

ic:

My

Com

mis

sion

exp

ires:

AR

CH

ITE

CT

'S C

ER

TIF

ICA

TE

FO

R P

AY

ME

NT

In a

ccor

danc

e w

ith th

e C

ontra

ct D

ocum

ents

, bas

ed o

n on

-site

obs

erva

tions

and

the

data

com

pris

ing

the

abov

e ap

plic

atio

n, th

e A

rchi

tect

cer

tifie

s to

the

Ow

ner t

hat t

o th

e be

st o

f the

Arc

hite

ct's

know

ledg

e, in

form

atio

n an

d be

lief

the

Wor

k ha

s pr

ogre

ssed

as

indi

cate

d, t

he q

ualit

y of

the

Wor

k is

in

acco

rdan

ce w

ith t

he C

ontra

ct

Doc

umen

ts, a

nd th

e C

ontra

ctor

is e

ntitl

ed to

pay

men

t of t

he A

MO

UN

T C

ERTI

FIED

.

AM

OU

NT

CE

RT

IFIE

D .

......

......

......

......

......

......

......

......

......

......

......

......

......

.$

(Atta

ch e

xpla

natio

n if

amou

nt c

ertif

ied

diff

ers

from

the

am

ount

app

lied

for.

In

itial

all

figur

es o

n th

is

App

licat

ion

and

on th

e C

ontin

uatio

n Sh

eet t

hat a

re c

hang

ed to

con

form

to th

e am

ount

cer

tifie

d.)

AR

CH

ITEC

T:B

y:

D

ate:

Th

is c

ertif

icat

e is

not

neg

otia

ble.

The

AM

OU

NT

CER

TIFI

ED is

pay

able

onl

y to

the

Con

tract

or n

amed

her

ein.

Is

suan

ce, p

aym

ent a

nd a

ccep

tanc

e of

pay

men

t are

with

out p

reju

dice

to a

ny r

ight

s of

the

Ow

ner

or C

ontra

ctor

un

der t

his C

ontra

ct.

Shor

t-For

m L

ump

Sum

Agr

eem

ent

Apr

il 15

, 201

3Ex

hibi

t L-3

– P

age

236

0804

1.23

EX

HIB

IT L

-3

PRO

JEC

T S

CH

ED

UL

E O

F V

AL

UE

S FO

RM

(See

Att

ache

d Sp

read

shee

t)

Short-Form Lump Sum AgreementApril 15, 2013 Exhibit M – Page 13608041.23

EXHIBIT M

PROJECT CLOSEOUT CHECKLIST

(to be attached to final pay application)Final Sub/Supplier Bid List updated to reflect actual Sub/Supplier contract amounts and incorporated into Final CCR and Change Order (HCA Asst. - forward copy to the Diversity File)

Execution of Final Change Order

Copy of Final Certificate of Occupancy

Final lien waiver from contractor in HCA format

All Final lien waivers from Subcontractors

Copy of letter addressed to the Facility outlining the procedures for warranty and callback work

Warranties assigned to Owner from Contractor and Subcontractor as specified in the contract Documents

Copy of Transmittals to the Facility that show distribution of:

Attic StockAs-BuiltsColor Roof Plans with Square Footage of Roof AreaO&M’s - MEP, Elevator, Roof, Doors, Auto Operators, Windows, Fire Alarm, etc.Training videos and documentation of training classes (subject, date, time, etc.)Warranties/Guarantees - Air Handlers, Chillers, Cooling Towers, Elevators, VAV’s, Switchgear, ATS, Generator, Roof, Waterproofing, etc.

Evidence of insurance coverage for 1 year from the Substantial Completion Date for “defective work”

Approval of final commissioning (confirmed by Byron Hall)

Short-Form Lump Sum AgreementApril 15, 2013 Exhibit N – Page 13608041.23

EXHIBIT N

ALTERNATIVE SUBCONTRACTOR AND SUB-SUBCONTRACTOR INSURANCE COVERAGE MINIMUMS

Plan Option A

Coverage Type Minimum Limits

Commercial General Liability i. $1,000,000 per occurrence;ii. $2,000,000 general aggregate with dedicated limits per site; and

iii. $5,000,000 products and completed operations aggregate

Worker’s Compensation i. Worker’s compensation at the statutory limit

ii. Employer’s liability at:a. $1,000,000 bodily injury per accident;b. $1,000,000 bodily injury by disease per employee;c. $1,000,000 bodily injury or disease aggregate.

Automobile Liability i. $1,000,000 combined single limit per accident

Excess/Umbrella Liability i. $5,000,000

Plan Option B

Coverage Type Minimum Limits

Commercial General Liability i. $500,000 per occurrence;ii. $1,000,000 general aggregate with dedicated limits per site; and

iii. $1,000,000 products and completed operations aggregate

Worker’s Compensation i. Worker’s compensation at the statutory limit

ii. Employer’s liability at:a. $500,000 bodily injury per accident;b. $500,000 bodily injury by disease per employee;c. $500,000 bodily injury or disease aggregate.

Automobile Liability i. $500,000 combined single limit per accident

Excess/Umbrella Liability i. $1,000,000

Short-Form Lump Sum AgreementApril 15, 2013 Exhibit O – Page 13608041.23

EXHIBIT O

BUILDER’S RISK INSURANCE INFORMATION

Project Number:

Owner’s Construction Mgr.:

Hospital Name: Project Name:

Project Address/Street/City/State/Zip

1. Is Fire Department paid or volunteer

2. Are fire hydrants available at site?

3. Type of construction: i.e., fire resistive, etc.

4. Percentage of building to be sprinkled at project completion %

5. Construction Budget (to be completed by Owner)

6. Total insurable cost (to be completed by Owner) [Construction Budget less Development/Planning, Environmental, Contingency & Land]

7. Current start date Current project completion date (to be completed by Owner)

8. New Square footage added (to be completed by Owner)

Owner will send a Builder’s Risk Certificate of Insurance to the Design Builder’s address listed below. Please type or print this information:

Company: Attention: Street Address: City/State/Zip:

Above form completed by: Date: (Please print)

Phone number w/area code:

Distribution by Owner’s Construction Manager (with Project Information Sheet):

Pamela Sands Jeff Nall, Senior ConsultantHCA Risk Management Global Risk Consultant (RGC)PO Box 550, 2971 Flowers Road SouthBuilding 2 – 4E Suite 213Nashville, TN 37202-0550 Atlanta, GA, 30341PH: 615-344-5847 FAX: 770-451-3300FAX: 615-344-5889 (Current as of 2/13)

AIA®


Bid Bond

AIA Document A310™ – 2010. Copyright © 1963, 1970 and 2010 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document

is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion

of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was

produced by AIA software at 17:36:03 on 07/09/2018 under Order No.8665849388 which expires on 03/28/2019, and is not for resale.

User Notes: (1632068981)

1













should be reviewed.


legal consequences.




modification.

Any singular reference to

Contractor, Surety, Owner or

other party shall be

considered plural where

applicable.







document.

CONTRACTOR: (Name, legal status and address)

SURETY: (Name, legal status and principal place

of business)

« »« »

« »

« »« »

« »

OWNER: (Name, legal status and address)



Ogden, Utah 84405»

BOND AMOUNT: $ « »

PROJECT: (Name, location or address, and Project number, if any)



Ogden, Utah 84405»

« »

The Contractor and Surety are bound to the Owner in the amount set forth above, for the

payment of which the Contractor and Surety bind themselves, their heirs, executors,

administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, as provided herein. The

conditions of this Bond are such that if the Owner accepts the bid of the Contractor within

the time specified in the bid documents, or within such time period as may be agreed to by

the Owner and Contractor, and the Contractor either (1) enters into a contract with the

Owner in accordance with the terms of such bid, and gives such bond or bonds as may be

specified in the bidding or Contract Documents, with a surety admitted in the jurisdiction

of the Project and otherwise acceptable to the Owner, for the faithful performance of such

Contract and for the prompt payment of labor and material furnished in the prosecution

thereof; or (2) pays to the Owner the difference, not to exceed the amount of this Bond,

between the amount specified in said bid and such larger amount for which the Owner

may in good faith contract with another party to perform the work covered by said bid,

then this obligation shall be null and void, otherwise to remain in full force and effect. The

Surety hereby waives any notice of an agreement between the Owner and Contractor to

extend the time in which the Owner may accept the bid. Waiver of notice by the Surety

shall not apply to any extension exceeding sixty (60) days in the aggregate beyond the

time for acceptance of bids specified in the bid documents, and the Owner and Contractor

shall obtain the Surety’s consent for an extension beyond sixty (60) days.

If this Bond is issued in connection with a subcontractor’s bid to a Contractor, the term

Contractor in this Bond shall be deemed to be Subcontractor and the term Owner shall be

deemed to be Contractor.

When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement

in the location of the Project, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or

legal requirement shall be deemed deleted herefrom and provisions conforming to such

statutory or other legal requirement shall be deemed incorporated herein. When so

furnished, the intent is that this Bond shall be construed as a statutory bond and not as a

common law bond.

AIA Document A310™ – 2010. Copyright © 1963, 1970 and 2010 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document

is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion

of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was

produced by AIA software at 17:36:03 on 07/09/2018 under Order No.8665849388 which expires on 03/28/2019, and is not for resale.

User Notes: (1632068981)

2

Signed and sealed this « » day of « » , « »

« »

(Contractor as Principal) (Seal)

« »

(Witness) (Title)

« »

(Surety) (Seal)

« »

(Witness) (Title)

AIA®


Payment Bond

AIA Document A312™ – 2010 Payment Bond. The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected

by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may

result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced

by AIA software at 17:36:53 on 07/09/2018 under Order No.8665849388 which expires on 03/28/2019, and is not for resale.

User Notes: (1228170869)

1













should be reviewed.


legal consequences.




modification.





applicable.







document.



of business)

« »« »

« »

« »« »

« »




Ogden, Utah 84405»

CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT Date: «»

Amount: $ «»

Description:

(Name and location)



Ogden, Utah 84405»

BOND

Date:

(Not earlier than Construction Contract Date)

« »

Amount: $ « »

Modifications to this Bond: « » None « » See Section 18

CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL SURETY Company: (Corporate Seal) Company: (Corporate Seal)

Signature:

Signature:

Name and

Title:

« »« » Name and

Title:

« »« »

(Any additional signatures appear on the last page of this Payment Bond.)

(FOR INFORMATION ONLY — Name, address and telephone)

AGENT or BROKER:

OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE: (Architect, Engineer or other party:)

« »

« »

« »

«»

«»

«»

«»

«»

«»





User Notes: (1228170869)

2

§ 1 The Contractor and Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators,

successors and assigns to the Owner to pay for labor, materials and equipment furnished for use in the performance of

the Construction Contract, which is incorporated herein by reference, subject to the following terms.

§ 2 If the Contractor promptly makes payment of all sums due to Claimants, and defends, indemnifies and holds

harmless the Owner from claims, demands, liens or suits by any person or entity seeking payment for labor, materials

or equipment furnished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract, then the Surety and the Contractor

shall have no obligation under this Bond.

§ 3 If there is no Owner Default under the Construction Contract, the Surety’s obligation to the Owner under this

Bond shall arise after the Owner has promptly notified the Contractor and the Surety (at the address described in

Section 13) of claims, demands, liens or suits against the Owner or the Owner’s property by any person or entity

seeking payment for labor, materials or equipment furnished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract

and tendered defense of such claims, demands, liens or suits to the Contractor and the Surety.

§ 4 When the Owner has satisfied the conditions in Section 3, the Surety shall promptly and at the Surety’s expense

defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner against a duly tendered claim, demand, lien or suit.

§ 5 The Surety’s obligations to a Claimant under this Bond shall arise after the following:

§ 5.1 Claimants, who do not have a direct contract with the Contractor,

.1 have furnished a written notice of non-payment to the Contractor, stating with substantial accuracy the

amount claimed and the name of the party to whom the materials were, or equipment was, furnished or

supplied or for whom the labor was done or performed, within ninety (90) days after having last

performed labor or last furnished materials or equipment included in the Claim; and

.2 have sent a Claim to the Surety (at the address described in Section 13).

§ 5.2 Claimants, who are employed by or have a direct contract with the Contractor, have sent a Claim to the Surety (at

the address described in Section 13).

§ 6 If a notice of non-payment required by Section 5.1.1 is given by the Owner to the Contractor, that is sufficient to

satisfy a Claimant’s obligation to furnish a written notice of non-payment under Section 5.1.1.

§ 7 When a Claimant has satisfied the conditions of Sections 5.1 or 5.2, whichever is applicable, the Surety shall

promptly and at the Surety’s expense take the following actions:

§ 7.1 Send an answer to the Claimant, with a copy to the Owner, within sixty (60) days after receipt of the Claim,

stating the amounts that are undisputed and the basis for challenging any amounts that are disputed; and

§ 7.2 Pay or arrange for payment of any undisputed amounts.

§ 7.3 The Surety’s failure to discharge its obligations under Section 7.1 or Section 7.2 shall not be deemed to

constitute a waiver of defenses the Surety or Contractor may have or acquire as to a Claim, except as to undisputed

amounts for which the Surety and Claimant have reached agreement. If, however, the Surety fails to discharge its

obligations under Section 7.1 or Section 7.2, the Surety shall indemnify the Claimant for the reasonable attorney’s fees

the Claimant incurs thereafter to recover any sums found to be due and owing to the Claimant.

§ 8 The Surety’s total obligation shall not exceed the amount of this Bond, plus the amount of reasonable attorney’s

fees provided under Section 7.3, and the amount of this Bond shall be credited for any payments made in good faith by

the Surety.

§ 9 Amounts owed by the Owner to the Contractor under the Construction Contract shall be used for the performance

of the Construction Contract and to satisfy claims, if any, under any construction performance bond. By the Contractor

furnishing and the Owner accepting this Bond, they agree that all funds earned by the Contractor in the performance of

the Construction Contract are dedicated to satisfy obligations of the Contractor and Surety under this Bond, subject to

the Owner’s priority to use the funds for the completion of the work.





User Notes: (1228170869)

3

§ 10 The Surety shall not be liable to the Owner, Claimants or others for obligations of the Contractor that are

unrelated to the Construction Contract. The Owner shall not be liable for the payment of any costs or expenses of any

Claimant under this Bond, and shall have under this Bond no obligation to make payments to, or give notice on behalf

of, Claimants or otherwise have any obligations to Claimants under this Bond.

§ 11 The Surety hereby waives notice of any change, including changes of time, to the Construction Contract or to

related subcontracts, purchase orders and other obligations.

§ 12 No suit or action shall be commenced by a Claimant under this Bond other than in a court of competent

jurisdiction in the state in which the project that is the subject of the Construction Contract is located or after the

expiration of one year from the date (1) on which the Claimant sent a Claim to the Surety pursuant to Section 5.1.2 or

5.2, or (2) on which the last labor or service was performed by anyone or the last materials or equipment were

furnished by anyone under the Construction Contract, whichever of (1) or (2) first occurs. If the provisions of this

Paragraph are void or prohibited by law, the minimum period of limitation available to sureties as a defense in the

jurisdiction of the suit shall be applicable.

§ 13 Notice and Claims to the Surety, the Owner or the Contractor shall be mailed or delivered to the address shown

on the page on which their signature appears. Actual receipt of notice or Claims, however accomplished, shall be

sufficient compliance as of the date received.

§ 14 When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the location where

the construction was to be performed, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal requirement

shall be deemed deleted herefrom and provisions conforming to such statutory or other legal requirement shall be

deemed incorporated herein. When so furnished, the intent is that this Bond shall be construed as a statutory bond and

not as a common law bond.

§ 15 Upon request by any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of this Bond, the Contractor and

Owner shall promptly furnish a copy of this Bond or shall permit a copy to be made.

§ 16 Definitions § 16.1 Claim. A written statement by the Claimant including at a minimum:

.1 the name of the Claimant;

.2 the name of the person for whom the labor was done, or materials or equipment furnished;

.3 a copy of the agreement or purchase order pursuant to which labor, materials or equipment was

furnished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract;

.4 a brief description of the labor, materials or equipment furnished;

.5 the date on which the Claimant last performed labor or last furnished materials or equipment for use in

the performance of the Construction Contract;

.6 the total amount earned by the Claimant for labor, materials or equipment furnished as of the date of the

Claim;

.7 the total amount of previous payments received by the Claimant; and

.8 the total amount due and unpaid to the Claimant for labor, materials or equipment furnished as of the

date of the Claim.

§ 16.2 Claimant. An individual or entity having a direct contract with the Contractor or with a subcontractor of the

Contractor to furnish labor, materials or equipment for use in the performance of the Construction Contract. The term

Claimant also includes any individual or entity that has rightfully asserted a claim under an applicable mechanic’s lien

or similar statute against the real property upon which the Project is located. The intent of this Bond shall be to include

without limitation in the terms “labor, materials or equipment” that part of water, gas, power, light, heat, oil, gasoline,

telephone service or rental equipment used in the Construction Contract, architectural and engineering services

required for performance of the work of the Contractor and the Contractor’s subcontractors, and all other items for

which a mechanic's lien may be asserted in the jurisdiction where the labor, materials or equipment were furnished.

§ 16.3 Construction Contract. The agreement between the Owner and Contractor identified on the cover page,

including all Contract Documents and all changes made to the agreement and the Contract Documents.





User Notes: (1228170869)

4

§ 16.4 Owner Default. Failure of the Owner, which has not been remedied or waived, to pay the Contractor as required

under the Construction Contract or to perform and complete or comply with the other material terms of the

Construction Contract.

§ 16.5 Contract Documents. All the documents that comprise the agreement between the Owner and Contractor.

§ 17 If this Bond is issued for an agreement between a Contractor and subcontractor, the term Contractor in this Bond

shall be deemed to be Subcontractor and the term Owner shall be deemed to be Contractor.

§ 18 Modifications to this bond are as follows:

« »

(Space is provided below for additional signatures of added parties, other than those appearing on the cover page.)


Signature:

Signature:

Name and Title: « »« » Name and Title: « »« »

Address: « » Address: « »

AIA®


Performance Bond

AIA Document A312™ – 2010 Performance Bond. The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected




User Notes: (1899066936)

1













should be reviewed.


legal consequences.




modification.





applicable.







document.



of business)

« »« »

« »

« »« »

« »




Ogden, Utah 84405»

CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT Date: «»

Amount: $ «»

Description:

(Name and location)



Ogden, Utah 84405»

BOND

Date:

(Not earlier than Construction Contract Date)

« »

Amount: $ « »

Modifications to this Bond: « » None « » See Section 16


Signature: Signature:

Name and

Title:

« »« » Name and

Title:

« »« »

(Any additional signatures appear on the last page of this Performance Bond.)

(FOR INFORMATION ONLY — Name, address and telephone)

AGENT or BROKER:

OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE: (Architect, Engineer or other party:)

« »

« »

« »

«»

«»

«»

«»

«»

«»





User Notes: (1899066936)

2

§ 1 The Contractor and Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators,

successors and assigns to the Owner for the performance of the Construction Contract, which is incorporated herein by

reference.

§ 2 If the Contractor performs the Construction Contract, the Surety and the Contractor shall have no obligation under

this Bond, except when applicable to participate in a conference as provided in Section 3.

§ 3 If there is no Owner Default under the Construction Contract, the Surety’s obligation under this Bond shall arise

after

.1 the Owner first provides notice to the Contractor and the Surety that the Owner is considering declaring

a Contractor Default. Such notice shall indicate whether the Owner is requesting a conference among

the Owner, Contractor and Surety to discuss the Contractor’s performance. If the Owner does not

request a conference, the Surety may, within five (5) business days after receipt of the Owner’s notice,

request such a conference. If the Surety timely requests a conference, the Owner shall attend. Unless

the Owner agrees otherwise, any conference requested under this Section 3.1 shall be held within ten

(10) business days of the Surety’s receipt of the Owner’s notice. If the Owner, the Contractor and the

Surety agree, the Contractor shall be allowed a reasonable time to perform the Construction Contract,

but such an agreement shall not waive the Owner’s right, if any, subsequently to declare a Contractor

Default;

.2 the Owner declares a Contractor Default, terminates the Construction Contract and notifies the Surety;

and

.3 the Owner has agreed to pay the Balance of the Contract Price in accordance with the terms of the

Construction Contract to the Surety or to a contractor selected to perform the Construction Contract.

§ 4 Failure on the part of the Owner to comply with the notice requirement in Section 3.1 shall not constitute a failure

to comply with a condition precedent to the Surety’s obligations, or release the Surety from its obligations, except to

the extent the Surety demonstrates actual prejudice.

§ 5 When the Owner has satisfied the conditions of Section 3, the Surety shall promptly and at the Surety’s expense

take one of the following actions:

§ 5.1 Arrange for the Contractor, with the consent of the Owner, to perform and complete the Construction Contract;

§ 5.2 Undertake to perform and complete the Construction Contract itself, through its agents or independent

contractors;

§ 5.3 Obtain bids or negotiated proposals from qualified contractors acceptable to the Owner for a contract for

performance and completion of the Construction Contract, arrange for a contract to be prepared for execution by the

Owner and a contractor selected with the Owner’s concurrence, to be secured with performance and payment bonds

executed by a qualified surety equivalent to the bonds issued on the Construction Contract, and pay to the Owner the

amount of damages as described in Section 7 in excess of the Balance of the Contract Price incurred by the Owner as

a result of the Contractor Default; or

§ 5.4 Waive its right to perform and complete, arrange for completion, or obtain a new contractor and with reasonable

promptness under the circumstances:

.1 After investigation, determine the amount for which it may be liable to the Owner and, as soon as

practicable after the amount is determined, make payment to the Owner; or

.2 Deny liability in whole or in part and notify the Owner, citing the reasons for denial.

§ 6 If the Surety does not proceed as provided in Section 5 with reasonable promptness, the Surety shall be deemed to

be in default on this Bond seven days after receipt of an additional written notice from the Owner to the Surety

demanding that the Surety perform its obligations under this Bond, and the Owner shall be entitled to enforce any

remedy available to the Owner. If the Surety proceeds as provided in Section 5.4, and the Owner refuses the payment

or the Surety has denied liability, in whole or in part, without further notice the Owner shall be entitled to enforce any

remedy available to the Owner.

§ 7 If the Surety elects to act under Section 5.1, 5.2 or 5.3, then the responsibilities of the Surety to the Owner shall not

be greater than those of the Contractor under the Construction Contract, and the responsibilities of the Owner to the





User Notes: (1899066936)

3

Surety shall not be greater than those of the Owner under the Construction Contract. Subject to the commitment by the

Owner to pay the Balance of the Contract Price, the Surety is obligated, without duplication, for

.1 the responsibilities of the Contractor for correction of defective work and completion of the

Construction Contract;

.2 additional legal, design professional and delay costs resulting from the Contractor’s Default, and

resulting from the actions or failure to act of the Surety under Section 5; and

.3 liquidated damages, or if no liquidated damages are specified in the Construction Contract, actual

damages caused by delayed performance or non-performance of the Contractor.

§ 8 If the Surety elects to act under Section 5.1, 5.3 or 5.4, the Surety’s liability is limited to the amount of this Bond.

§ 9 The Surety shall not be liable to the Owner or others for obligations of the Contractor that are unrelated to the

Construction Contract, and the Balance of the Contract Price shall not be reduced or set off on account of any such

unrelated obligations. No right of action shall accrue on this Bond to any person or entity other than the Owner or its

heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns.

§ 10 The Surety hereby waives notice of any change, including changes of time, to the Construction Contract or to

related subcontracts, purchase orders and other obligations.

§ 11 Any proceeding, legal or equitable, under this Bond may be instituted in any court of competent jurisdiction in

the location in which the work or part of the work is located and shall be instituted within two years after a declaration

of Contractor Default or within two years after the Contractor ceased working or within two years after the Surety

refuses or fails to perform its obligations under this Bond, whichever occurs first. If the provisions of this Paragraph

are void or prohibited by law, the minimum period of limitation available to sureties as a defense in the jurisdiction of

the suit shall be applicable.

§ 12 Notice to the Surety, the Owner or the Contractor shall be mailed or delivered to the address shown on the page

on which their signature appears.

§ 13 When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the location where

the construction was to be performed, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal requirement

shall be deemed deleted herefrom and provisions conforming to such statutory or other legal requirement shall be

deemed incorporated herein. When so furnished, the intent is that this Bond shall be construed as a statutory bond and

not as a common law bond.

§ 14 Definitions § 14.1 Balance of the Contract Price. The total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor under the Construction

Contract after all proper adjustments have been made, including allowance to the Contractor of any amounts received

or to be received by the Owner in settlement of insurance or other claims for damages to which the Contractor is

entitled, reduced by all valid and proper payments made to or on behalf of the Contractor under the Construction

Contract.

§ 14.2 Construction Contract. The agreement between the Owner and Contractor identified on the cover page,

including all Contract Documents and changes made to the agreement and the Contract Documents.

§ 14.3 Contractor Default. Failure of the Contractor, which has not been remedied or waived, to perform or otherwise

to comply with a material term of the Construction Contract.

§ 14.4 Owner Default. Failure of the Owner, which has not been remedied or waived, to pay the Contractor as required

under the Construction Contract or to perform and complete or comply with the other material terms of the

Construction Contract.

§ 14.5 Contract Documents. All the documents that comprise the agreement between the Owner and Contractor.

§ 15 If this Bond is issued for an agreement between a Contractor and subcontractor, the term Contractor in this Bond

shall be deemed to be Subcontractor and the term Owner shall be deemed to be Contractor.





User Notes: (1899066936)

4

§ 16 Modifications to this bond are as follows:

« »

(Space is provided below for additional signatures of added parties, other than those appearing on the cover page.)


Signature:

Signature:

Name and Title: « »« » Name and Title: « »« »

Address: « » Address: « »

AIA®


Instructions to Bidders

AIA Document A701™ – 1997. Copyright © 1970, 1974, 1978, 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING:

This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document,

or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.

This draft was produced by AIA software at 17:38:43 on 07/09/2018 under Order No.8665849388 which expires on 03/28/2019, and is not for resale.

User Notes: (1433301108)

1













should be reviewed.


legal consequences.




modification.







document.

for the following PROJECT: (Name and location or address)



Ogden, Utah 84405»

THE OWNER: (Name, legal status and address)



Ogden, Utah 84405»

THE ARCHITECT: (Name, legal status and address)

«NJRA Architects, Inc.»«»

«5272 South College Drive, Suite 104

Murray, Utah 84123»

TABLE OF ARTICLES 1 DEFINITIONS 2 BIDDER'S REPRESENTATIONS 3 BIDDING DOCUMENTS 4 BIDDING PROCEDURES 5 CONSIDERATION OF BIDS 6 POST-BID INFORMATION 7 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND 8 FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR





User Notes: (1433301108)

2

ARTICLE 1 DEFINITIONS § 1.1 Bidding Documents include the Bidding Requirements and the proposed Contract Documents. The Bidding

Requirements consist of the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, Instructions to Bidders, Supplementary Instructions to

Bidders, the bid form, and other sample bidding and contract forms. The proposed Contract Documents consist of the

form of Agreement between the Owner and Contractor, Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other

Conditions), Drawings, Specifications and all Addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract.

§ 1.2 Definitions set forth in the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, AIA Document A201, or in

other Contract Documents are applicable to the Bidding Documents.

§ 1.3 Addenda are written or graphic instruments issued by the Architect prior to the execution of the Contract which

modify or interpret the Bidding Documents by additions, deletions, clarifications or corrections.

§ 1.4 A Bid is a complete and properly executed proposal to do the Work for the sums stipulated therein, submitted in

accordance with the Bidding Documents.

§ 1.5 The Base Bid is the sum stated in the Bid for which the Bidder offers to perform the Work described in the

Bidding Documents as the base, to which Work may be added or from which Work may be deleted for sums stated in

Alternate Bids.

§ 1.6 An Alternate Bid (or Alternate) is an amount stated in the Bid to be added to or deducted from the amount of the

Base Bid if the corresponding change in the Work, as described in the Bidding Documents, is accepted.

§ 1.7 A Unit Price is an amount stated in the Bid as a price per unit of measurement for materials, equipment or

services or a portion of the Work as described in the Bidding Documents.

§ 1.8 A Bidder is a person or entity who submits a Bid and who meets the requirements set forth in the Bidding

Documents.

§ 1.9 A Sub-bidder is a person or entity who submits a bid to a Bidder for materials, equipment or labor for a portion of

the Work.

ARTICLE 2 BIDDER'S REPRESENTATIONS § 2.1 The Bidder by making a Bid represents that:

§ 2.1.1 The Bidder has read and understands the Bidding Documents or Contract Documents, to the extent that such

documentation relates to the Work for which the Bid is submitted, and for other portions of the Project, if any, being

bid concurrently or presently under construction.

§ 2.1.2 The Bid is made in compliance with the Bidding Documents.

§ 2.1.3 The Bidder has visited the site, become familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be performed

and has correlated the Bidder's personal observations with the requirements of the proposed Contract Documents.

§ 2.1.4 The Bid is based upon the materials, equipment and systems required by the Bidding Documents without

exception.

ARTICLE 3 BIDDING DOCUMENTS § 3.1 COPIES § 3.1.1 Bidders may obtain complete sets of the Bidding Documents from the issuing office designated in the

Advertisement or Invitation to Bid in the number and for the deposit sum, if any, stated therein. The deposit will be

refunded to Bidders who submit a bona fide Bid and return the Bidding Documents in good condition within ten days

after receipt of Bids. The cost of replacement of missing or damaged documents will be deducted from the deposit. A

Bidder receiving a Contract award may retain the Bidding Documents and the Bidder's deposit will be refunded.

§ 3.1.2 Bidding Documents will not be issued directly to Sub-bidders unless specifically offered in the Advertisement

or Invitation to Bid, or in supplementary instructions to bidders.





User Notes: (1433301108)

3

§ 3.1.3 Bidders shall use complete sets of Bidding Documents in preparing Bids; neither the Owner nor Architect

assumes responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding

Documents.

§ 3.1.4 The Owner and Architect may make copies of the Bidding Documents available on the above terms for the

purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work. No license or grant of use is conferred by issuance of copies of the Bidding

Documents.

§ 3.2 INTERPRETATION OR CORRECTION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS § 3.2.1 The Bidder shall carefully study and compare the Bidding Documents with each other, and with other work

being bid concurrently or presently under construction to the extent that it relates to the Work for which the Bid is

submitted, shall examine the site and local conditions, and shall at once report to the Architect errors, inconsistencies

or ambiguities discovered.

§ 3.2.2 Bidders and Sub-bidders requiring clarification or interpretation of the Bidding Documents shall make a

written request which shall reach the Architect at least seven days prior to the date for receipt of Bids.

§ 3.2.3 Interpretations, corrections and changes of the Bidding Documents will be made by Addendum.

Interpretations, corrections and changes of the Bidding Documents made in any other manner will not be binding, and

Bidders shall not rely upon them.

§ 3.3 SUBSTITUTIONS § 3.3.1 The materials, products and equipment described in the Bidding Documents establish a standard of required

function, dimension, appearance and quality to be met by any proposed substitution.

§ 3.3.2 No substitution will be considered prior to receipt of Bids unless written request for approval has been received

by the Architect at least ten days prior to the date for receipt of Bids. Such requests shall include the name of the

material or equipment for which it is to be substituted and a complete description of the proposed substitution

including drawings, performance and test data, and other information necessary for an evaluation. A statement setting

forth changes in other materials, equipment or other portions of the Work, including changes in the work of other

contracts that incorporation of the proposed substitution would require, shall be included. The burden of proof of the

merit of the proposed substitution is upon the proposer. The Architect's decision of approval or disapproval of a

proposed substitution shall be final.

§ 3.3.3 If the Architect approves a proposed substitution prior to receipt of Bids, such approval will be set forth in an

Addendum. Bidders shall not rely upon approvals made in any other manner.

§ 3.3.4 No substitutions will be considered after the Contract award unless specifically provided for in the Contract

Documents.

§ 3.4 ADDENDA § 3.4.1 Addenda will be transmitted to all who are known by the issuing office to have received a complete set of

Bidding Documents.

§ 3.4.2 Copies of Addenda will be made available for inspection wherever Bidding Documents are on file for that

purpose.

§ 3.4.3 Addenda will be issued no later than four days prior to the date for receipt of Bids except an Addendum

withdrawing the request for Bids or one which includes postponement of the date for receipt of Bids.

§ 3.4.4 Each Bidder shall ascertain prior to submitting a Bid that the Bidder has received all Addenda issued, and the

Bidder shall acknowledge their receipt in the Bid.

ARTICLE 4 BIDDING PROCEDURES § 4.1 PREPARATION OF BIDS § 4.1.1 Bids shall be submitted on the forms included with the Bidding Documents.

§ 4.1.2 All blanks on the bid form shall be legibly executed in a non-erasable medium.





User Notes: (1433301108)

4

§ 4.1.3 Sums shall be expressed in both words and figures. In case of discrepancy, the amount written in words shall

govern.

§ 4.1.4 Interlineations, alterations and erasures must be initialed by the signer of the Bid.

§ 4.1.5 All requested Alternates shall be bid. If no change in the Base Bid is required, enter "No Change."

§ 4.1.6 Where two or more Bids for designated portions of the Work have been requested, the Bidder may, without

forfeiture of the bid security, state the Bidder's refusal to accept award of less than the combination of Bids stipulated

by the Bidder. The Bidder shall make no additional stipulations on the bid form nor qualify the Bid in any other

manner.

§ 4.1.7 Each copy of the Bid shall state the legal name of the Bidder and the nature of legal form of the Bidder. The

Bidder shall provide evidence of legal authority to perform within the jurisdiction of the Work. Each copy shall be

signed by the person or persons legally authorized to bind the Bidder to a contract. A Bid by a corporation shall further

give the state of incorporation and have the corporate seal affixed. A Bid submitted by an agent shall have a current

power of attorney attached certifying the agent's authority to bind the Bidder.

§ 4.2 BID SECURITY § 4.2.1 Each Bid shall be accompanied by a bid security in the form and amount required if so stipulated in the

Instructions to Bidders. The Bidder pledges to enter into a Contract with the Owner on the terms stated in the Bid and

will, if required, furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of the Contract and payment of all obligations arising

thereunder. Should the Bidder refuse to enter into such Contract or fail to furnish such bonds if required, the amount of

the bid security shall be forfeited to the Owner as liquidated damages, not as a penalty. The amount of the bid security

shall not be forfeited to the Owner in the event the Owner fails to comply with Section 6.2.

§ 4.2.2 If a surety bond is required, it shall be written on AIA Document A310, Bid Bond, unless otherwise provided in

the Bidding Documents, and the attorney-in-fact who executes the bond on behalf of the surety shall affix to the bond

a certified and current copy of the power of attorney.

§ 4.2.3 The Owner will have the right to retain the bid security of Bidders to whom an award is being considered until

either (a) the Contract has been executed and bonds, if required, have been furnished, or (b) the specified time has

elapsed so that Bids may be withdrawn or (c) all Bids have been rejected.

§ 4.3 SUBMISSION OF BIDS § 4.3.1 All copies of the Bid, the bid security, if any, and any other documents required to be submitted with the Bid

shall be enclosed in a sealed opaque envelope. The envelope shall be addressed to the party receiving the Bids and

shall be identified with the Project name, the Bidder's name and address and, if applicable, the designated portion of

the Work for which the Bid is submitted. If the Bid is sent by mail, the sealed envelope shall be enclosed in a separate

mailing envelope with the notation "SEALED BID ENCLOSED" on the face thereof.

§ 4.3.2 Bids shall be deposited at the designated location prior to the time and date for receipt of Bids. Bids received

after the time and date for receipt of Bids will be returned unopened.

§ 4.3.3 The Bidder shall assume full responsibility for timely delivery at the location designated for receipt of Bids.

§ 4.3.4 Oral, telephonic, telegraphic, facsimile or other electronically transmitted bids will not be considered.

§ 4.4 MODIFICATION OR WITHDRAWAL OF BID § 4.4.1 A Bid may not be modified, withdrawn or canceled by the Bidder during the stipulated time period following

the time and date designated for the receipt of Bids, and each Bidder so agrees in submitting a Bid.

§ 4.4.2 Prior to the time and date designated for receipt of Bids, a Bid submitted may be modified or withdrawn by

notice to the party receiving Bids at the place designated for receipt of Bids. Such notice shall be in writing over the

signature of the Bidder. Written confirmation over the signature of the Bidder shall be received, and date- and

time-stamped by the receiving party on or before the date and time set for receipt of Bids. A change shall be so worded

as not to reveal the amount of the original Bid.





User Notes: (1433301108)

5

§ 4.4.3 Withdrawn Bids may be resubmitted up to the date and time designated for the receipt of Bids provided that

they are then fully in conformance with these Instructions to Bidders.

§ 4.4.4 Bid security, if required, shall be in an amount sufficient for the Bid as resubmitted.

ARTICLE 5 CONSIDERATION OF BIDS § 5.1 OPENING OF BIDS At the discretion of the Owner, if stipulated in the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, the properly identified Bids

received on time will be publicly opened and will be read aloud. An abstract of the Bids may be made available to

Bidders.

§ 5.2 REJECTION OF BIDS The Owner shall have the right to reject any or all Bids. A Bid not accompanied by a required bid security or by other

data required by the Bidding Documents, or a Bid which is in any way incomplete or irregular is subject to rejection.

§ 5.3 ACCEPTANCE OF BID (AWARD) § 5.3.1 It is the intent of the Owner to award a Contract to the lowest qualified Bidder provided the Bid has been

submitted in accordance with the requirements of the Bidding Documents and does not exceed the funds available.

The Owner shall have the right to waive informalities and irregularities in a Bid received and to accept the Bid which,

in the Owner's judgment, is in the Owner's own best interests.

§ 5.3.2 The Owner shall have the right to accept Alternates in any order or combination, unless otherwise specifically

provided in the Bidding Documents, and to determine the low Bidder on the basis of the sum of the Base Bid and

Alternates accepted.

ARTICLE 6 POST-BID INFORMATION § 6.1 CONTRACTOR'S QUALIFICATION STATEMENT Bidders to whom award of a Contract is under consideration shall submit to the Architect, upon request, a properly

executed AIA Document A305, Contractor's Qualification Statement, unless such a Statement has been previously

required and submitted as a prerequisite to the issuance of Bidding Documents.

§ 6.2 OWNER'S FINANCIAL CAPABILITY The Owner shall, at the request of the Bidder to whom award of a Contract is under consideration and no later than

seven days prior to the expiration of the time for withdrawal of Bids, furnish to the Bidder reasonable evidence that

financial arrangements have been made to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract. Unless such reasonable

evidence is furnished, the Bidder will not be required to execute the Agreement between the Owner and Contractor.

§ 6.3 SUBMITTALS § 6.3.1 The Bidder shall, as soon as practicable or as stipulated in the Bidding Documents, after notification of

selection for the award of a Contract, furnish to the Owner through the Architect in writing:

.1 a designation of the Work to be performed with the Bidder's own forces;

.2 names of the manufacturers, products, and the suppliers of principal items or systems of materials and

equipment proposed for the Work; and

.3 names of persons or entities (including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a

special design) proposed for the principal portions of the Work.

§ 6.3.2 The Bidder will be required to establish to the satisfaction of the Architect and Owner the reliability and

responsibility of the persons or entities proposed to furnish and perform the Work described in the Bidding

Documents.

§ 6.3.3 Prior to the execution of the Contract, the Architect will notify the Bidder in writing if either the Owner or

Architect, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the Bidder. If the Owner

or Architect has reasonable objection to a proposed person or entity, the Bidder may, at the Bidder's option, (1)

withdraw the Bid or (2) submit an acceptable substitute person or entity with an adjustment in the Base Bid or

Alternate Bid to cover the difference in cost occasioned by such substitution. The Owner may accept the adjusted bid

price or disqualify the Bidder. In the event of either withdrawal or disqualification, bid security will not be forfeited.





User Notes: (1433301108)

6

§ 6.3.4 Persons and entities proposed by the Bidder and to whom the Owner and Architect have made no reasonable

objection must be used on the Work for which they were proposed and shall not be changed except with the written

consent of the Owner and Architect.

ARTICLE 7 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND § 7.1 BOND REQUIREMENTS § 7.1.1 If stipulated in the Bidding Documents, the Bidder shall furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of the

Contract and payment of all obligations arising thereunder. Bonds may be secured through the Bidder's usual sources.

§ 7.1.2 If the furnishing of such bonds is stipulated in the Bidding Documents, the cost shall be included in the Bid. If

the furnishing of such bonds is required after receipt of bids and before execution of the Contract, the cost of such

bonds shall be added to the Bid in determining the Contract Sum.

§ 7.1.3 If the Owner requires that bonds be secured from other than the Bidder's usual sources, changes in cost will be

adjusted as provided in the Contract Documents.

§ 7.2 TIME OF DELIVERY AND FORM OF BONDS § 7.2.1 The Bidder shall deliver the required bonds to the Owner not later than three days following the date of

execution of the Contract. If the Work is to be commenced prior thereto in response to a letter of intent, the Bidder

shall, prior to commencement of the Work, submit evidence satisfactory to the Owner that such bonds will be

furnished and delivered in accordance with this Section 7.2.1.

§ 7.2.2 Unless otherwise provided, the bonds shall be written on AIA Document A312, Performance Bond and

Payment Bond. Both bonds shall be written in the amount of the Contract Sum.

§ 7.2.3 The bonds shall be dated on or after the date of the Contract.

§ 7.2.4 The Bidder shall require the attorney-in-fact who executes the required bonds on behalf of the surety to affix

thereto a certified and current copy of the power of attorney.

ARTICLE 8 FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR Unless otherwise required in the Bidding Documents, the Agreement for the Work will be written on AIA Document

A101, Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor Where the Basis of Payment Is a Stipulated Sum.

AIA®

Document G704TM – 2017

Certificate of Substantial Completion

AIA Document G704™ – 2017. Copyright © 1963, 1978, 1992, 2000 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved.

WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of

this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent

possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 17:40:03 on 07/09/2018 under Order No. which expires on 01/01/0001,

and is not for resale.

User Notes: (3B9ADA05)

1

PROJECT: (name and address) CONTRACT INFORMATION: CERTIFICATE INFORMATION: Ogden Regional Medical Center ED

Remodel

Contract For: General Construction Certificate Number: 001

5475 South 500 East

Ogden, Utah 84405

Date: Date:

OWNER: (name and address) ARCHITECT: (name and address) CONTRACTOR: (name and address)

Ogden Regional Medical Center NJRA Architects, Inc.

5475 South 500 East

Ogden, Utah 84405

5272 South College Drive, Suite 104

Murray, Utah 84123

The Work identified below has been reviewed and found, to the Architect’s best knowledge, information, and belief, to be

substantially complete. Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work when the Work or designated portion is

sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work for its

intended use. The date of Substantial Completion of the Project or portion designated below is the date established by this

Certificate.

(Identify the Work, or portion thereof, that is substantially complete.)

NJRA Architects, Inc.

Selvam Rajavelu,

President

ARCHITECT (Firm Name) SIGNATURE PRINTED NAME AND TITLE DATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

WARRANTIES The date of Substantial Completion of the Project or portion designated above is also the date of commencement of applicable

warranties required by the Contract Documents, except as stated below:

(Identify warranties that do not commence on the date of Substantial Completion, if any, and indicate their date of

commencement.)

WORK TO BE COMPLETED OR CORRECTED A list of items to be completed or corrected is attached hereto, or transmitted as agreed upon by the parties, and identified as

follows:

(Identify the list of Work to be completed or corrected.)

The failure to include any items on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance

with the Contract Documents. Unless otherwise agreed to in writing, the date of commencement of warranties for items on the

attached list will be the date of issuance of the final Certificate of Payment or the date of final payment, whichever occurs first.

The Contractor will complete or correct the Work on the list of items attached hereto within ( ) days from the above

date of Substantial Completion.

Cost estimate of Work to be completed or corrected: $

The responsibilities of the Owner and Contractor for security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work, insurance, and

other items identified below shall be as follows:

(Note: Owner’s and Contractor’s legal and insurance counsel should review insurance requirements and coverage.)

The Owner and Contractor hereby accept the responsibilities assigned to them in this Certificate of Substantial Completion:

AIA Document G704™ – 2017. Copyright © 1963, 1978, 1992, 2000 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved.

WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of

this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent

possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 17:40:03 on 07/09/2018 under Order No. which expires on 01/01/0001,

and is not for resale.

User Notes: (3B9ADA05)

2

CONTRACTOR (Firm

Name)

SIGNATURE PRINTED NAME AND TITLE DATE

Ogden Regional Medical

Center

OWNER (Firm Name) SIGNATURE PRINTED NAME AND TITLE DATE

AIA®

Document G707TM – 1994

Consent Of Surety to Final Payment

AIA Document G707™ – 1994. Copyright © 1982 and 1994 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA®

Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document,

or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the

law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 17:41:34 on 07/09/2018 under Order No. which expires on 01/01/0001, and is not for

resale.

User Notes: (3B9ADA1A)

1

PROJECT: (Name and address) ARCHITECT’S PROJECT NUMBER: OWNER:

ARCHITECT:

CONTRACTOR:

SURETY:

OTHER:

Ogden Regional Medical Center

ED Remodel

5475 South 500 East

Ogden, Utah 84405

CONTRACT FOR: General Construction

TO OWNER: (Name and address) CONTRACT DATED:


5475 South 500 East

Ogden, Utah 84405

In accordance with the provisions of the Contract between the Owner and the Contractor as indicated

above, the

(Insert name and address of Surety)

, SURETY,

on bond of

(Insert name and address of Contractor)

, CONTRACTOR,

hereby approves of the final payment to the Contractor, and agrees that final payment to the Contractor

shall not relieve the Surety of any of its obligations to

(Insert name and address of Owner)


5475 South 500 East

Ogden, Utah 84405

, OWNER,

as set forth in said Surety's bond.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Surety has hereunto set its hand on this date:

(Insert in writing the month followed by the numeric date and year.)

(Surety)

(Signature of authorized representative)

Attest:

(Seal): (Printed name and title)






User Notes: (1194618422)

39

§ 15.3.3 Either party may, within 30 days from the date that mediation has been concluded without resolution of the

dispute or 60 days after mediation has been demanded without resolution of the dispute, demand in writing that the

other party file for binding dispute resolution. If such a demand is made and the party receiving the demand fails to

file for binding dispute resolution within 60 days after receipt thereof, then both parties waive their rights to binding

dispute resolution proceedings with respect to the initial decision. § 15.3.4 The parties shall share the mediator’s fee and any filing fees equally. The mediation shall be held in the place

where the Project is located, unless another location is mutually agreed upon. Agreements reached in mediation shall

be enforceable as settlement agreements in any court having jurisdiction thereof.

§ 15.4 Arbitration § 15.4.1 If the parties have selected arbitration as the method for binding dispute resolution in the Agreement, any

Claim subject to, but not resolved by, mediation shall be subject to arbitration which, unless the parties mutually agree

otherwise, shall be administered by the American Arbitration Association in accordance with its Construction Industry

Arbitration Rules in effect on the date of the Agreement. The Arbitration shall be conducted in the place where the

Project is located, unless another location is mutually agreed upon. A demand for arbitration shall be made in writing,

delivered to the other party to the Contract, and filed with the person or entity administering the arbitration. The party

filing a notice of demand for arbitration must assert in the demand all Claims then known to that party on which

arbitration is permitted to be demanded.

§ 15.4.1.1 A demand for arbitration shall be made no earlier than concurrently with the filing of a request for

mediation, but in no event shall it be made after the date when the institution of legal or equitable proceedings based on

the Claim would be barred by the applicable statute of limitations. For statute of limitations purposes, receipt of a

written demand for arbitration by the person or entity administering the arbitration shall constitute the institution of

legal or equitable proceedings based on the Claim.

§ 15.4.2 The award rendered by the arbitrator or arbitrators shall be final, and judgment may be entered upon it in

accordance with applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof.

§ 15.4.3 The foregoing agreement to arbitrate and other agreements to arbitrate with an additional person or entity duly

consented to by parties to the Agreement, shall be specifically enforceable under applicable law in any court having

jurisdiction thereof.

§ 15.4.4 Consolidation or Joinder § 15.4.4.1 Subject to the rules of the American Arbitration Association or other applicable arbitration rules, either

party may consolidate an arbitration conducted under this Agreement with any other arbitration to which it is a party

provided that (1) the arbitration agreement governing the other arbitration permits consolidation, (2) the arbitrations to

be consolidated substantially involve common questions of law or fact, and (3) the arbitrations employ materially

similar procedural rules and methods for selecting arbitrator(s).

§ 15.4.4.2 Subject to the rules of the American Arbitration Association or other applicable arbitration rules, either

party may include by joinder persons or entities substantially involved in a common question of law or fact whose

presence is required if complete relief is to be accorded in arbitration, provided that the party sought to be joined

consents in writing to such joinder. Consent to arbitration involving an additional person or entity shall not constitute

consent to arbitration of any claim, dispute or other matter in question not described in the written consent.

§ 15.4.4.3 The Owner and Contractor grant to any person or entity made a party to an arbitration conducted under this

Section 15.4, whether by joinder or consolidation, the same rights of joinder and consolidation as those of the Owner

and Contractor under this Agreement.

NJRA Architects, Inc.5272 S. College Drive, Suite 104 | Murray, Utah 84123 | 801.364.9259 | ww.njraarchitects.com

Page 1 of 1

Item Number Description

1 Type here2345

Attachments:

Drawings

ARCHITECT’S SUPPLEMENTAL INSTRUCTIONSDate Issued: Jan X, XXXX

Project: NameAddressAddressAddress

Architect’s Supplemental Instructions:

ASI #1

To: Contractor’s NameAddressAddressAddress

The Work shall be revised in accordance with the following supplemental instructions, and shall be carried out in accordance with the Contract Documents. Prior to proceeding with the work described, the Contractor is to determine if the work is to affect the contract amount. If additional costs are to be incurred, the Contractor shall submit an itemized cost breakdown showing time, material and other items affected by the change. After acceptance of this work and associated costs, a change order will be prepared for signatures to affect a change to the contract.


Page 1 of 1

ItemNumber General Items Description

1 Type here2345

SheetNumber Drawings

Architectural DrawingsA-101 Type hereA-102 Type here

Structural DrawingsS-101 Type here

SpecificationSection Project Manual

Architectural SectionsXXXXXX Type here

Attachments: Drawings

ADDENDUMDate Issued: Jan X, XXXX


Addendum Number: 1

The Contractors submitting proposals on the above-captioned project shall be governed by the following addendum, changes and explanations to the drawings and specifications and shall submit their bids in accordance therewith.

NJRA Architects, Inc.5272 S. College Drive, Suite 104 | Murray, Utah 84123 | 801.364.9259 | www.njraarchitects.com

Page 1 of 1


1 Type here2345

Attachments:

Drawings

PROPOSAL REQUESTDate Issued: Jan X, XXXX


Proposal Request Number:

PR #1


A Proposal shall be prepared in accordance with the Contract Documents, containing detailed information relating to the requested changes. The Contractor shall submit an itemized cost breakdown showing time, material and other items affected by the change. Upon acceptance of this Proposal Request a Change Order will be prepared for signatures to affect a change to the contract.


Page 1 of 1

NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN REVISE AND RESUBMIT FOR FURTHER REVIEW MAKE CORRECTIONS AS NOTED WITHOUT FURTHER REVIEW

REJECTED


1 Item 1 …….2 Item 2 …….3 Item 3 …….4 Item 4 …….

SUBMITTAL REVIEWDate Reviewed: Jan X, XXXX


Specification Section and Name:

ASI #1

Reviewer: Name


Corrections or comments made on the shop drawings and associated information pages during this review do not relieve contractor from compliance with requirements given in the Contract Documents. This check is only for review of general conformance with the design concept of the project and general compliance with the information given in the Contract Documents. Any action shown is subject to the requirements of the plans and specifications. The Contractor is responsible for dimensions, which shall be confirmed and correlated at the job site, fabrication processes and techniques of construction, coordination of his/her work with that of all other trades, and the satisfactory performance of the work.


SUMMARY 011000 - 1

SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Work covered by the Contract Documents.2. Use of premises.3. Code compliance4. Dust control5. Protection of existing improvements6. Traffic Control7. Temporary Controls

1.3 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. Project Identification: Project consists of remodel of existing Radiology Suite at Ogden Regional Medical Center to incorporate new CT equipment & associated accessories.

B. Total interior remodel area in square feet: 1,475.

Project Location: Ogden Regional Medical CenterAddress: 5475 South 500 East Washington Terrace, Utah

C. 1. Owner: Ogden Regional Medical Center, 5475 South 500 East Ogden, Utah

2. Owner's Representative: Brett Dille

D. Architect: NJRA Architects, 5272 S College Dr, Murray, UT 84123

E. The Work consists of the following:

1. The Work includes: architectural, structural, mechanical, plumbing and electrical work as defined on the contract documents.

1.4 USE OF PREMISES

A. Contractor's use of premises is limited only by Owner's right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project.


SUMMARY 011000 - 2

B. Assume full responsibility for the protection and safekeeping of products under this Contract, stored on the site.

1.5 CODE COMPLIANCE

A. All work shall comply with current edition of codes including but not limited to the following:

1. International Building Code2. International Mechanical Code3. International Plumbing Code4. NFPA5. National Electric Code6. OSHA Regulation7. Health and Safety Regulations8. Utility Company Regulations9. Police, Fire Department Rules10. Environmental Protection Regulations11. Americans with Disabilities Act

B. Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to inspect and test according to their requirements and for each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.

C. Requirements of codes and regulations shall be considered as the minimum. Where the contract documents exceed (without violating) code and regulation requirements, contract requirements shall take precedence. Where codes conflict, the more stringent shall apply.

1.6 DUST CONTROL

Temporary partitions should be constructed as called out on the Contract Documents and as mentioned in specification Section 024119 – Selective Demolition.

1.7 PROTECTION OF EXISTING IMPROVEMENTS

A. Take precautions necessary to protect all existing utilities, monitor wells, and other Site improvements to remain from damage due to the work of this Project.

B. Provide restoration of damaged property if damage is a result of construction activities.

1.8 TRAFFIC CONTROL

A. Maintain control of vehicular and pedestrian traffic caused by, or resulting from, the work of this Project.

B. Means of control shall be in accordance with the applicable regulations of the jurisdiction responsible for traffic safety.


SUMMARY 011000 - 3

1.9 TEMPORARY CONTROLS

A. Conform to all applicable state and local ordinances and regulations. Obtain and pay for necessary permits and licenses as required by local jurisdictions.

END OF SECTION


PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 29 00 - 1

SECTION 01 29 00 – PAYMENT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes measurement and payment provisions for, but not limited to, the following:

1. Materials Delivered but Not Yet Installed.

2. Schedule of Values.

3. Applications for Payment.

4. Preliminary Progress Schedule.

5. Construction Progress Schedule.

6. Change Orders.

1.2 MATERIALS DELIVERED BUT NOT INSTALLED

A. Exclude from Applications for Payment materials or equipment delivered and stored, but not yet incorporated into the Work, unless circumstances dictate acceptance (i.e. pre-purchase of equipment for early delivery to prevent delay of construction or subsequent facility opening date) and pre-payment is agreed to, in writing, by the Owner.

B. If Owner has agreed to make early payment on account of materials or equipment not incorporated in the Work, but delivered and stored in conformance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, at the site, or at some other location agreed upon in writing, such pre-payment shall be conditioned upon approval by Contractor's Insurance Carrier, and Architect, in writing, prior to submission by Contractor of the applicable payment request.

C. Pre-payment request shall contain substantiating documentation, including:

1. Bill(s) of Sale.

2. Evidence of insurance for the materials or equipment, covering the item(s) until completion of installation.

3. Provision for transportation to the Project Site.

4. Protection of Owner's interest under any circumstance (i.e. Owner's right to retrieve equipment or materials from storage area of a bankrupt company's property).

5. Provision for inspection/testing at the stored location.

6. Provision for security until completion of installation.



1.3 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Type schedule on AIA Document G703. Owner's Standard Invoice/Schedule of Values or Contractor's standard forms and automated printout equivalent to the AIA Document will be considered for approval by Owner upon Contractor's request. Identify schedule with:

1. Title of Project and location.

2. Architect and Project number.

3. Name and Address of Contractor.

4. Contract designation.

5. Date of submission.

B. Schedule shall list the installed dollar value of the component parts of the Work in sufficient detail to serve as a basis for computing values for progress payments during construction.

C. List each subcontract first using the Table of Contents of the Project Manual as the format.

1. Next list any allowances included in the contract amount.

2. List each major section or portion of work to be performed by the Contractor.

3. List Contractor's fee separately.

4. List any contingencies.

5. Identify each line item with the number and title of the respective major section of the specifications.

6. Subdivide items to correspond with cost correlation requirements for construction progress schedule.

D. For each major line item list sub-values of major products by building area or floor level or other operations under the item.

E. For the various portions of the Work:

1. Each item shall include a directly proportional amount of the Contractor's overhead and profit.

2. For items on which progress payments will be requested for stored materials, break down the value into:

a. The cost of the materials, delivered and unloaded, with taxes paid.

b. The total installed value.



B. The sum of all values listed in the schedule shall equal the total Contract Sum.

C. Refer to General Conditions, Article 12, for changes.

1.4 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

A. Format and Data Required:

1. Submit applications typed on AIA Document G702/703, Application for Payment. Contractor's standard forms and automated print-out equivalent to the AIA Document will be considered for approval by Architect upon request by the Contractor.

2. Submit 2 copies with "wet" signatures.

3. Add provision for Inspector of Record's signature.

B. Provide itemized data on continuation sheet:

1. Format, schedules, line items and values: Those of the Schedule of Values accepted by Architect.

2. Include Payment Application number.

C. Preparation of Application for Each Progress Payment:

1. Application Form:

a. Fill in required information, including that for Change Orders executed prior to date of submittal of application along with the number assigned to each Change Order.

b. Fill in summary of dollar values to agree with respective totals indicated on continuation sheets.

c. Certification that the Project Record Documents are current with the progress status of the Project.

d. Execute certification with signature of a responsible officer of Contract firm.

2. Continuation Sheets:

a. Fill in total list of all scheduled component items of Work, with item number and scheduled dollar value for each item.

b. Fill in dollar value in each column for each scheduled line item when work has been performed or products stored.

1) Round off values to nearest dollar, or as specified for Schedule of Values, and percent of item completion.

c. List each Change Order executed prior to date of submission, at the end of the continuation sheets.



1) List by Change Order number, and description, as for an original component item of work.

D. Substantiating Data for Progress Payments:

1. When Owner or Architect requires substantiating data, submit information, with a cover letter identifying:

a. Project.

b. Application number and date.

c. Detailed list of enclosures.

d. For stored products.

1) Item number and identification as shown on application.

2) Description of specific Material.

2. Submit 1 copy of data and cover letter for each copy of application.

3. Revised updated CPM schedule.

4. Current period's General Contractor Conditional Waiver and the prior period's Unconditional Waiver.

5. Waivers from Subcontractors.

6. Copies of invoices for National Purchase Agreement (NPA) items.

7. Corrections and updates to "as-built" documents.

E. Preparation of Application for Final Payment:

1. Fill in application form as specified for progress payments.

2. Use continuation sheet for presenting the final statement of accounting as specified in Section 01700 - CONTRACT CLOSEOUT.

F. Submittal Procedure:

1. Submit Applications for Payment to Owner at the times stipulated in the Agreement.

2. Number: 3 copies of each Application.

3. When Owner, Inspector of Record, and Contractor agree on percentages to be requested, and when agreed and signed by them and Architect, Architect will transmit the Certificate for Payment to Owner.

4. Approval and signing of the Application for Payment by Owner and Architect is contingent upon approval of the current status of the As-Built Drawings/Record Documents and submittal of updated CPM



schedule.

1.5 CHANGE ORDERS

A. Change Orders shall be processed by the Architect in accordance with the Conditions of the Contract, Supplementary Conditions of the Contract, and as herein specified.

B. Coordination with Contractor's Submittals:

1. Revise Schedule of Values and Application for Payment forms monthly to record each change as a separate item of Work, and to record the adjusted Contract Sum.

2. Upon completion of work under a Change Order, enter pertinent changes in record documents.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 – EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION


PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00 - 1

SECTION 01 31 00 – PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section describes the requirements for Project coordination.

1.2 DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS

A. Minimum administrative and supervisory requirements necessary for coordination of Work shall be fulfilled collectively by the Contractor in coordination with subcontractors including, but not necessarily limited to, the following:

1. Coordination drawings.

2. Coordination meetings.

3. Administrative coordinating personnel.

4. Contractor's coordination of work.

1.3 COORDINATION MEETINGS

A. Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at project site, unless otherwise indicated.

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE COORDINATION PERSONNEL

A. Provide a General Superintendent and other administrative and supervisory personnel required for performance of the Work.

B. Provide specific coordinating personnel for each subcontractor as reasonably required for interfacing Work with other work of total Project.

C. Submittal of Staff Names, Duties: Within 7 days of Notice to Proceed submit to the Owner a listing of principal staff assignments and consultants, including names, addresses and telephone numbers.

1.5 CONTRACTOR'S COORDINATION OF WORK

A. Provide and coordinate the following:

1. General and special services and operations to furnish and install Work.

2. Primary, major and accessory materials, and items necessary to complete the installation.

3. Labor operations and material items reasonably incidental for finishing.



4. Performance of work and delivery of materials in accordance with established construction schedules.

B. Coordinate all aspects of construction operations, generally, and specifically as required to provide Owner with a complete, operable facility.

1. Resolve any dispute over coordination, or failure to coordinate, such that resolution is consistent with Contract Documents. When such resolution is not possible, refer to the General Conditions.

2. Where proper execution of this Work depends on the work of any other contractor, inspect and promptly report to Architect any defects in such work that render it unsuitable for such proper execution and results.

3. Cooperate with other contractors on the Project site and with Architect so that completion of all work can proceed with prudent speed.

a. Furnish other contractors, whose work is fitted to this work, detail and erection drawings giving full information regarding the fabrication and assembly of this Work.

b. So far as possible, drawings shall indicate checked field measurements.

c. Cooperate in timing this Work to join with the work of other contractors or the Owner.

4. Check the drawings of other contracts for interferences with this Work and promptly report to Architect, in writing, any such interferences.

5. Submit complete information, including Drawings, descriptions, sketches, marked prints, etc., as required for Architect's review and coordination of drawings by others which are a part of this Work.

C. Mechanical, Electrical, and Related Systems Coordination: Prior to proceeding with the work, and before installation, coordinate and work out all "tight" conditions involving work of various Sections.

1. Before work proceeds in these areas, prepare supplemental drawings for review by the Architect.

2. Provide all work necessary to coordinate tight conditions, including supplemental drawings in sufficient detail for showing that all work is coordinated in "tight" areas, and additional labor and materials necessary to overcome "tight" conditions at no increase in cost to the Owner.

3. Coordination of "tight" conditions shall include:

a. Providing sufficient clear space around all equipment necessary for maintenance access and as required by Code.

b. Adjustments in depth, position, and elevation of underground



and overhead utilities at points of conflict. Utility space conflicts shall be resolved by giving precedence to those utilities which are called out to be sloped. The term "utility" as used in this paragraph includes: all piping, conduit, and ductwork.

1.6 COORDINATION DRAWINGS

A. Submit plans and cross-sections in sufficient detail to show coordinated layout of all ducts, pipes, electrical work, access doors, above ceiling clearances, canopy rigging, acoustical curtains, and other related items. Plans and cross-sections shall be provided that include all underground ducts, electrical ductbanks, piping, and other underground utilities.

B. Engage professional drafter to prepare these drawings to one-quarter scale on Auto-CAD with title blocks to match the Contract Drawings.

1. These plans shall reflect existing dimensions as field-verified by the Contractor.

2. Plans shall be uniform and identical and shall serve as backgrounds for preparation of shop or layout drawings required under Divisions 15 and 16 and ultimately for recording of as-built information required under these divisions.

3. Where additional sheets of elevations, sections, details, and/or diagrams are required, such sheets shall match the Contract Drawings with respect to size and title block.

4. Prior to beginning excavation for structural footings and utilities, submit a coordination plan showing all underground utilities including: all underground piping, underground ductwork, electrical and communication ductbanks.

a. The plan shall be a composite overlay of sheets each dedicated to a single underground utility using a common background and scale.

b. Dimensions shall be sufficient to clearly indicate the position and depth of each utility relative to structural footings, above grade structures, and finished grade.

c. At points where the plan indicates that utilities will cross each other, cross a structural footing, or run within six (6) feet parallel to either each other or a structural footing, provide a cross section drawing.

d. Cross section drawings shall clearly show the relative positions and depths of each utility and structural footing.

e. The composite plan and cross section drawing(s) shall be updated to "as-builts" and submitted with the Project Record (As-Built) Drawings.

C. Do not commence work until the Architect has reviewed these Drawings.



1.7 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS

A. Prior to starting a particular type or kind of work:

1. Examine for relevant information, all Contract Documents and subsequent data issued;

2. Check accepted submittals and verify dimensions at job site;

3. Consult manufacturers for instructions applicable to conditions under which Work is to be installed;

4. Inspect areas, surfaces or construction receiving the Work.

a. Start of work shall signify compliance with the above requirements and acceptance of previously placed construction or substrates as being in satisfactory condition to achieve proper installations and first quality workmanship as intended under these specifications.

b. Failure to so inspect and report shall constitute an acceptance of the other contractor's work.



END OF SECTION


FIELD ENGINEERING 01 31 10 - 1

SECTION 01 31 10 – FIELD ENGINEERING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 FIELD MEASUREMENTS AND EXISTING CONDITIONS

A. Contractor Responsibility: Exact field measurements are responsibility of the Contractor. Any required off-sets, additional fittings, re-routing of existing or new work to provide serviceable system within the location shown, and to maintain head room and clearances to match existing construction, are responsibility of the Contractor.

B. Layout of the Work: The Contractor shall employ, at the Contractor's own expense, Registered Civil Engineer or Licensed Land Surveyor. Contractor's engineer or surveyor will provide layout of the work of the Project and establish all reference points and elevations required for construction.

1.2 GRADES, LINES AND LEVELS

A. Identification: Owner will identify existing benchmarks, control points, and property corners.

B. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations.

C. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of six permanent benchmarks on Project site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark.

1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents.

2. Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide temporary reference points sufficient to locate the Work.

3. Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked construction to its original condition.

D. Preservation: All stakes, boundary lines, bench marks or survey marks, etc., which have been or may be established in any part of the Project site or adjacent thereto shall be carefully preserved and respected by the Contractor and shall be restored at the Contractor's expense if lost or destroyed as result of the Contractor's operations.

1. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base replacements on the original survey control points.


FIELD ENGINEERING 01 31 10 - 2

E. Conflict: The Contractor will be held responsible for correctness of layout, for establishing location of existing concealed utility lines, and for notifying the Architect in writing in event of conflict with the Drawings. In such case, the Contractor shall not proceed until instructed by the Architect.

F. Certified Survey: On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other work requiring field-engineering services, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations, angles, plumbness and elevations of construction and sitework.

G. Final Property Survey: Prepare a final property survey showing significant features (real property) for Project. Include on the survey a certification, signed by land surveyor that principal metes, bounds, lines, and levels of Project are accurately positioned as shown on the survey.

END OF SECTION


SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 1

SECTION 01 33 00 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.

1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. General: Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings will not be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.

B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities.

C. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of related construction activities. Submittals should be submitted by contractor to architect within 30 days from notice to proceed.

D. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.

1. Initial Review: Allow 10 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.

2. Resubmittal Review: Allow 10 days for review of each resubmittal.

E. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification.

1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block.

2. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken:

a. Project name.b. Date.



c. Name and address of Architect.d. Name and address of Contractor.e. Name and address of subcontractor.f. Name and address of supplier.g. Name of manufacturer.h. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.k. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.

F. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form.

G. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities.

1. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating "Approval notation from Architect's action stamp".

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections.

B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment.1. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are

applicable.2. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Manufacturer's written recommendations.b. Manufacturer's product specifications.c. Manufacturer's installation instructions.d. Standard color charts.e. Manufacturer's catalog cuts.f. Standard product operation and maintenance manuals.g. Compliance with specified referenced standards.

3. Submit Product Data concurrent with Samples.4. Number of Copies: Submit four copies of Product Data, unless otherwise

indicated.

C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.

1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable:



a. Dimensions.b. Identification of products.c. Fabrication and installation drawings.d. Roughing-in and setting diagrams.e. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and

control wiring.f. Shopwork manufacturing instructions.g. Schedules.h. Design calculations.i. Compliance with specified standards.j. Relationship to adjoining construction clearly indicated.

2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm) but no larger than 30 by 40 inches (750 by 1000 mm).

3. Number of Copies: Submit four opaque copies of each submittal, Architect will retain two copies; remainder will be returned.

D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.

1. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.

a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW

A. Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.

3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION

A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval.

B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken, as follows:

END OF SECTION


QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 40 00 - 1

SECTION 01 40 00 – QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section describes the requirements for Owner furnished testing and inspection services which include the following:

1. Observation by Inspector of Record.

2. Laboratory responsibilities.

3. Laboratory reports.

4. Limits on testing laboratory authority.

5. Contractor responsibilities.

6. Schedule of inspections and tests.

B. These services are identified to indicate the requirement for cooperation and assistance needed by Owner's testing and inspection agency.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Testing and Inspection Agency Qualifications: A testing and inspection agency must have a minimum 5 years continuing experience preceding date of these Contract Documents, and be qualified in accordance with the following American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) publications:

1. ASTM E 548-84 Standard Practice for Generic Criteria for use in the Evaluation of Testing and Inspection Agencies.

2. ASTM E 699-79 (1984) Standard Criteria for Evaluation of Agencies Involved in Testing, Quality Assurance, and Evaluating Building Components in Accordance with Test Methods Promulgated by ASTM Committee E-6.

B. Testing Equipment: Calibrated at intervals with devices of accuracy traceable to either National Bureau of Standards or accepted values of natural physical constants.

1.3 INSPECTION AND TESTING PERSONNEL AND FACILITIES

A. Inspector of Record:

1. The Owner will employ one or more qualified Inspectors of Record, acceptable to the Local Building Department issuing Permits who will be employed continuously at the construction site, working under the Owner Representative's general direction. The IOR(s) will observe progress of the work and to report to the Owner any non-conformance



with Contract Documents.

2. In compliance with the State Building Code, Part 1, Title 24 of the California Code of Regulations, Article 7-145, the Inspector of Record shall have personal knowledge, obtained by continuous inspection of all parts of the work of construction in all stages of its progress, to ensure that the work is in accordance with the approved contract documents.

3. Specific duties and limits of responsibilities include the following:

a. Observing and spot checking materials upon arrival at site, and work in progress, to determine conformance with Contract Documents. Reporting any defects immediately to the Owner.

b. Maintaining liaison with the Contractor and his Subcontractors only through Contractor's superintendent.

c. Evaluating Contractor's suggestions and reporting them with recommendations to the Owner for final decision.

d. Remaining alert to the Construction Schedule and immediately reporting any potential delays and problems to the Owner.

e. Maintaining a Daily Log of activities on site, pertinent to a continuous project report record.

f. Preparing a Verified Report every 3 months (or sooner if required for a specific project schedule).

g. Receiving Samples of construction materials at the jobsite.

h. Scheduling and accompanying regulatory inspectors through the project and reporting to the Owner the results of such inspection visits.

i. Being alert to conditions which could affect Hospital's existing operation.

j. Reviewing and verifying degree of work completion with that cited in Contractor's monthly payment request.

k. Maintaining Contract information and Shop Drawing files.

l. Preparing a Field Inspection Report of incomplete or unsatisfac-tory work at intervals throughout the work progress. Checking off such items when made complete and satisfactory by Contractor.

m. Attending project meetings in accordance with specifications

Section 013100.

n. Enforcing Infection Control requirements.



o. Provide all coordination for independent Testing Laboratories.

p. Participate in formation of Final Punch List.

B. Local Permit Issuing Agency will approve the Inspector of Record for the project who shall be allowed access to the project site at any time.

C. Geotechnical Engineer: Observation of all excavations and engineeringcontrol of all fills and backfills shall be by a Geotechnical Engineer.

1. Owner will contract with the Geotechnical Engineer for observation and testing of all excavations and engineering control of all fills and backfills.

2. The Geotechnical Engineer shall submit a Final Report verifying that Work has been performed in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and Soils Investigation Report(s) prepared for this Project.

3. The Geotechnical Engineer shall distribute the Final Report in accordance with Paragraph 1.4, B.

D. Testing and Inspection Agency:

1. The Owner will employ and pay for the services of an independent testing and inspection agency to perform the tests and inspections required herein except where noted otherwise.

a. Employment of the testing and inspection agency shall in no way relieve the Contractor's obligation to perform the work defined in the Contract Documents.

2. Limitations of authority of the Testing and Inspection Agency:

a. Testing Agency is not authorized to:

1) Release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on the requirements of the Contract Documents;

2) Approve or accept any portion of the Work, or;

3) Perform any duties of the Contractor.

3. All work shall conform to the requirements of state and local applicable Codes.

4. Testing and inspection agency shall perform tests and inspections as required by applicable regulation as indicated in the specification Sections, and as directed by the Owner and required by the Code.

5. Testing and inspection agency shall prepare, cure, store, and transport job samples to the Laboratory.

6. At the completion of the Project, verified reports shall be submitted as



required by CCR, Title 22 and as directed.

1.4 LABORATORY REPORTS

A. After each inspection and test, promptly submit copies of laboratory report which includes:

1. Date issued,

2. Project title and number,

3. Name of Inspector from inspection agency,

4. Date and time of sampling or inspection,

5. Identification of product and specifications section,

6. Location in the Project,

7. Type of inspection or test,

8. Date of test,

9. Results of tests,

10. Conformance with Contract Documents,

11. Whether original test or re-test,

12. State/local permit number,

B. Reports shall be distributed to the following:

1. Architect of Record

2. Inspector of Record (I.O.R.)

3. General Contractor

4. Owner.

5. Applicable Consultant

6. Local Jurisdiction where applicable

1.5 LABORATORY RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Architect/Inspector of Record and Contractor in performance of services.

B. Perform specified inspecting, sampling, and testing of Products in accordance with specified standards.



C. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents.

D. Promptly notify Architect, IOR and Contractor of observed irregularities or non-conformance of Work or Products.

E. Perform additional inspection and test required by Architect.

F. Attend preconstruction meetings and progress meetings when requested.

1.6 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Cooperate with Inspector of Record and Testing and Inspection Agency and provide access to Work, including off-site manufacturer's or fabricator's operations.

1. Provide required quantities of material samples to be tested.

2. Samples will be selected and taken by representative of Testing and Inspection Agency.

B. Furnish copies of product data and test reports as required.

C. Furnish incidental labor and facilities:

1. To provide access to work to be tested;

2. To obtain and handle samples at the Project site, or at the source of the Product to be tested or inspected;

3. To facilitate inspections and tests, and;

4. For storage and curing of test samples at the Project site.

D. Provide, on a weekly basis, a Short Interval Project Schedule with a minimum three-week duration which identifies upcoming testing requirements.

E. Schedule the tests and inspections required by the Contract Documents and applicable codes and regulations with the Inspector of Record and the Testing and Inspection Agency, a minimum of 48 hours in advance.

1. When tests or inspections cannot be performed after such notice, or if re-tests and re-inspections are required due to the fault of the Contractor, all costs for such re-work shall be deducted from the Contract Amount. If the remaining unpaid balance in the Contract is insufficient to cover the Change Order for this work, Contractor shall pay the difference directly to the Owner.

2. Do not cover corrected Work until said Work has been re-tested and or re-inspected satisfactorily.



F. Arrange with Owner's Testing and Inspection Agency and pay for additional samples and tests required for the Contractor's convenience when approved by Owner.

G. Contractor shall pay costs for the following specified items:

1. Design mixes for:

a. Cast-in-Place concrete

b. Asphalt paving

2. Redesign of mixes due to change in source of ingredients.

3. Certified mill test reports.

4. Pre-construction tests for masonry units.

5. Preparation and delivery to laboratory of pre-construction masonry prisms for testing.

H. Notification of Architect:

1. In addition to tests and inspections called for in this Section, notify applicable parties of inspections and testing called for in the individual Sections of the Specifications or on the Drawings.

2. Notify 48 hours in advance, to assure inspections prior to covering up or closing in of work involved. Any work covered up before such required inspection or testing shall be uncovered or removed at the Contractor's expense.



END OF SECTION


TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00 - 1

SECTION 01 50 00 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities.

1.3 USE CHARGES

A. General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost.

B. Water Service: Pay water service use charges for water used by all entities for construction operations.

C. Electric Power Service: Pay electric power service use charges for electricity used by all entities for construction operations.


A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES

A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading.

B. Common-Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of construction personnel. Keep office clean and orderly. Furnish and equip offices as follows:

1. Furniture required for Project-site documents including file cabinets, plan tables, plan racks, and bookcases.

2. Heating and cooling equipment necessary to maintain a uniform indoor temperature of 68 to 72 deg F.



3. Lighting fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 20 fc at desk height.

2.3 EQUIPMENT

A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures.

B. Heating Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent heating system, provide vented, self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work.

B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.

3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION

A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.

1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.

B. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for construction.

C. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.

D. Heating: Provide temporary heating required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed.

E. Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations.

F. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.



G. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by all construction personnel. Install one telephone line(s) for each field office.

H. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities.

2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.

I. Parking: Provide temporary parking areas for construction personnel.

J. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water.

1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining properties nor endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities.

2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations.

K. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Provide Project identification sign. Install signs where indicated to inform public and individuals seeking entrance to Project. Unauthorized signs are not permitted.

L. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with Division 1 Section "Cleaning" for progress cleaning requirements.

M. Temporary Stairs: Until permanent stairs are available, provide temporary stairs where ladders are not adequate.

3.3 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects.

B. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Provide measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff and airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways, according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion- and sedimentation-control measures during construction until permanent vegetation has been established.

C. Stormwater Control: Comply with authorities having jurisdiction. Provide barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from heavy rains.

D. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations, furnish and install site enclosure fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates.



E. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.

F. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241.

1. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information.

3.4 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL

A. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.

1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage.

B. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.

END OF SECTION


PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 60 00 - 1

SECTION 01 60 00– PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Work Included: This Section contains definitions, product requirements and requirements for prior approved items.

B. Delivery and storage of materials and equipment.

C. Procedures for selecting products and approving substitutions.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Definitions are not intended to negate the meaning of other terms used in Contract Documents, including specialties, systems, structure, finishes, accessories, furnishings, special construction, and similar terms, which are self-explanatory and have recognized meanings in the construction industry.

B. Products: Purchased items for incorporation into the Work, regardless of whether specifically purchased for Project or taken from Contractor's stock of previously purchased products.

C. Materials: Products which must be substantially cut, shaped, worked, mixed, finished, refined, or otherwise fabricated, processed, installed, or applied to form units of Work.

D. Appliances, Equipment, and Fixtures: Products with operational parts, regardless of whether motorized or manually operated and particularly including products with service connections (wiring, piping, etc.).

E. System: A unit of Work (i.e., structural system, vacuum system, etc.) shown or specified to include particular products, materials, appliances, equipment, or fixtures.

F. Substitutions: Where products, materials, appliances, equipment, or fixtures are listed by trade name(s), manufacturer name(s), or catalog reference(s) or where these items are shown or specified as part of a system or systems, items or systems proposed for use by Contractor that are not listed or differ from those shown or specified as part of a system will be considered substitutions.

1. Submit substitutions in accordance with requirements of this Section.

2. The requirements for substitutions do not apply to specified Contractor options. Revisions to Contract Documents, where requested by Owner or Architect are changes, not substitutions.

3. Contractor's determinations of and compliance with governing regulations and orders issued by governing authorities do not constitute substitutions, and do not constitute a basis for change orders; except as



provided for under substitution procedures in this Section or elsewhere in Contract Documents.

G. Prior -to-Bid Approvals: Products, materials, appliances, equipment, fixtures, or systems that have been proposed as substitutions and accepted by Owner prior to bid.

1.3 DESCRIPTION

A. General: Specific products, materials, appliances, equipment, fixtures, accessories, manufacturers, and proprietary mentioned by name, grade, or brand, in Specifications or on Drawings have been selected for their particular fitness, availability, and desirability for use appropriate to Work of this Project and are intended to establish the standard of quality.

B. Compliance: The compliance requirements, for individual products are multiple in nature and may include generic, descriptive, proprietary, performance, prescriptive, compliance with standards, compliance with codes, conformance with graphic details, and other similar forms and methods of indicating requirements.

1.4 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Provide products which comply with requirements, and which are undamaged and unused at time of installation, and which are complete with accessories, trim, finish, safety guards, and other devices and details needed for a complete installation and for intended use.

1. Materials shall be new unless otherwise specified and unused, except for testing of current production models on date of order, undamaged, and un-deteriorated at time of use.

2. Identify materials in accordance with accepted trade standards and requirements of this Section.

3. Select and use methods or processes, including intermediate processes, which will produce the specified finished material or product.

4. Ascertain that the Work, including materials, products, and equipment delivered and installed, is in full compliance with the Contract Documents and appropriate submittals.

5. Standard Products: Where available, provide standard products of types which have been produced and used previously and successfully on other projects and in similar applications.

6. Continued Availability: Where additional amounts of product, by nature of its application, are likely to be needed by Owner at a later date for maintenance and repair or replacement work, provide a standard, domestically produced product which is likely to be available to Owner at such later date.



B. Nameplates: Except as otherwise indicated for required approval labels and operating data, do not permanently attach or imprint manufacturer's or producer's nameplates or trademarks on exposed surfaces of products which will be exposed to view either in occupied spaces or on exterior of the Work.

1. Labels: Locate required labels and stamps on a concealed surface or, where required for observation after installation, on an accessible surface which, in occupied spaces, is not conspicuous.

2. Equipment Nameplates: Provide permanent nameplate on each item of service-connected or power-operated equipment. See sections specifying equipment requirements for specifics.


A. Special Requirement: Due to certain Owner requirements, Owner will not consider substitutions on certain items. Therefore, substitutions will not be considered for items followed by the words: "no substitution(s)."

B. Architect's Compensation:

1. Except as limited by provisions of Owner-Architect or Owner-Contractor Agreements, Contractor shall reimburse Owner for compensation paid to Architect for evaluation of substitution proposals made during construction, whether or not substitution is accepted by Owner.

2. Refer to Request for Substitution form at the end of this Section.

C. Delays and Costs:

1. Substitution proposals made during construction shall be in accordance with procedures outlined in this Section, and be made in sufficient time to allow for adequate time for Architect's review and evaluation.

2. Delays and added costs associated with inadequate supportive data, necessary extended evaluations, or redesign work caused by substitutions shall be borne by Contractor.

3. Cost changes resulting from proposed substitutions shall be clearly stated with the initial substitution proposal. Subsequently discovered costs resulting from the substitution shall be borne by Contractor.

1.6 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING

A. Transport products by methods to avoid product damage; deliver in undamaged condition in manufacturer's unopened containers or packaging, dry.

B. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling or damage.



C. Promptly inspect shipments to assure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged.

D. Deliver products in the manufacturer's sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting and installing.

1.7 STORAGE AND PROTECTION

A. Store Products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible.

B. Store sensitive products in weathertight enclosures; maintain within temperature and humidity ranges required by manufacturer's instructions.

C. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering; provide ventilation to avoid condensation.

D. Store loose granular materials on solid surfaces in a well-drained area; prevent mixing with foreign matter.

E. Arrange storage to provide access for inspection, periodically inspect to assure products are undamaged and are maintained under required conditions.

F. After installation, provide covering to protect products from damage from traffic and construction operations, remove when no longer needed.

1.8 PROCEDURES

A. Procedures for Selecting Products: Contractor's options for selecting products are limited by Contract Document requirements and governing regulations, and are not controlled by industry traditions or procedures experienced by Contractor on previous construction projects.

1. Single Product/Manufacturer Name:

a. Provide product indicated. Do not offer to provide an unnamed product unless it has been accepted under substitution provisions listed below.

b. Except as otherwise indicated, "Named" is defined to mean manufacturer's name for product as recorded in latest issue of published product literature as of date of Contract Documents.

c. Refer to requests to use products of a later (or earlier) model to Architect for acceptance before proceeding.

2. Two or More Product/Manufacturer Names:



a. Provide 1 of the named products, at Contractor's option.

b. Do not offer to provide an unnamed product unless it has been accepted under substitution provisions listed below.

3. Performance Requirements:

a. Provide products which comply with specific performances indicated and which are recommended by manufacturer (in published product literature or by individual certification) for application indicated.

b. Overall performance of a product is implied where product is specified for specific performances.

4. Standards, Codes, and Regulations: Where compliance with an imposed standard, code, or regulation is required, selection from among products which comply with requirements of those standards, codes, and regulations is Contractor's option.

5. Prescriptive Requirements: Provide products which have been produced in accordance with prescriptive requirements, using specified ingredients and components, and complying with specified requirements for mixing, fabricating, curing, finishing, testing, and similar operations in manufacturing process.

6. Visual Matching:

a. Where matching of an established sample is required, final judgment of whether a product proposed by Contractor matches sample satisfactorily is Architect's judgment.

b. Where no product exists within specified cost category, which matches sample satisfactorily and complies with requirements, comply with provisions concerning, substitutions and change orders for selection of an equivalent product.

7. Visual Selection:

a. Where specified product requirements include "color(s), pattern(s), texture(s), etc. selected by Architect" or words of similar effect, selection of manufacturer and basic product (complying with requirements) is Contractor's option, and subsequent selection of color(s), pattern(s), and texture(s), etc. is Architect's selection.

b. Where specified product requirements include "color(s), pattern(s), texture(s), etc., to match Architect's sample" or words to that effect, selection of product (complying with requirements, and within established cost category) is Architect's selection, including designation of manufacturer where necessary to obtain desired color, pattern, or texture.



1.9 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

A. Prior (-to-Bid) Approvals: Substitute products, materials, appliances, equipment, fixtures, or systems will be considered by Architect.

1. Any bidder, material supplier, or manufacturer desiring to propose substitution(s) shall:

a. Submit in a sealed envelope catalog cuts, shop drawings, or other descriptive literature for products, materials, appliances, equipment, fixtures, or systems for proposed substitution.

b. Submit not later than 14 calendar days before bid opening

1. Make request to Architect in triplicate on copies of Request for Substitution form included at end of this Section.

2. Submittal(s) shall include a complete and adequate analysis showing point-for-point comparison to specified item(s) or system(s) and must prove equality or superiority.

3. Include related Section and Drawing number(s), and fully document compliance with requirements for substitutions.

4. Include product data/drawings, description of methods, samples.

a. Where applicable, statement of effect on construction time and coordination with other affected Work.

b. Cost information for proposal.

5. Include identification of previous use locally with dates and names of Architect and Owner.

6. Anything less will not be considered.

7. Equivalency:

a. The Architect will be the initial judge of equivalency of proposed substitution(s).

b. Architect will make written recommendation of acceptance or rejection to Owner.

8. Satisfaction:

a. Prior to proposing substitution(s), certify that item or system is equal to that specified.

b. That it will fit into space allocated.

c. That item affords comparable ease of operation, maintenance,



and service.

d. That appearance, longevity, and suitability for climate and use are comparable to item specified.

e. That substitution is in Owner's interest.

9. Manufacturer's data which is readily available to Architect is not acceptable for establishing proof of quality.

a. Provide laboratory test data performed by a nationally recognized independent testing laboratory known for its testing expertise.

b. Laboratory test shall include types of materials used in substitute item or system, including their thickness and strength, and a direct comparison to item or system specified for capacities, capabilities, coatings, functions, life cycle usage, and operations.

c. No change in Architect's design intent will be allowed where item or system will be exposed and where it will be used.

10. Proof: Burden of proof that a proposed substitution is equal or equivalent to a specified item or system shall be upon Contractor, who shall support his request with sufficient test data, samples, brochures, and other means to permit Architect to make a fair and equitable decision on merits of proposal.

11. Based on Architect's written recommendation of acceptance or rejection, Owner will determine acceptability of proposed substitutions.

12. Architect will notify Bidders of Owner's acceptance not later than 5 calendar days prior to bid opening via an addendum to the Contract Documents listing only accepted substitutions.

13. Responsibility: Acceptance of substitutions shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for complying with all other requirements of the Contract Documents and coordinating substitution(s) with adjacent materials and other affected equipment.

B. During Construction:

1. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on submittals without separate written request prior to submittal, or when acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract Documents.

2. Architect and Owner will consider requests from Contractor during construction for substitutions (following procedures outlined above for prior approvals) only under 1 or more of the following conditions:

a. Substitution is required for compliance with subsequent interpretation of code requirements or insurance regulations.

b. Shown or specified item or system cannot be provided within



Contract Time or becomes unavailable due to no fault of Contractor.

c. Subsequent information disclosed inability of item(s) or system(s) to perform properly or to fit in designated space, or manufacturer(s) refuse(s) to certify or warrant performance as required.

d. When, in Architect's judgment, a substitution would be substantially in Owner's best interests in terms of cost (substantial credit), time, or other valuable considerations, after deducting offsetting responsibilities Owner may be required to bear, including additional compensation to Architect for evaluation and redesign services, increased cost of other work by Owner or separate contractors, and similar considerations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTSNot used.

PART 3 - EXECUTIONNot used.

END OF SECTION



REQUEST FOR SUBSTITUTION

A. Completed reproduction of this form shall accompany all requests for substitutions. Failure to submit form with request shall be cause for rejection. Substituted items or systems may be incorporated into the Work only after receipt of Owner's written approval. Fill in all applicable spaces and cross out all nonapplicable information bracketed ([]) or unbracketed.

[Subcontractor:] [Material Supplier:] [Manufacturer:] Date: Requested Substitution: Reference: Specification Section Drawing Reference ____ Reason for Substitution: [Prior Approval] [During Construction]:

B. Resulting Change to Contract Amount: [Add] [Deduct] ____(Include supporting documentation.)

C. For substitutions made during construction the Architect will, upon receipt of substitution proposal, fill in the following compensation information, add it to or deduct it from the Change to the Contract Amount and submit Net Change to Contract Amount to Owner for approval. Upon receipt of Owner's approval, Architect will proceed with substitution review.

D. Architect's Fee for Substitution Evaluation: ___ E. Architect's Fee for Changes to Contract: ___

F. Documents Due to Substitution: Net Change to Contract Amount (B + C + D): [Add] [Deduct] Resulting Change to Contract Time: Add ___Deduct ___ Summary of Related Work Requiring Coordination (if any):

(Contractor shall assume responsibility for complete coordination with Work of all trades involved if Substitution Request is approved.)

G. Attached Documentation: The following is herewith attached to provide complete documentation of requested substitution:

[ ]Product Data [ ]Samples [ ]Shop Drawings[ ]Test Reports [ ]Other:

H. Contractor's Signature

Subcontractor's/Supplier's/Manufacturer'sSignature


GUARANTIES AND WARRANTIES 01 76 00 - 1

SECTION 01 76 00– GUARANTIES AND WARRANTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes requirements for guaranties and warranties for contract closeout and during specified guaranty/warranty periods.

1.2 DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS

A. General Limitations: It is recognized that specific guaranties and warranties are intended to protect Owner against failure of the Work to perform as required, and against deficient, defective, and faulty materials and workmanship, regardless of sources.

B. Related Damages and Losses: When correcting guarantied or warranted work which has failed, remove and replace other Work of Project which has been damaged as a result of such failure or which must be removed and replaced to provide access for correction of Work.

C. Reinstatement of Guaranty or Warranty Period: In addition to requirements in the General Conditions, when Work covered by a special project guaranty or product warranty has failed and has been corrected by replacement or restoration, reinstate guaranty or warranty by written endorsement for 1 year starting on date of acceptance of replaced or restored Work.

D. Replacement Cost, Obligations: Except as otherwise indicated, cost of replacing or restoring failing guaranties or warranted units or products is Contractor's obligation, without regard for whether Owner has already benefitted from use through a portion of anticipated useful service lives.

E. Rejection of Warranties: Owner reserves the right, at time of Substantial Completion or thereafter, to reject coincidental product warranties submitted by Contractor, which in opinion of Owner detract from or confuse interpretation of requirements of Contract Documents.

F. Contractor's Procurement Obligations: Do not purchase, subcontract for, or allow others to purchase or subcontract for materials or units of Work for Project where a special project guaranty, specified product warranty, certification, or similar commitment is required until it has been determined that entities required to sign or countersign such commitments are willing to do so.

G. Specific Guaranty or Warranty Forms: Where a special project guaranty or specified project warranty is required, prepare a written document to contain terms and appropriate identification; ready for execution by required parties.

1. A sample form is attached as the last article of this Section.

2. Refer to individual sections of Divisions 2 through 33 for specific content and requirements.



3. Submit draft to Owner for approval prior to final executions.

1.3 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED

A. Compile specified warranties.

B. Compile specified service and maintenance contracts.

C. Co-execute submittals when so specified.

D. Review submittals to verify compliance with Contract Documents.

E. Submit to Architect for review and transmittal to Owner.

1.4 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Assemble warranties, bonds, and service and maintenance contracts, executed by each of the respective manufacturers, suppliers, and subcontractors.

B. Number of original signed copies required: 2 each.

C. Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in orderly sequence. Provide complete index information for each item.

1. Product or work item with index number to bound item.

2. Firm, with name of principal, address, and telephone number.

3. Scope.

4. Date of beginning of warranty, bond or service and maintenance contract.

5. Duration of warranty, bond, or service maintenance contract.

6. Provide information for Owner's personnel:

a. Procedure to be followed in case of failure.

b. Circumstances which might affect the validity of warranty or bond.

7. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone number.

1.5 FORM OF SUBMITTALS

A. Prepare in duplicate packets.

B. Format:

1. Size 8-1/2 x 11 inches on punched sheets for standard 3-ring binder.



a. Fold larger sheets to fit into binders.

2. Warranty-Guaranty wording shall be as printed below.

3. Cover: Identify each packet with typed or printed title "GUARANTIES AND WARRANTIES". List:

a. Title of Project.

b. Name of Contractor.

C. Binders: Commercial quality, 3-ring, with durable and cleanable plastic covers.

1.6 TIME OF SUBMITTALS

A. Make submittals within 10 days after date of Substantial Completion prior to final request for payment.

B. For items or work, where acceptance is delayed materially beyond Date of Substantial Completion, provide updated submittal within 10 days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as start of warranty period.

1.7 SUBMITTALS REQUIRED

A. Submit warranties, bonds, service and maintenance contracts as specified in respective Sections of Specifications and as follows:

1. Provide when noted in individual Sections of the Project Manual Divisions 2 through 33.

1.8 SAMPLE FORM OF WARRANTY-GUARANTY

A. Print or type Warranty-Guaranty on installing contractor's own letterhead.

B. Wording and signatures required.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Not used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

Not used.

END OF SECTION



A. GUARANTEE-WARRANTY

When required by the specifications, warranties and/or guarantees other than one year shall be in the form of the following on the Contractor's own letterhead:

"GUARANTEE-WARRANTY FOR INTERMOUNTAIN HEALTHCARE, IMC- Bldg 5, Level 6, Medical/Surgical Unit”

We hereby warrant and the General Contractor and/or Material Manufacturer guarantee that the (name of product, equipment or system) that we have installed in the Intermountain Medical Alta View Hospital project, has been done in accordance with the Contract Documents and that the work as installed will fulfill the requirements of the guaranty-warranty included in the specifications. We agree to repair or replace any or all of our work, together with any other adjacent work which may be displaced by so doing, that may prove to be defective in its workmanship or material within a period of _____________ years from the date of Substantial Completion, without any expense whatsoever to the Owner, ordinary wear and tear and unusual abuse or neglect excepted.

In the event of our failure to comply with the above mentioned conditions within sixty (60) days after being notified in writing by the Owner, we collectively or separately do hereby authorize the Owner to proceed to have said defects repaired and made good at our expense, and we will honor and pay the costs and charges therefore upon demand.

Signed ____________________________ Countersigned _______________________(Subcontractor) (General Contractor)

Name _____________________________ Name ________________________________ (Print) (Print)

Company __________________________ Company _____________________________

Address ___________________________ Address _____________________________

___________________________ ______________________________

License No. ___________________________ License No.______________________________

Countersigned _________________________ (Material Manufacturer)

Name ________________________________ (Print)

Company ______________________________

Address ______________________________

______________________________


OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23 - 1

SECTION 01 78 23 – OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

PART 1 - GENERAL

PART 2 - RELATED DOCUMENTS


2.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following:

1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory.2. Emergency manuals.3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment.4. Maintenance manuals for the care and maintenance of products, materials, and

finishes.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for operation and maintenance manuals.

2. Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for preparing Record Drawings for operation and maintenance manuals.

3. Divisions 2 through 33 Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual requirements for the Work in those Sections.

2.3 DEFINITIONS

A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction.

B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.

2.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Final Submittal: Submit one copy one of each manual in final form at least 15 days before final inspection. Architect will return copy with comments within 15 days after final inspection.

1. Correct or modify each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit 3 copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's comments.



2.5 COORDINATION

A. Where operation and maintenance documentation includes information on installations by more than one factory-authorized service representative, assemble and coordinate information furnished by representatives and prepare manuals.

PART 3 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY

A. Organization: Include a section in the directory for each of the following:

1. List of documents.2. List of systems.3. List of equipment.4. Table of contents.

B. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system.

C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list.

D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and maintenance manual.

E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems."

3.2 MANUALS, GENERAL

A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:

1. Title page.2. Table of contents.3. Manual contents.

B. Title Page: Enclose title page in transparent plastic sleeve. Include the following information:

1. Subject matter included in manual.2. Name and address of Project.3. Name and address of Owner.4. Date of submittal.5. Name, address, and telephone number of Contractor.6. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.



C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual.

1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set.

D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.

1. Binders/Maintenance Manuals: Organize operation and maintenance data into suitable sets of mangeable size. Binders shall be Red Buckram binders with easy view metal for sheet size 11” X 8 ½” with expandable metal capacity as required for the project, rivet through construction with library corners using #12 BB and lining with same materials as cover, front cover and back-bone foil stamped in white. Binders shall be as manufactured by Hiller Bookbinding or equal. The master index sheet and each tabbed index sheet shall be AICO Gold-Line indexes or equal. Mark appropriate identification on front spine of each binder. Include the following types of information:

a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross-reference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of equipment or system.

b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets.

2. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software diskettes for computerized electronic equipment.

3. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.

a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts.

b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations.

3.3 EMERGENCY MANUALS

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following:

1. Type of emergency.2. Emergency instructions.3. Emergency procedures.



B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component:

1. Fire.2. Flood.3. Gas leak.4. Water leak.5. Power failure.6. Water outage.7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure.8. Chemical release or spill.

C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.

D. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Instructions on stopping.2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits.4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.5. Special operating instructions and procedures.

3.4 OPERATION MANUALS

A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information:

1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions.2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility.3. Operating standards.4. Operating procedures.5. Operating logs.6. Wiring diagrams.7. Control diagrams.8. Piped system diagrams.9. Precautions against improper use.10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.

B. Descriptions: Include the following:

1. Product name and model number.2. Manufacturer's name.3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component.4. Equipment function.5. Operating characteristics.6. Limiting conditions.7. Performance curves.8. Engineering data and tests.9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.



C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Startup procedures.2. Equipment or system break-in procedures.3. Routine and normal operating instructions.4. Regulation and control procedures.5. Instructions on stopping.6. Normal shutdown instructions.7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.9. Special operating instructions and procedures.

D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed.

E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for identification.

3.5 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUAL

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.

C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Product name and model number.2. Manufacturer's name.3. Color, pattern, and texture.4. Material and chemical composition.5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:

1. Inspection procedures.2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance.5. Repair instructions.

E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services.

F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.



1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

3.6 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL

A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.

C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment:

1. Standard printed maintenance instructions and bulletins.2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including

disassembly and component removal, replacement, and assembly.3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components.4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures:

1. Test and inspection instructions.2. Troubleshooting guide.3. Precautions against improper maintenance.4. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions.5. Demonstration and training videotape, if available.

E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment.

1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies.

2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording maintenance.

F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services.

G. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.



EXECUTION

3.7 MANUAL PREPARATION

A. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated.

B. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.

C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel.

D. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.

1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems.

E. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in Record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation.

1. Do not use original Project Record Documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals.

2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared Record Drawings in Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents."

F. Comply with Division 1 Sections for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation.

END OF SECTION


PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39 - 1

SECTION 01 78 39 – PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record Documents, including the following:

1. Record Drawings.2. Record Specifications.3. Record Product Data.

B. Related Sections include the following:1. Division 1 Section for general closeout procedures.2. Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and

maintenance manual requirements.3. Divisions 2 through 33 Sections for specific requirements for Project Record

Documents of the Work in those Sections.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:

1. Number of Copies: Submit one set(s) of marked-up Record Prints.

a. Final Submittal: Submit one set(s) of marked-up Record Prints showing modifications for trades involved in the project.

B. Record Specifications: Submit one copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications.

C. Record Product Data: Submit one copy of each Product Data submittal.

1. Where Record Product Data is required as part of operation and maintenance manuals, submit marked-up Product Data as an insert in manual instead of submittal as Record Product Data.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of blue- or black-line white prints of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings.

1. Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked-up Record Prints.

a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later.

b. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique.c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the

markup before enclosing concealed installations.

2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Dimensional changes to Drawings.b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings.c. Depths of foundations below first floor.d. Locations and depths of underground utilities.e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits.f. Revisions to electrical circuitry.g. Actual equipment locations.h. Duct size and routing.i. Locations of concealed internal utilities.j. Changes made following Architect's written orders.k. Details not on the original Contract Drawings.l. Field records for variable and concealed conditions.

3. Mark the Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. If Shop Drawings are marked, show cross-reference on the Contract Drawings.

4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.

5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings.

6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.

2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS

A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.



1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS

A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE

A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for Project Record Document purposes. Post changes and modifications to Project Record Documents as they occur; do not wait until the end of Project.

B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store Record Documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Maintain Record Documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours.

END OF SECTION


CLEANING 01 79 00 - 1

SECTION 01 79 00– CLEANING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Work Included: Requirements for periodic, general, and final cleaning of the project.

B. Provide temporary and periodic clean-up of extra materials, waste and general debris during construction of the work, together with the final clean-up and cleaning, polishing and other "housekeeping" required to bring various surfaces to an acceptable condition prior to final inspection, or before additional work is done during construction.

C. This Section includes requirements for Cleaning for all phases of the Project. Some requirements of this Section may not be applicable to individual project Phases.

1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Maintain premises and public properties free from accumulations of waste, debris, and rubbish in accordance with applicable safety and insurance standards and local ordinances.

B. The acceptable level of cleanliness of the Project shall be the decision of the Architect.

1. Work necessary to achieve such acceptable state shall be performed when required.

C. Burning: Burning of waste materials and/or rubbish on Site is not permitted.

1.3 CLEAN-UP DURING CONSTRUCTION

A. During construction, provide cleaning-up as follows:

1. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition.

2. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, down spouts, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space.

3. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning to eliminate dust.

4. Remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from site weekly, or more often if needed, and dispose off-site in compliance with local regulations.

5. Storage areas: Ensure that materials to be used for construction are stored in designated structures or areas by the appropriate trades.


CLEANING 01 79 00 - 2

Maintain such areas or structures in a clean condition for the life of the Project.

6. Containers: Provide appropriate containers, such as dump containers, and locate on site for collection of waste materials and rubbish.

7. Supervision: Oversee all cleaning of areas by the trades using them. Ensure that resulting accumulations are deposited in appropriate con-tainers.

8. Clean-up: Daily, weekly, or as necessary, clean-up floors and Site areas. Remove all loose materials, by sweeping if necessary.

1.4 FINAL CLEANING

A. Provide final clean-up and polishing just prior to final inspection and/or acceptance of the work of the Project.

B. Preparation:

1. Prior to final inspection, remove all loose material of any nature, except spare parts, loose furniture or furnishings, manuals, parts books, and similar items.

2. Remove all temporary buildings, utility lines or pipes and other work of a temporary nature.

3. Remove all temporary wrappings. Leave no trace of wrap or adhesive.

C. Surface Cleaning:

1. Special cleaning for specific units of Work as specified and as shown on Drawings.

2. Provide final cleaning of the Work, at time indicated, consisting of cleaning each surface or unit of Work to normal "clean" condition expected for a first-class building cleaning and maintenance program.

3. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning operations.

D. The following are examples, but not by way of limitation, of cleaning levels required:

1. Remove labels which are not required as permanent labels.

2. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and window/door glass, to a polished condition, removing substances which are noticeable as vision-obscuring materials. Replace broken glass and damaged transparent materials.

3. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of dust, stains, films, and similar noticeable distracting substances.


CLEANING 01 79 00 - 3

a. Except as otherwise indicated, avoid disturbance of natural weathering of exterior surfaces.

b. Restore reflective surfaces to original reflective condition.

4. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment clean, including elevator equipment and similar equipment; remove excess lubrication and other substances.

5. Remove debris and surface dust from limited-access spaces including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.

6. Clean concrete floors in unoccupied spaces broom clean.

7. Vacuum clean carpeted surfaces and similar soft surfaces.

8. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains including those resulting from water exposure.

9. Clean light fixtures and lamps so as to function with full efficiency.

10. Clean Project Site (staging areas, Contractor Parking areas), including landscape development areas, of litter and foreign substances.

11. Sweep paved areas to a broom-clean condition; remove stains, petro-chemical spills, and other foreign deposits.

E. Pest Control: Engage an experienced exterminator to make a final inspection of Project, and to rid Project of rodents, insects, and other pests.

F. Removal of Protection: Except as otherwise indicated or requested by Hospital Representative, remove temporary protection devices and facilities which were installed during course of Work to protect previously completed Work during remainder of construction period.

G. Compliances:

1. Comply with safety standards and governing regulations for cleaning operations.

2. Do not burn waste materials at site, or bury debris or excess materials on the property, or discharge volatile or other harmful or dangerous materials into drainage systems.

3. Remove waste materials from site and dispose of in a lawful manner.

H. Moving Parts: Lubricate moving parts as recommended by the parts manufacturer, or as directed by the Architect. Wipe clean, all surplus lubricants.

I. Protection: Protect finished floors from damage due to traffic or other causes.


CLEANING 01 79 00 - 4

END OF SECTION


SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 - 1

SECTION 02 41 19 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of a building or structure.2. Repair procedures for selective demolition operations.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Remove: Carefully detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.

B. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for reuse, and reinstall them where indicated.

C. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.

1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP

A. Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, demolished materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Proposed Dust-Control and Noise-Control Measures: Submit statement or drawing that indicates the measures proposed for use, proposed locations, and proposed time frame for their operation. Identify options if proposed measures are later determined to be inadequate.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's operations.

B. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities.



1. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Owner assumes no responsibility for condition of areas to be selectively demolished.

1. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical.

D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work.

1. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered in the work, Contractor will be responsible for removal and disposal of all materials. A copy of an Asbestos Report will be provided to the Contractor prior to construction beginning. See Bid Proposal for unit price to remove hazardous materials.

E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site will not be permitted.

F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations.

1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped.

B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required.

C. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect.

3.2 UTILITY SERVICES

A. Existing Utilities: Maintain services indicated to remain and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations.

B. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or operating facilities unless authorized in writing by Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to Owner and to authorities having jurisdiction.1. Provide at least 72 hours' notice to Owner if shutdown of service is required during

changeover.



C. Utility Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utilities serving areas to be selectively demolished.

3.3 PREPARATION

A. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of existing building and construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior.

1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, provide insulated temporary enclosures. Coordinate enclosure with ventilating and material drying or curing requirements to avoid dangerous conditions and effects.

B. Temporary Partitions: Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas from fumes and noise.

3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows:

1. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain.

2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces.

3. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.

B. Existing Facilities: Comply with building manager's requirements for using and protecting building facilities during selective demolition operations.

3.5 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

A. General: Promptly dispose of demolished materials. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.

B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.

C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.

END OF SECTION


CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 1

SECTION 03 30 00 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture.

C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing Drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Material certificates.

B. Material test reports.

C. Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements indicating compliance with specified tolerances.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.

1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities."

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.

1.5 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform preconstruction testing on concrete mixtures.



1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1.

1. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.

B. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 (ACI 301M).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONCRETE, GENERAL

A. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents:

1. ACI 301 (ACI 301M).2. ACI 117 (ACI 117M).

2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed.

B. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded-wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."

2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cementitious Materials:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I/II, gray.2. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F.3. Slag Cement: ASTM C 989/C 989M, Grade 100 or 120.

B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33/C 33M, graded.

1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 1 inch (25 mm) nominal.2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.

C. Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that do not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B.



3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D.4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F.5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M,

Type G.6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.

D. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M.

2.4 CURING MATERIALS

A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete.

B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m) when dry.

C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

D. Water: Potable.

E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, dissipating.

2.5 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301 (ACI 301M).

B. Cementitious Materials: Use fly ash, pozzolan, slag cement, and silica fume as needed to reduce the total amount of portland cement, which would otherwise be used, by not less than 40 percent.

C. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use water-reducing high-range water-reducing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability.

2. Use water-reducing and -retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.

3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a w/c ratio below 0.50.

2.6 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS

A. Normal-Weight Concrete:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi (20.7 MPa) at 28 days.2. Maximum W/C Ratio: 0.50.



3. Slump Limit: 8 inches (200 mm) for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches (50 to 100 mm) before adding high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture, plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).

4. Air Content: Do not allow air content of trowel-finished floors to exceed 3 percent.

2.7 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT

A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."

2.8 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M, and furnish batch ticket information.

1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FORMWORK INSTALLATION

A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301 (ACI 301M), to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads.

B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117 (ACI 117M).

3.2 EMBEDDED ITEM INSTALLATION

A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

3.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement.

3.4 JOINTS

A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.



B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect.

C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness as follows:

1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch (3.2 mm). Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces.

2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- (3.2-mm-) wide joints into concrete when cutting action does not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks.

3.5 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections are completed.

B. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete is placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.

3.6 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS

A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.

B. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power-driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture.

1. Apply float finish to surfaces to receive underlayment.

C. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.

1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces to be covered with resilient flooring.2. Finish and measure surface, so gap at any point between concrete surface and

an unleveled, freestanding, 10-ft.- (3.05-m-) long straightedge resting on two high spots and placed anywhere on the surface does not exceed 1/8 inch (3.2 mm). Comply with medical equipment vendor



3.7 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 (ACI 301M) for hot-weather protection during curing.

B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.

C. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:

1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days.2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining

cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period, using cover material and waterproof tape.

3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

a. Removal: After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound manufacturer.

3.8 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS

A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.

3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a special inspector and qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

END OF SECTION 03 30 00


METAL FASTENERS 05 05 00 - 1

SECTION 05 05 00 – METAL FASTENERS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. Work Included: This Section establishes general standards and requirements for metal fasteners utilized for attachment of items to the primary structure of the building and is incorporated in others Sections of these specifications where referenced, including:

1. Expansion Bolts. 2. Powder Actuated Devices.

3. Bolts, screws and other fasteners.

B. Work Specified Elsewhere:

1. Section 033000 – Cast-in-Place Concrete.

2. Section 092216 – Non-Structural Metal Framing

3. DIVISION 23 – Mechanical.

4. DIVISION 26 – Electrical. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with provisions of Section 013300 – Submittal Procedures.

B. Product Data: Manufacturers' information on materials, fabrication, and installation. Include current ICBO Reports and other information to substantiate compliance with Contract Documents.

C. Substitutions: Include with requests for substitution of fastening device type,

minimum embedment, length, load capacity for pull out and shear, and installation torque of fasteners and statement that fastening devices meet or exceed requirements specified in Contract Documents.


A. Field Quality Control: 1. The Owner's Testing Lab will perform and report on tests and inspections

as follows: 2. Expansion Bolts:

a. Test 50 percent of drilled-in anchorages to 2.0 times the al-lowable load specified with special inspection in tension.

b. If any anchor fails testing, test all anchors of the same category



installed that day until twenty consecutive anchors pass, then resume the initial testing frequency. Cost of this testing shall be borne by Contractor.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. Expansion Bolts: Hilti, Inc.'s Kwik Bolt II, Kwik Bolt III or as indicated in the structural drawings; wedge type stud expansion anchor system, comply with FS FF-S-325, Group II, Type 4, Class 1. Provide stainless steel expansion bolts for exterior exposure.

B. Powder Actuated Devices: Hilti Fastening Systems, Impex Tool Corporation, or

as indicated in the structural drawings; pins and tools. Tempered steel pins with special corrosion-resistant finish. Provide guide washers to accurately control penetration. Accomplish fastening by low-velocity piston-driven powder-actuated tool.

1. Type and Size: Hilti X-DNI, dome head nail with smooth shank, 0.145-

inch shank diameter, not less than 1-1/4-inch penetration or as indicated in the structural drawings.

C. Sheet Metal Screws: John Wagner Associates' Grabber or equal: Unless

otherwise noted on Drawings, type to suit stud, track, or channel gauge and as follows.

1. Where Overlaid with Gypsum Board or Other Finish Material:

a. For Fastening to 20 Gauge and Lighter Material: No. 8 by 9/16-inch Wafer Head Streaker.

b. For Fastening to 18 Gauge and Heavier Material: No. 8 by 1/2-

inch Wafer Head Self-Drilling. 2. Where Not Overlaid with Finish Material:

a. For Fastening to 20 Gauge and Lighter Material: No. 8 by 9/16-inch Hex Head Streaker.

b. For Fastening to 18 Gauge and Heavier Material: No. 8 by 1/2-

inch Hex Head Self-Drilling. D. Nuts and Bolts: ASTM A307 with suitable nuts, in accordance with ASTM A563,

and washers 1/4-inch diameter, unless otherwise noted.

E. U-Bolts: Special sizes and shapes shown; material as specified for nuts and bolts.



PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Expansion Bolts: Install in predrilled holes for fastening items into concrete.

1. Install expansion bolts according to the manufacturer's instructions as to tools, torque and tightening procedure.

2. Expansion bolt locations and spacings: As shown. 3. Edge Distance: Not less than 10 bolt diameters.

4. Unless otherwise noted, install expansion bolts with manufacturer's recommended minimum embedments. Embedment length is exclusive of thickness of floor coverings, grout pads or other overlays.

5. Do not recess expansion bolts more than one-fourth of the nominal bolt

diameter. Abandon overdrilled holes or partially fill with nonshrink grout and redrill when grout has set.

6. Abandon holes if the axis of a drilled hole deviates more than 5

degrees from normal to the concrete surface. 7. If a concrete reinforcing bar is encountered during drilling, immediately

terminate drilling and notify the Architect. Subject to review and approval the SEOR, the Architect may authorize using one of the following procedures:

a. If the location may be shifted, fill abandoned hole with non-

shrink grout and install expansion bolt with a minimum of 1/2 inch of sound concrete between the expansion bolt and the abandoned hole, or…

b. If the location may not be shifted, use a diamond core drill to

cut the rebar and drill the hole beyond the reinforcing such that the whole wedge portion of the expansion bolt can be expanded below the bar, or…

c. If the location may not be shifted, core an oversize hole at the

direction of the Architect and grout an acceptable anchor in place.

B. Fasten Work tightly to prevent rattle or vibration except where expansion-

contraction tolerances are required.

C. When expansion bolts are installed through metal deck into concrete slab above, embedment shall not extend closer than 3/4-inch to top of concrete. Locate at center of bottom flute. Minimum embedment shall be 1-1/2-inches above top flute of decking.

D. Expansion Bolt Test Values:



1. Test Procedure: Apply proof test loads by means of hydraulic ram, calibrating spring loading device, or torque wrench without removing nut if possible. If not possible, remove nut and install a threaded coupler to same tightness as original nut using a torque wrench.

2. Test Equipment: Calibrated by approved testing laboratory per standard industry procedures.

3. Expansion Bolts shall withstand following minimum test loads for

specified wedge type anchors: Anchor Thread Size Tension Test Load Test Torque (diameter in inches) (lbs.) ft-lbs.) 1/4 800 10 3/8 1100 25 1/2 2000 50 5/8 2300 80 3/4 3700 150 1 5800 250

4. Acceptance Criteria:

a. Hydraulic Ram Method: Expansion bolt is acceptable if there is no observable movement nor loosening of washer at application of tension test load.

b. Torque Wrench Method: Expansion bolt is acceptable if the test

torque is reached within one-half turn of the nut. 5. Test Timing: Within 24 hours after expansion bolt installation and in the

presence of the Inspector of Record.

END OF SECTION


METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 1

SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Steel ladders & stairs.2. Loose steel lintels.3. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment.4. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not

specified in other Sections.5. Galvanized Pipe Steel railing


1. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel" for structural-steel framing system components.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication and erection of each metal fabrication indicated. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.

B. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing metal fabrications similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."2. AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum."3. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."4. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for

welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.




A. Field Measurements: Where metal fabrications are indicated to fit walls and other construction, verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating metal fabrications without field measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. Allow for trimming and fitting.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal fabrications. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

A. Steel Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

B. Wide Flange Steel Shapes: ASTM A992

C. Steel Tubing: Cold-formed steel tubing complying with ASTM A 500.

D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless another weight is indicated or required by structural loads.

E. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded.

2.2 PAINT

A. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Organic zinc-rich primer, complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with topcoat.

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Carboline 621; Carboline Company.b. Aquapon Zinc-Rich Primer 97-670; PPG Industries, Inc.c. Tneme-Zinc 90-97; Tnemec Company, Inc.



B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel, complying with SSPC-Paint 20.

2.3 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide Type 304 or 316 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.

B. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with hex nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and, where indicated, flat washers.

C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36.

D. Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3 (ASME B18.6.7M).

E. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, carbon steel, ASME B18.21.1 (ASME B18.21.2M).

F. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

1. Material: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5.

2. Material: Alloy Group 1 or 2 stainless-steel bolts complying with ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M) and nuts complying with ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M).

2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs.

C. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.

D. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.



3. Remove welding flux immediately.4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended

so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

E. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Fabricate and space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.

F. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp edges.

2.5 STEEL LADDERS

A. General: Fabricate ladders for locations shown, with dimensions, spacings, details, and anchorages as indicated.

1. Comply with ANSI A14.3, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Siderails: Continuous, 1/2-by-2-1/2-inch steel flat bars, with eased edges, spaced 18 inches apart.

C. Bar Rungs: 3/4-inch diameter steel bars, spaced 12 inches o.c.

D. Fit rungs in centerline of side rails; plug-weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces.

E. Support each ladder at top and bottom and not more than 60 inches o.c. with welded or bolted steel brackets. Size brackets to support design loads specified in ANSI A14.3.

2.6 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS

A. Fabricate loose structural-steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated.

B. Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit where indicated.

C. Size loose lintels to provide bearing length at each side of openings equal to one-twelfth of clear span, but not less than 8 inches, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Galvanize loose steel lintels located in exterior walls.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Provide steel framing and supports that are not a part of structural-steel framework as necessary to complete the Work.

B. Fabricate units from structural-steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction retained by framing and supports. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items.



2.8 PIPE BOLLARDS

A. Fabricate pipe bollards from Schedule 40 steel pipe.

2.9 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.

2.10 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with applicable standard listed below:

1. ASTM A 123, for galvanizing steel and iron products.2. ASTM A 153/A 153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware.

B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface-preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications:

C. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1," for shop painting.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing metal fabrications to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through-bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors.

B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.

C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:


2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.3. Remove welding flux immediately.



4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings, if any.

3.3 INSTALLING PIPE BOLLARDS

A. Anchor bollards in place with concrete footings. Support and brace bollards in position in footing excavations until concrete has been placed and cured.

B. Fill bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface.

3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.

END OF SECTION 055000


ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00 - 1

SECTION 06 10 00- ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Work Included: Rough carpentry, complete, as shown on Drawings and as specified, including:

1. Miscellaneous fire-treated blocking, backing and plywood as shown.


1. Section 064123 – Interior Architectural Woodwork.

1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. American Plywood Association (APA):

1. Guide to Plywood Grades.

B. American Wood Preservers Association (AWPA):

1. C20; Structural Lumber - Fire-Retardant Treatment by Pressure Process.

2. C27; Plywood - Fire-Retardant Treatment by Pressure Process.

3. M4; Standard for the Care of Preservative-Treated Wood Products.

C. West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLIB):

1. Standard Grading Rules for West Coast lumber.

D. Western Wood Products Association (WWPA):

1. Western Lumber Grading Rules.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with requirements of Section 013300 – Submittal Requirements.

B. Shop Drawings: Show specially fabricated rough hardware.


B. Comply with latest edition of the following standards:

1. Western Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLIB) "Standard Grading Rules No. 16."

2. Western Wood Products Association (WWPA) "Grading Rules for Western



Lumber."

3. American Plywood Association (APA) "Guide to Plywood Grades."

4. United States Product Standard (PS) "Construction and Industrial Plywood" (PS 1-74).

5. American Wood Preserver's Association (AWPA):

a. "Structural Lumber - Fire-Retardant Treatment by Pressure Process" (AWPA C27-74).

b. "Plywood - Fire-Retardant Treatment by Pressure Process" (AWPA C27-74).

C. Grade Marks: Identify all wood materials by official grade mark.

1. Lumber: Mark each piece of lumber with grade mark WCLIB (or WWPA) or of agency certified by WCLIB (or WWPA), and accompany each mill shipment to site by certificate of inspection by WCLIB (or WWPA) and FR-S where fire treatment is required.

2. Softwood Plywood: Show Type, Grade, Class and Identification Index; per APA Guide to Plywood Grades, and per requirements of NBS PS-1.

C. Fire-Retardant Treatment:

1. Fire-Retardant Treatment: UL classification FR-S.

2. Obtain each type of fire-retardant treated wood products from one source for both treatment and fire-retardant formulation.

D. Pressure treatment shall not adversely affect application, permanence, or appearance of finish paint systems.

1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING

A. Facilities: Provide proper facilities for handling and storage of materials to prevent damage to edges, ends, and surfaces.

B. Storage: Keep materials dry. Stack materials off ground on level flat forms, fully protected from weather.


A. Environmental Requirements: Maintain uniform moisture content of lumber at not more than 19 percent before, during and after installation.

B. Sequencing and Scheduling: Coordinate details with other Work supporting, adjoining or fastening to rough carpentry Work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS



2.1 MATERIALS

A. Wood (all wood shall be fire treated):

1. Lumber: Douglas fir; No. 3 or construction grade per WCLIB.

2. Plywood: NBS PS-1 - grade structural one, C-C exterior.

3. Use only material that is free of urea-formaldehyde.

B. Fasteners:

1. Nails: Common wire typical.

2. Powder-Actuated Devices (PAD): As specified in Section 050500 – Metal Fasteners.

3. Expansion Bolts: As specified in Section 050500 – Metal Fasteners.

4. Miscellaneous Hardware: Provide common screws, bolts, fastenings, washers and nuts, and other items required to complete rough carpentry Work.

5. Finish: Hot-dip galvanize fasteners for exterior work.

2.2 ROUGH HARDWARE

A. All exterior hardware shall be hot-dipped galvanized per ASTM A-123 Standards.

1. Nails:

a. Common wire for typical framing, blocking, etc. Box nails will not be allowed.

b. Annular ring common wire nails for plywood floor.

2. Bolts: Hexagonal heads, Grade A conforming to ASTM A307.

3. Washers: Washers for bearing against wood shall be provided under all bolt heads and nuts.

a. Malleable iron or steel plate having an area equal to 16 times the area of bolt or lag screw.

b. Steel washers shall have a thickness not less than 1/10 the length of the washer's longest side.

c. Malleable iron washers shall have a thickness not less than 1/2 the bolt or lag screw diameter and having a bearing surface for the nut or head equal in diameter to not less than the long diameter of the nut or head.

4. Anchor Bolts: Hexagonal heads, Grade A conforming to ASTM 307, 1-



1/2-inch-diameter by 10 inch.

5. Rough Framing Connectors: KC Metal Products or approved equal. For connector type, see Drawings.

B. Powder Driven Fasteners, Expansion Bolts and Expansion Anchors: As specified under 050500 – Metal Fasteners.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Lumber:

1. Moisture Content: Air- or kiln-dry to 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of surfacing.

2. Finish: Surfaced four sides, S4S, unless otherwise specified.

3. Size: Per rules of governing standard. Sizes shown are nominal unless otherwise specified.

B. Fire-Retardant Treated Lumber and Plywood: Pressure treat rough carpentry materials per Reference Standards to obtain specified UL Classification.

1. Type: Hoover Treated Wood Products, "Exterior Fire-X," or equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas to receive rough carpentry Work and verify following:

1. Completion of installation of building components to receive rough carpentry Work.

2. That spacing, direction, and details of supports are correct to accommodate installation of blocking, backing, stripping, furring, and nailers.

3. That surfaces are satisfactory to receive Work. Do not commence installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Provide wood blocking, backing, furring, grounds, nailers, stripping, and similar items as detailed and otherwise required to anchor fixtures and equipment to be installed by other trades. Perform cutting, boring, and similar Work required. Install members true to line. Fit accurately. Secure rigidly. Provide special framing, even if not specifically shown, as required to properly complete Work.

B. Sills or Plates on Concrete: Set in grout if surface of concrete deviates from true plane by more than 1/16-inch in 4 feet. Anchor with bolts as shown. Use two bolts minimum per piece with one bolt located between 4 inches and 8 inches



from each end of each piece of sill.

C. Nail Joints: Per minimum requirements of applicable code unless otherwise shown.

D. Plywood: Sheet layout, nailing and edge-blocking as shown. Gap joints 1/16-inch. Butt joints accurately at centerlines of supporting members.

E. Fasteners:

1. General: Furnish and accurately locate items to be embedded in concrete. Secure such items in place before concrete is poured.

2. Nails: If wood tends to split, pre-drill holes three-fourths of nail diameter.

3. Lag Screws: Screw into place; do not hammer. Use soap or other lubricant to ease insertion. Pre-drill holes diameter of shank for unthreaded portion, two-thirds of shank diameter for threaded portion.

4. Bolts and Nuts: When installed, bear no more than 1/2-inch of threads on wood and allow no more than 1/2-inch of bolt to project beyond nut. Drill bolt holes 1/32-inch oversize. Tighten nuts snug when placed, and re-tighten at end of job or just before closing in.

5. Sheet Metal Fasteners: Nail or bolt per manufacturer's instructions. Nail or bolt holes. Use nails provided by manufacturer.

3.3 PLYWOOD BACKING FOR TELEPHONE AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

A. Panels: Not less than 3/4-inch thick. Use largest sizes practicable.

B. Joints: Tightly butt vee-joints.

C. Finish: Slightly ease exposed edges, sandpaper smooth as required.

D. Fastening: Secure to metal studs and backing plates with flat-head countersunk sheet metal screws at 12-inch centers at panel edges and at 16-inch centers in panel field.

END OF SECTION


INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06 41 23 - 1

SECTION 06 41 23- INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Work Included: Provide and install Casework, complete, as shown on Drawings and as specified. All casework to be:

AWI Premium Grade Fabrications.

B. This Section includes the following:

1. Plastic-laminate cabinets.2. Plastic-laminate countertops.3. Solid-surfacing-material countertops.

C. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips required for installing woodwork and concealed within other construction before woodwork installation.

2. Division 8 Section "Flush Wood Doors."

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing woodwork items, unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of material indicated.

1. Plastic laminates.2. Shop-applied transparent finishes.

C. Samples for Verification:



1. Plastic laminates, 8 by 10 inches, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish.2. Solid-surfacing materials, 6 inches square.3. One sample door with required hardware.


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed architectural woodwork similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Fabricator Qualifications:

1. Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.

2. Shop is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification

C. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork, construction, finishes, and other requirements.

1. Provide AWI certification labels or compliance certificate indicating that woodwork complies with requirements of grades specified.

D. Single-sourcing materials: It is the intent of the Contract Documents to single-source plastic laminate and solid surface materials specified in this section when scheduled on the drawings to assure matching of specified finishes.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Project Conditions" Article.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without

delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork without field measurements. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.



1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the AWI quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: Clear Maple.

C. Wood Products: Comply with the following:

1. Hardboard: AHA A135.4.2. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, Medium Density Overlay.3. Hardwood Plywood and Face Veneers: HPVA HP-1.

D. Thermoset Decorative Overlay: Particleboard complying with ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, or medium-density fiberboard complying with ANSI A208.2, Grade MD, with surface of thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper complying with LMA SAT-

E. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated, or if not indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard.

1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide high-pressure decorative laminates by one of the following:

a. Formica Corporation.b. Wilsonart

F. Solid-Surfacing Material: Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with ISSFA-2.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Solid Surface: Samsung Staron or equivalent called out in the drawings.

2. Type: Standard slab type, unless Special Purpose type is indicated.3. Colors and Patterns: as per finish schedule.

G. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Contact cement.

H. Edge-banding:



1. Edge-banding for cabinet body parts shall be purified 3 mm PVC applied with hot melt glue by automatic edge-banding equipment.

2. Edge-banding for door and drawer fronts shall be purified 3 mm PVC applied with hot melt glue by automatic edge-banding equipment. Edges and corners shall be rounded with a 3 mm radius and scraped free from machining or chatter marks.

3. Color shall match vertical laminate at cabinets or as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full color range for solids and patterns.

I. Cores:

1. All sides, tops, countertops, bottoms, doors, drawer fronts, and partitions shall have minimum ¾” thick multi-core premium grade panel product cores manufactured for uses as a core material for laminated casework. Provide 1-inch thickness for bottom panel of wall hung units (same as shelves).

2. Shelf Cores: Shelves shall have the same core material as specified for the cabinet body except provide 3/4-inch thickness.

3. Multi-Core Panel Products:

Simpson Plyron, SimpsonStates Industries “Armorcore” True North “Multi- Core”

2.2 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets.

B. Hardware Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.9 for items indicated by referencing BHMA numbers or items referenced to this standard.

C. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 170 degrees of opening, self-closing.

D. Door and Drawer Pulls: Back mounted, 4 inches long, wire pull, Finish- Satin Nickel, 5/16” in diameter. Field verify to match with hospital standard.

E. Catches: Magnetic catches, BHMA A156.9, B03141.

F. Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013.

G. Drawer Slides: Side-mounted, full-extension, zinc-plated steel drawer slides with steel ball bearings, BHMA A156.9, B05091, and rated for the following loads:

1. Box Drawer Slides: 100 lbf.2. Pencil Drawer Slides: 45 lbf.

H. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121.

I. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041.

J. Keyboard Trays: VersaTables, 24 inches wide, 14inches deep, Model KD-2414



K. Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: 2-1/2-inch beige, molded-plastic grommets and matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage.

L. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated.

1. Satin Chromium Plated: BHMA 652 for steel base.

M. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements in BHMA A156.9.

2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln-dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.

B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors.

2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Provide Premium Grade interior woodwork complying with the referenced quality standard.

B. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation areas.

C. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum extent possible, before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.

2.5 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH

A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 300.

B. Grade: Premium.

2.6 PLASTIC-LAMINATE CABINETS

A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 requirements for laminate cabinets.

B. Grade: Premium.

C. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay.

D. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with the following requirements:



1. Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: HGS.2. Vertical Surfaces: HGS.3. Edges: PVC T-mold matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish.

E. Materials for Semi-exposed Surfaces: Provide surface materials indicated below:

1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: High-pressure decorative laminate, Grade VGS.

2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Melamine.3. Drawer Bottoms: Melamine

F. Materials for Exposed Surfaces: Plastic Laminate

G. Retain one each from three groups below or revise to suit Project.

H. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:

1. Provide Architect's selections from laminate manufacturer's full range of colors and finishes in the following categories:

a. Solid colors.b. Patterns.

2.7 PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS

A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 requirements for high-pressure decorative laminate countertops.

B. Grade: Premium.

C. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: HGS.

D. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:

1. Provide Architect's selections from manufacturer's full range of colors and finishes in the following categories:

a. Solid colors.b. Patterns.

E. Edge Treatment: Countertop front edge shall be bullnose type with same laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces. Side edge, that is visible, shall be finished with same laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces.

F. Core Material: Shall be 1 ¼” thick solid plywood or high density particle board.

G. Side Splash: Provide ¾” side splash at all locations where counter abuts perpendicular wall. Side splash shall be attached to wall but not to countertop to allow for expansion or contraction of countertop after installation.



2.8 SOLID-SURFACING-MATERIAL COUNTERTOPS

A. Grade: Premium.

B. Solid-Surfacing-Material Thickness: 3/4 inch.

C. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors of solid-surfacing material complying with the following requirements:

1. Match project finish schedule. Provide Architect with sample for verification.

D. Fabricate tops in one piece, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with solid-surfacing-material manufacturer's written recommendations for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing.

1. Fabricate tops with shop-applied edges of materials and configuration indicated.2. Provide Integral back splash.3. Provide Integral side splash where countertop abuts perpendicular wall.

2.9 Wood Veneer Casework:

1. Applicable Standard: AWI Section 400A - Wood Cabinets.

2. Grade: Premium.

3. Construction Style: Flush overlay.

4. Scribing: Flush with door faces and per Premium Grade regardless of specified casework grade.

5. Materials:

a. Exposed Surfaces: Hardwood plywood.

b. Semi-Exposed Surfaces: Hardwood Plywood.

c. Edges: Wood veneer tape banding to match exposed surfaces, not less than 1/16-inch-thick.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before installation.

B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming.

3.2 INSTALLATION



A. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700 for the same grade specified in Part 2 of this Section for type of woodwork involved.

B. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.

C. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces and repair damaged finish at cuts.

D. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation.

E. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Do not use pieces less than 36 inches long, except where shorter single-length pieces are necessary.

F. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.

1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line.

2. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16 inches o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for 1-inch penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips.

G. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other supports into underside of countertop.

1. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line.

2. Secure backsplashes to tops and to walls.3. Calk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Division 7

Section "Joint Sealants."4. Cut circular openings in countertop for electrical cord access below countertop.

Provide a grommet around opening for finish appearance. Color of grommet to match countertop. The number of openings required will be determined by the Owner but will not exceed 250.

5. Cut openings in countertops for the installation of grilles as indicated on the drawings and as approved by Architect.

6. Provide full bullnose edge, Typical


A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.

B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.



C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.

END OF SECTION


FIRESTOPPING 07 84 00 - 1

SECTION 07 84 00 – FIRESTOPPING

Part 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Summary

A. Furnish labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services for Firestopping, in accordance with provisions of Contract Documents.

B. Completely coordinate with work of other trades.

1.2 Quality Assurance

A. Installer Qualifications:1. Certified, licensed or approved by firestopping manufacturer, trained to install

firestop products per specified requirements.2. Licensed by State or local authority, where applicable.3. Shown to have successfully completed not less than five (5) comparable scale

projects.

B. Provide firestop systems in compliance with following requirements:1. Obtain firestop system for each type of penetration and construction condition

from a single firestop systems manufacturer.2. Firestop products and systems shall bear classification marking of qualified testing

and inspection agency. 3. Firestopping tests, performed by qualified, testing and inspection agency.

a. UL or other agency, performing testing and follow-up inspection services for firestop systems, acceptable to local authorities having jurisdiction.

4. Existing applications for which no tested and listed classified system is available through a manufacturer:a. Provide Engineering Judgment or Equivalent Fire Resistance Rated Assembly

(EFRRA) for submittal derived from similar UL system designs or other tests approved by local authorities having jurisdiction, prior to installation.

b. Engineering judgment drawings must follow requirements set forth by International Firestop Council.

5. Inspect applied firestopping systems in accordance with International Building Code (IBC) Chapter 17.a. Inspections shall be performed by an FMG 4991 Approved Specialty

Contractor/UL Qualified Firestop Contractor and/or ASTM E2174 and ASTM E2393.

b. See Section 01 45 23.6. FM Approved in accordance with FM Standard 4991 – Approval of Firestop

Contractors.7. UL Qualified Firestop Contractor.

C. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):1. UL 263, Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials2. UL 723, Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials3. UL 1479, Fire Tests of Through Penetration Firestops4. UL 2079, Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems

D. ASTM International (ASTM):1. ASTM E84 Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials2. ASTM E119 Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials3. ASTM E136 Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace at 750F



4. ASTM E814 Fire Tests of Through Penetration Fire Stops5. ASTM E1399 Cyclic Movement and Measuring the Minimum and Maximum Joint

Widths of Architectural Joint Systems6. ASTM E1966 Test Method for Fire Resistive Joint Systems7. ASTM E2174 Standard Practice for On-site Inspection of Installed Fire Stops8. ASTM E2307 Standard Test Method for Determining the Fire Endurance of Perimeter

Fire Barrier Systems Using the Intermediate-Scale, Multi Story Test Apparatus (ISMA)9. ASTM E2393 Standard Practice for On-site Inspection of Installed Fire Resistive Joint

Systems and Perimeter Fire Barriers10. ASTM G21 Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric

Materials to Fungi

E. Building Code as locally adopted and amended.

F. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Fire Resistance Directory:1. Through Penetration Firestop Systems (XHEZ).2. Joint Systems (XHBN).3. Fill, Void or Cavity Materials (XHHW).4. Firestop Devices (XHJI).5. Forming Materials (XHKU).6. Wall Opening Protective Materials (CLIV).

G. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):1. NFPA 70: National Electrical Code2. NFPA 101: Life Safety Code3. NFPA 22: Standard for High Challenge Fire Walls, Fire Walls, and Fire Barrier Walls4. NFPA 251: Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials

H. Firestop Contractors International Association (FCIA): MOP – FCIA Firestop Manual of Practice

I. International Firestop Council (IFC):1. Recommended IFC Guidelines for Evaluating Firestop Engineering Judgments,

latest revision.2. Inspectors Field Pocket Guide, latest edition.

J. Identification Labels for Firestop Assemblies:1. Follow guidelines set in Chapter 7 of International Building Code.2. Coordinate with Section 04 22 00 and Section 09 29 00.3. Label penetration on both sides of wall or slab.4. Label each penetration or group of similar penetrations with a permanent label

marked with the following information:a. UL system number.b. Rating.c. Products used.d. Installation date.e. Installer name.f. Penetration reference number unique to each location.

K. Pipe insulation shall not be removed, cut away or otherwise interrupted through wall or floor openings.1. Provide products appropriately tested for the thickness and type of insulation

utilized.

L. Cabling where frequent cable moves, add-ons, and changes are likely to occur in future:1. Where cable trays are used:



a. Utilize re-enterable products (e.g. removable intumescent pillows) specifically designed for retrofit.

2. Where cable trays are not used:a. Utilize fire-rated cable pathway devices. b. Where not practical, re-enterable products designed for retrofit may be used.

M. Protect penetrations passing through fire-resistance rated floor-ceiling assemblies contained within chase wall assemblies with products tested by being fully exposed to fire outside of chase wall. 1. Identify systems within UL Fire Resistance Directory with the words: Chase Wall

Optional.

N. Fire Resistive Joint Sealant:1. Provide flexible fire-resistive joint sealants to accommodate normal and thermal

building movement without seal damage.2. Provide fire-resistive joint sealants designed to accommodate a specific range of

movement.a. Test in accordance with cyclic movement test criteria as outlined in: ASTM

E1399, ASTM E1966 or UL 2079.3. Provide fire-resistive joint systems subjected to an air leakage test.

a. Conduct in accordance with UL 2079, with published L-Ratings for ambient and elevated temperatures, as evidence of ability of fire-resistive joint system to restrict movement of smoke.

4. Coordinate firestopping with acoustical sealant requirements in Section 07 92 16.

O. Subject smoke wall containment systems to air leakage test.1. Conduct in accordance with UL 1479, with published L-Ratings for ambient and

elevated temperatures, as evidence of ability of fire-resistive joint system to restrict movement of smoke.

P. System Description:1. Through Penetration Firestop Systems for protection of penetrations through

following fire-resistance rated assemblies, including both blank openings and openings containing penetrating items:a. Roof assemblies.b. Floor assemblies.c. Wall and partition assemblies.d. Fire-rated smoke barrier assemblies.e. Existing, fire and smoke-rated assemblies.f. Construction enclosing compartmentalized areas.

2. Fire Resistive Joint Assemblies for linear voids where fire-rated floor, roof, or wall assemblies abut one another, including following types of joints:a. Top and bottom of wall interface with overhead roof or floor structure:

1) Coordinate with acoustical sealant specified in Section 09 29 00.2) Select products to maintain acoustical, smoke and fire ratings indicated.

b. Non-Fire Rated Expansion Joints: Specified in Section 07 95 13.c. Fire Rated Expansion Joints: Specified in Section 07 95 13.

Q. LEED Requirements:1. Refer to Section 01 81 16, LEED HC v2009 Requirements, for additional performance

requirements that may apply to products specified in this section.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s standard information indicating certification of products proposed for use on project.



B. Project Information: UL reports with illustration of systems, system numbers, temperature ratings, and products proposed for use on project.

C. Contract Closeout Information:1. Warranty.2. Electronic file of project firestopping documentation.3. LEED Information: IEQ 4.1, Low-Emitting Materials, Adhesives and Sealants:

Manufacturer's product data for construction adhesives and sealants including VOC content.

1.4 warranty

A. Written five (5) year warranty guaranteeing quality of installation and meeting requirements of manufacturer’s written instructions and tested systems.

Part 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Acceptable manufacturers

A. Firestopping:1. Base:

a. 3M - Firestopping Products.

B. Forming Materials:1. Base:

a. 3M - Firestopping Products.

C. Other manufacturers desiring approval, comply with Section 00 26 00.1. See systems Volume 2 of UL Building Materials Directory.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Through Penetration Firestop Systems:1. VOC content not to exceed 250 g/L2. Base Products:

a. FS-ONE Intumescent Firestop Sealant.b. CP 604 Self-leveling Firestop Sealant.c. CP 620 Fire Foam.d. CP 606 Flexible Firestop Sealant.e. CP 601S Elastomeric Firestop Sealant.

B. Fire-resistive Joints: 1. VOC content not to exceed 250 g/L2. Base Products:

a. CFS-SP WB Firestop Joint Spray.b. CP 601S Elastomeric Firestop Sealant.c. CP 606 Flexible Firestop Sealant.d. CP 604 Self-leveling Firestop Sealant.

C. Firestop Devices:1. Factory-assembled collars lined with intumescent material sized to fit specific

outside diameter of penetrating item.2. Base Products:

a. CP 680-P Cast-in-Place Firestop Device.b. CP 680-M Cast-in-Place Firestop Device.c. CP 681 Tub Box Kit.d. CFS-DID Firestop Device.

D. Intumescent Pads, Wall Opening Protective Materials:



1. Intumescent, non-curing pads or inserts for protection of electrical panels, switch and receptacle boxes, medical gas outlets and valve boxes and other items recessed in face of fire rated walls.

2. Base Product:a. CFS-P PA Firestop Putty Pad.b. CP 617 Firestop Putty Pad.c. Hilti Biox Insert.

E. Fire-rated Cable Pathways: 1. Usage:

a. Cables passing through fire-rated floors or walls shall pass through fire-rated cable pathway devices made from an intumescent material that adjusts automatically to cable additions or subtractions.

2. Product description and requirements:a. Pathway device modules comprised of steel raceway and intumescent pads

with adjustable smoke seal sleeve.b. F-Rating equal to the rating of barrier the device penetrates.c. Pathway devices shall be capable of allowing a 0 to 100 percent fill of cables.d. Size to accommodate quantity and size of electrical wires and data cables

indicated plus 100 percent expansion.e. Provide wire devices with steel wall plates allowing for single or multiple devices

ganged together without requiring additional wall structure framing.3. Base product:

a. CP 653 Speed Sleeve.1) Use in conjunction with CFS-SL GP when more than one device is required.

b. CFS-CC Firestop Cable Collar.

F. Firestop Putty:1. Intumescent, non-hardening, water resistant putties containing no solvents,

inorganic fibers or silicone compounds.2. Firestop putty shall be provided and installed at, but not limited to, the gap

between wire, cabling, or both, exiting an open end of conduit, where conduit penetrates one or both sides of a smoke or fire rated wall assembly.

3. Base products:a. CP 618 Firestop Putty Stick.b. CFS-PL Firestop Plug.

G. Wrap Strips: 1. Single component intumescent elastomeric strips faced on both sides with a plastic

film:2. Base Products:

a. CP 643N Firestop Collar.b. CP 644 Firestop Collar.c. CP 648E/648S Wrap Strips.

H. Firestop Blocks: 1. Re-enterable, non-curing, intumescent flexible block.2. Base products:

a. CFS-BL Fire Block.b. CFS-PL Firestop Plug.

I. Mortar:1. Portland cement based dry-mix product formulated for mixing with water at Project

site to form a non-shrinking, water-resistant, homogenous mortar.2. Base product:

a. CP 637 Firestop Mortar.



J. Silicone Sealants:1. Moisture curing, single component, silicone elastomeric sealant for horizontal

surfaces pourable or nonsag or vertical surface nonsag.2. Base product:

a. CP 601S Elastomeric Firestop Sealant.b. CP 604 Self LevelingSilicone Firestop Sealant.c. CFS-SIL SL Self Leveling Silicone Firestop Sealant.

K. Pre-formed mineral wool: 1. CP 767 Speed Strips2. CP 777 Speed Plugs

L. Fire Sealant:1. Single component latex or acrylic formulations that upon cure do not re-emulsify

during exposure to moisture.a. CP 601S Elastic Firestop Sealant.b. CP 606 Fire Resistant Joint Filler.c. CP 672 Firestop Joint Spray.d. CFS-SP WB Firestop Joint Spray.

2. VOC content of sealants shall be no greater than 250 g/L.3. VOC content of sealants shall be no greater than 250 g/L.4. Adhesives and sealants shall contain no carcinogen or reproductive toxicant

components present at more than 1 percent of total mass of the product as defined in the California Office of Environmental Health Hazard Assessment’s (OEHHA) list entitled, Chemicals Known to the State to Cause Cancer, or the Reproductive Toxicity, Safe Drinking Water and Toxic Enforcement Act of 1986 (Proposition 65).

M. Composite Sheet:1. Non-curing, re-penetrable material.2. Base Products:

a. CP 675T Firestop Board.b. CFS-BL FireBlock.

N. Forming Materials:1. Materials listed as components in laboratory-approved designs.2. Mineral Wool:

a. Base Product:CP 767 Speed Strip b. Similar product specifically named as components in laboratory-approved

designs.

O. Perimeter Fire Containment: Specified in Section 07 84 53.

P. Acoustical Sealant: Specified in Section 07 92 16.

2.3 THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS

A. General:1. Schedules below identify requirements for acceptable through penetration firestop

systems based on barrier type, fire-resistive rating, and penetrant type. Each system must comply with building code and fire code as locally adopted and amended.

2. Requirements for single-membrane penetrations and through penetration firestops are identical. Unless otherwise noted, penetrants which pass through a single membrane, shall be treated the same as if it passed through the entire fire-resistive assembly.

3. Select each firestop system based on actual field conditions, including penetration type, shape, size, quantities and physical position within opening.



4. Refer to Plans for indication of the required ratings of fire-resistive wall, floor, and roof assemblies.

5. Indicated ratings are minimum and may be exceeded.6. Firestop Assemblies at Fire-Rated Walls:

a. The minimum Fire (F) Rating for Firestop assemblies in walls shall equal that of the wall, but not less than 1-HR.

b. The minimum Temperature (T) Rating of Firestop assemblies in walls may equal zero.

c. Smoke Barrier: In addition to (F) Rating, (L) Rating of maximum 5 CFM per SF.d. Non-rated walls and Smoke-Partitions with no fire-resistive requirement:

Assembly with (L) rating.7. Firestop assemblies at fire-rated floors and roofs:

a. Minimum Fire (F) and Temperature (T) Ratings of Firestop assemblies used in floors or roof shall equal hourly rating of floor or roof being penetrated, but not less than 1-HR. 1) Exception 1: The T-rating may equal zero when portion of penetration,

above or below floor, is contained within a wall.2) Exception 2: Firestops are not required for floor penetrations within a 2-hour

rated shaft enclosure.

B. Voids in wall with no penetrations:1. Fill with approved through penetration firestopping system.2. Contractor’s option: Patch void in wall with like construction.

C. Penetrating Ducts with Dampers:1. Utilize only firestop materials which are included in damper’s classification.2. Do not install firestop systems that hamper performance of fire dampers.

D. Cable Trays and similar devices:1. Provide re-enterable products specifically designed for removal and re-installation

at openings within walls and floors designed to accommodate voice, data and video cabling.

E. Electrical panels and devices, medical gas outlets and valve boxes, film illuminators, and other items recessed in to face of rated walls:1. Where electrical devices are placed on opposite sides of wall, and are less than 24

IN apart measured horizontally, install intumescent pads over back of devices in approved manner or maintain continuity of rated barrier within wall cavity surrounding recessed item.



2.4 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT ASSEMBLIES – GENERAL

A. General:1. Where joint will be exposed to elements, fire-resistive joint sealant must be

approved by manufacturer for use in exterior applications and shall comply with ASTM C920.

B. Head-of-Wall Assemblies:1. General:

a. Use at top of fire-rated and smoke barrier walls and partitions where they abut floor and roof structures above.

b. Select systems with D designation, rated for dynamic movement capability.c. Select systems that can accommodate deflection of structure above. d. Maximum Leakage for Fire-resistive Joints in Smoke Barriers: 5 CFM or less per

linear foot as tested in accordance with UL 2079.e. Seal non-fire-rated sound-control walls and smoke partitions with acoustical

sealant as specified in Section 07 92 16.2. Minimum F and T ratings:

a. The minimum fire rating for firestop assemblies in walls shall equal that of wall, but not less than 1-HR.



b. The minimum temperature rating of firestop assemblies in walls may equal zero.3. Acceptable Systems:

a. Metal stud and drywall partitions: Select system from UL HW-D-0000 Series.b. Concrete and Masonry Walls: Select system from UL HW-D-1000 Series.

Part 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper or timely completion.

B. Surfaces to which firestop materials will be applied shall be free of dirt, grease, oil, scale, laitance, rust, release agents, water repellents, and any other substances that may inhibit optimum adhesion.

C. Provide masking and temporary covering to prevent soiling of adjacent surfaces by firestopping materials.

D. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 Installation

A. General: 1. Install firestop systems in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and

conditions of testing and classification as specified in UL or other acceptable third-party testing agency listing.

2. Penetrations through fire-resistive floor assemblies shall be sealed with firestop system providing minimum Class 1 W-rating as tested in accordance with UL 1479 and ensure air and water resistant seal.

3. Protect materials from damage on surfaces subjected to traffic.

B. Identification Labels:1. Identify each firestop assembly as defined in Quality Assurance.2. Do not locate identification labels, tags, or both, on finished surfaces or where

exposed to view by public.


A. Owner shall engage a qualified independent inspection agency to inspect firestop systems in accordance with ASTM E2174, Standard Practice for On-site Inspection of Installed Fire Stops, and ASTM E2393, Standard Practice for On-Site Inspection of Installed Fire Resistive Joint Systems and Perimeter Fire Barriers.

B. Construct mock-up on-site to include typical through penetration and fire-resistive joint applications for project.

C. Maintain areas of work accessible until inspection by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Where deficiencies are found, repair or replace assemblies to comply with requirements.


A. Remove equipment, materials and debris, leaving area in undamaged, clean condition.

B. Clean surfaces adjacent to sealed openings free of excess materials and soiling as work progresses.

C. Perform patching and repair of firestopping systems damaged by other trades.



END OF SECTION


JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 1

SECTION 07 92 00 - JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes sealants for the following applications, including those specified by reference to this Section:

1. Exterior joints in the following vertical surfaces and nontraffic horizontal surfaces:

a. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors and windows.

2. Exterior joints in the following horizontal traffic surfaces:

a. Control, expansion, and isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.

3. Interior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces:

a. Vertical control joints on exposed surfaces of interior unit masonry and concrete walls and partitions.

b. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors, windows, and elevator entrances.

c. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters.d. Other joints as indicated.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.


A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration date, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.



B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:

1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint sealant manufacturer.

B. Joint-Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for applications indicated.

C. Joint-Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion are removed from joint substrates.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products indicated for each type in the sealant schedules at the end of Part 3.

2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range for this characteristic.

2.3 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS

A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant in the Elastomeric Joint-Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses.

2.4 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS

A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: For each product of this description indicated in the Acoustical Joint-Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3, provide manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and the following:



1. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.

2.5 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING

A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants with joint substrates.

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant performance.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with

adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.

2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations by



vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint surfaces include the following:

a. Concrete.b. Masonry.c. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended in writing by joint sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

C. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 919 for use of joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

D. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

E. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and back of joints.

F. Install sealants by proven techniques to comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed:

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.2. Completely fill recesses provided for each joint configuration.3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that

allow optimum sealant movement capability.

G. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.



1. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint.2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that

do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from the original work.

3.6 ELASTOMERIC JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE

A. Multicomponent Nonsag Polysulfide Sealant: Where joint sealants of this type are indicated, provide products complying with the following:

1. Products: Provide one of the following:

a. cm-60; W.R Meadows, Inc.b. T-2235-M; Morton International, Inc.c. T-2282; Morton International, Inc.d. Thiokol 2P; Morton International, Inc.e. GC-5 Synthacalk; Pecora Corporation.f. Two-Part Sealant; Sonneborn Building Products Div., ChemRex Inc.

2. Type and Grade: M (multicomponent) and NS (nonsag).3. Class: 25.4. Uses Related to Exposure: T (traffic)

3.7 LATEX JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE

A. Latex Sealant: Where joint sealants of this type are indicated, provide products complying with the following:


a. Chem-Calk 600; Bostik Inc.b. NuFlex 330; NUCO Industries, Inc.c. LC 160 All Purpose Acrylic Caulk; Ohio Sealants, Inc.d. AC-20; Pecora Corporation.e. PSI-701; Polymeric Systems, Inc.f. Sonolac; Sonneborn Building Products Div., ChemRex, Inc.g. Tremflex 834; Tremco.



3.8 ACOUSTICAL JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE

A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: At all sound partitions and where joint sealants of this type are indicated, provide products complying with the following:


a. AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant; Pecora Corporation.b. SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant; USG Corp., United States Gypsum Co.

B. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: At all sound partitions and where joint sealants of this type are indicated, provide products complying with the following:


a. Pro-Series SC-170 Rubber Base Sound Sealant; Ohio Sealants, Inc.b. BA-98; Pecora Corporation.c. Tremco Acoustical Sealant; Tremco.

END OF SECTION


HOLLOW METAL DOOR AND FRAMES 08 11 13 - 1

SECTION 08 11 13 – HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Work Included: Provide and install hollow metal doors and frames, complete, as shown on Drawings and as specified.

1. Hollow Metal Door and Frame Sets.

2. Hollow Metal Interior Window Frames.

3. Hollow Metal Frames for Wood Doors specified in Section 081416 – Flush Wood Doors.

4. Coordinate Door and Frame fabrication with door hardware specified in Section 087100 – Door Hardware as required for the hardware types scheduled on Drawings.

5. Coordinate Door and Frame fabrication with Security and Access Control products specified in DIVISION 26 – Electrical as required for Security and Fire Alarm wiring and interface.


1. Section 050500 – Metal Fasteners.

2. Section 081416– Flush Wood Doors.

3. Section 084113– Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts.

4. Section 084213– Aluminum Framed Entrance

5. Section 087100 – Door Hardware.

7. Section 088000 –Glazing.

8. Section 085113 – Aluminum Windows.


A. Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association (HMMA) Division of National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM):

1. Hollow Metal Manual; including HMMA 800, 801, 802, 810, 820, 830, 840, 841, 850, 860, 861, 862, 863, 880, 881, and 882.


A. Comply with the latest edition of the following Standards:



1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

a. NFPA No. 80: "Fire Doors and Windows".

b. NFPA No. 251: "Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials".

c. NFPA No. 252: "Fire Tests of Door Assemblies".

d. NFPA No. 257: "Fire Tests of Window Assemblies".

2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

a. ASTM E-119: "Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials".

b. ASTM E-152: "Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies."

c. ASTM E-163: "Methods for Fire Tests of Window Assemblies".

3. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

a. A250.8: "Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames".

4. Underwriters' Laboratories' (UL):

a. UL-9: "Fire Tests of Door Assemblies".

b. UL-10C: "Fire Tests of Window Assemblies".

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Testing agency testing all fire rated doors and frames, shall have approval of enforcing authority for this project and provide inspection of materials and workmanship at factory during fabrication and assembly.

C. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Where opening has fire resistive rating of 20 minutes or longer, door shall bear testing agency-issued label.

a. Provide "T" temperature rating labels.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with provisions of Section 013300 – Submittal Procedures.

B. Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications, catalog cuts, data, and installation instructions.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. General: Show frame type, material descriptions and gauges, exact profiles, elevations, fire-resistive rating and complete details, including reinforcing, anchors, and connections.



a. Identify non-conforming frames and assemblies that cannot be fire rated or labeled for Architect's review and direction.

2. Provide Elevation Drawings for each frame assembly, fully dimensioned and identified by numbering nomenclature used on Drawings, including:

a. Locations of rough-in and reinforcing preparation for hardware provided in other Sections.

b. Routing of electrical conduit or cable within frame members.

c. Glass Type for each Lite, incorporating nomenclature used on Drawings.

d. Locations of Doors, including swing and Door numbering nomenclature used on Drawings.

e. Frame Finish.

3. Provide full-size special details showing thickness, profiles, jointing, connections, and assembly of various members, reinforcement, anchorage, and supports.

D. Samples: Submit 12-inch by 12-inch "L" section of metal door frame showing corner detail, anchor, weld, and finish.

E. Certificates: Submit certificates for specified doors and frames indicating compliance with fabrication and minimum labeling requirements. Certificates signed by Contractor and authorized representative of hollow metal manufacturing company.


A. General: Deliver, store, and handle hollow metal work in manner to prevent damage, distortion, and deterioration.

B. Packaging: Package hollow metal work in cardboard or other containers with separators, banding, spreaders, and paper wrappings to protect items during transit and Project site storage.

C. Manufacturer's Recommendations: Follow special storage and handling requirements of manufacturer.

D. Identification: Mark each door and door frame, on a surface which will be hidden after installation, with designation of opening for which it is furnished. Mark opening designation also on exterior packaging for each door and door frame.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Hardware Suppliers: Furnish hollow metal frame manufacturer with accepted hardware schedule, hardware templates, and samples of physical hardware where necessary to ensure correct fitting and installation.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. General: Provide products manufactured by Stiles Custom Metal, Inc; Curries Company, an ASSA ABLOY Group Company; Steelcraft, an Ingersoll Rand Company OR Ceco, an ASSA ABLOY Group Company

2.2 MATERIALS – GENERAL

A. Steel Sheet:

1. General: Free of scale, pitting, and surface defects.

2. Cold-Rolled: ASTM A366, commercial grade.

3. Hot-Rolled: ASTM A569, commercial grade, pickled.

4. Galvanized: Cold-rolled or hot-rolled sheet with zinc coating applied by hot-dip process per ASTM A526 (A60 or G60) with coating weight of not less than 0.30 ounces per square foot per side.

2.3 HOLLOW METAL DOORS

A. Faces:

1. Interior Doors: Cold-rolled or hot-rolled steel sheet; not less than 18 gauge.

2. Exterior Doors: Galvanized steel sheet, not less than 16 gauge.

B. Door Thickness: 1-3/4-inches, unless otherwise shown.

C. Door Types: Flush. Fully-welded seamless construction with no visible seams or joints on faces or vertical edges.

D. Door Construction:

1. General: Fabricate doors in conformance with ANSI A250.8, including:

a. Level and Physical Performance Level: Level 3 and Extra heavy Duty per ANSI A250.8.

b. Model: 2 (Seamless per ANSI A250.8).

2. Reinforcement: Stiffen face sheets by continuous vertical formed steel stiffener sections spanning full thickness of interior space between door faces.

3. Stiffeners: Not less than 22 gauge space not more than 6-inches apart and securely attach to face sheets by spot welds not more than 5-inches on center. Fill spaces between stiffeners to sound-deaden and



insulate full height of door with an inorganic non-combustible batt-type material.

4. Door Faces: Join at vertical edges by continuous weld extending full height of door. Grind, fill, and dress welds smooth to make invisible and provide smooth flush surface.

5. Top and Bottom Edges: Close with continuous recessed steel channel not less than 16 gauge, extending full width of door and spot welded to both faces. At exterior doors provide an additional flush closing channel at top edges and, where required for attachment of weather-stripping, a flush closure also at bottom edges. Provide openings in bottom closure of exterior doors to permit escape of entrapped moisture.

6. Edge Profiles: Provide for both vertical edges of doors as follows:

a. Single-Acting Swing Doors: Bevel 1/8-inch in 2 inches.

b. Double-Acting Swing Doors: Round on 2-1/8-inch radius.

7. Hardware Reinforcements:

a. General: Mortise, reinforce, drill and tap doors at factory for fully-templated hardware only, per hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware suppliers specified in Section 08710 – Door Hardware, and DIVISION 16 –Electrical (Fire Alarm and Security Requirements). Where surface-mounted hardware is scheduled, provide reinforcing plates only; drilling and tapping done by others.

b. Minimum Gauges For Hardware Reinforcing Plates: As follows:

1) Hinge and Pivot Reinforcements: 7 gauge.

2) Reinforcements for Lock Face, Flush Bolts, Concealed Holders: 12 gauge.

3) Reinforcements for All Other Surface-Mounted Hardware: 16 gauge.

8. Astragals:

a. Dutch Bend Astragal: Provide as integral part of door unless otherwise shown or scheduled. Fabricate astragal of three thickness of metal of same gauge as face sheet. Fabricate reveal on opposite door leaf from top to bottom for dutch bend astragal to lay flush with face.

b. Location:

1) Exterior Pairs of Doors:

a) Outswing: Astragal on exterior side of active door leaf.



b) Inswinging: Astragal on exterior side of inactive leaf.

9. Louvers: Welded blade type of construction. Louvers pierced into face sheets not permitted.

10. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration.

E. Electrical Requirements:

1. General: Make provisions for installation of electrical items specified under Section 087100 – Door Hardware, and DIVISION 16 –Electrical (Fire Alarm and Security Requirements) and other applicable Sections; arrange in manner so wiring can be readily removed and replaced.

2. Doors with Electric Hardware:

a. General: Provide with metal raceway or conduit to permit wiring from electric hinge to other electric door hardware.

b. Hinges or Pivot Location: Center or intermediate as applicable; top or bottom not permitted.

c. Install Electro Lynx wiring and Molex type connectors. Furnished by Section 087100, Door Hardware.

2.4 HOLLOW METAL PANELS

A. General: Fabricate and finish hollow metal panels as specified for hollow metal doors.

2.5 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES

A. Materials:

1. Interior Frames: Cold-rolled or hot-rolled steel sheet; not less than 16 gauge for openings 48-inches and less in width, and not less than 14 gauge for openings greater than 48-inches in width.

2. Exterior Frames: Galvanized steel sheet; not less than 14 gauge.

B. Fabrication:

1. General: Provide welded units with integral trim, of sizes and shapes shown. Knocked-down frames acceptable at interior non-rated openings only.

2. Finished Work: Strong and rigid, neat in appearance, square, true and free of defects, warp or buckle. Fabricate molded members clean cut, straight and of uniform profile throughout their lengths.

3. Jamb Depths, Trim, Profile, Returns, and Backbends: As shown.



4. Corner Joints: Close contact edges tight, miter and continuously weld trim edges, and miter (butt) stops. Use of gussets not permitted.

5. Stops: Minimum depth 5/8-inches.

6. Large Openings: When shipping limitations so dictate, fabricate frames for large openings in sections designed for splicing in field.

7. Multiple or Special Openings: Fabricate frames for multiple or special openings with mullion and/or rail members which are closed tubular shapes having no visible seams or joints. Securely weld joints between faces of abutting members and finish smooth.

8. Hardware Reinforcements:

a. General: Mortise, reinforce, drill, and tap frames at factory for fully templated mortised hardware only, per hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Where surface-mounted hardware is to be applied, provide frames with reinforcing plates only.

b. Hardware Reinforcing Plates: Minimum thickness as follows:

1) Hinge And Pivot Reinforcements: 7 gauge, 1-1/4-foot by 10-inches, minimum size.

2) Strike Reinforcements: 12 gauge.

3) Flush Bolt Reinforcements: 12 gauge.

4) Closer Reinforcements: 12 gauge.

5) Surface-Mounted Hardware Reinforcements: 12 gauge.

6) Hold-Open Arm Reinforcements: 12 gauge.

7) Surface Exit Device Reinforcements: 12 gauge.

9. Jamb Anchors:

a. Masonry Walls: Provide frames with adjustable jamb anchors. Anchors not less than 16-gauge steel or 0.156-inch diameter steel wire. Stirrup straps shall be not less than 2 inches by 10 inches in size, corrugated and/or perforated. Provide anchors on each jamb as follows:

Frames up to 7'-6" height: 3 anchors.Frames 7'-6" to 8'-0" height: 4 anchors.Frames over 8'-0" height: 1 anchor for each 2' or

fraction thereof in height.



b. Stud Partitions: Provide frames with steel anchors of suitable design, not less than 18-gauge thickness, securely welded inside each jamb as follows:

Frames up to 7'-6" height: 4 anchors.Frames 7'-6" to 8'-0" height: 5 anchors.Frames over 8'-0" height: 5 anchors plus one

additional for each 2' or fraction thereof over 8'-0".

c. Previously Placed Concrete or Masonry: Provide frames to be anchored to previously placed concrete, masonry or structural steel with anchors of suitable design as shown on approved shop drawings.

10. Floor Anchors:

a. General: Securely weld inside each jamb, with two holes provided at each jamb for floor anchorage.

b. Adjustable Anchors: Where so scheduled or specified, provide adjustable floor anchors, not less than 2 inches in height adjustment.

c. Thickness: Minimum 14 gauge.

11. Masonry Wall Openings More Than 48-Inches In Width: Provide with angle or channel stiffener factory welded into head; stiffeners not less than opening width and not used as lintels or load-bearing members.

12. Dust Cover Boxes: Or mortar guards, provide of not thinner than 26-gauge steel at hardware mortises on frames to be set in masonry or plaster partitions.

13. Steel Spreader: Provide frames with steel spreader temporarily attached to feet of both jambs to serve as brace during shipping and handling. Steel spreader not to be used for installation purposes.

C. Electrical Requirements:

1. General: Make provisions for installation of electrical items specified under Section 087100 – Door Hardware, and DIVISION 26 –Electrical (Fire Alarm and Security Requirements) and other applicable Sections; arrange in manner so wiring can be readily removed and replaced.

2. Frames with Electric Hinges:

a. General: Dust cover boxes or mortar guard for electrical hinges furnished under Section 087100 – Door Hardware; weld into place under this Section.

b. Hinge or Pivot Location: Center or intermediate as applicable; top or bottom not permitted.



3. Back Box for Electrical Hardware Items: Furnished under Section 087100 – Door Hardware; weld into place under this Section.

2.6 FIRE-RATED DOORS AND FRAMES

A. General: Provide labeled doors and frames for those openings requiring fire protection ratings as scheduled. Construct such doors and frames as tested and approved by UL, WHI, or other nationally recognized testing agency having factory inspection service.

B. Non-Ratable Openings: Identify on Shop Drawings any door or frame scheduled to be fire-rated cannot qualify for appropriate labeling because of its design, hardware or any other reason. Do not begin fabrication for non-ratable items until all issues have been resolved.

2.7 STOPS AND MOLDINGS

A. Moldings for Glazed Lites in Doors: Minimum 0.032 inch thick, fabricated from same material as door face sheet in which they are installed.

B. Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with standard steel frames, minimum 5/8 inch high, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Frames: Minimum 0.032 inch thick, fabricated from same material as frames in which they are installed.

2.8 SHOP PAINTING

A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

1. Finish standard steel door and frames after assembly.

B. Galvanized Steel Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces with nonpetroleum solvent so surfaces are free of oil and other contaminants. After cleaning, apply a conversion coating suited to the organic coating to be applied over it. Clean welds, mechanical connections, and abraded areas, and apply galvanizing repair paint specified below to comply with ASTM A 780.

1. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel, complying with SSPC-Paint 20.

C. Steel Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning"; remove dirt, oil, grease, or other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel; comply with SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning," or SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."

D. Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Apply shop primer specified below immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Apply a smooth coat of even consistency to provide a uniform dry film thickness of not less than 0.7-mils.



E. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer complying with ANSI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied finish paint system indicated; and providing a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verification of Conditions: Examine substrate and conditions under which hollow metal doors and frames are to be installed and give notification, in writing, of any conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF FRAMES

A. General: Install frames per Reference Standards and as specified.

B. Labeled Doors and Frames: Install per requirements of labeling authority.

C. Setting: Exercise care in setting of frames to maintain scheduled dimensions, hold head level, and maintain jambs plumb and square.

D. Anchorages and Connections: Secure to adjacent construction. Furnish anchors to suit wall conditions and floor angles or clips welded to frame for fastening to floor.

E. Spreader Bars: Whenever possible, leave frame spreader bars intact until frames are set perfectly square and plumb and anchors are securely attached. Do not use shipping bars as spreaders.

F. Expansion Movement: Allow for as required.

G. Fire-Rated Frames: Install per NFPA Standard No. 80.

H. Exterior Doors: Provide sheet metal drip at head.

I. Frames in Metal Stud Partitions: Frames filled tight with mineral fiber safing as specified in Section 078413 – Penetration Firestopping.

3.3 SHOP COAT TOUCH-UP

A. General: Immediately after installation remove rust, sand smooth, and touch-up items with prime coat which has been damaged with same primer as applied in shop.

3.4 ADJUSTMENT

A. General: Replace or re-hang doors which are hinge-bound or do not swing or operate freely.



3.5 PROTECTION

A. General: Protect installed work against damage from other construction work.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF DOORS

A. General: Install doors per manufacturer's instructions.

B. Hardware: Install per requirements specified in Section 087100 – Door Hardware.

C. Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate operable parts as required for correct function.

END OF SECTION


FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 14 16 - 1

SECTION 08 14 16- FLUSH WOOD DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Work Included: Provide and install flush wood doors, complete, as shown on Drawings and as specified, including:

1. Flush Wood Doors, including: Wood Veneer Flush Doors, including specified veneer and transparent finish.

2. Provide rated and un-rated doors as scheduled on Drawings.

3. Coordinate Door fabrication with Section 087100 – Door Hardware as required for the hardware types scheduled on Drawings.

4. Coordinate Door fabrication with DIVISION 26 – Electrical as required for Security and Fire Alarm wiring and interface.


1. Section 081113– Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.

2. Section 084113–Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts.


4. Section 088000 – Glazing.


A. National Wood Window and Door Association (NWWDA):

1. IS 1.1; General Requirements for Flush Wood Doors.

2. IS 1.2; Solid Core Wood Flush Doors.

3. IS 1.4; Special Construction Wood Flush Doors.

4. IS 1.6; Testing and Inspection Requirements for Wood Flush Doors.

B. Standards of Woodwork Institute (WI) "Manual of Millwork."

C. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM):

1. E-90-02: "Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements".


A. Qualifications:



1. Manufacturer: Certified and licensed per NWWDA IS 1 Series.

2. United States Product Standard (PS) "Construction and Industrial Plywood" (PS 1-74).

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with provisions of Section 013300 – Submittal Procedures.B. Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications, catalog cuts, standard details,

and installation details.

C. Shop Drawings: Complete, with door schedule; show location, types, sizes, thickness, cutout details, special details and other requirements to assure proper installation.

D. Samples:

1. Doors: Each type showing construction, faces, edges, and specified finishes; 12-inch by 12-inch corner section.

E. Certificates:

1. General: Certification that doors conform to NWMA IS 1 Series.

2. Sound Retardant Doors: Certification that doors comply with specified STC rating.

1.5 EXTENDED WARRANTY

A. Comply with requirements of Section 017600 – Guarantees and Warranties.

B. General: Manufacturer's standard based on NWMA IS 1.1 tolerances and book sizes.

C. Solid Core Doors:

1. Interior: Life of original installation.


A. Delivery: Package doors per manufacturer's recommendation prior to shipment. Mark and identify doors for each opening to facilitate proper location.

B. Storage: Store doors flat on level surfaces in clean, dry, and properly ventilated spaces.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Typical Flush Wood Doors: Provide wood doors manufactured by Marshfield Door Systems, VT Industries, Eggers Industries, OR Oshkosh Architectural Wood Doors

2.2 WOOD VENEER FACES FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH

A. General:

1. Provide wood veneer faced flush wood doors as required to match the Architect's samples and in conformance with ANSI/HPVA HP-1; not less than 1/50-inch-thick before finish sanding.

a. Grade: Premium, with Grade A faces.

B.

1. Species: White Maple.

2. Cut: Plain Sliced

3. Application:

a. Face Panel Grade: HPVA Grade A.

b. Finish: Match adjacent existing doors in the building.

4. Match between veneer leaves: Book Match

5. Fabrication: As specified in this Section.

2.3 MDO FACES FOR SHOP AND FIELD PAINTING

A. Paint-Grade Medium Density Overlay (MDO): Conform to PS 1-74.

B. Paint doors as specified in Section 099123 – Interior Painting.

2.4 FABRICATION – NON-RATED DOORS AND 20-MINUTE RATED DOORS

A. Fabrication:

1. General: Per NWWDA IS 1 Series, Premium Grade; no finger jointing permitted.

B. Cores:

1. Particleboard: Mat-formed wood particle board per ANSI 208.1, Grade 1-L-2 28–32 pounds per cubic foot.



a. Use particleboard made with binder containing no urea-formaldehyde resin.

2. Blocking: Provide mill option wood blocking in particleboard-core doors as required to eliminate through-bolting hardware for all surface applied hardware.

3. Adhesive: Type I bond.

4. Bonding: Fabricate doors using bonded core construction, including stile and rails bonded to core, using adhesive and pressure during the curing process. Plane assembled and cured door core units to a uniform thickness prior to application of crossbanding and veneers.

5. Crossbands: Dried to 6-9 percent moisture content, minimum 1/16-inch-thick spliced hardwood with no voids or defects, extending full width of doors with grain at right angles to face veneer.

6. Stiles: Provide SCL stiles, minimum 1-3/8-inch-thick before fitting; 1-1/8-inch minimum after trimming. For wood veneer doors, provide outer band matching specified wood veneer, with no exposed crossbands.

7. Rails: Provide wood rails, 1-1/8-inch minimum after trimming; mill option hardwood or softwood of a density equal to or exceeding Douglas Fir.

8. 20 minute particle core shall meet positive pressure and "S" label without use of intumescent seals.

C. Identification: Stamp each door with NWWDA Certification Hallmark.

1. 20-Minute Fire Rated Doors: Provide each door with UL or WHI metal or mylar type labels.

2.6 FABRICATION – 45, 60 AND 90 MINUTE FIRE RATED DOORS

A. Fabrication:

1. General: Fabricate as specified for standard doors, NWWDA IS 1.4, and UL requirements for fire rating shown.

2. Non-Ratable Openings: If any scheduled fire rated door cannot be labeled because of design, size, hardware, or other reason, give written notification; do not start fabrication until conflict is resolved.

B. Core: Door manufacturer's standard non-combustible mineral core, containing 0-percent asbestos and designed to meet or exceed labeling requirements.

1. Concealed Rod Hardware: Where scheduled, provide Georgia-Pacific, or equal, Firestop components; including matching full length wood edge meeting stiles with no visible finger joints, 1/2-inch width after trimming. Metal edges or metal edge and astragal no acceptable.



2. Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard size, incombustible multi-ply inner blocking to eliminate through-bolting of surface mounted hardware.

a. Stile Edge Screw Withdrawal: Minimum 740-pounds when tested per ASTM D-1037.

3. Stile Edge Split Resistance: Minimum 750-pounds minimum when tested per ASTM D-143 (modified). For wood veneer doors, provide 1/2-inch-thick outer band matching specified wood veneer.

a. Reinforce hinge edge on all fire doors to accommodate full-mortise hinges as specified and to provide additional screw holding power when hinge is installed.

C. Cross Bands and Edge Bands: Untreated or fire retardant treated per UL requirements for fire rating shown.

D. Identification: Stamp each door with NWWDA Certification Hallmark.

1. Fire Rated Doors: Provide each door with UL or WHI metal or mylar type labels.

E. Install flush stainless steel edge guards under label procedure. Furnished by section 087100 – Door Hardware.

F. Install Electro Lynx wiring and Molex. Type connectors under label procedure. Furnished by section 087100 – Door Hardware.

2.7 VISION PANEL FRAMES

A. General: Provide where shown; square profile moldings, unless otherwise shown.

B. Standard Doors:

1. General: Solid stock hardwood; flush type, unless otherwise shown.

2. Transparent Finish: Same grade and species to match face.

C. Glazing Materials: Provided under Section 088000 – Glazing.

2.8 GLASS AND GLAZING

A. Vision Glass: Rated and Non-rated vision glass specified in Section 088000 – Glazing.

2.9 SIZES AND CLEARANCES

A. Sizes: As shown; coordinate with installation to determine actual door sizes and clearances.

1. Door Thickness: 1-3/4-inch, unless otherwise shown.



B. Clearances: Maximum 1/8-inch clearance at jambs, heads, and meeting stiles; maximum 1/4-inch clearance over thresholds, and maximum 3/8-inch clearance in openings without thresholds; unless otherwise shown. Bevel vertical edges 1/8-inch per 2 inches.

2.10 PRE-FITTING AND PREMACHINING

A. General: Pre-fit and pre-machine.

B. Pre-fitting: Pre-fit at factory per specified clearances. Provide stile edges with standard bevel or radius as required by hardware.

C. Pre-machining: Coordinate with Section 087100 – Door Hardware, and DIVISION 26 - Electrical Security Requirements, including:

1. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, DHI A115-W Series standards, and hardware templates.

2. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining.

2.11 PRESEALING FOR PAINTED FINISHES

A. Opaque Finished Doors:

1. General: Manufacturer's standard clear sealer or pigmented alkyd base primer sealer; verify compatibility with Section 099123 – Interior Painting.

2. Sealer or Primer Sealer: One coat; apply to top and bottom rails and hardware cutouts.

3. Opaque Finish: Shop or Field Paint as shown on Drawings and as specified in Section 099123 – Interior Painting.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. General: Do not install doors until cementitious work in areas shown to receive wood doors is completed and dry.

B. Environmental Requirements: Condition doors to normal occupancy conditions prior to hanging. Do not subject doors to abnormal heat, dryness, or humidity.

D. Examine doors and substrates, with Installer present, for suitable conditions where wood doors will be installed.



1. Verify that installed frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with plumb jambs and level heads.

2. Reject doors with defects.

3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Cut, trim, and hang doors to fit into frames with specified clearances. Recoat top and bottom edges prior to hanging, if affected by fitting; use same type paint as applied at factory.

B. Prefinished Doors: Cutting, trimming, fitting, and machining not permitted.

C. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.

E. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing.

END OF SECTION


ACCESS PANELS 08 31 13 - 1

SECTION 08 31 13 – ACCESS PANELS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Work Included: Provide and install access panels, complete, as shown on Drawings as specified, and if not shown on Drawings, as required to access mechanical, electrical, plumbing and other equipment in conformance with governing codes and workplace safety guidelines.

1. Ceiling-mounted access panels.


1. Section 092216 – Non-Structural Metal framing

2. Section 092900 - Gypsum Board.

4. Section 099123 – Interior Painting.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Conform to the requirements of Section 013300 – Submittal Requirements.

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications, catalog cuts, and installation instructions. Submit approved test data or State Fire Marshal listing for fire-rated assemblies.

C. Shop Drawings: Show attachment to partition, soffit, and ceiling framing at each typical condition.


A. Delivery and Storage: Deliver and store panels in manufacturer's standard protective packaging.

B. Protection: Do not remove protective packaging until time of installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCESS PANELS FOR CEILINGS

A. Glass Fiber Reinforced Gypsum (GFRG) Types:

1. Manufacturer: Stealth Panels by Wind-lock

2. Non-Rated Gypsum Board Ceilings: Lay-in GFRG panels with rounded corners and matching GFRG frames with tapered edges. Panels to be gasketed to prevent migration of dust particles from



structure above. Provide smooth finish on panel and frame faces.

3. Sizes: 24 inches by 24 inches clear opening size, unless otherwise shown. (See manufacturer’s recommendation for rough opening sizes).

4. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard.

B. Metal Types:

1. Manufacturers: Karp Associates, Inc., Larsen's Manufacturing Co., Milcor, Nystrom, Inc., JL Industries, or equal. Karp specified as standard.

2. Non-Rated Gypsum Board Partitions: Karp Type KDW, flush panel type with frame flanges for joint compound concealment, 16-gauge steel frames and 14-gauge steel doors.

3. Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Partitions: Karp Type KRP-250FR, 16-gauge steel doors and frames. Provide UL label.

4. Exterior Cement Plaster Soffits: Karp Type DSC-210 PL; frame of 13-gauge and door of 16-gauge galvanized steel finished with baked enamel, recessed, and lined with galvanized self-furring steel lath. Provide concealed pivoting rod hinge and key-operated stainless steel lock.


A. General: Provide fastening devices, masonry anchors, casing beads, and other items as required to secure door and frame in place.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verification of Conditions: Examine construction to receive access panels and verify correctness of dimensions and other supporting or adjoining conditions. Do not install panels until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Verify that locations serve portion of work to which access is required.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install, per manufacturer's recommendations, securely to framing in locations required to give access to plumbing, mechanical, electrical, or similar devices concealed in walls or ceilings.

B. GFRG Access Panels: Conceal joint between GFRG frame and gypsum board with tape and joint compound as specified under Section 092900.



C. Coordination: Coordinate with other trades to verify correct sizes and locations of access panels.

3.3 ADJUSTMENT

A. General: Following installation, adjust access panels for smooth operation.

3.4 CLEANING

A. General: Thoroughly clean surface of grease, oil, or other impurities, touch up abraded prime coats and otherwise prepare for finish painting.

END OF SECTION


OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08 33 23 - 1

SECTION 08 33 23 - OVERHEAD COILING DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Counter door in Psych Holding 2.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Operation Cycle: One complete cycle of a door begins with the door in the closed position. The door is then moved to the open position and back to the closed position.


A. Operation-Cycle Requirements: Provide overhead coiling door components and operators capable of operating for not less than 10,000 cycles.


A. Product Data: For each type and size of overhead coiling door and accessory.

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components, profiles for slats, and finishes.

2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished accessories.

3. Include description of automatic-closing device and testing and resetting instructions.

B. Shop Drawings: For each installation and for special components not dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's product data.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting details.2. Include details of equipment assemblies, and indicate dimensions, required

clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

3. Include points of attachment and their corresponding static and dynamic loads imposed on structure.



4. For exterior components, include details of provisions for assembly expansion and contraction and for excluding and draining moisture to the exterior.

5. Show locations of controls, locking devices[, and other accessories.6. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.


A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.

1. Maintenance Proximity: Not more than two hours' normal travel time from Installer's place of business to Project site.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain overhead coiling doors from single source from single manufacturer.

1. Obtain operators and controls from overhead coiling-door manufacturer.

B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:1. Alpine Overhead Doors, Inc.2. The Cookson Company.3. Overhead Door Corporation.4. Roll-Lite Door Corp.; Div. of Clopay Building Products Co.5. Wayne-Dalton Corp.

2.2 DOOR ASSEMBLY

A. Service Door: Overhead coiling door formed with curtain of interlocking metal slats.1. Alpine Overhead Doors, Inc.2. The Cookson Company.3. Overhead Door Corporation.4. Roll-Lite Door Corp.; Div. of Clopay Building Products Co.5. Wayne-Dalton Corp.



B. Operation Cycles: Door components and operators capable of operating for not less than 10,000. One operation cycle is complete when a door is opened from the closed position to the fully open position and returned to the closed position.

1. Include tamperproof cycle counter.

C. Door Curtain Material: Galvanized steel.

D. Door Curtain Slats: Flat profile slats of 1-7/8-inch center-to-center height.

E. Bottom Bar: Manufacturer’s standard continuous channel or tubular shape to suit type of curtain slats.

F. Curtain Jamb Guides: Galvanized steel with exposed finish matching curtain slats.

G. Hood: Match curtain material and finish.

1. Shape: Round.2. Mounting: Between jambs.

H. Locking Devices: Equip door with locking device assembly.

1. Match existing lock in Psych Holding 1.

I. Electric Door Operator:

1. Usage Classification: Standard duty, up to 25 cycles per hour and up to 90 cycles per day.

2. Operator Location: Wall.3. Safety: Listed according to UL 325 by a qualified testing agency for commercial

or industrial use[; moving parts of operator enclosed or guarded if exposed and mounted at 8 feet or lower].

4. Motor Exposure: Interior.5. Motor Electrical Characteristics:

a. Horsepower: Per manufacturer’s recommendation.b. Voltage: Horsepower: Per manufacturer’s recommendation..

6. Emergency Manual Operation: Chain type.7. Obstruction-Detection Device: Automatic electric sensor edge on bottom bar.

8. Control Station(s): Exterior mounted.

J. Door Finish:

1. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coated Finish: Color as indicated by manufacturer's designations.

2. Factory Prime Finish: Manufacturer's standard color.



2.3 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2.4 DOOR CURTAIN MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION

A. Door Curtains: Fabricate overhead coiling-door curtain of interlocking metal slats, designed to withstand wind loading indicated, in a continuous length for width of door without splices. Unless otherwise indicated, provide slats of thickness and mechanical properties recommended by door manufacturer for performance, size, and type of door indicated, and as follows:

1. Steel Door Curtain Slats: Zinc-coated (galvanized), cold-rolled structural-steel sheet; complying with ASTM A653/A653M, with G90 (Z275) zinc coating; nominal sheet thickness (coated) of 0.028 inch (0.71 mm); and as required.

B. Curtain Jamb Guides: Manufacturer's standard angles or channels and angles of same material and finish as curtain slats unless otherwise indicated, with sufficient depth and strength to retain curtain, to allow curtain to operate smoothly, and to withstand loading. Slot bolt holes for guide adjustment. Provide removable stops on guides to prevent overtravel of curtain.

2.5 HOODS

A. General: Form sheet metal hood to entirely enclose coiled curtain and operating mechanism at opening head. Contour to fit end brackets to which hood is attached. Roll and reinforce top and bottom edges for stiffness. Form closed ends for surface-mounted hoods and fascia for any portion of between-jamb mounting that projects beyond wall face. Equip hood with intermediate support brackets as required to prevent sagging.

1. Galvanized Steel: Nominal 0.028-inch- (0.71-mm-) thick, hot-dip galvanized-steel sheet with G90 (Z275) zinc coating, complying with ASTM A653/A653M.

2. Stainless Steel: 0.025-inch- (0.64-mm-) thick, stainless steel sheet, Type 304, complying with ASTM A666.

3. Aluminum: 0.040-inch- (1.02-mm-) thick aluminum sheet complying with ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M), of alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated.

4. Include automatic drop baffle on fire-rated doors to guard against passage of smoke or flame.

5. Exterior-Mounted Doors: Fabricate hood to act as weather protection and with a perimeter sealant-joint-bead profile for applying joint sealant.

B. Removable Metal Soffit: Formed or extruded from same metal and with same finish as curtain if hood is mounted above ceiling unless otherwise indicated.



2.6 LOCKING DEVICES

A. Slide Bolt: Fabricate with side-locking bolts to engage through slots in tracks for locking by padlock, located on both left and right jamb sides, operable from coil side.

B. Locking Device Assembly: Fabricate with cylinder lock, spring-loaded dead bolt, operating handle, cam plate, and adjustable locking bars to engage through slots in tracks.

C. Chain Lock Keeper: Suitable for padlock.

D. Safety Interlock Switch: Equip power-operated doors with safety interlock switch to disengage power supply when door is locked.

2.7 CURTAIN ACCESSORIES

A. Astragal for Interior Doors: Equip each door bottom bar with a replaceable, adjustable, continuous, compressible gasket of flexible vinyl, rubber, or neoprene as a cushion bumper.

B. Push/Pull Handles: Equip each push-up-operated or emergency-operated door with lifting handles on each side of door, finished to match door.

2.8 COUNTERBALANCE MECHANISM

A. General: Counterbalance doors by means of manufacturer's standard mechanism with an adjustable-tension, steel helical torsion spring mounted around a steel shaft and contained in a spring barrel connected to top of curtain with barrel rings. Use grease-sealed bearings or self-lubricating graphite bearings for rotating members.

B. Counterbalance Barrel: Fabricate spring barrel of manufacturer's standard hot-formed, structural-quality, seamless carbon-steel pipe, of sufficient diameter and wall thickness to support rolled-up curtain without distortion of slats and to limit barrel deflection to not more than 0.03 in./ft. (2.5 mm/m) of span under full load.

C. Counterbalance Spring: One or more oil-tempered, heat-treated steel helical torsion springs. Size springs to counterbalance weight of curtain, with uniform adjustment accessible from outside barrel. Secure ends of springs to barrel and shaft with cast-steel barrel plugs.

1. Fire-Rated Doors: Equip with auxiliary counterbalance spring and prevent tension release from main counterbalance spring when automatic-closing device operates.

D. Torsion Rod for Counterbalance Shaft: Fabricate of manufacturer's standard cold-rolled steel, sized to hold fixed spring ends and carry torsional load.

E. Brackets: Manufacturer's standard mounting brackets of either cast iron or cold-rolled steel plate.



2.9 ELECTRIC DOOR OPERATORS

A. General: Electric door operator assembly of size and capacity recommended and provided by door manufacturer for door and operation-cycles requirement specified, with electric motor and factory-prewired motor controls, starter, gear-reduction unit, solenoid-operated brake, clutch, control stations, control devices, integral gearing for locking door, and accessories required for proper operation.

1. Comply with NFPA 70.2. Control equipment complying with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and NEMA ICS 6,

with NFPA 70 Class 2 control circuit, maximum 24-V ac or dc.

B. Usage Classification: Electric operator and components capable of operating for not less than number of cycles per hour indicated for each door.

C. Door Operator Location(s): Operator location indicated for each door.1. Through-Wall Mounted: Operator is mounted on other side of wall from coil side of

door.

D. Motors: Reversible-type motor with controller (disconnect switch) for motor exposure indicated for each door assembly.

1. Electrical Characteristics: Minimum as indicated for each door assembly. If not indicated, large enough to start, accelerate, and operate door in either direction from any position, at a speed not less than 8 in./sec. (203 mm/s) and not more than 12 in./sec. (305 mm/s), without exceeding nameplate ratings or service factor.

2. Operating Controls, Controllers, Disconnect Switches, Wiring Devices, and Wiring: Manufacturer's standard unless otherwise indicated.

3. Coordinate wiring requirements and electrical characteristics of motors and other electrical devices with building electrical system and each location where installed.

E. Limit Switches: Equip each motorized door with adjustable switches interlocked with motor controls and set to automatically stop door at fully opened and fully closed positions.

F. Obstruction-Detection Devices: External entrapment protection consisting of indicated automatic safety sensor capable of protecting full width of door opening. For non-fire-rated doors, activation of device immediately stops and reverses downward door travel.

1. Photoelectric Sensor: Manufacturer's standard system designed to detect an obstruction in door opening without contact between door and obstruction.

a. Self-Monitoring Type: Designed to interface with door operator control circuit to detect damage to or disconnection of sensing device. When self-monitoring feature is activated, door closes only with sustained or constant pressure on close button.

2. Electric Sensor Edge: Automatic safety sensor edge, located within astragal or weather stripping mounted to bottom bar. Contact with sensor activates device.



Connect to control circuit using manufacturer's standard take-up reel or self-coiling cable.

a. Self-Monitoring Type: Four-wire-configured device designed to interface with door operator control circuit to detect damage to or disconnection of sensor edge.

3. Pneumatic Sensor Edge: Automatic safety sensor edge, located within astragal or weather stripping mounted to bottom bar. Contact with sensor activates device.

G. Control Station: Three-button control station in fixed location with momentary-contact push-button controls labeled "Open" and "Stop" and sustained- or constant-pressure push-button control labeled "Close."

1. Interior-Mounted Units: Full-guarded, surface-mounted, heavy-duty type, with general-purpose NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure.

2. Exterior-Mounted Units: Full-guarded, standard-duty, surface-mounted, weatherproof type, NEMA ICS 6, Type 4 enclosure, key operated.

H. Emergency Manual Operation: Equip each electrically powered door with capability for emergency manual operation. Design manual mechanism so required force for door operation does not exceed 25.

I. Emergency Operation Disconnect Device: Equip operator with hand-operated disconnect mechanism for automatically engaging manual operator and releasing brake for emergency manual operation while disconnecting motor without affecting timing of limit switch. Mount mechanism so it is accessible from floor level. Include interlock device to automatically prevent motor from operating when emergency operator is engaged.

J. Motor Removal: Design operator so motor may be removed without disturbing limit-switch adjustment and without affecting emergency manual operation.

K. Audible and Visual Signals: Audible alarm and visual indicator lights in compliance with the accessibility standard.

2.10 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with NAAMM/NOMMA 500 for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

2.11 STEEL AND GALVANIZED-STEEL FINISHES

A. Factory Prime Finish: Manufacturer's standard primer, compatible with field-applied finish. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, pretreatment, application, and minimum dry film thickness.



B. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, pretreatment, application, and minimum dry film thickness.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for substrate construction and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine locations of electrical connections.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install overhead coiling doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports; according to manufacturer's written instructions and as specified.

B. Install overhead coiling doors, hoods, controls, and operators at the mounting locations indicated for each door.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and to furnish reports to Architect.

B. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Test door release, closing, and alarm operations when activated by smoke detector or building's fire-alarm system. Test manual operation of closed door. Reset door-closing mechanism after successful test.

C. Repair or remove and replace installations where inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.

D. Reinspect repaired or replaced installations to determine if replaced or repaired door assembly installations comply with specified requirements.

3.4 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.



1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

2. After electrical circuitry has been energized, operate doors to confirm proper motor rotation and door performance.

3. Test and adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust hardware and moving parts to function smoothly so that doors operate easily, free of warp, twist, or distortion.

B. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts as recommended by manufacturer.

C. Adjust seals to provide tight fit around entire perimeter.

3.6 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, maintenance service shall include 12 months' full maintenance by skilled employees of coiling-door Installer. Include quarterly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper door operation. Parts and supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies.

1. Perform maintenance, including emergency callback service, during normal working hours.

2. Include 24-hour-per-day, seven-day-per-week, emergency callback service.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain overhead coiling doors.



GLAZING 08 80 00 - 1

SECTION 08 80 00 – GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Furnish labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services for Interior Glass and Glazing in accordance with provisions of Contract Documents.

B. Completely coordinate with work of other trades.


A. Glass Standards:1. ANSI Z97.1.2. CPSC 16 CFR 1201.3. GANA Glazing Manual.

B. Flat Glass ASTM C1036.1. Float glass: Type I, Quality q3 and Class 1 unless otherwise indicated. 2. Figured glass: Type II, Quality q7, Form 3 and Class 1, Finish f1 and Pattern p2 unless

otherwise indicated.3. Mirror glass and one-way vision glass: Type I, Quality q1 or q2, Class 1 and coated

for purpose.

C. Flat Glass, Heat Treated, Coated and Uncoated, ASTM C1048.1. Heat strengthened glass: Kind HS, Type I, Quality q3, Class 1 and Condition A unless

otherwise indicated.2. Tempered glass: Kind FT, Type I, Quality q3, Class 1 and Condition A unless

otherwise indicated.

D. Mirror Glass: 1. ASTM C1503; 2. Quality: Mirror select.3. F.S.DD-M-00411B (1).

E. Fire-Rated Assemblies: 1. General:

a. Where glazing products are used in fire-rated assemblies, comply with requirements of specific assembly specified in other sections of these Specifications.

b. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL):1) UL 9 – Fire Tests of Window Assemblies.2) UL 10B – Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.3) UL 10C – Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.

c. Fire Protective Rated Glass: Each lite shall bear permanent, non-removable label of UL certifying it for use in tested and rated fire protective assemblies.

2. Door Assemblies: a. Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting

agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252.

b. Positive Pressure Compliance: UL 10C.c. Fire Protective Glazing Products for Door Assemblies: Products identical to those

tested per UL 10B, labeled and listed by UL.


GLAZING 08 80 00 - 2

3. Window Assemblies:a. Complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting

agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257.

b. Positive Pressure Compliance: UL 10C.

F. Laminated Glass: 1. ASTM C1172 Standard Specification for Laminated Architectural Flat Glass.2. Laminated Glass Design Guide, by the Glass Association of North America (GANA).

G. Glazing Standards:1. Glazing Manual, by the Glass Association of North America (GANA).

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Samples:1. Provide one (1) 12 IN x 12 IN example of each specified type of glass.

B. Contract Closeout Information:1. Warranties.

C. Smoke baffle system:1. Shop drawing details, plans and elevations showing supports to building structure,

interface at ceiling, blocking, baffle shoe, cap rail, grommet, cladding, sealant/adhesive, and glass.

2. Product data.3. Standard warranty.4. Installation Instructions

1.4 WARRANTY

A. Written warranty signed by manufacturer or fabricator.

B. Laminated Glass:1. Five (5) years against deterioration including edge separation, delamination that

materially obstructs vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated-glass standard.

C. Fire-rated Ceramics: 1. Five (5) year manufacturer’s standard warranty.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Glass Products:1. Base:

a. AGC Industries.b. Other manufacturers listed under (GLI) on Interior Finish Schedule drawing I-001

2. Optional:a. Guardian Industries.b. Pilkington.c. PPG Industries.d. Saint-Gobain.

B. Fire-rated Glass Ceramic:1. Base:


GLAZING 08 80 00 - 3

a. Technical Glass Products.2. Optional:

a. Safti First.b. Pilkington.c. Saint-Gobain.

C. Radiation-resistant Glass:1. Base:

a. Ray-Bar Engineering Corp.2. Optional:

a. Nelco.b. Corning Inc.c. Schott North America, Inc.d. Radiation Protection Products (RPP).

D. Smoke Baffle System: 1. Base design: CRL / Blumcraft (C.R. Laurence Co. Architectural Products)2. Optional: Approved equal.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Glass Materials:1. Comply with indicated standards.2. See Glass Types Schedule for listing of types.3. Materials specified in Glass Types Schedules are minimum acceptable products.4. Single manufacturer produce individual glass types used in fabrication of insulating

units.5. Manufacturer or fabricator determine if materials should be heat strengthened or

fully tempered at non-hazardous locations that do not require safety glazing and provide accordingly.

B. Glazing Compounds:1. Nonsag, nonstain type.2. Pigmented to match frame units not requiring painting.3. Compatible with adjacent surfaces.4. For use in setting glass: Neutral-cure Silicone sealant.5. Sealants:

a. Sealants shall have a VOC content no greater than 250 g/L.b. Sealants shall contain no carcinogen or reproductive toxicant components

present at more than 1% of total mass of the product as defined in the California Office of Environmental Health Hazard Assessment’s (OEHHA) list entitled “Chemicals Known to the State to Cause Cancer” or the Reproductive Toxicity, Safe Drinking Water and Toxic Enforcement Act of 1986 (Proposition 65).

6. Sealant tape: a. Butyl rubber sealant tape or ribbon having a continuous neoprene shim.

7. Gaskets:a. Polyvinyl chloride or neoprene.b. Extruded, flexible, of profile and hardness required to receive glass and provide

a watertight installation.

C. Installation Setting Blocks and Spacers:1. Neoprene, compatible with sealants used.2. Setting blocks: 80-90 durometer.3. Spacers: 40-50 durometer.


GLAZING 08 80 00 - 4

4. Compressible filler stock: Closed cell jacketed rod stock of synthetic rubber or plastic foam.

5. Shims, clips, springs, angles, beads, attachment screws and other miscellaneous items: As indicated or required.

2.3 GLASS TYPES SCHEDULE

A. Refer to Interior Glass Types Schedule and Interior Finish Schedule for basic description of Mark Numbers indicated on Drawing.

B. Refer to Drawings for depiction of unit sizes and locations.

C. Upgrade basic type conditions in accordance with following rules:1. Heat treatment upgrade based on physical size of unit:

a. Heat strengthened or fully tempered units between 55 and 70 SF.b. Fully temper units exceeding 70 SF.c. Strengthen annealed glass where units exceed length or width limitations or

both as recommended by glass manufacturer.2. Heat treatment upgrade based on locations which are potentially hazardous to

occupants:a. Upgrade units to fully tempered, Kind FT, glass as required by any one of

following:1) When required by local Codes.2) When specifically indicated on Drawings.3) Locations requiring Safety Glass, Kind FT, by 16 CFR 1201 and ANSI Z97.1:

a) Units installed in doors, sash, transom or other operable units.b) Units where any part of unit is within 18 IN, measured vertically, above a

floor line, sidewalk, paver, or other walking surface located within 3 FT of the glass unit, measured horizontally.

4) Units in sidelights and other units located adjacent to and within 48 IN of either jamb of door or other operable units; this includes adjacent lites that are in perpendicular plane to door.

3. Other conditions requiring heat treatment upgrades:a. Units which will be exposed to irregular sun or shade combinations or both shall

be Kind HS or better.b. Where glass manufacturer recommends heat treatment coatings or tints

specified.c. Where required to resist lateral loads.

2.4 INTERIOR GLASS TYPES

A. Annealed:1. Clear float, 6mm (1/4 IN) thick.

B. Tempered:1. Clear, fully-tempered tongue-less float, 6mm (1/4 IN) thick.

C. Laminated Fire and Safety Glass, 8mm:1. Laminated, wireless, UL labeled for assembly indicated.2. Impact-Safety Rated per ANSI Z97.1 and CPSC 16CFR1201.3. Thickness: 8mm (5/16 IN), laminated.4. Surface: Polished.5. Base Product: FireLite Plus by Technical Glass Products.

D. Mirror Glass:1. Color: Clear.


GLAZING 08 80 00 - 5

2. Thickness: 6mm (1/4 IN).3. Unit Length and Width: As indicated on drawings.4. Annealed5. Tempered.

E. Radiation-Resistant Glazing:1. Composition: Lead-barium, polished float glass containing not less than 60 percent

heavy metal oxides, including not less than 48 percent lead oxide by weight.2. Color: Clear.3. Provide glass units of sufficient thickness to provide same radiation shielding as

adjacent wall areas. Provide single or multiple plies as necessary.

F. Laminated, Heat-Strengthened Glass:1. Laminated safety glass complying with ANSI Z97.1 and CPSC 16 CFR 1201, consisting

of 2 sheets of heat strengthened float glass ASTM C1036, and 60 mil interlayer.

2.5 SMOKE BAFFLE SYSTEM

A. Smoke Baffle, 1/2 IN tempered glass smoke curtain. System includes:1. Mounting brackets;2. Snap in inserts, pins inserts, bushings, cladding and mounting screws, as required.3. 1/2 IN flat polished glass edges, at vertical and horizontal exposed surfaces.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Examine framing or glazing channel surfaces, backing, stop design, and conditions under which glazing is to be installed.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Do not install glass with edge damage.

B. Contractor is responsible for correct glass size for each opening, within tolerances and dimensions established.

C. Comply with recommendations of manufacturers, except where more stringent requirements are indicated.

D. Comply with GANA Glazing Manual.

E. Install sealants as recommended by sealant manufacturer.

F. Install setting blocks in adhesive or sealant.

G. Provide spacers inside and out, of proper size and spacing, for glass size, except where gaskets are used for glazing.

H. Minimum Bite:1. Monolithic, 6mm (1/4 IN) glass: 3/8 IN minimum bite.2. For other sizes: Refer to Table C of AAMA’s Aluminum Curtain Wall Design Manual,

Volume 6, Glass and Glazing.

I. Sealant Depth: Equal to sealant width.

J. Prevent sealant exudation from glazing channels.1. Leave void at heel or install filler at jambs and head.2. Do not leave void or install filler at sill.


GLAZING 08 80 00 - 6

K. Miter cut and bond gasket ends together at corners.

L. Immediately after installation, attach crossed streamers to framing held away from glass.

M. Do not apply anything to surfaces of glass.

N. Install spandrel units from exterior of building.

O. Installation of Mirrors:1. Mastic Attachment: Install mirrors with mirror adhesive applied to back of mirror and

pressed against substrate as recommended by mirror supplier.

P. Remove and replace damaged glass.

Q. Installation smoke baffle systems:1. Install in accordance with approved shop drawings.2. Follow manufacturers installation instructions.

3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Wash and polish glass on both faces not more than 7 days prior to final completion of work in each area.

B. Comply with glass manufacturer's recommendations and GANA 01-0300.

END OF SECTION


NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16 - 1

SECTION 09 22 16 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board assemblies.2. Suspension systems for interior gypsum ceilings, soffits, and grid systems.

B. Related Requirements:1. Section 054000 "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for exterior and interior load-bearing

and exterior non-load-bearing wall studs; floor joists; roof rafters and ceiling joists; and roof trusses.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non-load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless

otherwise indicated.2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 (Z120) hot-dip galvanized unless

otherwise indicated.



B. Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. Use either steel studs and runners or dimpled steel studs and runners.

1. Steel Studs and Runners (or Dimpled Steel Studs and Runners):a. Thickness: 30 Mil (structural); minimum, unless noted otherwise. Use 16 GA

studs at lead lined walls. b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

C. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following:1. Single Long-Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch- (51-mm-)

deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction fit into top runner and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches (305 mm) of the top of studs to provide lateral bracing.

2. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.

D. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated.1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings.

E. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, 0.053-inch (1.34-mm) minimum base-metal thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges.1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm).2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches (38 by 38 mm), 0.068-inch- (1.72-

mm-) thick, galvanized steel.

F. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.033 inch (0.84 mm).2. Depth: 7/8 inch (22.2 mm).

G. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmission.1. Configuration: hat shaped.

H. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.053-inch (1.34-mm) uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges.1. Depth: 3/4 inch (19 mm).2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum

uncoated-steel thickness of 0.033 inch (0.8 mm).3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- (1.59-

mm-) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire.

2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- (1.59-mm-) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire.

B. Hanger Attachments to Concrete:1. Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with holes or loops for

attaching wire hangers and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal



to 5 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 by an independent testing agency.a. Type: Post-installed, expansion anchor.

2. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with clips or other devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190 by an independent testing agency.

C. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch (4.12 mm) in diameter.

D. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 0.053 inch (1.34 mm) and minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges.1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm).

E. Furring Channels (Furring Members):1. Cold-Rolled Channels: 0.053-inch (1.34-mm) uncoated-steel thickness, with

minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges, 3/4 inch (19 mm) deep.2. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.033 inch (0.84 mm), unless noted otherwise.

b. Depth: 1-5/8 inches (41 mm) unless noted otherwise.3. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch (22 mm) deep.

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.033 inch (0.84 mm).4. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) deep members designed to reduce

sound transmission.a. Configuration: hat shaped.

F. Grid Suspension System for Gypsum Board Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock.1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Drywall Grid Systems.b. Chicago Metallic Corporation; Drywall Grid System.c. USG Corporation; Drywall Suspension System.

2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding

power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=228&mf=04&mf=95&src=wd&mf=04&src=wd

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456814688&mf=04&&mf=04&src=wd






3.2 PREPARATION

A. Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and that hangers will develop their full strength.

1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation in advance of time needed for coordination and construction.


A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754.1. Gypsum Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 841 that

apply to framing installation.2. Portland Cement Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in

ASTM C 1063 that apply to framing installation.3. Gypsum Veneer Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 844

that apply to framing installation.4. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that

apply to framing installation.

B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.

C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.

D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently.

3.4 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES

A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.1. Single-Layer Application: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated.2. Multilayer Application: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated.3. Tile Backing Panels: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated.

B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.

C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.

D. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling.



1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies.

2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated.b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum

1/2-inch (13-mm) clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly.

c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure.

3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads.

4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure.a. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-

resistance-rated assembly indicated.5. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly

indicated.6. Curved Partitions:

a. Bend track to uniform curve and locate straight lengths so they are tangent to arcs.

b. Begin and end each arc with a stud, and space intermediate studs equally along arcs. On straight lengths of no fewer than two studs at ends of arcs, place studs 6 inches (150 mm) o.c.

E. Direct Furring:1. Screw to wood framing.2. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry

attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c.

3.5 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.1. Hangers: 48 inches (1219 mm) o.c.2. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): 48 inches (1219 mm) o.c.3. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 16 inches (406 mm) o.c.

B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.

C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within

ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system.



a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of unistrut or equivalent devices.

3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.

4. Flat Hangers: Secure to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.

5. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck.6. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger

inserts that extend through forms.7. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck.8. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.

D. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports.

E. Seismic Bracing: Sway-brace suspension systems with hangers used for support.

F. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track.

G. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.6 m) measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes.

END OF SECTION


ACOUSTICAL INSULATION 09 22 20 - 1

SECTION 09 22 20 – ACOUSTICAL INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Provide materials, fabrications and installation of acoustical insulation and associated accessories.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with requirements of Section 013300 – Submittal Procedures.

B. Manufacturer's product data and literature describing each type of insulation.


A. Regulatory Requirements:

1. Insulation shall be certified by the manufacturer to comply with California standards for insulating materials.

2. Insulating materials shall be installed in compliance with Flame Spread Rating and Smoke Density requirements of IBC.

B. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide insulation materials whose fire performance characteristics have been determined per the ASTM test method indicated below. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization.

1. Surface Burning Characteristic: ASTM E84

2. Fire Resistance Ratings: ASTM E119

3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E136

C. Single Source Responsibility for Insulation Products: Obtain each type of building insulation from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work.


A. Comply with requirements of Section 016000 – Product Requirements.

B. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers bearing identification of manufacturer's name, thermal resistance rating, and fiber materials. Maintain seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use.

C. Keep materials dry by storing off ground under watertight covers.




A. Comply with requirements of Section 013100 – Project Management and Coordination.

B. Do not install insulation until construction has progressed to a point that inclement weather will not damage or wet insulation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Acoustical Insulation: Unfaced, friction-fit, flexible sound attenuation batt of fiberglass.

1. Provide thermal resistance rating of R-13, Unless otherwise shown.

2. Comply with requirements of ASTM C 665-84, Type I.

3. Manufacturers: Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corp. "Unfaced Fiberglass Insulation, "Schuller- "Unfaced Fiberglass Insulation" or Certainteed Products Corp. "Rigid Fit Unfaced Fiberglass Insulation."

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Electrical Box Acoustical Sealer: Resilient sealer pads; "Electrical Box Pads" manufactured by 3M, or approved equivalent.

B. Insulation Support: String wire, staples, nails as required.

C. Stick Fasteners: Rust-resistant metal fasteners and washers adhesively applied to substrate. Stic-Klip Mfg. Co. "Type A or N" with Speed Washers or Miracle Adhesives Corp. "Stuk-Ups, Prong or Spindle and Washer".

D. Adhesive for Stick Fasteners: Type as recommended by fastener manufacturer.

E. Sealing Tape: Type as recommended by the thermal insulation manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to receive insulation for conditions that will adversely affect installation and performance.

B. Do not start work until defects have been corrected.

C. Coordination: Ensure that all work that will be concealed by the work of this Section, such as electrical and plumbing work, that require inspection, have received all required inspections and been accepted by the inspecting authority.



3.2 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION

A. General Requirements:

1. Comply with insulation manufacturer's instructions applicable to products and application indicated. If printed instructions are not available or do not apply to project conditions, consult manufacturer's technical representative for specific recommendations before proceeding with installation of insulation.

2. Install insulation to fit snugly between framing members and around pipes, conduits, and outlet boxes as necessary to maintain integrity of insulation.

3. Provide means to prevent displacement where required.

B. Acoustical Insulation:

1. Fill spaces between studs with acoustical insulation.

2. Cover rear surface of all recessed mechanical and electrical outlet boxes with outlet box acoustical isolation pad.

3.3 DEFECTIVE WORK

A. Remove any wet insulation or material deemed defective by the Architect, and replace with new material.

B. Restore other work to original condition which was damaged by repair or replacement of defective insulation work.

C. Remove damaged materials from project.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. General: Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes.

B. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation will be subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.

END OF SECTION


GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 1

SECTION 09 29 00 – GYPSUM BOARD

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Work Included: Provide and Install gypsum board panels and cementitious panels, complete as shown, including finishing materials and accessories.

1. Interior gypsum board walls, ceilings and soffits:

a. Fire/smoke-rated assemblies.

b. Acoustic assemblies.

c. Water-resistant assemblies.

d. Impact-resistant gypsum board wall assemblies.

e. General wall assemblies, including multi-layer assemblies to facilitate reveals and other decorative features.

f. Cementitious backer board for interior tile assemblies.

2. Interior finishing materials and accessories:

a. Tapes, joint treatments, and coating materials to prepare wall surfaces for painting by others.

b. Corner beads, reveals, and other trims.

c. Neoprene tapes for sealing to work by others.

d. Fasteners, adhesives and sealants.

e. Special trim and accessories.

3. Projectile Resistant Backing: ballistic-proof fiberglass backing for Pharmacy wall assemblies and where shown on Drawings.


1. Section 092216 – Non-Structural Metal Framing.

4. Section 093000 – Tile.

5. Section 072400 – Exterior Insulation and Finish System (EIFS).

6. Section 099123 – Interior Painting.

1.2 SUBMITTALS




B. Provide manufacturers' data describing products and installations.


A. Comply with the latest edition of the following standards:

1. American Society for Testing and Materials ASTM C 840, Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board.

2. Gypsum Association (GA) File Numbers in GA-600 Fire Resistance Design Manual.

B. Fire rated gypsum board systems shall satisfy minimum fire ratings as noted and shall conform to methods approved by applicable Building Code.

C. Tolerances of Installed Trims and Accessories:

1. Horizontal Variation from Level: 1/8-inch in 12 feet.

2. Vertical Variation from Plumb: 1/8-inch in 8 feet.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING


B. Deliver materials to the project site with manufacturers' labels intact and legible.

C. Keep materials dry by storing inside building and fully protect from weather.

D. Stack gypsum board neatly and flat, with care to avoid damage to edges, ends and surfaces.


A. Environmental Requirements: Establish and maintain application and finishing environment in accordance with ASTM C 840.

B. Provide adequate ventilation to eliminate excessive moisture within building during this work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS - INTERIOR APPLICATIONS

A. Interior Gypsum Board: Use 5/8-inch-thick, Type ‘X’ gypsum board throughout, unless otherwise noted.

1. Typical Finish Board, use throughout unless otherwise noted. ASTM C 36, Type X; tapered, or beveled taper edge, 48 inches wide by maximum length to minimize number of joints.



2. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Provide USG's Fiberock Brand "Aqua-Tough"; Georgia-Pacific (GP) "DensShield Tile Guard"; Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Board through core gypsum board panels per ASTM C 1178, Type FRX-G; tapered, or beveled taper edge, 48 inches wide by maximum length to minimize number of joints.

a. Locations: Use at high humidity/moisture locations, including HSKP rooms, Kitchen and Servery areas.

3. High Abuse, Impact Resistant Board: Provide National Gypsum Hi-Abuse Kal-Kore, USG's Fiberock Brand "Aqua-Tough". 5/8-inch-thick, ASTM C1278, Type X; fiber reinforced gypsum panels; tapered, or beveled taper edge, 48 inches wide by maximum length to minimize number of joints.

a. Gypsum core wall panel with additives to enhance surface indentation resistance, and impact resistance of the core and surface with abrasion-resistant paper on front and long edges with heavy liner paper bonded to the back side and conforming to ASTM C36.

b. Impact Resistance: No failure after 100 impacts when tested in accordance with ASTM E695, modified.

c. Indentation Resistance: Not less than the following loads to produce the indicated depth of the surface indentation when tested in accordance with ASTM D1037, modified:

1) 0.100-inch at 260 pounds.

2) 0.200-inch at 524 pounds.

d. Locations: Typical all corridors from finished floor to 48 inches above finished floor.

4. 1/4-inch Flexible Type: Provide board manufactured to bend to fit tighter radii than specified regular-type gypsum board.

a. Provide only at non-rated curved layouts that exceed maximum allowable bending radii of specified standard thickness gypsum board.

b. Thickness: 1/4 inch. Provide minimum 2 layer application with staggered joints.

c. Long Edges: Tapered.

5. Early-install/Concealed locations (Contractor Option): Provide Georgia Pacific DensGlass Ultra Shaft and DensAmor Plus in conformance with ASTM D 3273; products inherently mold and mildew resistant for use in shaftwalls, concealed locations above finished ceilings, internal layers of multi-layer assemblies and other locations approved by Architect to allow installation before the building enclosure is 100-percent complete.



a. Use at Shaft-side of shaft assemblies and any location where early install is required prior to closing in of the building.

B. Cementitious Backer Board: Per ANSI A108.1; Provide Custom Building Product's "Wonderboard"; USG's "Durock Cement Board". Panels of high-density portland cement surface coating on both faces of lightweight portland cement and expanded ceramic aggregate core, nominal 5/8-inch-thick and 3.2 to 3.8 pounds per square foot.

1. General: Provide as shown on Drawings for tile assemblies specified in Section 093000 – Tile. (Typical at all toilets/restrooms) At fire-rated wall assemblies and inside faces of exterior walls, apply over gypsum board base layer.

C Acoustically enhanced Gypsum Wallboard Composite:

a. Two-ply high density, mold resistant, paper faced gypsum wallboard laminated together with viscoelastic dampening polymer.b. Composite Thickness 5/8 inchesc. Fire-resistance, Type X gypsum cored. Base Product: Quite Rock ES by PABCO Gypsum OR Sound Break XP by National Gypsum Company

D. Interior Joint Finishing Materials:

1. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.

2. Joint Tape:

a. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper.

b. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.

3. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.

a. Prefilling: At open joints, beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound.

b. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting-type taping or drying-type, all-purpose compound as recommended by the manufacturer to obtain best results from actual project conditions.

1) Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.

c. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.

d. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.



e. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.

4. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels:

a. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Use setting-type taping compound and setting-type, sandable topping compound.

b. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: As recommended by backing panel manufacturer.

c. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by backer unit manufacturer.

E. Fasteners:

1. Screws: ASTM C 954 or ASTM C 1002 self-drilling and self-tapping steel screws with double-lead thread design as approved by system manufacturer for standard and heavier gauge load bearing steel framing.

2. Nails: ASTM C 514, annular ring type as approved by system manufacturer.

3. Staples: Galvanized, as recommended to approved accessory manufacturer.

F. Metal Backing: Refer to Section 092216 – Non-Structural Metal Framing.

G. Metal Accessories: ASTM C 1047 Electro-galvanized steel corner beads and trim (casing beads) formed for application of joint cement and manufactured specifically for gypsum board construction, minimum base steel 0.014 inch thick.

H. Special Trims and Accessories:

1. General: Provide extruded aluminum trims and accessories in conforming to profiles and shapes as shown on Drawings and as specified.

a. Provide double-layer gypsum board assemblies at locations shown on Drawings to receive recessed reveal trims.

b. Material: Extruded aluminum alloy 6063 T5.

c. Manufacturer: Provide products manufactured by Gordon, Fry Reglet Company, Flannery Company, or equal.

a. Accessories: For each trim profile noted below, provide factory fabricated where required by layouts shown on Drawings, including:

1) Mitered assemblies for "T-intersections" and "X-intersections".



2) Finished end caps.

2. Partition "End Cap" Trims: Provide for providing finished ends to gypsum board walls including chemical conversion coating. Typical where gypsum board walls butt mullions of window or window wall assemblies, allowing attachment of partition cap to mullion prior to construction of gypsum board wall.

a. Overall Width: Provide width matched to partition assembly, including:

1) 4-inch stud walls with 5/8-inch gypsum board each side.


b. Tape/screw Flanges: Nominal 7/8-inch.

c. Manufacturer: Provide "910 Series" Final Forms by Gordon or equivalent products manufactured by Fry Reglet Company, Flannery Company, or equal.

3. Reveal "Top Track" Trim: Provide for top of wall or partial height partition top cap termination where shown on Drawings.

a. Reveal Depth: Nominal 5/8-inch for use with 5/8-inch gypsum board panels.

b. Reveal Width: As shown on Drawings.

c. Overall Width: Provide width matched to partition assembly, including:



d. Tape/screw Flanges: Nominal 7/8-inch.

e. Manufacturer: Provide "922 Series" Final Forms by Gordon or equivalent products manufactured by Fry Reglet Company, Flannery Company, or equal.

4. Reveal "Field" Trims: Provide for creating square-edged vertical and horizontal reveal lines in gypsum board wall assemblies where shown on Drawings.

a. Depth: Nominal 5/8-inch for use with 5/8-inch gypsum board panels.


c. Tape/crew Flanges: Nominal 7/8-inch.

d. Manufacturer: Provide "500 Series" double-sided Final Forms



reveals by Gordon or equivalent products manufactured by Fry Reglet Company, Flannery Company, or equal.

5. Reveal "Edge" Trim: Provide for finished vertical and horizontal reveal edges at top and sides of gypsum board panels where shown on Drawings.



c. Tape/screw Flanges: Nominal 7/8-inch.

d. Manufacturer: Provide "200 Series" Final Forms by Gordon or equivalent products manufactured by Fry Reglet Company, Flannery Company, or equal.

6. Reveal "Base" Trim: Provide for recessed base at bottom of gypsum board panels at floor where shown on Drawings.


b. Reveal Width: 4-inches.

c. Tape/screw Flanges: Nominal 7/8-inch.

d. Manufacturer: Provide "800 Series" Final Forms by Gordon or equivalent products manufactured by Fry Reglet Company, Flannery Company, or equal.

7. Special Fabrications: Provide factory fabricated mitered assemblies for "T-intersections" and "X-intersections" where shown on Drawings.

8. Finish: Special trims to be primed and painted to match adjacent wall surfaces as specified in Section 099123 – Interior Painting.

I. Adhesive for Laminating Board: As recommended by approved board manufacturer.

J. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Section 079200 – Joint Sealants.

K. Electrical Box Sealer:

a. Non-rated Locations: As specified in Section 079200 – Joint Sealants.

b. Fire-rated Locations: As specified in Section 078413 – Penetration Firestopping.

L. Concealed, Non-Rated Access Panels: As specified in Section 08310 – Access Panels.

PART 3 - EXECUTION



3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Inspect areas and surfaces scheduled to receive gypsum board and verify that:

1. Support systems are in proper alignment, straight and true.

2. Required blocking, bracing and backing members of support systems are installed.

B. Do not start work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate details with other work supporting, adjoining, or fastening to gypsum board.

3.4 INSTALLATION - INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD


1. Apply and finish gypsum board in accordance with requirements of ASTM C 840 unless otherwise noted.

2. Cut gypsum board by scoring and breaking or sawing from face side. Smooth all cut edges and ends of gypsum board where necessary, in order to obtain neat jointing.

3. Scribe ceiling board neatly in casing bead where it meets surfaces in other planes.

4. Apply first to the ceiling at right angles to framing members, then to walls. Use boards of maximum practical length so that a minimum number of end joints occur.

5. Apply in either vertical or horizontal direction with ends and edges falling on framing members or other solid backing except where edge joints are at right angles to support. Bring ends and edges into contact with adjoining board, but do not force into place.

6. Lay out joints at openings so that no end joint aligns with edges of opening unless control joints will be installed at these points.

a. All joints running parallel to framing shall be centered as near as possible on face of framing member.

b. Stagger end joints and arrange joints on opposite sides of partition to occur on different studs.

c. At external corners, butt and fit board to provide solid edge.

7. Hold gypsum board nominal 1/4-inch above floor or curb typical.

8. Where gypsum board is carried full height to structure above, provide



for deflection of structure by undercutting board nominal 3/8 inch and seal top edge of board to structure in continuous bead to form elastic closure.

9. Cut board to fit electrical outlets, pipes, or other items as required.

a. Cut gypsum board by scoring on face and back in outline before removal or by cutting with a saw or other suitable tool.

b. Smooth all cut out where necessary.

10. After trim is applied and prior to decoration, correct surface damage and defects.

11. Provide gypsum backer board gusset at double stud walls where studs are less than 3-5/8 inches thick.

12. Fastening:

a. Attach board from center to edges and ends, pressing firmly against supports. Place fasteners approximately not more than 1 inch nor less than 3/8 inch from edges with heads just below gypsum board surfaces; but do not break paper.

b. Walls: Space screws maximum 12 inches on center for ceilings and maximum 16 inches on center for walls in field and along abutting edges.

c. Suspended Ceilings: Space screws maximum 12 inches on center in field and along abutting edges.

B. Curved Surfaces:

1. Install panels horizontally (perpendicular to supports) and unbroken, to extent possible, across curved surface plus 12-inch-long straight sections at ends of curves and tangent to them.

2. 1/4-inch Board Application: For double-layer construction, fasten base layer to studs with screws 16 inches o.c. Center gypsum board face layer over joints in base layer, and fasten to studs with screws spaced 12 inches o.c.

a. Continue double layer 1/4-icnh board application to closest adjacent inside or outside corners. Do not “shim” double board to align with adjacent 5/8 thick gypsum board.

3. Fire-rated Assemblies: Provide in strict conformance with referenced UL-listed assembly. Use on standard thickness type “X” board bent per manufacturer’s written instructions.

C. Joint Treatment:

1. Apply tape and cement to joints and corners in strict accordance with directions of gypsum board manufacturer.



2. Pre-fill V-grooves formed by the abutting beveled or rounded wrapped edges with joint compound as per manufacturing recommendations.

3. Use tape and cement, allow to dry between coats. Use number of coats required by level of finish specified.

4. Work final coat to smooth level plane surface.

5. Protect external corners with metal corner beads unless otherwise noted.

6. Treat fastening head dimples same as joints; tape may be omitted.

7. Joints and fastening head dimples in backer board need only be treated as required to preserve fire rating.

8. Seal joints shown on Drawings and where gypsum board meets dissimilar material with specified sealant. Tool to neat surface, ready for paint; remove excess material.

D. Fire-Rated Conditions:

1. At penetrations of rated assemblies, preserve continuity of fire rating with firestopping systems as specified in Section 07840 – Firestopping and Smoke Seals.

2. Where adjacent interior spaces have suspended ceilings of different heights, extend separating partition finish on both faces of studs to at least 3 inches above higher ceiling finish.

3. Conform to applicable codes and authorities for requirements of taping and cementing joints and fastener heads.

E. Sound Retardant Partitions:

1. Construct partitions in accordance with Drawings and as herein specified.

2. Hold face layers and base layers 1/4 inch clear from abutting surfaces, floors, walls and overhead structure. Seal with specified sealant and tape. Tape not required at floors.

3. Provide airtight closures at wall penetrations (outlet boxes, pipes, duct work and other items) by neatly cutting gypsum board to clear penetrations. Seal void with specified sealant and apply joint tape to both gypsum board and penetrating object.

4. Seal airtight the backs and sides of electrical junction boxes with resilient sealer pads.

F. Furring over Recessed Light Fixtures: At non-rated lighting fixtures, construct furring from gypsum board as indicated on Drawings.



G. Water-Resistant Board: During board application, coat all cut edges with approved water resistant adhesive as recommended by manufacturer for the application.

H. Enclosure System: Install in strict accordance with requirements of approved manufacturer's system using metal components, gypsum components, and other accessories as required.

I. Cementitious Backer Board:

1. General: Install cementitious backer board in strict conformance with the requirements of the tile assemblies specified in Section 093000 – Tile.

2. Provide support systems so that all edges of cementitious backer boards are supported.

3. Use only corrosion-resistant fasteners.

3.5 FINISHING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

A. Levels of Gypsum Board Finish: Provide the following levels of gypsum board finish per USG “Gypsum Construction Handbook, Centennial Edition”.

1. Level 1: for ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated, unless a higher level of finish is required for fire-resistive-rated assemblies and sound-rated assemblies.

2. Level 2: where water-resistant gypsum backing board panels form substrates for tile, and where indicated.

3. Level 3: Not used.

4. Level 4: Not used.

5. Level 5: Typical, for all gypsum board surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

B. Level 4 gypsum board finish: Embed tape in joint compound and apply three separate coats of joint compound over joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories. Touch up and sand between coats and after last coat as needed to produce a surface free of visual defects and ready for decoration. Use the following joint compound combination:

1. Embedding and First Coat: Ready-mixed, drying-type, all-purpose or taping compound.

2. Fill (Second) Coat: Ready-mixed, drying-type, all-purpose or topping compound.

3. Finish (Third) Coat: Ready-mixed, drying-type, all-purpose or topping compound.

C. Where Level 5 gypsum board finish is indicated: apply joint compound combination specified for Level 4 plus a thin, uniform skim coat of joint



compound over entire surface.

1. Use joint compound specified for the finish (third coat) or a product specially formulated for this purpose and acceptable to gypsum board manufacturer.

2. Produce surfaces free of tool marks and ridges ready for decoration of type indicated.

D. Where Level 2 gypsum board finish is indicated, apply joint specified for first coat in addition to embedding coat.

E. Where Level 1 gypsum board finish is indicated, apply joint compound specified for embedding coat.

F. Finish water-resistant gypsum backing board forming base for mortar-set ceramic tile to comply with ASTM C 840 and board manufacturer's directions for treatment of joints behind tile.

G. Impact-Resistant Gypsum Board:

1. Construct partitions in accordance with Drawings and as herein specified.

2. General: Install to a height of no less than 4 feet above finish floor at locations shown on Drawings.

3.6 PARTITION IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify partitions indicated on drawings as having a required fire or smoke rating.

1. Follow guidelines set in Chapter 7 of International Building Code or as locally amended.

2. Permanently identify with stenciling

a. Mininum 6 inches high letters with minimum ½ inch stroke.b. Bottom of lettering to start at 6 inches above ceiling. c. Stenciling to be 10 feet on center max. d. Color : Red for 1-hr rated walls, Blue for 2-hr rated walls, Green

for smoke partition walls.e. Provide in a manner acceptable to authority having jurisdiction.


A. Remedy any fastener popping or ridging.

B. Promptly remove any residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.

C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner suitable to Installer, that ensures gypsum board assemblies remain without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.



END OF SECTION


CEILING SUSPENSION 095100 - 1

SECTION 09 51 00 – CEILING SUSPENSION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Work Included: Provide and install ceiling suspension systems, complete, as shown on Drawings and as specified for the following ceiling finish systems:

1. Gypsum Board Ceilings, coordinated with the Work of Section 09250 – Gypsum Board.

2. Lay-in Acoustical Ceilings, coordinated with the Work of Section 09510 – Acoustical Ceilings.


1. Section 01410 – Testing and Inspection Services


3. Section 08311 – Access Panels.

3. Section 09110 – Interior Wall Framing.

4. Section 09510 – Acoustical Ceilings.

5. Divisions 15 and 16 – Mechanical and Electrical Work in Suspended Ceilings.


A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. C635; Standard Specification for Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panel Ceilings.

2. C754; Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum.

3. C841; Standard Specification for Installation of Interior Furring and Lathing.

4. C1063; Standard Specification for Installation of Lathing and Furring for Portland Cement-Based Plaster.

5. C636; Standard Specification for Installation of Metal Suspension System



for Acoustic Tile and Lay-In Panels.

6. CISCA Ceiling Systems Installation Handbook.

B. International Building Code (IBC) with 2003 Utah Amendments.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Samples:

1. Exposed Suspension System Components: 12-inch-long piece of each item specified.

C. Shop Drawings: Show following:

1. Layout of suspension systems, location of hangers, seismic braces and trapezes, indicating location of fixed and free side of layouts.

2. Hanger spacing and fastening details.

3. Trapeze details.

4. Splicing method for main and cross runners.

5. Support at ceiling fixtures and air diffusers.

6. Change in level details.

7. Locations and dimensions of access panels, light fixtures, supply and exhaust grilles and diffusers, sprinkler heads, speakers, and detection devices.

8. Seismic control details.

9. Develop and coordinate location of all Work which is to be located in ceiling with the Sections involved per Section 01330 – Submittal Procedures prior to making shop drawing submittal.

D. Product Data: Manufacturer's information on materials, fabrication, and installation. Provide certification of flame spread rating and UL classification.


A. Allowable Tolerances:

1. Deflection: Do not exceed a maximum of L/360 of span.

2. Level: Do not deviate from level in excess of 1/8 inch in 12 feet.

B. Testing:



1. If required by local authority, special inspection services may be implemented, refer to Section 01410 – Testing and Inspection Services.

2. Fasteners: As specified in Section 05050 – Metal Fasteners.

1.5 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE

A. Comply with requirements of Section 01315 – Project Meetings.

B. Arrange a conference at the job site to coordinate interior wall, partition and ceiling installation, to be attended by the Owner, Architect, Contractor, and personnel involved in the actual manufacture and installation of the Work of the following Sections:

1. Section 07220 – Acoustical Insulation.

2. Section 07840 – Fire Stopping and Smoke Seals.

3. Section 09110 – Interior Wall Framing.

4. Section 09120 – Ceiling Suspension.

5. Section 09250 – Gypsum Board.

6. Section 09265 – Shaft Wall Systems.

7. Section 09510 – Acoustical Ceilings.

8. DIVISION 15 – Mechanical.

9. DIVISION 16 – Electrical.


A. Delivery: Deliver products and materials in original unopened packages, containers, or bundles with manufacturer's label intact and legible.

B. Damaged Items: Remove items delivered in broken, damaged, rusted, or unlabeled condition from Project site immediately.

C. Manufacturer's Recommendations: Follow additional delivery, storage, and handling requirements of manufacturer.


A. Concealed Work: Ensure that work concealed by suspended ceilings be complete, tested if required, inspected, and approved prior to commencement of installation of materials specified herein.

B. Environmental Conditions: Do not commence installation until area has been closed in, and temperature and humidity conditions are similar to those



expected during building occupancy.

C. Wet Work: Complete and cured, prior to commencement of installation of suspended ceilings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Framing:

1. General: Types specified are products of Western Metal Lath Company. Structural characteristics and quality of substitutions shall meet or exceed those of types specified and referenced standards.

2. Main Runners: 1-1/2-inch-deep cold-rolled (0.475 pound/foot) or hot-rolled (1.12 pound/foot) steel channels, galvanized for exterior work and rust-inhibitive coated for interior work.

3. Cross Furring: 3/4-inch-deep cold- or hot-rolled (0.3 pound/foot) steel channels, galvanized for exterior work and rust-inhibitive coated for interior work.

4. Furring Channels: 7/8-inch hat-shaped channels, 25-gauge hot-rolled channel at gypsum board ceilings; rust inhibitive finish.

5. Clips: Galvanized steel, of sizes and shapes shown. 16-gauge, except as otherwise shown.

B. Fasteners:

1. Sheet Metal Screws: To suit channel gauge, as specified in Section 09110 – Metal Support Systems.

2. Expansion Bolts:

a. Tie Wire: Hilti Kwik Bolt HKT 14, Ramset/Red Head TW, or equal, with minimum 1-1/2-inch embedment.

b. Others: As specified in Section 05050 – Metal Fasteners.

3. Powder-Actuated Devices (PAD's):

a. As specified in Section 05050 – Metal Fasteners and as follows:

1) Size: 0.145-inch diameter with 15/16-inch minimum penetration.

2) For Attachment of Ceiling Clips: Hilti DN 27 P8T, or equal.

4. Pop Rivets: 3/16-inch-diameter plated steel.



5. Machine Bolts: ASTM A307, Grade A, regular hexagon head type with ASTM A563, Grade A nuts. 1/4-inch size unless otherwise shown.

C. Hanger, Bracing and Tie Wires:

1. FS QQ-W-461H, Finish 5, Class 1, soft temper or ASTM A 641, Class 1 coating, soft temper.

2. Minimum gauges:

a. Hangers, 8.

b. Diagonal bracing wire, 12.

c. Single-strand tie wire, 16.

d. Double-strand tie wire, 18.

D. Welding Electrodes: AWS, low hydrogen type, as required.

E. Ceiling Clips: "BERC2" Clips in conformance with IBC Seismic category D, E, and F requirements for specified ceiling grid systems.

F. Seismic Brace:

1. General: Provide compression post and four 12-gauge galvanized steel wires splayed at 45 degrees vertically and spaced at 90 degrees horizontally to each other and attached to main runner or grid member with 2-inches of compression post.

2. Wire Attachment: PAD devices not permitted for attachment of brace wires. Fasten bracing wires at each end with not less than 4 tight turns within distance of 1-1/2 inches, except machine made wire turns, where both strands have been deformed or bent in wrapping, need not comply with 1-1/2-inch distance requirement as long as turns are tight as possible and four in number.

G. Compression Posts: Provide compression posts as shown on Drawings and as specified, including:

1. Angle Strut Type: Steel sheet angles or channels, not less than 16-gauge, L/R ratio of 200 maximum.

2. EMT Type: Electrical metallic tubing, diameters shown.

3. Metal Stud Type: 2-inch by 4-inch steel stud, 16-gauge. Attach to main channel with three No. 10 screws. Attach to structure per drawings.

4. Proprietary Type: Use at Contractor's option in lieu of angle strut or EMT types. USG's Donn Series VSA Compression Post, or equivalent, galvanized steel telescoping post with top clip, bulb clip, guide ring, and locking device. Provide size recommended by manufacturer for span.



H. Suspension System for Acoustical Ceilings:

1. General: Provide each component as products of a single manufacturer.

2. Type: Comply with ASTM C 635 Structural Classification as "Heavy Duty" Systems, for direct hung installation with interlocking main runners and cross runners. Roll-formed grid components composed of double web hot-dipped galvanized steel.

a. Structural Classification: UL Certified in compliance with CBC Chapter 16 criteria.

3. Manufacturer: Armstrong World Industries; USG Interiors, Inc; Chicago Metallic;. Products from Armstrong World Industries are the Basis-of-Design for coordinated suspension components and acoustical ceiling panels.

4. Grid System:

a. For use with the following acoustic ceiling types: ACP-1, ACP-2, and ACP-3 as specified in Section 09510 – Acoustical Ceilings

b. Manufacturer: USG Corporation.

c. Type: USG DONN DX/DXL, heavy duty 15/16” Tee System; and 7/8” M7 wall molding; including ACM7 seismic clip for seismic categories D, E and F.

d. Surface Finish: Baked polyester paint. Color: White

5. Typical Perimeter Angles: With matching corner caps and splice pieces; same material as that of exposed suspension system members, 15-gauge with hemmed edge, typical.

a. Finish: Baked polyester paint. Match adjacent grid system.

7. Slip Joints: MM Systems Corp.'s Series DX-100, or equal, white polyvinyl-chloride flexible extrusion for 1-inch-wide joint.

8. Slotted Angle Spacer: Slotted angles or channels with spring steel diamond points which snap tight to prevent movement of strut.

9. Miscellaneous Accessories: Manufacturer's standard for use with suspension system furnished; furnish as required.

I. Sound Isolation Clips: As specified in Section 09110 – Non-Load Bearing Wall

Framing.

J. Miscellaneous: Provide manufacturer's standard miscellaneous items and



accessories suitable for use intended and required for complete installation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verification of Conditions: Examine conditions under which ceiling suspension systems are to be installed. Give notification in writing, of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of Work. Proceed only when conditions are satisfactory.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Hanger Wires:

1. Spacing:

a. For Gypsum Board, Metal Ceilings, and Acoustical Ceilings: 4-foot centers maximum.

2. Clearance: Not less than 6-inches between hanger wires and unbraced ducts, pipes, and conduit.

3. Attachment to Structure Above: Use wire pigtail embedded in concrete, tie wire type expansion bolt, or PAD with ceiling clip, as appropriate.

4. Hanger Wires: Fasten hanger wires to attachment device at structure above with not less than 3 tight turns within distance of 1-1/2-inches, except machine-made wire turns, where both strands have been deformed or bent in wrapping, need not comply with 1-1/2-inch distance requirement as long as turns are as tight as possible and 3 in number.

5. Wire Size:

a. For Gypsum Board Soffits and Ceilings: 8-gauge.

b. For Acoustical and Metal Panel Ceilings: 12-gauge at inaccessible and 10-gauge at accessible areas.

6. Out-Of-Plumb Wires: Install hanger wires as near plumb as possible. Where hanger wires are more than 1 (horizontal) to 6 (vertical) out of plumb, provide counterbrace wires.

B. Trapezes: Provide trapezes or other supplementary support members at obstructions in order to maintain specified hanger spacing. Provide additional hangers, struts or braces as required at all ceiling breaks, soffits or dis-continuous areas. Counter-balance out-of-plumb wires as specified.

C. Additional Hanger Wires: Provide as required at ceiling breaks, soffits, and discontinuous areas.



D. Gypsum Board Ceiling Suspension System:

1. Runner Channels:

a. Spacing: 4-foot maximum centers.

b. Attachment: Saddle tie with hanger wires at 4-foot maximum centers. Make 2 loops and secure with not less than 3 turns in 1-1/2-inch maximum distance.

c. Splice: Lap and interlock flanges 12 inches minimum and tie near each end with double loops of 16-gauge tie wire.

2. Furring Channels:

a. Spacing: 16-inch maximum centers.

b. Attachment: Saddle tie with 16-gauge tie wire to runner channels and secure with no less than 3 tight turns.

c. Splice: Lap and interlock 8-inches minimum and tie near each end with double loops of 16-gauge tie wire.

E. Acoustical Ceiling Panel and Metal Ceiling Panel suspension system:

1. General: Install per Reference Standards, manufacturer's instructions, and reviewed shop drawings.

2. Main Grid Members:


b. Attachment: Tie with hanger wire secured with not less than 3 turns in 1-1/2-inch maximum distance.

c. Lighting Fixtures, Air Terminals, and Other Services Less Than 56 Pounds in Weight: Secure with slack hanger wires at two corners.

d. Lighting Fixtures, Air Terminals, and Other Services Greater Than 56 Pounds in Weight: Secure with hanger wires at four corners and as shown on Drawings.

3. Secondary Grid Members:


b. Attachment: Form 2-foot by 2-foot grid with positive splices.

F. Seismic Restraint:

1. General: Provide as follows for each type suspension system.



2. Spacing:

a. Areas Less Than 96-Square Feet:

1) No Dimension Greater Than 12-Feet: No bracing required.

2) Dimension Greater Than 12-Feet: Provide bracing.

b. Areas Greater Than 96-Square Feet: Provide brace for each 96-square feet or fraction thereof.

c. Maximum Brace Spacing: 8-feet by 12-feet.

d. Maximum Distance From Walls: 1/2-brace spacing in direction perpendicular to plane of wall.

3. Seismic Brace:

a. General: Provide compression post and four 12-gauge galvanized steel wires splayed at 45 degrees vertically and spaced at 90 degrees horizontally to each other and attached to main runner or grid member with 2-inches of compression post.

b. Wire Attachment: Powder-actuated devices not permitted for attachment of brace wires. Fasten bracing wires at each end with not less than 4 tight turns within distance of 1-1/2-inches, except machine made wire turns, where both strands have been deformed or bent in wrapping, need not comply with 1-1/2-inch distance requirement as long as turns are as tight as possible and 4 in number.

I. Access Panels: Frame as required for access panels furnished under Divisions 15 and 16 and specified under Section 08310 –Access Panels.

END OF SECTION


ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09 51 13 - 1

SECTION 09 51 13 – ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Work Included: Provide and install acoustical ceilings panels and accessories, complete, as shown and specified, including:

1. Mineral core acoustical ceiling panels.



2. Section 122200 – Curatins and Drapes.

3. Division 23 – Mechanical (Air Supply, Ducts, and Connections).

4. Division 26 – Electrical (Lighting Fixture Attachments).


A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. C635; Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panel Ceilings.

2. C636; Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panels.

B. Ceiling and Interior System Contractors Association (CISCA):

1. Ceiling Systems Handbook.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Performance Criteria:

1. Fire-Hazard Classification: Provide acoustical ceilings that are identical to those tested for following fire hazard characteristics, per ASTM test method indicated below, by UL or other testing and inspecting organizations acceptable to authorities have jurisdiction. Identify acoustical ceiling components with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization.

a. Test Method: ASTM E84.b. Flame Spread: 25 or less.c. Smoke Developed: 50 or less.

1.4 SUBMITTALS




B. Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications, data, and installation instructions.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans drawn accurately to scale and coordinating penetrations and ceiling-mounted items. Show following:

a. Ceiling suspension members.b. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.c. Ceiling-mounted items including light fixtures; air outlets and

inlets; speakers; sprinkler heads; and special moldings at walls, column penetrations, and other junctures with adjoining construction.

D. Samples:

1. For Initial Selection: Manufacturer's standard sample sets consisting of actual acoustical units or sections of units showing full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of unit indicated.

2. For Verification: 12-inch-square sample of each type of exposed finish specified or selected and of same thickness and material indicated for final unit of Work. Where finishes involve normal color and texture variations, include sample sets showing full range of variations expected.

E. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in Quality Assurance article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include list of completed projects with project names, addresses, names of Architects and Owners, and other information specified.

F. Research Reports: Or evaluation reports of model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that show compliance of acoustical ceiling system and components with building code in effect for Project.

G. Product Test Reports: From qualified independent testing agencies that are based on its testing or current products for compliance of acoustical ceiling systems and components with requirements.


A. Qualifications of Installer: Engage experienced Installer who has successfully completed acoustical ceilings similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for Project.

B. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling unit from single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of Work.



C. Coordination of Work: Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical ceiling units and suspension system components with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system components (if any), and partition system (if any).


A. Delivery and Storage: Deliver acoustical ceiling units to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in fully enclosed space protected against damage from moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.

B. Handling: Handle acoustical ceiling units carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.


A. Storage: Before installing acoustical ceiling units, permit them to reach room temperature and stabilized moisture content.

B. Space Enclosure: Do not install acoustical ceilings until space is enclosed and weatherproof, wet-work in space is completed and nominally dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient conditions of temperature and humidity will be continuously maintained at values near those expected for final occupancy.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MINERAL CORE ACOUSTICAL PANELS

A. Manufacturer: Provide products manufactured by CertainTeed; USG; or Armstrong.

1. Basis-of-Design: “Ultima- Health Zone” washable tiles by Armstrong products are specified as the basis of design.

B. Mineral Core Acoustical Panel Types:

1. Type 1:

a. General: “Ultima- Healthzone” by Armstrong (Item # 1935)b. Size: 24 inches by 24 inches by 3/4-inch-thick.c. Edge Detail: Square.d. Noise Reduction Coefficient: UL Classified NRC of 0.70 in

compliance with ASTM C423.e. Sound Transmission Class: UL Classified CAC minimum of 38 in

compliance with ASTM E1414 or ASTM E413.f. Light reflectance: 0.86g. Provide manufacturer's coordinated field and border units, as

required by layouts shown on Drawings.



h. Specified grid system: Armstrong's Prelude XL 15/16-inch exposed tee.

2. Type 2:

a. General: Match with adjacent existing.b. Size: 24 inches by 24 inches by 5/8-inch-thick.c. Edge Detail: Match with adjacent existing.d. Noise Reduction Coefficient: UL Classified NRC of 0.60 in

compliance with ASTM C423.e. Sound Transmission Class: UL Classified CAC minimum of 35 in

compliance with ASTM E1414 or ASTM E413.f. Light reflectance: 0.83g. Provide manufacturer's coordinated field and border units, as

required by layouts shown on Drawings.h. Specified grid system: Armstrong's Prelude XL 15/16-inch exposed

tee. (match with adjacent existing)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verification of Conditions: Examine substrates and structural framing to which ceiling system attached or abuts, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other sections that affect installation and anchorage of ceiling system. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install acoustical ceiling systems per Reference Standards and manufacturer's instructions.

B. Acoustical Ceiling Tiles:

1. General: Make joints straight and true to line with exposed surfaces flush and level. Tightly butt tiles with corners and arises full and without broken edges.

2. Suspended System:

a. Concealed Grid: Install tile with concealed metal splines in kerfed edges between tiles to form concealed mechanical joints.

b. Edge Units: Install spring steel spacers where supported on edge trim.

c. Access Tile: Install units by concealed saddle and notched hook spline method.

d. Identification Markers: Install one per access tile; locate on tile as directed.

3.3 CLEANING



A. Cleaning: Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceiling panels. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touch-up of minor finish damage. Remove and replace work that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.

END OF SECTION


RESILIENT FLOORING 096519 - 1

SECTION 09 65 19 – RESILIENT FLOORING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Work Included: Provide and install resilient flooring, resilient base and accessories, complete as shown on Drawings and as specified, including:

1. Resilient base at sealed concrete floors.

2. Vinyl Composition Tile including resilient base.

3. Heterogenous sheet vinyl, heat welded including integral coved base.

4. Edge Strips, Reducer Strips and other floor-edge transitions.

5. Cap trim, cove-shaped furring, and accessories for cove base installations.

6. Hot Weld Strips and cold seam materials.

7. Adhesives and other accessory materials as required to provide complete floor assemblies as specified.


1. Section 035300 – Concrete Toppings.


3. Section 093000 – Tile.


A. Resilient Floor Covering Institute (RFCI).

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. ASTM E-1907-98: “Standard Practices for Determining Moisture-Related Acceptability of Concrete Floors to Receive Moisture-Sensitive Finishes”.

2. ASTM F-1869-89: “Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride”.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. General: Schedule submittals as required to provide a minimum of 60-days from flooring materials order day to start of installation.



C. Shop Drawings: Provide seaming diagrams for public spaces including corridors.

D. Samples:

1. Edge, Reducer and Transition Strips: Each specified type and color, 12 inches long.

2. Resilient Tile Flooring: 2 samples, each type and color specified, 12 inches square.

3. Resilient Sheet Flooring: 2 samples, each type and color specified, 12 inches square.

4. Resilient Base: 2 samples each type and color, 12 inches long. None required for black color.

E. Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications, data, and installation instructions.

F. Qualifications: Submit Contractor’s and Installer’s project lists and specified manufacturer certifications, including project names and addresses and contact names and telephone numbers.

G. Maintenance Manuals: Manufacturer's written maintenance instructions.


A. Qualifications of Installer: Minimum of three project installations of extent comparable to proposed Project.

B. Regulatory Requirement: Materials shall have the following flammability ratings, according to NFPA 253:

1. Smoke Density: 45 or less.

2. Critical Radiant Flux: Class I - Minimum 0.45 watts per square centimeter. (Class II - Minimum 0.22 watts per square centimeter.)

C. Slip Resistance: Static coefficient of friction for installed flooring shall be equal to or greater than .06 when measured with a James Machine per ASTM D2047.


A. Comply with requirements of Section 016000 – Product Requirments.

B. Delivery: Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's unopened containers clearly marked with manufacturer's name, brand, size, thickness, grade, color, graining, and design.

C. Storage: Store materials per manufacturer's recommendations and at not less than 70 degrees F for at least 24 hours before installation.




A. Environmental Requirements: Maintain temperature in spaces to receive resilient flooring at 70 degrees F minimum at least 48 hours before, during, after installation; thereafter, maintain a 55 degrees F minimum.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Basis-of-Design: Tile Products as scheduled on the Drawings provide a "Basis-of–Design" for each scheduled Resilient Flooring Product and have been selected and approved for use by the Owner based manufacturer's samples provided to the Architect, and have been fully coordinated with finish materials specified elsewhere.

B. Resilient Flooring substitution requests will only be considered for acceptance by the Architect when the following conditions are met:

1. Proposed substitution Resilient Flooring meets or exceeds the specified material, construction and performance criteria.

2. Proposed Resilient Flooring substitution visually matches scheduled types for thickness, textures, patterns, color, and reflectance and other surface characteristics as determined by the Architect.

3. Acceptance of a proposed substitution Resilient Flooring by the Architect shall incur no additional cost to the Owner, including costs incurred to re-select adjacent finishes specified elsewhere as required to coordinate and match substituted Resilient Flooring for color, texture or pattern.

2.2 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

A. Manufacturer: Provide products manufactured by Mannington.

B. Adhesive for Resilient Bases: Waterproof type recommended in writing or supplied directly by base manufacturer.

C. Resilient Base Materials: Thermoplastic Rubber, Type TP- Premium Edge wall base. Finish: Smooth Matte Finish. Corners- Factory pre-formed. Thickness- 1/8”; 4-foot minimum length.

1. Provide colors as scheduled on Drawings and specified and as required to match Architect’s samples.

2. Provide manufacturer's standard black at casework bases.

D. Resilient Base Types:

1. Rubber Wall Base by Roppe.

a. Color: As scheduled on Drawings.



b. Height: 4-inches.

c. Seal rubber base to resilient flooring with continuous clear silicon sealant.

E. Locations: Provide resilient base at locations shown or scheduled on Drawings, including:

1. Exposed, Sealed and Painted Concrete floors.

2. Floors finished with materials specified in this Section.

3. Plywood.

2.3 VINYL COMPOSITION TILE

A. General: Provide Vinyl Composition Tile in conformance with ASTM F-1066, Class 2, for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated.

1. Manufacturer: Basis of Design ‘ESSENTIALS’ by Mannington Commercial Flooring. Match with adjacent existing.

2. Vinyl Composition Tile Types:

a. As scheduled on Drawings.

B. Performance Requirements:

1. ASTM Specification (F-1066) Class 2.

2. Fire Resistance: 450 or less when tested per ASTME-E-662. Greater than 0.45-watts/cm² (Class 1)when tested per ASTM-E-648.

3. Static Load Limit: 125-pounds per square inch or better.

C. Vinyl Composition Tile Accessories:

1. Adhesive: Provide Solvent-free Adhesives recommended by the Vinyl Composition Tile Manufacturer(s) in writing for use with each type of specified Vinyl Composition Tile and for the conditions at the project area.

a. Adhesive Trowel: Use appropriate trowel tooth patterns as recommended by the Adhesive Manufacturer in writing for use with the specified Vinyl Composition Tile types.

2. Sub-Floor Primer and Sealer: Provide sub-floor Sealers or Primers where recommended by the Vinyl Composition Tile Manufacturer(s) in writing where required by the Sub-Floor conditions at the project area at the project area noted during verification of conditions.



3. Vinyl Composition Tile Sealer: Typical at all locations, provide sealer coat for Vinyl Composition Tile floors as recommended by each Vinyl Composition Tile manufacturer in writing for each specified type.

4. Wax for Vinyl Flooring: FS P-W-155, 16 percent concentration; slip-resistant, water emulsion base.

a. Finish Sheen: As selected by the Architect.

2.4 HETEROGENEOUS SHEET VINYL FLOORING

A. General: Provide PVC-Free Resilient Sheet Flooring in conformance with ASTM F-1303, Type I, Grade 1, Class B Backing, for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated.

1. Manufacturer: Provide “REJUVENATIONS- STONERUN” by ARMSTRONG Commercial Flooring.

2. Heterogeneous Sheet Vinyl Flooring Types:

a. As scheduled on Drawings.

B. Performance Requirements:

1. Fire Resistance: 450 or less when tested per ASTM E-662/NFPA 258 (Smoke Density). 0.45-watts/cm² or better (Class 1 or better) when tested per ASTM E-648/NFPA 253 (Critical Radiant Flux).

2. Static Load Limit: 750-pounds per square inch or better when tested per ASTM F-970.

3. Slip Resistance: equal or exceed specified requirements.

C. Heterogeneous Sheet Vinyl Flooring Accessories:

1. Adhesive: Provide Solvent-free Adhesives recommended by each Heterogeneous Sheet Vinyl Flooring Manufacture in writing for use with each type of specified Heterogeneous Sheet Vinyl Flooring and for the actual conditions at the project area.

a. Adhesive Trowel: Use appropriate trowel tooth patterns as recommended by the Adhesive Manufacturer in writing for use with the specified Heterogeneous Sheet Vinyl Flooring types.

2. Sub-Floor Primer and Sealer: Provide sub-floor Sealers or Primers where recommended by the Resilient Sheet Flooring Manufacturer(s) in writing where required by the Sub-Floor conditions at the project area at the project area noted during verification of conditions.

3. Welding Rods: For Heterogeneous Sheet Vinyl Flooring shown on Drawings or scheduled to receive heat-welded seams, provide 4-mm welding rod as recommended in writing by the manufacturer of each specified type of Flooring. Provide single-sourcing of welding rods and sheet vinyl flooring for each specified type of Resilient Sheet Flooring.



a. Colors: Provide welding rods to match Architect's samples or as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

4. Heterogeneous Sheet Vinyl Flooring Initial Cleaning: Typical at all locations, follow Resilient Sheet Flooring manufacturer's written instructions recommending process and product for each specified type.

a. Finish Sheen: to be as scheduled in drawings.

2.6 MATERIALS FOR COVED BASE AT RESILIENT FLOORS

A. General: Provide materials as required to install cove base at locations shown or scheduled on Drawings. Not all specified resilient sheet flooring types may require cove base; some resilient flooring types may be scheduled to receive several base treatments, including cove base.

B. Materials:

1. Fillet Cove Strips: Provide redwood cove strips as recommended by each specified resilient sheet flooring manufacturer in writing to coordinate with each specified resilient sheet flooring type.

2. Outside Corner for Resilient Sheet Coved Base: Provide the each specified manufacturer's outside pre-molded corner to match each specified resilient sheet flooring type. Provide types and color(s) as scheduled on Drawings and as specified.

3. Cap Strip: Extruded aluminum, clear anodized. Single-source one cap strip type and finish for use through-out entire scope of project. Provide cap strips in the longest length practical to minimize butt joints.

2.7 REDUCER STRIPS, EDGE STRIPS AND TRANSITIONS

A. Manufacturer: Where Manufacturer’s standard products are scheduled on Drawings and specified, provide the specific products indicated or materials complying with the requirements set forth in this Section.

B. Adhesive for reducer, edge and transition strips: Waterproof type recommended in writing or supplied directly by base manufacturer.

C. Locations: Provide reducer, edge and transition strips at locations where different floor finishes meet, as required to protect the transition joint and/or provide a gentle transition between floor finishes of differing thicknesses, including:

1. Exposed, Sealed and Painted Concrete floors: to any other floor finish.

2. Section 093000 – Tile: to any floor finish specified in this Section and Section 096813 – Tile Carpeting.



3. Floor finishes specified in this Section:

a. All locations between two different floor finish materials specified in this Section.

b. Between two different floor finish colors of the same material specified in this Section when shown or scheduled on Drawings.

c. Between floor finishes specified in this Section and at transitions to carpet specified in Section 096813 – Tile Carpeting.

D. Manufacturer: Provide reducer, edge and transition strips by Johnsonite, Mercer, or equal.

1. Provide reducer, edge and transition strips at all level differences in flooring. Center on door frame where possible.

a. Colors: As selcted by the Architect from the manufacturer's full range of standard colors.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verification of Conditions: Examine substrates and adjoining construction and conditions under which Work will be installed. Give written notification of deficiencies detrimental to proper or timely installation; do not proceed until corrected.

B. Slab Moisture Test:

1. General: Test substrates to determine acceptable dryness prior to application of resilient flooring. Use ASTM F-1869-89, “Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride”, as applicable for the specified flooring as recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer.

2. Slab-Moisture Content Testing: Perform tests at locations not more than 50 feet apart in every direction, but no less than one test per 1000-square feet. Verify the following performance criteria are equaled or exceeded before beginning floor installation:

a. Vapor and moisture barrier shall reduce vapor transmissions from concrete slabs-on-grade and above-grade concrete and metal deck assemblies to 3 pounds or less per 1000-square feet in a 24-hour period when tested per ASTM F-1869-89.

b. Alkalinity: Maximum pH of 10.

3. Contingency for High Moisture Readings: Report all unacceptable test results to Architect.

C. Air-Moisture Content Testing:



1. General: Determine relative humidity of air in rooms to receive resilient flooring, using wet-bulb and dry-bulb sling pyschrometer. Do not install resilient flooring when relative humidity exceeds 45 percent.

D. Adhesion Test:

1. Secure one, three-foot-square piece of each specified type of resilient sheet or 3-foot by 3-foot area of each specified type of tile in each typical area that has passed the specified moisture test, using adhesive(s) as specified and recommended by manufacturer(s).

2. The test pieces shall remain in place for 72 hours.

3. Determine if the adhesive is bonding the material satisfactorily to the surface. Resilient flooring should not be able to be removed without severe deformation, tearing, or destruction of the sample(s).

4. Where there is evidence of unsatisfactory bonding, manufacturer's representative is to be notified in order that they may verify and evaluate the conditions.

5. Notify Architect immediately if, in the opinion of manufacturer's representative, the adhesion test results are unsatisfactory.

6. Remove successful test pieces and adhesive prior to commencing final installation.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean substrate of deleterious materials which impair bonding of resilient flooring. Do Work on smooth, even troweled finish. Remove rough areas and protrusions from concrete by griding. Fill cracks, rough areas, and other surface defects with an acceptable plastic filler.

B. Primer/Sealer Coat: Apply primer to concrete surfaces; work well into surfaces; use minimum quantity that will assure complete surface coverage with a non-absorptive base. Allow primer to thoroughly dry before applying adhesive.

1. Prime coat may be omitted if recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer in writing based on review of the project area. Review the requirements for each specified type of resilient flooring for each project area.

2. Do not combine different specified flooring types under one manufacturer’s recommendation.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Edge Strips:



1. General: Install in continuous lengths at door openings and other exposed edges of resilient flooring, unless otherwise shown. Install edge strips before applying primer.

2. Metal: Anchor strips solidly to substrate with countersunk non-magnetic stainless steel screws; use lead shields for anchoring into concrete; space screws 1-inch from each end and not more than 9-inch centers at intermediate points.

3. Vinyl: Set in and securely bond to substrates with adhesive per manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Prime Coat: Apply primer to concrete surfaces; work well into surfaces; use minimum quantity that will assure complete surface coverage with a non-absorptive base.

a. Allow primer to thoroughly dry before applying adhesive.

b. Prime coat may be omitted if recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer.

C. Adhesive: Apply to substrate with properly notched steel trowels; allow adhesive to become tacky before applying resilient flooring.

D. Resilient Flooring: Extend flooring, and fit neatly and tightly, into breaks and recesses, against bases, around pipes and penetrations, around permanent casework, equipment, and under-casework recesses.

E. Sheet Material:

1. General: Lay sheet material with minimum number of joints with bottom surface securely bonded to substrate and top surface left smooth, clean, and free from imperfections.

a. Make joints straight, tight, and inconspicuous.

b. Roll each sheet from center to edges to assure complete bond and tight joints.

2. Joints: Provide Chemically Weld; Adhesive Weld; Heat Weld as scheduled on Drawings and in conformance with sheet flooring manufacturer's written instructions.

3. Coved Bases:

a. Install a continuous redwood cove strip at intersection of floor and vertical surfaces prior to laying sheet material.

b. Use cove strip with a 3/4-inch radius; make bases 4 inches high, unless otherwise shown; butt ends; miter corner; secure with acceptable type fasteners.

c. Apply cove strips and sheet material to solid backing.



d. Roll sheet material into adhesive; hold in place until complete adhesion is assured.

e. Make top of base level and straight; terminate top edge into a metal trim cap.

f. Securely screw trim cap to backing before applying sheet material; use single lengths where possible; make neat mitered corners and butted ends.

g. Use standard aluminum alloy or stainless steel trim cap of standard design as selected, unless otherwise shown.

4. Perimeter Bond System: At Contractor's option, a perimeter bond system may be used for installation of sheet vinyl flooring.

a. Do work with manufacturer's approved and trained applicators per manufacturer's recommendations and supervision.

b. Install sheet vinyl flooring with adhesive spread only at seam lines, projections, and wall lines.

c. Cut seams with an electrically operated cutting machine made for purpose.

F. Resilient Bases:

1. General: Where base is scheduled, install around perimeter of room or space, at base of partitions, walls, columns, pilasters, casework, and other permanent fixtures.

a. Install top-set coved type bases throughout, except install straight type bases at carpet.

b. Secure bases to surfaces with waterproof adhesive; make joints tight; keep top and bottom edges in firm contact with adjacent surfaces.

1) Provide a continuous seal of the resilient base to both the

wall surface at the upper edge and the floor surface at the bootom edge.

c. Use longest lengths possible; straight pieces less than 24 inches long not permitted.

d. Miter or cope inside corners.

2. Coved Type: Provide with premolded end stops and premolded one-piece external corners.

3. Straight Type: Provide with preformed one-piece external corners.

4. Edges and Seams: Match edges at seams. Double cut adjoining lengths. Make tight butt joints.



3.4 CLEANING

A. General: Not more than four days before Substantial Completion, thoroughly clean work per resilient flooring manufacturer's recommendations. Use of solvents, wet mopping, or washing is prohibited.

B. Defective and Damaged Work: Replace with acceptable Work at no additional cost to Owner.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. General: Protect Work from traffic during construction period so Work will be without indication of use or damage at time of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION


INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 - 1

SECTION 09 91 23- INTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Work Included: Interior and Exterior Painting, complete as shown on Drawings and as specified.

1. Work includes, but is not limited to, painting of following items, materials, and spaces:

a. Paint every interior and exterior exposed-to-view unfinished surface, except as otherwise shown on Drawings or as specified.

b. Paint the following exposed mechanical and electrical items to match adjacent surfaces even if the items are factory-finished:

1) Wall and ceiling diffusers/registers installed in gypsum board assemblies at any location.

2) Access doors at any location except when concealed above suspended ceilings.

3) Flush-mounted electrical panelboards and cabinets in gypsum board assemblies at any location.

4) All exposed piping, conduit, duct work and similar surfaces in Stair Enclosures and Fire Control Room (except items with factory “red” finish).

c. Paint semi-visible areas behind registers, grilles, diffusers, screen vents as required to “black out”.

d. Paint auxiliary rails of smoke containment screens with high-temperature coating.

e. Stairs: Paint all exposed ferrous metal assemblies, concrete landings and treads, including hazard striping as required by code.

f. Stenciling at Smoke Partition and Fire Rated Walls: See section 092900 Gypsum Board.

2. Do not paint the following items:

a. Factory-finished items specified in various Sections.

b. Pre-finished wall, ceiling, and floor coverings.



c. Concrete traffic or walking decks, walks, steps, and ramps.

d. Code-Required Labels: Keep equipment identification and fire rating labels free of paint.

e. Surfaces concealed in walls and above ceilings except as specifically indicated otherwise.

f. Ducts, piping, conduit, and equipment concealed in walls and ceilings, unless specifically indicated otherwise.

g. Do not paint "Shell Areas" as shown on drawings except paint all sides of doors and frames at walls into finished areas.

h. Mechanical or elevator shafts not requiring periodic cleaning.

i. Mechanically-finished nonferrous metal, such as stainless steel, aluminum, and bronze, except exposed mechanical and electrical items.

j. Interior spaces specifically noted as unpainted.

3. Note: This Section includes a comprehensive listing of paint finish types. Not all paint systems included herein may be required by the Scope of Work of this Project, or the scope of some finishes may be very limited. The responsibility of the Contractor to schedule the Work so that all specified and required Painting Scope is included in the Scope of Work for the Project.



2. Section 079200 – Joint Sealants.

3. Section 099113 – Exterior Painting.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit complete list of materials proposed for use, together with manufacturer's data and specifications.

C. Samples:

1. Opaque Colors and Finishes: Submit samples, on hardboard, using materials accepted for Project, of each color and paint finish selected with texture to simulate actual conditions. Prepare three samples, 8-1/2 inches by 11 inches, with required number of paint coats clearly visible.



2. Transparent and Stained Finishes: Prepare samples on species and quality of wood to be used in the Work. Re-submit as requested until acceptable sheen, color, and texture are achieved. Label and identify each sample as to location and application.


A. Labeling: Include following on label of each container:

1. Manufacturer's name and product name.

2. Generic type of paint.

3. Manufacturer's stock number.

4. Color.

5. Instructions for reducing, where applicable.

B. Special Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Use materials for Work of this Section which comply with volatile organic compound limitations and other regulations of local Air Quality Management District and other local, state, and federal agencies having jurisdiction.

C. Project Mock-Up: As directed by the Architect, apply on actual wall surfaces where designated, samples of each and any color selected for final review.

1. On at least 100 square feet of surface as directed, provide full-coat finish samples until required sheen, color and texture are obtained.

2. Duplicate painted finishes of prepared samples.

3. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of in-place work.



B. Delivery: Deliver material in sealed containers with labels legible and intact.

C. Storage of Materials:

1. Store only acceptable Project materials on Project site.

2. Store in suitable location.

3. Restrict storage to paint materials and related equipment.

4. Comply with health and fire regulations.




A. Environmental Requirements:

1. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations as to environmental conditions under which coatings and coating systems can be stored and applied.

2. Do not apply finish in areas where dust is being generated.

B. Protection: Cover or otherwise protect finished work of other trades and surfaces not being painted concurrently or not to be painted.

1.6 SCHEDULING

A. Gypsum Board: Verify that a fully-cured skim cooat has been applied to Gypsum Board specified for Level 5 finish and scheduled to receive semi-gloss or gloss paint finishes. Do not proceed until completed.

1.7 MAINTENANCE

A. Extra Materials: At completion of Work, deliver to Owner extra stock of paint of one gallon of each color used of each coating material used. Tightly seal and clearly label containers.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Primers and Single-color Paints: Provide paint systems as manufactured by the following manufacturers. Unless otherwise specified, single source all components of a paint system from a single manufacturer, including primer/sealer/undercoat and body and finish coats to assure compatibility.

1. Benjamin Moore and Co. (BM).

2. ICI Dulux Paints (ICI).

4. Sherwin-Williams Co. (S/W).

2.2 MATERIALS

A. General: Provide materials selected for coating system for each type of surface which are the product of single manufacturer.

B. Thinner: As recommended by each manufacturer for his respective product.

C. Unsuitability of Specified Products: Claims concerning unsuitability of any materials specified will not be entertained, unless such claim is made in writing to the Architect before Work is started.



2.3 COLORS

A. Color and Sheen: Colors are scheduled on Drawings (or as selected by Architect if not scheduled on Drawings) based on standard color chips provided by one or more of the listed manufacturers.

B. Mixing: Deliver paints and stains ready mixed to Project site.

2.4 MILDEW RESISTANCE

A. General: Add fungicidal agent to paint per manufacturer's recommendations. Add agent to paint at factory. Clearly indicate on labels that paint is mildew resistant.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verification of Conditions: Examine surfaces scheduled to receive paint and finishes for conditions that might adversely affect execution, permanence, or quality of work and which cannot be put into acceptable condition through preparatory work. Proceed with preparation or coating application only when conditions are satisfactory.

B. Review all questions regarding the scope of painting with Owner prior to proceeding with Work.

3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. General: Remove scale, dirt, dust, grit, rust, wax, grease, efflorescence, loose material, and other foreign matter detrimental to proper adhesion of paint.

B. Gypsum Board:

1. Narrow, Shallow Cracks and Small Holes: Fill with spackling compound.

2. Deep, Wide Cracks and Deep Holes: Rake out, dampen with clear water, and fill with thin layers of gypsum board joint compound.

3. Curing: Allow to dry.

4. Sanding: Sand smooth after drying; do not raise nap of paper on gypsum board.

C. Metals:

1. Chipped or Abraded Areas in Shop Coatings: Touch-up using appropriate primer.

2. Galvanized Surfaces: Apply a wash coat made by dissolving 8 ounces copper acetate or copper sulfate in one gallon of water; apply with brush.



3. Stainless Steel: Scarify surfaces before applying prime coat.

D. Wood:

1. General: If required, sandpaper surfaces smooth before applying primer. Thoroughly clean knots; apply thin coat of knot sealer over surfaces shown to receive opaque finish.

2. Back Priming: Back prime surfaces installed against cementitious surfaces; give particular attention to sealing cross-grained surfaces.

3. Puttying:

a. General: Fill nail holes, cracks, and other depressions flush with putty after prime coat application. Allow putty to dry; sandpaper smooth before applying body coat.

b. For Opaque Finish: Linseed oil type putty.

E. Protection:

1. General: Properly protect floors and other adjacent work by drop cloths or other suitable coverings. In areas scheduled for painting, maintain wrappings and factory-applied protection provided by other trades.

2. Hardware and Other Obstructions: Remove or protect factory finished items such as hardware, plates, lighting fixtures, grilles, and similar items placed prior to painting. Reposition or remove protection upon completion of each space. Equipment adjacent to surfaces requiring paint disconnected, moved, reset, and reconnected by respective trades.

3. Fire Precautions: At end of each work day, place in metal containers or remove from premises, solvent soaked cloths, waste, and other materials which constitute a fire hazard.

F. Moisture Content: Do not apply initial coating until moisture content of surface is within limitations recommended by paint manufacturer.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. General: Apply paint per manufacturer's instructions and as specified. Thoroughly stir paint and keep at uniform consistency during application. Apply paint evenly, free from drops, ridges, waves, laps, and brush marks; finished surface uniform in sheen, color, and texture. Apply succeeding coats to unscarred and completely integral base coats; slightly vary color of undercoats to distinguish them from preceding coat. Allow sufficient time between coats to assure proper drying. Sandpaper smooth interior finishes between coats.



B. Prime Coat: Do not thin primers in excess of manufacturer's printed directions. Apply by brush, unless otherwise specified, within 8 hours after cleaning.

C. Body and Finish Coats: Do not thin; apply by brush, roller or spray.

D. Drying Time: Comply with recommendations of product manufacturer for drying time between succeeding coats.

E. Moldings and Ornaments: Leave clean and true to details with no undue amount of paint in corners and depressions.

F. Edges of Paint: Where adjoining other materials or colors, make clean and sharp with no overlapping.

G. Refinishing: Refinish entire wall where portion of finish is deemed not acceptable.

H. Precaution: Do not paint over fusible links, UL labels, or sprinkler heads.

I. Exposed Plumbing and Mechanical Items: Finish items without factory finish such as conduits, pipes, access panels, and items of similar nature to match adjacent wall and ceiling surfaces, unless otherwise directed.

3.4 CLEANING

A. General: Touch up and restore finish where damaged. Remove spilled, splashed, or spattered paint from surfaces. Do not mar surface finish of item being cleaned.

B. Storage Space: Leave clean and in condition required for equivalent spaces in Project.

3.5 PAINT SYSTEMS

A. Schedule: Only major areas are scheduled. Treat miscellaneous and similar items and areas within room or space with similar system.

B. Number of Coats: Where number of coats are specified, it is only as a minimum requirement. Apply additional coats, at no additional cost to Owner, if necessary to completely hide base material, produce uniform color, and provide satisfactory finish result.

C. Thickness of Coats: For each paint system product, provide the manufacturer's recommended mil-thickness for each applied coat.

D. Systems Specifications: These specifications are a guide and are meant to establish procedure and quality. Confer with Architect to determine exact finish desired.



E. Acceptance of Final Colors: Do not apply final coats of paint for either exterior and interior systems until colors have been reviewed and accepted by the Architect.

3.6 INTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS (Systems are based on products by S-W; other manufacturers listed in Part Two may be used)

A. Interior Gypsum Board – Flat:

1. General: Provide as follows unless otherwise scheduled on Drawings or noted as follows in this Section.

2. Flat Finish — Low Odor Zero VOC System3. Primer: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Primer, B28W2600, 0 g/L VOC4. 1st coat: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Flat, B30-2600 series, 0 g/L VOC5. 2nd coat: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Flat, B30-2600 series, 0 g/L VOC

B. Interior Gypsum Board – Eggshell/Satin:

1. General: Provide as follows unless otherwise scheduled on Drawings or noted as follows in this Section.

2. Primer: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Primer, B28W2600 0 g/L VOC3. 1st coat: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Eg-Shel B26-2600 series, 0 g/L VOC4. 2nd coat: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Eg-Shel B26-2600 series, 0 g/L VOC

C. Interior Gypsum Board – Semi-gloss:

1. General: Provide at stairs, service areas and where scheduled.2. Primer: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Primer, B28W2600, 0 g/L VOC 3. 1st coat: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Semi-Gloss B31-2600 series, 0 g/L VOC4. 2nd coat: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Semi-Gloss B31-2600 series, 0 g/L VOC

D. Interior Gypsum Board – Epoxy Coatings:

1. General: Provide at Restroom and other gypsum surfaces as scheduled on Drawings and required by the the governing Health Codes:

2. Eg-Shel Finisha. Primer: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Primer, B28W2600, 0 g/L VOCb. 1st coat: Pro Industrial Pre-Catalyzed Water-Based Epoxy Eg-Shel,

K45 series, <150 g/L VOCc. 2nd coat: Pro Industrial Pre-Catalyzed Water-Based Epoxy Eg-Shel,

K45 series, <150 g/L VOC3. Semi-Gloss Finish (typical, unless noted otherwise)

a. Primer: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Primer, B28W2600, 0 g/L VOCb. 1st coat: Pro Industrial Pre-Catalyzed Water-Based Epoxy Semi-

Gloss, K46 series, <150 g/L VOCc. 2nd coat: Pro Industrial Pre-Catalyzed Water-Based Epoxy Semi-

Gloss, K46 series, <150 g/L VOC



4. Gloss Finish a. Primer: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Primer, B28W2600, 0 g/L VOCb. 1st coat: Pro Industrial Zero VOC Water-Based Epoxy Gloss, B73-

300 series, 0 g/L VOCc. 2nd coat: Pro Industrial Zero VOC Water-Based Epoxy Gloss, B73-

300 series, 0 g/L VOC

E. Interior Ferrous Metal:

1. General: Shop and field-applied paint finishes for the Work of Section 050500 – Metal Fabrications, is included in the Scope of Work for those Sections.

2. For other exposed-to-view ferrous metal items, including items specified in DIVISION 23 – Mechanical; and DIVISION 26 – Electrical, provide the finishes as follow:

3. Bare Metal Items; High Performance Coating System: Mechanical and Electrical Piping, Conduits, Ductwork, Supports, Hangers, Machinery and Similar Items:

a. Eg-Shel or Gloss Finish (Verify with Architect for each room / area prior to painting)

b. Primer: Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Primer, B66-310 series, <100 g/L VOC

c. 1st coat: Pro Industrial Zero VOC Water-Based Epoxy Eg-Shel, B73-360 series or Gloss, B73-300 series, 0 g/L VOC

d. 2nd coat: Pro Industrial Zero VOC Water-Based Epoxy Eg-Shel, B73-360 series or Gloss, B73-300 series, 0 g/L VOC

4. Shop Primed or painted (by others) Items; Semi-Gloss finish:a. Primer: Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Primer, B66-310 series,

<100 g/L VOCb. 1st coat: Pro Industrial Zero VOC Acrylic Semi-Gloss, B66-650

series, 0 g/L VOCc. 2nd coat: Pro Industrial Zero VOC Acrylic Semi-Gloss, B66-650

series, 0 g/L VOC

5. Shop Galvanized Items:

a. Galvanizing repair provided in Section 050500 – Metal Fabrications.

b. Galvanized Metal Decking & Ferrous Decking — Including Bar Joistsi. Flat, Eg-Shel, or Semi-Gloss Finishii. Primer: Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Primer,

B66-310 series, <100 g/L VOCiii. 1st coat: Low VOC Waterborne Acrylic Dryfall, Flat

B42W81, Eg-Shel B42W82, Semi-Gloss, B42W83, All sheens <50 g/L VOC



iv. 2nd coat: Low VOC Waterborne Acrylic Dryfall, Flat B42W81, Eg-Shel B42W82, Semi-Gloss, B42W83, All sheens <50 g/L VOC

c. Galvanized Metal Decking & Ferrous Decking — Including Bar Joists – High Performance Systemi. Primer: Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Primer,

B66-310 series, <100 g/L VOCii. 1st coat: Pro Industrial Multi-Surface Acrylic Eg-Shel,

B66-560 series, <150 g/L VOCiii. 2nd coat: Pro Industrial Multi-Surface Acrylic Eg-Shel,

B66-560 series, <150 g/L VOC

F. Interior Aluminum and Copper:

1. Refer to Section 076200 – Flashing and Sheet Metal for shop and field-applied paint finishes specified in those Sections.

2. Mechanical and Electrical Items:a. Pretreatment: Metal Pretreatment.b. 1st Coat: Aluminum Primer. Provide additional general purpose

sealer coat when recommended by paint manufacturer.c. 2nd Coat: Acrylic Paint, Semi-Gloss.d. 3rd Coat: Acrylic Paint, Semi-Gloss.

G. Interior Wood:

1. General: Transparant Finishes are specified and provided in Section 064123 Interior Architectural Woodwork

2. Semi-Gloss Finish — Low Odor Zero VOC System 3. Primer: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Primer, B28W2600, 0 g/L VOC4. 1st coat: Pro Industrial Zero VOC Acrylic Semi-Gloss, B66-650 series, 0

g/L VOC5. 2nd coat: Pro Industrial Zero VOC Acrylic Semi-Gloss, B66-650 series, 0

g/L VOC

H. Interior Mechanical Insulation; Finish Varies:

1. Provide finish materials recommended in writing by the mechanical insulation manufacturer for their products in exterior locations. Adapt the following as required.

a. 1st Coat: General Purpose PVA Sealer, or as recommended by the insulation manufacturer.

b. 2nd Coat: Match adjacent finish system.

I. Miscellaneous Interior Painting Systems:

1. Ductwork at Grilles and Diffusers:



a. Apply interior surfaces of ductwork partially visible through grilles and diffusers.

b. 1st Coat: Galvanized Metal Primer.

c. 2nd Coat: Acrylic Paint, Matte Black.

d. 3rd Coat: Acrylic Paint, Matte Black.

2. Exposed Insulated Pipes and Ductwork:

a. 1st Coat: 1 coat General Purpose PVA sealer. Omit sealer where glass fabric jackets are used.

b. 2nd Coat: Acrylic Paint, match adjacent finish.

c. 3rd Coat: Acrylic Paint, match adjacent finish.

3. Exposed Non-Insulated Pipes and Ductwork: Including conduit.

a. Cast-Iron Pipe:

1) Pre-treatment: Conform with the requirements of Section 050500 – Metal Fabrications.

2) 1st Coat: Ferrous Metal Primer.

3) 2nd Coat: Acrylic Paint, match adjacent finish.

4) 3rd Coat: Acrylic Paint, match adjacent finish.

b. Other Pipes, Conduit, and Ductwork:

1) Pre-treatment: Conform with the requirements of Section 050500 – Metal Fabrications.

2) 1st Coat: As specified for ferrous and non-ferrous metals as applicable.

3) 2nd Coat: Acrylic Paint, match adjacent finish.

4) 3rd Coat: Acrylic Paint, match adjacent finish.

J. Miscellaneous Interior Painting Systems:

1. Factory Finished Equipment: Satisfactorily refinish surfaces damaged before, during, or after installation as directed; use 128 semi-gloss enamel.

2. Plywood Equipment Backing:



a. General: Telephone, Data and Electric Closets.

b. 1st Coat: Latex Enamel Undercoater.

c. 2nd Coat: Acrylic Paint; match adjacent finish.

d. 3rd Coat: Acrylic Paint; match adjacent finish.

K. Pipe Identification:

1. General: Per ANSI A13.1; buried pipe, electrical conduit, and pipe in concealed spaces such as furred spaces and shafts not included.

2. Color Scheme: ANSI Z53.1 in combination with legend and flow markers; continuous total length coverage. Safety colors as specified under applicable Mechanical Section.

3. Legend: Stencil letters of colors, type, and sizes per ANSI A13.1. Tags for identification of pipes less than 3/4-inch overall outside diameter, including valves and fittings; provided under applicable mechanical Section.

4. Flow Markers: Provide each type with appropriate size arrows to indicate flow direction in pipe; same color as legend.

5. Visibility: Locate legend and flowmarkers for easy visibility from operating floor; space not over 20 feet with at least one per room.

3.8 CLEANING:

A. Comply with provisions of Section 017900 – Cleaning.

B. Remove paint spots, oil, and stains from adjacent surfaces upon completion of Work; leave Work clean.

END OF SECTION


WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION 10 26 00 - 1

SECTION 10 26 00 – WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Work Included: Provide and install wall protection, wall corner guards and other finish protection products, complete, as shown on Drawings and as specified, including:

1. Surface-Mounted Corner Guards and Partition End Guards.

2. Protective Wall Covering Wainscot


1. Section 081113 – Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.

2. Section 084113 – Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts.

3. Section 081416 – Flush Wood Doors.

4. Section 079200 – Joint Sealants.

5. Section 087100 – Door Hardware


1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with provisions of Section 013300 – Submittal Procedures.

B. Product Data: Manufacturer's catalog cuts, standard color charts, and data sheets; including installation details and instructions, for each item specified.

C. Samples:

1. Crash Rails: 12-inch-long piece of each type specified, including color.

2. Corridor Handrail: 12-inch-long piece of each specified type, including mounting bracket and specified finish.

3. Partition End and Corner Guards: 12-inch-long piece of each type specified, including color.

4. Wall protection and Door Protection: 12-inch-square piece of each specified type, including corner and specified color.




A. Delivery and Storage: Deliver and store items and related fasteners in manufacturer's original packaging, identified with manufacturer's name and type of product, and size. Store materials indoors, protected from moisture and other sources of damage.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. General: Provide vinyl/acrovyn wall and corner protection single-sourced from one manufacturer to assure color matching.

B. Manufacturer: Inpro Corporation, Construction Specialties, Inc., Pawling Corporation OR Korogard

a. Basis-of-Design: Inpro Corporation

C. Fire Hazard Classification: Flame spread of 25 or less when tested per ASTM E84.

2.3 CORNER GUARDS

A. Type: Inpro Coorporation 160 Surface mount Corner Guard with continuous aluminum retainer.

1. Size: 2” X 2” X 4’-0”.

2. Mounting Style: Surface-mounted.

3. Color: Woodland Faux- Wood Patterns, as scheduled on Drawings.

4. Mounting Height: 4 feet high from top of finished floor.

5. Locations: Typical at all corners and as shown on Drawings.

2.4 PROTECTIVE WALL COVERING WAINSCOT

A. Type: Sheet plastic wall protection by Inpro Coorporation. Typical where shown on Drawings.

1. Size: 406- 0.060” thick Rigid Sheet by sizes shown on Drawings.


3. Color: As scheduled on Drawings.

4. Mounting Height: From finished floor to 4 feet above finish floor. Align top of wall protection with top of corner guards where occurs.

5. Locations: As shown on Drawings.



2.7 PARTITION END PROTECTION

A Manufacturer: Wall Protection by InPro Corporation

B. Type: Composite assembly consisting of two 160 surface mounted corner guards and partition-end infill panel of adhesive-applied .060-inch-thick Acrovyn sheet.

1. Size: Verify partition width; 2-inch return at each wall face.


3. Color: As scheduled on Drawings.

4. Mounting Height: From finish floor to 4 feet above finish floor.

5. Provide manufacturer's coordinated top and bottom caps.

6. Locations: Al all wall end partitions, typical.


A. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard, removable, corrosion-resistant fasteners of size and length suitable for the conditions of installation.

B. Adhesive: As recommended by manufacturer for setting material.

C. Backing Plates: As specified in Section 092216 – Non-Structural Metal Framing and as shown on Drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verification of Conditions: After application of wall base and finish painting of walls is complete, examine areas and conditions under which items are to be installed. If unsatisfactory conditions exist, do not proceed with the Work until such conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Cleaning: Prior to application, clean side of units that will be in contact with wall surface.

3.3 INSTALLATION



A. General: Install units per manufacturer's instructions and as specified. Install wall and corner guards, crash rails and handrails plumb and true and securely fastened to backing plates or substrates.


A. Cleaning: Prior to time of final acceptance, strip units of protective coverings, and clean in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Defective Materials: Remove and replace any defective, misaligned, or damaged units, at no additional cost to Owner.

END OF SECTION


WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 211313 - 1

SECTION 211313 - WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Pipes, fittings, and specialties.2. Sprinklers.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Standard-Pressure Sprinkler Piping: Wet-pipe sprinkler system piping designed to operate at working pressure of 175-psig maximum.



1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For wet-pipe sprinkler systems.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.2. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For wet-pipe sprinkler systems indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.


A. Coordination Drawings: Sprinkler systems, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Domestic water piping.2. Compressed air piping.3. HVAC hydronic piping.4. Items penetrating finished ceiling include the following:

a. Lighting fixtures.b. Air outlets and inlets.



B. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and NICET Level III technician.

C. Approved Sprinkler Piping Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 13, that have been approved by authorities having jurisdiction, including hydraulic calculations if applicable.

D. Welding certificates.

E. Fire-hydrant flow test report.

F. Field Test Reports and Certificates: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements and as described in NFPA 13. Include "Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping."

G. Field quality-control reports.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wet-pipe sprinkler systems and specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Sprinkler Cabinets: Finished, wall-mounted, steel cabinet with hinged cover, and with space for minimum of six spare sprinklers plus sprinkler wrench. Include number of sprinklers required by NFPA 13 and sprinkler wrench. Include separate cabinet with sprinklers and wrench for each type of sprinkler used on Project.


A. Installer Qualifications:

1. Installer's responsibilities include designing, fabricating, and installing sprinkler systems and providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering responsibility. Base calculations on results of fire-hydrant flow test.

a. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of working plans, calculations, and field test reports by a qualified professional engineer or NICET Level III technician.

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to 2010 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Sprinkler system equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and testing shall comply with the following:

1. NFPA 13.

B. Standard-Pressure Piping System Component: Listed for 175-psig minimum working pressure.

C. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer or NICET Level III technician to design wet-pipe sprinkler systems.

1. Fire-hydrant flow test:

a. Refer to Section 211200 for water flow test information.

b. Margin of Safety for Available Water Flow and Pressure: 10 percent, including losses through water-service piping, valves, and backflow preventers.

c. Sprinkler Occupancy Hazard Classifications (Note, based on current information the tenants of the building are unknown. All areas shall be designed for Ordinary Hazard Group I):1) Building Service Areas: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.2) Electrical Equipment Rooms: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.3) General Storage Areas: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.4) Mechanical Equipment Rooms: Ordinary Hazard, Group 1.5) Office and Public Areas: Light Hazard.

2. Minimum Density for Automatic-Sprinkler Piping Design:a. Light-Hazard Occupancy: 0.10 gpm over 1500-sq. ft. area.b. Ordinary-Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy: 0.15 gpm over 1500-sq. ft. area.c. Ordinary-Hazard, Group 2 Occupancy: 0.20 gpm over 1500-sq. ft. area.d. Special Occupancy Hazard: As determined by authorities having

jurisdiction.3. Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler (Note, based on current information the

tenants of the building are unknown. All areas shall be designed for Ordinary Hazard Group I with a maximum protection area of 130 sq.ft.):a. Office Spaces: 225 sq. ft. b. Storage Areas: 130 sq. ft.c. Mechanical Equipment Rooms: 130 sq. ft.d. Electrical Equipment Rooms: 130 sq. ft.e. Other Areas: According to NFPA 13 recommendations unless otherwise

indicated.

D. Seismic Performance: Sprinkler piping shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to NFPA 13 and ASCE/SEI 7.



2.2 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Standard-Weight, Galvanized- and Black-Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B. Pipe ends may be factory or field formed to match joining method.

B. Schedule 30, Galvanized- and Black-Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135/A 135M; ASTM A 795/A 795M, Type E; or ASME B36.10M wrought steel, with wall thickness not less than Schedule 30 and not more than Schedule 40. Pipe ends may be factory or field formed to match joining method.

C. Thinwall Galvanized- and Black-Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135/A 135M or ASTM A 795/A 795M, threadable, with wall thickness less than Schedule 30 and equal to or greater than Schedule 10. Pipe ends may be factory or field formed to match joining method.

D. Schedule 10, Black-Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135/A 135M or ASTM A 795/A 795M, Schedule 10 in NPS 5 and smaller; and NFPA 13-specified wall thickness in NPS 6 to NPS 10, plain end.

E. Nonstandard OD, Thinwall Black-Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135/A 135M or ASTM A 795/A 795M thinwall with plain ends and wall thickness less than Schedule 10.

F. Hybrid Black-Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135/A 135M or ASTM A 795/A 795M lightwall, with wall thickness less than Schedule 10 and greater than Schedule 5.

G. Schedule 5 Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135/A 135M or ASTM A 795/A 795M lightwall with plain ends.

H. Galvanized- and Black-Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard-weight, seamless steel pipe with threaded ends.

I. Galvanized- and Uncoated-Steel Couplings: ASTM A 865/A 865M, threaded.

J. Galvanized and Uncoated, Gray-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125, standard pattern.

K. Malleable- or Ductile-Iron Unions: UL 860.

L. Cast-Iron Flanges: ASME 16.1, Class 125.

M. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, Class 150.

1. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick ASME B16.21, nonmetallic and asbestos free or EPDM rubber gasket.

a. Class 125 and Class 250, Cast-Iron, Flat-Face Flanges: Full-face gaskets.b. Class 150 and Class 300, Ductile-Iron or -Steel, Raised-Face Flanges:

Ring-type gaskets.

2. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.



N. Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M and ASME B16.9.

1. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12M/D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

O. Grooved-Joint, Steel-Pipe Appurtenances:1. Pressure Rating: 175-psig minimum.2. Painted Grooved-End Fittings for Steel Piping: ASTM A 47/A 47M, malleable-

iron casting or ASTM A 536, ductile-iron casting, with dimensions matching steel pipe.

3. Grooved-End-Pipe Couplings for Steel Piping: AWWA C606 and UL 213 rigid pattern, unless otherwise indicated, for steel-pipe dimensions. Include ferrous housing sections, EPDM-rubber gasket, and bolts and nuts.

2.3 SPRINKLERS

A. Acceptable manufacturers:1. Viking.2. Victaulic.3. Reliable.4. Tyco.

B. Listed in UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" or FM Global's "Approval Guide."

C. Pressure Rating for Automatic Sprinklers: 175-psig minimum.

D. Automatic Sprinklers with Heat-Responsive Element:1. Nonresidential Applications: UL 199 .2. Characteristics: Nominal 1/2-inch orifice with Discharge Coefficient K of 5.6, and

for "Ordinary" temperature classification rating unless otherwise indicated or required by application.

E. Sprinkler Guards:1. Standard: UL 199.2. Type: Wire cage with fastening device for attaching to sprinkler.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Perform fire-hydrant flow test according to NFPA 13 and NFPA 291. Use results for system design calculations required in "Quality Assurance" Article.

B. Report test results promptly and in writing.



3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated on approved working plans.

1. Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval from authorities having jurisdiction. File written approval with Architect before deviating from approved working plans.

2. Coordinate layout and installation of sprinklers with other construction that penetrates ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, and partition assemblies.

B. Piping Standard: Comply with NFPA 13 requirements for installation of sprinkler piping.

C. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with NFPA 13 requirements for seismic-restraint device materials and installation.

D. Use listed fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions in pipe sizes.

E. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller.

F. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves, apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and larger end connections.

G. Install "Inspector's Test Connections" in sprinkler system piping, complete with shutoff valve, and sized and located according to NFPA 13.

H. Install sprinkler piping with drains for complete system drainage.

I. Install sprinkler control valves, test assemblies, and drain risers adjacent to standpipes when sprinkler piping is connected to standpipes.

J. Install automatic (ball drip) drain valve at each check valve for fire-department connection, to drain piping between fire-department connection and check valve. Install drain piping to and spill over floor drain or to outside building.

K. Install alarm devices in piping systems.

L. Install hangers and supports for sprinkler system piping according to NFPA 13. Comply with requirements for hanger materials in NFPA 13.

M. Install pressure gages on riser or feed main, at each sprinkler test connection, and at top of each standpipe. Include pressure gages with connection not less than NPS 1/4 and with soft-metal seated globe valve, arranged for draining pipe between gage and valve. Install gages to permit removal, and install where they are not subject to freezing.

N. Fill sprinkler system piping with water.



3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Install couplings, flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and special fittings that have finish and pressure ratings same as or higher than system's pressure rating for aboveground applications unless otherwise indicated.

B. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller.

C. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves, apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and larger end connections.

D. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

E. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before assembly.

F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable for water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9.

G. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded

or damaged.

H. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12M/D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to "Quality Assurance" Article.

1. Shop weld pipe joints where welded piping is indicated. Do not use welded joints for galvanized-steel pipe.

I. Steel-Piping, Cut-Grooved Joints: Cut square-edge groove in end of pipe according to AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipe and grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe joints.

J. Steel-Piping, Roll-Grooved Joints: Roll rounded-edge groove in end of pipe according to AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipe and grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe grooved joints.

3.4 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION

A. Install sprinklers in suspended ceilings in center of narrow dimension of acoustical ceiling panels.

B. Install dry-type sprinklers with water supply from heated space. Do not install pendent or sidewall, wet-type sprinklers in areas subject to freezing.



C. Install sprinklers into flexible, sprinkler hose fittings, and install hose into bracket on ceiling grid.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements in NFPA 13.

B. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals.


A. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Leak Test: After installation, charge systems and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

3. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler systems according to NFPA 13, "Systems Acceptance" Chapter.

4. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices.5. Coordinate with fire-alarm tests. Operate as required.6. Coordinate with fire-pump tests. Operate as required.7. Verify that equipment hose threads are same as local fire department equipment.

B. Sprinkler piping system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.7 CLEANING

A. Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers.

B. Only sprinklers with their original factory finish are acceptable. Remove and replace any sprinklers that are painted or have any other finish than their original factory finish.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain the system .



ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220518-1

SECTION 220518 - ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Escutcheons.2. Floor plates.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ESCUTCHEONS

A. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With polished, chrome-plated finish and setscrew fastener.

B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with chrome-plated finish and spring-clip fasteners.

2.2 FLOOR PLATES

A. One-Piece Floor Plates: Cast-iron flange with holes for fasteners.

B. Split-Casting Floor Plates: Cast brass with concealed hinge.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and finished floors.

B. Install escutcheons with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and with OD that completely covers opening.

1. Escutcheons for New Piping:


ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220518-2

a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type.

b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish.

c. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type.d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece,

cast-brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish.e. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece,

stamped-steel type.f. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-

brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish.g. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece,

stamped-steel type.h. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with

polished, chrome-plated finish.i. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type.j. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass type with

polished, chrome-plated finish.k. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped-steel type.

C. Install floor plates for piping penetrations of equipment-room floors.

D. Install floor plates with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with OD that completely covers opening.

1. New Piping: One-piece, floor-plate type.2. Existing Piping: Split-casting, floor-plate type.


A. Replace broken and damaged escutcheons and floor plates using new materials.



BALL VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22052312-1

SECTION 220523.12 - BALL VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Bronze ball valves.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. CWP: Cold working pressure.


A. Product Data: For each type of valve.

1. Certification that products comply with NSF 61 Annex G and NSF 372.


A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:

1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.2. Protect threads, flange faces, and soldered ends.3. Set ball valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.

B. Use the following precautions during storage:

1. Maintain valve end protection.2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher-than-ambient-dew-point

temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.

C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use operating handles or stems as lifting or rigging points.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES

A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single manufacturer.



B. ASME Compliance:

1. ASME B1.20.1 for threads for threaded end valves.2. ASME B16.18 for solder-joint connections.3. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.

C. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 Annex G and NSF 372 for valve materials for potable-water service.

D. Bronze valves shall be made with dezincification-resistant materials. Bronze valves made with copper alloy (brass) containing more than 15 percent zinc are not permitted.

E. Valve Pressure-Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures.

F. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.

G. Valve Actuator Types:

1. Handlever: For quarter-turn valves smaller than NPS 4.

H. Valves in Insulated Piping:

1. Include 2-inch stem extensions.2. Extended operating handles of nonthermal-conductive material and protective

sleeves that allow operation of valves without breaking vapor seals or disturbing insulation.

3. Memory stops that are fully adjustable after insulation is applied.

2.2 BRONZE BALL VALVES

A. Two-Piece, Bronze Ball Valves with Full Port, and Bronze or Brass Trim:


a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.b. Crane; Crane Energy Flow Solutions.c. Hammond Valve.d. NIBCO INC.e. Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company.f. Zurn Industries, LLC.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-110.b. CWP Rating: 600 psig.c. Body Design: Two piece.d. Body Material: Bronze.e. Ends: Threaded and soldered.

http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?ulid=9499

http://www.specagent.com/Lookup?uid=123456984916








f. Seats: PTFE.g. Stem: Bronze or brass.h. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.i. Port: Full.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling.

B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made accessible by such operations.

C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.

D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.

E. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.

3.2 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.

B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.

C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.

D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.

E. Install valve tags. Comply with requirements in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for valve tags and schedules.

3.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. If valves with specified CWP ratings are unavailable, the same types of valves with higher CWP ratings may be substituted.

B. Select valves with the following end connections:

1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends except where solder-joint valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below.



3.4 DOMESTIC HOT- AND COLD-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller:

1. Bronze Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded ends.2. Two-piece, bronze ball valves with full port and bronze or brass trim.

END OF SECTION 220523.12


HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529-1

SECTION 220529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following hangers and supports for plumbing system piping and equipment:

1. Steel pipe hangers and supports.2. Trapeze pipe hangers.3. Metal framing systems.4. Thermal-hanger shield inserts.5. Fastener systems.6. Pipe stands.7. Pipe positioning systems.8. Equipment supports.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.

B. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and Supports."


A. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.

B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.

C. Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment and obtain approval from authorities having jurisdiction.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Steel pipe hangers and supports.2. Thermal-hanger shield inserts.3. Powder-actuated fastener systems.4. Pipe positioning systems.



B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following:

1. Trapeze pipe hangers. Include Product Data for components.2. Metal framing systems. Include Product Data for components.3. Pipe stands. Include Product Data for components.4. Equipment supports.

C. Welding certificates.


A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to [AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."] [AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code--Reinforcing Steel."] [ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.]


1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."2. AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum."3. AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code--Reinforcing Steel."4. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.

2.2 STEEL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. Refer to Part 3 "Hanger and Support Applications" Article for where to use specific hanger and support types.

B. Manufacturers:

1. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.2. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.3. Grinnell Corp.4. PHD Manufacturing, Inc.

C. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped.



D. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.

E. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion for support of bearing surface of piping.

2.3 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS

A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from structural-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.

2.4 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Description: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made of steel channels and other components.

B. Manufacturers:

1. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.2. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.; ERISTRUT Div.3. Thomas & Betts Corporation.4. Unistrut Corp.; Tyco International, Ltd.

C. Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish unless bare metal surfaces are indicated.


2.5 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS

A. Description: 100-psig- minimum, compressive-strength insulation insert encased in sheet metal shield.

B. Manufacturers:

1. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc.2. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.3. PHS Industries, Inc.4. Pipe Shields, Inc.5. Rilco Manufacturing Company, Inc.6. Value Engineered Products, Inc.

C. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate or ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with vapor barrier.

D. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate or ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass.

E. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.



F. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.

G. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature.

2.6 FASTENER SYSTEMS

A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Hilti, Inc.b. ITW Ramset/Red Head.c. Masterset Fastening Systems, Inc.d. MKT Fastening, LLC.e. Powers Fasteners.

B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type stainless steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

1. Manufacturers:

a. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.b. Empire Industries, Inc.c. Hilti, Inc.d. ITW Ramset/Red Head.e. MKT Fastening, LLC.f. Powers Fasteners.

2.7 PIPE STAND FABRICATION

A. Pipe Stands, General: Shop or field-fabricated assemblies made of manufactured corrosion-resistant components to support roof-mounted piping.

B. Compact Pipe Stand: One-piece plastic unit with integral-rod-roller, pipe clamps, or V-shaped cradle to support pipe, for roof installation without membrane penetration.

1. Manufacturers:

a. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.b. MIRO Industries.

C. Curb-Mounting-Type Pipe Stands: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe support made from structural-steel shape, continuous-thread rods, and rollers for mounting on permanent stationary roof curb.



2.8 PIPE POSITIONING SYSTEMS

A. Description: IAPMO PS 42, system of metal brackets, clips, and straps for positioning piping in pipe spaces for plumbing fixtures for commercial applications.

B. Manufacturers:

1. C & S Mfg. Corp.2. HOLDRITE Corp.; Hubbard Enterprises.

2.9 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural-steel shapes.


A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.

1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS

A. Specific hanger and support requirements are specified in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment.

B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized, metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish.

D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.

E. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.

F. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:



1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.

2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of 120 to 450 deg F pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 16, requiring up to 4 inches of insulation.

3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 24, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation.

4. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 24, if little or no insulation is required.

5. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to allow off-center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.

6. Adjustable, Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 8.

7. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.

8. Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.

9. Adjustable, Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 2.

10. Split Pipe-Ring with or without Turnbuckle-Adjustment Hangers (MSS Type 11): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 8.

11. Extension Hinged or 2-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 3.

12. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.13. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or

contraction.14. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36,

with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.15. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36,

with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange and with U-bolt to retain pipe.

16. Adjustable, Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for pipes, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36, if vertical adjustment is required, with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.

17. Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1 to NPS 30, from 2 rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.

18. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 20, from single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.

19. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 42, if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical adjustment is not necessary.

20. Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 24, if small horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur and vertical adjustment is not necessary.

21. Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 30, if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might be required in addition to expansion and contraction.



G. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20.

2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20, if longer ends are required for riser clamps.

H. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads.

2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings.4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various

types of building attachments.5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping

installations.

I. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.

2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist construction to attach to top flange of structural shape.

3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles.

4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.

5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are considerable and rod sizes are large.

6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.7. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required

tangent to flange edge.8. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams.9. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of

steel I-beams for heavy loads.10. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of

steel I-beams for heavy loads, with link extensions.11. Malleable Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to

structural steel.12. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from

above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:

a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb.b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb.c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.

13. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.



14. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required.

15. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear horizontal movement where headroom is limited.

J. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation.

3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.

K. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping movement.

2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 1-1/4 inches.

3. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll hanger with springs.

4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal expansion in piping systems.

5. Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from hanger.

6. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from base support.

7. Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from trapeze support.

8. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of stress from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected equipment. Include auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load-adjustment capability. These supports include the following types:

a. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally.b. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically.c. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze

member.

L. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

M. Comply with MFMA-102 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.



N. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete construction.

O. Use pipe positioning systems in pipe spaces behind plumbing fixtures to support supply and waste piping for plumbing fixtures.

3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Steel Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure.

B. Trapeze Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers.

1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual pipe hangers.

2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1.

C. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and support together on field-assembled metal framing systems.

D. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.

E. Fastener System Installation:

1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less than 4 inches thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.

2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Pipe Stand Installation:

1. Pipe Stand Types except Curb-Mounting Type: Assemble components and mount on smooth roof surface. Do not penetrate roof membrane.

2. Curb-Mounting-Type Pipe Stands: Assemble components or fabricate pipe stand and mount on permanent, stationary roof curb. Refer to Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories" for curbs.

G. Pipe Positioning System Installation: Install support devices to make rigid supply and waste piping connections to each plumbing fixture. Refer to Division 22 Section "Plumbing Fixtures" for plumbing fixtures.



H. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories.

I. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.

J. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

K. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.

L. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

M. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

N. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 (for building services piping) are not exceeded.

O. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following:

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.

a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation.

b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.

c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees.


4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:

a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick.b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.



c. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.d. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick.e. NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick.

5. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood inserts.6. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield.7. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping

insulation.


A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support equipment above floor.

B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface.

C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.

3.4 METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports.

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following:


2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.3. Remove welding flux immediately.4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and

contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.

B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.



3.6 PAINTING

A. Touch Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

B. Touch Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 09 painting Sections.

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.



VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

220548-1

SECTION 220548 - VIBRATION & SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING & EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Isolation pads.2. Isolation mounts.3. Restrained elastomeric isolation mounts.4. Restrained spring isolators.5. Housed spring mounts.6. Elastomeric hangers.7. Spring hangers.8. Spring hangers with vertical-limit stops.9. Pipe riser resilient supports.10. Resilient pipe guides.11. Seismic snubbers.12. Restraining braces and cables.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. IBC: International Building Code.

B. ICC-ES: ICC-Evaluation Service.

C. OSHPD: Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development for the State of California.


A. Seismic-Restraint Loading:

1. Site Class as Defined in the IBC: See Structural Drawings.2. Assigned Seismic Use Group or Building Category as Defined in the IBC: IV.

a. Component Importance Factor: 1.5.b. Component Response Modification Factor: See Structural Drawings.c. Component Amplification Factor: See Structural Drawings

3. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at Short Periods (0.2 Second): See Structural drawings.

4. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at 1-Second Period: See structural drawings



220548-2

1.4 SUBMITTALS


1. Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration isolation device.

2. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each type and size of seismic-restraint component used.

a. Tabulate types and sizes of seismic restraints, complete with report numbers and rated strength in tension and shear as evaluated by an evaluation service member of ICC-ES.

b. Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and compliance with requirements.

3. Interlocking Snubbers: Include ratings for horizontal, vertical, and combined loads.

B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For vibration isolation and seismic-restraint details indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Design Calculations: Calculate static and dynamic loading due to equipment weight and operation, seismic forces required to select vibration isolators, seismic restraints, and for designing vibration isolation bases.

2. Riser Supports: Include riser diagrams and calculations showing anticipated expansion and contraction at each support point, initial and final loads on building structure, spring deflection changes, and seismic loads. Include certification that riser system has been examined for excessive stress and that none will exist.

3. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail overall dimensions, including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides and rails, base weights, equipment static loads, power transmission, component misalignment, and cantilever loads.

4. Seismic-Restraint Details:

a. Design Analysis: To support selection and arrangement of seismic restraints. Include calculations of combined tensile and shear loads.

b. Details: Indicate fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachments of restraints to the restrained items and to the structure. Show attachment locations, methods, and spacings. Identify components, list their strengths, and indicate directions and values of forces transmitted to the structure during seismic events. Indicate association with vibration isolation devices.

c. Preapproval and Evaluation Documentation: By an evaluation service member of ICC-ES, showing maximum ratings of restraint items and the basis for approval (tests or calculations).

C. Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of seismic bracing for plumbing piping and equipment with other systems and equipment in the vicinity, including other supports and seismic restraints.



220548-3


E. Qualification Data: For professional engineer and testing agency.


A. Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the IBC unless requirements in this Section are more stringent.

B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

C. Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis and shall bear anchorage preapproval OPA number from OSHPD, preapproved by ICC-ES, or preapproved by another agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum seismic-restraint ratings. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based on calculations. If preapproved ratings are not available, submittals based on independent testing are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear and tensile loads) to support seismic-restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATORS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Ace Mountings Co., Inc.2. Amber/Booth Company, Inc.3. California Dynamics Corporation.4. Isolation Technology, Inc.5. Kinetics Noise Control.6. Mason Industries.7. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc.8. Vibration Isolation.9. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.

B. Pads: Arranged in single or multiple layers of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad area, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized-steel baseplates, and factory cut to sizes that match requirements of supported equipment.

1. Resilient Material: Oil- and water-resistant neoprene.

C. Mounts: Double-deflection type, with molded, oil-resistant rubber, hermetically sealed compressed fiberglass, or neoprene isolator elements with factory-drilled, encapsulated top plate for bolting to equipment and with baseplate for bolting to structure. Color-code or otherwise identify to indicate capacity range.



220548-4

1. Materials: Cast-ductile-iron or welded steel housing containing two separate and opposing, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene elements that prevent central threaded element and attachment hardware from contacting the housing during normal operation.

2. Neoprene: Shock-absorbing materials compounded according to the standard for bridge-bearing neoprene as defined by AASHTO.

D. Restrained Mounts: All-directional mountings with seismic restraint.



E. Spring Isolators: Freestanding, laterally stable, open-spring isolators.

1. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load.

2. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load.3. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness.4. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without

deformation or failure.5. Baseplates: Factory drilled for bolting to structure and bonded to 1/4-inch- thick,

rubber isolator pad attached to baseplate underside. Baseplates shall limit floor load to 500 psig.

6. Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and cap screw to fasten and level equipment.

F. Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open-spring isolators with seismic or limit-stop restraint.

1. Housing: Steel with resilient vertical-limit stops to prevent spring extension due to weight being removed; factory-drilled baseplate bonded to 1/4-inch- thick, neoprene or rubber isolator pad attached to baseplate underside; and adjustable equipment mounting and leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation.

2. Restraint: Seismic or limit-stop as required for equipment and authorities having jurisdiction.



deformation or failure.

G. Housed Spring Mounts: Housed spring isolator with integral seismic snubbers.

1. Housing: Ductile-iron or steel housing to provide all-directional seismic restraint.2. Base: Factory drilled for bolting to structure.



220548-5

3. Snubbers: Vertically adjustable to allow a maximum of 1/4-inch travel up or down before contacting a resilient collar.

H. Elastomeric Hangers: Single or double-deflection type, fitted with molded, oil-resistant elastomeric isolator elements bonded to steel housings with threaded connections for hanger rods. Color-code or otherwise identify to indicate capacity range.

I. Spring Hangers: Combination coil-spring and elastomeric-insert hanger with spring and insert in compression.

1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.



deformation or failure.6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel-washer-

reinforced cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame.7. Self-centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and

support spring coil.

J. Spring Hangers with Vertical-Limit Stop: Combination coil-spring and elastomeric-insert hanger with spring and insert in compression and with a vertical-limit stop.




deformation or failure.6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene.7. Adjustable Vertical Stop: Steel washer with neoprene washer "up-stop" on lower

threaded rod.8. Self-centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and


K. Resilient Pipe Guides: Telescopic arrangement of 2 steel tubes or post and sleeve arrangement separated by a minimum of 1/2-inch- thick neoprene. Where clearances are not readily visible, a factory-set guide height with a shear pin to allow vertical motion due to pipe expansion and contraction shall be fitted. Shear pin shall be removable and reinsertable to allow for selection of pipe movement. Guides shall be capable of motion to meet location requirements.



220548-6

2.2 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICES


1. Amber/Booth Company, Inc.2. California Dynamics Corporation.3. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.4. Hilti, Inc.5. Kinetics Noise Control.6. Loos & Co.; Cableware Division.7. Mason Industries.8. TOLCO Incorporated; a brand of NIBCO INC.9. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd.

B. General Requirements for Restraint Components: Rated strengths, features, and applications shall be as defined in reports by an evaluation service member of ICC-ES.

1. Structural Safety Factor: Allowable strength in tension, shear, and pullout force of components shall be at least four times the maximum seismic forces to which they will be subjected.

C. Snubbers: Factory fabricated using welded structural-steel shapes and plates, anchor bolts, and replaceable resilient isolation washers and bushings.

1. Anchor bolts for attaching to concrete shall be seismic-rated, drill-in, and stud-wedge or female-wedge type.

2. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: Oil- and water-resistant neoprene.3. Maximum 1/4-inch air gap, and minimum 1/4-inch- thick resilient cushion.

D. Channel Support System: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated support assembly made of slotted steel channels with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building structure at the other end and other matching components and with corrosion-resistant coating; and rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces.

E. Restraint Cables: ASTM A 492 stainless-steel cables with end connections made of steel assemblies with thimbles, brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for restraining cable service; and with a minimum of two clamping bolts for cable engagement.

F. Hanger Rod Stiffener: Steel tube or steel slotted-support-system sleeve with internally bolted connections to hanger rod.

G. Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchor Bolts: Neoprene bushings designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of anchor bolts and studs.

H. Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene elements and steel sleeves designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of attachment devices used.

I. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One-piece, molded, oil- and water-resistant neoprene, with a flat washer face.



220548-7

J. Mechanical Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type in zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488. Minimum length of eight times diameter.

K. Adhesive Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and capsule anchor system containing polyvinyl or urethane methacrylate-based resin and accelerator, or injected polymer or hybrid mortar adhesive. Provide anchor bolts and hardware with zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488.

2.3 FACTORY FINISHES

A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting.

B. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested equipment before shipping.

1. Powder coating on springs and housings.2. All hardware shall be galvanized. Hot-dip galvanize metal components for

exterior use.3. Baked enamel or powder coat for metal components on isolators for interior use.4. Color-code or otherwise mark vibration isolation and seismic-control devices to

indicate capacity range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic-control devices for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations before installation.


3.2 APPLICATIONS

A. Multiple Pipe Supports: Secure pipes to trapeze member with clamps approved for application by an evaluation service member of ICC-ES.

B. Hanger Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger rod stiffeners where indicated or scheduled on Drawings to receive them and where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods due to seismic forces.



220548-8

C. Strength of Support and Seismic-Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads within specified loading limits.

3.3 VIBRATION-CONTROL AND SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION

A. Equipment Restraints:

1. Install seismic snubbers on plumbing equipment mounted on vibration isolators. Locate snubbers as close as possible to vibration isolators and bolt to equipment base and supporting structure.

2. Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inches.

3. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an evaluation service member of ICC-ES providing required submittals for component.

B. Piping Restraints:

1. Comply with requirements in MSS SP-127.2. Space lateral supports a maximum of 40 feet o.c., and longitudinal supports a

maximum of 80 feet o.c.3. Brace a change of direction longer than 12 feet.

C. Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure.

D. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an evaluation service member of ICC-ES providing required submittals for component.

E. Install bushing assemblies for anchor bolts for floor-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media between anchor bolt and mounting hole in concrete base.

F. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached to wall.

G. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.

H. Drilled-in Anchors:

1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling. Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.

2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full design strength.



220548-9

3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-duty sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to which anchor is to be fastened.

4. Adhesive Anchors: Clean holes to remove loose material and drilling dust prior to installation of adhesive. Place adhesive in holes proceeding from the bottom of the hole and progressing toward the surface in such a manner as to avoid introduction of air pockets in the adhesive.

5. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench.6. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless steel anchors for

exterior applications.

3.4 ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION

A. Install flexible connections in piping where they cross seismic joints, where adjacent sections or branches are supported by different structural elements, and where the connections terminate with connection to equipment that is anchored to a different structural element from the one supporting the connections as they approach equipment. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping" for piping flexible connections.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust isolators after piping system is at operating weight.

B. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during normal operation.

C. Adjust active height of sprint isolators.

D. Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation.



PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION

220719 - 1

©2013 Spectrum Engineers, Inc.

SECTION 220719 - PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes insulating the following plumbing piping services:

1. Domestic cold-water piping.2. Domestic hot-water piping.3. Domestic recirculating hot-water piping.4. Sanitary drain piping.5. Roof drains and rainwater leaders.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

B. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests and test methods employed.

C. Field quality-control reports.


A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.

B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less.

2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed index of 150 or less.


A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.



220719 - 2


1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application. Before preparing piping Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance.

C. Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing.

1.6 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results.

B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Piping Insulation Schedule," "Outdoor, Aboveground Piping Insulation Schedule," and "Outdoor, Underground Piping Insulation Schedule" articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.

B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.

D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795.

E. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:


a. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; Coreplus 1200.b. Johns Manville; Micro-Lok.c. Knauf Insulation; 1000-Degree Pipe Insulation.d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley-K.e. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation.

2. Type I, 850 Deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, without factory-applied jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=1889&mf=04&src=wd

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456822449&mf=04&src=wd







220719 - 3


2.2 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:

1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

3. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.

2.3 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.

B. PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming. Thickness is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

a. Johns Manville.b. Owens Corning.c. Other prior approved manufacturer.

2. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer.3. Color: White.4. Factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field fabricate.

a. Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges, unions, reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P-trap and supply covers for lavatories.

2.4 TAPES

A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136.


a. ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 428 AWF ASJ.b. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0836.c. Compac Corporation; 104 and 105.d. Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and 1542 CW Plus/SQ.

2. Width: 3 inches.3. Thickness: 11.5 mils.4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.5. Elongation: 2 percent.6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.









220719 - 4


2.5 SECUREMENTS

A. Bands:


a. ITW Insulation Systems; Gerrard Strapping and Seals.b. RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate Strapping and Seals.

2. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 or Type 316; 0.015 inch thick, 1/2 inch wide with wing seal or closed seal.

3. Aluminum: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch thick, 1/2 inch wide with wing seal or closed seal.

B. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- wide, stainless steel or Monel.

2.6 PROTECTIVE SHIELDING GUARDS

A. Protective Shielding Pipe Covers,:


a. Engineered Brass Company.b. Insul-Tect Products Co.; a subsidiary of MVG Molded Products.c. McGuire Manufacturing.d. Plumberex.e. Truebro; a brand of IPS Corporation.f. Zurn Industries, LLC; Tubular Brass Plumbing Products Operation.

2. Description: Manufactured plastic wraps for covering plumbing fixture hot- and cold-water supplies and trap and drain piping. Comply with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.

1. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects.2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application.













220719 - 5


B. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be insulated. Before insulating, apply a corrosion coating to insulated surfaces as follows:

1. Stainless Steel: Coat 300 series stainless steel with an epoxy primer 5 mils thick and an epoxy finish 5 mils thick if operating in a temperature range between 140 and 300 deg F. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application methods for operating temperature range.

2. Carbon Steel: Coat carbon steel operating at a service temperature between 32 and 300 deg F with an epoxy coating. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application methods for operating temperature range.

C. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.

3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.

B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.

C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.

D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.

E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.

G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.

1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor

legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.

3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.

K. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:



220719 - 6


1. Draw jacket tight and smooth.2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket.

Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.

3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c.

a. For below-ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.

4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written instructions, to maintain vapor seal.

5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.

L. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.

M. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement.

N. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.

O. For above-ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:

1. Vibration-control devices.2. Testing agency labels and stamps.3. Nameplates and data plates.4. Cleanouts.

3.4 PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface

and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof flashing.

4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.



220719 - 7


2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches.

4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.

D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

E. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.

1. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers.

F. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:

1. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations.2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in

Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

3.5 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.

B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:

1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity unless otherwise indicated.

2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.

3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive.

4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement.

5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable



220719 - 8


insulation cover. For below-ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier.

6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.

7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below-ambient services and a breather mastic for above-ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.

8. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "union." Match size and color of pipe labels.

C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.

D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the following:

1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe insulation.

2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless-steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.

3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges, except divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.

4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish.

5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed surfaces with a metal jacket.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION

A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:

1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials.

2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.

3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient surfaces, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.

4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient surfaces, do not staple longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:



220719 - 9


1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the

thickness of pipe insulation.3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of

adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation.4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at

least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:

1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available.

2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.

D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:

1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available.

2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to valve body.

3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.

4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.

3.7 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION

A. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.

1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the finish bead along seam and joint edge.

3.8 FINISHES

A. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection of the completed Work.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Perform tests and inspections.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to three locations of straight pipe, three locations of threaded fittings, three locations of welded fittings, two locations of threaded strainers, two locations of welded strainers, three locations of threaded valves, and three locations of



220719 - 10


flanged valves for each pipe service defined in the "Piping Insulation Schedule, General" Article.

D. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals noncompliance with requirements.

3.10 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following:

1. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces.2. Underground piping.3. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.

3.11 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Domestic Cold Water:

1. NPS 1 and Smaller: Insulation shall be the following:a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1/2 inch thick.

2. NPS 1-1/2 and Larger: Insulation shall be the following:a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick.

B. Domestic Hot and Recirculated Hot Water:

1. NPS 1-1/4 and Smaller: Insulation shall be the following:a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick.

2. NPS 1-1/2 and Larger: Insulation shall be the following:a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1.5 inch thick.

C. Exposed Sanitary Drains, Domestic Water, Domestic Hot Water, and Stops for Plumbing Fixtures for People with Disabilities:

1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following:a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick.

D. Floor Drains, Traps, and Sanitary Drain Piping within 10 Feet of Drain Receiving Condensate and Equipment Drain Water below 60 Deg F:

1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following:a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick.

3.12 INDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE

A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket.



220719 - 11


B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.



DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 1


SECTION 221116 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Under-building-slab and aboveground domestic water pipes, tubes, and fittings inside buildings.

2. Encasement for piping.


A. Product Data: For transition fittings and dielectric fittings.


A. System purging and disinfecting activities report.

B. Field quality-control reports.


A. Interruption of Existing Water Service: Do not interrupt water service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary water service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner no fewer than Six days in advance of proposed interruption of water service.

2. Do not interrupt water service without Owner's written permission.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.

B. Potable-water piping and components shall comply with NSF 14 and NSF 61 Annex G. Plastic piping components shall be marked with "NSF-pw."

2.2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L water tube, drawn temper.

B. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K and ASTM B 88, Type L water tube, annealed temper.

C. Cast-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, pressure fittings.




D. Wrought-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings.

E. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends.

F. Copper Unions:

1. MSS SP-123.2. Cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body.3. Ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces.4. Solder-joint or threaded ends.

G. Copper-Tube, Extruded-Tee Connections:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

a. T-DRILL Industries Inc.

2. Description: Tee formed in copper tube according to ASTM F 2014.

H. Appurtenances for Grooved-End Copper Tubing:


a. Anvil International.b. Shurjoint Piping Products.c. Victaulic Company.

2. Bronze Fittings for Grooved-End, Copper Tubing: ASTM B 75 copper tube or ASTM B 584 bronze castings.

3. Mechanical Couplings for Grooved-End Copper Tubing:

a. Copper-tube dimensions and design similar to AWWA C606.b. Ferrous housing sections.c. EPDM-rubber gaskets suitable for hot and cold water.d. Bolts and nuts.e. Minimum Pressure Rating: 300 psig.

2.3 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS

A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials:

1. AWWA C110/A21.10, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick or ASME B16.21, nonmetallic and asbestos free unless otherwise indicated.

2. Full-face or ring type unless otherwise indicated.

B. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.

C. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys.

D. Flux: ASTM B 813, water flushable.










E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing unless otherwise indicated.

2.4 ENCASEMENT FOR PIPING

A. Standard: ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105/A21.5.

B. Form: Sheet.

C. Color: Black.

2.5 TRANSITION FITTINGS


1. Same size as pipes to be joined.2. Pressure rating at least equal to pipes to be joined.3. End connections compatible with pipes to be joined.

B. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system fitting.

C. Sleeve-Type Transition Coupling: AWWA C219.


a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co.b. Dresser, Inc.c. Ford Meter Box Company, Inc. (The).d. JCM Industries, Inc.e. Romac Industries, Inc.f. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.

DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined.

B. Dielectric Unions:


a. Capitol Manufacturing Company.b. Central Plastics Company.c. HART Industrial Unions, LLC.d. Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company.e. Wilkins.f. Zurn Industries, LLC.

2. Standard: ASSE 1079.


















3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F.4. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

C. Dielectric Flanges:


a. Capitol Manufacturing Company.b. Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company.c. Wilkins.d. Zurn Industries, LLC.

2. Standard: ASSE 1079.3. Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly.4. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F.5. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded solder-joint

copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

D. Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits:


a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.b. Calpico, Inc.c. Central Plastics Company.d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

2. Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges.3. Pressure Rating: 150 psig.4. Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic.5. Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene.6. Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers.

E. Dielectric Nipples:


a. Elster Perfection Corporation.b. Grinnell Mechanical Products.c. Matco-Norca.d. Precision Plumbing Products.e. Victaulic Company.

2. Standard: IAPMO PS 66.3. Electroplated steel nipple complying with ASTM F 1545.4. Pressure Rating and Temperature: 300 psig at 225 deg F.5. End Connections: Male threaded or grooved.6. Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene.




















PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTHWORK

A. Comply with requirements in Section 312000 "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.


A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of domestic water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings.

B. Install copper tubing under building slab according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

C. Install underground copper tube in PE encasement according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105/A21.5.

D. Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve inside the building at each domestic water-service entrance. Comply with requirements for pressure gages in Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" and with requirements for drain valves and strainers in Section 221119 "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."

E. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting.

F. Install water-pressure-reducing valves downstream from shutoff valves. Comply with requirements for pressure-reducing valves in Section 221119 "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."

G. Install domestic water piping level and plumb.

H. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices in Section 220548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

I. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

J. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

K. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, and coordinate with other services occupying that space.

L. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

M. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher than the system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

N. Install piping free of sags and bends.




O. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

P. Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment, machine, and specialty.

Q. Install pressure gages on suction and discharge piping for each plumbing pump and packaged booster pump. Comply with requirements for pressure gages in Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping."

R. Install thermostats in hot-water circulation piping. Comply with requirements for thermostats in Section 221123 "Domestic Water Pumps."

S. Install thermometers on inlet and outlet piping from each water heater. Comply with requirements for thermometers in Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping."

T. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

U. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

V. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."


A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before assembly.

C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or

damaged.

D. Brazed Joints for Copper Tubing: Comply with CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," "Brazed Joints" chapter.

E. Soldered Joints for Copper Tubing: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux to end of tube. Join copper tube and fittings according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

F. Extruded-Tee Connections: Form tee in copper tube according to ASTM F 2014. Use tool designed for copper tube; drill pilot hole, form collar for outlet, dimple tube to form seating stop, and braze branch tube into collar.

G. Joint Construction for Grooved-End Copper Tubing: Make joints according to AWWA C606. Roll groove ends of tubes. Lubricate and install gasket over ends of tubes or tube and fitting. Install coupling housing sections over gasket with keys seated in tubing grooves. Install and tighten housing bolts.




H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate asbestos-free, nonmetallic gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable for domestic water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9.

I. Joints for Dissimilar-Material Piping: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both piping systems.

3.4 TRANSITION FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install transition couplings at joints of dissimilar piping.

B. Transition Fittings in Underground Domestic Water Piping:

1. Fittings for NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Fitting-type coupling.2. Fittings for NPS 2 and Larger: Sleeve-type coupling.

3.5 DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.

B. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric couplings or nipples.

C. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Use dielectric flanges.

D. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 5 and Larger: Use dielectric flange kits.


A. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices in Section 220548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Comply with requirements for pipe hanger, support products, and installation in Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42, clamps.2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:

a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.c. Longer Than 100 Feet if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.

3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.

4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

D. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch.

E. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:




1. NPS 3/4 and Smaller: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod.2. NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod.3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod.4. NPS 2-1/2: 108 inches with 1/2-inch rod.5. NPS 3 to NPS 5: 10 feet with 1/2-inch rod.6. NPS 6: 10 feet with 5/8-inch rod.7. NPS 8: 10 feet with 3/4-inch rod.

F. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet.

G. Support piping and tubing not listed in this article according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions.

3.7 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. When installing piping adjacent to equipment and machines, allow space for service and maintenance.

C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.

D. Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve; extend and connect to the following:

1. Domestic Water Booster Pumps: Cold-water suction and discharge piping.2. Water Heaters: Cold-water inlet and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not

smaller than sizes of water heater connections.3. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water-supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller

than that required by plumbing code.4. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water-supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than

equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

3.8 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification materials and installation in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Label pressure piping with system operating pressure.


A. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Piping Inspections:

a. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.




b. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction:

1) Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing in after roughing in and before setting fixtures.

2) Final Inspection: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified in "Piping Tests" Subparagraph below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

c. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests or inspections, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

d. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Piping Tests:

a. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that piping is full of water.

b. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

c. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

d. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow it to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.

e. Repair leaks and defects with new materials, and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained.

f. Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required.

B. Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.10 ADJUSTING

A. Perform the following adjustments before operation:

1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs.2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position.3. Open throttling valves to proper setting.4. Adjust balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide adequate flow.

a. Manually adjust ball-type balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide hot-water flow in each branch.

b. Adjust calibrated balancing valves to flows indicated.

5. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and for temporary sealing of piping during installation.

6. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs.




7. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for application where used and are clean and ready for use.

8. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.

3.11 CLEANING

A. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows:

1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired before using.

2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction; if methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below:

a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets.

b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:

1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.

2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200 ppm of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.

c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from system after the standing time.

d. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination.e. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Clean non-potable domestic water piping as follows:

1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired before using.

2. Use purging procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or; if methods are not prescribed, follow procedures described below:

a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets.

b. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination.

C. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities. Include copies of water-sample approvals from authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

3.12 PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

B. Flanges and unions may be used for aboveground piping joints unless otherwise indicated.




C. Fitting Option: Extruded-tee connections and brazed joints may be used on aboveground copper tubing in cases where the branch line is at least 2 sizes smaller than the main and no larger than 1 ½”.

D. Under-building-slab, domestic water, building-service piping, NPS 3 and smaller, shall be one of the following:

1. Soft copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type K; wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings; and brazed joints.

E. Under-building-slab, domestic water, building-service piping, NPS 4 to NPS 8 and larger, shall be one of the following:

1. Soft copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type K; wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings; and brazed joints.

F. Under-building-slab, domestic water piping, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be one of the following:

1. Hard or soft copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type K; wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings; and brazed joints.

G. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 3 and smaller, shall be one of the following:

1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; cast- or wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings; and soldered joints.

H. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 4 and Larger, shall be one of the following:

1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; cast- or wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings; and brazed joints.

2. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; grooved-joint, copper-tube appurtenances; and grooved joints.

3.13 VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following requirements apply:

1. Shutoff Duty: Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use butterfly, ball, or gate valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

2. Throttling Duty: Use ball or globe valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use butterfly or ball valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

3. Hot-Water Circulation Piping, Balancing Duty: Calibrated balancing valves.4. Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves.

B. Use check valves to maintain correct direction of domestic water flow to and from equipment.



SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

221316 - 1


SECTION 221316 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Pipe, tube, and fittings.2. Specialty pipe fittings.3. Encasement for underground metal piping.


A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure unless otherwise indicated:

1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water.

B. Seismic Performance: Soil, waste, and vent piping and support and installation shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.




A. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For waste and vent piping, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.

2. Detailed description of piping anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.



A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B. Comply with NSF/ANSI 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF-dwv" for plastic drain, waste, and vent piping and "NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping.



221316 - 2



A. Interruption of Existing Sanitary Waste Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner no fewer than six days in advance of proposed interruption of sanitary waste service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of sanitary waste service without Owner's written permission.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.

2.2 HUBLESS, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301.

B. CISPI, Hubless-Piping Couplings:


a. ANACO-Husky.b. Fernco Inc.c. Mission Rubber Company, LLC; a division of MCP Industries.

2. Husky Series 2000 or equal for sanitary waste, Husky Series 4000 or equal for storm water.

3. Standards: ASTM C 1277 and CISPI 310.

4. Description: Stainless-steel corrugated shield with stainless-steel bands and tightening devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.

2.3 GALVANIZED-STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Galvanized-Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Standard Weight class. Include square-cut-grooved or threaded ends matching joining method.

B. Galvanized-Cast-Iron Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.12, threaded.

C. Steel Pipe Pressure Fittings:

1. Galvanized-Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M or ASTM A 106/A 106M, Schedule 40, seamless steel pipe. Include ends matching joining method.







221316 - 3


2. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39; Class 150; hexagonal-stock body with ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal, bronze seating surface; and female threaded ends.

3. Galvanized-Gray-Iron, Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125, standard pattern.

D. Cast-Iron Flanges: ASME B16.1, Class 125.

1. Flange Gasket Materials: ASME B16.21, full-face, flat, nonmetallic, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated.

2. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.

2.4 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS

A. Transition Couplings:

1. General Requirements: Fitting or device for joining piping with small differences in OD's or of different materials. Include end connections same size as and compatible with pipes to be joined.

2. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system fitting.

3. Pressure Transition Couplings:

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1) Fernco.2) Ford Meter Box Company, Inc. (The).3) Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.4) Viking Johnson.

b. Standard: AWWA C219.

c. Description: Metal, sleeve-type same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to, and ends compatible with, pipes to be joined.

d. Center-Sleeve Material: Manufacturer's standard.e. Gasket Material: Natural or synthetic rubber.f. Metal Component Finish: Corrosion-resistant coating or material.

B. Dielectric Fittings:

1. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined.

2. Dielectric Unions:


1) Capitol Manufacturing Company.2) Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company.3) Wilkins.4) Zurn Industries, LLC.

b. Description:












221316 - 4


1) Standard: ASSE 1079.2) Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F.3) End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

3. Dielectric Flanges:


1) Capitol Manufacturing Company.2) Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company.3) Wilkins.4) Zurn Industries, LLC.

b. Description:

1) Standard: ASSE 1079.2) Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly.3) Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F.4) End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded

solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

4. Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits:


1) Advance Products & Systems, Inc.2) Calpico, Inc.3) Central Plastics Company.4) Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

b. Description:

1) Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges.2) Pressure Rating: 150 psig.3) Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic.4) Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene.5) Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers.

5. Dielectric Nipples:


1) Grinnell Mechanical Products.2) Matco-Norca.3) Precision Plumbing Products.4) Victaulic Company.

b. Description:

1) Standard: IAPMO PS 662) Electroplated steel nipple.3) Pressure Rating: 300 psig at 225 deg F.


















221316 - 5


4) End Connections: Male threaded or grooved.5) Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings.

B. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

E. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

F. Install piping at indicated slopes.

G. Install piping free of sags and bends.

H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

I. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

J. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Section 220548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

K. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if two fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

L. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed.

M. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes unless otherwise indicated:



221316 - 6


1. Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 2 and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and larger.

2. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.3. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.

N. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."

1. Install encasement on underground piping according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105/A 21.5.

O. Install steel piping according to applicable plumbing code.

P. Plumbing Specialties:1. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building

sanitary sewers in sanitary drainage gravity-flow piping. Install cleanout fitting with closure plug inside the building in sanitary drainage force-main piping. Comply with requirements for cleanouts specified in Section 221319 "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties."

2. Install drains in sanitary drainage gravity-flow piping. Comply with requirements for drains specified in Section 221319 "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties."

Q. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

R. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

S. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 220517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

T. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."


A. Join hubless, cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for hubless-piping coupling joints.

B. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified.

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

C. Flanged Joints: Align bolt holes. Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Torque bolts in cross pattern.



221316 - 7


3.3 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Transition Couplings:

1. Install transition couplings at joints of piping with small differences in OD's.2. In Drainage Piping: Unshielded, nonpressure transition couplings.

B. Dielectric Fittings:

1. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.2. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric nipples.3. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Use dielectric flanges.4. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 5 and Larger: Use dielectric flange kits.


A. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Section 220548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Comply with requirements for pipe hanger and support devices and installation specified in Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

1. Install carbon-steel pipe hangers for horizontal piping in noncorrosive environments.2. Install stainless-steel pipe hangers for horizontal piping in corrosive environments.3. Install carbon-steel pipe support clamps for vertical piping in noncorrosive environments.4. Install stainless-steel pipe support clamps for vertical piping in corrosive environments.5. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.6. Install individual, straight, horizontal piping runs:

a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.c. Longer Than 100 Feet if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.

7. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.

8. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

C. Support horizontal piping and tubing within 12 inches of each fitting, valve, and coupling.

D. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

E. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch minimum rods.

F. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod.2. NPS 3: 60 inches with 1/2-inch rod.3. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 60 inches with 5/8-inch rod.4. NPS 6 and NPS 8: 60 inches with 3/4-inch rod.5. NPS 10 and NPS 12: 60 inches with 7/8-inch rod.6. Spacing for 10-foot lengths may be increased to 10 feet. Spacing for fittings is limited to

60 inches.



221316 - 8


G. Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet.

H. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 1-1/4: 84 inches with 3/8-inch rod.2. NPS 1-1/2: 108 inches with 3/8-inch rod.3. NPS 2: 10 feet with 3/8-inch rod.4. NPS 2-1/2: 11 feet with 1/2-inch rod.5. NPS 3: 12 feet with 1/2-inch rod.6. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 12 feet with 5/8-inch rod.7. NPS 6 and NPS 8: 12 feet with 3/4-inch rod.8. NPS 10 and NPS 12: 12 feet with 7/8-inch rod.

I. Install supports for vertical steel piping every 15 feet.

J. Install hangers for stainless-steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 2: 84 inches with 3/8-inch rod.2. NPS 3: 96 inches with 1/2-inch rod.3. NPS 4: 108 inches with 1/2-inch rod.4. NPS 6: 10 feet with 5/8-inch rod.

K. Install supports for vertical stainless-steel piping every 10 feet.

L. Install hangers for PVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 48 inches with 3/8-inch rod.2. NPS 3: 48 inches with 1/2-inch rod.3. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 48 inches with 5/8-inch rod.4. NPS 6 and NPS 8: 48 inches with 3/4-inch rod.5. NPS 10 and NPS 12: 48 inches with 7/8-inch rod.

M. Install supports for vertical PVC piping every 48 inches.

N. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions.

3.5 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.

C. Connect drainage and vent piping to the following:

1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code.

2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.



221316 - 9


3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code.

4. Install test tees (wall cleanouts) in conductors near floor and floor cleanouts with cover flush with floor.

5. Comply with requirements for, cleanouts and drains specified in Section 221319 "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties."

6. Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve if indicated and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

D. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance of equipment.

E. Make connections according to the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

3.6 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify exposed sanitary waste and vent piping. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."


A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.

2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows:

1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

3. Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping except outside leaders on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water. From 15 minutes before



221316 - 10


inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks.

4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug vent-stack openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into piping system equal to pressure of 1-inch wg. Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap of water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks.

5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained.

6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.


A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.

3.9 PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping unless otherwise indicated.

B. Aboveground, soil and waste piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be any of the following:

1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints.2. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings and sovent stack fittings; CISPI hubless-piping

couplings; and coupled joints.3. Galvanized-steel pipe, drainage fittings, and threaded joints.4. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Unshielded, nonpressure transition couplings.

C. Aboveground, soil and waste piping NPS 5 and larger shall be any of the following:

1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints.2. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; CISPI hubless-piping couplings; and coupled

joints.3. Galvanized-steel pipe, drainage fittings, and threaded joints.4. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Unshielded, nonpressure transition couplings.

D. Aboveground, vent piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be any of the following:

1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints.2. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; CISPI hubless-piping couplings; and coupled

joints.3. Galvanized-steel pipe, drainage fittings, and threaded joints.4. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Shielded, nonpressure transition couplings.

E. Aboveground, vent piping NPS 5 and larger shall be any of the following:

1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints.



221316 - 11


2. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; CISPI hubless-piping couplings; and coupled joints.

3. Galvanized-steel pipe, drainage fittings, and threaded joints.4. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Shielded, nonpressure transition couplings.



SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319-1

SECTION 221319 - SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following sanitary drainage piping specialties:1. Cleanouts.2. Floor drains.3. Air-admittance valves.4. Miscellaneous sanitary drainage piping specialties.5. Flashing materials.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.

B. FOG: Fats, oils, and greases.

C. FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic.

D. HDPE: High-density polyethylene plastic.

E. PE: Polyethylene plastic.

F. PP: Polypropylene plastic.

G. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and accessories for the following:1. Oil interceptors.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for frost-resistant vent terminals.

C. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that oil interceptors, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." Include the following:

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without

separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic



forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.

D. Field quality-control test reports.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For drainage piping specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

C. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic sanitary piping specialty components.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.

B. Coordinate size and location of roof penetrations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CLEANOUTS

A. Exposed Metal Cleanouts:1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by

one of the following:

a. Josam Company; Josam Div.b. MIFAB, Inc.c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.d. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.e. Watts Drainage Products Inc.f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for cast iron for cleanout test tee.



3. Size: Same as connected drainage piping4. Body Material: Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe test tee as required to match

connected piping.5. Closure: Countersunk or raised-head, cast-iron plug.6. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout

size.

B. Metal Floor Cleanouts:1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by


2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for cast-iron soil pipe with cast-iron ferrule heavy-duty, adjustable housing cleanout.

3. Size: Same as connected branch.4. Type: Heavy-duty, adjustable housing.5. Body or Ferrule: Cast iron.6. Clamping Device: Not required.7. Outlet Connection: Inside calk.8. Closure: Brass plug with straight threads and gasket.9. Adjustable Housing Material: Cast iron with threads.10. Frame and Cover Material and Finish: Nickel-bronze, copper alloy.11. Frame and Cover Shape: Round.12. Top Loading Classification: Extra Heavy Duty.13. Riser: ASTM A 74, Extra-Heavy class, cast-iron drainage pipe fitting and riser to

cleanout.

C. Cast-Iron Wall Cleanouts:1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by


a. Josam Company; Josam Div.b. MIFAB, Inc.c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.d. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.e. Watts Drainage Products Inc.f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M. Include wall access.3. Size: Same as connected drainage piping.4. Body: Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe test tee as required to match connected

piping.5. Closure: Countersunk or raised-head, drilled-and-threaded brass plug.6. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout

size.7. Wall Access: Round, flat, chrome-plated brass or stainless-steel cover plate with

screw.

2.2 FLOOR DRAINS

A. Cast-Iron Floor Drains:



1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:a. Josam Company; Josam Div.b. MIFAB, Inc.c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.d. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.e. Watts Drainage Products Inc.f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation.g. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

2. Standard: ASME A112.6.3.3. Pattern: Floor drain.4. Body Material: Gray iron.5. Outlet: Bottom.6. Top or Strainer Material: Nickel bronze.7. Top Shape: Round.8. Trap Material: Cast iron.9. Trap Pattern: Standard P-trap.10. Trap Features: Trap-seal primer valve drain connection.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS SANITARY DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Deep-Seal Traps

1. Description: Cast-iron or bronze casting, with inlet and outlet matching connected piping and cleanout trap-seal primer valve connection.

2. Size: Same as connected waste piping.

a. NPS 2: 4-inch- minimum water seal.b. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: 5-inch- minimum water seal.

B. Floor-Drain, Trap-Seal Primer Fittings:

1. Description: Cast iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and trap-seal primer valve connection.

2. Size: Same as floor drain outlet with NPS 1/2 side inlet.

C. Vent Caps: VTR

1. Description: Cast-iron body with threaded or hub inlet and vandal-proof design. Include vented hood and setscrews to secure to vent pipe.

2. Size: Same as connected stack vent or vent stack.

2.4 FLASHING MATERIALS

A. Copper Sheet: ASTM B 152/B 152M, of the following minimum weights and thicknesses, unless otherwise indicated:



1. General Applications: 12 oz./sq. ft..2. Vent Pipe Flashing: 8 oz./sq. ft..

B. Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with 0.20 percent copper content and 0.04-inch minimum thickness, unless otherwise indicated. Include G90 hot-dip galvanized, mill-phosphatized finish for painting if indicated.

C. Elastic Membrane Sheet: ASTM D 4068, flexible, chlorinated polyethylene, 40-mil minimum thickness.

D. Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened.

E. Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units required for installation; matching or compatible with material being installed.

F. Solder: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloy.

G. Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type, bituminous mastic.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping joining materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.

B. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated.

2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet

for larger piping.4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.

C. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with finished floor.

D. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall.

E. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance.2. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor

drainage.



3. Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.

4. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Install fixture air-admittance valves on fixture drain piping.

G. Install deep-seal traps on floor drains and other waste outlets, if indicated.

H. Install vent caps on each vent pipe passing through roof.

I. Install wood-blocking reinforcement for wall-mounting-type specialties.

J. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is indicated.

K. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding pipe fittings.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.

C. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

D. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

3.3 FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Fabricate flashing from single piece unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes are required. Join flashing according to the following if required:1. Copper Sheets: Solder joints of copper sheets.

B. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in floors and roofs with waterproof membrane.

1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 10 inches, and skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around pipe.

2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around sleeve.

3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around specialty.



C. Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement.

D. Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device.

E. Install flashing for piping passing through roofs with counterflashing or commercially made flashing fittings, according to Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

F. Extend flashing up vent pipe passing through roofs and turn down into pipe, or secure flashing into cast-iron sleeve having calking recess.

G. Fabricate and install flashing and pans, sumps, and other drainage shapes.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.

B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.



PLUMBING FIXTURES 224100 - 1


SECTION 224100 - PLUMBING FIXTURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Water closets.

2. Flushometer valves.

3. Sinks.

4. Sink faucets.

5. Fixture supports.

6. Laminar flow outlets

7. Supply fittings.

8. Waste fittings.

9. Grout.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components

and profiles, and finishes for lavatories.

2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished

specialties and accessories.


A. Coordination Drawings: Counter cutout templates for mounting of counter-mounted plumbing

fixtures.

B. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.

1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective

covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Faucet Washers and O-Rings: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type and size

installed.

2. Faucet Cartridges and O-Rings: Equal to 5 percent of amount of each type and size

installed.

3. Flushometer-Tank Repair Kits: Equal to 5 percent of amount of each type installed, but

no fewer than two of each type.

4. Toilet Seats: Equal to 5 percent of amount of each type installed.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WATER CLOSETS

A. Healthcare Water Closets : Floor mounted, floor outlet, top spud, accessible.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

a. American Standard Companies, Inc.

b. Kohler Co.

c. Hospital approved equal.

2. Bowl:

a. Standards: ASME A112.19.2/CSA B45.1 and ASME A112.19.5.

b. Material: Vitreous china.

c. Type: Siphon jet.

d. Style: Flushometer valve.

e. Height: Handicapped/elderly.

f. Rim Contour: Elongated with bedpan lugs or slots.

g. Water Consumption: 1.6 gal. (6 L) per flush.

h. Spud Size: NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40).

2.2 FLUSHOMETER VALVES

A. Flushometers:


following:

a. Sloan Valve Company.

b. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Commercial Brass Operation.

2. Description: See drawings

2.3 TOILET SEATS

A. Toilet Seats:


following:

a. Bemis Manufacturing Company.

b. Church Seats.

c. Olsonite Corp.

2. Standard: IAPMO Z124.5.

3. Material: Plastic with antimicrobial agent.

4. Type: Commercial (standard).

5. Shape: Elongated rim, open front.

6. Hinge: Check.

7. Hinge Material: Noncorroding metal.

8. Color: White.




2.4 LAVATORIES

A. Lavatories:


following:

a. American Standard Companies, Inc.

b. Kohler Co.

2. Description: See drawings.

2.5 SINKS

A. Sinks: One or two bowl, counter mounted, stainless steel.

1. Stainless-Steel Sinks:

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one

of the following:

1) Elkay Manufacturing Co.

2) Kohler Co.

3) Hospital approved equivalent.

2. Fixture:

a. Standard: ASME A112.19.1/CSA B45.2 for enameled -steel sinks.

b. Standard: ANSI Z124.3 for PMMA sinks.

c. Standard: ANSI Z124.3 and ANSI/ICPA SS-1 for solid-surface sinks.

d. Standard: ASME A112.19.3/CSA B45.4 for stainless-steel sinks.

3. Faucet: See Drawings.

4. Supply Fittings: Comply with requirements in "Supply Fittings" Article.

5. Waste Fittings: Comply with requirements in "Waste Fittings" Article, except include

continuous waste for multibowl sinks.

2.6 SINK & LAVATORY FAUCETS

A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF/ANSI 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health

Effects," for faucet materials that will be in contact with potable water.

B. Sink Faucets:

1. General-Duty, Solid-Brass Faucets:

a. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

1) Chicago Faucets

2. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1.

3. General: Include hot- and cold-water indicators; coordinate faucet inlets with supplies

and fixture holes; coordinate outlet with spout and fixture receptor.








2.7 FIXTURE SUPPORTS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. Josam Company.

2. MIFAB Manufacturing Inc.

3. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.

4. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.

5. Watts Drainage Products Inc.; a div. of Watts Industries, Inc.

6. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

B. Lavatory Supports,:

1. Description: Type II, lavatory carrier with concealed arms and tie rod for wall-

mounting, lavatory-type fixture. Include steel uprights with feet.

2. Accessible-Fixture Support: Include rectangular steel uprights.

2.8 LAMINAR-FLOW, FAUCET-SPOUT OUTLETS


Effects," for faucet-spout outlet materials that will be in contact with potable water.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. AM Conservation Group, Inc.

2. Chronomite Laboratories, Inc.

3. NEOPERL, Inc.

4. OMNI

C. Description: Chrome-plated-brass, faucet-spout outlet that produces non-aerating, laminar

stream. Include external or internal thread that mates with faucet outlet for attachment to faucets

where indicated and flow-rate range that includes flow of faucet.

2.9 SUPPLY FITTINGS


Effects," for faucet materials that will be in contact with potable water.

B. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1.

C. Sink Supply Fittings:

1. Supply Piping: Chrome-plated-brass pipe or chrome-plated-copper tube matching water-

supply piping size. Include chrome-plated wall flange.

2. Stops: Chrome-plated-brass, one-quarter-turn, ball-type stop with inlet connection

matching water-supply piping type and size.

a. Operation: Wheel handle.

b. Check valve: install downstream of stops.







3. Risers:

a. Size: NPS 3/8 for lavatories.

b. Size: NPS 1/2 for sinks.

c. Material: Chrome-plated, soft-copper flexible tube riser.

2.10 WASTE FITTINGS

A. Standard: ASME A112.18.2/CSA B125.2.

B. Drain: Grid type with NPS 1-1/4 offset tailpiece for accessible lavatories.

C. Drain: Pop-up type with NPS 1-1/4 straight tailpiece as part of faucet for standard lavatories.

D. Drain: Grid type with NPS 1-1/2 offset tailpiece for accessible sinks.

E. Drain: Grid type with NPS 1-1/2 straight tailpiece for standard sinks.

F. Trap:

1. Size: See Drawings for specific fixture size requirements.

2. Material: Chrome-plated, one-piece, cast-brass trap with swivel 0.029-inch-thick tubular

brass wall bend; and chrome-plated-brass or -steel wall flange.

2.11 GROUT

A. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry,

hydraulic-cement grout.

B. Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.

C. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in of water-supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify

actual locations of piping connections before plumbing-fixture installation.

B. Examine walls, floors, cabinets, and counters for suitable conditions where fixtures will be

installed.





3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install plumbing fixtures level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.

B. Install counter-mounting fixtures in and attached to casework.

C. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each fixture to be connected to water

distribution piping. Attach supplies to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures.

Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation.

1. Exception: Use ball, gate, or globe valves if supply stops are not specified with fixture.

Comply with valve requirements specified in Section 220523 "General-Duty Valves for

Plumbing Piping."

D. Install faucet flow-control fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if

faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.

E. Install shower flow-control fittings with specified maximum flow rates in shower arms.

F. Install traps on fixture outlets.

1. Exception: Omit trap on fixtures with integral traps.

2. Exception: Omit trap on indirect wastes unless otherwise indicated.

G. Install disposer in outlet of each sink indicated to have a disposer. Install switch where indicated

or in wall adjacent to sink if location is not indicated.

H. Install hot-water dispensers in back top surface of sink or in countertop with spout over sink.

I. Install protective shielding pipe covers and enclosures on exposed supplies and waste piping of

accessible lavatories and sinks. Comply with requirements in Section 220719 "Plumbing Piping

Insulation."

J. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations.

Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings. Comply with

escutcheon requirements specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."

K. Seal joints between plumbing fixtures, counters, floors, and walls using sanitary-type, one-part,

mildew-resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Comply with sealant

requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent

piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.

B. Comply with water piping requirements specified in Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping."

C. Comply with soil and waste piping requirements specified in Section 221316 "Sanitary Waste

and Vent Piping."




D. Install protective shielding pipe covers and enclosures on exposed supplies and waste piping of

accessible lavatories and sinks. Comply with requirements in Section 220719 "Plumbing Piping

Insulation."

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Operate and adjust plumbing fixtures and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning

fixtures, fittings, and controls.

B. Adjust water pressure at faucets to produce proper flow.


A. After completing installation of plumbing fixtures, inspect and repair damaged finishes.

B. Clean plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning

methods and materials.

C. Provide protective covering for installed plumbing fixtures and fittings.

D. Do not allow use of plumbing fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by

Owner.



COMPRESSED-AIR PIPING FOR LABORATORY AND HEALTHCARE FACILITIES

226113 - 1


SECTION 226113 - COMPRESSED-AIR PIPING FOR LABORATORY AND HEALTHCARE FACILITIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Medical compressed-air piping, designated "medical air."2. Healthcare laboratory compressed-air piping, designated "medical laboratory air."

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 123570 "Healthcare Casework" for compressed-air outlets in healthcare casework.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Medical compressed-air piping systems include medical air, dental air, instrument air, and medical laboratory air.

B. Nonmedical compressed-air piping systems include laboratory air piping systems.




A. Qualification Data: For Installer and testing agency.

B. Material Certificates: Signed by Installer certifying that medical compressed-air piping materials comply with requirements in NFPA 99 for positive-pressure medical gas systems.

C. Brazing certificates.

D. Field quality-control reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For compressed-air piping specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.





226113 - 2


1. Medical Air Piping Systems for Healthcare Facilities: According to ASSE Standard #6010 for medical-gas-system installers.

2. Shape-Memory-Metal Coupling Joints: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the vacuum piping testing indicated, that is a member of the Medical Gas Professional Healthcare Organization or is an NRTL, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Certifier to be licensed to ASSE 6000 series, and P.I.P.E. 6030, Level M4 or equivalent. 2. All brazers shall be qualified per NITC/ASSE 6000 series certification, 37 minimum hours

training course, and possess a valid certification card at all times while brazing a medical gas system.

3. Employ only qualified journeymen, provide brazers performance qualification test records for each brazer used on installation.

4. System verification to be performed by an independent certifier.5. Qualify testing personnel according to ASSE Standard #6020 for medical-gas-system

inspectors and ASSE Standard #6030 for medical-gas-system verifiers.6. Certifier to be member of M.G.P.H.O. organization of medical gas verifiers.7. Certifier, if also a manufacturer, manufacturer’s representative or a supplier of medical

gas systems components, shall not furnish, sell or in any other way supply products for installation on part of the systems being certified.

C. Brazing: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications"; or AWS B2.2, "Standard for Brazing Procedure and Performance Qualification."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Field verify medical air operating pressure, assumed 50 to 55 psig.

2.2 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS

A. Comply with NFPA 99 for medical air piping materials.

B. Copper Medical Gas Tube: ASTM B 819, Type L, seamless, drawn temper, that has been manufacturer cleaned, purged, and sealed for medical gas service or according to CGA G-4.1 for oxygen service. Include standard color marking "OXY," "MED," "OXY/MED," "OXY/ACR," or "ACR/MED" in green for Type K tube and in blue for Type L tube.

C. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22, solder-joint pressure type that has been manufacturer cleaned, purged, and bagged for oxygen service according to CGA G-4.1.

D. Copper Unions: ASME B16.22 or MSS SP-123, wrought-copper or cast-copper alloy.

E. Cast-Copper-Alloy Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150.

1. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness, full-face type.



226113 - 3


2. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel.

F. Flexible Pipe Connectors:


a. Flex-Hose Co., Inc.b. Flexicraft Industries.c. Mercer Rubber Co.d. Metraflex Company (The).

2. Description: Corrugated-bronze tubing with bronze wire-braid covering and ends brazed to inner tubing.

a. Working-Pressure Rating: 200 psig minimum.b. End Connections: Plain-end copper tube.

G. Shape-Memory-Metal Couplings:


a. Aerofit, Inc.b. Smart Tap; Smart Technology, Inc.

2. Description: Cryogenic compression fitting made of nickel-titanium, shape-memory alloy, and that has been manufacturer cleaned, purged, and sealed for oxygen service according to CGA G-4.1.

2.3 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys.

2.4 VALVES

A. General Requirements for Valves: Manufacturer cleaned, purged, and bagged according to CGA G-4.1 for oxygen service.

B. Zone-Valve Box Assemblies: Box with medical gas valves, tube extensions, and gages.

1. Zone-Valve Boxes:

a. Steel Box with Aluminum Cover:

1) Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a) Allied Healthcare Products Inc.b) Amico Corporation.c) Ohio Medical Corporation.

b. Steel Box with Stainless-Steel Cover:















226113 - 4



a) BeaconMedaes.b) Tri-Tech Medical.

c. Description: Formed steel box with cover, anchors for recessed mounting, holes with grommets in box sides for tubing extension protection, and of size for single or multiple valves with pressure gages and in sizes required to permit manual operation of valves. Medical air and medical vacuum tubing, valves, and gages may be incorporated in zone valve boxes for medical gases.

1) Interior Finish: Factory-applied white enamel.2) Cover Plate: Aluminum or stainless-steel with frangible or removable

windows.3) Valve-Box Windows: Clear or tinted transparent plastic with labeling that

includes rooms served, according to NFPA 99.

C. Ball Valves:


a. Allied Healthcare Products Inc.b. BeaconMedaes.c. Conbraco Industries, Inc.d. NIBCO INC.

2. Standard: MSS SP-110.3. Description: Three-piece body, brass or bronze.4. Pressure Rating: 300 psig minimum.5. Ball: Full-port, chrome-plated brass.6. Seats: PTFE or TFE.7. Handle: Lever8. Stem: Blowout proof with PTFE or TFE seal.9. Ends: Manufacturer-installed ASTM B 819, copper-tube extensions and manufacturer-

installed ASTM B 819, copper-tube extensions with pressure gage on one copper-tube extension.

2.5 MEDICAL COMPRESSED-AIR SERVICE CONNECTIONS


1. Allied Healthcare Products Inc.2. Amico Corporation.3. BeaconMedaes.

B. General Requirements for Medical Compressed-Air Service Connections:

1. Suitable for specific medical air pressure and service listed.2. Include roughing-in assemblies, finishing assemblies, and cover plates.3. Individual cover plates are not required if service connection is in multiple unit or

assembly with cover plate.















226113 - 5


4. Recessed-type units made for concealed piping unless otherwise indicated.5. For renovation work, coordinate specific outlet type with facility.

C. Roughing-in Assembly:

1. Steel outlet box for recessed mounting and concealed piping.2. Brass-body outlet block with secondary check valve that will prevent gas flow when

primary valve is removed.3. Double seals that will prevent air leakage.4. ASTM B 819, NPS 3/8 copper outlet tube brazed to valve with service marking and tube-

end dust cap.

D. Finishing Assembly:

1. Brass housing with primary check valve.2. Double seals that will prevent air leakage.3. Cover plate with gas-service label.

E. Quick-Coupler Pressure Service Connections:

1. Outlets for medical air with noninterchangeable keyed indexing to prevent interchange between services.

2. Constructed to permit one-handed connection and removal of equipment.3. With positive-locking ring that retains equipment stem in valve during use.4. Coordinate specific connection type with facility.

F. Cover Plates:

1. One piece.2. Stainless steel.3. Permanent, color-coded, identifying label matching corresponding service.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Cleaning of Medical Gas Tubing: If manufacturer-cleaned and -capped fittings or tubing is not available or if precleaned fittings or tubing must be recleaned because of exposure, have supplier or separate agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction perform the following procedures:

1. Clean medical gas tube and fittings, valves, gages, and other components of oil, grease, and other readily oxidizable materials as required for oxygen service according to CGA G-4.1.

2. Wash medical gas tubing and components in hot, alkaline-cleaner-water solution of sodium carbonate or trisodium phosphate in proportion of 1 lb of chemical to 3 gal. of water.

a. Scrub to ensure complete cleaning.b. Rinse with clean, hot water to remove cleaning solution.



226113 - 6



A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of compressed-air piping. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, air-compressor sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings.

B. Comply with NFPA 99 for installation of compressed-air piping.

C. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal and coordinate with other services occupying that space.

F. Install piping adjacent to equipment and specialties to allow service and maintenance.

G. Install compressed-air piping with 1 percent slope downward in direction of flow.

H. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings same as or higher than system pressure rating used in applications specified in "Piping Schedule" Article unless otherwise indicated.

I. Install eccentric reducers, if available, where compressed-air piping is reduced in direction of flow, with bottoms of both pipes and reducer fitting flush.

J. Install branch connections to compressed-air mains from top of main. Provide drain leg and drain trap at end of each main and branch and at low points.

K. Install thermometer and pressure gage on discharge piping from each air compressor and on each receiver.


M. Install piping free of sags and bends.

N. Install fittings for changes in direction and for branch connections.

O. Install medical air piping to medical air service connections specified in this Section, to medical air service connections in equipment specified in Section 226313 "Gas Piping for Laboratory and Healthcare Facilities," and to equipment specified in other Sections requiring medical air service.

P. Piping Restraint Installation: Install seismic restraints on compressed-air piping. Seismic-restraint devices are specified in Section 220548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

Q. Install compressed-air service connections recessed in walls. Attach roughing-in assembly to substrate; attach finishing assembly to roughing-in assembly.



226113 - 7


R. Connect compressed-air piping to air compressors and to compressed-air outlets and equipment requiring compressed-air service.

S. Install unions in copper compressed-air tubing adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each machine, specialty, and piece of equipment.

T. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.

U. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."

V. Medical gas piping to be purged at any time brazing is to take place.

W. Recommended practices during construction: The system while under construction should remain capped with appropriate plugs or electrical tape during non-construction times. System should be left with a slight nitrogen purge in piping.

X. Purge gas to be nitrogen (N) only.


A. Install shutoff valve at each connection to and from compressed-air equipment and specialties.

B. Install valve boxes recessed in wall and anchored to substrate. Single boxes may be used for multiple valves that serve same area or function.

C. Install zone valves and gages in valve boxes. Rotate valves to angle that prevents closure of cover when valve is in closed position.


A. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from outside of cleaned tubing and fittings before assembly.

B. Threaded Joints: Apply appropriate tape to external pipe threads.

C. Brazed Joints: Join copper tube and fittings according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," "Brazed Joints" chapter. Continuously purge joint with oil-free dry nitrogen during brazing.

D. Flanged Joints: Install flange on copper tubes. Use pipe-flange gasket between flanges. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9 for bolting procedure.

E. Shape-Memory-Metal Coupling Joints: Join new copper tube to existing tube according to procedures developed by fitting manufacturer for installation of shape-memory-metal coupling joints.


A. Comply with requirements in Section 220548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for seismic-restraint devices.



226113 - 8


B. Comply with requirements in Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for pipe hanger and support devices.

C. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.

D. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:

1. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel, clevis hangers.2. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable, roller hangers.

E. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze. Comply with requirements in Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for trapeze hangers.

F. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

G. Support horizontal piping within 12 inches of each fitting and coupling.

H. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch-minimum rods.

I. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 1/4: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod.2. NPS 3/8 and NPS 1/2: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod.3. NPS 3/4: 84 inches with 3/8-inch rod.4. NPS 1: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod.5. NPS 1-1/4: 108 inches with 3/8-inch rod.6. NPS 1-1/2: 10 feet with 3/8-inch rod.7. NPS 2: 11 feet with 3/8-inch rod.8. NPS 2-1/2: 13 feet with 1/2-inch rod.9. NPS 3: 14 feet with 1/2-inch rod.10. NPS 3-1/2: 15 feet with 1/2-inch rod.11. NPS 4: 16 feet with 1/2-inch rod.12. NPS 5: 18 feet with 1/2-inch rod.13. NPS 6: 20 feet with 5/8-inch rod.14. NPS 8: 23 feet with 3/4-inch rod.

J. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet.

3.6 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install identifying labels and devices for medical compressed-air piping systems according to NFPA 99. Use the following or similar captions and color-coding for piping products where required by NFPA 99:

1. Medical gas piping shall be identified by means of metal tags, stenciling, stamping or with adhesive markers, in a manner that is not readily removable. Label piping at intervals of not more than 20’ and at least once in each room and each story, traversed by the piping system. There is no requirement to paint the piping. Labeling to be similar to existing methodology. General practice indicated below:

a. Medical Air: Black letters on yellow background.b. Instrument Air: White letters on red background.



226113 - 9


3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL FOR MEDICAL COMPRESSED-AIR PIPING IN HEALTHCARE FACILITIES

A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections of medical compressed-air piping in healthcare facilities and to prepare test and inspection reports.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Medical Compressed-Air Testing Coordination: Perform tests, inspections, verifications, and certification of medical compressed-air piping systems concurrently with tests, inspections, and certification of medical gas piping and medical vacuum piping systems.

2. Preparation: Perform the following Installer tests according to requirements in NFPA 99 and ASSE Standard #6010:

a. Initial blowdown.b. Initial pressure test.c. Cross-connection test.d. Piping purge test.e. Standing pressure test for positive-pressure medical compressed-air piping.f. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

3. System Verification: Perform the following tests and inspections according to NFPA 99, ASSE Standard #6020, and ASSE Standard #6030:

a. Standing pressure test.b. Individual-pressurization or pressure-differential cross-connection test.c. Valve test.d. Master and area alarm tests.e. Piping purge test.f. Piping particulate test.g. Piping purity test.h. Final tie-in test.i. Operational pressure test.j. Medical air purity test.k. Verify correct labeling of equipment and components.

4. Testing Certification: Certify that specified tests, inspections, and procedures have been performed and certify report results. Include the following:

a. Inspections performed.b. Procedures, materials, and gases used.c. Test methods used.d. Results of tests.

C. Remove and replace components that do not pass tests and inspections and retest as specified above.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports. Final reports to be presented in a written report to the director of facilities management, architect, and design engineer

3.8 PROTECTION

A. Protect tubing from damage.



226113 - 10


B. Retain sealing plugs in tubing, fittings, and specialties until installation.

C. Clean tubing not properly sealed, and where sealing is damaged, according to "Preparation" Article.

3.9 PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Connect new tubing to existing tubing with memory-metal couplings.

B. Flanges may be used where connection to flanged equipment is required.

C. Medical Air Piping except Instrument Air Piping Larger Than NPS 3 and Operating at More Than 185 psig: Type L, copper medical gas tube; wrought-copper fittings; and brazed joints.

3.10 VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Shutoff Valves: Ball valve with manufacturer-installed ASTM B 819, copper-tube extensions.

B. Zone Valves: Ball valve with manufacturer-installed ASTM B 819, copper-tube extensions with pressure gage on one copper-tube extension.



VACUUM PIPING FOR LABORATORY AND HEALTHCARE FACILITIES

226213 - 1


SECTION 226213 - VACUUM PIPING FOR LABORATORY AND HEALTHCARE FACILITIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Medical-surgical vacuum piping, designated "medical vacuum."

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 123570 "Healthcare Casework" for vacuum inlets in healthcare casework.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. HVE: High-volume (oral) evacuation.

B. WAGD: Waste anesthetic gas disposal.

C. Medical vacuum piping systems include medical vacuum, WAGD, dental vacuum, HVE, and medical laboratory vacuum piping systems.

D. Nonmedical laboratory vacuum piping systems include laboratory low-vacuum and laboratory high-vacuum piping systems.





B. Material Certificates: Signed by Installer certifying that medical vacuum piping materials comply with requirements in NFPA 99.


D. Field quality-control reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For vacuum piping specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.



226213 - 2




1. Medical Vacuum Piping Systems for Healthcare Facilities: According to ASSE Standard #6010 for medical-gas-system installers.


B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the vacuum piping testing indicated, that is a member of the Medical Gas Professional Healthcare Organization or is an NRTL, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.








PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Field verify medical vacuum operating conditions, assumed 15 in. Hg.


A. Comply with NFPA 99 for medical vacuum piping materials.

B. Copper Medical Gas Tube: ASTM B 819, Type L, seamless, drawn temper that has been manufacturer cleaned, purged, and sealed for medical gas service or according to CGA G-4.1 for oxygen service. Include standard color marking "OXY," "MED," "OXY/MED," "OXY/ACR," or "ACR/MED" in blue.

C. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22, solder-joint pressure type that has been manufacturer cleaned, purged, and sealed for medical gas service or according to CGA G-4.1 for oxygen service.




226213 - 3



1. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness, full-face type.


F. Flexible Pipe Connectors:


a. Flex-Hose Co., Inc.b. Flexicraft Industries.c. Mercer Rubber Co.d. Metraflex Company (The).

2. Description: Corrugated-bronze tubing with bronze wire-braid covering and ends brazed to inner tubing.

a. Working-Pressure Rating: 200 psig minimum.b. End Connections: Plain-end copper tube.



2.4 VALVES


1. Exception: Factory cleaning and bagging are not required for valves for WAGD service.























226213 - 4






C. Copper-Alloy Ball Valves:





2.5 MEDICAL VACUUM SERVICE CONNECTIONS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:


B. General Requirements for Medical Vacuum Service Connections:

1. Suitable for specific medical vacuum service listed.2. Include roughing-in assemblies, finishing assemblies, and cover plates.3. Individual cover plates are not required if service connection is in multiple unit or

assembly with cover plate.4. Recessed-type units made for concealed piping unless otherwise indicated.5. For renovation work, coordinate specific outlet type with facility.


1. Steel outlet box for recessed mounting and concealed piping.












226213 - 5


2. Brass-body inlet block.3. Seals that will prevent vacuum leakage.4. ASTM B 819, NPS 3/8 copper outlet tube brazed to valve with service marking and tube-

end dust cap.


1. Brass housing with primary check valve.2. Seals that will prevent vacuum leakage.3. Cover plate with gas-service label.

E. Quick-Coupler Suction Service Connections:

1. Inlets for medical vacuum and WAGD with noninterchangeable keyed indexing to prevent interchange between services.


F. Cover Plates:

1. One piece.2. Aluminum or stainless steel.3. Permanent, color-coded, identifying label matching corresponding service.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION






A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of vacuum piping. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, vacuum producer sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings.

B. Comply with NFPA 99 for installation of vacuum piping.



226213 - 6






G. Install vacuum piping with 1 percent slope downward in direction of flow.

H. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings same as or higher than piping pressure rating used in applications specified in "Piping Schedule" Article unless otherwise indicated.

I. Install eccentric reducers, if available, where vacuum piping is reduced in direction of flow, with bottoms of both pipes and reducer fitting flush.

J. Provide drain leg and drain trap at end of each main and branch and at low points.

K. Install thermometer and vacuum gage on inlet piping to each vacuum producer and on each receiver and separator. Comply with requirements in Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping."


M. Install piping free of sags and bends.

N. Install fittings for changes in direction and for branch connections.

O. Install medical vacuum piping from medical vacuum service connections specified in this Section.

P. Piping Restraint Installation: Install seismic restraints on vacuum piping. Seismic-restraint devices are specified in Section 220548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

Q. Install medical vacuum service connections recessed in walls. Attach roughing-in assembly to substrate; attach finishing assembly to roughing-in assembly.

R. Connect vacuum piping to vacuum producers and to equipment requiring vacuum service.

S. Install unions in copper vacuum tubing adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each machine, specialty, and piece of equipment.

T. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.

U. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."

V. Medical gas piping to be purged at any time brazing is to take place.



226213 - 7


W. Recommended practices during construction: The system while under construction should remain capped with appropriate plugs or electrical tape during non-construction times. System should be left with a slight nitrogen purge in piping.

X. Purge gas to be nitrogen (N) only.


A. Install valve boxes recessed in wall and anchored to substrate. Single boxes may be used for multiple valves that serve same area or function.

B. Install zone valves and gages in valve boxes. Rotate valves to angle that prevents closure of cover when valve is in closed position.


A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from outside of cleaned tubing and fittings before assembly.

C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

D. Threaded Joints: Apply appropriate tape to external pipe threads.

E. Brazed Joints: Join copper tube and fittings according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," "Brazed Joints" chapter. Do not use flux. Continuously purge joint with oil-free dry nitrogen during brazing.

F. Flanged Joints:

1. Copper Tubing: Install flange on copper tubes. Use pipe-flange gasket between flanges. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9 for bolting procedure.

2. PVC Piping: Install PVC flange on PVC pipes. Use pipe-flange gasket between flanges. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9 for bolting procedure.









226213 - 8







1. NPS 1/4: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod.2. NPS 3/8 and NPS 1/2: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod.3. NPS 3/4: 84 inches with 3/8-inch rod.4. NPS 1: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod.5. NPS 1-1/4: 108 inches with 3/8-inch rod.6. NPS 1-1/2: 10 feet with 3/8-inch rod.7. NPS 2: 11 feet with 3/8-inch rod.8. NPS 2-1/2: 13 feet with 1/2-inch rod.9. NPS 3: 14 feet with 1/2-inch rod.10. NPS 3-1/2: 15 feet with 1/2-inch rod.11. NPS 4: 16 feet with 1/2-inch rod.12. NPS 5: 18 feet with 1/2-inch rod.13. NPS 6: 20 feet with 5/8-inch rod.14. NPS 8: 23 feet with 3/4-inch rod.


3.6 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install identifying labels and devices for medical vacuum piping systems according to NFPA 99. Use the following or similar captions and color-coding for piping products where required by NFPA 99:


a. Medical Vacuum: Black letters on white background.

3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL FOR HEALTHCARE FACILITY MEDICAL VACUUM PIPING

A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections of medical vacuum piping systems in healthcare facilities and to prepare test and inspection reports.




226213 - 9


1. Medical Vacuum Testing Coordination: Perform tests, inspections, verifications, and certification of medical vacuum piping systems concurrently with tests, inspections, and certification of medical compressed-air piping and medical gas piping systems.


a. Initial blowdown.b. Initial pressure test.c. Cross-connection test.d. Piping purge test.e. Standing pressure test for vacuum systems.f. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.


a. Standing pressure test.b. Individual-pressurization or pressure-differential cross-connection test.c. Valve test.d. Master and area alarm tests.e. Piping purge test.f. Final tie-in test.g. Operational vacuum test.h. Verify correct labeling of equipment and components.




3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL FOR LABORATORY FACILITY NONMEDICAL VACUUM PIPING

A. Testing Agency: Engage qualified testing agency to perform field tests and inspections of vacuum piping in nonmedical laboratory facilities and to prepare test and inspection reports.


1. Piping Leak Tests for Vacuum Piping: Test new and modified parts of existing piping. Cap and fill vacuum piping with oil-free, dry nitrogen. Isolate test source and let stand for four hours to equalize temperature. Refill system, if required, to test pressure; hold for two hours with no drop in pressure.

a. Test Pressure for Copper Tubing: 100 psig

2. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.3. Inspect filters for proper operation.



226213 - 10



D. Prepare test and inspection reports. Final reports to be presented in a written report to the director of facilities management, architect, and design engineer

3.9 PROTECTION





A. Connect new copper tubing to existing copper tubing with memory-metal couplings.

B. Flanges may be used where connection to flanged equipment is required.

C. Medical Vacuum Piping: Use copper medical gas tube, wrought-copper fittings, and brazed joints.

D. Medical Laboratory Vacuum Piping: Use one of the following piping materials for each size range:

1. NPS 4 and Smaller: Copper medical gas tube, wrought-copper fittings, and brazed joints.

3.11 VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Shutoff Valves:

1. Copper Tubing: Copper-alloy ball valve with manufacturer-installed ASTM B 819, copper-tube extensions.

B. Zone Valves: Copper-alloy ball valve with manufacturer-installed ASTM B 819, copper-tube extensions with pressure gage on one copper-tube extension.



GAS PIPING FOR LABORATORY AND HEALTHCARE FACILITIES

226313 - 1


SECTION 226313 - GAS PIPING FOR LABORATORY AND HEALTHCARE FACILITIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Oxygen piping, designated "medical oxygen."

B. Owner-Furnished Material:

1. Patient-service consoles.2. Owner will furnish gases for medical gas concentration testing specified in this Section.

C. Related Requirements:

1. Section 123570 "Healthcare Casework" for gas outlets in medical casework.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. CR: Chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic rubber.

B. Medical gas piping systems include medical carbon dioxide, medical helium, medical nitrogen, medical nitrous oxide, and medical oxygen for healthcare facility patient care.



B. Shop Drawings: Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.



B. Material Certificates: Signed by Installer certifying that medical gas piping materials comply with requirements in NFPA 99 for positive-pressure medical gas systems.


D. Certificates of Shop Inspection and Data Report for Bulk Gas Storage Tanks: As required by ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

E. Field quality-control reports.



226313 - 2



A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For medical gas piping specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.



1. Medical Gas Piping Systems for Healthcare Facilities: According to ASSE Standard #6010 for medical-gas-system installers.


B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the medical gas piping testing indicated, that is a member of the Medical Gas Professional Healthcare Organization or is an NRTL, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.








PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Field verify medical oxygen operating pressure, assumed 50 to 55 psig.


A. Comply with NFPA 99 for medical gas piping materials.

B. Copper Medical Gas Tube: ASTM B 819, Type L, seamless, drawn temper that has been manufacturer cleaned, purged, and sealed for medical gas service; or according to CGA G-4.1 for oxygen service. Include standard color marking "OXY," "MED," "OXY/MED," "OXY/ACR," or "ACR/MED" in green for Type K tube and blue for Type L tube.



226313 - 3


C. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22, solder-joint pressure type that has been manufacturer cleaned, purged, and bagged for oxygen service according to CGA G-4.1.



1. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness, full-face type.




2.4 VALVES























226313 - 4


C. Ball Valves:





2.5 MEDICAL GAS SERVICE CONNECTIONS



B. General Requirements for Medical Compressed-Air Service Connections:

1. Suitable for specific medical air pressure and service listed.2. Include roughing-in assemblies, finishing assemblies, and cover plates.3. Individual cover plates are not required if service connection is in multiple unit or

assembly with cover plate.4. Recessed-type units made for concealed piping unless otherwise indicated.5. For renovation work, coordinate specific outlet type with facility.


1. Steel outlet box for recessed mounting and concealed piping.2. Brass-body outlet block with secondary check valve that will prevent gas flow when

primary valve is removed.3. Double seals that will prevent air leakage.4. ASTM B 819, NPS 3/8 copper outlet tube brazed to valve with service marking and tube-

end dust cap.


1. Brass housing with primary check valve.2. Double seals that will prevent air leakage.3. Cover plate with gas-service label.












226313 - 5


E. Quick-Coupler Pressure Service Connections:

1. Outlets for medical air with noninterchangeable keyed indexing to prevent interchange between services.


F. Cover Plates:

1. One piece.2. Stainless steel.3. Permanent, color-coded, identifying label matching corresponding service.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION






A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of gas piping. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings.

B. Comply with NFPA 99 for installation of medical gas piping.






226313 - 6



G. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings same as or higher than system pressure rating used in applications specified in "Piping Schedule" Article unless otherwise indicated.

H. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

I. Install piping free of sags and bends.

J. Install fittings for changes in direction and for branch connections.

K. Install medical gas piping to medical gas service connections specified in this Section, to medical gas service connections in equipment specified in this Section, and to equipment specified in other Sections requiring medical gas service.

L. Piping Restraint Installation: Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Section 220548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

M. Install medical gas service connections recessed in walls. Attach roughing-in assembly to substrate; attach finishing assembly to roughing-in assembly.

N. Connect gas piping to gas sources and to gas outlets and equipment requiring gas service.

O. Install unions in copper tubing adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each specialty and piece of equipment.

P. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.

Q. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs.

R. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 220518 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."

S. Medical gas piping to be purged at any time brazing is to take place.

T. Recommended practices during construction: The system while under construction should remain capped with appropriate plugs or electrical tape during non-construction times. System should be left with a slight nitrogen purge in piping.

U. Purge gas to be nitrogen (N) only.


A. Install shutoff valve at each connection to gas laboratory and healthcare equipment and specialties.

B. Install valve boxes recessed in wall and anchored to substrate. Single boxes may be used for multiple valves that serve same area or function.

C. Install zone valves and gages in valve boxes. Arrange valves so largest valve is lowest. Rotate valves to angle that prevents closure of cover when valve is in closed position.



226313 - 7



A. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from outside of cleaned tubing and fittings before assembly.

B. Brazed Joints: Join copper tube and fittings according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," "Brazed Joints" chapter. Continuously purge joint with oil-free, dry nitrogen during brazing.

3.5 GAS SERVICE COMPONENT INSTALLATION

A. Assemble patient-service console with service connections. Install with supplies concealed in walls. Attach console box or mounting bracket to substrate.












1. NPS 1/4: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod.2. NPS 3/8 and NPS 1/2: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod.3. NPS 3/4: 84 inches with 3/8-inch rod.4. NPS 1: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod.5. NPS 1-1/4: 108 inches with 3/8-inch rod.6. NPS 1-1/2: 10 feet with 3/8-inch rod.7. NPS 2: 11 feet with 3/8-inch rod.8. NPS 2-1/2: 13 feet with 1/2-inch rod.9. NPS 3: 14 feet with 1/2-inch rod.10. NPS 3-1/2: 15 feet with 1/2-inch rod.11. NPS 4: 16 feet with 1/2-inch rod.12. NPS 5: 18 feet with 1/2-inch rod.



226313 - 8


13. NPS 6: 20 feet with 5/8-inch rod.14. NPS 8: 23 feet with 3/4-inch rod.


3.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install identifying labels and devices for healthcare medical gas piping systems according to NFPA 99. Use the following or similar captions and color-coding for piping products where required by NFPA 99:


a. Oxygen: White letters on green background or green letters on white background.

3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL FOR HEALTHCARE FACILITY MEDICAL GAS

A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.


1. Medical Gas Piping Testing Coordination: Perform tests, inspections, verifications, and certification of medical gas piping systems concurrently with tests, inspections, and certification of medical compressed-air piping and medical vacuum piping systems.


a. Initial blowdown.b. Initial pressure test.c. Cross-connection test.d. Piping purge test.e. Standing pressure test for positive-pressure medical gas piping.f. Standing pressure test for vacuum systems.g. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.


a. Standing pressure test.b. Individual-pressurization or pressure-differential cross-connection test.c. Valve test.d. Master and area alarm tests.e. Piping purge test.f. Piping particulate test.g. Piping purity test.h. Final tie-in test.i. Operational pressure test.j. Medical gas concentration test.k. Medical air purity test.



226313 - 9


l. Verify correct labeling of equipment and components.m. Verify medical gas supply sources.




D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL FOR LABORATORY FACILITY SPECIALTY GAS

A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.


1. Piping Leak Tests for Specialty Gas Piping: Test new and modified parts of existing piping. Cap and fill specialty gas piping with oil-free, dry nitrogen to pressure of 50 psig above system operating pressure, but not less than 150 psig. Isolate test source and let stand for four hours to equalize temperature. Refill system, if required, to test pressure; hold for two hours with no drop in pressure.

2. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.3. Inspect specialty gas regulators for proper operation.


D. Prepare test and inspection reports. Final reports to be presented in a written report to the director of facilities management, architect, and design engineer.

3.10 PROTECTION





A. Connect new tubing to existing tubing with memory-metal couplings.

B. Medical Gas Piping except Medical Nitrogen Piping Larger than NPS 3 and Operating at More Than 185 psig: Type L, copper tube; wrought-copper fittings; and brazed joints.



226313 - 10


3.12 VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Shutoff Valves: Ball valve with manufacturer-installed ASTM B 819, copper-tube extensions.

B. Zone Valves: Ball valve with manufacturer-installed ASTM B 819, copper-tube extensions with pressure gage on one copper-tube extension.



COMMON MOTOR

REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC

EQUIPMENT

230513 - 1/3

© 2015 Spectrum Engineers, Inc.

SECTION 230513 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose,

horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on ac power systems up to

600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment

manufacturer for field installation.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the

following:

1. Motor controllers.

2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load.

3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.

4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.

B. Comply with IEEE 841 for severe-duty motors.

2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS

A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet (1000 m)

above sea level.

B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads

at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence,

and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.


COMMON MOTOR


EQUIPMENT

230513 - 2/3


2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS

A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.

B. Efficiency: Energy efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1.

C. Service Factor: 1.15.

D. Multispeed Motors: Variable torque.

1. For motors with 2:1 speed ratio, consequent pole, single winding.

2. For motors with other than 2:1 speed ratio, separate winding for each speed.

E. Multispeed Motors: Separate winding for each speed.

F. Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage.

G. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.

H. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating.

I. Insulation: Class F.

J. Code Letter Designation:

1. Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G.

2. Motors Smaller than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.

K. Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for motor

frame sizes smaller than 324T.

2.4 POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Motors Used with Reduced-Voltage and Multispeed Controllers: Match wiring connection

requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box,

suited to control method.

B. Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features

coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer.

1. Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant insulation varnish, designed and

tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses produced by

pulse-width modulated inverters.

2. Energy- and Premium-Efficient Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F insulation.

3. Inverter-Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation.

4. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected

motors.

C. Severe-Duty Motors: Comply with IEEE 841, with 1.15 minimum service factor.


COMMON MOTOR


EQUIPMENT

230513 - 3/3


2.5 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS

A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and

requirements of specific motor application:

1. Permanent-split capacitor.

2. Split phase.

3. Capacitor start, inductor run.

4. Capacitor start, capacitor run.

B. Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type.

C. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and

thrust loading.

D. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type.

E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor

when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor

insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns

to normal range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)



BALL VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 23052312 - 1

SECTION 230523.12 - BALL VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Bronze ball valves.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. CWP: Cold working pressure.

B. SWP: Steam working pressure.


A. Product Data: For each type of valve.


A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:

1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.2. Protect threads, flange faces, and weld ends.3. Set ball valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.

B. Use the following precautions during storage:

1. Maintain valve end protection.2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher-than-ambient-dew-point

temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.

C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use operating handles or stems as lifting or rigging points.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES

A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single manufacturer.



B. ASME Compliance:

1. ASME B1.20.1 for threads for threaded-end valves.2. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design

criteria.3. ASME B16.18 for solder-joint connections.4. ASME B31.1 for power piping valves.5. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.

C. Bronze valves shall be made with dezincification-resistant materials. Bronze valves made with copper alloy (brass) containing more than 15 percent zinc are not permitted.

D. Refer to HVAC valve schedule articles for applications of valves.

E. Valve Pressure-Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures.

F. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.

G. Valve Actuator Types:

1. Clamp lock hand lever: For valves smaller than NPS 8.2. Hand wheel and closed housing worm gear: For valves NPS 8 and larger.3. Chain operators: Equipment room valves NPS 4 and larger and located over 6’ 6”

above finished floor.

H. Valves in Insulated Piping:

1. Include 2-inch stem extensions.2. Extended operating handle of nonthermal-conductive material, and protective

sleeves that allow operation of valves without breaking the vapor seals or disturbing insulation.

3. Memory stops that are fully adjustable after insulation is applied.

I. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.

2.2 BRONZE BALL VALVES

A. Two-Piece Bronze Ball Valves with Full Port and Bronze or Brass Trim:


a. Apollo.b. Hammond Valve.c. Kitz.d. Milwaukee Valve Company.e. NIBCO INC.f. Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company.

2. Description:








a. Standard: MSS SP-110.b. SWP Rating: 150 psig.c. CWP Rating: 600 psig.d. Body Design: Two piece.e. Body Material: Bronze.f. Ends: Threaded.g. Seats: PTFE.h. Stem: Bronze.i. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.j. Port: Full.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling.

B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made accessible by such operations.

C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.

D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.

E. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.


A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.

B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.

C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.

D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.

E. Install valve tags. Comply with requirements in Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for valve tags and schedules.

3.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are unavailable, the same types of valves with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted.



B. Select valves with the following end connections:

1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends except where solder-joint valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below.

2. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends.

3.4 HEATING-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller: Two piece, full port, bronze with bronze trim.

1. Valves may be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded ends.

END OF SECTION 230523.12



SECTION 230539 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following hangers and supports for plumbing system piping and equipment:

1. Steel pipe hangers and supports.2. Trapeze pipe hangers.3. Metal framing systems.4. Thermal-hanger shield inserts.5. Fastener systems.6. Pipe stands.7. Pipe positioning systems.8. Equipment supports.


1. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural-steel shapes and plates for trapeze hangers for pipe and equipment supports.

2. Division 13 Section "Water-Based Fire-Suppression Systems" for pipe hangers for fire-suppression piping.

3. Division 15 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for vibration isolation devices.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.

B. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and Supports."


A. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.

B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.

C. Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment and obtain approval from authorities having jurisdiction.



1.4 SUBMITTALS


1. Steel pipe hangers and supports.2. Thermal-hanger shield inserts.3. Powder-actuated fastener systems.4. Pipe positioning systems.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following:

1. Trapeze pipe hangers. Include Product Data for components.2. Metal framing systems. Include Product Data for components.3. Pipe stands. Include Product Data for components.4. Equipment supports.

C. Welding certificates.


A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to [AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."] [AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code--Reinforcing Steel."] [ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.]


1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."2. AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum."3. AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code--Reinforcing Steel."4. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.

2.2 STEEL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. Refer to Part 3 "Hanger and Support Applications" Article for where to use specific hanger and support types.



B. Manufacturers:

1. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.2. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.3. Grinnell Corp.4. PHD Manufacturing, Inc.

C. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped.


E. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion for support of bearing surface of piping.

2.3 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS

A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from structural-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.

2.4 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Description: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made of steel channels and other components.

B. Manufacturers:

1. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.2. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.; ERISTRUT Div.3. Thomas & Betts Corporation.4. Unistrut Corp.; Tyco International, Ltd.

C. Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish unless bare metal surfaces are indicated.


2.5 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS

A. Description: 100-psig- minimum, compressive-strength insulation insert encased in sheet metal shield.

B. Manufacturers:

1. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc.2. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.3. PHS Industries, Inc.4. Pipe Shields, Inc.5. Rilco Manufacturing Company, Inc.6. Value Engineered Products, Inc.



C. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: [Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate] [Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate or ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass] [ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass] with vapor barrier.

D. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: [Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate] [Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate or ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass] [ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass].

E. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.

F. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.

G. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature.

2.6 FASTENER SYSTEMS

A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Hilti, Inc.b. ITW Ramset/Red Head.c. Masterset Fastening Systems, Inc.d. MKT Fastening, LLC.e. Powers Fasteners.

B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type stainless steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

1. Manufacturers:

a. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.b. Empire Industries, Inc.c. Hilti, Inc.d. ITW Ramset/Red Head.e. MKT Fastening, LLC.f. Powers Fasteners.

2.7 PIPE STAND FABRICATION

A. Pipe Stands, General: Shop or field-fabricated assemblies made of manufactured corrosion-resistant components to support roof-mounted piping.



B. Compact Pipe Stand: One-piece plastic unit with integral-rod-roller, pipe clamps, or V-shaped cradle to support pipe, for roof installation without membrane penetration.

1. Manufacturers:

a. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.b. MIRO Industries.

C. Curb-Mounting-Type Pipe Stands: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe support made from structural-steel shape, continuous-thread rods, and rollers for mounting on permanent stationary roof curb.

2.8 PIPE POSITIONING SYSTEMS

A. Description: IAPMO PS 42, system of metal brackets, clips, and straps for positioning piping in pipe spaces for plumbing fixtures for commercial applications.

B. Manufacturers:

1. C & S Mfg. Corp.2. HOLDRITE Corp.; Hubbard Enterprises.


A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural-steel shapes.


A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.

1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS

A. Specific hanger and support requirements are specified in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment.

B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.



C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized, metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish.

D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.

E. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.

F. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.

2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of 120 to 450 deg F pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 16, requiring up to 4 inches of insulation.

3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 24, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation.

4. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 24, if little or no insulation is required.

5. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to allow off-center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.

6. Adjustable, Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 8.

7. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.

8. Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.

9. Adjustable, Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 2.

10. Split Pipe-Ring with or without Turnbuckle-Adjustment Hangers (MSS Type 11): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 8.

11. Extension Hinged or 2-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 3.

12. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.13. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or

contraction.14. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36,

with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.15. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36,

with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange and with U-bolt to retain pipe.

16. Adjustable, Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for pipes, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36, if vertical adjustment is required, with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.

17. Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1 to NPS 30, from 2 rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.

18. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 20, from single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.



19. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 42, if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical adjustment is not necessary.

20. Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 24, if small horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur and vertical adjustment is not necessary.

21. Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 30, if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might be required in addition to expansion and contraction.

G. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20.

2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20, if longer ends are required for riser clamps.

H. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads.

2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings.4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various

types of building attachments.5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping

installations.

I. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.

2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist construction to attach to top flange of structural shape.

3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles.

4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.

5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are considerable and rod sizes are large.

6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.7. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required

tangent to flange edge.8. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams.9. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of

steel I-beams for heavy loads.10. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of

steel I-beams for heavy loads, with link extensions.



11. Malleable Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to structural steel.

12. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:

a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb.b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb.c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.

13. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.14. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is

required.15. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to

linear horizontal movement where headroom is limited.

J. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation.

3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.

K. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping movement.

2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 1-1/4 inches.

3. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll hanger with springs.

4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal expansion in piping systems.

5. Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from hanger.

6. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from base support.

7. Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from trapeze support.

8. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of stress from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected equipment. Include auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load-adjustment capability. These supports include the following types:

a. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally.b. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically.



c. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze member.

L. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

M. Comply with MFMA-102 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

N. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete construction.

O. Use pipe positioning systems in pipe spaces behind plumbing fixtures to support supply and waste piping for plumbing fixtures.


A. Steel Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure.

B. Trapeze Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers.

1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual pipe hangers.

2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1.

C. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and support together on field-assembled metal framing systems.

D. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.

E. Fastener System Installation:

1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less than 4 inches thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.

2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Pipe Stand Installation:



1. Pipe Stand Types except Curb-Mounting Type: Assemble components and mount on smooth roof surface. Do not penetrate roof membrane.

2. Curb-Mounting-Type Pipe Stands: Assemble components or fabricate pipe stand and mount on permanent, stationary roof curb. Refer to Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories" for curbs.

G. Pipe Positioning System Installation: Install support devices to make rigid supply and waste piping connections to each plumbing fixture. Refer to Division 22 Section "Plumbing Fixtures" for plumbing fixtures.

H. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories.

I. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.

J. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

K. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.

L. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

M. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

N. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 (for building services piping) are not exceeded.

O. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following:

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.

a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation.

b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.

c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.




3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees.


4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:

a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick.b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.c. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.d. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick.e. NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick.

5. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood inserts.6. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield.7. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping

insulation.


A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support equipment above floor.

B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface.

C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.

3.4 METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports.

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following:


2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.3. Remove welding flux immediately.4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and

contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.



3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.

B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.

3.6 PAINTING

A. Touch Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

B. Touch Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 09 painting Sections.

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.




230548-1

SECTION 230548 - VIBRATION & SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Isolation pads.2. Isolation mounts.3. Restrained elastomeric isolation mounts.4. Restrained spring isolators.5. Housed spring mounts.6. Elastomeric hangers.7. Spring hangers.8. Spring hangers with vertical-limit stops.9. Pipe riser resilient supports.10. Resilient pipe guides.11. Seismic snubbers.12. Restraining braces and cables.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. IBC: International Building Code.

B. ICC-ES: ICC-Evaluation Service.

C. OSHPD: Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development for the State of California.


A. Seismic-Restraint Loading:

1. Site Class as Defined in the IBC: See Structural Drawings.2. Assigned Seismic Use Group or Building Category as Defined in the IBC: IV.

a. Component Importance Factor: 1.5.b. Component Response Modification Factor: See Structural Drawings.c. Component Amplification Factor: See Structural Drawings

3. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at Short Periods (0.2 Second): See Structural drawings.

4. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at 1-Second Period: See structural drawings



230548-2

1.4 SUBMITTALS


1. Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration isolation device.

2. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each type and size of seismic-restraint component used.

a. Tabulate types and sizes of seismic restraints, complete with report numbers and rated strength in tension and shear as evaluated by an evaluation service member of ICC-ES.

b. Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and compliance with requirements.

3. Interlocking Snubbers: Include ratings for horizontal, vertical, and combined loads.

B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For vibration isolation and seismic-restraint details indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Design Calculations: Calculate static and dynamic loading due to equipment weight and operation, seismic forces required to select vibration isolators, seismic restraints, and for designing vibration isolation bases.

2. Riser Supports: Include riser diagrams and calculations showing anticipated expansion and contraction at each support point, initial and final loads on building structure, spring deflection changes, and seismic loads. Include certification that riser system has been examined for excessive stress and that none will exist.

3. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail overall dimensions, including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides and rails, base weights, equipment static loads, power transmission, component misalignment, and cantilever loads.

4. Seismic-Restraint Details:

a. Design Analysis: To support selection and arrangement of seismic restraints. Include calculations of combined tensile and shear loads.

b. Details: Indicate fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachments of restraints to the restrained items and to the structure. Show attachment locations, methods, and spacings. Identify components, list their strengths, and indicate directions and values of forces transmitted to the structure during seismic events. Indicate association with vibration isolation devices.

c. Preapproval and Evaluation Documentation: By an evaluation service member of ICC-ES, showing maximum ratings of restraint items and the basis for approval (tests or calculations).

C. Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of seismic bracing for plumbing piping and equipment with other systems and equipment in the vicinity, including other supports and seismic restraints.



230548-3


E. Qualification Data: For professional engineer and testing agency.


A. Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the IBC unless requirements in this Section are more stringent.

B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

C. Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis and shall bear anchorage preapproval OPA number from OSHPD, preapproved by ICC-ES, or preapproved by another agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum seismic-restraint ratings. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based on calculations. If preapproved ratings are not available, submittals based on independent testing are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear and tensile loads) to support seismic-restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATORS


1. Ace Mountings Co., Inc.2. Amber/Booth Company, Inc.3. California Dynamics Corporation.4. Isolation Technology, Inc.5. Kinetics Noise Control.6. Mason Industries.7. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc.8. Vibration Isolation.9. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.

B. Pads: Arranged in single or multiple layers of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad area, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized-steel baseplates, and factory cut to sizes that match requirements of supported equipment.

1. Resilient Material: Oil- and water-resistant neoprene.

C. Mounts: Double-deflection type, with molded, oil-resistant rubber, hermetically sealed compressed fiberglass, or neoprene isolator elements with factory-drilled, encapsulated top plate for bolting to equipment and with baseplate for bolting to structure. Color-code or otherwise identify to indicate capacity range.



230548-4



D. Restrained Mounts: All-directional mountings with seismic restraint.



E. Spring Isolators: Freestanding, laterally stable, open-spring isolators.



deformation or failure.5. Baseplates: Factory drilled for bolting to structure and bonded to 1/4-inch- thick,

rubber isolator pad attached to baseplate underside. Baseplates shall limit floor load to 500 psig.

6. Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and cap screw to fasten and level equipment.

F. Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open-spring isolators with seismic or limit-stop restraint.

1. Housing: Steel with resilient vertical-limit stops to prevent spring extension due to weight being removed; factory-drilled baseplate bonded to 1/4-inch- thick, neoprene or rubber isolator pad attached to baseplate underside; and adjustable equipment mounting and leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation.

2. Restraint: Seismic or limit-stop as required for equipment and authorities having jurisdiction.



deformation or failure.

G. Housed Spring Mounts: Housed spring isolator with integral seismic snubbers.

1. Housing: Ductile-iron or steel housing to provide all-directional seismic restraint.2. Base: Factory drilled for bolting to structure.



230548-5

3. Snubbers: Vertically adjustable to allow a maximum of 1/4-inch travel up or down before contacting a resilient collar.

H. Elastomeric Hangers: Single or double-deflection type, fitted with molded, oil-resistant elastomeric isolator elements bonded to steel housings with threaded connections for hanger rods. Color-code or otherwise identify to indicate capacity range.

I. Spring Hangers: Combination coil-spring and elastomeric-insert hanger with spring and insert in compression.




deformation or failure.6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel-washer-

reinforced cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame.7. Self-centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and


J. Spring Hangers with Vertical-Limit Stop: Combination coil-spring and elastomeric-insert hanger with spring and insert in compression and with a vertical-limit stop.




deformation or failure.6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene.7. Adjustable Vertical Stop: Steel washer with neoprene washer "up-stop" on lower

threaded rod.8. Self-centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and


K. Resilient Pipe Guides: Telescopic arrangement of 2 steel tubes or post and sleeve arrangement separated by a minimum of 1/2-inch- thick neoprene. Where clearances are not readily visible, a factory-set guide height with a shear pin to allow vertical motion due to pipe expansion and contraction shall be fitted. Shear pin shall be removable and reinsertable to allow for selection of pipe movement. Guides shall be capable of motion to meet location requirements.



230548-6



1. Amber/Booth Company, Inc.2. California Dynamics Corporation.3. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.4. Hilti, Inc.5. Kinetics Noise Control.6. Loos & Co.; Cableware Division.7. Mason Industries.8. TOLCO Incorporated; a brand of NIBCO INC.9. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd.

B. General Requirements for Restraint Components: Rated strengths, features, and applications shall be as defined in reports by an evaluation service member of ICC-ES.


C. Snubbers: Factory fabricated using welded structural-steel shapes and plates, anchor bolts, and replaceable resilient isolation washers and bushings.

1. Anchor bolts for attaching to concrete shall be seismic-rated, drill-in, and stud-wedge or female-wedge type.

2. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: Oil- and water-resistant neoprene.3. Maximum 1/4-inch air gap, and minimum 1/4-inch- thick resilient cushion.

D. Channel Support System: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated support assembly made of slotted steel channels with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building structure at the other end and other matching components and with corrosion-resistant coating; and rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces.

E. Restraint Cables: ASTM A 492 stainless-steel cables with end connections made of steel assemblies with thimbles, brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for restraining cable service; and with a minimum of two clamping bolts for cable engagement.

F. Hanger Rod Stiffener: Steel tube or steel slotted-support-system sleeve with internally bolted connections to hanger rod.

G. Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchor Bolts: Neoprene bushings designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of anchor bolts and studs.

H. Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene elements and steel sleeves designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of attachment devices used.

I. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One-piece, molded, oil- and water-resistant neoprene, with a flat washer face.



230548-7

J. Mechanical Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type in zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488. Minimum length of eight times diameter.

K. Adhesive Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and capsule anchor system containing polyvinyl or urethane methacrylate-based resin and accelerator, or injected polymer or hybrid mortar adhesive. Provide anchor bolts and hardware with zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488.


A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting.

B. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested equipment before shipping.

1. Powder coating on springs and housings.2. All hardware shall be galvanized. Hot-dip galvanize metal components for

exterior use.3. Baked enamel or powder coat for metal components on isolators for interior use.4. Color-code or otherwise mark vibration isolation and seismic-control devices to

indicate capacity range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic-control devices for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations before installation.


3.2 APPLICATIONS

A. Multiple Pipe Supports: Secure pipes to trapeze member with clamps approved for application by an evaluation service member of ICC-ES.

B. Hanger Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger rod stiffeners where indicated or scheduled on Drawings to receive them and where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods due to seismic forces.



230548-8

C. Strength of Support and Seismic-Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads within specified loading limits.

3.3 VIBRATION-CONTROL AND SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION

A. Equipment Restraints:

1. Install seismic snubbers on plumbing equipment mounted on vibration isolators. Locate snubbers as close as possible to vibration isolators and bolt to equipment base and supporting structure.

2. Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inches.

3. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an evaluation service member of ICC-ES providing required submittals for component.

B. Piping Restraints:

1. Comply with requirements in MSS SP-127.2. Space lateral supports a maximum of 40 feet o.c., and longitudinal supports a

maximum of 80 feet o.c.3. Brace a change of direction longer than 12 feet.


D. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an evaluation service member of ICC-ES providing required submittals for component.

E. Install bushing assemblies for anchor bolts for floor-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media between anchor bolt and mounting hole in concrete base.

F. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached to wall.

G. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.

H. Drilled-in Anchors:

1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling. Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.




230548-9


4. Adhesive Anchors: Clean holes to remove loose material and drilling dust prior to installation of adhesive. Place adhesive in holes proceeding from the bottom of the hole and progressing toward the surface in such a manner as to avoid introduction of air pockets in the adhesive.

5. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench.6. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless steel anchors for

exterior applications.

3.4 ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION

A. Install flexible connections in piping where they cross seismic joints, where adjacent sections or branches are supported by different structural elements, and where the connections terminate with connection to equipment that is anchored to a different structural element from the one supporting the connections as they approach equipment. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping" for piping flexible connections.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust isolators after piping system is at operating weight.

B. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during normal operation.

C. Adjust active height of sprint isolators.

D. Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation.



TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

230593 - 1


SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Balancing Air Systems:

a. Variable-air-volume systems.

2. Balancing Hydronic Piping Systems:

a. Constant-flow hydronic systems.

3. Balancing steam systems.4. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Equipment:

a. Motors.b. Heat-transfer coils.

5. Testing, adjusting, and balancing existing systems and equipment.6. Sound tests.7. Vibration tests.8. Duct leakage tests.9. Control system verification.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.

B. BAS: Building automation systems.

C. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.

D. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

E. TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau.

F. TAB Specialist: An independent entity meeting qualifications to perform TAB work.

G. TDH: Total dynamic head.

1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. TAB Conference: If requested by the Owner, conduct a TAB conference at Project site after approval of the TAB strategies and procedures plan to develop a mutual understanding of the details. Provide a minimum of 14 days' advance notice of scheduled meeting time and location.



230593 - 2


1. Minimum Agenda Items:

a. The Contract Documents examination report.b. The TAB plan.c. Needs for coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors.d. Proposed procedures for documentation and communication flow.



A. Qualification Data: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit documentation that the TAB specialist and this Project's TAB team members meet the qualifications specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.

B. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3.

C. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit TAB strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in "Preparation" Article.

D. System Readiness Checklists: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit system readiness checklists as specified in "Preparation" Article.

E. Examination Report: Submit a summary report of the examination review required in "Examination" Article.

F. Certified TAB reports.

G. Sample report forms.

H. Instrument calibration reports, to include the following:

1. Instrument type and make.2. Serial number.3. Application.4. Dates of use.5. Dates of calibration.


A. TAB Specialists Qualifications: Certified by AABC NEBB or TABB.

1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB specialist and certified by AABC NEBB or TABB.

2. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB specialist and certified by AABC NEBB or TABB as a TAB technician.

B. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 111, Section 4, "Instrumentation."



230593 - 3


C. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 7.2.2 - "Air Balancing."

D. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6.7.2.3 - "System Balancing."


A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the site and existing building during entire TAB period. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's operations.

B. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner may occupy completed areas of building before Substantial Completion. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's operations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover conditions in systems designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.

B. Examine installed systems for balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify that locations of these balancing devices are applicable for intended purpose and are accessible.

C. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment.

D. Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.

E. Examine ceiling plenums and underfloor air plenums used for supply, return, or relief air to verify that they are properly separated from adjacent areas. Verify that penetrations in plenum walls are sealed and fire-stopped if required.

F. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves.

1. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system.

2. Calculate system-effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from the conditions used to rate equipment performance. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Duct Design." Compare results with the design data and installed conditions.



230593 - 4


G. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control testing, cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed.

H. Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections.

I. Examine HVAC equipment and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, filters are clean, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.

J. Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes, and verify that they are accessible and their controls are connected and functioning.

K. Examine strainers. Verify that startup screens have been replaced by permanent screens with indicated perforations.

L. Examine control valves for proper installation for their intended function of throttling, diverting, or mixing fluid flows.

M. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.

N. Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping.

O. Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment.

P. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from indicated values.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes the following:

1. Equipment and systems to be tested.2. Strategies and step-by-step procedures for balancing the systems.3. Instrumentation to be used.4. Sample forms with specific identification for all equipment.

B. Perform system-readiness checks of HVAC systems and equipment to verify system readiness for TAB work. Include, at a minimum, the following:

1. Airside:

a. Verify that leakage and pressure tests on air distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed.

b. Duct systems are complete with terminals installed.c. Volume, smoke, and fire dampers are open and functional.d. Clean filters are installed.e. Fans are operating, free of vibration, and rotating in correct direction.f. Variable-frequency controllers' startup is complete and safeties are verified.g. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.h. Ceilings are installed.i. Windows and doors are installed.j. Suitable access to balancing devices and equipment is provided.

2. Hydronics:



230593 - 5


a. Verify leakage and pressure tests on water distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed.

b. Piping is complete with terminals installed.c. Water treatment is complete.d. Systems are flushed, filled, and air purged.e. Strainers are pulled and cleaned.f. Control valves are functioning per the sequence of operation.g. Shutoff and balance valves have been verified to be 100 percent open.h. Pumps are started and proper rotation is verified.i. Pump gage connections are installed directly at pump inlet and outlet flanges or in

discharge and suction pipe prior to valves or strainers.j. Variable-frequency controllers' startup is complete and safeties are verified.k. Suitable access to balancing devices and equipment is provided.

3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING

A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in AABC's "National Standards for Total System Balance" NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems" SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" and in this Section.

B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures.

1. After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts with same material and thickness as used to construct ducts.

2. After testing and balancing, install test ports and duct access doors that comply with requirements in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories."

3. Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials. Restore insulation, coverings, vapor barrier, and finish according to Section 230713 "Duct Insulation," Section 230716 "HVAC Equipment Insulation," and Section 230719 "HVAC Piping Insulation."

C. Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings.

D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units.

3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS

A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended testing procedures. Cross-check the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes.

B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.

C. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity.

D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct-airflow measurements.

E. Check airflow patterns from the outdoor-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air dampers through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.



230593 - 6


F. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.

G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.

H. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.

I. Check for airflow blockages.

J. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.

K. Check for proper sealing of air-handling-unit components.

L. Verify that air duct system is sealed as specified in Section 233113 "Metal Ducts."

3.5 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME SYSTEMS

A. Adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:

1. Verify that the system static pressure sensor is located two-thirds of the distance down the duct from the fan discharge.

2. Verify that the system is under static pressure control.3. Select the terminal unit that is most critical to the supply-fan airflow. Measure inlet static

pressure, and adjust system static pressure control set point so the entering static pressure for the critical terminal unit is not less than the sum of the terminal-unit manufacturer's recommended minimum inlet static pressure plus the static pressure needed to overcome terminal-unit discharge system losses.

4. Calibrate and balance each terminal unit for maximum and minimum design airflow as follows:

a. Adjust controls so that terminal is calling for maximum airflow. Some controllers require starting with minimum airflow. Verify calibration procedure for specific project.

b. Measure airflow and adjust calibration factor as required for design maximum airflow. Record calibration factor.

c. When maximum airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from terminal units.

d. Adjust controls so that terminal is calling for minimum airflow.e. Measure airflow and adjust calibration factor as required for design minimum

airflow. Record calibration factor. If no minimum calibration is available, note any deviation from design airflow.

f. When in full cooling or full heating, ensure that there is no mixing of hot-deck and cold-deck airstreams unless so designed.

g. On constant volume terminals, in critical areas where room pressure is to be maintained, verify that the airflow remains constant over the full range of full cooling to full heating. Note any deviation from design airflow or room pressure.

5. After terminals have been calibrated and balanced, test and adjust system for total airflow. Adjust fans to deliver total design airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by fan manufacturer.

a. Set outside-air, return-air, and relief-air dampers for proper position that simulates minimum outdoor-air conditions.



230593 - 7


b. Set terminals for maximum airflow. If system design includes diversity, adjust terminals for maximum and minimum airflow so that connected total matches fan selection and simulates actual load in the building.

c. Where duct conditions allow, measure airflow by Pitot-tube traverse. If necessary, perform multiple Pitot-tube traverses to obtain total airflow.

d. Where duct conditions are not suitable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, a coil traverse may be acceptable.

e. If a reliable Pitot-tube traverse or coil traverse is not possible, measure airflow at terminals and calculate the total airflow.

6. Measure fan static pressures as follows:

a. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection.b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan inlet or through the flexible connection.c. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up the air-handling

system.d. Report any artificial loading of filters at the time static pressures are measured.

7. Set final return and outside airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and minimum outdoor airflow.

a. Balance the return-air ducts and inlets the same as described for constant-volume air systems.

b. Verify that terminal units are meeting design airflow under system maximum flow.

8. Re-measure the inlet static pressure at the most critical terminal unit and adjust the system static pressure set point to the most energy-efficient set point to maintain the optimum system static pressure. Record set point and give to controls contractor.

9. Verify final system conditions as follows:

a. Re-measure and confirm that minimum outdoor, return, and relief airflows are within design. Readjust to match design if necessary.

b. Re-measure and confirm that total airflow is within design.c. Re-measure final fan operating data, rpms, volts, amps, and static profile.d. Mark final settings.e. Test system in economizer mode. Verify proper operation and adjust if necessary.

Measure and record all operating data.f. Verify tracking between supply and return fans.

3.6 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

A. Prepare test reports for pumps, coils, and heat exchangers. Obtain approved submittals and manufacturer-recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required coil and heat exchanger flow rates with pump design flow rate.

B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" piping layouts.

C. In addition to requirements in "Preparation" Article, prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing as follows:

1. Check liquid level in expansion tank.2. Check highest vent for adequate pressure.3. Check flow-control valves for proper position.4. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.



230593 - 8


5. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.6. Check that air has been purged from the system.

3.7 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

A. Adjust pumps to deliver total design gpm.

1. Measure total water flow.

a. Position valves for full flow through coils.b. Measure flow by main flow meter, if installed.c. If main flow meter is not installed, determine flow by pump TDH or exchanger

pressure drop.

2. Measure pump TDH as follows:

a. Measure discharge pressure directly at the pump outlet flange or in discharge pipe prior to any valves.

b. Measure inlet pressure directly at the pump inlet flange or in suction pipe prior to any valves or strainers.

c. Convert pressure to head and correct for differences in gage heights.d. Verify pump impeller size by measuring the TDH with the discharge valve closed.

Note the point on manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow, and verify that the pump has the intended impeller size.

e. With valves open, read pump TDH. Adjust pump discharge valve until design water flow is achieved.

3. Monitor motor performance during procedures and do not operate motor in an overloaded condition.

B. Adjust flow-measuring devices installed in mains and branches to design water flows.

1. Measure flow in main and branch pipes.2. Adjust main and branch balance valves for design flow.3. Re-measure each main and branch after all have been adjusted.

C. Adjust flow-measuring devices installed at terminals for each space to design water flows.

1. Measure flow at terminals.2. Adjust each terminal to design flow.3. Re-measure each terminal after it is adjusted.4. Position control valves to bypass the coil, and adjust the bypass valve to maintain design

flow.5. Perform temperature tests after flows have been balanced.

D. For systems with pressure-independent valves at terminals:

1. Measure differential pressure and verify that it is within manufacturer's specified range.2. Perform temperature tests after flows have been verified.

E. For systems without pressure-independent valves or flow-measuring devices at terminals:

1. Measure and balance coils by either coil pressure drop or temperature method.



230593 - 9


2. If balanced by coil pressure drop, perform temperature tests after flows have been verified.

F. Verify final system conditions as follows:

1. Re-measure and confirm that total water flow is within design.2. Re-measure final pumps' operating data, TDH, volts, amps, and static profile.3. Mark final settings.

G. Verify that memory stops have been set.

3.8 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS

A. Motors 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:

1. Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number.2. Motor horsepower rating.3. Motor rpm.4. Phase and hertz.5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.7. Starter size and thermal-protection-element rating.8. Service factor and frame size.

B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test manual bypass of controller to prove proper operation.

3.9 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT-TRANSFER COILS

A. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each water coil:

1. Entering- and leaving-water temperature.2. Water flow rate.3. Water pressure drop for major (more than 20 gpm) equipment coils, excluding unitary

equipment such as reheat coils, unit heaters, and fan-coil units.4. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.5. Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air for cooling coils.6. Airflow.

B. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each electric heating coil:

1. Nameplate data.2. Airflow.3. Entering- and leaving-air temperature at full load.4. Voltage and amperage input of each phase at full load.5. Calculated kilowatt at full load.6. Fuse or circuit-breaker rating for overload protection.

C. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each steam coil:

1. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.2. Airflow.3. Inlet steam pressure.



230593 - 10


D. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each refrigerant coil:

1. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.2. Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.3. Airflow.

3.10 SOUND TESTS

A. After the systems are balanced and construction is Substantially Complete, measure and record sound levels at 5 locations as designated by the Architect.

B. Instrumentation:

1. The sound-testing meter shall be a portable, general-purpose testing meter consisting of a microphone, processing unit, and readout.

2. The sound-testing meter shall be capable of showing fluctuations at minimum and maximum levels, and measuring the equivalent continuous sound pressure level (LEQ).

3. The sound-testing meter must be capable of using 1/3 octave band filters to measure mid-frequencies from 31.5 Hz to 8000 Hz.

4. The accuracy of the sound-testing meter shall be plus or minus one decibel.

C. Test Procedures:

1. Perform test at quietest background noise period. Note cause of unpreventable sound that affects test outcome.

2. Equipment should be operating at design values.3. Calibrate the sound-testing meter prior to taking measurements.4. Use a microphone suitable for the type of noise levels measured that is compatible with

meter. Provide a windshield for outside or in-duct measurements.5. Record a set of background measurements in dBA and sound pressure levels in the eight

un-weighted octave bands 63 Hz to 8000 Hz (NC) with the equipment off.6. Take sound readings in dBA and sound pressure levels in the eight un-weighted octave

bands 63 Hz to 8000 Hz (NC) with the equipment operating.7. Take readings no closer than 36 inches from a wall or from the operating equipment and

approximately 60 inches from the floor, with the meter held or mounted on a tripod.8. For outdoor measurements, move sound-testing meter slowly and scan area that has the

most exposure to noise source being tested. Use A-weighted scale for this type of reading.

D. Reporting:

1. Report shall record the following:

a. Location.b. System tested.c. dBA reading.d. Sound pressure level in each octave band with equipment on and off.

2. Plot sound pressure levels on NC worksheet with equipment on and off.



230593 - 11


3.11 VIBRATION TESTS

A. After systems are balanced and construction is Substantially Complete, measure and record vibration levels on equipment having motor horsepower equal to or greater than 10.

B. Instrumentation:

1. Use portable, battery-operated, and microprocessor-controlled vibration meter with or without a built-in printer.

2. The meter shall automatically identify engineering units, filter bandwidth, amplitude, and frequency scale values.

3. The meter shall be able to measure machine vibration displacement in mils of deflection, velocity in inches per second, and acceleration in inches per second squared.

4. Verify calibration date is current for vibration meter before taking readings.

C. Test Procedures:

1. To ensure accurate readings, verify that accelerometer has a clean, flat surface and is mounted properly.

2. With the unit running, set up vibration meter in a safe, secure location. Connect transducer to meter with proper cables. Hold magnetic tip of transducer on top of the bearing, and measure unit in mils of deflection. Record measurement, then move transducer to the side of the bearing and record in mils of deflection. Record an axial reading in mils of deflection by holding nonmagnetic, pointed transducer tip on end of shaft.

3. Change vibration meter to velocity (inches per second) measurements. Repeat and record above measurements.

4. Record CPM or rpm.5. Read each bearing on motor, fan, and pump as required. Track and record vibration

levels from rotating component through casing to base.

D. Reporting:

1. Report shall record location and the system tested.2. Include horizontal-vertical-axial measurements for tests.3. Verify that vibration limits follow Specifications, or, if not specified, follow the General

Machinery Vibration Severity Chart or Vibration Acceleration General Severity Chart from the AABC National Standards. Acceptable levels of vibration are normally "smooth" to "good."

4. Include in report General Machinery Vibration Severity Chart, with conditions plotted.

3.12 DUCT LEAKAGE TESTS

A. Witness the duct pressure testing performed by Installer.

B. Verify that proper test methods are used and that leakage rates are within specified tolerances.

C. Report deficiencies observed.

3.13 CONTROLS VERIFICATION

A. In conjunction with system balancing, perform the following:



230593 - 12


1. Verify temperature control system is operating within the design limitations.2. Confirm that the sequences of operation are in compliance with Contract Documents.3. Verify that controllers are calibrated and function as intended.4. Verify that controller set points are as indicated.5. Verify the operation of lockout or interlock systems.6. Verify the operation of valve and damper actuators.7. Verify that controlled devices are properly installed and connected to correct controller.8. Verify that controlled devices travel freely and are in position indicated by controller:

open, closed, or modulating.9. Verify location and installation of sensors to ensure that they sense only intended

temperature, humidity, or pressure.

B. Reporting: Include a summary of verifications performed, remaining deficiencies, and variations from indicated conditions.

3.14 PROCEDURES FOR TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING EXISTING SYSTEMS

A. Perform a preconstruction inspection of existing equipment that is to remain and be reused.

1. Measure and record the operating speed, airflow, and static pressure of each fan.2. Measure motor voltage and amperage. Compare the values to motor nameplate

information.3. Check the refrigerant charge.4. Check the condition of filters.5. Check the condition of coils.6. Check the operation of the drain pan and condensate-drain trap.7. Check bearings and other lubricated parts for proper lubrication.8. Report on the operating condition of the equipment and the results of the measurements

taken. Report deficiencies.

B. Before performing testing and balancing of existing systems, inspect existing equipment that is to remain and be reused to verify that existing equipment has been cleaned and refurbished. Verify the following:

1. New filters are installed.2. Coils are clean and fins combed.3. Drain pans are clean.4. Fans are clean.5. Bearings and other parts are properly lubricated.6. Deficiencies noted in the preconstruction report are corrected.

C. Perform testing and balancing of existing systems to the extent that existing systems are affected by the renovation work.

1. Compare the indicated airflow of the renovated work to the measured fan airflows, and determine the new fan speed and the face velocity of filters and coils.

2. Verify that the indicated airflows of the renovated work result in filter and coil face velocities and fan speeds that are within the acceptable limits defined by equipment manufacturer.

3. If calculations increase or decrease the airflow rates and water flow rates by more than 5 percent, make equipment adjustments to achieve the calculated rates. If increase or decrease is 5 percent or less, equipment adjustments are not required.

4. Balance each air outlet.



230593 - 13


3.15 TOLERANCES

A. Set HVAC system's airflow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances:

1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus or minus 10 percent.2. Air Supply Outlets: 0 to 10 percent.3. Air Return Inlets: Plus or minus 5 percent.4. Air Exhaust Inlets: 0 to -10 percent.5. Heating-Water Flow Rate: 0 to 5 percent.6. Cooling-Water Flow Rate: 0 to 5 percent.

B. Maintaining pressure relationships as designed shall have priority over the tolerances specified above.

3.16 PROGRESS REPORTING

A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems balancing devices to facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and balancing devices.

B. Status Reports: Prepare bi-monthly progress reports to describe completed procedures, procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems found in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system and each building floor for systems serving multiple floors.

3.17 FINAL REPORT

A. General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sections for tested systems and balanced systems.

1. Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer.

2. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.3. Certify validity and accuracy of field data.

B. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field-report data, include the following:

1. Manufacturers' test data.2. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.3. Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop Drawings and

Product Data.

C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data:

1. Title page.2. Name and address of the TAB specialist.3. Project name.4. Project location.5. Architect's name and address.6. Engineer's name and address.



230593 - 14


7. Contractor's name and address.8. Report date.9. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report.10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report.

Number each page in the report.11. Summary of contents including the following:

a. Indicated versus final performance.b. Notable characteristics of systems.c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract

Documents.

12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings.14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated values.15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following:

a. Settings for outdoor-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers.b. Conditions of filters.c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions.d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils.e. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter.f. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems.g. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller.h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.

D. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present each system with single-line diagram and include the following:

1. Quantities of outdoor, supply, return, and exhaust airflows.2. Water and steam flow rates.3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations.5. Terminal units.6. Balancing stations.7. Position of balancing devices.

E. Apparatus-Coil Test Reports:

1. Coil Data:

a. System identification.b. Location.c. Coil type.d. Number of rows.e. Fin spacing in fins per inch o.c.f. Make and model number.g. Face area in sq. ft..h. Tube size in NPS.i. Tube and fin materials.j. Circuiting arrangement.

2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):

a. Airflow rate in cfm.



230593 - 15


b. Average face velocity in fpm.c. Air pressure drop in inches wg.d. Outdoor-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.e. Return-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.f. Entering-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.g. Leaving-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F.h. Water flow rate in gpm.i. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig.j. Entering-water temperature in deg F.k. Leaving-water temperature in deg F.l. Refrigerant expansion valve and refrigerant types.m. Refrigerant suction pressure in psig.n. Refrigerant suction temperature in deg F.o. Inlet steam pressure in psig.

F. Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid representing the duct cross-section and record the following:

1. Report Data:

a. System and air-handling-unit number.b. Location and zone.c. Traverse air temperature in deg F.d. Duct static pressure in inches wg.e. Duct size in inches.f. Duct area in sq. ft..g. Indicated airflow rate in cfm.h. Indicated velocity in fpm.i. Actual airflow rate in cfm.j. Actual average velocity in fpm.k. Barometric pressure in psig.

G. Air-Terminal-Device Reports:

1. Unit Data:

a. System and air-handling unit identification.b. Location and zone.c. Apparatus used for test.d. Area served.e. Make.f. Number from system diagram.g. Type and model number.h. Size.i. Effective area in sq. ft..


a. Airflow rate in cfm.b. Air velocity in fpm.c. Preliminary airflow rate as needed in cfm.d. Preliminary velocity as needed in fpm.e. Final airflow rate in cfm.f. Final velocity in fpm.g. Space temperature in deg F.



230593 - 16


H. System-Coil Reports: For reheat coils and water coils of terminal units, include the following:

1. Unit Data:

a. System and air-handling-unit identification.b. Location and zone.c. Room or riser served.d. Coil make and size.e. Flowmeter type.


a. Airflow rate in cfm.b. Entering-water temperature in deg F.c. Leaving-water temperature in deg F.d. Water pressure drop in feet of head or psig.e. Entering-air temperature in deg F.f. Leaving-air temperature in deg F.

I. Instrument Calibration Reports:

1. Report Data:

a. Instrument type and make.b. Serial number.c. Application.d. Dates of use.e. Dates of calibration.

3.18 VERIFICATION OF TAB REPORT

A. The TAB specialist's test and balance engineer shall conduct the inspection in the presence of Construction Manager.

B. Construction Manager shall randomly select measurements, documented in the final report, to be rechecked. Rechecking shall be limited to either 10 percent of the total measurements recorded or the extent of measurements that can be accomplished in a normal 8-hour business day.

C. If rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in the final report by more than the tolerances allowed, the measurements shall be noted as "FAILED."

D. If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total measurements checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing shall be considered incomplete and shall be rejected.

E. If TAB work fails, proceed as follows:

1. TAB specialists shall recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the final report and balancing device settings to include all changes; resubmit the final report and request a second final inspection.

2. If the second final inspection also fails, Owner may contract the services of another TAB specialist to complete TAB work according to the Contract Documents and deduct the cost of the services from the original TAB specialist's final payment.



230593 - 17


3. If the second verification also fails, Owner may contact AABC Headquarters regarding the AABC National Performance Guaranty.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.19 ADDITIONAL TESTS

A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional TAB to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.

B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and winter conditions, perform additional TAB during near-peak summer and winter conditions.



DUCT INSULATION 230713-1

SECTION 230713 DUCT INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes insulating the following duct services:

1. Indoor, concealed supply and outdoor air.2. Indoor, exposed supply and outdoor air.3. Indoor, concealed return located in unconditioned space.4. Indoor, exposed return located in unconditioned space.5. Outdoor, concealed supply and return.6. Outdoor, exposed supply and return.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts" for duct liners.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, water-vapor permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory- and field-applied if any).

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of insulation and hanger.

2. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, dampers, specialties and flanges for each type of insulation.

3. Detail application of field-applied jackets.4. Detail application at linkages of control devices.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

B. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests and test methods employed.

C. Field quality-control reports.




A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.

B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less.

2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed index of 150 or less.


A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

B. Coordinate clearance requirements with duct Installer for duct insulation application. Before preparing ductwork Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance.

C. Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing.

1.7 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results.

B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Duct Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Duct and Plenum Insulation Schedule," and "Aboveground, Outdoor Duct and Plenum Insulation Schedule" articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.

B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.

D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795.

E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process.

F. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type I Type II with factory-applied vinyl jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.


a. CertainTeed Corp.; SoftTouch Duct Wrap.b. Johns Manville; Microlite.c. Knauf Insulation; Friendly Feel Duct Wrap.d. Owens Corning; SOFTR All-Service Duct Wrap.

2.2 SEALANTS

A. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:


a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; CP-76.

b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 405.c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B.

Fuller Company; 95-44.d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05.

2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F.5. Color: Aluminum.6. For indoor applications, sealants shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less

when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).



7. Sealants shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

2.3 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:

1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

3. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.

4. FSP Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with polyethylene backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.

a. Vinyl Jacket: White vinyl with a permeance of 1.3 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure A, and complying with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.

2.4 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Metal Jacket:


a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; Metal Jacketing Systems.

b. ITW Insulation Systems; Aluminum and Stainless Steel Jacketing.c. RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate.

2. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005, Temper H-14.

a. Sheet and roll stock ready for shop or field sizing.b. Finish and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.c. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 2.5-mil- thick polysurlyn.

2.5 SECUREMENTS

A. Insulation Pins and Hangers:



1. Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.135-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated.

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1) AGM Industries, Inc.; CWP-1.2) GEMCO; CD.3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; CD.4) Nelson Stud Welding; TPA, TPC, and TPS.

2. Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.106-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch galvanized carbon-steel washer.

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:

1) AGM Industries, Inc.; CHP-1.2) GEMCO; Cupped Head Weld Pin.3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Cupped Head.4) Nelson Stud Welding; CHP.

3. Metal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements:


1) AGM Industries, Inc.; Tactoo Perforated Base Insul-Hangers.2) GEMCO; Perforated Base.3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Spindle.

b. Baseplate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square.

c. Spindle: Aluminum, fully annealed, 0.106-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated.

d. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates.

4. Nonmetal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate fastened to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements:




1) GEMCO; Nylon Hangers.2) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Nylon Insulation Hangers.

b. Baseplate: Perforated, nylon sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 1-1/2 inches in diameter.

c. Spindle: Nylon, 0.106-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated, up to 2-1/2 inches.

d. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates.

5. Self-Sticking-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements:


1) AGM Industries, Inc.; Tactoo Self-Adhering Insul-Hangers.2) GEMCO; Peel & Press.3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Self Stick.

b. Baseplate: Galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square.

c. Spindle: Aluminum, fully annealed, 0.106-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated.

d. Adhesive-backed base with a peel-off protective cover.

6. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- thick, sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.


1) AGM Industries, Inc.; RC-150.2) GEMCO; R-150.3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; WA-150.4) Nelson Stud Welding; Speed Clips.

b. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations.

7. Nonmetal Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- thick nylon sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:



1) GEMCO.2) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.

B. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- wide, stainless steel or Monel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.

1. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects.2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application.

3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of ducts and fittings.

B. Install insulation materials, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of duct system as specified in insulation system schedules.

C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.

D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.

E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

G. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

H. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

I. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.



1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on

anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.

3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

J. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.

K. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:

1. Draw jacket tight and smooth.2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as

insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.

3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 4 inches o.c.

a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.

4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written instructions, to maintain vapor seal.

5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to duct flanges and fittings.

L. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.

M. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement.

N. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.

3.4 PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof

surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.



3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof flashing.

4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall

surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches.

4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

D. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate damper sleeves to match adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches.

1. Comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers.

E. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:

1. Duct: For penetrations through fire-rated assemblies, terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves and externally insulate damper sleeve beyond floor to match adjacent duct insulation. Overlap damper sleeve and duct insulation at least 2 inches.

2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."

3.5 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION

A. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins.

1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.

2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions.

3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor-discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows:



a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c.

b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, place pins 16 inches o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.

c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums.

d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.e. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers.f. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend

parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing.

4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, 1 inch o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.

a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-barrier seal.

b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-foot intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to two times the insulation thickness, but not less than 3 inches.

5. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end joints. At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c.

6. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.

7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6-inch- wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.

3.6 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation:

1. Indoor, concealed supply and outdoor air.2. Indoor, exposed supply and outdoor air.3. Indoor, concealed return located in unconditioned space.4. Indoor, exposed return located in unconditioned space.



B. Items Not Insulated:

1. Indoor, concealed within mechanical shaft(s) supply and outdoor air. (To be lined)

2. Outdoor, concealed supply and return. (Outdoor ducts to be lined)3. Outdoor, exposed supply and return. (Outdoor ducts to be lined)4. Fibrous-glass ducts.5. Metal ducts with duct liner of sufficient thickness to comply with energy code and

ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.6. Factory-insulated flexible ducts.7. Factory-insulated plenums and casings.8. Flexible connectors.9. Vibration-control devices.10. Factory-insulated access panels and doors.

3.7 INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. General:

B. Concealed, round and flat-oval, supply-air duct insulation shall be the following:

1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 2 inches thick and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.

C. Concealed, round and flat-oval, return-air (exhaust) duct insulation shall be the following:


D. Concealed, round and flat-oval, outdoor-air duct insulation shall be the following:


E. Concealed, rectangular, supply-air duct insulation shall be the following:


F. Concealed, rectangular, return-air duct (exhaust) insulation shall be the following:


G. Concealed, rectangular, outdoor-air duct insulation shall be the following:


H. Exposed, round and flat-oval, supply-air duct insulation shall be the following:


I. Exposed, round and flat-oval, return-air duct insulation shall be the following:




J. Exposed, round and flat-oval, outdoor-air duct insulation shall be the following:


K. Exposed, rectangular, supply-air duct insulation shall be the following:


L. Exposed, rectangular, return-air duct insulation shall be the following:


M. Exposed, rectangular, outdoor-air duct insulation shall be the following:


3.8 ABOVEGROUND, OUTDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Aboveground, outdoor duct to be lined.



METAL DUCTS 233113-1

SECTION 233113 - METAL DUCTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Single-wall rectangular ducts and fittings.2. Single-wall round and flat-oval ducts and fittings.3. Sheet metal materials.4. Duct liner.5. Sealants and gaskets.6. Hangers and supports.7. Seismic-restraint devices.


1. Division 23 Section "Nonmetal Ducts" for fibrous-glass ducts, thermoset fiber-reinforced plastic ducts, thermoplastic ducts, PVC ducts, and concrete ducts.

2. Division 23 Section "HVAC Casings" for factory- and field-fabricated casings for mechanical equipment.

3. Division 23 Section "Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, duct-mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.

4. Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for testing, adjusting, and balancing requirements for metal ducts.


A. Delegated Duct Design: Duct construction, including sheet metal thicknesses, seam and joint construction, reinforcements, and hangers and supports, shall comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and performance requirements and design criteria indicated in "Duct Schedule" Article.

B. Structural Performance: Duct hangers and supports and seismic restraints shall withstand the effects of gravity and seismic loads and stresses within limits and under conditions described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and ASCE/SEI 7.

C. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.


A. Product Data: For each type of the following products:

1. Liners and adhesives.



2. Sealants and gaskets.3. Seismic-restraint devices.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components, and attachments to other work.

2. Factory- and shop-fabricated ducts and fittings.3. Duct layout indicating sizes, configuration, liner material, and static-pressure

classes.4. Elevation of top of ducts.5. Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines.6. Fittings.7. Reinforcement and spacing.8. Seam and joint construction.9. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions.10. Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project.11. Locations for duct accessories, including dampers, turning vanes, and access

doors and panels.12. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building

attachment, seismic restraints, and vibration isolation.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal:

1. Sheet metal thicknesses.2. Joint and seam construction and sealing.3. Reinforcement details and spacing.4. Materials, fabrication, assembly, and spacing of hangers and supports.5. Design Calculations: Calculations, including analysis data signed and sealed by

the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation for selecting hangers and supports and seismic restraints.


A. Welding certificates.



A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum," for aluminum supports. AWS D9.1M/D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding.

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports.



2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum," for aluminum supports.

3. AWS D9.1M/D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding.

C. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-up."

D. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6.4.4 - "HVAC System Construction and Insulation."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SINGLE-WALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.

B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-1, "Rectangular Duct/Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Duct/Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

D. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 4, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

2.2 SINGLE-WALL ROUND AND FLAT-OVAL DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.


a. McGill AirFlow LLC.b. SEMCO Incorporated.



c. Spiral Manufacturing Co., Inc.

B. Flat-Oval Ducts: Indicated dimensions are the duct width (major dimension) and diameter of the round sides connecting the flat portions of the duct (minor dimension).

C. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Round Duct Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

1. Transverse Joints in Ducts Larger Than 60 Inches in Diameter: Flanged.

D. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Round Duct Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

1. Fabricate round ducts larger than 90 inches in diameter with butt-welded longitudinal seams.

2. Fabricate flat-oval ducts larger than 72 inches in width (major dimension) with butt-welded longitudinal seams.

E. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

2.3 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

A. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections. Ductwork to be no lighter than 24 gauge. Contractor may substitute heavier gauge at no additional cost.

B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.

1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90.2. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized.

C. PVC-Coated, Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.

1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90.2. Coating Materials: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use on ducts

listed and labeled by an NRTL for compliance with UL 181, Class 1.



D. Carbon-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, with oiled, matte finish for exposed ducts.

E. Stainless-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 304 or 316, as indicated in the "Duct Schedule" Article; cold rolled, annealed, sheet. Exposed surface finish shall be No. 2B, No. 2D, No. 3, or No. 4 as indicated in the "Duct Schedule" Article.

F. Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209 Alloy 3003, H14 temper; with mill finish for concealed ducts, and standard, one-side bright finish for duct surfaces exposed to view.

G. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

1. Where black- and galvanized-steel shapes and plates are used to reinforce aluminum ducts, isolate the different metals with butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM gasket materials.

H. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.

2.4 SEALANT AND GASKETS

A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants and gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL.

B. Two-Part Tape Sealing System:

1. Tape: Woven cotton fiber impregnated with mineral gypsum and modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable, airtight seal.

2. Tape Width: 4 inches.3. Sealant: Modified styrene acrylic.4. Water resistant.5. Mold and mildew resistant.6. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative.7. Service: Indoor and outdoor.8. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare),

stainless steel, or aluminum.10. For indoor applications, sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less

when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).11. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California

Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

C. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:



1. Application Method: Brush on.2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent.3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20.4. Water resistant.5. Mold and mildew resistant.6. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water).7. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative.8. Service: Indoor or outdoor.9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare),

stainless steel, or aluminum sheets.

D. Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920.

1. General: Single-component, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric.2. Type: S.3. Grade: NS.4. Class: 25.5. Use: O.6. For indoor applications, sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less

when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

E. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.

F. Round Duct Joint O-Ring Seals:

1. Seal shall provide maximum leakage class of 3 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg and shall be rated for 10-inch wg static-pressure class, positive or negative.

2. EPDM O-ring to seal in concave bead in coupling or fitting spigot.3. Double-lipped, EPDM O-ring seal, mechanically fastened to factory-fabricated

couplings and fitting spigots.

2.5 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts.

B. Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation.

C. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct."

D. Steel Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603.

E. Steel Cables for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless steel complying with ASTM A 492.



F. Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device.

G. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials.

H. Trapeze and Riser Supports:

1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates.2. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel shapes and plates.3. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum or galvanized steel coated with zinc

chromate.



1. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.2. Ductmate Industries, Inc.3. Hilti Corp.4. Kinetics Noise Control.5. Mason Industries.6. TOLCO; a brand of NIBCO INC.7. Unistrut Corporation; Tyco International, Ltd.

B. General Requirements for Restraint Components: Rated strengths, features, and applications shall be as defined in reports by an evaluation service member of the ICC Evaluation Service.


C. Channel Support System: Shop- or field-fabricated support assembly made of slotted steel channels rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces and with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building structure at the other end. Include matching components and corrosion-resistant coating.

D. Restraint Cables: ASTM A 603, galvanized-steel cables with end connections made of cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for restraining cable service; and with an automatic-locking and clamping device or double-cable clips.

E. Hanger Rod Stiffener: Steel tube or steel slotted-support-system sleeve with internally bolted connections or Reinforcing steel angle clamped to hanger rod.

F. Mechanical Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations. Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings.

B. Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install round and flat-oval ducts in maximum practical lengths.

D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.

E. Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for branch connections.

F. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and perpendicular to building lines.

G. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building.

H. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness.

I. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and enclosures.

J. Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches.

K. Where ducts pass through fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls, install fire dampers. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers.

L. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials. Comply with SMACNA's "IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction," Appendix G, "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines."

M. All ducts shall be cleaned and capped prior to installing and installed duct shall not have the ends uncapped to prevent the entry of dust during construction.

N. All ductwork, including supply, return and exhaust shall have circumferential joints, longitudinal joints, and duct wall penetrations externally sealed in according to SMACNA Class A. The sealant used to seal the longitudinal joints for low pressure ductwork must be visible of the joints shall require resealing in the field.



O. Leak testing shall be performed for all ductwork with a pressure classification of 2” and above, ductwork with a cross-sectional area greater than 6 square feet, and all ductwork enclosed in shafts.

P. Follow procedure published by United Sheet Metal Division of United McGill Corporation entitled “System Pressure Testing for Leaks” using prescribed test kit containing test blower, two U-tube manometer, and calibrated orifice tube. Orifice flow measurement device to be individually calibrated against a primary standard and a calibrated curve permanently attached to orifice tube assembly.

Q. All leak testing is to be witnessed by General Contractor’s Qaulity Control on-site representative.

R. If system is tested in sections, leakage rates may be totaled to give performance of the whole system.

S. Contractor to have on-site at all times: duct leak test training video (distributed by HCA). Contact the HCA director of Engineering and Facility Management.

T. Contractor to maintain on-site, a set of ductwork prints that are shaded in different colors to show the duct sections isolated for each test. Contractor is to indicate on the print, the date each section of duct was tested and the final percent leakage rate measured for each test section.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK

A. Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or damaged.

B. Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed bead. Do not use two-part tape sealing system.

C. Grind welds to provide smooth surface free of burrs, sharp edges, and weld splatter. When welding stainless steel with a No. 3 or 4 finish, grind the welds flush, polish the exposed welds, and treat the welds to remove discoloration caused by welding.

D. Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in the arrangement and fabrication of fittings, hangers and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets.

E. Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these requirements.

3.3 ADDITIONAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMERCIAL KITCHEN HOOD EXHAUST DUCT (If indicated on plans)

A. Install commercial kitchen hood exhaust ducts without dips and traps that may hold grease, and sloped a minimum of 2 percent to drain grease back to the hood.

B. Install fire-rated access panel assemblies at each change in direction and at maximum intervals of 20 feet in horizontal ducts, and at every floor for vertical ducts, or as



indicated on Drawings. Locate access panel on top or sides of duct a minimum of 1-1/2 inches from bottom of duct.

C. Do not penetrate fire-rated assemblies except as allowed by applicable building codes and authorities having jurisdiction.

3.4 DUCT SEALING

A. Seal ducts for duct static-pressure, seal classes, and leakage classes specified in "Duct Schedule" Article according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." (See Duct Installation, 3.1 of this document for specific guidelines for leakage)

B. Seal ducts to the following seal classes according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible":

1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

2. Outdoor, Supply-Air Ducts: Seal Class A.3. Outdoor, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C.4. Outdoor, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class C.5. Unconditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg and

Lower: Seal Class B.6. Unconditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than 2-Inch

wg: Seal Class A.7. Unconditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C.8. Unconditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class B.9. Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg and Lower:

Seal Class C.10. Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than 2-Inch

wg: Seal Class B.11. Conditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class B.12. Conditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class C.


A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 5, "Hangers and Supports."

B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.

1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete.2. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and

completely cured.3. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate

concretes or for slabs more than 4 inches thick.4. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate

concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.



5. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints.

C. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection.

D. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.

E. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds, bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum intervals of 16 feet.

F. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

3.6 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT-DEVICE INSTALLATION

A. Install ducts with hangers and braces designed to support the duct and to restrain against seismic forces required by applicable building codes. Comply with ASCE/SEI 7.

1. Space lateral supports a maximum of 40 feet o.c., and longitudinal supports a maximum of 80 feet o.c.

2. Brace a change of direction longer than 12 feet.

B. Select seismic-restraint devices with capacities adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads.


D. Install cable restraints on ducts that are suspended with vibration isolators.

E. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an evaluation service member of the ICC Evaluation Service.

F. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing and restraints to structure, to flanges of beams, to upper truss chords of bar joists, or to concrete members.

G. Drilling for and Setting Anchors:

1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcement or embedded items during drilling. Notify the Architect if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.





4. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench.5. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior applications and stainless-steel

anchors for applications exposed to weather.

3.7 CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Division 23 Section "Duct Accessories."

B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.

3.8 PAINTING

A. Paint interior of metal ducts that are visible through registers and grilles and that do not have duct liner. Apply one coat of flat, black, latex paint over a compatible galvanized-steel primer. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Division 9 painting Sections.


A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Duct System Cleanliness Tests:

1. Visually inspect duct system to ensure that no visible contaminants are present.2. Test sections of metal duct system, chosen randomly by Owner, for cleanliness

according to "Vacuum Test" in NADCA ACR, "Assessment, Cleaning and Restoration of HVAC Systems."

a. Acceptable Cleanliness Level: Net weight of debris collected on the filter media shall not exceed 0.75 mg/100 sq. cm.

C. Duct system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.10 DUCT CLEANING

A. Clean new and existing duct system(s) before testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. Use service openings for entry and inspection.



1. Create new openings and install access panels appropriate for duct static-pressure class if required for cleaning access. Provide insulated panels for insulated or lined duct. Patch insulation and liner as recommended by duct liner manufacturer. Comply with Division 23 Section "Duct Accessories" for access panels and doors.

2. Disconnect and reconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection.3. Remove and reinstall ceiling to gain access during the cleaning process.

C. Particulate Collection and Odor Control:

1. When venting vacuuming system inside the building, use HEPA filtration with 99.97 percent collection efficiency for 0.3-micron-size (or larger) particles.

2. When venting vacuuming system to outdoors, use filter to collect debris removed from HVAC system, and locate exhaust downwind and away from air intakes and other points of entry into building.

D. Clean the following components by removing surface contaminants and deposits:

1. Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers).2. Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling

supply and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and drive assemblies.

3. Air-handling unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil section, air wash systems, spray eliminators, condensate drain pans, humidifiers and dehumidifiers, filters and filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains.

4. Coils and related components.5. Return-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes except in ceiling

plenums and mechanical equipment rooms.6. Supply-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes.7. Dedicated exhaust and ventilation components and makeup air systems.

E. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology:

1. Clean metal duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract contaminants from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building.

2. Use vacuum-collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning. Connect vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being cleaned are under negative pressure.

3. Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces without damaging integrity of metal ducts, duct liner, or duct accessories.

4. Clean fibrous-glass duct liner with HEPA vacuuming equipment; do not permit duct liner to get wet. Replace fibrous-glass duct liner that is damaged, deteriorated, or delaminated or that has friable material, mold, or fungus growth.

5. Clean coils and coil drain pans according to NADCA 1992. Keep drain pan operational. Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning materials; comb and straighten fins.

6. Provide drainage and cleanup for wash-down procedures.7. Antimicrobial Agents and Coatings: Apply EPA-registered antimicrobial agents if

fungus is present. Apply antimicrobial agents according to manufacturer's written instructions after removal of surface deposits and debris.



3.11 START UP

A. Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing."

3.12 DUCT SCHEDULE

A. Fabricate ducts with galvanized sheet steel except as otherwise indicated and as follows:

1. Underground Ducts: Concrete-encased, PVC-coated, galvanized sheet steel with thicker coating on duct exterior.

B. Supply Ducts:

1. Ducts Connected to Fan Coil Units, Furnaces, Heat Pumps, Terminal Units, and duct work downstream of Variable-Air-Volume Boxes:

a. Pressure Class: Positive 1-inch wg.b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A.c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 24.d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 24.

2. Ducts Connected to Constant-Volume Air-Handling Units:


3. Ducts Connected downstream of supply fans up to terminal boxes:


C. Return Ducts:

1. Ducts Connected to Fan Coil Units, Furnaces, Heat Pumps, and Terminal Units:

a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 1-inch wg.b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A.c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 24.d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 24.

2. Ducts Connected to Air-Handling Units <Insert equipment>:

a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2-inch wg (3-inch wg for return ductwork within 100’ from fan).

b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A.



c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12.d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 12.

D. Exhaust Ducts:

1. Ducts Connected to Fans Exhausting (ASHRAE 62.1, Class 1 and 2) Air:

a. Pressure Class: Negative 2-inch wg.b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A if negative pressure, and A if positive

pressure.c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12.d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 6.

2. Ducts Connected to Air-Handling Units:

a. Pressure Class: Negative 2-inch wg.b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A if negative pressure, and A if positive

pressure.c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12.d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 6.

3. Ducts Connected to Commercial Kitchen Hoods: Comply with NFPA 96.

a. Exposed to View: Type 304, stainless-steel sheet, No. 4 finish.b. Concealed: Carbon-steel sheet.c. Welded seams and joints.d. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 3-inch wg.e. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: Welded seams, joints, and penetrations.f. SMACNA Leakage Class: 3.

4. Ducts Connected to Dishwasher Hoods:

a. Type 304, stainless-steel sheet.b. Exposed to View: No. 4 finish.c. Concealed: No. 2D finish.d. Welded seams and joints.e. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2-inch wg.f. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: Welded seams, joints, and penetrations.g. SMACNA Leakage Class: 3.

E. Outdoor-Air (Not Filtered, Heated, or Cooled) Ducts:

1. Ducts Connected to Fan Coil Units, Furnaces, Heat Pumps, and Terminal Units:


2. Ducts Connected to Air-Handling Units:




F. Intermediate Reinforcement:

1. Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel.2. Stainless-Steel Ducts:

a. Exposed to Airstream: Match duct material.b. Not Exposed to Airstream: Galvanized.

G. Liner:

1. Outdoor Supply Air Ducts: Fibrous glass, Type I, 2 inch thick.

2. Outdoor Return / Exhaust Air Ducts: Fibrous glass, Type I, 2 inch thick.

3. Indoor (concealed in mechanical chase) Supply Air Ducts: Fibrous glass, Type I, 1 1/2 inch thick.

4. Indoor (concealed in mechanical chase) Return / Exhaust Air Ducts: Fibrous glass, Type I, 1 1/2 inch thick.

H. Elbow Configuration:

1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows."

a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower:

1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio.2) Mitered Type RE 4 without vanes.

b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm:

1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio.2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and two

vanes.3) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC

Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."

c. Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher:

1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio.2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two

vanes.3) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC

Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3,



"Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."

2. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows."

a. Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio.b. Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two

vanes.c. Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."

3. Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "Round Duct Elbows."

a. Minimum Radius-to-Diameter Ratio and Elbow Segments: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 3-1, "Mitered Elbows." Elbows with less than 90-degree change of direction have proportionately fewer segments.

1) Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and three segments for 90-degree elbow.

2) Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and four segments for 90-degree elbow.

3) Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and five segments for 90-degree elbow.

4) Radius-to Diameter Ratio: 1.5.

b. Round Elbows, 12 Inches and Smaller in Diameter: Stamped or pleated.c. Round Elbows, 14 Inches and Larger in Diameter: Standing seam.

I. Branch Configuration:

1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-6, "Branch Connection."

a. Rectangular Main to Rectangular Branch: 45-degree entry.b. Rectangular Main to Round Branch: Spin in.

2. Round and Flat Oval: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees." Saddle taps are permitted in existing duct.

a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 90-degree tap.b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: Conical tap.c. Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 45-degree lateral.



AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300-1

SECTION 233300 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Backdraft and pressure relief dampers.2. Manual volume dampers.3. Control dampers.4. Fire Dampers5. Combination Fire and Smoke Dampers6. Flange connectors.7. Turning vanes.8. Flexible connectors.9. Duct accessory hardware.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


1. For duct silencers, include pressure drop and dynamic insertion loss data. Include breakout noise calculations for high transmission loss casings.

B. Shop Drawings: For duct accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details and attachments to other work.

1. Detail duct accessories fabrication and installation in ducts and other construction. Include dimensions, weights, loads, and required clearances; and method of field assembly into duct systems and other construction. Include the following:

a. Special fittings.b. Manual volume damper installations.c. Control damper installations.d. Fire-damper, smoke-damper, combination fire- and smoke-damper, ceiling,

and corridor damper installations, including sleeves; and duct-mounted access doors and remote damper operators.

e. Duct security bars.

C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which ceiling-mounted access panels and access doors required for access to duct accessories are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the items involved.

D. Source quality-control reports.



E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air duct accessories to include in operation and maintenance manuals.


A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."

B. Comply with AMCA 500-D testing for damper rating.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.

B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.

1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90.2. Exposed-Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized.

C. Stainless-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 304, and having a No. 2 finish for concealed ducts and finish for exposed ducts.

D. Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, Temper H14; with mill finish for concealed ducts and standard, 1-side bright finish for exposed ducts.

E. Extruded Aluminum: Comply with ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063, Temper T6.

F. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.

G. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.

2.2 BACKDRAFT AND PRESSURE RELIEF DAMPERS


1. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc.2. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc.3. Greenheck Fan Corporation.4. Ruskin Company.



B. Description: Gravity balanced.

C. Maximum Air Velocity: 2000 fpm.

D. Maximum System Pressure: 2-inch wg.

E. Frame: 0.052-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel, with welded corners and mounting flange.

F. Blades: Multiple single-piece blades, maximum 6-inch width, 0.050-inch-thick aluminum sheet with sealed edges.

G. Blade Action: Parallel.

H. Blade Seals: Vinyl foam.

I. Blade Axles:

1. Material: Nonferrous metal.2. Diameter: 0.20 inch.

J. Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum.

K. Return Spring: Adjustable tension.

L. Bearings: Steel ball or synthetic pivot bushings.

M. Accessories:

1. Adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure.2. Counterweights and spring-assist kits for vertical airflow installations.3. Electric actuators.4. 90-degree stops.

2.3 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS

A. Standard, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers:


a. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc.b. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc.c. Ruskin Company.

2. Standard leakage rating.3. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.4. Frames:

a. Hat-shaped, galvanized-steel channels, 0.064-inch minimum thickness.b. Mitered and welded corners.



c. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts.

5. Blades:

a. Multiple or single blade.b. Parallel- or opposed-blade design.c. Stiffen damper blades for stability.d. Galvanized-steel, 0.064 inch thick.

6. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.7. Bearings:

a. Molded synthetic.b. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have

axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.

8. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.

2.4 CONTROL DAMPERS


1. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc.2. Greenheck Fan Corporation.3. Ruskin Company.

B. Low-leakage rating and bearing AMCA's Certified Ratings Seal for both air performance and air leakage.

C. Frames:

1. Hat shaped.2. Galvanized-steel channels, 0.064 inch thick.3. Mitered and welded corners.

D. Blades:

1. Multiple blade with maximum blade width of 8 inches.2. Parallel- and opposed-blade design.3. Galvanized steel.4. 0.064 inch thick.5. Blade Edging: Closed-cell neoprene edging.6. Blade Edging: Inflatable seal blade edging, or replaceable rubber seals.

E. Blade Axles: 1/2-inch-diameter; galvanized steel; blade-linkage hardware of zinc-plated steel and brass; ends sealed against blade bearings.

1. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.



F. Bearings:

1. Oil-impregnated bronze Stainless-steel sleeve.2. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles full

length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.3. Thrust bearings at each end of every blade.

2.5 FIRE DAMPERS


1. Aire Technologies.2. Greenheck Fan Corporation.3. Pottorff.4. Ruskin Company.

B. Type: Static; rated and labeled according to UL 555 by an NRTL.

C. Closing rating in ducts up to 4-inch wg static pressure class and minimum 2000-fpm velocity.

D. Fire Rating: 1-1/2 hours.

E. Frame: Curtain type with blades inside airstream; fabricated with roll-formed, 0.034-inch-thick galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners.

F. Mounting Sleeve: Factory- or field-installed, galvanized sheet steel.

1. Minimum Thickness: 0.05 thick, as indicated, and of length to suit application.2. Exception: Omit sleeve where damper-frame width permits direct attachment of

perimeter mounting angles on each side of wall or floor; thickness of damper frame must comply with sleeve requirements.

G. Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal as indicated.

H. Blades: Roll-formed, interlocking, 0.024-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel. In place of interlocking blades, use full-length, 0.034-inch-thick, galvanized-steel blade connectors.

I. Horizontal Dampers: Include blade lock and stainless-steel closure spring.

J. Heat-Responsive Device: Replaceable, 165 deg F rated, fusible links.

K. Heat-Responsive Device: replaceable link and switch package, factory installed, 165 deg F rated.








2.6 COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS


1. Aire Technologies.2. Greenheck Fan Corporation.3. Nailor Industries Inc.4. Ruskin Company.

B. Type: Dynamic; rated and labeled according to UL 555 and UL 555S by an NRTL.

C. Closing rating in ducts up to 4-inch wg static pressure class and minimum 2000-fpm velocity.

D. Fire Rating: 1 1/2 hours.

E. Frame: Hat-shaped, 0.094-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel, with welded interlocking, gusseted or mechanically attached corners and mounting flange.

F. Heat-Responsive Device: Resettable, 165 deg F rated, fire-closure device.

G. Heat-Responsive Device: Electric resettable device and switch package, factory installed, rated.

H. Smoke Detector: Integral, factory wired for single-point connection.

I. Blades: Roll-formed, horizontal, overlapping, 0.063-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel.

J. Leakage: Class I.

K. Rated pressure and velocity to exceed design airflow conditions.

L. Mounting Sleeve: Factory-installed, 0.039-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel; length to suit wall or floor application.

M. Master control panel for use in dynamic smoke-management systems.

N. Damper Motors: two-position action.

O. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."

1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.

2. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical devices and connections specified in Section 230923 "Direct Digital Control (DDC) System for HVAC."

3. Permanent-Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Motors: With oil-immersed and sealed gear trains.








4. Spring-Return Motors: Equip with an integral spiral-spring mechanism where indicated. Enclose entire spring mechanism in a removable housing designed for service or adjustments. Size for running torque rating of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque rating of 150 in. x lbf.

5. Outdoor Motors and Motors in Outdoor-Air Intakes: Equip with O-ring gaskets designed to make motors weatherproof. Equip motors with internal heaters to permit normal operation at minus 40 deg F.

6. Nonspring-Return Motors: For dampers larger than 25 sq. ft., size motor for running torque rating of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque rating of 300 in. x lbf.

7. Electrical Connection: 115 V, single phase, 60 Hz.

P. Accessories:

1. Auxiliary switches for signaling or position indication.2. Test and reset switches, damper mounted.

2.7 TURNING VANES


1. Ductmate Industries, Inc.2. Duro Dyne Inc.3. METALAIRE, Inc.4. SEMCO Incorporated.5. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.

B. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Curved blades of galvanized sheet steel; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.

1. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated faces and fibrous-glass fill.

C. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Nonmetal Ducts: Fabricate curved blades of resin-bonded fiberglass with acrylic polymer coating; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.

D. General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 2-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and 2-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."

E. Vane Construction: Single wall.

F. Vane Construction: Single wall for ducts up to 48 inches wide and double wall for larger dimensions.



2.8 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS


1. Ductmate Industries, Inc.2. Duro Dyne Inc.3. Ventfabrics, Inc.4. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.

B. Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics.

C. Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.

D. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3-1/2 inches wide attached to 2 strips of 2-3/4-inch-wide, 0.028-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-inch-thick aluminum sheets. Provide metal compatible with connected ducts.

E. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.

1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd..2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling.3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.

F. Outdoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with weatherproof, synthetic rubber resistant to UV rays and ozone.

1. Minimum Weight: 24 oz./sq. yd..2. Minimum Tensile Strength: 500 lbf/inch in the warp and 440 lbf/inch in the filling.3. Service Temperature: Minus 50 to plus 250 deg F.

G. High-Temperature System, Flexible Connectors: Glass fabric coated with silicone rubber.


H. High-Corrosive-Environment System, Flexible Connectors: Glass fabric with chemical-resistant coating.


2.9 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE

A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to suit duct-insulation thickness.



B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline and grease.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts.

B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories in galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.

C. Install backdraft dampers at inlet of exhaust fans or exhaust ducts as close as possible to exhaust fan unless otherwise indicated.

D. Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches extend from larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install dampers with hat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat channel.

1. Install steel volume dampers in steel ducts.2. Install aluminum volume dampers in aluminum ducts.

E. Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing.

F. Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated.

G. Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment.

H. For fans developing static pressures of 5-inch wg and more, cover flexible connectors with loaded vinyl sheet held in place with metal straps.

I. Do not use flexible ducts for runouts.

J. Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to ducts directly or with maximum 36-inch lengths of flexible duct clamped or strapped in place.

K. Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes.


A. Tests and Inspections:

1. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement.2. Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be

performed.



3. Operate control dampers to verify full range of movement and verify that smoke signal device is set up correctly.

4. Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation.5. Operate remote damper operators to verify full range of movement of operator

and damper.



DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES

233713 - 1


SECTION 233713 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Rectangular and square ceiling diffusers.2. Linear slot diffusers.3. Fixed face registers and grilles.


1. Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers and volume-control dampers not integral to diffusers, registers, and grilles.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, include the following:

1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings.

2. Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate drawing designation, room location, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: For diffusers, registers, and grilles with factory-applied color finishes.

C. Samples for Verification: For diffusers, registers, and grilles, in manufacturer's standard sizes to verify color selected.


A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the items involved:

1. Ceiling suspension assembly members.2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.4. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers,

access panels, and special moldings.5. Duct access panels.

B. Source quality-control reports.



233713 - 2


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CEILING DIFFUSERS

A. Rectangular and Square Ceiling Diffusers :


a. Krueger.b. Nailor Industries Inc.c. Price Industries.d. Titus.

2. Devices shall be specifically designed for variable-air-volume flows.3. Material: Aluminum.4. Finish: Baked enamel, white.5. Face Size: See Plans.6. Face Style: Four cone.7. Mounting: Surface or T-bar.8. Pattern: Adjustable.

B. Louver Face Diffuser :


a. Krueger.b. Nailor Industries Inc.c. Price Industries.d. Titus.

2. Devices shall be specifically designed for variable-air-volume flows.3. Material: Aluminum.4. Finish: Baked enamel, white.5. Face Size: See Plans.6. Face Style: Four cone.7. Mounting: Surface or T-bar.8. Pattern: Adjustable.

C. Laminar Air Diffuser :


a. Krueger.b. Price Industries.c. Anemostat.d. Titus.

2. Devices shall be specifically designed for constant-air-volume flow.3. Material: Aluminum or stainless steel.
















233713 - 3


2.2 CEILING LINEAR SLOT OUTLETS

A. Linear Slot Diffuser:


2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:a. Anemostat Products; a Mestek company.b. Krueger.c. Price Industries.d. Titus.

3. Devices shall be specifically designed for constant-air-volume flows.4. Material - Shell: Aluminum or stainless steel5. Material - Pattern Controller and Tees: Aluminum.6. Slot Width: 1 inch.7. Length: See plans.8. Accessories: Provide accessories necessary for suspended mounting. Provide cross

bracing as necessary to fix motion and meet seismic criteria.

2.3 REGISTERS AND GRILLES

A. Fixed Face Register :


a. Anemostat Products; a Mestek company.b. Price Industries.c. Titus.

2. Material: Aluminum.3. Finish: Baked enamel, white.4. Face Arrangement: 1/2-by-1/2-by-1/2-inch grid core.5. Core Construction: Removable.6. Rear-Blade Arrangement: Vertical spaced 3/4 inch apart.7. Frame: 1 inch wide.8. Mounting Frame: Filter.9. Mounting: Countersunk screw, Lay in.10. Accessories: Filter.

B. Fixed Face Grille :


a. Anemostat Products; a Mestek company.b. Price Industries.c. Titus.

2. Material: Aluminum.3. Finish: Baked enamel, white.4. Face Arrangement: 1/2-by-1/2-by-1/2-inch grid core.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=3492&mf=04&mf=95&src=wd&mf=04&src=wd















233713 - 4


5. Core Construction: Removable.6. Rear-Blade Arrangement: Vertical spaced 3/4 inch apart.7. Frame: 1 inch wide.8. Mounting Frame: Filter.9. Mounting: Countersunk screw, Lay in.

2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Verification of Performance: Rate diffusers, registers, and grilles according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of equipment.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb.

B. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practical. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location.

C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before starting air balancing.



COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260500 - 1

SECTION 260500 – COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:1. Supporting devices for electrical components.2. Access Panels3. Demolition4. Cutting and patching for electrical construction.5. Touchup painting.6. Temporary Power and Communication7. Permits and Fees

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For electricity-metering equipment.

B. Shop Drawings: Dimensioned plans and sections or elevation layouts of electricity-metering equipment.

C. Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures are specified in Division 1.1. Prepare submittals in three-ring “hard cover” binders with project name and

volume on the binding. Include tabs identified by the specification section and in numerical order. Include plastic sleeves to hold drawings that exceed 8-1/2” x 11”.

2. Include cover sheet with the following information: date, project name, address, and title; Installer’s name, address and phone number; Project manager, and Engineering firm names and phone numbers.

D. Digital Operation and Maintenance Manual on CD-ROM1. Intuitive CD-ROM instructional manual for information to care, adjust, maintain

and operate equipment. Include contract documents, shop drawings, product data.a. Software: Adobe Acrobat.b. Format: PDF.c. Index: Hypertext alphabetical index.d. Auto Starting: Windows 9X with any directions to continue observable on

the screen.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.



B. Comply with NFPA 70, and NFPA 99.

C. Installer Qualifications: All workmen doing electrical work shall be duly licensed with the required supervision in the State or Locality as legally required.1. Site Review: All electricians must carry their electrician’s license with them and

show it upon request.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate chases, slots, inserts, sleeves, and openings with general construction work and arrange in building structure during progress of construction to facilitate the electrical installations that follow.1. Set inserts and sleeves in poured-in-place concrete, masonry work, and other

structural components as they are constructed.

B. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installing electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Coordinate installing large equipment requiring positioning before closing in the building.

C. Coordinate electrical equipment installation with other building components.1. Verify all dimensions be field measurements.2. Minimize costs to resolve equipment and other conflicts by successfully

concluding preinstallation conferences. Include the following:a. Review Divisions 21, 22 and 23 shop drawings. Compare equipment

electrical specifications with equipment schedule. Prevent Div 21, 22 and 23 equipment encroaching on clearances required by NEC. Request clarification of conflicts prior to installation.

b. Determine whether lighting fixtures and other electrical items conflict with the location of structural members and mechanical or other equipment.

c. Coordinate connecting electrical service to components furnished in other sections of the specification or by the User. Verify electrical requirements including voltage, full load amps, and minimum wire ampacity prior to installing or purchasing the associated electrical equipment and wiring.

d. Review systems furniture electrical specifications and compare with wiring indicated. Request dimensional layout from furniture installer including electrical connection locations. Request clarification of conflicts prior to installation.

D. Coordinate electrical service connections to components furnished by electric utility companies.1. Coordinate installation and connection of exterior underground and overhead

utilities and services, including provision for electricity-metering components.2. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and of utility company

providing electrical power and other services.3. Notify Architect a minimum of seven days in advance of any proposed utility

interruption and obtain approval prior to proceeding. Comply with requirements of the Owner, User, and Utility.

4. Include all costs, including Owner, municipal or utility costs that will need to be paid to obtain electric service.

E. Coordinate communication service connections to components furnished by communication utility companies.



1. Coordinate installation and connection of exterior underground and overhead utilities and services.

2. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.3. Notify Architect a minimum of seven days in advance of any proposed utility

interruption and obtain approval prior to proceeding. Comply with requirements of the Owner, User, and Utility.

4. Include all costs, including Owner, municipal or utility costs that will need to be paid to obtain communication services.

F. Temporary Power and Communication are specified in Division 1 Section “Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls”.1. Comply with requirements for temporary electric and communication services

with the proper utility.2. Comply with Article 305 of the NEC.

G. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are concealed by finished surfaces. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 8 Section "Access Doors."

H. Coordinate with Authorities Having Jurisdiction including: city, county, state, university, federal and other governmental authorities.1. Obtain all permits (including excavation permits) prior to beginning construction.2. Pay all fees.3. Request inspections required by Authorities Having Jurisdiction in a timely manner

and in order to comply with sequencing requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUPPORTING DEVICES

A. Material: Cold-formed steel, with corrosion-resistant coating acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Metal Items for Use Outdoors or in Damp Locations: Hot-dip galvanized steel.

C. Slotted-Steel Channel Supports: Flange edges turned toward web, and 9/16-inch- (14-mm-) diameter slotted holes at a maximum of 2 inches (50 mm) o.c., in webs.1. Channel Thickness: Selected to suit structural loading.2. Fittings and Accessories: Products of the same manufacturer as channel

supports.

D. Raceway and Cable Supports: Manufactured clevis hangers, riser clamps, straps, threaded C-clamps with retainers, ceiling trapeze hangers, wall brackets, and spring-steel clamps or click-type hangers.

E. Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.

F. Cable Supports for Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug for nonarmored electrical cables in riser conduits. Plugs have number and size of conductor gripping holes as required to suit individual risers. Body constructed of malleable-iron casting with hot-dip galvanized finish.



G. Expansion Anchors: Carbon-steel wedge or sleeve type.

H. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.

I. Powder-Driven Threaded Studs: Heat-treated steel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide the maximum possible headroom.

B. Materials and Components: Install level, plumb, and parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference with other installations.

D. Right of Way: Give to raceways and piping systems installed at a required slope.

E. Existing Utilities: Locate and identify existing underground utilities in excavation areas or in demolition areas. Maintain services to areas outside demolition limits or excavated areas. When services must be interrupted, install temporary services for affected areas.

F. Manufacturer’s Instructions: Comply with manufacturer’s installation instructions and recommendations, to the extent that those instructions and recommendations are more explicit or stringent than requirements indicated in the Contract Documents.

G. Record drawings and Shop Drawings: Mark up drawings daily during construction with changes or deletions in the scope of the project.

3.2 ELECTRICAL SUPPORTING DEVICE APPLICATION

A. Damp Locations and Outdoors: Hot-dip galvanized materials or nonmetallic, U-channel system components.

B. Dry Locations: Steel materials.

C. Support Clamps for PVC Raceways: Click-type clamp system.

D. Selection of Supports: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Strength of Supports: Adequate to carry present and future loads, times a safety factor of at least four; minimum of 200-lb (90-kg) design load.

3.3 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Install support devices to securely and permanently fasten and support electrical components.



1. Comply with NFPA 70. In addition, install supports within 12” of couplings, fittings, and boxes, with a minimum of two supports per 10 foot length of raceway. Install supports at each change of direction. Similarly support cables in cable trays or raceways as indicated; except, provide J-hooks to support cables.

2. Support suspended conduit and cables independently from all other electrical or mechanical systems by attaching directly from building structure, unless prior approval in writing has been obtained from the Architect after engineering calculations have been submitted.

3. Coordinate installation of supports so as not to interfere with the removal of ceiling tiles, the service of mechanical equipment, etc.

4. Install bracing parallel to trusses, beams, joists, bridging, etc.

B. Install individual and multiple raceway hangers and riser clamps to support raceways. Provide U-bolts, clamps, attachments, and other hardware necessary for hanger assemblies and for securing hanger rods and conduits.

C. Support parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze- or bracket-type hangers.

D. Support parallel runs of cables together on trapeze or bracket type hangers, either vertically or horizontally.

E. Size supports for multiple raceway and cable installations so capacity can be increased by a 25 percent minimum in the future.

F. Support individual horizontal raceways with separate, malleable-iron pipe hangers or clamps.

G. Install 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) diameter or larger threaded steel hanger rods, unless otherwise indicated.

H. Spring-steel fasteners specifically designed for supporting single conduits or tubing may be used instead of malleable-iron hangers for 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) and smaller raceways serving lighting and receptacle branch circuits above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to slotted channel and angle supports.

I. Arrange supports in vertical runs so the weight of raceways and enclosed conductors is carried entirely by raceway supports, with no weight load on raceway terminals.

J. Simultaneously install vertical conductor supports with conductors.

K. Separately support cast boxes that are threaded to raceways and used for fixture support. Support sheet-metal boxes directly from the building structure or by bar hangers. If supported directly from the building structure, attach box to framing on opposite sides of the box. If bar hangers are used, attach bar to raceways on opposite sides of the box and support the raceway with an approved fastener not more than 24 inches (610 mm) from the box.

L. Install metal channel racks for mounting cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices unless components are mounted directly to structural elements of adequate strength.



M. Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of concrete slabs and walls unless core-drilled holes are used. Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of masonry and fire-rated gypsum walls and of all other fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Install sleeves during erection of concrete and masonry walls.1. Install wrapped or coated RMC sleeves with 3 feet extending on each side

through penetrations of foundations or concrete walls by RNC.

N. Securely fasten electrical items and their supports to the building structure, unless otherwise indicated. Perform fastening according to the following unless other fastening methods are indicated:1. Wood: Fasten with wood screws or screw-type nails.2. Masonry: Toggle bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion bolts on solid

masonry units.3. New Concrete: Concrete inserts with machine screws and bolts.4. Existing Concrete: Expansion bolts. Drill holes in concrete so holes do not cut

main reinforcing bars. Fill and seal holes drilled in concrete and not used.a. Obtain prior approval from project structural engineer prior to drilling

prestressed or post-tension concrete slabs and beams.5. Instead of expansion bolts, threaded studs driven by a powder charge and

provided with lock washers may be used in existing concrete.6. Steel: Welded threaded studs or spring-tension clamps on steel.

a. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.7. Welding to steel structure may be used only for threaded studs, not for conduits,

pipe straps, or other items.8. Light Steel: Sheet-metal screws.9. Fasteners: Select so the load applied to each fastener does not exceed 25

percent of its proof-test load. Do not support electrical equipment or conduits with toggle bolts, moly-bolts, or screws in sheetrock or plaster. Do not support electrical equipment or conduit from tie wires.

10. Do not use wooden plugs in concrete or masonry units for fastening conduits, tubing, boxes, cabinets, etc.

3.4 ACCESS DOORS

A. Install access panels where required by accessibility requirements of NEC for electrical installations such as junction boxes, ballasts, and other electrical equipment requiring access.

3.5 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to cable and raceway penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to achieve fire-resistance rating of the assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 7 Section "Firestopping."

B. Gypsum Board Tenting: Apply to lighting fixture or electrical equipment penetrations of fire rated floor, ceiling and wall assemblies, unless product is UL listed with integral fire rating Perform tenting as specified in appropriate Division 9 section to reestablish the original fire-resistance rating of the assembly at the penetration.

3.6 DEMOLITION



A. Protect existing electrical equipment and installations indicated to remain. If damaged or disturbed in the course of the Work, remove damaged portions and install new products of equal capacity, quality, and functionality.1. Relocate existing electrical devices, conduit or equipment that for any reason

obstructs construction. Include any equipment having electrical connections that requires disconnecting and reconnection at the same or another location throughout the course of construction.

2. Maintain in working condition all electrical equipment and apparatus in areas not remodeled.

3. Temporary Partitions or Dust Barriers: Prevent the spread of dust and dirt to adjacent areas.

B. Accessible Work: Remove exposed electrical equipment and installations, indicated to be demolished, in their entirety.1. Include exposed equipment and installations made obsolete by new work.

C. Abandoned Work: Cut and remove buried raceway and wiring, indicated to be abandoned in place, 2 inches (50 mm) below the surface of adjacent construction. Cap raceways and patch surface to match existing finish.

D. Remove and legally dispose of demolished material from Project site.

E. Remove, store, clean, reinstall, reconnect, and make operational components indicated for relocation.

F. Remove conductors from raceway to the first active outlet or branch panels for vacated or unused circuits.

3.7 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces required to permit electrical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of trades involved.1. Core drilling: X-Ray post-tension slabs prior to core drilling to assure that post-

tension cables are not damaged.

B. Repair and refinish disturbed finish materials and other surfaces to match adjacent undisturbed surfaces. Install new fireproofing where existing firestopping has been disturbed. Repair and refinish materials and other surfaces by skilled mechanics of trades involved.

3.8 REFINISHING AND TOUCHUP PAINTING

A. Refinish and touch up paint. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Division 9 Section "Painting."1. Clean damaged and disturbed areas and apply primer, intermediate, and finish

coats to suit the degree of damage at each location.2. Follow paint manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation and for

timing and application of successive coats.3. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by

manufacturer.4. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating

recommended by manufacturer.




A. On completion of installation, including outlets, fittings, and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, paint spots, and construction debris.1. Remove labels that are not permanent labels.2. Wipe surfaces of electrical equipment. Remove excess lubrication and other

substances.3. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surface finishes to a dust-free condition,

free of stains, films and similar foreign substances.

B. Protect equipment and installations and maintain conditions to ensure that coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.



CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 1

SECTION 260519

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes building wires and cables and associated connectors, splices, and terminations for wiring systems rated 600 V and less.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Field Quality-Control Test Reports: From Contractor.


A. Agency Qualifications: Testing agency as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7 or a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

C. Comply with NFPA 70.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection:

1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified.

2.2 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Manufacturers:1. Copper Wire and Cables:

a. Alcan Aluminum Corporation; Alcan Cable Div.b. American Insulated Wire Corp.; a Leviton Company.c. General Cable Corporation.d. Senator Wire & Cable Company.e. Southwire Company.



B. Refer to Part 3 "Conductor and Insulation Applications" Article for insulation type, cable construction, and ratings.

C. Conductor Material: Copper, minimum size #12 for phase conductors and #14 for control conductors complying with NEMA WC 7; solid conductor for No. 10 AWG and smaller, stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

D. Conductor Insulation Types: Type THWN-2, XHHW-2 and SO complying with NEMA WC7.

2.3 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES

A. Manufacturers:1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.2. AMP Incorporated/Tyco International.3. Burndy.4. Hubbell/Anderson.5. Ilsco.6. O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC.7. 3M Company; Electrical Products Division.

B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONDUCTOR AND INSULATION APPLICATIONS

A. Service Entrance: Type THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

B. Exposed Feeders: Type THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

D. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and in Crawlspaces: Type THWN-2, single conductors in raceway. Exposed Branch Circuits: Type THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

E. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete and below Slabs-on-Grade: Type THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

F. Branch circuits in healthcare occupancies: 1. Branch Circuits: Type THHN-2/THWN-2, minimum #12 in raceway2. Branch Circuits: Type THHN-2/THWN-2 must be installed in non-flexible metallic

raceways.3. Patient Care Area branch circuits: Branch circuit wiring in all areas other than

mechanical and electrical rooms shall comply with NEC 517.13 (b). Do not use non-metallic conduits or raceways for branch circuits serving areas other than mechanical and electrical rooms.

G. Fire Alarm Circuits:



1. THWN-2 conductors in raceway for fire alarm power and horn/strobe indicating circuits.

2. Power limited signaling circuit cable in raceway for initiating loops

H. Emergency circuits: Install in separate raceways from all other wiring, except where they connect to the same equipment for two-source operation.

I. Class 1 Control Circuits: Type THWN-2, in raceway.

J. Class 2 Control Circuits: Type THWN-2, in raceway.

K. Fixture Conductors: Install conductors in lighting fixtures with insulation ratings as recommended by the manufacturer’s written instructions or a minimum 90 degrees C., whichever is higher.

L. Communication Conductors: Install communication conductors in raceway.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Multi-wire branch circuits: install no more than three circuits in a raceway, unless specifically shown otherwise. Install #10 conductors for branch circuits for which the distance from panelboard to furthest outlet is more than 100’ for 120 volt or more than 140’ for 277 volt circuits.

C. GFI circuit breakers or feed-thru outlets to outlets served: provide separate neutrals.

D. Panelboards, switchboards, MCCs, switchgear: Do not route conductors through a section which terminate in another section, except for interconnecting control conductors.

E. Remove existing conductors from raceway before pulling in new wires and cables.

F. Parallel conductors: Where parallel conductors are installed in parallel raceways, install in each raceway conductors of phase, neutral and/or ground as specified. Carefully cut parallel conductors to identical length for each phase leg. Do not parallel conductors less than #1/0.

G. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

H. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway.

I. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible.

J. Do not install wiring through any part of a transformer vault or elevator equipment room and shaft that is does not serve equipment in the respective room. Also, coordinate that piping or other items foreign to the transformer vault, elevator equipment room or shaft is not installed in these spaces.



K. Support cables according to Division 26 Section "Common Work Results for Electrical."

L. Seal around cables penetrating fire-rated elements according to Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."

M. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

B. Conductor splices: Minimize conductor splices. Do not install in conduit bodies.

C. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.

1. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice and tap conductor for aluminum conductors. Install compression type connectors for aluminum conductors or copper pigtail adapters for installation in mechanical lugs.

D. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack.

E. Furniture connections: connect systems furniture to power supply circuits per manufacturer’s written instructions.

F. Panelboard connections: do not splice conductors in panelboards.


A. Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing:1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been

energized, test for compliance with requirements.2. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in

NETA ATS, Section 7.3.1. Certify compliance with test parameters.

B. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:1. Test procedures used.2. Test results that comply with requirements.3. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to

achieve compliance with requirements.



GROUNDING AND BONDING 260526 - 1

SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes grounding of electrical systems and equipment. Grounding requirements specified in this Section may be supplemented by special requirements of systems described in other Sections.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.1. Comply with UL 467.

B. Comply with NFPA 780 and UL 96 when interconnecting with lightning protection system.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:1. Grounding Conductors, Cables, Connectors, and Rods:

a. Apache Grounding/Erico Inc.b. Boggs, Inc.c. Chance/Hubbell.d. Copperweld Corp.e. Dossert Corp.f. Erico Inc.; Electrical Products Group.g. Framatome Connectors/Burndy Electrical.h. Galvan Industries, Inc.i. Harger Lightning Protection, Inc.j. Hastings Fiber Glass Products, Inc.k. Heary Brothers Lightning Protection Co.l. Ideal Industries, Inc.m. ILSCO.n. Kearney/Cooper Power Systems.o. Korns: C. C. Korns Co.; Division of Robroy Industries.p. Lightning Master Corp.q. Lyncole XIT Grounding.r. O-Z/Gedney Co.; a business of the EGS Electrical Group.s. Raco, Inc.; Division of Hubbell.t. Robbins Lightning, Inc.



u. Salisbury: W. H. Salisbury & Co.v. Superior Grounding Systems, Inc.w. Thomas & Betts, Electrical.x. VFC, Inc.

2.2 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

A. For insulated conductors, comply with Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

B. Material: Copper.

C. Equipment Grounding Conductors: Insulated with green-colored insulation.

D. Grounding Electrode Conductors: Stranded cable.

E. Bare Copper Conductors: Comply with the following:1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3.2. Assembly of Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33.

F. Copper Bonding Conductors: As follows:1. Bonding Conductor: as noted on the drawings, stranded copper conductor.

Comply with NEC minimum requirements.2. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided copper conductors,

terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches (42 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) thick.

G. Grounding Bus: Bare, annealed copper bars of rectangular cross section, with insulators.1. 2” X 12” X ¼” minimum ground bus mounted on insulators.

2.3 CONNECTOR PRODUCTS

A. Comply with IEEE 837 and UL 467; listed for use for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and connected items.

B. Bolted Connectors: Bolted-pressure-type connectors, or compression type.

C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welded type, in kit form, and selected per manufacturer's written instructions.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Use only copper conductors for both insulated and bare grounding conductors in direct contact with earth, concrete, masonry, crushed stone, and similar materials.

B. In raceways, use insulated equipment grounding conductors.

C. Exothermic-Welded Connections: Use for connections to structural steel and for underground connections, except those at test wells.



1. Use for interconnecting wiring from ground bus to ground bus.

D. Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Use bolted pressure clamps.

E. Ground Rod Clamps at Test Wells: Use bolted pressure clamps with at least two bolts.

F. Grounding Bus: Install in electrical and telephone equipment rooms, in rooms housing service equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.1. Use 2” X 12” X ¼” bus with insulated spacer; space 2 inch (50.8 mm) from wall.

Locate 12” above floor, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Underground Grounding Conductors: Use tinned- copper conductor, No. 2/0 AWG minimum. Bury at least 24 inches (600 mm) below grade or bury 12 inches (300 mm) above duct bank when installed as part of the duct bank.

3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

A. Comply with NFPA 70, Article 250, for types, sizes, and quantities of equipment grounding conductors, unless specific types, larger sizes, or more conductors than required by NFPA 70 are indicated.

B. Isolated Grounding Receptacle Circuits: Install an insulated equipment-grounding conductor connected to the receptacle-grounding terminal. Isolate grounding conductor from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Nonmetallic Raceways: Install an equipment-grounding conductor in nonmetallic raceways unless they are designated for telephone or data cables.

D. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install an equipment-grounding conductor to duct-mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners and heaters. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct.

E. Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install a separate equipment-grounding conductor to each electric water heater, heat-tracing, and antifrost heating cable. Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components.

F. Signal and Communication Systems: For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other communication systems, provide as noted on the drawings insulated grounding conductor in raceway from grounding electrode system to each service location, terminal cabinet, wiring closet, and central equipment location.1. Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets: Terminate

grounding conductor on a 1/4-by-2-by-12-inch (6.4-by-50-by-300-mm) grounding bus.

G. Common Ground Bonding with Lightning Protection System: Bond electrical power system ground directly to lightning protection system grounding conductor at closest point to electrical service grounding electrode. Use bonding conductor sized same as system grounding electrode conductor, and install in conduit.

3.3 INSTALLATION



A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise indicated. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

B. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install so vibration by equipment mounted on vibration isolation hangers and supports is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations, unless a disconnect-type connection is required; then, use a bolted clamp. Bond straps directly to the basic structure taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts. Install straps only in locations accessible for maintenance.

C. Metal Water Service Pipe: Provide insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes by grounding clamp connectors. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor to street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end.

D. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system upstream from equipment shutoff valve.

E. Metal Frame of the building where effectively grounded: Provide insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to metal frame of building. Exothermically weld grounding conductors to metal frame. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. General: Make connections so galvanic action or electrolysis possibility is minimized. Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact will be galvanically compatible.1. Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to ensure high conductivity and to

make contact points closer to order of galvanic series.2. Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact.3. Make aluminum-to-steel connections with stainless-steel separators and

mechanical clamps.4. Make aluminum-to-galvanized steel connections with tin-plated copper jumpers

and mechanical clamps.5. Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent

future penetration of moisture to contact surfaces.

B. Exothermic-Welded Connections: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Welds that are puffed up or that show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable.

C. Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: For No. 8 AWG and larger, use pressure-type grounding lugs. No. 10 AWG and smaller grounding conductors may be terminated with winged pressure-type connectors.

D. Non-contact Metal Raceway Terminations: If metallic raceways terminate at metal housings without mechanical and electrical connection to housing, terminate each conduit with a grounding bushing. Connect grounding bushings with a bare grounding



conductor to grounding bus or terminal in housing. Bond electrically non-continuous conduits at entrances and exits with grounding bushings and bare grounding conductors, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Connections at Test Wells: Use compression-type connectors on conductors and make bolted- and clamped-type connections between conductors and ground rods.

F. Tighten screws and bolts for grounding and bonding connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A.

G. Compression-Type Connections: Use hydraulic compression tools to provide correct circumferential pressure for compression connectors. Use tools and dies recommended by connector manufacturer. Provide embossing die code or other standard method to make a visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on grounding conductor.

H. Moisture Protection: If insulated grounding conductors are connected to ground rods or grounding buses, insulate entire area of connection and seal against moisture penetration of insulation and cable.

3.5 SEPARATELY DERIVED SYSTEMS

A. Comply with NFPA 70, Article 250, for types, sizes, and quantities of grounding electrode conductors, unless specific types, larger sizes, or more conductors than required by NFPA 70 are indicated.

B. Do not ground system neutral conductor under any circumstances after it has been grounded at the service entrance disconnect except for separately derived systems. Interconnect or bond all grounding systems to the main system ground. Do not used neutral conductors for grounding equipment. Do not bond the neutral bus to distribution cabinets, except for separately derived systems.



RACEWAYS AND BOXES 260533 - 1

SECTION 260533 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring.

B. Related Sections include the following:1. Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for firestopping materials

and installation at penetrations through walls, ceilings, and other fire-rated elements.

2. Division 26 Section "Common Work Results for Electrical" for supports, anchors, and identification products.

3. Division 26 Section "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems" for seismic restraints and bracing of raceways, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.

4. Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices" for devices installed in boxes and for floor-box service fittings.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

B. FMC: Flexible metal conduit.

C. HDPE : High Density Polyethylene.

D. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

E. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.

F. LFNC: Liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit.

G. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details of components for raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.

C. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that enclosures, cabinets, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the following:



1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation

of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."





B. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of raceways, boxes, enclosures, cabinets, and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection:1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by

the manufacturers specified.

2.2 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING

A. Manufacturer:1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.2. Alflex Inc.3. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose.4. Electri-Flex Co.5. Grinnell Co./Tyco International; Allied Tube and Conduit Div.6. LTV Steel Tubular Products Company.7. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex.8. O-Z Gedney; Unit of General Signal.9. Wheatland Tube Co.

B. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.

C. EMT and Fittings: ANSI C80.3.1. Fittings: Steel Set-screw or compression type. Do not use die-cast fittings.

D. FMC: Zinc-coated steel.



E. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket.

F. Fittings: NEMA FB 1; compatible with conduit and tubing materials. Do not use die-cast fittings.

2.3 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING

A. Manufacturer:1. American International.2. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose.3. Arnco Corp.4. Cantex Inc.5. Certainteed Corp.; Pipe & Plastics Group.6. Condux International.7. ElecSYS, Inc.8. Electri-Flex Co.9. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.10. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex.11. RACO; Division of Hubbell, Inc.12. Spiralduct, Inc./AFC Cable Systems, Inc.13. Thomas & Betts Corporation.

B. RNC: NEMA TC 2, Schedule 40 and Schedule 80 PVC.

C. RNC Fittings: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.

D. LFNC: UL 1660.

E. HDPE: NEMA TC-7 Smoothwall Coilable PE Electrical Plastic Conduit. UL Listed HDPE is compliant with the 2002 NEC Articles 300 and 352, and meets the requirements of UL 651B. EPEC 40 (Schedule 40).

2.4 METAL WIREWAYS

A. Manufacturer:1. Hoffman.2. Square D.

B. Material and Construction: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA 1 and 3R.

C. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.

D. Select features, unless otherwise indicated, as required to complete wiring system and to comply with NFPA 70.

E. Wireway Covers: Screw-cover type.

F. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.

2.5 SURFACE RACEWAYS



A. Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers. Finish with manufacturer's standard prime coating. Single channel unless otherwise noted. Designed for field installation of receptacles that meet the requirements of Section 16140. Precut outlet covers.

1. Manufacturer:a. Thomas & Betts Corporation.b. Monosystems.c. Wiremold Company (The); Electrical Sales Division.

B. Types, sizes, and channels as indicated and required for each application, with fittings that match and mate with raceways.

2.6 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS

A. Manufacturer:1. Cooper Crouse-Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries, Inc.2. Emerson/General Signal; Appleton Electric Company.3. Erickson Electrical Equipment Co.4. Hoffman.5. Hubbell, Inc.; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co.6. O-Z/Gedney; Unit of General Signal.7. RACO; Division of Hubbell, Inc.8. Robroy Industries, Inc.; Enclosure Division.9. Scott Fetzer Co.; Adalet-PLM Division.10. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Co.11. Thomas & Betts Corporation.12. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The).13. Woodhead, Daniel Company; Woodhead Industries, Inc. Subsidiary.

B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

C. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, with gasketed cover.

D. Floor Boxes: Cast metal (on grade) and Sheet metal (above grade), fully adjustable, rectangular.

E. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

F. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous hinge cover and flush latch.1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard

enamel.

G. Cabinets: NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. Key latch to match panelboards. Include metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage and include accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.



2.7 EXPANSION FITTINGS:

A. Manufacturer:1. O-Z Gedney; Unit of General Signal.

B. Expansion Fittings: Malleable Iron, hot dipped galvanized, weatherproof suitable for raceway and applications1. Coordinate expansion requirements with Architect.


A. Finish: provide manufacturer's standard paint applied before shipping to factory-assembled products for:1. Surface raceways: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard

colors.2. Enclosures: Standard Grey in electrical rooms, White in finished areas.3. Cabinets: Standard Grey in electrical rooms, White in finished areas.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Outdoors:1. Exposed: Rigid steel or IMC.2. Concealed: Rigid steel or IMC.3. Underground: RNC (except coated or wrapped rigid steel for bends greater than

22 degrees, coated or wrapped rigid steel.a. Conduits that are a part of the emergency power system, includes life

safety and critical branches and feeders to standby power distribution system, must be encased in not less than 2” thick concrete.

b. Conduits supplying patient care areas must be rigid steel or IMC, coated or wrapped.

4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC.

5. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

B. Indoors:1. Exposed:

a. Above 6’ from finished floor: EMT, IMC or Rigid Steel.b. Below 6’ from finished floor, or subject to mechanical damage: IMC or

Rigid Steel.2. Underground: refer to underground installation selections in outdoor paragraph

above.3. Concealed: EMT or Rigid Steel.

a. Patient Care Applications: EMT or Rigid Steel.4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic,

Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, Engine-Driven or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC.5. Connection to systems furniture: LFMC6. Damp or Wet Locations: Rigid steel conduit.



7. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except as follows:a. Damp or Wet Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4, stainless steel.

C. Minimum Raceway Size:1. Metallic Conduits: 3/4-inch trade size (DN 16).2. Nonmetallic Conduits: 3/4-inch trade size (DN 21).

D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.1. Rigid Metal Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless otherwise

indicated. Engage a minimum of five full threads.2. Intermediate Metal Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless

otherwise indicated. Engage a minimum of five full threads.3. PVC Externally Coated or wrapped Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings

approved for use with that material. Patch all nicks and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits.

4. EMT: set screw or compression for dry interior locations; compression for damp or wet locations; compression with tape for installations in concrete slabs above grade.

5. Building Expansion joints: use expansion fittings with 36” of wrapped metal raceways on either side of joint.

E. Do not install aluminum conduits embedded in or in contact with concrete.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Layout of electrical boxes: Do not scale electrical drawings. Refer to mounting height detail sheet.1. Coordinate with architectural elevations. Where outlets are not identified on the

elevations, refer mounting height decisions to the Architect. If counters or work surfaces are shown refer mounting height decisions, whether above or below counter, to the Architect. Coordinate location of switches with actual door swings.

2. Verify final locations with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual equipment to be connected as determined from shop drawings.

B. Outlet Boxes:1. Frame construction: 4”X4”X1-1/2” with suitable plaster-ring, except:

a. 2-1/8” deep for boxes with 3 conduit entrances and for communication outlets

b. 4-11/16” boxes for boxes with 4 or more conduits.2. Masonry or concrete construction: 1g or multiple gang by 3-1/2” deep.3. Fixture Outlets: minimum 4” outlet box with 3/8” fixture stud supported adequately

for minimum of 200 lbs.4. Do not use gangable boxes.

C. Keep raceways at least 12 inches (300 mm) away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

D. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.

E. Support raceways as specified in Division 26 Section "Common Work Results for Electrical."



F. Install temporary closures to prevent foreign matter from entering raceways.

G. Stub-ups: Embed coupling flush with finished floor. If to remain a spare, the flush plug is to remain in the coupling.

H. Make bends and offsets so ID is not reduced. Keep legs of bends in the same plane and keep straight legs of offsets parallel, unless otherwise indicated. Make bends in parallel or banked runs from same centerline to make bends parallel.1. Nonmetallic Conduits: Use rigid elbows for all bends 22 degrees or greater.2. Communication Systems Raceways: comply with long sweep radius elbows

minimum dimensions in Table 5.2-1 of ANSI/TIA/EIA-569A for all bends or offsets for backbone cables.

I. Raceways below grade: Install RNC or wrapped/coated Rigid Steel minimum 24” below grade, unless specifically noted otherwise. Where noted encase in concrete.

J. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, except at surface mounted panels and apparatus or unless otherwise indicated. Install surface raceways only where indicated or where directed by Architect.1. Install concealed raceways with a minimum of bends in the shortest practical

distance, considering type of building construction and obstructions, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Install surface raceways in rooms where surface mounted panels are indicated or for exposed equipment in mechanical, electrical, or communication rooms.

K. Raceways Embedded in Slabs: Install in middle 1/3 of slab thickness where practical and leave at least 2 inches (50 mm) of concrete cover.1. Maximum conduit size: Lesser of 1-inch trade size (DN 27) or 1/3 the concrete

cover.a. For conduits larger than 1-inch trade size (DN 27), consult structural

engineer for additional structural supports or other options.b. Layout: Route conduits without crossovers. Space conduit at least 18”

apart. Space raceways laterally to prevent voids in concrete.c. Where concentrations of conduit occur, support slab independent of steel

deck. Coordinate with structural engineer.2. Secure raceways to reinforcing rods to prevent sagging or shifting during

concrete placement.3. Install taped compression type fittings or fittings approved for such use.4. Change from nonmetallic tubing to IMC or Rigid Steel conduit before rising

above the floor.

L. Raceways Penetrating foundation walls: Install rigid conduit through the foundation wall or 3’ each side.

M. Install exposed raceways parallel or at right angles to nearby surfaces or structural members and follow surface contours as much as possible.1. Run parallel or banked raceways together on common supports.2. Make parallel bends in parallel or banked runs. Use factory elbows only where

elbows can be installed parallel; otherwise, provide field bends for parallel raceways.

N. Raceway coordination: Do not install raceways in or through (including above ceilings) the following areas that do not serve equipment in those areas:



1. Elevator equipment rooms.2. Imaging Rooms.3. Stairwells.4. Vestibules.

O. Join raceways with fittings designed and approved for that purpose and make joints tight.1. Use insulating bushings to protect conductors.

P. Tighten set screws of threadless fittings with suitable tools.

Q. Cap open ends of empty conduit to keep out debris until the project is completed.

R. Terminations:1. Where raceways are terminated with locknuts and bushings, align raceways to

enter squarely and install locknuts with dished part against box. For RMC and IMC, use two locknuts, one inside and one outside box and a bushing. For EMT, use insulated throats or plastic bushings (except for grounding bushings where required).

2. Where raceways are terminated with threaded hubs, screw raceways or fittings tightly into hub so end bears against wire protection shoulder. Where chase nipples are used, align raceways so coupling is square to box; tighten chase nipple so no threads are exposed.

3. Service Conduits or conduits installed in concentric/eccentric knock-outs or reducing washers: terminate raceway with grounding bushings.

S. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb (90-kg) tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack at each end of pull wire. Plug empty raceways at both ends.

T. Low Voltage, Telephone, and Signal System Raceways, 2-Inch Trade Size (DN 53) and Smaller: In addition to above requirements, install raceways in maximum lengths of 150 feet (45 m) and with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes where necessary to comply with these requirements. All structural cabling will be run in raceway minimum size 1” or basket tray.

U. Fire alarm to be installed in raceway

V. Install seals for conduit penetrations of slabs on grade and exterior walls below grade. Tighten sleeve seal screws until sealing grommets have expanded to form watertight seal.

W. Roof Penetrations: Install flashings for conduit penetrations of roofs under the direct supervision of the roofing installer.

X. Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill them with UL-listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the following points:1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of

refrigerated spaces.2. Where conduits pass through airtight spaces or plenums to prevent air leakage.3. Where conduits pass from hazardous areas to nonhazardous.



4. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

Y. Stub-up Connections: Extend conduits through concrete floor for connection to freestanding equipment. Install with an adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for plugs set flush with finished floor. Extend conductors to equipment with rigid steel conduit; FMC may be used 6 inches (150 mm) above the floor. Install screwdriver-operated, threaded plugs flush with floor for future equipment connections.

Z. Raceway Cleaning: Prevent accumulation of water, dirt or concrete in raceways. Where water or foreign matter have entered raceways, thoroughly clean or replace conduits where such accumulation cannot be removed by methods approved by this Engineer.

AA. Flexible Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches (1830 mm) of flexible conduit for recessed and semi-recessed lighting fixtures; for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for all motors. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations. Install separate ground conductor across flexible connections.

BB. Surface Raceways: Install a separate, green, ground conductor in raceways from junction box supplying raceways to receptacle or fixture ground terminals.

CC. Set floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.

DD. Install hinged-cover enclosures and cabinets plumb. Support at each corner.

EE. Spare conduits:1. Provide 300’ of ¾” C as directed by Architect/Engineer, where not required,

credit unused portion.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by

manufacturer.2. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating

recommended by manufacturer.

3.4 CLEANING

A. After completing installation of exposed, factory-finished raceways and boxes, inspect exposed finishes and repair damaged finishes.



IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 1

SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTSA. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARYA. Section Includes:

1. Identification for raceways.2. Identification of power and control cables.3. Identification for conductors.4. Underground-line warning tape.5. Warning labels and signs.6. Instruction signs.7. Equipment identification labels.8. Miscellaneous identification products.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALSA. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.B. Samples: For each type of label and sign to illustrate size, colors, lettering style,

mounting provisions, and graphic features of identification products.C. Identification Schedule: An index of nomenclature of electrical equipment and system

components used in identification signs and labels.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Comply with ANSI A13.1 and IEEE C2.B. Comply with NFPA 70.C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.E. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and

inks used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.

1.5 COORDINATIONA. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with

requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual; and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 POWER AND CONTROL RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALSA. Color coded raceways with factory applied color coating.



B. Colors for Raceways:1. Normal power circuits: no added color.2. Emergency power circuits: blue3. Optional Standby and UPS power circuits: green4. Fire Alarm wiring: red5. Access control and CCTV systems wiring: white6. All other systems: black

2.2 ARMORED AND METAL-CLAD CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALSA. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length

of color field for each cable size.B. Colors for Cables Carrying Circuits at 600 V and Less:

1. Black letters on an orange field.2. Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type.

C. Heat-Shrink Preprinted Tubes: Flame-retardant polyolefin tube with machine-printed identification label. Sized to suit diameter of and shrinks to fit firmly around cable it identifies. Full shrink recovery at a maximum of 200 deg F (93 deg C). Comply with UL 224.

2.3 POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALSA. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length

of color field for each cable size.B. Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve,

with diameter sized to suit diameter of cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

2.4 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALSA. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils

(0.08 mm) thick by 1 to 2 inches (25 to 50 mm) wide.B. Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve,

with diameter sized to suit diameter of conductor it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.

2.5 FLOOR MARKING TAPEA. 2-inch- (50-mm-) wide, 5-mil (0.125-mm) pressure-sensitive vinyl tape, with yellow and

black stripes and clear vinyl overlay.

2.6 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNSA. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.B. Metal-Backed, Butyrate Warning Signs:

1. Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate signs with 0.0396-inch (1-mm) galvanized-steel backing; and with colors, legend, and size required for application.

2. 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) grommets in corners for mounting.3. Nominal size, 10 by 14 inches (250 by 360 mm).

C. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD -

EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT

OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES (915 MM)."



2.7 INSTRUCTION SIGNSA. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick for

signs up to 20 sq. inches (129 sq. cm) and 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick for larger sizes.1. Engraved legend with black letters on white face.2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners.3. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable

equipment.

2.8 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELSA. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw

mounting. White letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm).

2.9 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTSA. Paint: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for paint materials and

application requirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or interior).

B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATIONA. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient

viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using

materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.E. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical

fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate.F. Attach plastic raceway and cable labels that are not self-adhesive type with clear vinyl

tape with adhesive appropriate to the location and substrate.G. System Identification Color-Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Each color-

coding band shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot (15-m) maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot (7.6-m) maximum intervals in congested areas.

H. Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels and Metal Tags: Secure tight to surface of conductor or cable at a location with high visibility and accessibility.

I. Cable Ties: For attaching tags. Use general-purpose type, except as listed below:1. Outdoors: UV-stabilized nylon.2. In Spaces Handling Environmental Air: Plenum rated.

J. Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for surface preparation and paint application.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULEA. Accessible Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction

and pull box of the following systems with color coding that matches raceways and self-adhesive vinyl labels with the wiring system legend. For power circuits include the



panel and circuit numbers of all conductors contained in the box and the voltage. For fire alarm circuits include the circuit numbering to match shop drawings. For other systems include the system type such as Access Control, CCTV, Overhead Paging, etc. System color coding shall be as follows:1. Normal power circuits: no added color.2. Emergency power circuits: blue3. Optional Standby and UPS power circuits: green4. Fire Alarm wiring: red5. Access control and CCTV systems wiring: white6. All other systems: black

B. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase.1. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors

listed below for ungrounded service, feeder, and branch-circuit conductors.a. Color shall be factory applied.b. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:

1) Phase A: Black.2) Phase B: Red.3) Phase C: Blue.

c. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits:1) Phase A: Orange2) Phase B: Brown3) Phase C: Yellow.

C. Install instructional sign including the color-code for grounded and ungrounded conductors using adhesive- vinyl-film-type labels.

D. Control-Circuit Conductor Identification: For conductors and cables in pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use self-adhesive vinyl labels with the conductor or cable designation, origin, and destination.

E. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach marker tape to conductors and list source.

F. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, and signal connections.1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions,

terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system

used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections.3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams,

and the Operation and Maintenance Manual.G. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape for

power, lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable.1. Limit use of underground-line warning tape to direct-buried cables.2. Install underground-line warning tape for both direct-buried cables and cables in

raceway.H. Workspace Indication: Install floor marking tape to show working clearances in the

direction of access to live parts. Workspace shall be as required by NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1926.403 unless otherwise indicated. Do not install at flush-mounted panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces.

I. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Self-adhesive warning labels.



1. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145.2. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background.3. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access.4. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of

equipment including, but not limited to, the following:a. Power transfer switches.b. Controls with external control power connections.

J. Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation.

K. Emergency Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs with white legend on a red background with minimum 3/8-inch- (10-mm-) high letters for emergency instructions at equipment used for power transfer.

L. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification.1. Labeling Instructions:

a. Indoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) high letters on 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches (50 mm) high.

b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label.c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those

appropriate for viewing from the floor.d. Fasten labels with appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change

the NEMA or NRTL rating of the enclosure.2. Equipment to Be Labeled:

a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label.

b. All receptacles and switchesc. Fire alarm devicesd. Circuit #’s on j-boxese. Enclosures and electrical cabinets.f. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items.g. Switchboards.h. Transformers: Label that includes tag designation shown on Drawings for

the transformer, feeder, and panelboards or equipment supplied by the secondary.

i. Emergency system boxes and enclosures.j. Enclosed switches.k. Enclosed circuit breakers.l. Enclosed controllers.m. Variable-speed controllers.n. Push-button stations.o. Power transfer equipment.p. Contactors.q. Remote-controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices.



r. Battery racks.s. Monitoring and control equipment.t. UPS equipment.

END OF SECTION


WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 1

SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTSA. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARYA. Section Includes:

1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates.2. Snap switches and wall-box dimmers.3. Wall-switch and exterior occupancy sensors.

1.3 DEFINITIONSA. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.C. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor.D. RFI: Radio-frequency interference.E. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.F. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTSA. Coordination:

1. Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations.2. Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements.

1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALSA. Product Data: For each type of product.B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for

premarking wall plates.C. Samples: One for each type of device and wall plate specified, in each color

specified.

1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALSA. Field quality-control reports.

1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALSA. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers'

packing-label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERSA. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following

manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles:1. Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour).

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate from single source from single manufacturer.





2.2 GENERAL WIRING-DEVICE REQUIREMENTSA. Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.C. Use electrical devices with modular plug-in connectors which meet the following

requirements:1. Connectors shall comply with UL 2459 and shall be made with stranding building

wire.2. Devices shall comply with the requirements in this Section.

2.3 STRAIGHT-BLADE RECEPTACLESA. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6

Configuration 5-20R, UL 498, and FS W-C-596.1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Pass & Seymour (Plugtail); 5361 (single), 5362 (duplex).

B. Tamper-Resistant Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498 Supplement sd, and FS W-C-596.1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Pass & Seymour; TR63H (Plugtail).

2. Description: Labeled shall comply with NFPA 70, "Health Care Facilities" Article, "Pediatric Locations" Section.

2.4 GFCI RECEPTACLESA. General Description:

1. Straight blade, non-feed-through type.2. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, UL 943 Class A, and FS W-C-596.3. Include indicator light that shows when the GFCI has malfunctioned and no

longer provides proper GFCI protection.B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:a. .b. Pass & Seymour(Plugtail); 2095.

C. Tamper-Resistant GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Pass & Seymour(Plugtail); 2095TR.

2.5 TWIST-LOCKING RECEPTACLESA. Single Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6

Configuration L5-20R, and UL 498.1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Cooper; CWL520R.b. Hubbell; HBL2310.c. Leviton; 2310.d. Pass & Seymour; L520-R.

2.6 TOGGLE SWITCHESA. Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W-S-896.
















B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1) Single Pole:2) Pass & Seymour(Plugtail); CSB20AC1.3) Three Way:4) Pass & Seymour(Plugtail); CSB20AC3.5) Four Way:6) Pass & Seymour(Plugtail); CSB20AC4.

2.7 WALL-BOX DIMMERSA. Dimmer Switches: Modular, full-wave, solid-state units with integral, quiet on-off

switches, with audible frequency and EMI/RFI suppression filters.B. Control: Continuously adjustable slider; with single-pole or three-way switching.

Comply with UL 1472.C. Fluorescent Lamp Dimmer Switches: Modular; compatible with dimmer ballasts; trim

potentiometer to adjust low-end dimming; dimmer-ballast combination capable of consistent dimming with low end not greater than 20 percent of full brightness.

2.8 WALL PLATESA. Single and combination types shall match corresponding wiring devices.

1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish.2. Material for Finished Spaces: Smooth, high-impact thermoplastic.3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Smooth, high-impact thermoplastic.4. Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover, and

listed and labeled for use in wet and damp locations.B. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with Type 3R,

weather-resistant, die-cast aluminum with lockable cover.

2.9 FINISHESA. Device Color:

1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: White unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing.

2. Wiring Devices Connected to Emergency Power System: Red.3. TVSS Devices: Blue.

B. Wall Plate Color: For plastic covers, match device color.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATIONA. Comply with NECA 1, including mounting heights listed in that standard, unless

otherwise indicated.B. Coordination with Other Trades:

1. Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of boxes.

2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables.

3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.












4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.C. Conductors:

1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until right before they are spliced or terminated on devices.

2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.

3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails.

4. Existing Conductors:a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors.b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign

matter.c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted, provided the outlet box is large

enough.D. Device Installation:

1. Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and that were installed before building finishing operations were complete.

2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors.

3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment.

4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches (152 mm) in length.

5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid conductor tightly clockwise, two-thirds to three-fourths of the way around terminal screw.

6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by manufacturer.

7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections.

8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device.9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to

hold device-mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.E. Receptacle Orientation:

1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles down, and on horizontally mounted receptacles to the right.

2. Install hospital-grade receptacles in patient-care areas with the ground pin or neutral blade at the top.

F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.

G. Dimmers:1. Install dimmers within terms of their listing.2. Verify that dimmers used for fan speed control are listed for that application.3. Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according

to manufacturers' device listing conditions in the written instructions.H. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension

vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates.

I. Adjust locations of floor service outlets and service poles to suit arrangement of partitions and furnishings.



3.2 GFCI RECEPTACLESA. Install non-feed-through-type GFCI receptacles where protection of downstream

receptacles is not required.

3.3 IDENTIFICATIONA. Comply with Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."B. Identify each receptacle with panelboard identification and circuit number. Use hot,

stamped, or engraved machine printing with black-filled lettering on face of plate, and durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLA. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. In healthcare facilities, prepare reports that comply with recommendations in NFPA 99.

2. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436.3. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital

readout or illuminated digital-display indicators of measurement.B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles:

1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V.2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is

unacceptable.3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable.4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943.5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted.6. Tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the

circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above.

C. Test straight-blade convenience outlets in patient-care areas for the retention force of the grounding blade according to NFPA 99. Retention force shall be not less than 4 oz. (115 g).

D. Wiring device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

END OF SECTION


ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 1

SECTION 262816 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes individually mounted enclosed switches and circuit breakers used for the following:1. Feeder and branch-circuit protection.2. Motor and equipment disconnecting means.

B. Related Sections include the following:1. Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices" for attachment plugs, receptacles, and

toggle switches used for disconnecting means.2. Division 26 Section "Switchboards" for individually enclosed, fusible switches used

as feeder protection.3. Division 26 Section "Fuses" for fusible devices.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.

B. RMS: Root mean square.

C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.

D. MCP: Motor Circuit Protectors (Adjustable instantaneous trip circuit breakers).

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each switch and circuit breaker.1. Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required

clearances and service space around equipment. Show tabulations and layout of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. Include the following:a. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.b. Current and voltage ratings.c. Short-circuit current rating.d. UL listing for series rating of installed devices.e. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual

overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components.2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between

manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.



3. Maintenance Data: For RV Power Centers and components to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.

C. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that enclosed switches and circuit breakers, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the following:1. Basis of Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual

test of assembled components or on calculation.a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation

of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."



D. Qualification Data: Submit data for testing agencies indicating that they comply with qualifications specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.

E. Field Test Reports: Submit written test reports and include the following:1. Test procedures used.2. Test results that comply with requirements.3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that

comply with requirements.

F. Manufacturer's field service report.

G. Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers and for components to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. In addition to requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures," include the following:1. Routine maintenance requirements for components.2. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting switches and circuit

breakers.3. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of circuit breaker.



B. Comply with NEMA AB 1 and NEMA KS 1.


D. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed switches and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.




A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions, unless otherwise indicated:1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F (minus 30 deg C) and not

exceeding 104 deg F (40 deg C).2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m).

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with other construction, including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.1. Spares: For the following:

a. Potential Transformer Fuses: 2.b. Control-Power Fuses: 2.c. Fuses for Fused Switches: refer to Division 26 section “Fuses”.

2. Spare Indicating Lights: Six of each type installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:1. Fusible Switches:

a. Eaton Corp.; Cutler-Hammer Products.b. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Control Division.c. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.d. Square D Co.

2. Molded-Case Circuit Breakers:a. Eaton Corp.; Cutler-Hammer Products.b. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Control Division.c. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.d. Square D Co.

3. Combination Circuit Breaker and Ground-Fault Trip:a. Eaton Corp.; Cutler-Hammer Products.b. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Control Division.c. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.d. Square D Co.

B. RV Power Centers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:1. Midwest Electric Products, Inc

2.2 RV Power Centers

A. Metering: Unmetered.



B. Mounting: Pedestal – earth burial.

C. Feed: Underground.

D. Heads: One

E. Receptacles: one 14-50R and one 5-20R2

F. Breakers: 1. One 50 amp, 2 pole2. One 20 amp, single pole, GFI.

G. Amps: 100

H. Volts: 120/208, single phase.

I. U.L. Listed.

2.3 ENCLOSED SWITCHES

A. Enclosed, Nonfusible Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, with lockable handle.

B. Enclosed, Fusible Switch, 800 A and Smaller: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, with clips to accommodate specified fuses, built-in fuse pullers arranged to facilitate fuse removal, lockable handle with two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.1. Rejection clips where rejection fuses are specified.

2.4 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker: NEMA AB 1, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents.1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level

overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-mounted, field-adjustable trip setting.

3. Electronic Trip Unit Circuit Breakers: RMS sensing; field-replaceable rating plug; with the following field-adjustable settings: a. Instantaneous trip.b. Long- and short-time pickup levels.c. Long- and short-time time adjustments.d. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.

4. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with 5 -mA trip sensitivity, unless noted otherwise on the drawings.

B. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker Features and Accessories: Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.1. Lugs: Mechanical style suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and material of

conductors.2. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching

fluorescent lighting loads; Type HACR for heating, air-conditioning, and refrigerating equipment.



3. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator.

4. Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 55 percent of rated voltage.

5. Auxiliary Switch: [One SPDT switch] [Two SPDT switches] with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts mimic circuit-breaker contacts, "b" contacts operate in reverse of circuit-breaker contacts.

2.5 ENCLOSURES

A. NEMA AB 1 and NEMA KS 1 to meet environmental conditions of installed location.1. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.2. Kitchen Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel.

3. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.4. Hazardous Areas Indicated on Drawings: NEMA 250, Type 7C.


A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard gray paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested enclosures before shipping.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been

corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

B. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

C. Equipment Disconnects1. Maximum elevation: 48”.2. Locate lockable disconnect near each motor complying with clearance

requirements.3. Multiple speed motors: provide switch in all motor leads.

D. RF Power Centers: Install according to manufacturers written instructions. Provide concrete base below ground to prevent tilting and settling.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs as specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."



B. Enclosure Nameplates: Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate mounted with corrosion-resistant screws.

C. Fusible Switch Labels: Label each enclosure with “REPLACE WITH CURRENT LIMITING FUSES ONLY. CATALOG NUMBER: (FUSE CAT. NO.).”

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Install equipment grounding connections for switches and circuit breakers with ground continuity to main electrical ground bus.

B. Install power wiring. Install wiring between switches and circuit breakers, and control and indication devices.

C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.


A. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch, circuit breaker, component,

and control circuit.2. Test continuity of each line- and load-side circuit.

B. Testing: After installing enclosed switches and circuit breakers and after electrical circuitry has been energized, demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements.1. Procedures: Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test

indicated in NETA ATS, Section 7.5 for switches and Section 7.6 for molded-case circuit breakers. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges.

3.7 CLEANING

A. On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of enclosures. Remove paint splatters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning. Repair exposed surfaces to match original finish.



INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 1

SECTION 26 5100 - INTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Interior lighting fixtures, lamps, and ballasts.2. Emergency lighting units.3. Exit signs.4. Lighting fixture supports.

B. Related Sections:1. Division 26 Section "Lighting Control Devices" for automatic control of

lighting, including time switches, photoelectric relays, occupancy sensors, and multipole lighting relays and contactors.

2. Division 26 Section "Central Dimming Controls" and "Modular Dimming Controls" for architectural dimming systems.

3. Division 26 Section "Network Lighting Controls" for manual or programmable control systems with low-voltage control wiring or data communication circuits.

4. Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices" for manual wall-box dimmers for incandescent lamps.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. BF: Ballast factor.

B. CCT: Correlated color temperature.

C. CRI: Color-rendering index.

D. HID: High-intensity discharge.

E. LER: Luminaire efficacy rating.

F. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.

G. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided.

H. TCLP: Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure, as designed by the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA).

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:



1. Physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions.2. Emergency lighting units including battery and charger. Integral for all

LED fixtures3. Ballast, including BF.4. Energy-efficiency data.5. Air and Thermal Performance Data: For air-handling lighting fixtures.

Furnish data required in "Submittals" Article in Division 23 Section "Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles."

6. Sound Performance Data: For air-handling lighting fixtures. Indicate sound power level and sound transmission class in test reports certified according to standards specified in Division 23 Section "Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles."

7. Life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy-efficiency data for lamps.8. Photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests,

complying with IESNA Lighting Measurements Testing & Calculation Guides, of each lighting fixture type. The adjustment factors shall be for lamps, ballasts, and accessories identical to those indicated for the lighting fixture as applied in this Project.a. Testing Agency Certified Data: For indicated fixtures, photometric

data shall be certified by a qualified independent testing agency. Photometric data for remaining fixtures shall be certified by manufacturer.

b. Manufacturer Certified Data: Photometric data shall be certified by a manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

B. Shop Drawings: For nonstandard or custom lighting fixtures. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads,

required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For lighting fixtures, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on

actual test of assembled components or on calculation.2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of

gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the

certification is based and their installation requirements.

D. Samples, When Requested by Architect/Engineer: For each lighting fixture indicated in the Interior Lighting Fixture Schedule. Each Sample shall include the following:1. Lamps and ballasts, installed.2. Cords and plugs.3. Pendant support system.

E. Installation instructions.



F. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:1. Lighting fixtures.2. Suspended ceiling components.3. Partitions and millwork that penetrate the ceiling or extends to within 12

inches (305 mm) of the plane of the luminaires.4. Ceiling-mounted projectors.5. Structural members to which suspension systems for lighting fixtures will be

attached.6. Other items in finished ceiling including the following:

a. Air outlets and inlets.b. Speakers.c. Sprinklers.d. Smoke and fire detectors.e. Occupancy sensors.f. Access panels.g.

7. Perimeter moldings.

G. Product Certificates: For each type of ballast for bi-level and dimmer-controlled fixtures, from manufacturer.

H. Field quality-control reports.

I. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and fixtures to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.1. Provide a list of all lamp types used on Project; use ANSI and

manufacturers' codes.

J. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by manufacturers' laboratories that are accredited under the National Volunteer Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.


D. FM Global Compliance: Lighting fixtures for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for indicated class and division of hazard by FM Global.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.



1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components that fail in materials, quality or workmanship within specified warranty period.1. Warranty Period for Emergency Lighting Unit Batteries: 10 years from date

of Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty for the remaining nine years.

2. Warranty Period for Emergency Fluorescent Ballast and Self-Powered Exit Sign Batteries: Seven years from date of Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty for the remaining six years.

3. Acrylic Lenses, Anti-Yellowing: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion if acrylic lenses who any noticeable sign of yellowing.

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.1. Lamps: 10 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least

one of each type.2. Plastic Diffusers and Lenses: One [ten [U of U Projects]] for every 100 of

each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.3. Ballasts or drivers: One for every 100 of each type and rating installed.

Furnish at least one of each type.4. Globes and Guards: One for every 20 of each type and rating installed.

Furnish at least one of each type.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products indicated.

2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS

A. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed fixtures.

B. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.

C. Sheet Metal Components: Steel unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.

D. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position.

E. Diffusers and Globes:



1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.a. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch (3.175 mm) minimum unless

otherwise indicated.b. UV stabilized.

2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated.

F. Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps and ballasts. Labels shall be located where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal viewing angles when lamps are in place.1. Label shall include the following lamp and ballast characteristics:

a. "USE ONLY" and include specific lamp type.b. Lamp diameter code (T-4, T-5, T-8, T-12, etc.), tube configuration

(twin, quad, triple, etc.), base type, and nominal wattage for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires.

c. Lamp type, wattage, bulb type (ED17, BD56, etc.) and coating (clear or coated) for HID luminaires.

d. Start type (preheat, rapid start, instant start, etc.) for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires.

e. ANSI ballast type (M98, M57, etc.) for HID luminaires.f. CCT and CRI for all luminaires.

2.3 LED LAMPS AND DRIVERS:

A. Minimum CRI 78.

B. Rated life of 50,000 hrs per L70 (IES LM-79).

C. Flicker: No visible or detectable flicker, operate on filtered DC or AC greater than 42Khz.

D. Drivers shall not operate LEDs below 70% of LED manufacturer’s recommended drive current.

E. Dimming drivers shall be compatible with the control method shown on the drawings. All dimmed drivers shall use dimming control capable of 1% - 100% dimming. 0-10 vdc, DMX, dali, n-lite or Lurtron HiLume protocol.

F. Approved Manufacturers.1. General Electric.2. Philips.3. Osram / Sylvania.4. Cree

2.4 EXIT SIGNS

A. General Requirements for Exit Signs: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Internally Lighted Signs:1. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 50,000 hours minimum rated lamp life.2. Self-Powered Exit Signs (Battery Type): Integral automatic charger in a

self-contained power pack.



a. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type.b. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer

relay.c. Operation: Relay automatically energizes lamp from battery when

circuit voltage drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger.

d. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability.

e. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.

f. Remote Test: Switch in hand-held remote device aimed in direction of tested unit initiates coded infrared signal. Signal reception by factory-installed infrared receiver in tested unit triggers simulation of loss of its normal power supply, providing visual confirmation of either proper or failed emergency response.

g. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates code-required test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated by an integral audible alarm and a flashing red LED.

2.5 LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS

A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel- and angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.

B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch (13-mm) steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish same as fixture.

C. Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2-inch (13-mm) steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount a single fixture. Finish same as fixture.

D. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage (2.68 mm).

E. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch (5-mm) minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.

F. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Lighting fixtures:1. Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise

indicated.2. Install lamps in each luminaire.

B. Temporary Lighting: If it is necessary, and approved by Architect, to use permanent luminaires for temporary lighting, install and energize the minimum



number of luminaires necessary. When construction is sufficiently complete, remove the temporary luminaires, disassemble, clean thoroughly, install new lamps, and reinstall.

C. Remote Mounting of Ballasts: Distance between the ballast and fixture shall not exceed that recommended by ballast manufacturer. Verify, with ballast manufacturers, maximum distance between ballast and luminaire.

D. Lay-in Ceiling Lighting Fixtures Supports: Use grid as a support element.1. Install ceiling support system rods or wires, independent of the ceiling

suspension devices, for each fixture. Locate not more than 6 inches (150 mm) from at least two diagonal corners of lighting fixture and attach to building structure.

2. Support Clips: Fasten to lighting fixtures and to ceiling grid members at or near each fixture corner with clips that are UL listed for the application.

3. Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Install as indicated on reflected ceiling plans or center in acoustical panel, and support fixtures independently with at least two 3/4-inch (20-mm) metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees.

4. Install at least one independent support rod or wire from structure to a tab on lighting fixture. Wire or rod shall have breaking strength of the weight of fixture at a safety factor of 3.

E. Suspended Lighting Fixture Support:1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches (1200 mm), brace to

limit swinging.2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers.3. Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or

rod for suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end.

4. Do not use grid as support for pendant luminaires. Connect support wires or rods to building structure.

5. Safety Cables: to prevent the fixture from falling if swaying breaks the pendant.

F. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labels with panel and circuit numbers on concealed junction and outlet boxes. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."


A. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify transfer from normal power to battery and retransfer to normal.

B. Verify that self-luminous exit signs are installed according to their listing and the requirements in NFPA 101.



C. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards.

3.4 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Burn-in all lamps that require specific aging period to operate properly, prior to occupancy by Owner. Burn-in fluorescent and compact fluorescent lamps intended to be dimmed, for at least 100 hours continuous at full voltage.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting aimable luminaires to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose. Some of this work may be required after dark.1. Adjust aimable luminaires in the presence of Architect.

END OF SECTION


STRUCTURED CABLING (VOICE-DATA) DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS 271000 - 1

SECTION 271000 - STRUCTURED CABLING (VOICE-DATA) DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



. B. Requirements of the following Division 26 Sections apply to this section:

1. Basic Electrical Requirements.2. Basic Electrical Materials and Methods.3. Electronic Systems Electrical

C. Requirements of the following Division 27 Sections apply to this Section:1. Basic Electronic Systems Materials and Methods.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes complete installation of voice/data distribution components as an addition to an existing local area network. Install completely so system will be fully operational when telephone/data instruments and network/switching equipment are connected. Items that are part of this work include, but are not limited to the following:

1. Cat 6 UTP 4 pair cabling.2. Telecommunications outlets.3. Patch panels.4. Cable Management.5. Labeling.6. Patch Cords.7. Terminations and all accessories.8. Equipment rack.

B. This section requires that rough-in materials for this section be provided by the Division 26 installer for installation under Division 26. Rough-in materials include but are not limited to conduit, junction boxes, pathways in corridors, and through wall sleeves. Cable, wall cable management, and j-hooks for this section shall be provided by the Division 27 installer.

C. Backbone vertical cabling and terminations to the new rack shall be provided by the Owner.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.

B. Product data for system components.

1. Prior to purchasing any equipment or materials, a list of their manufacturers shall be submitted for review.

2. Prior to assembling or installing the telecommunications work, the following shall be submitted for review:

a. Catalog information, factory assembly drawings and field installation drawings as required for a complete explanation and descriptions of all items and equipment.

C. Upon request, submit for approval a sample of each of the following:



1. Each type of cable.

2. Each type of cable connector.

3. Complete outlet assembly including frame, jacks, and cover plate.

4. Each type of identification label.

5. Other items as requested.

D. Record of field tests of system.

E. Documents will not be accepted for review unless:

1. They include complete information pertaining to appurtenances and accessories.

2. They are submitted as a package where they pertain to related items.

3. They are properly marked with specific service or function, and intended location of use within the project (i.e., voice TR and MC termination).

4. They are clearly identified or highlighted to indicate all items which are applicable.

5. They indicate the project name and address along with the Contractor's name, address and phone number.

6. They are properly marked with external connection identification as related to the project where they consist of standard factory assembly or field installation drawings.

F. Shop drawing Review

1. The Contractor shall submit for approval system shop drawings which include pin configurations, cable runs, punch down blocks, patch panels, conduit, systems/materials. and riser diagrams and workstation or other terminations. The Contractor shall keep all documentation current throughout the installation and build-out process. If changes occur which affect any documentation, the Contractor shall formally re-issue the affected documentation to the Owner at the completion of the installation.

2. The purpose of the review of shop drawings is to maintain the integrity of the design. Unless the contractor clearly points out changes, substitutions, deletions or any other differences between the submission and the Contract Documents in writing on the Contractor's letterhead, approval by the Engineer or Architect does not constitute acceptance. It is not to be assumed that the engineer has read the text nor reviewed the technical data of a manufactured item and its components except where the Vendor has pointed out differences between his product and the specified model.

3. It is the responsibility of the contractor to confirm all dimensions, quantities, and the coordination of materials and products supplied by him with other trades. Approval of shop drawings containing errors does not relieve the contractor from making corrections at his expense.

4. Substitutions of equipment, systems, materials, must be coordinated by the Contractor with his own or other trades which may be involved with the item, such as, but not limited to, equipment substitutions which change telecommunications or electrical requirements, or hanging or supporting weights or dimensions.



5. Any extra charges or credits which may be generated by other trades due to substitutions will not be accepted unless the Contractor has an agreement in writing with the Owner.

6. Substitutions of equipment, system, etc. requiring approval of local authorities must comply with such regulations and be filed at the expense of the Contractor (should filing be necessary). Substitutions are subject to approval or disapproval by the Engineer. The contractor in offering substitution shall hold the Owner and Engineer harmless if the substituted item is an infringement of patent held by the specified item.

G. The Contractor shall establish cable records during the installation. These records shall correlate workstation number, distribution cable number, punch down block or frame assignments, conduit or duct path and station location. These records shall be updated as the project progresses to reflect any required changes. As built Records/Drawings will be furnished as specified and accepted by Owner.

H. All manufacturer's product data including specifications and installation instructions will be provided to the Owner upon acceptance of the space by the Owner.


A. All equipment and materials for permanent installation shall be the products of recognized manufacturers and shall be new.

B. Installers Qualifications: Belden certified and experienced in voice/data distribution system installation similar to that indicated for this project and that have a record of successful performance for a period of 5 years minimum.

1. Factory certification: The installer shall have factory trained and certified technicians on the jobsite at all times for the products and installation methods used in this project.

C. New equipment and installation shall comply with the following:

1. ANSI/TIA/EIA -568-C, “Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard”, 2002.

2. ANSI/TIA/EIA -569-C, “Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces", 2012.

3. ANSI/TIA/EIA -606A, “Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings”, 1993.

4. ANSI/TIA/EIA -607A, “Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications”, 1994.

5. NFPA 70, National Electric Code

D. New equipment and installation shall:

1. Be Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (U.L.) labeled and/ or listed where specifically called for, or where normally subject to such U.L. labeling and/ or listing services.

2. Be clearly labeled identifying the transmission parameters specified (specifically with reference to Category ratings).

3. Be without blemish or defect.

4. Be in accordance with the latest applicable standards.

5. Be products which meet with the acceptance of the agency inspecting the telecommunications work.



E. All items of equipment or material of one generic type shall be the product of one manufacturer throughout.

F. It is the intent of these specifications that wherever a manufacturer of a product is specified, and the terms "other approved" or "or approved equal" or "equal" are used, the substitute item must conform in all respects to the specified item. Consideration will not be given to claims that the substituted item meets the performance requirements with lesser construction. Performance as delineated in schedules and in the specifications shall be interpreted as minimum performance.

G. Substituted equipment or optional equipment where permitted and approved, must conform to space requirements. Any substituted equipment that cannot meet space requirements, whether approved or not shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense. Any modifications of related systems as a result or substitutions shall be made at the Contractor's expense.

H. Note that the approval of shop drawings, or other information submitted in accordance with the requirements hereinbefore specified, does not assure that the Engineer, Architect, or any other Owner's Representative, attests to the dimensional accuracy or dimensional suitability of the material or equipment involved or the ability of the material or equipment involved or the mechanical performance of equipment. Approval of Shop Drawing does not invalidate the plans and specifications if in conflict, unless a letter requesting such change is submitted and approved in the Engineer's letterhead.

I. Substitutions of Telecommunications Equipment for that shown on the schedules or designated by model number in the specifications will not be considered it the item is not a regular cataloged item shown in the current catalog of the manufacturer.

J. Manufacturer's Recommendations: Where installation procedures of any part thereof are required to be in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer of the material being installed, printed copies of the recommendations shall be furnished prior to installation. Installation of the item will not be allowed to proceed until the recommendations are received. Failure to furnish these recommendations can be cause for rejection of the material.

K. Connected Equipment Manufacturer Approval: Where cables specified in this Section are used to provide signal paths for systems specified in other sections of these Specifications or for systems furnished under other contracts, obtain review of the cable characteristics and approval for use with the connected system equipment by the connected equipment manufacturers.

L. "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" (NRTL) Listing: Provide materials that are listed and labeled.

1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the "National Electrical Code," Article 100.

2. FCC Regulations: Comply with FCC Part 68, Chapter 1, "US Code of Federal Regulations," Title 47 for all telephone system wire and cable connection components.

M. Toxicity: Comply with applicable codes and regulations regarding toxicity of combustion products of materials used in control/signal transmission media.

N. Coordination of Work: Coordinate the Work of this Section with the requirements of the Owner's voice/data system suppliers, existing conditions, and any of the off premises utility organizations.

1. Meet jointly with the representatives of the Owner and any utility representatives, to exchange information and agree on details of installation interfaces, any work involving existing equipment and the installation of new infrastructure thereto, T568A or B wiring standards, and any other circumstances that impact on the completion of the work of this Section.



2. Record agreements reached in the meeting and distribute the record to the other participants.

1.5 DESCRIPTION OF STANDARD TELECOMMUNICATIONS ASSEMBLIES

A. The pair configuration for all twisted-pair cables shall conform to the industry standards for multi-pair cables and shall be color coded using the Western Electric color code scheme.

B. The contractors shall be responsible for insuring that the installation of all equipment be performed in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications. The necessity of special conditions required by a particular manufacturer shall be bought to the attention of the engineer prior to the installation of any equipment in the area concerned.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Project Warranty: A written warranty agreeing to replace and install voice/data distribution system components that fail in materials or workmanship, or do not meet manufacturer’s official published specifications and performance criteria within the warranty period specified below. This includes both labor and materials. This warranty shall be in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights and remedies the Owner may have against the Contractor under the Contract Documents.

B. Special Project Warranty Period: 5 years minimum, beginning on the date of Substantial Completion.


A. Deliver cable factory-packaged in containers or reels. Store in clean dry space and protect products from damaging fumes and traffic. Handle wire and cable carefully to avoid damage.

1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate with installation of electrical boxes and fittings, and raceways for subsequent installation of cable/wire.

B. Sequence installation of cabling systems with other work to minimize possibility of damage during construction. Contractor is responsible for replacing and or repairing damaged materials during installation, such as wall finishes, ceiling tile, grid, etc.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT/CABLING LIST

A. The parts referred to in the drawings or specifications are recommended types. Where acceptable substitutes are available from only one vendor, no substitutions will be permitted. The owner or his representative reserve the right to examine and approve any and all parts acquired to satisfy the installation requirements, and to reject these parts without penalty if they do not meet with the specifications.

B. The items indicated by a specific manufacturer shall not be construed as a "bill of materials". They represent items of significance used during the design of the cabling installation. Where the items indicated are one portion of an assembly, the entire assembly shall be provided unless specified otherwise. Where items do not have a manufacturer or part number listed, no particular item has been selected at this time.

C. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

1. Cable:



a. Belden Inc.; Electronics Division.

2. Rack Terminal and Connector Components:a. Belden/CDT.

3. Distribution Racks and Wire Management:a. B-Lineb. Chatsworth.c. Panduit.

D. Voice/Data distribution (LAN) system equipment racks

1. General Frame Requirements:

a. Distribution Frames: Freestanding and wall-mounting, modular-steel units designed for telecommunications terminal support and coordinated with dimensions of units to be supported.

b. Module Dimension: Width compatible with EIA 310 standard, 19-inch panel mounting.

c. Finish: Manufacturer's standard, baked-polyester powder coat.

2. Floor-Mounted Racks: Modular-type, steel or aluminum construction.

a. Vertical and horizontal cable management channels, top and bottom cable troughs, grounding lug, and a power strip.

b. Baked-polyester powder coat finish.

2.2 UTP CABLE AND WIRING COMPONENTS

A. General: Provide cable and wiring components of manufacturer's standard materials as indicated by published product information, designed and constructed as recommended by manufacturer, for a complete installation and for applications indicated. See schedules in drawings and specifications.

B. Data Grade Systems:

1. Cable: Provide 4 pair, 24 gauge, category 6 UTP cable that meets or exceeds the requirements for channel and link performance as stated in ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-C.1 and C.2- Provide plenum rated cable in all areas with BLUE jacket.

2. Terminations: Unless otherwise indicated, all cable shall be terminated at patch panels and at workstations.

3. Patch Panels: Rack-mounted, modular type with RJ45 connectors. Provide quantity of ports to accommodate the number of outlets shown on drawings plus 25%. Patch panels shall be provided for Category 6 UTP and all equipment shall meet current industry standards.

4. Workstations: Shall be an 8-pin modular jack that mounts to a frame or faceplate. The jacks shall be appropriate for the type and category of UTP cable being installed, i.e., category 6 cable shall have category 6 termination unless otherwise noted.

5. Patch Cables: Category 6, terminated with RJ-45 connectors. Provide one for each station cable terminated to the LAN rack patch panels. Provide length and quantity as necessary to complete interconnection to owner switches based on the rack elevation drawings and submittal shop drawings. Minimum length is 6 feet.



PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Distribution System: Unless indicated otherwise, provide all terminations and accessories for cables being provided in this project. Install completely so system will be fully operational when telephone/data instruments and switching equipment are connected.

3.2 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting telephone distribution systems performance. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.3 WIRING INSTALLATION

A. General: Install telephone/data distribution systems, cabling and components in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and in compliance with NEC and applicable ANSI/TIA/EIA requirements. Coordinate installation of transmission media with other Work.

B. Install cable without damaging conductors, shield, or jacket. Do not either in handling or installation bend cable to smaller radii than minimum recommended by manufacturer. Ensure that medium manufacturer's recommended pulling tensions are not exceeded. Pull cable simultaneously where more than one is being installed in same raceway. Use pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket weave wire/cable grips that will not damage media or raceway.

C. Wiring Method: Install horizontal cabling in cable management tray and/or hooks. Installations that use the suspended ceiling to support cable will not be accepted.

D. Exposed Cable: Install parallel or perpendicular to surfaces or exposed structural members and follow surface contours where possible.

1. Cable Support: Secure cable to independent supports at intervals not greater than 5 feet to prevent sagging between supports. Use metallic supports with corrosion-resistant finish.

E. No splices are allowed except at indicated termination points.

F. Wiring in Termination Rooms and Cabinets: Install conductors parallel to and at right angles to walls. Bundle, wrap, and train the conductors to terminal points with sufficient service loop. Use wire distribution spools at points where cables are fanned or conductors turned. Label each terminal with designations approved by the Owner. Wiring on racks, patch panels, and at riser UTP blocks shall be installed through wire-management devices.

G. Conductor Terminations: Terminate conductors of cables on terminal blocks and hardware using tools recommended by the manufacturer.

3.4 GROUNDING

A. Provide grounding connections for cable and other system components as required by manufacturer's written instructions and TIA/EIA 607, "Grounding and Bonding of Telecommunications Systems".



B. All ground connectors in the main telecommunications equipment rooms and telecommunications closets shall be made to the ground bars provided for that purpose as part of the electrical work.

C. All metal panels, enclosures, boxes, racks, raceways, etc. in computer rooms, telecommunications equipment rooms and closets shall be grounded.

D. Conductors utilized for grounding and bonding shall not be less that #6 AWG and shall have type "TW" or better insulation, color coded green.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION AND TAGGING FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS DEVICES

A. Identify individually:

1. Each and every telecommunications cable.2. Each outlet (and each port).3. Each termination block and patch panel (and each termination).4. Each equipment termination frame and cabinet.5. Each junction box used for telecommunications wiring.6. Each system (i.e., voice, Data, fiber, etc.) as identified by the engineer.7. Other items as directed.

B. The nomenclature used to identify cables, blocks, equipment, etc. shall be as specified on the drawings or elsewhere in this specification. Missing or unclear nomenclature criteria for the items specified above shall not be construed as a reason not to identify the items and shall be brought to the attention of the Owner.

C. All materials required for labeling shall be provided by the contractor. All labels shall be permanently adhered, easily visible and shall be resistant to smearing. All text shall be typed (not handwritten). All cables shall be labeled at both ends minimum.

3.6 FIRE-STOPPING:

A. Firestopping shall be provided for all penetrations of conduit, wireways, bus ducts, cable trays, etc., through fire-rated walls and floors and other fire-rated separations as follows:

1. Excess space in framed openings through structural floors between conduits and concrete shall be grouted in with concrete to a depth of at least the thickness of the slab plus 2" minimum above the slab.

2. Conduit penetration through poured concrete or masonry walls shall be grouted in with concrete and provided with tight fitting escutcheon plates on both sides.

3. Conduit penetrations through fire-rated dry walls shall be with sleeves through the wall fitted with escutcheon plates on both sides with excess openings filled with fire stop material specifically manufactured for the purpose.

4. Excess space within conduit sleeves or stubs through floor slabs or walls where low voltage/ telecommunications cables pass through shall be filled with firestopping material specifically manufactured for the purpose.

5. Utilize fire-rated fittings, as specified elsewhere for penetrations through floor slabs for supplying floor outlets.

B. All conduits/sleeves used for vertical cable passage shall be sealed utilized suitable material after the installation of cables as follows:

1. The material shall be non-corrosive to the cable jacket or insulation that it applies to.



2. The material shall provide for a minimum of three (3) hour fire rating.

3. The material shall be non-shrinking, waterproof and smoke tight. The material shall remain flexible and non-hardening.

4. The material shall be of the type that when installed will not slip through the openings, will stick to the surfaces of the openings and the cable and will not require any pressure to be applied to the cable in order to keep it in place.

5. The material shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner and the final installation shall be smooth finished to the top of the sleeve or conduit.

6. The material shall be easily removable without damaging the cables after being set or cured for at least one week.

C. All horizontal cable penetrations through rated walls shall be sealed in a manner that will provide a fire rating equal to the wall construction.

D. Upon completion of the telecommunications work, the contractor will certify that all openings for the cables satisfactorily sealed and fire stopped.

E. All materials used for firestopping shall be approved for the purpose and the rating of the wall or floor and all methods employed shall meet with the approval of the local authorities.

F. Refer to architectural drawings and specifications for all locations of fire rated walls and floors.

3.7 TESTING

A. Before an application for final acceptance of the telecommunications work will be considered, all tests deemed necessary by the Owner and Engineer to show proper execution of the voice and data wiring work shall have been performed and completed in the presence of the Owner's representative. Scheduling of all testing procedures shall be arranged to suit the convenience of the Owner.

B. Test specified to be performed in this document are intended to verify the quality of all cabling. This document also establishes a uniform method of reporting the test results for evaluation by the Engineer and Owner.

C. All tests are to be performed upon completion of the initial installation.

D. Performing the indicated tests does not constitute equipment or circuit acceptance.

3.8 TEST EQUIPMENT

A. The equipment indicated below represents test equipment utilized to develop this test specification. Substitute test equipment may be used, upon approval by the Engineer, provided the same level and quality of testing is performed.

1. Twisted pair (Cat 6)

PRODUCT PRODUCT NUMBER

Fluke Networks DTX CableAnalyzer

Utilize accessories as required (refer to manufacturer’s handbook):

B. Prior to any testing being performed, the Engineer shall be supplied with a list of test equipment to be used, for his review and approval, if not the equipment identified in this



specification. The submittal shall include documentation indicating that the proposed equipment is capable of performing all of the tests as required by this specification.

3.9 TESTS TO BE PERFORMED

A. Tests are to be performed on the following aspects of the voice/data distribution cabling system:

1. From each Termination Room (TR) termination to each and every workstation termination.

2. Any other telecommunications inter-building or station cable which forms a portion of this installation.

B. All cable runs for which equipment will not initially be attached must be tested to the same level of compliance as all other cabling.

C. Prior to any acceptance testing being performed, a sample test shall be performed for each series of tests (i.e., copper, fiber, etc.). The sample test shall consist of a regular acceptance test on a few sample cables as selected by the contractor. The Engineer shall be given a minimum of one week notice so he and/ or his representative may observe the test.

D. The Contractor is responsible for testing each telephone and data circuit installed and is to certify that each circuit is fully operational from the workstation to the MC prior to notifying the Owner that the space is ready for inspection and acceptance. All testing will be in accordance with ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-C standards. The contractor will maintain and provide to the Owner an operational test log. This will provide a chronological list, including but not limited to the following: all significant events, including equipment/ facility reactions, meter readings, etc. obtained during the testing phase.

E. All wiring, wiring connections and equipment provided by the contractor shall be tested in the presence of a representative of the Owner. The record of the test results will be submitted to the Owner's representative within seven (7) days of said test.

F. Testing for certification will not occur until after all construction has been completed, carpet laid to ensure that the installation is not injured after testing.

G. Test results and written certification will be entered on forms previously approved by the Owner's Technical Representative and returned to the Owner within seven (7) days after testing.

H. Data Grade Cable (Category 6)

The following tests shall be performed on all pairs of each UTP cable.

1. Test equipment

Fluke Networks DTX CableAnalyzer

2. Tests to be performed

a. The test equipment shall be configured to test the maximum transmission performance for which the cable is rated (i.e. Cat 6 = 250 Mbps).

b. The following minimum information shall be provided for each cable and pair to be tested:

1. Length - find the total cable length.



2. Resistance - measured for each cable pair.

3. Noise - measured for each pair at the following frequencies: 10Hz - 150KHz - 16 MHZ, - 100MHz, -250MHZ.

4. Insertion Loss (dB loss) - measured for each pair at 250 MHZ.

5. Near End Cross Talk (NEXT) - measured in dB and the associated frequency.

6. Power Sum NEXT - measured in dB.

7. Attenuation to Cross Talk (ACR) - measured in dB.

8. Far End Cross Talk (ELFEXT) - measured in dB.

9. Power Sum ELFEXT - measured in dB.

10. Return Loss - measured in dB.

11. Wire map - indicate that the wiring at the near end and far end are as specified.

c. Installer shall show that the complete installation meets category 6 requirements.

3.5 RECORD OF TEST RESULTS

A. A record of all required tests shall be provided to the Engineer and Owner. The information shall be permanent record for the purposes of maintenance and restoration.

B. A brief description outlining the test equipment used and a single line diagram indicating the test setup shall be provided to the Engineer for his review. The level of description should be sufficient enough to allow an individual who is not familiar with the specific test equipment to recreate any portion of the test.

C. Test results to be provided shall contain the following minimum information:

1. For all similar cable runs include:

a. Project name.

b. Description of test (i.e., voice riser, workstation cable, etc.)

c. Cable origin

d. Cable destination

e. Cable ID

f. Cable pair/ strand

g. Test date

h. Tester (individual responsible for conducting the test)

i. Page____ of _____

j. An initial block for Owner witness for each separate testing requirement.



l. A signature block for the Owner witness.

2. For copper cables:

a. No shorts, no crosses, no breaks

b. For the indicated pairs of the cables include:

1) Length

2.) Resistance

3.) Noise @ 10 Hz - 150 Khz 150KHz - 15 Mhz 16 Mhz - 250 Mhz

4.) Attenuation (dB) at 10 Mhz

5.) Near end cross talk (NEXT) and the associated frequency

6.) Wire map

7.) Test equipment settings.

D. While it is recognized that the test results will be completed in the field, it is important to note that they will serve as record documents. Therefore, care should be taken in the recording of the test results. The final product is expected to be done in a neat and legible manner.

E. Some test equipment has the ability to record test results to a printer or memory for printing later. Submitting of these printed test forms is preferred in lieu of handwritten forms. Some test equipment also has the ability to store the tests results to disk media. The test results are required on disk to associate the information with a cable management database. All test results shall be provided in the following formats:

1. Printed (1 bound copy).

2. Disk or Flash media.

F. A copy of the test results in both electronic and printed formats shall be provided to the Engineer for his review and the Owner for his records.

3.6 CORRECTIVE ACTION

A. Any defects or deficiencies discovered in any of the telecommunications work shall be indicated on the test report and be corrected.

B. Upon completion of testing and problem resolution, all connections tested are to be 100% error free for all horizontal workstations.

C. Any connections determined to be not correctable shall be indicated at each end of the termination as "bad" (in red) - backbone/ riser.

3.7 COMMISSIONING

A. Subsequent to hookups of telephone/data distribution systems, operate control/signal systems to demonstrate proper functioning. Replace malfunctioning media with new materials, and then retest until satisfactory performance is achieved.



B. Documentation: Use the above test equipment to make a strip chart recording of transmission characteristics, wave form, and performance of all segments of the installation at the time of commissioning. Record loss data in a form with provision for at least 50 additional loss data entries during future maintenance operations. Bind the recordings in a cable record book indexed for easy reference during future maintenance operations and turn book over to the Owner's authorized representative.



NURSE CALL 275223 - 1

SECTION 275223 - NURSE CALL

GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes system hardware and software that shall consist of a staff/resident emergency communications network comprised of master console, duty stations, dome lights, call cords, pull cord stations, emergency push button stations, and wiring that is independent of the existing nurse call systems. The system shall be a new Rauland Responder V nurse call system. All necessary equipment required to meet the intent of these specifications, whether or not enumerated within these specifications, shall be supplied and installed to provide a complete and operating staff/resident emergency communications network.

B. This section requires that rough-in materials for this section be provided by the Division 26 installer for installation under Division 26. Rough-in materials include but are not limited to conduit, junction boxes, alternative raceway, and device enclosures. Cable for this section is to be provided by the installer for this section.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Prior to commencement of work, the supplying contractor shall submit complete submittal sets which shall include the following:

1. Cabling Diagrams: Single-line block diagrams showing cabling interconnection of all components for this specific equipment. Include cable type for each interconnection.

2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.3. Station Installation Details: For built-in equipment; dimensioned and to scale.4. Equipment Cabinet Drawings: Dimensioned and to scale.

B. Coordination Drawings: Detail system components that fit, match, and line up with provisions made in equipment specified in other Sections or in separate contracts:

1. Patient/Resident station wall elevations.2. Call Master console.

C. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that nurse call equipment complies with requirements.



D. Field Tests Reports and Observations: Include record of final adjustments certified by Installer.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For nurse call equipment to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 1 "Closeout Procedures “ and “Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Operating instructions.2. Troubleshooting guide.3. Wiring diagrams and terminal identification.4. Equipment parts list.5. Product data for types and sizes of wires and cables used.

F. Warranty Statement: Special warranty requirements as specified in this Section.


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project. The Installer shall be able to fully support the listed service and warranty requirements as specified herein.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing equipment similar to that indicated for this Project and that maintains technical support services capable of providing user with training, parts, and emergency maintenance and repair with a 24-hour-maximum response time.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain nurse call equipment components through one source from a single manufacturer.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled according to UL 1069 as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate wiring paths and maintenance access at locations listed below. Coordinate trim features and finishes at these locations to present a unified design appearance.

1. Patient/Resident stations.2. Call Master console.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. The installing contractor shall provide a warranty on the system which shall include all necessary labor and equipment to maintain the system(s) in full operation for a period of one year from the date of acceptance.

B. Manufacturer shall provide, free of charge, product firmware/software upgrades throughout the warranty period for any product feature enhancements.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

1. Rauland-Borg Corporation.a. Rauland IV system

2.2 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordinate the features of materials and equipment to form an integrated system. Match components and interconnections for optimum performance of specified functions. System shall be microprocessor based, but independent of the facility’s local area network, with a segmented platform configuration providing that system or equipment failures are locally mitigated without global system shutdowns or resets.

B. Expansion Capability: Equipment ratings, housing volume, spare keys, switches, relays, annunciator modules, terminals, and cable conductor quantities adequate to increase the number of stations in the future by 20 percent above those indicated without adding internal or external components or main trunk cable conductors.

C. Resistance to Electrostatic Discharge: System, components, and cabling, and the selection, arrangement, and connection of materials and circuits, shall be protected against damage or diminished performance when subjected to electrostatic discharges of up to 25,000 V in an environment with a relative humidity of 20 percent or less.

D. Equipment: Solid state, modular.

E. Wall-Mounted Component Connection Method: Components connect to system wiring in back boxes with factory-wired plug connectors.

2.3 FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE

A. Station Selection: Master station is capable of selectively communicating with other stations or groups of stations on its system by operating selector switches.

B. Master Station Privacy: Capable of conversing with individual stations in complete privacy.

C. Hands Free: Called station is capable of conversing hands free.

D. Annunciation: At the master station, a tone announces an incoming call and a visual indication is displayed on the console and identifies the calling station and indicates



the priority of the call. LED/LCD lighted displays or touchscreens identify stations selected for outgoing calls.

E. System Reset at Master Station: When a normal incoming call is canceled, associated lights and audible tones are extinguished, and the system is reset when the station switch is returned to the normal position after responding to a call.

F. Patient Station Call: Activates the call-placed lamp at patient station and corridor dome lights. It sounds a tone and lights the call lights at staff/duty stations and actuates annunciation at the master station. When the calling station is selected at the master station, the patient can converse with the master station without moving and without raising or directing the voice.

G. Pull-Cord Call Station and Emergency-Call Station Call: Activates call-placed lamp and corridor dome light. Master station tone pulses with visual display for that room flashes. When master station acknowledges the call, the tone stops but the display and lights continue to function until the call is canceled at the point of origin.

H. Handset Operation: Lifting handset on master station disconnects speaker microphone and transfers conversation to the handset.

I. Station Privacy: No patient, staff, or duty station can be remotely monitored without the lighting of a warning lamp at the monitored station.

J. Patient Station Cord Set: When a patient station cord-set plug is removed from the jack in the station faceplate, a patient station call is initiated as described above. When the master station call button for the station is pressed, the tone stops but lights continue to flash until the call is canceled at the point of origin or the plug is reinserted or replaced with a dummy plug.

K. Call Priority Indication: Call priority switch near each patient station, or integral with the master station, controls the priority status of the call transmitted by individual stations. The switch selects one of the following status levels:

1. Normal: No change to the normal call initiation and canceling sequence.2. Emergency: Call initiation produces signals and indications identical to those of

emergency-call stations. Indicator lamps are extinguished and the system is reset only at the originating station.

2.4 EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTIONS

A. Master Station: Speaker-microphone unit with operating controls.

1. LED/LCD displays with “button” controls or touchscreen technology to designate location and priority of calling stations and called stations.

a. Pulse rate of incoming-call lights denotes priority of calls awaiting response.

2. Station Selection Controls: Touchscreen controls or console “button” controls select stations for two-way voice communications.

3. Signal Tones: Announce incoming calls.4. Volume Control: Regulates incoming-call volume.



5. Privacy Handset with Hook Switch: Of the type that does not require push-to-talk switch, attached to each station, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Central Equipment Cabinet: Lockable metal. Houses amplifiers, tone generators, power supplies, controls, terminal strips, and other components.

1. Amplifier: With fidelity and overall gain necessary to achieve the sound transmission and reproduction characteristics specified, considering interoperability with the installed speakers/microphones and wiring.

a. Power Output: Not less than 3 W at a total harmonic distortion not exceeding 5 percent.

b. Hum and Noise: 60 dB below full output with normal input open.c. Volume Control: Concealed within the amplifier unit to control the volume

of sound reproduced at all stations.d. Protection: Circuit to prevent damage to the amplifier in case shorted or

open output.

2. System Power Supply: For low-voltage operation of the call system.

a. Equipment Rating: Suitable for continuous operation between 32 and 120 deg F (0 and 49 deg C), from a primary line voltage between 105- to 125-V ac, 60 Hz.

b. Output: Regulated low voltages with protection against overloads. Line-to-load regulation shall not exceed 2-1/2 percent with ripple and noise remaining below the 10 mV, RMS level.

c. Overload Protection: Electronic fold-back circuit set to limit the volt-ampere output to less than 100 VA during overloaded or shorted output. Restore power output automatically on removal of overload without resetting circuit breakers or replacing fuses.

3. Power-on indicator lamp.4. Surge Protective Device: Comply with Division 26 Section "Transient Voltage

Suppression" for auxiliary panel suppressors, with LED indicator lights for power and protection status.

5. Battery Backup Unit: Sealed nickel-cadmium, wet-cell battery supplies power through an automatic switch when normal power fails, for a period of not less than six minutes at rated output.

a. Automatic retransfer to normal power, after a 15-minute time delay.b. Two-rate battery charger with an automatic trickle rate and a recharge

rate.

C. Speaker/Microphones (General):

1. Type: Permanent-magnet, dynamic or ceramic, protected against dust and humidity.

2. Sound Reproduction: Sound level of 90 dB plus or minus 3 dB at a distance of 48 inches on the axis without overdriving or distorting any frequencies between 300 and 3000 Hz when installed in an enclosure or in the pillow speaker.

3. Power Handling Capacity: Not susceptible to damage from overdriving within the range of power available from the amplifier.



4. Impedance Matching: Coordinated and matched to the input and output circuits of the amplifier, both for single connection and for group monitoring, to provide the sound reproduction specified. Subsystems or components shall not be combined, which could cause unacceptable distortion such as feedback between pillow speakers and unmuted room speaker/microphone combinations. This protection shall extend throughout the entire range of operation (volume control) of all components.

D. Single-Patient Station: Each bedside control station shall be capable of the following functions:

1. At least 2 programmable call levels (including associated sub-stations).2. Sound Reproduction: Sound level of 90 dB plus or minus 3 dB at a distance of 48

inches on the axis without overdriving or distorting any frequencies between 300 and 3000 Hz when installed in an enclosure or in the pillow speaker.

3. Support and supervise up to 2 sub-stations including pull-cord or push-button modules.

E. Staff and Duty Stations: Audible call-tone signal device, speaker microphone with dynamic cone, monitor lamp, reset switch, routine-call lamp, emergency-call lamp, and call push button; assembled under a single faceplate.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS

A. Emergency-Call Station: Locking-type push button, labeled "Push to Call Help"; reset trigger to release push button and cancel call; and call-placed lamp; mounted in a single faceplate.

B. Pull-Cord Call Station (Bath): Water-resistant construction. Includes the following, mounted under a single faceplate:

1. Pull-Down Switch: Lever-locking type, labeled "Pull Down to Call Help."2. Reset trigger.3. Call-placed lamp.

C. Call-Button Cord Set: Plug and 72-inch white cord; equipped with momentary-action, call-button switch.

1. Ethylene oxide, sterilizable.2. Washable cord.3. Palladium switch contacts in high-impact white housing with cord-set strain relief.4. Attachment: Stainless-steel bed clamp with permanently attached Mylar strap.5. Quantity: 3 cord sets for every 10 patient beds.

D. Indicator Lamps: Light-emitting-diode type with 20-year rated life, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Station Faceplates: High-impact plastic, color by architect. Molded or machine-engraved labeling identifies indicator lamps and controls.

F. Corridor Dome Lights: Two-lamp signal lights (minimum).



1. Lamps: Front replaceable without tools, low voltage with rated life of 7500 hours. Barriers are such that only one color is displayed at a time.

2. Lenses: Heat-resistant, shatterproof, translucent polymer that will not deform, discolor, or craze when exposed to hospital cleaning agents.

3. Filters: Two per unit, amber and red.

G. Cable: Features include the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Conductors: Jacketed single and multiple twisted-pair, copper cables. Sizes and types as recommended by equipment manufacturer. All cable shall be plenum rated.

H. Grounding Components: As specified in Division 26 Section "Grounding."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Wiring Method: Install wiring in raceway except within consoles, desks, and counters; and except in accessible ceiling spaces, where cable wiring method may be used. Use UL-listed plenum cable in environmental air spaces including plenum ceilings. Conceal cable and raceway wiring except in unfinished spaces.

B. Install cables without damaging conductors, shield, or jacket.

C. Do not bend cables, in handling or in installing, to smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturer.

D. Pull cables without exceeding cable manufacturer's recommended pulling tensions.

1. Pull cables simultaneously if more than one is being installed in same raceway.2. Use pulling compound or lubricant if necessary. Use compounds that will not

damage conductor or insulation.3. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire or

cable grips, that will not damage media or raceway.

E. Install exposed raceways and cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces or exposed structural members, and follow surface contours. Secure and support cables by straps, staples, or similar fittings designed and installed so as not to damage cables. Secure cable at intervals not exceeding 30 inches and not more than 6 inches from cabinets, boxes, or fittings.

F. Wiring within Enclosures: Provide adequate length of conductors. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess. Provide and use lacing bars in cabinets.

G. Separation of Wires: Separate speaker-microphone, line-level, speaker-level, and power-wiring runs. Run in separate raceways or, if exposed or in same enclosure, provide 12-inch minimum separation between conductors to speaker microphones and



adjacent parallel power and telephone wiring. Provide separation as recommended by equipment manufacturer for other conductors.

H. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make splices, taps, and terminations on numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes, terminal cabinets, and equipment enclosures. Install terminal cabinets where there are splices, taps, or terminations for eight or more conductors.

I. Impedance and Level Matching: Carefully match input and output impedances and signal levels at signal interfaces. Provide matching networks if required.

J. Identification of Conductors and Cables: Retain color-coding of conductors and apply wire and cable marking tape to designate wires and cables so all media are identified in coordination with system wiring diagrams. Label stations, controls, and indications using approved consistent nomenclature.

1. Label each cable within 4 inches of each termination and tap, where it is accessible in a cabinet or junction or outlet box, and elsewhere as indicated.

2. Prepare cable administration drawings to show building floor plans with cable administration point labeling. Identify labeling convention and show labels for terminal hardware and positions, cables, stations and devices and equipment grounding conductors.

K. Configure system to direct call devices to the assigned master station as indicated in the drawings. Duty stations shall reflect all calls in the system regardless of which master station the devices are assigned to or as noted.

3.2 GROUNDING

A. Ground cable shields and equipment to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize ground loops, common-mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other signal impairments.

B. Signal Ground Terminal: Locate at main equipment cabinet. Isolate from power system and equipment grounding except at connection to main building ground bus.

C. Grounding Provisions: Comply with requirements in Division 16 Section "Grounding."


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.

B. Test Procedure: Comply with the following:

1. Schedule tests a minimum of seven days in advance of performance of tests.2. Report: Submit a written record of test results.3. Operational Test: Perform an operational system test, and demonstrate proper

operations, adjustment, and sensitivity of each station. Perform tests that include originating station-to-station and all-call messages and pages at each nurse call



station. Verify proper routing, volume levels, and freedom from noise and distortion. Test each available message path from each station on the system. Meet the following criteria:

a. Speaker Output: 90 dB plus or minus 3 dB, 300 to 3000 Hz.b. Gain from patient's bedside station to nurse station, with distortion less than

65 dB (plus or minus 3 dB, 300 to 3000 Hz).c. Signal-to-Noise Ratio: Hum and noise level at least 45 dB below full output.

4. Test Procedure:

a. Frequency Response: Determine frequency response of two transmission paths by transmitting and recording audio tones.

b. Signal-to-Noise Ratio: Measure the ratio of signal to noise of the complete system at normal gain settings, using the following procedure: Disconnect a speaker microphone and replace it in the circuit with a signal generator using a 1000-Hz signal. Measure the ratio of signal to noise and repeat the test for four speaker microphones.

c. Distortion Test: Measure distortion at normal gain settings and rated power. Feed signals at frequencies of 300, 400, 1000, and 3000 Hz into each nurse call equipment amplifier, and measure the distortion in the amplifier output.

C. Retesting: Rectify deficiencies indicated by tests and completely retest work affected by such deficiencies at Contractor's expense. Verify by the system test that the total system meets these Specifications and complies with applicable standards. Report results in writing.

D. Inspection: Verify that units and controls are properly labeled and interconnecting wires and terminals are identified.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting sound levels and controls to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to three visits to Project during other-than-normal operating hours for this purpose.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel and caregiver staff to adjust, operate, and maintain nurse call equipment. Refer to Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures” and “Demonstration and Training."

3.6 TRAINING

A. Both manufacturer/factory supported and local installer training shall be provided to all nursing staff. Floor nurses/staff shall receive training appropriate to their needs, and likewise, unit secretaries (or any person whose specific responsibilities include answering patient calls and dispatching staff) shall receive operational training appropriate to their needs.



B. The training shall be comprehensive enough to allow the local in-house technical staff the ability to maintain and service the system themselves, including the making of internal programming alterations. Include in the contract any factory training sessions required, trips, expenses, etc. at local or factory locations to provide this level of training.



ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS 281300 - 1

SECTION 281300 - ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This section includes the addition of access controlled doors to an existing facility system and specifies door status sensors, card and/or keypad readers, and door controllers. System controllers and card readers shall match the existing facility Lenel and HID system.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Hard-Wired System: Alarm, supervisory, and detection devices are directly connected, through individual dedicated conductors, to distributed door controller panels and networked to central control panels.


A. The system shall tie into the existing access control system currently installed. Provide any programming necessary to configure the system with the additional controllers on the system.

B. The system shall support both manual and automatic responses to alarms entering the system. Each alarm condition shall be capable of initiating numerous events including but not limited to the activation of remote devices, door control, and card validation.

C. Access control functions shall include but not be limited to card validation based on time of day and day of week, holiday scheduling with validation override, and positive verification of card.

D. The system shall interface with the fire alarm system and in the event of an alarm, be programmed to release all and/or selected controlled doors that are without free egress, and put them into “access”, or unlocked mode, until directed to relock. Doors to be released by system command shall be coordinated with the local authority having jurisdiction through the Architect. Delayed exit doors shall be released at the door location through fire alarm relay modules communicating to the delayed door hardware controller.

1.5 FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE

A. The system shall consist of intelligent controllers used in a distributed processing configuration. Each controller shall retain all data necessary for system operation in its



own RAM. Each controller will contain an integrated real time clock that will continue to govern events even if communication with the host computer is interrupted.

B. Card access system basic requirements. :

1. Provide a system that is an extension of the existing access control system utilized by the ORMC for all their facilities, with all existing function available.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following according to General Conditions Section.

B. Product data for system components, including "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" (NRTL) listing data and list of materials, dimensioned plans, sections, and elevations showing minimum clearances, mounting arrangements, and installed features and devices.

C. Wiring diagrams for system, including all devices, components, and auxiliary equipment. System diagram is unique to the Project system; a manufacturer's generic system diagram is not acceptable. Diagrams shall differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. Include diagrams for equipment and for system with all terminals, interconnections, cable types and sizes and specific rough in requirements identified.

D. System operation description, including method of operation and supervision of each component and each type of circuit, and sequence of operations for all manually and automatically initiated system inputs, and all specialized functions as listed above. Description must cover this specific Project; manufacturer's standard descriptions for generic systems are not acceptable.

E. Operation and maintenance data for inclusion in "Operating and Maintenance Manual" specified in General Conditions Section. Include data for each type product, including all features and operating sequences, both automatic and manual. Include user's software data and recommendations for spare parts to be stocked at the site. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of service organizations that stock repair parts for the system.

F. Product certifications signed by the manufacturers of system components certifying that their products comply with the referenced standards.

G. Separate Qualification Data for Manufacturers and Installers: Demonstrate their capabilities and experience as specified in Quality Assurance Article. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names of Engineers and Owners, plus other information specified.

H. Record of field tests of system.


A. Installer Qualifications: The installer shall be a factory authorized sales and services representative of the system submitted. At the time of bid, the bidder shall have staff with a minimum of 5 years of experience installing systems of similar size, complexity, and general operation as the system described in this specification. When requested to do so, the installer shall furnish, in writing, proof of compliance with system



manufacturer’s current service and installation certification programs. Installer must be capable of providing emergency maintenance and repairs for the overall system at the project site with 24 hours maximum response time. The installer shall have access to a local office staffed with factory trained technicians, fully capable of supervising installation, system start-up, providing training and servicing of both hardware and software for systems of similar complexity and function as the system described in this specification.

B. Comply with NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code."

C. Listing and Labeling: Provide system and components that are listed and labeled for their indicated use and location on the Project.

1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the "National Electrical Code," Article 100.

2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.

D. Comply with UL Standard 609, 1023, and 1076.

E. FM Compliance: Provide FM-approved card access system and components.

F. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain system components from a single source (the prime system manufacturer) that assumes responsibility for system components and for their compatibility.

G. Coordination of Work: Coordinate the Work of this Section with the requirements of the Owner's security procedures and policies.

1. Meet jointly with the representatives of the Owner to exchange information and agree on details of installation interfaces, any work involving, but not limited to, specific programming, partitioning, card reader restrictions, alarm annunciations, and any other circumstances that impact on the completion of the work of this Section.

2. Record agreements reached in the meeting and distribute the record to the other participants

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Lenel – Door controllers and interfaces2. Sentrol – Door position switches 3. HID – Card readers

2.2 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM EQUIPMENT, GENERAL

A. Surge Protection: Comply with minimum requirements of UL Standard 1449, "Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors," for each component using solid-state devices and having



a line voltage power source connection or an exterior underground signal connection.

B. Provide at the locations identified, a completely operational Access Control System including but not limited to the following equipment:

1. Card Readers 2. Access controller panels3. Relay output contacts4. All power supplies or transformers 5. All equipment, security devices, components, wire, cable, and mounting

hardware as required to meet specification requirements and manufacturers documented installation procedures.

C. Basic Central System Components:

1. Communications terminal and door controller panels to meet the system functional specifications above and for the number of readers as indicated in the drawings.

2.3 ELECTRICAL POWER

A. Normal System Power Supply: 120 V 60 Hz from emergency power circuits.

B. Power Source Transfer: When normal power is interrupted, system is automatically switched to backup supply without degradation of critical system function or loss of signals or status data.

1. Backup Source: Provide a minimum of 2 hour battery backup for all system components. A 2 hour backup power source shall also be provided for the power supplies that support the locking devices. Such batteries shall be an integral part of the power supplies.

2. Annunciation: Switching of the system or any system component to backup power is indicated as a system alarm condition.

2.4 CARD ACCESS SYSTEM HARDWARE, GENERAL

A. Types, features, accessories, and mounting conditions of individual devices are as indicated in the drawings.

B. Battery Back-up: The access control panel shall provide a DC back-up battery for up to one hour operation upon loss of AC power. The access control panel shall provide a lithium battery to retain database information for up to 30 days upon loss of power.

C. Suppression: The access control panel shall have provisions for relay suppressor kits for each relay used, to protect the access control panel from collapsing electrical fields.

D. Card Readers: Card readers shall be HID iClass readers matching the readers currently installed in the hospital for door control. The access control panel shall support card readers using Magstripe, Barcode, Wiegand, Proximity and Biometrics technologies.



1. Proximity Readers: The system shall be provided with uni-directional proximity card readers. The reader shall be able to be mounted with its sides against metal door or window frames, and masonry walls.

2.5 DOOR CONTACT INDICATORS

A. Contact indicators on doors where the door position switch in not provided by the door hardware contractor shall be button type magnetic reed switches with opposing magnet, and shall be per manufacturers recommendations for the type of door installed on. Use concealed types.

2.6 ELECTRIFIED LOCKS

A. All electrified locking devices shall be provided by the door hardware contractor. Provide sufficient coordination for correct termination and function with the access control system.

2.7 REQUEST TO EXIT DEVICES

A. Request to exit functions shall be provided by monitoring integral switches furnished in the locking hardware. Coordinate with door hardware contractor for cabling requirements.

2.8 POWER SUPPLIES.

A. Where indicated, the security contractor shall provide access control power supplies as per manufacturers written recommendations with total number of powered devices for each power supply restricted to only consuming 75 percent of the power supplies rated amperage. Provide separate power supplies for access controllers and separate supplies for access locking devices. Locate power supplies at associated access control system door controller panels. Power supplies that are required for the particular locking hardware that are to be installed in the vicinity of the door, shall be provided by the door hardware contractor. Coordinate with door hardware contractor on termination requirements.

2.9 WIRE AND CABLE

A. General: Stranded copper. Plenum rated. Size conductors as required by system manufacturer.

B. Comply with Division 26 Section "Wires and Cables" except as indicated.

C. Cable for Low-Voltage Control and Signal Circuits: Unshielded, twisted-pair cable, except where manufacturer recommends shielded cable.

2.10 RACEWAY

A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Raceways."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install system according to NFPA 70, applicable codes, and manufacturer's printed instructions.



B. Wiring Method: Install all wiring in raceways, ¾ inch minimum. Conceal raceways except in unfinished indoor spaces. Multiple home runs may be contained in a single conduit of appropriate size. Conduit fill shall not exceed 40%.

C. Wiring Within Panels And Enclosures: Bundle, wrap, and train the conductors to terminal points with 6 inches of service loop, (12 inches maximum). Provide and use cable management hardware as required.

D. Number of Conductors: As recommended by system manufacturer for functions indicated.

E. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make splices, taps, and terminations on numbered terminal strips in junction, pull and outlet boxes, terminal cabinets, and equipment enclosures.

F. Tighten connections to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standard 486A.

G. Identification of Conductors and Cables: Color-code conductors and apply wire and cable marking tape to designate wires and cables so media are identified and coordinated with system wiring diagrams.

H. Install power supplies and other auxiliary components for detection devices at the access control panel or at a data-gathering panel except as otherwise indicated. Do not install such items in the vicinity of the devices they serve, unless otherwise specified.

I. Extensive coordination with the associated door hardware contractors shall be required by the security contractor when connection to locking devices and installation of sensor equipment is called for.

3.2 GROUNDING

A. Ground system components and conductor and cable shields to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize ground loops, common mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments.


A. Manufacturer's Field Services: Provide services of a factory-authorized service representative to supervise the field assembly and connection of components and system pre-testing, testing, adjustment, and programming.

B. Inspection: Verify that units and controls are properly labeled and interconnecting wires and terminals are identified.

C. Pre-testing: Align and adjust the system and perform pre-testing of all components, wiring, and functions to verify conformance with specified requirements. Correct deficiencies by replacing malfunctioning or damaged items with new items. Retest until satisfactory performance and conditions are achieved.

D. Testing: Provide at least 10 days' notice of acceptance test performance schedule.



E. Operational Tests: Perform operational system tests to verify conformance with specifications. Test all modes of system operation and intrusion detection. Methodically test for false alarms in each zone of space intrusion detection devices by simulating activities outside indicated detection patterns.

F. Installer Start-up Responsibility: The Installer shall initiate system operation. Competent start-up personnel shall be enlisted by the Installer on each consecutive working day until the system is fully functional. Upon reoccurring technical problems, the Installer shall supply factory direct Manufacturer's support in the form of factory technical representation and/or diagnostic equipment until the resolution of those defined problems.

3.4 ADJUSTMENT

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 1 year of date of substantial completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting and reprogramming to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to 3 visits to the site for this purpose without additional cost. All initial and subsequent system programming shall become the property of the Owner.

3.5 COMMISSIONING

A. Train Owner's operating personnel in the programming and operation of the system. Train Owner's maintenance personnel in the procedures and schedules involved in preventive maintenance and in programming, operating, adjusting, troubleshooting, and servicing of the system. Provide a minimum of 4 hours training.

B. Schedule training with advance notice of at least 7 days.



DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 283111-1

SECTION 283111 – DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Manual fire-alarm boxes.2. System smoke detectors.3. Heat detectors.4. Notification appliances.


A. Simplex Non-coded, zoned system.


A. Seismic Performance: Fire-alarm control unit and raceways shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7.1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of

any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. General Submittal Requirements:1. Submittals shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction prior to submitting

them to Architect. 2. Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons with the following qualifications:

a. Trained and certified by manufacturer in fire-alarm system design.b. NICET-certified fire-alarm technician, Level IV minimum.

B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

C. Shop Drawings: For fire-alarm system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.1. Comply with recommendations in the "Documentation" Section of the

"Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter in NFPA 72.2. Comply with the installation requirements of FM Global Data Sheet 5-40.3. Include voltage drop calculations for notification appliance circuits.4. Include battery-size calculations.5. Include performance parameters and installation details for each detector,

verifying that each detector is listed for complete range of air velocity, temperature, and humidity possible when air-handling system is operating.



6. Include plans, sections, and elevations of heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning ducts, drawn to scale and coordinating installation of duct smoke detectors and access to them. Show critical dimensions that relate to placement and support of sampling tubes, detector housing, and remote status and alarm indicators. Locate detectors according to manufacturer's written recommendations.

7. Include floor plans to indicate final outlet locations showing address of each addressable device. Show size and route of cable and conduits.

D. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

E. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For fire-alarm control unit, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.

F. Field quality-control reports.

G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire-alarm systems and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:1. Comply with the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance"

Chapter in NFPA 72.2. Provide "Record of Completion Documents" according to NFPA 72 article

"Permanent Records" in the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter.

3. Record copy of site-specific software.4. Provide "Maintenance, Inspection and Testing Records" according to NFPA 72

article of the same name and include the following:a. Frequency of testing of installed components.b. Frequency of inspection of installed components.c. Requirements and recommendations related to results of maintenance.d. Manufacturer's user training manuals.

5. Manufacturer's required maintenance related to system warranty requirements.6. Abbreviated operating instructions for mounting at fire-alarm control unit.7. Copy of NFPA 25.

H. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation:1. Software operating and upgrade manuals.2. Program Software Backup: On magnetic media or compact disk, complete with

data files.3. Device address list.4. Printout of software application and graphic screens.


A. Installer Qualifications: Personnel shall be trained and certified by manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project.

B. Installer Qualifications: Installation shall be by personnel certified by NICET as fire-alarm Level IV technician.



C. Source Limitations for Fire-Alarm System and Components: Obtain fire-alarm system from single source from single manufacturer. Components shall be compatible with, and operate as, an extension of existing system.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: FM approved and listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:1. Simplex (match existing)

2.2 SYSTEMS OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION

A. Fire-alarm signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices:1. Manual stations.2. Heat detectors.3. Smoke detectors.4. Duct smoke detectors.5. Automatic sprinkler system water flow.6. Heat detectors in elevator shaft and pit.

B. Fire-alarm signal shall initiate the following actions:1. Continuously operate alarm-notification appliances.2. Identify alarm at the fire-alarm control unit and remote annunciators.3. Transmit an alarm signal to the remote alarm receiving station.4. Unlock electric door locks in designated egress paths.5. Release fire and smoke doors held open by magnetic door holders.6. Switch heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning equipment controls to fire-alarm

mode.7. Recall elevators to primary or alternate recall floors.8. Activate emergency lighting control.9. Activate emergency shutoffs for gas and fuel supplies.10. Record events in the system memory.

C. Supervisory signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions:1. Valve supervisory switch.2. Low-air-pressure switch of a dry-pipe sprinkler system.3. Elevator shunt-trip supervision.

D. System trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions:1. Open circuits, shorts, and grounds in designated circuits.



2. Opening, tampering with, or removing alarm-initiating and supervisory signal-initiating devices.

3. Loss of primary power at fire-alarm control unit.4. Ground or a single break in fire-alarm control unit internal circuits.5. Abnormal ac voltage at fire-alarm control unit.6. Break in standby battery circuitry.7. Failure of battery charging.8. Abnormal position of any switch at fire-alarm control unit or annunciator.9. Fire-pump power failure, including a dead-phase or phase-reversal condition.10. Low-air-pressure switch operation on a dry-pipe or preaction sprinkler system.

E. System Trouble and Supervisory Signal Actions: Initiate notification appliance and annunciate at fire-alarm control unit and remote annunciators.

F. Circuits:1. Initiating Device, Notification Appliance, and Signaling Line Circuits: NFPA 72,

Zoned Class A.2. Initiating Device, Notification Appliance, and Signaling Line Circuits: NFPA 72,

Class B.a. Initiating Device Circuits: Style A.b. Install no more than 50 addressable devices on each signaling line circuit.

2.3 MANUAL FIRE-ALARM BOXES

A. General Requirements for Manual Fire-Alarm Boxes: Comply with UL 38. Boxes shall be finished in red with molded, raised-letter operating instructions in contrasting color; shall show visible indication of operation; and shall be mounted on recessed outlet box. If indicated as surface mounted, provide manufacturer's surface back box.1. Single-action mechanism, pull-lever type. With integral addressable module

arranged to communicate manual-station status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.

2. Double-action mechanism requiring two actions to initiate an alarm, pull-lever type; with integral addressable module arranged to communicate manual-station status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.

3. Station Reset: Key- or wrench-operated switch.4. Indoor Protective Shield: Factory-fabricated clear plastic enclosure hinged at the

top to permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm. Lifting the cover actuates an integral battery-powered audible horn intended to discourage false-alarm operation.

5. Weatherproof Protective Shield: Factory-fabricated clear plastic enclosure hinged at the top to permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm.

2.4 SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS

A. General Requirements for System Smoke Detectors:1. Comply with UL 268; operating at 24-V dc, nominal.2. Detectors shall be four-wire type.3. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status

(normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.



4. Base Mounting: Detector and associated electronic components shall be mounted in a twist-lock module that connects to a fixed base. Provide terminals in the fixed base for connection to building wiring.

5. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to restore them to normal operation.

6. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type indicating detector has operated.

B. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors:1. Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and shall be able

to identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting.2. An operator at fire-alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall

be able to manually access the following for each detector:a. Primary status.b. Device type.c. Present average value.d. Present sensitivity selected.e. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).

2.5 HEAT DETECTORS

A. General Requirements for Heat Detectors: Comply with UL 521.

B. Heat Detector, Combination Type: Actuated by either a fixed temperature of 135 deg F (57 deg C) or a rate of rise that exceeds 15 deg F (8 deg C) per minute unless otherwise indicated.1. Mounting: Adapter plate for outlet box mounting.2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status


C. Heat Detector, Fixed-Temperature Type: Actuated by temperature that exceeds a fixed temperature of 190 deg F (88 deg C).1. Mounting: Adapter plate for outlet box mounting.2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status


2.6 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES

A. General Requirements for Notification Appliances: Connected to notification appliance signal circuits, zoned as indicated, equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system connections.1. Combination Devices: Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in a single-

mounting assembly, equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system connections.

B. Chimes, Low-Level Output: Vibrating type, 75-dBA minimum rated output.

C. Chimes, High-Level Output: Vibrating type, 81-dBA minimum rated output.

D. Horns: Electric-vibrating-polarized type, 24-V dc; with provision for housing the operating mechanism behind a grille. Comply with UL 464. Horns shall produce a



sound-pressure level of 90 dBA, measured 10 feet (3 m) from the horn, using the coded signal prescribed in UL 464 test protocol.

E. Visible Notification Appliances: Xenon strobe lights comply with UL 1971, with clear or nominal white polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate. The word "FIRE" is engraved in minimum 1-inch- (25-mm-) high letters on the lens.1. Rated Light Output:

a. 15/30/75/110 cd, selectable in the field.2. Mounting: Wall mounted unless otherwise indicated.3. For units with guards to prevent physical damage, light output ratings shall be

determined with guards in place.4. Flashing shall be in a temporal pattern, synchronized with other units.5. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals.6. Mounting Faceplate: Factory finished, white.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NFPA 72 for installation of fire-alarm equipment.1. Install seismic bracing. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Vibration

and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise

indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around the full perimeter of concrete base.

3. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor.

4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.

B. Comply with all installation requirements of FM Global Data Sheet 5-40.

C. Equipment Mounting: Install fire-alarm control unit on finished floor with tops of cabinets not more than 72 inches (1830 mm) above the finished floor.1. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Division 26

Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."2. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Division 26

Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

D. Connecting to Existing Equipment: Verify that existing fire-alarm system is operational before making changes or connections.1. Connect new equipment to existing control panel in existing part of the building.2. Connect new equipment to existing monitoring equipment at the supervising

station.3. Expand, modify, and supplement existing control monitoring equipment as

necessary to extend existing control monitoring functions to the new points. New components shall be capable of merging with existing configuration without degrading the performance of either system.



E. Smoke- or Heat-Detector Spacing:1. Comply with NFPA 72, "Smoke-Sensing Fire Detectors" Section in the "Initiating

Devices" Chapter, for smoke-detector spacing.2. Comply with NFPA 72, "Heat-Sensing Fire Detectors" Section in the "Initiating

Devices" Chapter, for heat-detector spacing.3. Smooth ceiling spacing shall not exceed 30 feet (9 m).4. Spacing of detectors for irregular areas, for irregular ceiling construction, and for

high ceiling areas shall be determined according to Appendix A or Appendix B in NFPA 72.

5. HVAC: Locate detectors not closer than 5 feet (1.5 m) from air-supply diffuser or return-air opening.

6. Lighting Fixtures: Locate detectors not closer than 12 inches (300 mm) from any part of a lighting fixture.

F. Duct Smoke Detectors: Comply with NFPA 72 and NFPA 90A. Install sampling tubes so they extend the full width of duct.

G. Heat Detectors in Elevator Shafts: Coordinate temperature rating and location with sprinkler rating and location.

H. Single-Station Smoke Detectors: Where more than one smoke alarm is installed within a dwelling or suite, they shall be connected so that the operation of any smoke alarm causes the alarm in all smoke alarms to sound.

I. Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install not less than 6 inches (150 mm) below the ceiling. Install bells and horns on flush-mounted back boxes with the device-operating mechanism concealed behind a grille.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. For fire-protection systems related to doors in fire-rated walls and partitions and to doors in smoke partitions, comply with requirements in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware." Connect hardware and devices to fire-alarm system.1. Verify that hardware and devices are NRTL listed for use with fire-alarm system in

this Section before making connections.

B. Make addressable connections with a supervised interface device to the following devices and systems. Install the interface device less than 3 feet (1 m) from the device controlled. Make an addressable confirmation connection when such feedback is available at the device or system being controlled.1. Alarm-initiating connection to smoke-control system (smoke management) at

firefighter smoke-control system panel.2. Alarm-initiating connection to elevator recall system and components.3. Alarm-initiating connection to activate emergency lighting control.4. Alarm-initiating connection to activate emergency shutoffs for gas and fuel

supplies.5. Supervisory connections at valve supervisory switches.6. Supervisory connections at low-air-pressure switch of each dry-pipe sprinkler

system.7. Supervisory connections at elevator shunt trip breaker.



8. Supervisory connections at fire-pump power failure including a dead-phase or phase-reversal condition.

9. Supervisory connections at fire-pump engine control panel.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Install framed instructions in a location visible from fire-alarm control unit.

3.4 GROUNDING

A. Ground fire-alarm control unit and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100. Install a ground wire from main service ground to fire-alarm control unit.


A. Field tests shall be witnessed by Architect authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Tests and Inspections:1. Visual Inspection: Conduct visual inspection prior to testing.

a. Inspection shall be based on completed Record Drawings and system documentation that is required by NFPA 72 in its "Completion Documents, Preparation" Table in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter.

b. Comply with "Visual Inspection Frequencies" Table in the "Inspection" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72; retain the "Initial/Reacceptance" column and list only the installed components.

2. System Testing: Comply with "Test Methods" Table in the "Testing" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72.

3. Test audible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions. Perform the test using a portable sound-level meter complying with Type 2 requirements in ANSI S1.4.

4. Test audible appliances for the private operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions.

5. Test visible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions.

6. Factory-authorized service representative shall prepare the "Fire Alarm System Record of Completion" in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter in NFPA 72 and the "Inspection and Testing Form" in the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72.

C. Reacceptance Testing: Perform reacceptance testing to verify the proper operation of added or replaced devices and appliances.

D. Fire-alarm system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.



E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

F. Maintenance Test and Inspection: Perform tests and inspections listed for weekly, monthly, quarterly, and semiannual periods. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.

G. Annual Test and Inspection: One year after date of Substantial Completion, test fire-alarm system complying with visual and testing inspection requirements in NFPA 72. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.
